ML091400650: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
Line 15: Line 15:


=Text=
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:Foundations and Concrete Supports 3.8.5-1WATTS BARWBNP-79 3.8.5 Foundations and Concrete Supports3.8.5.1 Description of Foundations and Supports3.8.5.1.1 Primary ContainmentThe primary containment foundation consists of a 9-foot-thick circular reinforced concrete structural slab, measuring 131 feet 7 inches in diameter. The outer 5 feet, where adjacent to other structures (225° of the slab), is thickened to 16 feet, while the remaining 135° portion is thickened to 12 feet for the outer 13 feet. These deepened portions are transitioned upward on a 2 to 1 slope to the bottom of the 9-foot-thick portion. The slab is keyed into rock in the central portion by the 8-foot-thick walls of the reactor cavity extending a total of 26 feet into rock. A 3-foot-thick concrete subpour underlies the structural concrete and caps the top of the irregular rock surface. This serves to preserve the rock in its native state of being under pressure, thus preventing deterioration of the rock surface. The base rock consists of interbedded shales and limestones. See Section 2.5.1 for additional discussion of the rock base and foundation treatment.The interior concrete structures described in Section 3.8.3 constitute the support system for all equipment in the containment structures. All major equipment supported on the foundation (steam generators and reactor coolant pumps) is anchored through the steel liner plate into the 9-foot-thick concrete base slab, thus preventing the liner from becoming a stress carrying member.The base liner plate is anchored to the foundation through the use of embedded 'Tee' shaped steel sections which have provisions for leveling before concrete is placed. The embedded anchors are used as screens during the placement of the concrete to ensure that a flat surface is obtained coincident with the top of the anchors. All welded joints in the base liner plate are made at anchors. All joints in the base liner plate are equipped with leak chases to facilitate testing for leaktightness.
{{#Wiki_filter:WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-79 3.8.5 Foundations and Concrete Supports 3.8.5.1 Description of Foundations and Supports 3.8.5.1.1 Primary Containment The primary containment foundation consists of a 9-foot-thick circular reinforced concrete structural slab, measuring 131 feet 7 inches in diameter. The outer 5 feet, where adjacent to other structures (225° of the slab), is thickened to 16 feet, while the remaining 135° portion is thickened to 12 feet for the outer 13 feet. These deepened portions are transitioned upward on a 2 to 1 slope to the bottom of the 9-foot-thick portion. The slab is keyed into rock in the central portion by the 8-foot-thick walls of the reactor cavity extending a total of 26 feet into rock. A 3-foot-thick concrete subpour underlies the structural concrete and caps the top of the irregular rock surface. This serves to preserve the rock in its native state of being under pressure, thus preventing deterioration of the rock surface. The base rock consists of interbedded shales and limestones. See Section 2.5.1 for additional discussion of the rock base and foundation treatment.
3.8.5.1.2 Foundations of Other Category I StructuresAuxiliary-Control Building and Associate StructureAll of the Auxiliary-Control Building, except the waste packaging structure, and the condensate demineralizer waste evaporator structure portion is supported by a reinforced concrete slab placed on a 4-inch-minimum-thick concrete subpour which caps the top of the irregular rock surface.The Auxiliary Building portion of the base slab is 7 feet thick while the control bay portion is 5 feet thick. The entire base slab is located on three different levels with continuity between these levels being provided through thick walls. The thicknesses of the slab were selected primarily to provide sufficient rigidity to minimize differential vertical movements of columns and walls and secondarily to reduce shearing stresses in the slab itself. Due to the thickness of the slab, anchorage into rock was not required to resist hydrostatic up-lift pressures from maximum flood conditions.
The interior concrete structures described in Section 3.8.3 constitute the support system for all equipment in the containment structures. All major equipment supported on the foundation (steam generators and reactor coolant pumps) is anchored through the steel liner plate into the 9-foot-thick concrete base slab, thus preventing the liner from becoming a stress carrying member.
The base liner plate is anchored to the foundation through the use of embedded 'Tee' shaped steel sections which have provisions for leveling before concrete is placed.
The embedded anchors are used as screens during the placement of the concrete to ensure that a flat surface is obtained coincident with the top of the anchors. All welded joints in the base liner plate are made at anchors. All joints in the base liner plate are equipped with leak chases to facilitate testing for leaktightness.
3.8.5.1.2 Foundations of Other Category I Structures Auxiliary-Control Building and Associate Structure All of the Auxiliary-Control Building, except the waste packaging structure, and the condensate demineralizer waste evaporator structure portion is supported by a reinforced concrete slab placed on a 4-inch-minimum-thick concrete subpour which caps the top of the irregular rock surface.
The Auxiliary Building portion of the base slab is 7 feet thick while the control bay portion is 5 feet thick. The entire base slab is located on three different levels with continuity between these levels being provided through thick walls. The thicknesses of the slab were selected primarily to provide sufficient rigidity to minimize differential vertical movements of columns and walls and secondarily to reduce shearing stresses in the slab itself. Due to the thickness of the slab, anchorage into rock was not required to resist hydrostatic up-lift pressures from maximum flood conditions.
Foundations and Concrete Supports                                                                  3.8.5-1


3.8.5-2Foundations and Concrete Supports WATTS BARWBNP-86The waste packaging structure is separated from the rest of the Auxiliary Building by 2 inches of fiberglass expansion joint material. The 45-inch-thick base slab at grade elevation 728 is supported below elevation 723.25 by crushed stone backfill placed in 4-inch layers and compacted to a minimum of 70% relative density.The base slab of the condensate demineralizer waste evaporator structure is 2-feet, 9-inches thick, except for the access tunnel part of the building which is 2-feet, 3-inches thick. The structure is supported on H-bearing piles. The access tunnel is separated from the rest of the Auxiliary Building by two inches of fiberglass expansion joint  
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-86 The waste packaging structure is separated from the rest of the Auxiliary Building by 2 inches of fiberglass expansion joint material. The 45-inch-thick base slab at grade elevation 728 is supported below elevation 723.25 by crushed stone backfill placed in 4-inch layers and compacted to a minimum of 70% relative density.
The base slab of the condensate demineralizer waste evaporator structure is 2-feet, 9-inches thick, except for the access tunnel part of the building which is 2-feet, 3-inches thick. The structure is supported on H-bearing piles. The access tunnel is separated from the rest of the Auxiliary Building by two inches of fiberglass expansion joint material.
Intake Pumping Station The intake structure is supported by a reinforced concrete slab placed on a 4-inch-minimum-thick concrete subpour which caps the top of the irregular rock surface. The base slab is 4 feet thick with a 6-foot-wide by 10-foot deep key located at the back of the structure. This key extends the full width of the structure. The base slab extends 10 feet past the back wall and has two areas of 26 feet by 29 feet on each side that extend beyond the walls.
The concrete retaining walls at the intake structure are designed to protect the forebay of the intake against earth slides during an earthquake. The base slabs of these cantilevered walls are keyed into rock. The walls are separated from the structure with expansion joint material.
North Steam Valve Room The north steam valve room is supported by a grillage of reinforced concrete foundation walls to base rock. These walls span vertically from base rock at El. 683.0 to the bottom of the valve room base slab at El. 722.0. There are four 4-foot thick walls running in a north-south direction and these walls are tied together by a singular 4-foot thick wall running in an east-west direction. Three closed cells are formed by these walls in combination with the Reactor Building wall. These closed cells are backfilled with a noncompacted crushed stone. The valve room foundation walls are separated from the Reactor Building foundation and wall by a 2-inch fiberglass expansion joint material.
Diesel Generator Building The base slab of the Diesel Generator Building is discussed in Section 3.8.5.5.2.
Based on soils laboratory tests, it could not be assured that the existing material between the top of firm gravel at elevation 713 and base slab was capable of safely supporting the structure. Therefore, this material was removed and replaced with crushed stone fill placed in 4-inch layers and compacted to a minimum of 70% relative density (see Section 2.5.4.5.2.). A slope stability analysis was performed in order to assure stability of the slope below the building.
3.8.5-2                                                            Foundations and Concrete Supports


material.Intake Pumping StationThe intake structure is supported by a reinforced concrete slab placed on a 4-inch-minimum-thick concrete subpour which caps the top of the irregular rock surface. The base slab is 4 feet thick with a 6-foot-wide by 10-foot deep key located at the back of the structure. This key extends the full width of the structure. The base slab extends 10 feet past the back wall and has two areas of 26 feet by 29 feet on each side that extend beyond the walls.The concrete retaining walls at the intake structure are designed to protect the forebay of the intake against earth slides during an earthquake. The base slabs of these cantilevered walls are keyed into rock. The walls are separated from the structure with expansion joint material.North Steam Valve RoomThe north steam valve room is supported by a grillage of reinforced concrete foundation walls to base rock. These walls span vertically from base rock at El. 683.0 to the bottom of the valve room base slab at El. 722.0. There are four 4-foot thick walls running in a north-south direction and these walls are tied together by a singular 4-foot thick wall running in an east-west direction. Three closed cells are formed by these walls in combination with the Reactor Building wall. These closed cells are backfilled with a noncompacted crushed stone. The valve room foundation walls are separated from the Reactor Building foundation and wall by a 2-inch fiberglass expansion joint material.Diesel Generator BuildingThe base slab of the Diesel Generator Building is discussed in Section 3.8.5.5.2. Based on soils laboratory tests, it could not be assured that the existing material between the top of firm gravel at elevation 713 and base slab was capable of safely supporting the structure. Therefore, this material was removed and replaced with crushed stone fill placed in 4-inch layers and compacted to a minimum of 70% relative density (see Section 2.5.4.5.2.). A slope stability analysis was performed in order to assure stability of the slope below the building.
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-86 Refueling Water Storage Tank The refueling water storage tank foundation is a solid, circular reinforced concrete structure placed on engineered granular fill over firm natural granular soil. The foundation is constructed with shear keys to prevent sliding displacement and with retaining walls to contain a reservoir of borated water after a postulated rupture of the storage tank. The foundation is protected from missiles by a concrete apron.
Discharge Overflow Structure See Section 3.8.4.1.7 for a description of the discharge overflow structure foundation.
Class 1E Electrical System Manholes and Duct Banks The manholes and a portion of the duct banks are supported on in-situ soil. The duct banks at the intake pumping station are supported on in-situ soil, piles, and a bracket on the pumping station wall, see Section 3.8.4.1.4 for additional information.
ERCW Standpipe Structures See Section 3.8.4.1.7 for the standpipe structures.
ERCW Pipe Supporting Slabs and Beams See Section 3.8.4.1.7 for a description of the beams and slab.
ERCW Valve Covers See Section 3.8.4.1.7 for a description of these structures.
Additional Diesel Generator Building The base slab of the additional Diesel Generator Building is discussed in Section 3.8.4.4.8. Similar to the Diesel Generator Building, it could not be assured that the existing soil between the top of firm gravel at elevation 713.0 and the bottom of the base slab at elevation 730.0 could safely support this structure. Therefore, the building was supported on end bearing steel H-Piles driven to refusal in sound rock or other suitable material. For additional information on this structure, see Section 3.8.4.1.8.
3.8.5.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications See Sections 3.8.1.2, 3.8.3.2, and 3.8.4.2.
3.8.5.3 Loads and Loading Combinations The loads and loading combinations are described in Sections 3.8.1.3, 3.8.3.3, and 3.8.4.3. For loads and loading combinations on the Additional Diesel Generator Building, see Table 3.8.4-22.
Foundations and Concrete Supports                                                                3.8.5-3


Foundations and Concrete Supports 3.8.5-3WATTS BARWBNP-86Refueling Water Storage TankThe refueling water storage tank foundation is a solid, circular reinforced concrete structure placed on engineered granular fill over firm natural granular soil. The foundation is constructed with shear keys to prevent sliding displacement and with retaining walls to contain a reservoir of borated water after a postulated rupture of the storage tank. The foundation is protected from missiles by a concrete apron.Discharge Overflow StructureSee Section 3.8.4.1.7 for a description of the discharge overflow structure foundation.Class 1E Electrical System Manholes and Duct BanksThe manholes and a portion of the duct banks are supported on in-situ soil. The duct banks at the intake pumping station are supported on in-situ soil, piles, and a bracket on the pumping station wall, see Section 3.8.4.1.4 for additional information.ERCW Standpipe StructuresSee Section 3.8.4.1.7 for the standpipe structures.ERCW Pipe Supporting Slabs and BeamsSee Section 3.8.4.1.7 for a description of the beams and slab.
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-79 3.8.5.4 Design and Analysis Procedure 3.8.5.4.1 Primary Containment Foundation The foundation was analyzed as a slab on a rigid foundation. The slab was analyzed using computer code Gendek 3 Finite Element Analysis of Stiffened Plates.
ERCW Valve CoversSee Section 3.8.4.1.7 for a description of these structures.Additional Diesel Generator BuildingThe base slab of the additional Diesel Generator Building is discussed in Section 3.8.4.4.8. Similar to the Diesel Generator Building, it could not be assured that the existing soil between the top of firm gravel at elevation 713.0 and the bottom of the base slab at elevation 730.0 could safely support this structure. Therefore, the building was supported on end bearing steel H-Piles driven to refusal in sound rock or other suitable material. For additional information on this structure, see Section 3.8.4.1.8.
Maximum tangential and radial moments were obtained using the finite element analysis of the various load combinations. Shear stresses were obtained by conventional analysis for the containment vessel anchorage and major equipment loadings.
3.8.5.2  Applicable Codes, Standards, and SpecificationsSee Sections 3.8.1.2, 3.8.3.2, and 3.8.4.2.3.8.5.3  Loads and Loading CombinationsThe loads and loading combinations are described in Sections 3.8.1.3, 3.8.3.3, and 3.8.4.3. For loads and loading combinations on the Additional Diesel Generator Building, see Table 3.8.4-22.
3.8.5.4.2 Auxiliary-Control Building The reinforced concrete base slab of the Auxiliary-Control Building was designed in compliance with the ACI Building Code 318-63. It was analyzed by the ICES STRUDL-II finite element method as a slab on an elastic foundation. In the ICES STRUDL- II program the foundation material was modeled by assigning a vertical spring to each node of the grid system which was used to represent the base slab. The base slab was divided into elements with wall stiffnesses being recognized by introducing flexural rigidity along the wall and torsional rigidity being recognized by including a rotational spring. Superposition of the various loading conditions were used to obtain maximum stresses. Manual calculations gave results for the bending moments which checked reasonably close with those obtained from the ICES STRUDL-II analysis. A standard frame analysis was also performed in order to determine the shearing forces in the slab.
3.8.5-4Foundations and Concrete Supports WATTS BARWBNP-793.8.5.4  Design and Analysis Procedure 3.8.5.4.1 Primary Containment FoundationThe foundation was analyzed as a slab on a rigid foundation. The slab was analyzed using computer code Gendek 3 Finite Element Analysis of Stiffened Plates.Maximum tangential and radial moments were obtained using the finite element analysis of the various load combinations. Shear stresses were obtained by conventional analysis for the containment vessel anchorage and major equipment loadings.3.8.5.4.2 Auxiliary-Control BuildingThe reinforced concrete base slab of the Auxiliary-Control Building was designed in compliance with the ACI Building Code 318-63. It was analyzed by the ICES STRUDL-II finite element method as a slab on an elastic foundation. In the ICES STRUDL- II program the foundation material was modeled by assigning a vertical spring to each node of the grid system which was used to represent the base slab. The base slab was divided into elements with wall stiffnesses being recognized by introducing flexural rigidity along the wall and torsional rigidity being recognized by including a rotational spring. Superposition of the various loading conditions were used to obtain maximum stresses. Manual calculations gave results for the bending moments which checked reasonably close with those obtained from the ICES STRUDL-II analysis. A standard frame analysis was also performed in order to determine the shearing forces in the slab.Shear walls fixed to the base slab transmit lateral force to the slab; the base slab itself is keyed and anchored into foundation rock to transmit shear from the structure into the rock.The 45-inch-thick slab of the waste packaging area was designed for a uniform distribution of base pressure to span as a flat plate between the load bearing walls.
Shear walls fixed to the base slab transmit lateral force to the slab; the base slab itself is keyed and anchored into foundation rock to transmit shear from the structure into the rock.
Walls were thicker than necessary for structural purposes because of shielding requirements.The base slab of the condensate demineralizer waste evaporator building portion was designed as a pile supported foundation. Batter piles were used around the perimeter of the structure to transmit lateral loads from the structure to the foundation media.3.8.5.4.3 Intake Pumping StationThe design of the base slab was controlled for the most part by uplift considerations under assumed unwatered conditions with one bay dry and full uplift over 100% of the area between the slab and the base rock. The backfilled portion of the base slab was controlled by the load from the saturated fill.
The 45-inch-thick slab of the waste packaging area was designed for a uniform distribution of base pressure to span as a flat plate between the load bearing walls.
3.8.5.4.4 Soil-Supported StructuresA uniform or linear distribution of base pressure was assumed in the design of all soil-supported structures and all base slabs were essentially designed as flat plates.
Walls were thicker than necessary for structural purposes because of shielding requirements.
Foundations and Concrete Supports 3.8.5-5WATTS BARWBNP-89 3.8.5.4.5  Pile Supported StructuresPile supported structures were designed using conventional frame analysis or through the use of ICES STRUDL-II finite element computer program.
The base slab of the condensate demineralizer waste evaporator building portion was designed as a pile supported foundation. Batter piles were used around the perimeter of the structure to transmit lateral loads from the structure to the foundation media.
3.8.5.5  Structural Acceptance Criteria 3.8.5.5.1  Primary Containment FoundationThe base slab design contained the following conservative features:
3.8.5.4.3 Intake Pumping Station The design of the base slab was controlled for the most part by uplift considerations under assumed unwatered conditions with one bay dry and full uplift over 100% of the area between the slab and the base rock. The backfilled portion of the base slab was controlled by the load from the saturated fill.
(1)No allowance was made for the additional spread of reactions under the walls or the additional section modulus due to the 3-foot structural fill over the base slab.(2)In the outer area of the slab, where the additional depth is in excess of the 2-foot, 8-inch recess in the upper surface, no allowance has been made for the additional thickness which increases the stiffness of the slab and thus lowers the stresses.
3.8.5.4.4 Soil-Supported Structures A uniform or linear distribution of base pressure was assumed in the design of all soil-supported structures and all base slabs were essentially designed as flat plates.
3.8.5.5.2  Foundations of Ot her Category I Structures Auxiliary-Control BuildingThe base slab as designed has its maximum flexural stresses and shearing stresses within the allowable working stress design limits of Table 3.8.4-1 for all loading combinations. Design Case I (dead load plus live load), which generally controlled the design, was investigated by the ICES STRUDL-II program for several loading conditions created by the three different levels of the slab and by the early conditions were superimposed in various combinations to ensure that the slab was designed for the maximum possible stresses.The maximum calculated compression of the base slab was approximately 12 ksf. The maximum allowable compression on rock is 26 ksf (180 psi). In probable maximum flood conditions, with the dead load of the structure alone assumed to resist the buoyant force, the factor of safety against floatation is 1.53.Intake Pumping StationThe base slab of the intake pumping station serves as a water barrier under maintenance conditions with one bay unwatered. It also adds to the stability of the structure. Backfill on the extended areas of the slab add weight to the structure and the key provides resistance to sliding. The maximum calculated compression on the base slab was approximately 12 ksf. The maximum allowable compression on rock is 26 ksf (180 psi).North Steam Valve RoomThe valve room foundation walls were designed to resist the maximum overturning effect on the building. This effect was due to pressure as the result of the rupture of a main steam pipe, its associated jet impingement load, and the Safe Shutdown Earthquake. This resistance to overturning was obtained by converting the maximum overturning moment on the structure into a resisting active soil pressure on the 3.8.5-6Foundations and Concrete Supports WATTS BARWBNP-92foundation walls. For overturning in the east-west direction, four of the foundation walls were considered effective. For overturning in the north-south direction, the singular cross-wall was considered to be resisting the overturning. Using this pressure as a load on the walls, they were modeled as plate structures utilizing the STRUDL-II Finite Element computer program. The walls were considered to span between bedrock, the bottom of the valve room base slab and other foundation walls framing into them.Waste Packaging StructureThis structure is situated on well-compacted crushed stone backfill above rock and was designed for a normal allowable uniform bearing pressure of 4 ksf and a maximum allowable pressure with 70% or more of the base in compression of 8 ksf under maximum overturning forces. Actual calculated bearing pressures were 1.4 ksf for uniform loading and 6.7 ksf with 72% of the base in compression for maximum overturning forces.Diesel Generator BuildingThe structure is situated as described in Section 3.8.5.1.2. The base slab of the Diesel Generator Building is 9 feet 9 inches thick founded on crushed stone backfill and located above the  PMF elevation. The structure was designed for a normal allowable uniform bearing pressure of 4 ksf and a maximum allowable pressure of 8 ksf under maximum overturning forces. Actual calculated bearing pressures for the Diesel Generator Building were 2.0 ksf for uniform loading and 4.9 ksf for maximum overturning forces with 100% of the base in compression.Additional Diesel Generator BuildingFor discussions on this pile supported structure see Section 3.8.4.4.8. Also, rotational restraint from the piles was not considered due to the large difference in stiffness between the 12 foot thickness of the base slab and that of the steel H-piles. 3.8.5.6  Materials, Quality Control, and Special Construction Techniques GeneralSee Section 3.8.1.6.
3.8.5-4                                                                 Foundations and Concrete Supports
3.8.5.6.1  MaterialsConcrete and Reinforcing SteelSee Section 3.8.1.6.1Backfill MaterialsBackfill material was taken only from areas designated by the soils investigation program (see Section 2.5.4.5.2) as suitable for backfill material.
Foundations and Concrete Supports 3.8.5-7WATTS BARWBNP-643.8.5.6.2  Quality ControlConcrete and Reinforcing SteelConcrete production and testing were as in Section 3.8.1.6.2, except some concrete used to protect rock surfaces was purchased as ready mix in conformance with ASTM C94-69.The protective concrete for rock surfaces was specified as 2,000 psi at 90 days age. It was in conformance to specifications.The Shield Building base slab and the north steam valve rooms foundation walls used concrete specified as 5,000 psi at 90 days.                  Some concrete did not meet specification requirements. This was evaluated and documented in the Report CEB-86-19C "Concrete Quality Evaluation". Results have been documented in affected calculation packages and drawings.Testing of reinforcing steel was as in Section 3.8.1.6.2.Base RockThe base area of all rock-supported structures was inspected by the principal civil design engineer in conjunction with an experienced TVA geologist during final cleanup of rock surfaces to determine its suitability as a foundation.BackfillQuality control requirements for backfill material were as specified in Section 2.5.4.5. 3.8.5.6.3  Special Construction Techniques No special construction techniques were used.
3.8.5-8Foundations and Concrete Supports WATTS BARWBNP-64 Category I(L) Cranes 3.8.6-1WATTS BARWBNP-79 3.8.6  Category I(L) Cranes 3.8.6.1  Polar Cranes


3.8.6.1.1 DescriptionSee Figures 3.8.6-1 through 3.8.6-6.There are two polar cranes, one in each of the Reactor Buildings. Each crane is a single two-part trolley, overhead, electric traveling type; operating on an 86-foot 0-inch-diameter rail at the top of the crane wall and above the reactor. Each crane has a main hoist capacity of 175 tons and an auxiliary hoist capacity of 35 tons.The main and auxiliary hoist motions are driven by dc motors with stepless regulated speed control. The bridge and trolley are driven by ac motors with static, stepless regulated speed control.Structural portions of the crane bridges consist of welded boxtype girders and welded, haunched, box-type end ties. Structural portions of the trolleys consist of welded box-type trucks and welded cross girts.Control of each crane is from a cab located below the bridge walkway at one end of a girder.3.8.6.1.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and SpecificationsThe following codes, standards, and specifications were used in the design of the cranes:National Electric Code, 1971 edition.
WATTS BAR                                                                                        WBNP-89 3.8.5.4.5 Pile Supported Structures Pile supported structures were designed using conventional frame analysis or through the use of ICES STRUDL-II finite element computer program.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association, Motor and Generator Standards, Standard MG-1, 1970 edition.Crane Manufacturers Association of American, Inc., Specification #70, 1970 edition.
3.8.5.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria 3.8.5.5.1 Primary Containment Foundation The base slab design contained the following conservative features:
(1)  No allowance was made for the additional spread of reactions under the walls or the additional section modulus due to the 3-foot structural fill over the base slab.
(2)  In the outer area of the slab, where the additional depth is in excess of the 2-foot, 8-inch recess in the upper surface, no allowance has been made for the additional thickness which increases the stiffness of the slab and thus lowers the stresses.
3.8.5.5.2 Foundations of Other Category I Structures Auxiliary-Control Building The base slab as designed has its maximum flexural stresses and shearing stresses within the allowable working stress design limits of Table 3.8.4-1 for all loading combinations. Design Case I (dead load plus live load), which generally controlled the design, was investigated by the ICES STRUDL-II program for several loading conditions created by the three different levels of the slab and by the early conditions were superimposed in various combinations to ensure that the slab was designed for the maximum possible stresses.
The maximum calculated compression of the base slab was approximately 12 ksf. The maximum allowable compression on rock is 26 ksf (180 psi). In probable maximum flood conditions, with the dead load of the structure alone assumed to resist the buoyant force, the factor of safety against floatation is 1.53.
Intake Pumping Station The base slab of the intake pumping station serves as a water barrier under maintenance conditions with one bay unwatered. It also adds to the stability of the structure. Backfill on the extended areas of the slab add weight to the structure and the key provides resistance to sliding. The maximum calculated compression on the base slab was approximately 12 ksf. The maximum allowable compression on rock is 26 ksf (180 psi).
North Steam Valve Room The valve room foundation walls were designed to resist the maximum overturning effect on the building. This effect was due to pressure as the result of the rupture of a main steam pipe, its associated jet impingement load, and the Safe Shutdown Earthquake. This resistance to overturning was obtained by converting the maximum overturning moment on the structure into a resisting active soil pressure on the Foundations and Concrete Supports                                                                  3.8.5-5
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-92 foundation walls. For overturning in the east-west direction, four of the foundation walls were considered effective. For overturning in the north-south direction, the singular cross-wall was considered to be resisting the overturning. Using this pressure as a load on the walls, they were modeled as plate structures utilizing the STRUDL-II Finite Element computer program. The walls were considered to span between bedrock, the bottom of the valve room base slab and other foundation walls framing into them.
Waste Packaging Structure This structure is situated on well-compacted crushed stone backfill above rock and was designed for a normal allowable uniform bearing pressure of 4 ksf and a maximum allowable pressure with 70% or more of the base in compression of 8 ksf under maximum overturning forces. Actual calculated bearing pressures were 1.4 ksf for uniform loading and 6.7 ksf with 72% of the base in compression for maximum overturning forces.
Diesel Generator Building The structure is situated as described in Section 3.8.5.1.2. The base slab of the Diesel Generator Building is 9 feet 9 inches thick founded on crushed stone backfill and located above the PMF elevation. The structure was designed for a normal allowable uniform bearing pressure of 4 ksf and a maximum allowable pressure of 8 ksf under maximum overturning forces. Actual calculated bearing pressures for the Diesel Generator Building were 2.0 ksf for uniform loading and 4.9 ksf for maximum overturning forces with 100% of the base in compression.
Additional Diesel Generator Building For discussions on this pile supported structure see Section 3.8.4.4.8. Also, rotational restraint from the piles was not considered due to the large difference in stiffness between the 12 foot thickness of the base slab and that of the steel H-piles.
3.8.5.6 Materials, Quality Control, and Special Construction Techniques General See Section 3.8.1.6.
3.8.5.6.1 Materials Concrete and Reinforcing Steel See Section 3.8.1.6.1 Backfill Materials Backfill material was taken only from areas designated by the soils investigation program (see Section 2.5.4.5.2) as suitable for backfill material.
3.8.5-6                                                              Foundations and Concrete Supports
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-64 3.8.5.6.2 Quality Control Concrete and Reinforcing Steel Concrete production and testing were as in Section 3.8.1.6.2, except some concrete used to protect rock surfaces was purchased as ready mix in conformance with ASTM C94-69.
The protective concrete for rock surfaces was specified as 2,000 psi at 90 days age.
It was in conformance to specifications.
The Shield Building base slab and the north steam valve rooms foundation walls used concrete specified as 5,000 psi at 90 days.
Some concrete did not meet specification requirements. This was evaluated and documented in the Report CEB-86-19C "Concrete Quality Evaluation". Results have been documented in affected calculation packages and drawings.
Testing of reinforcing steel was as in Section 3.8.1.6.2.
Base Rock The base area of all rock-supported structures was inspected by the principal civil design engineer in conjunction with an experienced TVA geologist during final cleanup of rock surfaces to determine its suitability as a foundation.
Backfill Quality control requirements for backfill material were as specified in Section 2.5.4.5.
3.8.5.6.3 Special Construction Techniques No special construction techniques were used.
Foundations and Concrete Supports                                                              3.8.5-7
 
WATTS BAR                        WBNP-64 3.8.5-8  Foundations and Concrete Supports
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-79 3.8.6 Category I(L) Cranes 3.8.6.1 Polar Cranes 3.8.6.1.1 Description See Figures 3.8.6-1 through 3.8.6-6.
There are two polar cranes, one in each of the Reactor Buildings. Each crane is a single two-part trolley, overhead, electric traveling type; operating on an 86-foot 0-inch-diameter rail at the top of the crane wall and above the reactor. Each crane has a main hoist capacity of 175 tons and an auxiliary hoist capacity of 35 tons.
The main and auxiliary hoist motions are driven by dc motors with stepless regulated speed control. The bridge and trolley are driven by ac motors with static, stepless regulated speed control.
Structural portions of the crane bridges consist of welded boxtype girders and welded, haunched, box-type end ties. Structural portions of the trolleys consist of welded box-type trucks and welded cross girts.
Control of each crane is from a cab located below the bridge walkway at one end of a girder.
3.8.6.1.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications The following codes, standards, and specifications were used in the design of the cranes:
National Electric Code, 1971 edition.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association, Motor and Generator Standards, Standard MG-1, 1970 edition.
Crane Manufacturers Association of American, Inc., Specification #70, 1970 edition.
Federal Specification RR-W-410C American Society for Testing and Materials, 'Material Standards,' 1974 edition.
Federal Specification RR-W-410C American Society for Testing and Materials, 'Material Standards,' 1974 edition.
American Welding Society, D1.1-72 with 73 Revisions, Structural Welding Code.Section 1.23, Part 1, 'Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings,' Manual of Steel Construction, Part 5, American Institute for Steel Construction, 7th edition, 1970.American Gear Manufacturers Association Standards for Spur, Helical, Herringbone, and Beval Gears.
American Welding Society, D1.1-72 with 73 Revisions, Structural Welding Code.
Section 1.23, Part 1, 'Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings,' Manual of Steel Construction, Part 5, American Institute for Steel Construction, 7th edition, 1970.
American Gear Manufacturers Association Standards for Spur, Helical, Herringbone, and Beval Gears.
Category I(L) Cranes                                                                              3.8.6-1
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-89 Where date of edition, copyright, or addendum is specified, earlier versions of the listed documents were not used. In some instances, later revisions of the listed documents were used where design safety was not compromised.
The cranes meet applicable requirements of the listed codes, standards, and specifications.
3.8.6.1.3 Loads, Loading Combinations, and Allowable Stresses Loads, loading combinations, and allowable stresses are shown in Table 3.8.6-1.
3.8.6.1.4 Design and Analysis Procedure The bridge girders and end ties for each crane were designed as simple beams in the vertical plane and as a continuous frame in the horizontal plane. Stresses in the girders and end ties were computed with the trolley positioned to produce maximum stresses.
Seismic restraints are located on the bottom of each girder and these restraints are designed to withstand seismically applied loads to ensure the crane will not fall during an earthquake.
Trolley positions used were the maximum end position, third point, and the point near the center which produces maximum bending moments.
Trolley members were designed as simple beams. Design of the bridge girders and end ties was by TVA. Mechanical parts and structural members except the bridge girders and end ties were designed by the contractor. Calculations and designs made by the contractor were reviewed by TVA design engineers.
In designing for earthquake conditions, forces due to accelerations at the crane bridge rails were used as static loads for determining component and member sizes. After establishing component and member sizes, a dynamic analysis, using appropriate response spectra, was made of the total crane to determine that allowable stresses had not been exceeded.
Earthquake accelerations at the bridge rails were determined by dynamic analysis of the structures supporting the crane rails.
The polar crane was also evaluated for seismic loads based on the Set B seismic response spectra using 2% damping for OBE and 4% damping for SSE. The polar crane was initially evaluated for seismic loads based upon Set A seismic response spectra.
3.8.6.1.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria Allowable stresses for all load combinations used for the various crane parts are given in Table 3.8.6-1. For normal load conditions, the allowable stresses provide safety factors of 2 to 1 on yield for structural parts and 5 to 1 on ultimate for mechanical parts, except for wire ropes which have a minimum safety factor of 5 to 1 on ultimate. For limiting conditions, such as an SSE earthquake or stall, stresses do not exceed .9 yield.
3.8.6-2                                                                              Category I(L) Cranes
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                        WBNP-89 3.8.6.1.6 Materials, Quality Controls, and Special Construction Techniques A36 steel was used for the major structural portions of the crane. Design by TVA and erection by TVA were in accordance with TVA's quality assurance program. Design and fabrication by the contractor were in accordance with the contractor's quality assurance program which was reviewed and approved by TVA's design engineers.
The contractor's quality assurance program covers the criteria in Appendix B of 10 CFR 50. Fabrication procedures such as welding, stress relieving, and nondestructive testing were included in appendices to the contractor's quality assurance program.
ASTM standards were used for all material specifications and certified mill test reports were provided by the contractor for materials used for all load-carrying members.
This crane is covered by TVA's Augmented Quality Assurance Program for Seismic Category I(L) Structures.
3.8.6.1.7 Testing and Inservice Surveillance Requirements Upon completion of erection and adjustments on each crane, all crane motions and operating parts were thoroughly tested with the crane handling 125 percent of rated capacity. Tests were made to prove the ability of each crane to handle its rated capacity and smaller loads smoothly at any speed within the specified speed range.
Each brake was tested to demonstrate its ability to hold the required load.
After the initial test, periodic visual inspections of each crane are to be made. Parts inspected during the visual inspection are to include all bolted parts, couplings, brakes, hoist ropes, hoist blocks, limit switches, and equalizer systems.
3.8.6.1.8 Safety Features The cranes were designed to withstand an SSE and to maintain any load up to rated capacity during and after the earthquake period.
The bridges are equipped with double flange wheels, spring-set, electrically-released brakes which set and firmly lock two of the wheels when the bridge drive machinery is not operating or when power is lost for any reason, hold down lugs which run under the rail heads, and seismic restraints located on the bottom of each girder. During an earthquake the crane rail will yield before the crane wheels fail, thus allowing the crane to move until the seismic restraints on each girder contact the crane wall. These restraints hold the crane on the runway. Guide rollers, mounted on each extreme corner truck, travel against the outer surface of the bridge rail to assure bridge truck alignment.
The trolleys are each equipped with double flange wheels, two spring-set, electrically-released brakes which set and firmly lock the driving wheels when the trolley drive machinery is not operating or when power is lost for any reason, and hold down lugs which run under the rail heads. Positive wheel and bumper stops are provided at both ends of the bridge. During an earthquake, the trolley could be displaced, but it will not leave its rails which are firmly attached to the bridge structure.
Category I(L) Cranes                                                                                3.8.6-3


3.8.6-2Category I(L) Cranes WATTS BARWBNP-89Where date of edition, copyright, or addendum is specified, earlier versions of the listed documents were not used. In some instances, later revisions of the listed documents were used where design safety was not compromised.The cranes meet applicable requirements of the listed codes, standards, and specifications.3.8.6.1.3  Loads, Loading Combin ations, and Allowable StressesLoads, loading combinations, and allowable stresses are shown in Table 3.8.6-1.3.8.6.1.4  Design and Analysis ProcedureThe bridge girders and end ties for each crane were designed as simple beams in the vertical plane and as a continuous frame in the horizontal plane. Stresses in the girders and end ties were computed with the trolley positioned to produce maximum stresses. Seismic restraints are located on the bottom of each girder and these restraints are designed to withstand seismically applied loads to ensure the crane will not fall during an earthquake.Trolley positions used were the maximum end position, third point, and the point near the center which produces maximum bending moments.Trolley members were designed as simple beams. Design of the bridge girders and end ties was by TVA. Mechanical parts and structural members except the bridge girders and end ties were designed by the contractor. Calculations and designs made by the contractor were reviewed by TVA design engineers.In designing for earthquake conditions, forces due to accelerations at the crane bridge rails were used as static loads for determining component and member sizes. After establishing component and member sizes, a dynamic analysis, using appropriate response spectra, was made of the total crane to determine that allowable stresses had not been exceeded.Earthquake accelerations at the bridge rails were determined by dynamic analysis of the structures supporting the crane rails. The polar crane was also evaluated for seismic loads based on the Set B seismic response spectra using 2% damping for OBE and 4% damping for SSE. The polar crane was initially evaluated for seismic loads based upon Set A seismic response spectra.3.8.6.1.5  Structural Acceptance CriteriaAllowable stresses for all load combinations used for the various crane parts are given in Table 3.8.6-1. For normal load conditions, the allowable stresses provide safety factors of 2 to 1 on yield for structural parts and 5 to 1 on ultimate for mechanical parts, except for wire ropes which have a minimum safety factor of 5 to 1 on ultimate. For limiting conditions, such as an SSE earthquake or stall, stresses do not exceed .9 yield.
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-68 Safety features provided for each hoist include two independent gearing systems, connected by a cross shaft to prevent windup, two brakes with each of the brakes operating through one of the independent gearing systems, two upper travel limit switches, one lower travel limit switch, over-speed switches set to trip at 120% of maximum rated speed, and emergency dynamic braking for controlled lowering in case of simultaneous failure of ac power source and holding brakes. In addition, each hoist incorporates a symmetrical cross reeving system designed to hold the load level with either rope. Each hoist is also provided with a hydraulic equalizing system to prevent dropping the load and to limit shock loading in case of a single rope failure. Each hoist is also provided with a load sensing system which provides cessation of hoisting when a load of 100% of the rated capacity is applied. The main hoist is also provided with an audible alarm which activates at 100% of rated capacity, as well as a load display on the control console and a load display board which is visible from the Reactor Building refueling floor (elevation 757.0). Holding brakes for the hoists are the spring-set, electrically released type with provisions for manual release of the brakes.
The capacity of each main hoist brake is sufficient to stop a 100% rated load traveling at the maximum rated hoisting speed within a distance of 6 inches.
Safety control features provided for all motions consist of overcurrent protection, undervoltage protection, control actuators which return to the stop position when released, and an emergency-stop pushbutton.
3.8.6.2 Auxiliary Building Crane 3.8.6.2.1 Description See Figure 3.8.6-7 through 3.8.6-11.
The crane in the Auxiliary Building is a single trolley, overhead, electric traveling type with a span of 77 feet. The crane has a main hoist capacity of 125 tons and an auxiliary hoist capacity of 10 tons.
The main and auxiliary hoists are driven by dc motors with regenerative braking and stepless speed control. DC power is supplied by solid-state thyristor-silicon controlled rectifiers. The bridge and trolley travel motions are ac operated with static-stepless regulated speed control.
Structural portions of the crane bridge consist of welded, box-type girders and welded, haunches, box-type end ties. Structural portions of the trolley consist of welded, box-type trucks and welded cross girts.
Control of the crane is from a control console in the operator cab which is located at midspan of the crane beneath the south girder.
3.8.6-4                                                                            Category I(L) Cranes


Category I(L) Cranes 3.8.6-3WATTS BARWBNP-89 3.8.6.1.6  Materials, Quality Contro ls, and Special Construction TechniquesA36 steel was used for the major structural portions of the crane. Design by TVA and erection by TVA were in accordance with TVA's quality assurance program. Design and fabrication by the contractor were in accordance with the contractor's quality assurance program which was reviewed and approved by TVA's design engineers. The contractor's quality assurance program covers the criteria in Appendix B of 10 CFR 50. Fabrication procedures such as welding, stress relieving, and nondestructive testing were included in appendices to the contractor's quality assurance program.ASTM standards were used for all material specifications and certified mill test reports were provided by the contractor for materials used for all load-carrying members.This crane is covered by TVA's Augmented Quality Assurance Program for Seismic Category I(L) Structures.3.8.6.1.7  Testing and Inser vice Surveillance RequirementsUpon completion of erection and adjustments on each crane, all crane motions and operating parts were thoroughly tested with the crane handling 125 percent of rated capacity. Tests were made to prove the ability of each crane to handle its rated capacity and smaller loads smoothly at any speed within the specified speed range. Each brake was tested to demonstrate its ability to hold the required load.After the initial test, periodic visual inspections of each crane are to be made. Parts inspected during the visual inspection are to include all bolted parts, couplings, brakes, hoist ropes, hoist blocks, limit switches, and equalizer systems.3.8.6.1.8  Safety Features The cranes were designed to withstand an SSE and to maintain any load up to rated capacity during and after the earthquake period.The bridges are equipped with double flange wheels, spring-set, electrically-released brakes which set and firmly lock two of the wheels when the bridge drive machinery is not operating or when power is lost for any reason, hold down lugs which run under the rail heads, and seismic restraints located on the bottom of each girder. During an earthquake the crane rail will yield before the crane wheels fail, thus allowing the crane to move until the seismic restraints on each girder contact the crane wall. These restraints hold the crane on the runway. Guide rollers, mounted on each extreme corner truck, travel against the outer surface of the bridge rail to assure bridge truck alignment.The trolleys are each equipped with double flange wheels, two spring-set, electrically-released brakes which set and firmly lock the driving wheels when the trolley drive machinery is not operating or when power is lost for any reason, and hold down lugs which run under the rail heads. Positive wheel and bumper stops are provided at both ends of the bridge. During an earthquake, the trolley could be displaced, but it will not leave its rails which are firmly attached to the bridge structure.
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-90 The one crane serves the needs of two reactor units. It handles the fuel casks, new fuel shipments to the new fuel storage, shield plugs at the equipment access doors, and any large pieces of equipment going into or out of the Reactor Buildings via the Auxiliary Building.
3.8.6-4Category I(L) Cranes WATTS BARWBNP-68Safety features provided for each hoist include two independent gearing systems, connected by a cross shaft to prevent windup, two brakes with each of the brakes operating through one of the independent gearing systems, two upper travel limit switches, one lower travel limit switch, over-speed switches set to trip at 120% of maximum rated speed, and emergency dynamic braking for controlled lowering in case of simultaneous failure of ac power source and holding brakes. In addition, each hoist incorporates a symmetrical cross reeving system designed to hold the load level with either rope. Each hoist is also provided with a hydraulic equalizing system to prevent dropping the load and to limit shock loading in case of a single rope failure. Each hoist is also provided with a load sensing system which provides cessation of hoisting when a load of 100% of the rated capacity is applied. The main hoist is also provided with an audible alarm which activates at 100% of rated capacity, as well as a load display on the control console and a load display board which is visible from the Reactor Building refueling floor (elevation 757.0). Holding brakes for the hoists are the spring-set, electrically released type with provisions for manual release of the brakes. The capacity of each main hoist brake is sufficient to stop a 100% rated load traveling at the maximum rated hoisting speed within a distance of 6 inches.Safety control features provided for all mo tions consist of overcurrent protection, undervoltage protection, control actuators which return to the stop position when released, and an emergency-stop pushbutton.3.8.6.2  Auxiliary Building Crane 3.8.6.2.1  DescriptionSee Figure 3.8.6-7 through 3.8.6-11.The crane in the Auxiliary Building is a single trolley, overhead, electric traveling type with a span of 77 feet. The crane has a main hoist capacity of 125 tons and an auxiliary hoist capacity of 10 tons.The main and auxiliary hoists are driven by dc motors with regenerative braking and stepless speed control. DC power is supplied by solid-state thyristor-silicon controlled rectifiers. The bridge and trolley travel motions are ac operated with static-stepless regulated speed control.Structural portions of the crane bridge consist of welded, box-type girders and welded, haunches, box-type end ties. Structural portions of the trolley consist of welded, box-type trucks and welded cross girts.Control of the crane is from a control console in the operator cab which is located at midspan of the crane beneath the south girder.
3.8.6.2.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications The following codes, standards, and specifications were used in the design of the crane:
Category I(L) Cranes 3.8.6-5WATTS BARWBNP-90The one crane serves the needs of two reactor units. It handles the fuel casks, new fuel shipments to the new fuel storage, shield plugs at the equipment access doors, and any large pieces of equipment going into or out of the Reactor Buildings via the Auxiliary Building.3.8.6.2.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and SpecificationsThe following codes, standards, and specifications were used in the design of the crane:National Electric Code, 1970 Edition.
National Electric Code, 1970 Edition.
NEMA Standard MG1, 1970 Edition.Crane Manufacturers Association of American, Inc., Specification No. 70, 1970 Edition.Federal Specification RR-W-410C.
NEMA Standard MG1, 1970 Edition.
Crane Manufacturers Association of American, Inc., Specification No. 70, 1970 Edition.
Federal Specification RR-W-410C.
ASTM Material Standards, 1974 Edition.
ASTM Material Standards, 1974 Edition.
AWS, D1.1-72 with 1973 Revisions, Structural Welding Code.Section 1.23, Part I, Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings; AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 7th Edition, 1970. American Gear Manufacturers Association Standards for Spur, Helical, Herringbone, and Bevel Gears.Where date of edition, copyright, or addendum is specified, earlier versions of the listed documents were not used. In some instances, later revisions of the listed documents were used where design safety was not compromised.The cranes meet applicable requirements of the listed codes, standards, and specifications.3.8.6.2.3 Loads, Loading Combin ations, and Allowable StressesLoads, loading combinations, and allowable stresses are shown in Table 3.8.6-2.3.8.6.2.4 Design and Analysis ProcedureThe bridge girders and end ties for the crane were designed as simple beams in the vertical plane and as a continuous frame in the horizontal plane. Stresses in the girders and end ties were computed with the trolley positioned to produce maximum stresses. Trolley positions used were the maximum end position.
AWS, D1.1-72 with 1973 Revisions, Structural Welding Code.
3.8.6-6Category I(L) Cranes WATTS BARWBNP-89third point, and the point near the center which produces maximum bending moments. The end tie and girder connections are designed to withstand seismically applied loads to ensure that the crane will not fall during an earthquake.Trolley members were designed as simple beams. Design of the bridge girders and end ties was by TVA. Mechanical parts and structural members except the bridge girders and end ties were designed by the contractor. Calculations and designs made by the contractor were reviewed by TVA.In designing for earthquake conditions, forces due to accelerations at the crane rails were used as static loads for determining component and member sizes. After establishing component and member sizes, a dynamic analysis, using appropriate response spectra, was made of the total crane to determine that allowable stresses had not been exceeded.Earthquake accelerations at the crane rails were determined by dynamic analysis of the supporting structure of the Auxiliary Building. The Auxiliary Building crane was initially evaluated for seismic loads based upon Set A seismic response spectra.The Auxiliary Building crane was also evaluated for seismic loads based upon Set B seismic response spectra using 4% damping for SSE.3.8.6.2.5 Structural Acceptance CriteriaAllowable stresses for all load combinations used for the various crane parts are given in Table 3.8.6-2. For normal load conditions, the allowable stresses provide a safety factor of 2 to 1 on yield for structural parts and 5 to 1 on ultimate for mechanical parts, except for wire ropes which have a minimum safety factor of 5 to 1 on ultimate. For limiting conditions, such as a SSE or stall, stresses do not exceed 0.9 yield.Since the design stresses for SSE do not exceed 0.9 yield, OBE, which results in lower design loads, does not govern.
Section 1.23, Part I, Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings; AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 7th Edition, 1970.
3.8.6.2.6 Materials, Quality Contro ls, and Special Construction TechniquesASTM A 36 steel was used for the major structural portions of the crane. Design by TVA and erection by TVA were in accordance with the TVA quality assurance program. Design and fabrication by the contractor were in accordance with the contractor's quality assurance program which was reviewed and approved by TVA's design engineers. The contractor quality assurance program covers the criteria in Appendix B of 1O CFR 5O. Fabrication procedures such as welding, stress relieving, and nondestructive testing, were included in appendices to the contractor's quality assurance program.ASTM standards were used for all material specifications and certified mill tests reports were provided by the contractor for materials used for all load-carrying members.
American Gear Manufacturers Association Standards for Spur, Helical, Herringbone, and Bevel Gears.
Category I(L) Cranes 3.8.6-7WATTS BARWBNP-86This crane is covered by TVA's Augmented Quality Assurance Program for Seismic Category I(L) Structures.3.8.6.2.7 Testing and Inser vice Surveillance RequirementsUpon completion of erection and adjustments on the crane, all crane motions and operating parts were thoroughly tested with crane handling 125% of rated capacity. Tests were made to prove the ability of the crane to handle its rated capacity and smaller loads smoothly at any speed within the specified speed range. Each brake was tested to demonstrate its ability to hold the required load.After the initial test, periodic visual inspections of the crane are to be made. Parts inspected during the visual inspection are to include all bolted parts, couplings, brakes, hoist ropes, hoist blocks, limit switches, and equalizer systems.3.8.6.2.8 Safety FeaturesThe crane was designed to withstand an SSE and to maintain any load up to rated capacity during and after the earthquake period.The bridge is equipped with double flange wheels, hold down lugs which run under the rail heads, one spring-released hydraulically set brake, and one spring-set electrically released brake which sets and firmly locks the wheels when the bridge drive machinery is not operating or when power is lost for any reason. During an earthquake the crane rail will yield before failure of the crane wheels and allow the end ties to contact the adjacent concrete wall, thus restraining the crane and preventing it from falling. Positive wheel and bumper stops are provided at each end of the bridge travel.The trolley is equipped with double flange wheels, two spring-set, electrically released brakes which set and firmly lock the driving wheels when the trolley drive machinery is not operating or when power is lost for any reason, and hold down lugs which run under the rail heads. Positive wheel and bumper stops are provided at both ends of the bridge. During an earthquake, the trolley could be displaced, but it will not leave the rails which are firmly attached to the bridge structure.Safety features provided for each hoist include two independent gearing systems, connected by a cross shaft to prevent windup, two brakes with each of the brakes operating through one of the independent gearing systems, two upper traveling limit switches, one lower travel limit switch, over-speed switches set to trip at 120% of maximum rated speed, and emergency dynamic braking for controlled lowering in case of simultaneous failure of ac power source and holding brakes. In addition, the main hoist incorporates a symmetrical cross reeving system designed to hold the load level with either rope and to limit the shock loading in case of a single rope failure, and a hydraulic sheave equalizing system to prevent dropping the load and to limit shock loading in case of a single rope failure. The main hoist is also provided with a load sensing system which provides cessation of hoisting when a load of 100% of the rated capacity is applied. The main hoist is also provided with an audible alarm which activates at 100% of rated capacity, as well as a load display on the control console and a load display board which is visible from the Auxiliary Building refueling floor 3.8.6-8Category I(L) Cranes WATTS BARWBNP-68(elevation 757.0). The auxiliary hoist has a two-part whip-style reeving so that a single rope failure will not drop the load. Holding brakes for the hoists are the spring-set, electrically released type with provisions for manual release of the brakes. The capacity of each main hoist brake is sufficient to stop at 100% rated load traveling at the maximum rated hoisting speed within a distance of 6 inches.The interlocks will not be bypassed for any loads except the fuel transfer gates and for new fuel handling. All loads in excess of 2,059 lbs, or which would have a kinetic energy greater than that of a spent fuel assembly from its normal handling height, will be transported around the spent fuel pit, rather than over, with the interlocks activated, via the normal paths used for heavy loads (see Figure Q10.6-2).Safety control features provided for all mo tions consist of overcurrent protection, undervoltage protection, control actuators which return to the stop position when released, and an emergency-stop pushbutton.The electrical interlocks and mechanical stops will be administratively bypassed to allow use of the crane for handling the fuel transfer canal gate. The bypass is accomplished by means of a keyed switch, operation of which bypasses all interlocks controlling crane movements and activates a green indicating light located beneath the operator's cab. The indicating light is visible from any point on the operating floor. Control of the bypass key by administrative personnel and the ability of administrative personnel to stop the crane by means of any one of three pushbutton stations ensure that administrative personnel control all bypass operations.Two pushbutton stations are located on the west wall and one pushbutton station is located on the east wall of the Auxiliary Building about four feet above the elevation 757.0 operating floor. These stations are readily accessible to administrative personnel on the operating floor. Testing of bypass interlocks is accomplished on a periodic basis in accordance with approved WBNP surveillance instructions. Testing must occur within seven calendar days prior to initial use, and every seven calendar days during continued regular usage. Each limit switch is manually operated to ascertain proper functioning of interlock circuits. To verify that the interlock system is functioning properly, each limit switch is moved to its actuated position, and all affected crane controls operated to ensure that crane movement does not occur.
Where date of edition, copyright, or addendum is specified, earlier versions of the listed documents were not used. In some instances, later revisions of the listed documents were used where design safety was not compromised.
Category I(L) Cranes 3.8.6-9WATTS BARWBNP-89Table 3.8.6-1  Polar Cranes Loads, Loading Combinations, and Allowable Stresses (Page 1 of 2)    No.Load Combinations Allowable Stresses (psi)TensionCompression(2)Shear      Bridge Structure  IDeadLive Impact Trolley tractive0.50 Fy0.48 Fy0.33 Fy IIDeadLive Impact Bridge tractive0.50 Fy0.48 Fy0.33 FyIIIDeadLive Trolley collision0.62 Fy0.59 Fy0.41 Fy IVDeadTrolley weight Stall at 275% capacity0.90 Fy0.90 Fy0.50 Fy  VDeadLive at 100% capacity
The cranes meet applicable requirements of the listed codes, standards, and specifications.
3.8.6.2.3 Loads, Loading Combinations, and Allowable Stresses Loads, loading combinations, and allowable stresses are shown in Table 3.8.6-2.
3.8.6.2.4 Design and Analysis Procedure The bridge girders and end ties for the crane were designed as simple beams in the vertical plane and as a continuous frame in the horizontal plane. Stresses in the girders and end ties were computed with the trolley positioned to produce maximum stresses. Trolley positions used were the maximum end position.
Category I(L) Cranes                                                                              3.8.6-5
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-89 third point, and the point near the center which produces maximum bending moments.
The end tie and girder connections are designed to withstand seismically applied loads to ensure that the crane will not fall during an earthquake.
Trolley members were designed as simple beams. Design of the bridge girders and end ties was by TVA. Mechanical parts and structural members except the bridge girders and end ties were designed by the contractor. Calculations and designs made by the contractor were reviewed by TVA.
In designing for earthquake conditions, forces due to accelerations at the crane rails were used as static loads for determining component and member sizes. After establishing component and member sizes, a dynamic analysis, using appropriate response spectra, was made of the total crane to determine that allowable stresses had not been exceeded.
Earthquake accelerations at the crane rails were determined by dynamic analysis of the supporting structure of the Auxiliary Building.
The Auxiliary Building crane was initially evaluated for seismic loads based upon Set A seismic response spectra.
The Auxiliary Building crane was also evaluated for seismic loads based upon Set B seismic response spectra using 4% damping for SSE.
3.8.6.2.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria Allowable stresses for all load combinations used for the various crane parts are given in Table 3.8.6-2. For normal load conditions, the allowable stresses provide a safety factor of 2 to 1 on yield for structural parts and 5 to 1 on ultimate for mechanical parts, except for wire ropes which have a minimum safety factor of 5 to 1 on ultimate. For limiting conditions, such as a SSE or stall, stresses do not exceed 0.9 yield.
Since the design stresses for SSE do not exceed 0.9 yield, OBE, which results in lower design loads, does not govern.
3.8.6.2.6 Materials, Quality Controls, and Special Construction Techniques ASTM A 36 steel was used for the major structural portions of the crane. Design by TVA and erection by TVA were in accordance with the TVA quality assurance program.
Design and fabrication by the contractor were in accordance with the contractor's quality assurance program which was reviewed and approved by TVA's design engineers. The contractor quality assurance program covers the criteria in Appendix B of 10 CFR 5O. Fabrication procedures such as welding, stress relieving, and nondestructive testing, were included in appendices to the contractor's quality assurance program.
ASTM standards were used for all material specifications and certified mill tests reports were provided by the contractor for materials used for all load-carrying members.
3.8.6-6                                                                              Category I(L) Cranes
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-86 This crane is covered by TVA's Augmented Quality Assurance Program for Seismic Category I(L) Structures.
3.8.6.2.7 Testing and Inservice Surveillance Requirements Upon completion of erection and adjustments on the crane, all crane motions and operating parts were thoroughly tested with crane handling 125% of rated capacity.
Tests were made to prove the ability of the crane to handle its rated capacity and smaller loads smoothly at any speed within the specified speed range. Each brake was tested to demonstrate its ability to hold the required load.
After the initial test, periodic visual inspections of the crane are to be made. Parts inspected during the visual inspection are to include all bolted parts, couplings, brakes, hoist ropes, hoist blocks, limit switches, and equalizer systems.
3.8.6.2.8 Safety Features The crane was designed to withstand an SSE and to maintain any load up to rated capacity during and after the earthquake period.
The bridge is equipped with double flange wheels, hold down lugs which run under the rail heads, one spring-released hydraulically set brake, and one spring-set electrically released brake which sets and firmly locks the wheels when the bridge drive machinery is not operating or when power is lost for any reason. During an earthquake the crane rail will yield before failure of the crane wheels and allow the end ties to contact the adjacent concrete wall, thus restraining the crane and preventing it from falling.
Positive wheel and bumper stops are provided at each end of the bridge travel.
The trolley is equipped with double flange wheels, two spring-set, electrically released brakes which set and firmly lock the driving wheels when the trolley drive machinery is not operating or when power is lost for any reason, and hold down lugs which run under the rail heads. Positive wheel and bumper stops are provided at both ends of the bridge. During an earthquake, the trolley could be displaced, but it will not leave the rails which are firmly attached to the bridge structure.
Safety features provided for each hoist include two independent gearing systems, connected by a cross shaft to prevent windup, two brakes with each of the brakes operating through one of the independent gearing systems, two upper traveling limit switches, one lower travel limit switch, over-speed switches set to trip at 120% of maximum rated speed, and emergency dynamic braking for controlled lowering in case of simultaneous failure of ac power source and holding brakes. In addition, the main hoist incorporates a symmetrical cross reeving system designed to hold the load level with either rope and to limit the shock loading in case of a single rope failure, and a hydraulic sheave equalizing system to prevent dropping the load and to limit shock loading in case of a single rope failure. The main hoist is also provided with a load sensing system which provides cessation of hoisting when a load of 100% of the rated capacity is applied. The main hoist is also provided with an audible alarm which activates at 100% of rated capacity, as well as a load display on the control console and a load display board which is visible from the Auxiliary Building refueling floor Category I(L) Cranes                                                                               3.8.6-7


SSE0.90 Fy0.90 Fy0.50 Fy    No.Load CombinationsAllowable Stresses (psi)TensionCompression(2)ShearTrolley Structure  IDeadLive Impact0.5 FY0.48 FY0.33 FY IIDeadStall at 275% capacity 0.9 FY (4)0.62 FY(3)0.9  FY0.59 FY0.5 FY0.41 FYIIISame as case V for bridgeMechanical Parts    No.Load CombinationsAllowable Stresses (psi)Tension and Compression (2)ShearParts Other Than Wheel Axlesand Saddle Truck Connecting Pins 3.8.6-10Category I(L) Cranes WATTS BARWBNP-89 Notes:(1)Acts in one horizontal direction at any given time and acts in the vertical and horizontal directions simultaneously. (2)The value given for allowable compression stress is the maximum value permitted, when buckling does not control. The critical buckling stress, F cr, shall be used in place of F Y when buckling controls.(3)For sheave frames, cross girts, and their respective connections (4)For all other members  IDeadLive Ult 52 x Ult 15 IIDeadStall at 275% capacity0.9 FY0.5 FYWheel Axles and Connecting Pins  IDeadLive Impact Ult 52 x Ult 15 IIDeadLive Collision Ult 52 x Ult 15    No.Load CombinationsAllowable Stresses (psi)Tension and Compression (2)ShearWheel Axles and Connecting Pins (Continued)IIIDeadStall at 275% capacity0.40 FY0.50 FY IVDeadLive at 100% capacity
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-68 (elevation 757.0). The auxiliary hoist has a two-part whip-style reeving so that a single rope failure will not drop the load. Holding brakes for the hoists are the spring-set, electrically released type with provisions for manual release of the brakes. The capacity of each main hoist brake is sufficient to stop at 100% rated load traveling at the maximum rated hoisting speed within a distance of 6 inches.
The interlocks will not be bypassed for any loads except the fuel transfer gates and for new fuel handling. All loads in excess of 2,059 lbs, or which would have a kinetic energy greater than that of a spent fuel assembly from its normal handling height, will be transported around the spent fuel pit, rather than over, with the interlocks activated, via the normal paths used for heavy loads (see Figure Q10.6-2).
Safety control features provided for all motions consist of overcurrent protection, undervoltage protection, control actuators which return to the stop position when released, and an emergency-stop pushbutton.
The electrical interlocks and mechanical stops will be administratively bypassed to allow use of the crane for handling the fuel transfer canal gate. The bypass is accomplished by means of a keyed switch, operation of which bypasses all interlocks controlling crane movements and activates a green indicating light located beneath the operator's cab. The indicating light is visible from any point on the operating floor.
Control of the bypass key by administrative personnel and the ability of administrative personnel to stop the crane by means of any one of three pushbutton stations ensure that administrative personnel control all bypass operations.
Two pushbutton stations are located on the west wall and one pushbutton station is located on the east wall of the Auxiliary Building about four feet above the elevation 757.0 operating floor. These stations are readily accessible to administrative personnel on the operating floor.
Testing of bypass interlocks is accomplished on a periodic basis in accordance with approved WBNP surveillance instructions. Testing must occur within seven calendar days prior to initial use, and every seven calendar days during continued regular usage. Each limit switch is manually operated to ascertain proper functioning of interlock circuits. To verify that the interlock system is functioning properly, each limit switch is moved to its actuated position, and all affected crane controls operated to ensure that crane movement does not occur.
3.8.6-8                                                                          Category I(L) Cranes


SSE0.90 FY0.50 FYTable 3.8.6-1 Polar Cranes Loads, Loading Combinations, and Allowable Stresses (Page 2 of 2)
WATTS BAR                                                                                          WBNP-89 Table 3.8.6-1 Polar Cranes Loads, Loading Combinations, and Allowable Stresses (Page 1 of 2)
Category I(L) Cranes 3.8.6-11WATTS BARWBNP-89Table 3.8.6-2  Auxiliary Building Crane Loads, Loading Combinations, And Allowable Stresses (Page 1 of 2)    No.Load CombinationsAllowable Stresses (psi)TensionCompression(2)ShearBridge Structure IDeadLive Impact Trolley tractive0.50 Fy0.48 Fy0.33 Fy IIDeadLive Impact Bridge tractive0.50 Fy0.48 Fy0.33 FyIIIDeadLive Trolley collision0.62 Fy0.59 Fy0.41 Fy IVDeadLive Bridge collision0.62 Fy0.59 Fy0.41 Fy VDeadTrolley weight Stall at 275% capacity0.90 Fy0.90 Fy0.50 Fy VIDeadLive at 100% capacity
No.           Load Combinations                               Allowable Stresses (psi)
Tension                Compre        Shear ssion(2)
Bridge Structure I        Dead Live                                          0.50 Fy                0.48 Fy    0.33 Fy Impact Trolley tractive II        Dead Live                                          0.50 Fy                0.48 Fy    0.33 Fy Impact Bridge tractive III        Dead Live                                          0.62 Fy                0.59 Fy    0.41 Fy Trolley collision IV        Dead Trolley weight                                0.90 Fy                0.90 Fy    0.50 Fy Stall at 275% capacity V        Dead Live at 100% capacity                        0.90 Fy                0.90 Fy    0.50 Fy SSE No.            Load Combinations                                          Allowable Stresses (psi)
Tension          Compression(2)          Shear Trolley Structure I        Dead Live                                  0.5 FY              0.48 FY            0.33 FY Impact II        Dead                                0.9 FY(4)            0.9 FY              0.5 FY Stall at 275% capacity             0.62 FY(3)            0.59 FY            0.41 FY III        Same as case V for bridge Mechanical Parts No.          Load Combinations                                          Allowable Stresses (psi)
Tension and                    Shear Compression(2)
Parts Other Than Wheel Axles and Saddle Truck Connecting Pins Category I(L) Cranes                                                                                    3.8.6-9


SSE0.90 Fy0.90 Fy0.50 Fy    No.Load CombinationsAllowable Stresses (psi)TensionCompression(2)ShearTrolley Structure  IDeadLive Impact0.5 FY0.48 FY0.33 FY IIDeadStall at 275% capacity 0.9 FY(4)  0.62 FY (3)0.9  FY0.59 FY0.50 FY0.41 FYIIISame as case VI for bridgeMechanical Parts    No.Load CombinationsAllowable Stresses (psi)Tension and Compression (2)ShearParts Other Than Wheel Axlesand Saddle Truck Connecting Pins 3.8.6-12Category I(L) Cranes WATTS BARWBNP-89 Notes:(1)Acts in one horizontal direction at any given time and acts in the       vertical and horizontal directions simultaneously. (2)The value given for allowable compression stress is the maximum value permitted, when buckling does not control. The critical buckling stress, F cr, shall be used in place of F Y when buckling controls.(3)For sheave frames, cross girts, and their respective connections (4)For all other members IDeadLive Ult 52 x Ult 15 IIDeadStall at 275% capacity0.9 FY0.50 FYWheel Axles and Connecting Pins  IDeadLive Impact Ult 52 x Ult 15 IIDeadLive Collision Ult 52 x Ult 15IIIDeadStall at 275% capacity0.9 FY0.5 FY IVDeadLive at 100% capacity SSE0.9 F Y0.50 F YTable 3.8.6-2  Auxiliary Building Crane Loads, Loading Combinations, And Allowable Stresses (Page 2 of 2)
WATTS BAR                                                                                              WBNP-89 Table 3.8.6-1 Polar Cranes Loads, Loading Combinations, and Allowable Stresses (Page 2 of 2)
Category I (L) Cranes3.8.6-13WATTS BAR WBNP-71Figure 3.8.6-1  Reactor Building Units 1 & 2 175 Ton Polar Cranes Arrangement
I      Dead                                      Ult                          2 x Ult Live                                      5                             15 II      Dead                                    0.9 FY                          0.5 FY Stall at 275% capacity Wheel Axles and Connecting Pins I      Dead                                      Ult                          2 x Ult Live                                      5                              15 Impact II      Dead                                      Ult                          2 x Ult Live                                      5                              15 Collision No.         Load Combinations                                  Allowable Stresses (psi)
Tension and                       Shear Compression(2)
Wheel Axles and Connecting Pins (Continued)
III      Dead                                  0.40 FY                        0.50 FY Stall at 275% capacity IV      Dead                                  0.90 FY                        0.50 FY Live at 100% capacity SSE Notes:
(1)Acts in one horizontal direction at any given time and acts in the vertical and horizontal directions simultaneously.
(2)The value given for allowable compression stress is the maximum value permitted, when buckling does not control. The critical buckling stress, Fcr, shall be used in place of FY when buckling controls.
(3)For sheave frames, cross girts, and their respective connections (4)For all other members 3.8.6-10                                                                                      Category I(L) Cranes


Category I (L) Cranes3.8.6-14WATTS BAR WBNP-48Figure 3.8.6-2 Reactor Building Units 1 & 2 175 Ton Polar Cranes Trolley Arrangement and Details (Sheet 1)
WATTS BAR                                                                                       WBNP-89 Table 3.8.6-2 Auxiliary Building Crane Loads, Loading Combinations, And Allowable Stresses (Page 1 of 2)
Category I (L) Cranes3.8.6-15WATTS BAR WBNP-89Figure 3.8.6-3  Reactor Building Units 1 & 2 175 Ton Polar Cranes Trolley Arrangement and Details (Sheet 2)
No.      Load Combinations                                        Allowable Stresses (psi)
Category I (L) Cranes3.8.6-16WATTS BAR WBNP-89Figure 3.8.6-4  175 Ton Polar Cranes Bridge Details Category I (L) Cranes3.8.6-17WATTS BAR WBNP-89Figure 3.8.6-5  Reactor Building Units 1 & 2 175 Ton Polar Cranes Miscellaneous Details (Sheet 1)
Tension          Compression(2)         Shear Bridge Structure I        Dead Live                                0.50 Fy              0.48 Fy          0.33 Fy Impact Trolley tractive II        Dead Live                                0.50 Fy              0.48 Fy          0.33 Fy Impact Bridge tractive III        Dead Live                                0.62 Fy              0.59 Fy          0.41 Fy Trolley collision IV        Dead Live                                0.62 Fy              0.59 Fy          0.41 Fy Bridge collision V        Dead Trolley weight                      0.90 Fy              0.90 Fy          0.50 Fy Stall at 275% capacity VI        Dead                                0.90 Fy              0.90 Fy          0.50 Fy Live at 100% capacity SSE No.       Load Combinations                                        Allowable Stresses (psi)
Category I (L) Cranes3.8.6-18WATTS BAR WBNP-44Figure 3.8.6-6  Reactor Building Units 1 & 2 175 Ton Polar Cranes Miscellaneous Details (Sheet 2)
Tension          Compression(2)        Shear Trolley Structure I       Dead Live                                  0.5 FY              0.48 FY          0.33 FY Impact II        Dead                                0.9 FY(4)           0.9 FY            0.50 FY Stall at 275% capacity              0.62 FY(3)           0.59 FY          0.41 FY III        Same as case VI for bridge Mechanical Parts No.       Load Combinations                              Allowable Stresses (psi)
Category I (L) Cranes3.8.6-19WATTS BAR WBNP-71Security-Related Information - Withheld Under 10CFR2.390Figure 3.8.6-7  Auxiliary Building Units 1 & 2 125 Ton Crane Arrangement Category I (L) Cranes3.8.6-20WATTS BAR WBNP-89Figure 3.8.6-8  Auxiliary Building Units 1 & 2 125 Ton Crane Trolley Arrangement Category I (L) Cranes3.8.6-21WATTS BAR WBNP-89Figure 3.8.6-9 Auxiliary Building Units 1 & 2 125 Ton Crane Trolley Details Category I (L) Cranes3.8.6-22WATTS BAR WBNP-89Figure 3.8.6-10  Auxiliary Building Units 1 & 2 125 Ton Crane Bridge Details Category I (L) Cranes3.8.6-23WATTS BAR WBNP-89Figure 3.8.6-11  125 Ton Crane Limit Switch and Mechanical Stop Arrangement Category I (L) Cranes3.8.6-24WATTS BAR WBNP-89THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SHELL TEMPERATURE TRANSIENTS 3.8A-1WATTS BARWBNP-923.8ASHELL TEMPERATURE TRANSIENTSFigure 3.8A-1 presents average shell temperatures adjacent to the three compartments as a function of time after the DBA. The DBA is a double end rupture of the reactor coolant pipe with the reactor decay heat released into the lower compartment as steam. Initially the steam is condensed in the ice compartment. After the ice melts, the steam is condensed in the upper compartment by a water spray.The lower compartment temperature rises to 250°F, essentially instantaneously, then is reduced to 220°F very shortly after the blowdown is completed. The blowdown is completed before the shell adjacent to the lower compartment reaches 220°F, as illustrated by the smooth curve presented in Figure 3.8A-1.The upper compartment temperature rises essentially instantaneously due to compression of the noncondensable gases into the upper compartment. The sharp rise at 7,000 seconds simulates the disappearance of the ice from the ice compartment. The shell temperature will rise at a maximum of 0.11 degree per second during the rise from 140°F to 190°F. The subsequent temperature decrease of the shell adjacent to the upper compartment is due to the reduction in decay heat.The curve labeled shell adjacent to the ice compartment indicates the temperature of the shell adjacent to the ice compartment. The shell is separated from the ice compartment with a thick layer of insulation, hence the rather slow response for the temperature of the shell adjacent to the ice compartment. After the ice is all melted the temperature inside the ice compartment will be the same as the temperature in the lower compartment; however, the shell temperature adjacent to the ice compartment will always be less than the temperature in the ice compartment because of insulation. The temperature of the shell adjacent to the ice compartment will peak at less than 220°F.The curves in Figure 3.8A-1 are an average shell temperature representative for the bulk of the shell. Some areas near boundaries between compartments and near the base will differ significantly from the bulk. The lower portion of the lower compartment shell will be insulated for the purpose of minimizing the transient effects. Figure 3.8A-2 is a plot of shell temperature versus distance above Elevation 702.78 for various times after a LOCA. In establishing these curves it was assumed that top of the concrete slab is at Elevation 702.78 inches, and that the top of the insulation is at Elevation 707.11, and the top 8 inches of insulation is tapered from 2 inches thick to 1/4-inch thick.
Tension and                    Shear Compression(2)
3.8A-2SHELL TEMPERATURE TRANSIENTS WATTS BARWBNP-92THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SHELL TEMPERATURE TRANSIENTS3.8A-3WATTS BAR WBNP-79Figure 3.8A-1  Shell Wall Temperature Versus Time After Loss of Coolant
Parts Other Than Wheel Axles and Saddle Truck Connecting Pins Category I(L) Cranes                                                                                3.8.6-11


3.8A-4SHELL TEMPERATURE TRANSIENTSWATTS BAR WBNP-79Figure 3.8A-2  Typical Temperature Transient Lower Compartment Wall BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA 3.8B-1WATTS BARWBNP-863.8B  BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA 3.8B.1  INTRODUCTIONThe buckling design criteria in this appendix are applicable to stiffened circular cylindrical and spherical shells. Section 2.0 sets forth the buckling design criteria for shells stiffened with circumferential stiffeners. Because of existing penetrations, interferences, or large attached masses, it may be expedient to further analyze some areas of the vessel as independent panels. Section 3.0 sets forth the criteria for shells stiffened with a combination of circumferential and vertical stiffeners. Section 4.0 deals with the criteria for a spherical dome. The procedures and data presented were adapted primarily from Chapter 3 of the Shell Analysis Manual, by E. H. Baker, A. P. Cappelli, L. Kovalevsky, F. L. Rish, and R. M. Verette, National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C., Contractor Report CR-912, April 1968. The criteria given in this section cover only the range of variables needed for the structural steel containment vessel for which these specifications were prepared.The buckling criteria are specified in terms of unit stresses and membrane forces in the shell. Stresses caused by multiple loads must be combined according to provisions of Table 3.8B-1 for use in these criteria. The values of the load factors and factors of safety used in the buckling criteria are given in Section 5.0. The method of applying the factors of safety to the criteria is shown in Table 3.8B-2.
WATTS BAR                                                                                                 WBNP-89 Table 3.8.6-2 Auxiliary Building Crane Loads, Loading Combinations, And Allowable Stresses (Page 2 of 2)
3.8B.2  SHELLS STIFFENED WITH CIRCUMFERENTIAL STIFFENERS 3.8B.2.1 Circular Cylindrical Shells Under Axial CompressionThe critical buckling stress for a cylinder under axial compression alone is determined by the equationfor various ranges of cylinder length defined byThe constant C c is determined from Figure 3.8B-l for the appropriate value of R/t. cr 1C c Et R------------
I      Dead                                      Ult                            2 x Ult Live                                      5                              15 II      Dead                                    0.9 FY                        0.50 FY Stall at 275% capacity Wheel Axles and Connecting Pins I      Dead                                      Ult                            2 x Ult Live                                      5                              15 Impact II      Dead                                      Ult                            2 x Ult Live                                      5                              15 Collision III        Dead                                    0.9 FY                          0.5 FY Stall at 275% capacity IV        Dead                                    0.9 FY                          0.50 FY Live at 100% capacity SSE Notes:
-=Z L 2 Rt------1 2-=
(1) Acts in one horizontal direction at any given time and acts in the       vertical and horizontal directions simultaneously.
3.8B-2BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WATTS BARWBNP-92The critical buckling stress in a cylinder under axial compression and internal pressure is determined by:The constants C c and C c are determined from Figures 3.8B-1 and 3.8B-2, respectively. The constant C c given in Figure 3.8B-2 depends only upon the internal pressure and R/Et.
(2) The value given for allowable compression stress is the maximum value permitted, when buckling does not control. The critical buckling stress, Fcr, shall be used in place of FY when buckling controls.
3.8B.2.2  Circular Cylindrical Sh ells in Circumferential CompressionA circular cylindrical shell under a critical external radial or hydrostatic pressure will buckle in circumferential compression. The critical circumferential compressive stress is given by:for various values of Z given in Section 2.1. Curves for determining the constant K p for both radial and hydrostatic pressure are given in Figure 3.8B-3.
(3) For sheave frames, cross girts, and their respective connections (4) For all other members 3.8.6-12                                                                                        Category I(L) Cranes
3.8B.2.3  Circular Cylindrical Shells Under TorsionThe shear buckling stress of the cylinder subject to torsional loads is given by:The shear buckling stress of the cylinder subject to torsion and internal pressure is determined bywhere constants, C s and C s, are determined from Figures 3.8B-4 and 3.8B-5. Values of C s are given for internal radial pressure alone and internal pressure plus an external load equal to the longitudinal force produced by the internal pressure. cr 1CC c+Et R------= cr 2K p 2 E121 u 2--------------------------
-t L---2= cr 3C s Et RZ 14----------------
= cr 3C s+C sEt RZ 14----------------
=
BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA 3.8B-3WATTS BARWBNP-92Figure 3.8B-4 is applicable for values of:For cylinders with length constant Z less than 100, the shear buckling stress is determined by:
for values of: 3.8B.2.4  where a is the effective length and b is the circumference of the cylinder. The coefficient K's is given in Figure 3.8B-10.
Circular Cylindrical Shells Under BendingThe critical buckling stress for the cylinder under bending is computed by the equation:where the buckling constant, C b is given by Figure 3.8B-6.The critical buckling stress for the cylinder under internal pressure and bending is computed by:where C b and C b are given by Figures 3.8B-6 and 3.8B-7, respectively.Figure 3.8B-7 is a function of the internal pressure and the geometry.
3.8B.2.5  Circular Cylindrical Shell Under Combined LoadsThe criterion for buckling failure of the cylindrical shell under combined loading is expressed by an interaction equation of stress-ratios of the form:
Z L 2 Rt------1 2-100= cr 3K's 2 E121 2--------------------------
-t a---2 ab=Z a 2 Rt------1 2-= cr 4C b Et R------= cr 4C bC b+Et R------=
3.8B-4BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WATTS BARWBNP-86Note thatwhere N m is the compressive or shear membrane force and F m is the appropriate load factor, given in Section 5.0, for individual loading components in any loading combination. The superscript n refers to the particular type of loading. Superscripts n = 1, 2, 3, and 4 represent respectively axial compression, circumferential compression, torsion, and bending loads.The following interaction equations were used in the design of the cylindrical shell.(a)Axial Compression and Circumferential Compression (b)Axial Compression and Bending (c)Axial Compression and Torsion R 1 x R 2 y R 3 z++1=R n N 1 F n1 cr t n-------------------
-N 2 F n2 cr t n-------------------
-N m F nm cr t n----------------------
-N k F nk cr t n-------------------
-++=N m 1F m cr 1t-------------------
mo=mk=N m 2F m cr 2t-------------------
mo=mk=1+N m 1F m cr 1t-------------------
mo=m k=N m 4F m cr 4t-------------------
mo=m k=19+N m 1F m cr 1t-------------------
mo=mk=N m 3F m cr 3t-------------------
mo=mk=


2 1+
Category I (L) Cranes                                                                                  WATTS BAR WBNP-71 Figure 3.8.6-1 Reactor Building Units 1 & 2 175 Ton Polar Cranes Arrangement 3.8.6-13
BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA 3.8B-5WATTS BARWBNP-86 (d)Axial Compression, Bending, and Torsion (e)Axial Compression, Circumferential Compression, and TorsionThe longitudinal membrane stresses produced by the nonaxisymmetric pressure loads (NASPL) were considered as caused by bending loads in the interaction equations.
3.8B.3  SHELLS STIFFENED WITH A COMBINATION OF CIRCUMFERENTIAL AND VERTICAL STIFFENERS 3.1The shell was provided with permanent circumferential and vertical stiffeners. The circumferential stiffeners were designed to have a spring stiffness at least great enough to enforce nodes in the vertical stiffeners so as to preclude a general instability mode of buckling failure, thus ensuring that if buckling occurs, it will occur in stiffened panels between the circumferential stiffeners. An acceptable procedure for determining the critical buckling stresses in the vertical stiffeners and stiffened panels is outlined in Section 3.43 Shell Analysis Manual, by E. H. Baker A. P. Cappelli, L. Kovalevsky, F. L. Rish, and R. M. Verette, National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C., Contractor Report CR-912, April 1968.
3.2In addition for shells stiffened with a combination of circumferential and vertical stiffeners under combined load, the criterion for buckling failure of the shell plate is expressed by an interaction equation of stress ratios in the formsimilar to the interaction equations of Section 2.5.The critical buckling stresses for the shell plates between the circumferential and vertical stiffeners were determined by the following equations.(a)Curved Panel under Axial Compression.The critical buckling stress for a curved cylindrical panel under axial compression alone is determined by the equation:
N m 1F m cr 1t-------------------
mo=mk=N m 4F m cr 4t-------------------
mo=mk=N m 3F m cr 3t-------------------
mo=mk=
+2 1+N m 1F m cr 1t-------------------
mo=mk=N m 2F m cr 2t-------------------
mo=mk=N m 3F m cr 3t-------------------
mo=mk=


+2 1+R 1 X R 2 y R 3 Z 1++
Category I (L) Cranes                                                                                                                WATTS BAR WBNP-48 Figure 3.8.6-2 Reactor Building Units 1 & 2 175 Ton Polar Cranes Trolley Arrangement and Details (Sheet 1) 3.8.6-14
3.8B-6BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WATTS BARWBNP-79for various ranges of cylinder length given by:The constant K c is determined from Figure 3.8B-8.(b)Curved Panel in Circumferential CompressionThe critical buckling stress of a curved cylindrical panel under circumferential compression was determined by Section 2.2.(c)Curved Panel Under TorsionThe shear buckling stress of a curved cylindrical panel subjected to torsional loads is given by:for values of:The coefficient, K s, is given in Figure 3.8B-9. For cylindrical panels with length, a, less than the arc length, b, the shear buckling stress is determined by:for values of: cr K c 2 E121 2--------------------------
-t b---2=Z b 2 Rt------1 2-= cr K s 2 E121 2----------------------------
t b---2 ab=Z b 2 Rt------1 2-= cr K s' 2 E121 2--------------------------
-t a---2 ab=z a 2 Rt------1 2-=
BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA 3.8B-7WATTS BARWBNP-79Curves for determining K s, are given in Figure 3.8B-10.(d)Curved Panels Under BendingThe critical buckling stress for a curved panel in bending shall be computed using the equation for axial compression given in (a) of this section.3.3The critical buckling stress in a stiffened hemispherical shell for the analysis required in the bid specification is not treated in the Shell Analysis Manual, and except for external pressure, was determined by the following equation:where: t = thickness of shell E = modulus of elasticity R = radius of shell3.8B.4  SPHERICAL SHELLS3.8B.4.1  The critical buckling stress in the spherical dome, except for external pressure, was determined by the following equation:where    t = thickness of shell E = modulus of elasticity R = radius of shell3.8B.4.2  Spherical Shel l Under Combined LoadsThe criterion for buckling failure of the dome is expressed by an interaction equation of the stress ratios in the form: cr0.125 E t R----= cr 0.125 Et R------=R 1 X R 2 y R 3 Z 1++
3.8B-8BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WATTS BARWBNP-86similar to the interaction equation of Section 2.5.A set of interaction equations similar to those in Section 2.5 was used in the design except that the effects due to torsion were considered.
3.8B.5  FACTOR OF SAFETYThe buckling stress criteria were evaluated to determine the factors of safety against buckling inherent in the criteria. The factors which affect stability were determined and the criteria were evaluated to account for these factors. The basis used to evaluate the criteria to account for the factors were (1) how well established are the effects of the factors on stability of these shells (2) amount of supporting data in the literature and (3) margins marked by the critical stresses and interaction equations used in the criteria. The buckling criteria were found to be very conservative and judged to provide at least a factor of safety of 2.0 against buckling for all loading conditions for which the vessels were designed.In addition, a load factor of 1.1 will be applied to load conditions which include the Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE). A load factor of 1.25 will be used with all other load conditions.
BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA 3.8B-9WATTS BARWBNP-64Table 3.8B-1  MULTIPLE LOAD COMBINATIONS VARIOUS PLANT CONDITIONSLOADING CONDITIONS (Page 1 of 3)Load ComponentsConst. Cond.Test. Cond.
Normal Design Norm. Oper. 1/2 SSE Accident1/2 SSEMSLB Accident (Static)1/2 SSEAccident SSE MSLB Accident (Static) SSEPost Accident FloodingPersonnel Access Lock Load XXPenetration LoadsXXXXXX Containment Vessel and Appurtenances Dead LoadsXXXXXXXXWalkway Live LoadsXSpray Header and Lighting Fixtures Live LoadsXXXSafe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE)
Lateral and Vertical Loads XXDesign Internal Pressure of Design


External Pressure XOne-half Safe Shutdown Earthquake (1/2  
Category I (L) Cranes                                                                                                                WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Figure 3.8.6-3 Reactor Building Units 1 & 2 175 Ton Polar Cranes Trolley Arrangement and Details (Sheet 2) 3.8.6-15


SSE) Lateral and Vertical LoadsXXXX 3.8B-10BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WATTS BARWBNP-64Design Internal Pressure or Pressure Transient Loads XXDesign TemperatureX Internal Temperature Range of 60F to 120F X Internal Temperature Range of 80F to 250F XXThermal Stress Loads Including Shell Temperature Transients XXHydrostatic Load Case 1a or 1B (See Note 1)
Category I (L) Cranes                                                        WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Figure 3.8.6-4 175 Ton Polar Cranes Bridge Details 3.8.6-16
XXHydrostatic Load Case II (See Note


1)XWind Loads(See Note 2)
Category I (L) Cranes                                                                                                      WATTS BAR Figure 3.8.6-5 Reactor Building Units 1 & 2 175 Ton Polar Cranes Miscellaneous Details (Sheet 1)
XShow Loads(See Note 2)
WBNP-89 3.8.6-17
XTable 3.8B-1  MULTIPLE LOAD COMBINATIONS VARIOUS PLANT CONDITIONSLOADING CONDITIONS (Page 2 of 3)Load ComponentsConst. Cond.Test. Cond.
Normal Design Norm. Oper. 1/2 SSE Accident1/2 SSEMSLB Accident (Static)1/2 SSEAccident SSE MSLB Accident (Static) SSEPost Accident Flooding BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA 3.8B-11WATTS BARWBNP-64 Notes:1. Hydrostatic loads case 1A & 1B, and load case II are shown on TVA drawing 48N400.2. Wind and snow loads do not act simultaneously.
: 3. For allowable stress condition see Table 3.8.B-2.Temporary Construction Loads XInternal Test Pressure XWeight of Contained Air XMSLB Pressure XX Internal Temperature Range of 80F to 327F XXAirlock Live LoadXTable 3.8B-1 MULTIPLE LOAD COMBINATIONS VARIOUS PLANT CONDITIONSLOADING CONDITIONS (Page 3 of 3)Load ComponentsConst. Cond.Test. Cond.
Normal Design Norm. Oper. 1/2 SSE Accident1/2 SSEMSLB Accident (Static)1/2 SSEAccident SSE MSLB Accident (Static) SSEPost Accident Flooding 3.8B-12BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WATTS BARWBNP-91(1) All code references are to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, Nuclear Power Plant Components, 1971 Edition, with Winter 1971 Addenda.Table 3.8B-2 Allowable Stress Intensities Plus Buckling Load FactorsLoading ConditionsApplicable ASME CodeReference (1) for Stress IntensityBuckling Load  Factors  Normal Design Condition Construction ConditionNB-3221In accordance with ASME Code, Section VIIINormal Operation ConditionNB-3222Load factor = 1.25 for both cylindrical portion and hemispherical headUpset Operation ConditionNB-3223Load factor = 1.25 for both cylindrical portion and hemispherical headEmergency Operation ConditionNB-3224Load factor = 1.10 for both cylindrical portion and hemispherical headTest ConditionNB-3226NA Post-Accident Fuel Recovery ConditionNB-3224NA BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA 3.8B-13WATTS BARWBNP-64THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 3.8B-14BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WATTS BARWBNP-64 BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA3.8B-15WATTS BAR WBNP-91Figure 3.8B-1  Buckling Stress Coefficient, C C , for Unstiffened Unpressurized CircularCylinders Subjected to Axial Compression


3.8B-16BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIAWATTS BAR WBNP-91Figure 3.8B-2  Increase in Axial-Compressive Buckling-Stress Coefficient of CylindersDue to Internal Pressure BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA3.8B-17WATTS BAR WBNP-91Figure 3.8B-3  Buckling Coefficients for Circular Cylinders Subjected to External Pressure 3.8B-18BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIAWATTS BAR WBNP-64Figure 3.8B-4  Buckling Stress Coefficient, C S, for Unstiffened Unpressurized Circular Cylinders Subjected to Torsion BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA3.8B-19WATTS BAR WBNP-64Figure 3.8B-5  Increase in Torsional Buckling-Stress Coefficient of Cylinders Due to Internal Pressure 3.8B-20BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIAWATTS BAR WBNP-64Figure 3.8B-6 Buckling-Stress Coefficient, C B, for Unstiffened Unpressurized Circular Cylinders Subjected to Bending BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA3.8B-21WATTS BAR WBNP-64Figure 3.8B-7  Increase in Bending Buckling-Stress Coefficient of Cylinders Due to Internal Pressure 3.8B-22BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIAWATTS BAR WBNP-64Figure 3.8B-8  Buckling-Stress Coefficient, K C, For Unpressurized Curved Panels Subjected to Axial Compression BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA3.8B-23WATTS BAR WBNP-64Figure 3.8B-9  Buckling-Stress Coefficient, K S, for Unpressurized Curved Panels Subjected to Shear 3.8B-24BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIAWATTS BAR WBNP-64Figure 3.8B-10  Buckling-Stress Coefficient, K' S, for Unpressurized Curved Panels Subjected to Shear DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS 3.8C-1WATTS BAR WBNP- 923.8C    DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS 3.8C.1   INTRODUCTIONThis appendix presents abstracts of the computer programs employed in the design and analysis of the Watts Bar containment vessels. These abstracts explain the purpose of the program and give a brief description of the methods of analysis performed by the program.Analytical derivations are not contained herein, but are in the CB&I Stress Report.3.8C.2   PROGRAM 1017-MODAL ANALYSI S OF STRUCTURES USING THE EIGEN VALUE TECHNIQUEThe purpose of this program is three-fold:
Category I (L) Cranes                                                                                                      WATTS BAR WBNP-44 Figure 3.8.6-6 Reactor Building Units 1 & 2 175 Ton Polar Cranes Miscellaneous Details (Sheet 2) 3.8.6-18
(1)To calculate the mass and stiffness matrices associated with the structural model.(2)To determine the undamped natural periods of the model.
(3)To calculate the maximum modal responses of the structure; i.e., deflections, shears, and moments.The stiffness and mass matrices may be required in order to perform a dynamic analysis of the structure
. The maximum modal responses may be used to perform a spectral analysis.The program has the following options:
(1)Vertical translation.
(2)Torsional modes.
(3)Soil-structure interaction.
(4)Liquid sloshing.
(5)Direct introduction of stiffness and mass matrices.
3.8C.3  PROGRAM 1044-SEISMIC ANALYSIS of VESSEL APPENDAGESAppendages to a vessel may not significantly contribute structurally to the dynamic responses of a model of a vessel. However, appendages can effect the vessel locally by vibrating differently from the model of the vessel at the point of attachment.
3.8C-2DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS WATTS BARWBNP-86The response spectrum method of analysis is not a strictly adequate way of obtaining the maximum appendage accelerations since it does not include the possible consequences of near resonance between the vessel model and the appendage model.This paper describes the method used to evaluate the maximum elastic differential accelerations between an independently vibrating appendage model and an elastic beam vessel model at the appendage elevation due to known excitations of the elastic beam model.The method involves two distinct steps. Firstly, the necessary time-absolute acceleration records are computed at appendage elevations due to model excitations. Secondly, the maximum differential accelerations between each appendage model and the vessel model at the appendage elevation are obtained.The time-absolute acceleration records at the appendage elevation are computed by use of a step-by-step matrix analysis procedure. The equations of motion for the vessel model are of the form:
[M] {ü} + (AT/) [K] {u} + [K] {u} = -[M] {ü g} where[M]=Mass matrix, order n x n obtained from a modal analysis.[K]=Stiffness matrix, order n x n, obtained from a modal analysis.
A=Portion of first mode critical damping for the model T=First mode of the model
[M]=A diagonal matrix, order n x n, with diagonal elements corresponding to elements of the mass excited by translational accelerations.{ü}=n x 1 matrix of relative accelerations between the model base and the n degrees of freedom.{u}=n x 1 matrix of velocities corresponding to {ü}
{u}=n x 1 matrix of displacements corresponding to {ü}


{u g}=n x 1 matrix of translation base acceleration. n=Degrees of freedom of vessel model.By taking a small time increment (smaller than the smallest period obtained from the model analysis) and letting accelerations vary linearly within the selected increment, the equations of motion can be integrated for the quantities {u}, {u}, and {ü} over the expected time increment
Security-Related Information - Withheld Under 10CFR2.390 WATTS BAR                                                                                                                                                    WBNP-71 Figure 3.8.6-7 Auxiliary Building Units 1 & 2 125 Ton Crane Arrangement Category I (L) Cranes                                                                                                                                          3.8.6-19
[1]. The values obtained are superimposed upon the values of these quantities existing at the beginning of the time increment. This process is DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS 3.8C-3WATTS BARWBNP-79repeated for the duration of the excitation. The time-absolute acceleration records for each translational degree of freedom are the sums of {ü} and {ü g} taken throughout the history of the excitation.The second step is similar to the first step. The equation of motion (n = 1) is written for the appendage as a single degree-of-freedom elastic model using the time-absolute acceleration record obtained in Step 1 at the appendage elevation as the excitation. This equation is solved in the same manner used in Step 1. The maximum absolute value of {ü} obtained is the quantity desired. It is the maximum differential acceleration between the appendage model and the vessel model due to a known excitation of the vessel mode.For any appendage, this two-step procedure should be executed three times. This is required to evaluate normal, tangential and vertical appendage accelerations with respect to a vessel cross-section.3.8C.4  PROGRAM E1668-SPECTRAL ANALYSIS FOR ACCELERATION RECORDS DIGITIZED AT EQUAL INTERVALSProgram E1668 evaluates dynamic response spectra at various periods and presents the results on a printed plot. Given the time-acceleration record, the program numerically integrates the normal convolution time integral for various natural periods and damping ratios. The computed relative displacements, relative and pseudo-relative velocities, and absolute and pseudo-absolute accelerations are tabulated for periods from 0.025 seconds to 1 second.
3.8C.5  PROGRAM 1642-TRANSI ENT PRESSURE BEAM ANALYSISThe program was developed to perform the numerical integration required for the transient pressure beam analysis. The pressure transient curve for each compartment is read in and stored as a series of coordinates. At any time instant the total force acting at each compartment is calculated by multiplying the pressures by the corresponding areas of the shell over which they act. Each force is then distributed to the vessel model masses directly above and below. The proportion applied to each mass is based upon their respective distances from the force.For a given increment the program checks the current time, determines the current pressure in each compartment, calculates the current force on each mass and applies a recurrence formula. The deflection values, y(t) and y(t-t) are updated, the current time incremented, and the process is repeated. The values of the orthogonal deflections are stored and also printed out for a prescribed number of times, every ten increments or so, and the equivalent static forces determined. Equivalent static forces are those which produce deflections identical to the calculated kinetic deflections; they are obtained by multiplying the deflection vector by the stiffness matrix.[F] equivalent = [K] [Y]
The shears and moments at the particular time are then determined from statics:
3.8C-4DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS WATTS BARWBNP-88                        Q  =  F                        M  =  F  . moment armThe maximum moments, M =  and maximum shears, Q =  are then printed out at selected locations.
In addition the program will also print out an acceleration trace at the mass points.
3.8C.6  PROGRAM E1623-POST PROCESSOR PROG RAM FOR PROGRAM E1374Program E1623 was written specifically for the TVA Watts Bar Containment Vessels. It performs the following operations:
(1)Using Fourier data generated by Program El374 (Dynamic Shell Analysis), the summed displacements, forces and stresses found for various points around the shell circumference at each output point on the meridian.
(2)The maximum of the summed values along with the associated time and azimuth are saved for each elevation and printed out at the end of the problem.(3)The following tables are printed:
(1)Radial deflection, , at each elevation versus azimuth (2)Longitudinal force, N, at each elevation versus azimuth (3)Longitudinal moment, M, at each elevation versus azimuth (4)Circumferential force, N, at each elevation versus azimuthThe time basis for these tables is the occurrence of the minimum longitudinal force at the base.(4)Ring forces are calculated and then the maximums are pointed out.
(5)Displacement traces at several elevations can be saved on a tape or disk unit.(6)The membrane stress resultants are saved on either a tape or disk unit for input into the buckling check program.Program E1374 writes the Fourier amplitude results of the fundamental variables (, ' B , , Q, N , M, N) on a labeled tape after each timestop. Program E1623 reads this tape, interpolates to obtain the values at the output times, and calculates the remaining forces and all the stresses.The amplitudes are then summed using the following equation:
M x 2 M y 2+Q x 2 Q y 2+
DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS 3.8C-5WATTS BARWBNP-88where:where: 3.8C.7  PROGRAM E1374-SHELL DYNAMIC ANALYSIS 3.8C.7.1  IntroductionProgram E1374 is CBI's shell dynamic analysis program. Presently, it is capable of extracting eigenvalues and performing undamped transient analyses. Non-axisymmetric loads can be handled through the use of appropriate Fourier series.The equation of motion for a particular Fourier harmonic n of an undamped system iswhere:[M n] = Mass matrix
[K n] = Stiffness matrix
[P n] = Applied load f , t ,g n xt ,n  cos n 1=mh n xt ,nsin n 1=m+= waves ntial circumfere of number  maximum = m sum Fourier  = t), f(x, azimuth = harmonics sine of amplitudes
= t)(x, h harmonics cosine of amplitudes
= t)(x, g time=t coordinate meridinal =x n n M nU nK nU nP n=+
3.8C-6DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS WATTS BARWBNP-79[U n] = Displacement
= AccelerationNote that all of the above are functions of n.
In order to calculate free vibration frequencies and mode shapes the applied load is set equal to zero, [U n] is assumed to be a harmonic function of time, and the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of the resulting equation obtained.If the transient response due to a time-varying load is required, a numerical integration technique is used.Since Program E1374 is not set up to handle longitudinal stiffeners, the integration for this portion of the shell is performed using Program 781. The influence values are then converted to stiffness matrix form and stored on disc. After Program E1374 has set up the stiffness matrices for the unstiffened shell, the matrices for segments with stiffening are replaced with the Program 781 matrices from disc. The solution in Program E1374 then continues in the standard manner. This consists of assembling the overall stiffness matrix [K n] and load vector [C n], reducing to upper triangular form, and back-substituting.3.8C.8  PROGRAM E1622-LOAD GENERATION PREPROCESSOR FOR PROGRAM E1374In order to perform non-axisymmetric analyses on shells, the load must often be defined using Fourier series representation. The purpose of Program E1622 is to calculate and store on magnetic tape a time history of the Fourier pressure amplitudes.
The format of this tape is designed specifically for use with Program E1374.In order to calculate the amplitudes of the harmonics several assumptions are made in the program.
(1)A linear function in the circumferential direction is assumed between given points.(2)Only distributed loads are considered.
(3)The model consists of a cylindrical shell and optional hemispherical top head.
(4)The pressure has a block type distribution in the longitudinal direction.
(5)Any initial pressure acting on the shell can be subtracted from the input pressure histories.
(6)Amplitudes for both sine and cosine terms can be calculated with the user supplying the range of harmonics to be output.
U n DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS 3.8C-7WATTS BARWBNP-86 3.8C.9  PROGRAM E1624 SPCGEN-SPECTRAL CURVE GENERATIONProgram E1624 reads the Fourier amplitudes of the deflection transients stored on magnetic tape from the output of Program E1374. The program calculates the accelerations at uniform time intervals and evaluates the response spectra. From the deflection transient for each harmonic, the acceleration traces are computer generated using three point central difference for the first and last three time steps, and a seven point central difference elsewhere.3.8C.10  PROGRAM 781, METHOD OF MODELING VERTICAL STIFFENERSN =  No. of vertical stiffeners aroundE =  Modulus of elasticityThe shell shown in Figure 3.8C-l is modeled using 2 layers. The inside layer represents the shell and, therefore, has the normal isotropic material properties. The outer layer, on the other hand is described as an orthotropic material having the following properties.
t 2  = d E2  =  0 G2 =  0where: t 2  =  Thickness of outer layer E 2  =  Modulus of elasticity of outer layer in longitudinal direction E2  =  Modulus of elasticity of outer layer in circumferential direction.
G2 =  Shear modulus of outer layer.
3.8C.11  PROGRAM 119-CHECK of FLANGE DESIGNThis program is used for the design of bolted flanges. The program checks the flange design based on Appendix II of ASME Code, Section VIII. Bolt and flange stresses are computed for both the bolt-up and design conditions. If the bolt and gasket are not overstressed, the computer automatically calculates the required flange thickness or checks any supplied thickness. The minimum gasket width required to prevent crushing, and the maximum pressure that the flange is capable of resisting under the design conditions are automatically calculated.
3.8C.12  PROGRAM 772-NO ZZLE REINFORCEMENT CHECKThis is a program for checking nozzle reinforcing. It is designed essentially for containment vessels, and adheres to area replacement criteria specified by ASME E 2 bN 2 R----------
-E=
3.8C-8DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS WATTS BARWBNP-86Section III and VIII. The program does no design work, merely checking the adequacy of pre-selected reinforcing plate dimensions and weld sizes.
3.8C.13  PROGRAM 1027-WRC 107 ST RESS INTENSITIES AT LOADED ATTACHMENTS FOR SPHERES OR CYLINDERS WITH ROUND OR SQUARE ATTACHMENTThis program determines the stress intensities in a sphere or cylinder at a maximum of 12 points around an externally loaded round or square attachment. Stresses resulting from external loads are superimposed on an initial pressure stress situation. The program computes stresses at three levels of plate thicknesses: outside, inside, and centerline of plate. The 12 points investigated are shown in Figure 3.8C-2. Four points at the edge of attachment, at 1/2 RT from the edge of attachment and at the edge of reinforcement.The program determines 3 components for each stress intensity:
(1) X =A normal stress parallel to the vessel's longitudinal axis (2) =A normal stress in a circumferential direction (3) =A shear stressThe program has an option, whereby the influence coefficients can be calculated directly. The program uses the methodology from the "Welding Research Council Bulletin #107", of December 1968. Additionally, the program contains extrapolations of the curves for cylinders in WRC 107 for gamma up to 600. It should be noted that the use of the program requires complete familiarity with WRC 107 publication.
3.8C.14  PROGRAM 1036M-STRESS INTENSITIES IN JUMBO INSERT PLATESThis program determines the stress intensities in a "Jumbo" insert plate (a reinforcing plate with multiple penetrations) in a cylindrical vessel at 8 points around one of these penetrations due to the loading on that penetration plus the loadings on the 4 adjacent penetrations all as superimposed on an initial stress situation. It does this at three levels of plate thickness: outside, inside, and centerline of plate. The 8 points investigated are shown in Figure 3.8C-3. The 4 points on radius R are at the junction of the penetration and the insert plate. The other 4 points are other points of interest; normally, they will be at the midpoints in the clear space between penetrations or at the edge of reinforcing. Although 5 penetrations are considered, each point is analyzed as though it were only influenced by 2 (the central penetration plus the penetration on the same axis as the point concerned).The program also determines 3 components for each stress intensity:
(1) x =a normal stress parallel to the vessel's longitudinal axis (2) =a normal stress in a vessel's circumferential direction (3)  =a shear stress DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS 3.8C-9WATTS BARWBNP-86Each of these is composed of 3 subcomponents:
(1)One due to the central penetration's loading (2)One due to the loading on the next adjacent penetration (3)An initial stress component (input)The program has an option whereby the penetration loads will be considered reversible or nonreversible in direction. Under the reversible option, (see Figure 3.8C-4) only the data associated with the most severe loading situations is printed out.Most of the analysis and notation used in the program is taken directly from the "Welding Research Council Bulletin #107" of December 1968. Use of the program requires complete familiarity with this publication.The analysis in WRC 107 is for a single penetration. This program analyzes the several penetrations individually, using WRC 107 techniques verbatim, and then through superposition obtains the composite results. The adjacent penetrations must be on a cardinal line of the central penetration in order to use WRC 107 methods. This has required a very conservative extension of the WRC 107 analysis. WRC 107 analysis applies only to the points on the penetration to shell juncture. This program makes stress determinations at points removed from the junction by fictitiously extending the radius of any penetration to any point at which a stress determination is desired. This disregards the statement in WRC 107 that "these stresses attenuate very rapidly at points removed from the penetration to shell juncture". Furthermore, in some cases, the moment induced stresses at both the juncture and at points removed from the juncture are increased by 20% per discussion in WRC 107. Figure 3.8C-5 shows the cases for the 20% increase and indicates the thickness used for the calculation of the parameters (per WRC 107) and stresses.The program contains extrapolations of the curves in WRC 107 for T up to 600. The program is limited to the domains and range of Figures 1A through 4C in WRC 107 (0
<  < 0.5 and 5 <
T <600).REFERENCE (1)Wilson & Clough, Dynamic Response by Step-By-Step Matrix Analysis 3.8C-10DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS WATTS BARWBNP-86THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS3.8C-11WATTS BAR WBNP-86Figure 3.8C-1  Vertical Stiffener Model


3.8C-12DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMSWATTS BAR WBNP-64Figure 3.8C-2  Points of Stress Calculation DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS3.8C-13WATTS BAR WBNP-64Figure 3.8C-3  Jumbo Insert Plant Points of Stress Intensities 3.8C-14DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMSWATTS BAR WBNP-64Figure 3.8C-4  Determination of Loads on Center Penetration Associated with MaximumStress Intensity DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS3.8C-15WATTS BAR WBNP-64Figure 3.8C-5  Penetration Analysis 3.8C-16DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMSWATTS BAR WBNP-64 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 3.8D-1WATTS BARWBNP-79 3.8D    COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSISComputer programs used for structural analysis and design have been validated by one of the following criteria or procedures: (a)The following computer programs are recognized programs in the public domain:
Category I (L) Cranes                                                                                    WATTS BAR Figure 3.8.6-8 Auxiliary Building Units 1 & 2 125 Ton Crane Trolley Arrangement WBNP-89 3.8.6-20
ProgramUsage StartDate:YearHardwareSourceAMG0321965IBMR&HAMGO331965IBMR&HAMGO341965IBMR&H ANSYS1972CDCCDCASHSD1969IBMUCBBASEPLATE II1982CDCCDC GENDHK 31969IBMUCBGENSHL 21969IBMFIRLGENSHL 51968IBMFIRL GTSTRUDL1979CDCGTNASTRAN (MSC)1974CDCCDCSAP IV1973CDCUCB SAP IV1974IBMUSCSDRC FRAME1977CDCSDRC  PACKAGE SAGS/DAGSSPSTRESS1977CDCCDCSTARDYNE1977CDCCDC STRESS1970EGCDCSTRUDL (V2 M2)1972IBMICESSTRUDL (Rel. 2.6)1974IBM MCAUTO (Dynal)STRUDL (Rel. 4.0)1975IBM MCAUTOSTRUPAK PACKAGE1971CDCTRW  MAP2DF/SAP2DFSUPERB1977CDCCDC WELDDA1983CDCCDCWERCO1978CDCAAA 3.8D-2COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS WATTS BARWBNP-86All programs on IBM hardware are run under the MVS operating system, on either a 370/165 machine or a 360150 machine. All programs on CDC hardware are run under the SCOPE 3.3 operating system on a 6600 machine.The following abbreviations are used for program sources:
CDC - Control Data Cor poration, Minneapolis, MIFIRL - Franklin Institute Research Labs, Philadelphia, PA GT - Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, GA ICES - Integrated Civil Engineering System, Worcester, MA MCAUTO - McDonnell-Douglas Automation Company, St. Louis, MOR&H - Rohm & Haas Company, Huntsville, ALSDRC - Structural Dynamics Research Corporation, Cincinnati, OHTRW - TRW Systems Group, Redondo, CA UCB - University of California, Berkely, CA USC - University of Southern California, Los Angeles, CA


AAA - AAA Technology and Specialt ies Co., Inc., Houston, TX (b)The following programs have been validated by comparison with a program in the public domain:RESPONSE FOR EARTHQUAKE AVER AGING SPECTRAL RESPONSE Summary comparisons of results for these computer programs are provided in Figures 3.8D-l and 3.8D-2.
Category I (L) Cranes                                                                                WATTS BAR Figure 3.8.6-9 Auxiliary Building Units 1 & 2 125 Ton Crane Trolley Details WBNP-89 3.8.6-21
COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 3.8D-3WATTS BARWBNP-86 (c)The following programs have been validated by comparison with hand calculations:
BIAXIAL BENDING - USD CONCRETE STRESS ANALYSIS


DL42 PLTDL42 THERMCYL TORSIONAL DYNANAL
Category I (L) Cranes                                                                                WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Figure 3.8.6-10 Auxiliary Building Units 1 & 2 125 Ton Crane Bridge Details 3.8.6-22


PNA100 The following programs have been validated by comparison with analytical results published in the technical literature:
Category I (L) Cranes                                                                                WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Figure 3.8.6-11 125 Ton Crane Limit Switch and Mechanical Stop Arrangement 3.8.6-23
BAP222 DYNANAL ROCKING DYNANAL Summary comparison of results for these computer programs are provided in Tables 3.8D-l through 3.8D-10.
3.8D-4COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS WATTS BARWBNP-86Comparison of hand calculations with BIAXIAL BENDING - USD for the moment capacities of a reinforced concrete section for a given direct load.Table 3.8D-1 BIAXIAL BENDING - USDMoment Capacity(FT-KIPS)MXMYHandCalculationsProgram HandCalculationsProgram  0  0409408601603287285 850850164165911909 77 76933932  0  0 COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 3.8D-5WATTS BARWBNP-86Comparison of hand calculations with CONCRETE STRESS ANALYS IS for reinforced concrete beam with 9 rows of steel, subject to combined load of moment and axial force.Table 3.8D-2 Concrete Stress AnalysisConcrete Compression Stress(psi)Hand Calculations Program436.436.Row No.Steel Tensile Stress(psi)HandCalculationsProgram1-3833-3830 2-2238-2234 3- 644- 639 4  950 957 5 2417 2419 6 3884 3881 7 5478 5477 8 6275 6275 91105311053 3.8D-6COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS WATTS BARWBNP-86Table 3.8D-3 Thermcyl DeadLoad(psi)Maximum ConcreteCompression Stress(psi)SteelTensile Stress(psi)HandCalculationsProgramHandCalculationsProgram  0 770.8 770.912,948.12,950. 10 848.8 848.312,285.12,290. 1001313. 1316. 8,336. 8,311.10002795. 2793. -5,010.-4,990.
COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 3.8D-7WATTS BARWBNP-79Comparison of hand calculations with TORSIONAL DYNANAL results for torsional modes of vibration of a thin-walled steel half-tube.
Table 3.8D-4 Torsional DynanalPure Torsion Modal FrequenciesMode No.Frequency (RAD./SEC.)Hand CalculationsProgram128102814 284308430 3.8D-8COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS WATTS BARWBNP-79Comparison of DYNANAL with analytical procedure presented in Engineering Vibrations, L. S. Jacobsen and R. S. Ayre, McGraw-Hill, 1958, Chapter 10, Modal Analysis of 200 Ft. shear-wall building including effects of flexural and shear deformations.Table 3.8D-5 DYNANALModal Periods IncludingEffects of Flexural and Shear DeformationsMode No.Period (SEC)PublishedResultsProgram11.481.502.425.430 3.216.222 4.149.157 5.114.124 COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 3.8D-9WATTS BARWBNP-79Comparison of ROCKING DYNANAL with Analytical Procedure presented in "Earthquake Stresses in Shear Buildings," M. G. Salvadori, ASCE Transactions, 1953, Paper No. 2666. Modal analysis of lumped-mass shear beam including effects of base rocking.Table 3.8D-6 Rocking DynanalModal Frequencies ofLumped-Mass Shear BeamIncluding effects of Base RockingModeNo.Frequency (RAD./SEC.)PublishedResults Program15.1555.339220.5219.226 3.8D-10COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS WATTS BARWBNP-79Table 3.8D-7 BAP222Comparison of BAP222 with analyt ical procedure presented in A Simple Analysis for Eccentrically Loaded Concrete Sections,L. G. Parker and J. J. Scanion, Civil Engineering, October 1940 PublishedResults ProgramPressure bulb geometry, Z4Pressure bulb geometry, Z5 Pressure bulb geometry, Z7 Concrete pressure force Anchor load 1 Anchor load 2 Anchor load 3 Anchor load 4 12 (in.)  6.41 (in.)  3.67 (in.)-14.08 (k)- 1.715 (k)  5.34 (k) -3.22 (k)  3.665 (k)12 (in.)    6.41 (in.)  3.36 (in.)-14.48 (k)- 1.65 (k) 5.4 (k) -3.44 (k)  3.61 (k)
COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 3.8D-11WATTS BARWBNP-79Table 3.8D-8 DL42Comparison of hand calculations with DL42 for the design of a baseplate resisting a given load.
HandCalculationsProgram Safety factor (0.5 SSE)
Safety factor (SSE)
Maximum plate moment Effective section modulus Minimum plate thickness  3.232  3.878 10.535 (k-in)  1.261 (in.)  0.417 (in.)          3.234          3.881        10.526          1.261          0.417 3.8D-12COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS WATTS BARWBNP-79Table 3.8D-9 PLTDL42Comparison of hand calculations with PLTDL42 for the design of a baseplate resisting a given load.
HandCalculationsProgram Safety factor (0.5 SSE)
Safety factor (SSE)
Maximum plate moment Effective section modulus Minimum plate thickness Plate bending stress  3.232  3.878 10.535 (k-in)  1.261 (in.)  0.417 (in.)  8.355 (k/in)    3.234    3.881    10.526    1.261    0.417    8.348 COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 3.8D-13WATTS BARWBNP-79 Added by Amendment 51Table 3.8D-10 PNA 100 Nozzle Stresses (PEN X-57) Next to ShellCase Calc.ModeABCD1Program11,03916,58811,22416,495Hand11,03616,58411,22116,4914Program13,07419,19212,41717,974Hand13,07019,18712,41217,968AWAY FROM SHELLCase Calc.ModeABCD1Program10,35810,09510,57110,330Hand10,35410,09010,56710,3274Program12,94412,62112,19611,915Hand12,93912,61612,19011,908 3.8D-14COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS WATTS BARWBNP-79THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS3.8D-15WATTS BAR WBNP-51Figure 3.8D-1  Response for Earthquake Averaging


3.8D-16COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSISWATTS BAR WBNP-51Figure 3.8D-2  Spectral Response CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OFEXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURESAND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979 WATTS BARWBNP-89 3.8E-1 3.8E    CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 19793.8E.1  Application Codes and Standards (a)American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318-77, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" (b)American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), "Specification for the Design Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings," 7th edition adopted February 12, 1969, as amended through June 12, 1974 or later editions, except welded construction is in accordance with Item d below.(c)American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards (d)American Welding Society (AWS) Structural Welding Code, AWS D1.1-72, with Revisions 1-73 and 2-74 except later editions may be used for prequalified joint details, base materials, and qualification of welding procedures and welders.Visual inspection of structural welds will meet the minimum requirements of Nuclear Construction Issues Group documents NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 as specified on the design drawings or other engineering design output (See Section 3.8.4.1.1, Item 18). (e)National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 13 (f)National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 14 (g)National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 15 (h)National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 24 (i)National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 30 (j)American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sections III, VIII, and IX (k)American Nuclear Standard Institute (ANSI) B31.1, "Power Piping" (l)AWS D1.1-81, "Structural Welding Code" (m)AISC-ANSI-N690-1984 "Nuclear Facilities Steel Safety-Related Structures for Design, Fabrication and Erection" 3.8E.2  Load DefinitionsThe following terms are used in the load combination equations for structures.
WATTS BAR                                           WBNP-89 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK Category I (L) Cranes                                3.8.6-24
3.8E-2WATTS BARWBNP-89CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION ANDEVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDEDTO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979Normal loads, which are those loads to be encountered during normal plant operation and shutdown, include:D - Lead loads or their related internal moments and forces including any permanent equipment loads; all hydrostatic loads; and earth loads applied to horizontal surfaces.L - Live loads or their related internal moments and forces including any movable equipment loads and other loads which vary with intensity and occurrence, such as lateral soil pressure.
T o - Thermal effects and loads during normal operating or shutdown conditions, based on the most critical transient or steady-state condition.
R o - Pipe reactions during normal operating or shutdown conditions, based on the most critical transient or steady-state condition.Severe environmental loads include:
E - Loads generated by the operating basis earthquake (OBE). The term "operating basis earthquake" has the same meaning as "one-half safe shutdown earthquake."W - Load generated by the design wind specified for the plant.
Extreme environmental loads include:


E' - Load generated by the safe shutdown earthqua ke (SSE). The term "safe shutdown earthquake" has the same meaning as the term "design basis earthquake" (DBE).
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-92 3.8ASHELL TEMPERATURE TRANSIENTS Figure 3.8A-1 presents average shell temperatures adjacent to the three compartments as a function of time after the DBA. The DBA is a double end rupture of the reactor coolant pipe with the reactor decay heat released into the lower compartment as steam. Initially the steam is condensed in the ice compartment. After the ice melts, the steam is condensed in the upper compartment by a water spray.
W t - Loads generated by the design tornado specified for the plant. Tornado loads include loads due to the tornado wind pressure, the tornado-created differential pressure, and to tornado-generated missiles.Abnormal loads, which are those loads generated by a postulated high-energy pipe break accident, include:
The lower compartment temperature rises to 250&deg;F, essentially instantaneously, then is reduced to 220&deg;F very shortly after the blowdown is completed. The blowdown is completed before the shell adjacent to the lower compartment reaches 220&deg;F, as illustrated by the smooth curve presented in Figure 3.8A-1.
P a - Pressure equivalent static load within or across a compartment generated by the postulated break, and including an appropriate dynamic load factor to account for the dynamic nature of the load.
The upper compartment temperature rises essentially instantaneously due to compression of the noncondensable gases into the upper compartment. The sharp rise at 7,000 seconds simulates the disappearance of the ice from the ice compartment. The shell temperature will rise at a maximum of 0.11 degree per second during the rise from 140&deg;F to 190&deg;F. The subsequent temperature decrease of the shell adjacent to the upper compartment is due to the reduction in decay heat.
T a -Thermal loads under thermal conditions generated by the postulated break and  includingT
The curve labeled shell adjacent to the ice compartment indicates the temperature of the shell adjacent to the ice compartment. The shell is separated from the ice compartment with a thick layer of insulation, hence the rather slow response for the temperature of the shell adjacent to the ice compartment. After the ice is all melted the temperature inside the ice compartment will be the same as the temperature in the lower compartment; however, the shell temperature adjacent to the ice compartment will always be less than the temperature in the ice compartment because of insulation.
: o. R a -Pipe reactions under thermal conditions generated by the postulated break and  including R
The temperature of the shell adjacent to the ice compartment will peak at less than 220&deg;F.
: o.
The curves in Figure 3.8A-1 are an average shell temperature representative for the bulk of the shell. Some areas near boundaries between compartments and near the base will differ significantly from the bulk. The lower portion of the lower compartment shell will be insulated for the purpose of minimizing the transient effects. Figure 3.8A-2 is a plot of shell temperature versus distance above Elevation 702.78 for various times after a LOCA. In establishing these curves it was assumed that top of the concrete slab is at Elevation 702.78 inches, and that the top of the insulation is at Elevation 707.11, and the top 8 inches of insulation is tapered from 2 inches thick to 1/4-inch thick.
CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OFEXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURESAND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979 WATTS BARWBNP-89 3.8E-3 Y r - Equivalent static load on the structure generated by the reaction on the broken high-energy pipe during the postulated break, and including an appropriate dynamic load factor to account for the dynamic nature of the load.Y j - Jet impingement equivalent static load on a structure generated by the postulated break, and including an appropriate dynamic load factor to account for the dynamic nature of the load.
SHELL TEMPERATURE TRANSIENTS                                                                    3.8A-1
Y m - Missile impact equivalent static load on a structure generated by or during the postulated break, as from pipe whipping, and including an appropriate dynamic load factor to account for the dynamic nature of the load.In determining an appropriate equivalent static load for Y r , Y j , and Y m , elasto-plastic behavior may be assumed with appropriate ductility ratios, provided excessive deflections will not result in loss of function of any safety-related system.
Other loads:
C - Construction live loads F' - Hydrostatic load from the probable maximum flood


F a - Flood load generated by a postulated pipe break Concrete capacity:
WATTS BAR                                              WBNP-92 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 3.8A-2                             SHELL TEMPERATURE TRANSIENTS
U - Concrete section strength required to resist design loads based on the strength design methods described in ACI 318-77.
3.8E.3  Load Combinations - Concrete For service load conditions, the strength design method is used, and the following load combinations are considered.
(1)U = 1.4 D + 1.7 L (2)U = 1.4 D + 1.7 L + 1.9 E (3)U = 1.4 D + 1.7 L + 1.7 W 3.8E-4WATTS BARWBNP-88CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION ANDEVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDEDTO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979If thermal stressses due to T o and R o are present, the following combinations are also considered.
(1a)U = (0.75) (1.4 D + 1.7 L + 1.7 T o + 1.7 R o)(2a)U = (0.75) (1.4 D + 1.7 L + 1.9 E + 1.7 T o + 1.7 R o)(3a)U = (0.75) (1.4 D + 1.7 L + 1.7 W + 1.7 T o + 1.7 R o)Both cases of L having its full value or being completely absent are checked. In addition, the following combinations are considered:
(2a')U = 1.2 D + 1.9 E (3a')U = 1.2 D + 1.7 W (b)For factored load conditions, which represent extreme environmental, abnormal, abnormal/severe environmental and abnormal/extreme environmental conditions, the strength design method is used; and the following load combinations are considered:
(4)U = D + L + T o + R o + E'(5)U = D + L + T o + R o + W t (6)U = D + L + T a + R a + 1.5 P a (7)U = D + L + T a + R a + 1.25 P a + 1.0 (Y r + Y j + Y m) + 1.25 E (8)U = D + L + T a + R a + 1.0 P a + 1.0 (Y r + Y j + Y m) + 1.0 E'For the Additional Diesel Generator Building and structures initiated after July 1979, the three individual tornado-generated loads are combined as follows:
W t = W w W t = W p W t = W m W t = W w + 0.5W p W t = W w + W m W t = W w + 0.5 W p + W m where: W t is the total tornado load, W w is the tornado wind load, W p is the tornado-generated pressure differential load, and W m is the tornado missile load.
CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OFEXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURESAND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979 WATTS BARWBNP-86 3.8E-5In combinations (6), (7), and (8), the maximum values of P a , T a , R a , Y j , Y r, and Y m , including an appropriate dynamic load factor, is used unless a time-history analysis is performed to justify otherwise. Combinations (5), (7), and (8), are satisfied first without the tornado missile load in (5) and without Y r , Y j, and Y m in (7) and (8). When considering these concentrated loads, local section strength capacities may be exceeded provided there is no loss of function of any safety-related system.(c)Other load conditions:
(9)U = 1.4 D + 1.4 C (10)U = D + L + F' (11)U = D + F a3.8E.4  Load Combinations - Structural Steel (a)For service load conditions, the elastic working stress design methods of Part 1 of the AISC specifications is used and the following load combinations are considered.Allowable StressLoad Combinations(1)AISC Allowable*D + L (2)AISC Allowable*D + L + E (3)AISC Allowable*D + L + W
*See Table 3.8E-1 for limiting values If thermal stresses due to T o and R o are present, the following combinations are also considered:Allowable Stress Load Combinations (1a) 1.5 x AISC Allowable*D + L + T o + R o(2a) 1.5 x AISC Allowable*D + L + T o + R o + E(3a) 1.5 x AISC Allowable*D + L + T o + R o + W* The allowable stress shall be limited to the values given in Table 3.8E-1.
Both cases of L having its full value or being completely absent, are checked.(b)For factored load conditions, the following load combinations are considered.
3.8E-6WATTS BARWBNP-88CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION ANDEVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDEDTO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979Allowable StressLoad Combinations(4)1.6 x AISC Allowable* D + L + T o + R o + E'(5)1.6 X AISC Allowable*D + L + T o + R o + W t(6)1.6 x AISC Allowable*D + L + T a + R a + P a(7)1.6 x AISC Allowable*D + L + T a + R a + P a+ 1.0 (Y j + Y r + Y m)+ EAllowable StressLoad Combinations(8)1.7 x AISC Allowable*D + L + T a + R a + P a+ 1.0 (Y j + Y r +Y m) + E'(9)1.6 x AISC Allowable*D + F a(10)Table 3.8E-1 Limiting StressD + L + E' (11)Table 3.8E-1 Limiting StressD + L + W t* If thermal loads are not present, the allowable stress shall be limited to the values given in Table 3.8E-1.Evaluations of miscellaneous and structural steel designed prior to July 1979, may be performed using load combinations (2), (10), and (11) unless other specific loads of a significant nature exist, in which case, the appropriate load combinations of Section 3.8E.4 must be considered. The design of modifications must meet the load combinations in Section 3.8E.4.Thermal analyses using linear elastic methods are performed for restrained Category I structures located in high temperature environments.In combinations (6), (7), and (8), the maximum values of P a , R a , T a , Y j , Y r, and Y m , including an appropriate dynamic load factor, was used unless a time-history analysis was performed to justify otherwise. Combinations (5), (7), and (8) were first satisfied without the tornado missile load in (5) and without Y r , Y j, and Y m in (7) and (8).
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-1WATTS BARWBNP-793.9  MECHANICAL SYST EMS AND COMPONENTS3.9.1  General Topic for Analysis of Seismic Category I ASME Code and Non-Code Items3.9.1.1  Design TransientsTransients used in the design and fatigue analysis for Westinghouse supplied ASME Code Class 1 components and CS components are discussed and presented in Section 5.2.1.5. Specifically, the transients are identified for Class 1 components in Tables 5.2-2 and 5.2-3. The transients used in the design and analysis of CS components are identified in Table 5.2-2.3.9.1.2  Computer Programs Used in Analysis and Design 3.9.1.2.1  Other Than NSSS Systems, Components, Equipm ent, and Supports (1)The following computer programs are used in piping analyses: (a)TPIPE Program - TPIPE is a special purpose computer program capable of performing static and dynamic linear elastic analyses of power-related piping systems. The dynamic analysis option includes:  (1) frequency extraction, (2) response spectrum, (3) time history modal superposition, and (4) time history direct integration methods.In addition to these basic analysis capabilities, the program can perform an ASME Section III, Class 1, 2, or 3 stress evaluation and perform thermal transient heat analysis to provide the linear thermal gradient, T1, nonlinear thermal gradient, T2, and gross discontinuity expansion difference, a T a - b T b, required for a Class 1 stress evaluation.This program is owned and maintained by TVA. It has been fully verified and documented and was compared with PISOL, SAP IV, PIPSD, STARDYNE, and SUPERPIPE with excellent correlation. These programs are well recognized and utilized throughout the industry. (b)Post Processors - The post processors are used in performing the stress evaluations and support load calculations made in the analysis of piping systems. The programs use moment, force, and deflection data generated by TPIPE. A stress evaluation is made for each joint on the analysis model.
The appropriate stress intensifications/stress indices according to the ASME Section III code are utilized in evaluating stresses for the Normal, Upset, Emergency, and Faulted Conditions. Pipe rupture limits and active valve limits are also evaluated. The allowed stress


3.9-2MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79difference for pipe lug attachments and the lug load is calculated for each load condition.Support and anchor design loads are calculated for each support to meet the requirements given in Section 3.9.3.4.2.(c)The following computer programs are also used for piping analysis:
WATTS BAR SHELL TEMPERATURE TRANSIENTS Figure 3.8A-1 Shell Wall Temperature Versus Time After Loss of Coolant WBNP-79 3.8A-3
(2)The following computer programs are used in support design and equipment/component analysis.ProgramSourceProgram DescriptionME-101BECHTELLinear elastic analysis of piping systems - Bechtel Western Power CorpSan Francisco, CA.ANSYSSWANSONGeneral purpose finite element program - Swanson Analysis Systems, Inc. Houston, PA.ACRONYMPROGRAM DESCRIPTIONFAPPS (ME150)Frame Analysis For Pipe SupportsSMAPPS (ME152)Standard Frame Analysis For Small Bore Pipe SupportsMAPPS (ME153)Miscellaneous Applications For Pipe SupportsIAPIntegral Welded Attachments CONANAllowable Tensile Load For Anchor Bolt Group With Shear Cone OverlapBASEPLATE IIFinite Element Analysis Of Base Plates And Anchor BoltsGT STRUDLStructural Analysis ProgramCASDTVA Computer Aided Support Design Program SUPERSAPStructural Finite Element Analysis ProgramANSYSStructural Finite Element Analysis ProgramSTARDYNEStructural Analysis Program


MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-3WATTS BARWBNP-79 3.9.1.2.2  Programs Used for Category I Components of NSSSComputer programs that Westinghouse uses in analysis to determine structural and functional integrity of Seismic Category I systems, components, equipment and supports are presented in WCAP-8252, Revision 1
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-79 Figure 3.8A-2 Typical Temperature Transient Lower Compartment Wall 3.8A-4                                                                       SHELL TEMPERATURE TRANSIENTS
[1] and WCAP-8929 [10].3.9.1.3  Experiment al Stress AnalysisNo experimental stress analysis was used per se, for the reactor internals. However, Westinghouse makes extensive use of measured results from prototype plants and various scale model tests as discussed in the following Sections 3.9.2.4, 3.9.2.5, and 3.9.2.6.3.9.1.4  Consideration for the E valuation of the Faulted Condition3.9.1.4.1  Subsystems and Components Analyzed by WestinghouseThe analytical methods used to evaluate stresses for ASME Class 1 systems and components are presented in Section 5.2.1.10. The results of the analyses are documented in the stress reports that describe the system or component.For reactor internals the faulted condition was evaluated based on a non-linear elastic system analysis and conforms to the requirements of Appendix F of the ASME Code Section III. Analytical methods are described in Section 3.9.2.5.3.9.1.4.2  Subsystems and Components Analyzed by TVA (1)Piping Systems - The methods employed in the analysis of ASME Class 1 and Class 2/3 piping systems are elastic analytical methods as described by the equations of Sections NB-3600 and NC-3600 of the ASME Code.The faulted condition stress limits specified for Class 1 and Class 2/3 systems are in compliance with the elastic method limits set forth in Appendix F subsection F-1360 of the ASME Section III Code.
(2)Piping System Supports - The methods employed in the analysis of ASME Code Classes 1, 2, and 3 piping system supports are as follows: (a)Linear Type - Elastic methods as described by Part I of the AISC, "Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings," February 12, 1969.  (Supplements 1, 2, & 3)*(b)Standard Components - Elastic or load-rated methods as described by Manufacturers' Standardization Society (MSS) SP-58, 1967 edition, "Pipe Hangers and Supports."The faulted condition stress limits for Class 1, 2, and 3 pipe supports are specified in Section 3.9.3.4.2. For linear supports these faulted condition limits meet the intent and requirements of the elastic method limits set forth in Appendix F, subsection F-1320 or F-1370, of the 3.9-4MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-86ASME Section III Code. See Section 3.9.3.4.2. For standard components, the allowable stresses or load ratings of MSS-SP-58 are based on a factor of safety of five based on normal operating conditions. Upset, emergency, faulted, and test conditions were evaluated using Table 3.9-21. This low allowable stress is adequate to assure that active components are properly supported for faulted conditions.*Later edition of the AISC code may be utilized when design safety is not compromised.
(3)Mechanical EquipmentNo plastic instability allowable limits given in ASME Section III have been used when dynamic analysis is performed. The limit analysis methods have the limits established by ASME Section III for Normal, Upset and Emergency Conditions. For these cases, the limits are sufficiently low to assure that the elastic system analysis is not invalidated. For ASME Code Class 1 mechanical equipment, the stress limits for faulted loading conditions are specified in Sections 3.9.3.1.2 and 5.2. For ASME Code Class 2 and 3 mechanical equipment the stress limits for faulted loading conditions are specified in Section 3.9.3.1.2. These faulted condition limits are established in such a manner that there is equivalence with the adopted elastic system analysis. Particular cases of concern are checked by readjusting the elastic system analysis.
(4)Mechanical Equipment SupportsThe stress limits for the faulted loading condition of mechanical equipment supports are given in Section 3.9.3.4.1 of Westinghouse's scope of supply, and Section 3.9.3.4.2 for TVA's scope of supply.
3.9.2  Dynamic Te sting and Analysis3.9.2.1  Preoperational Vibration a nd Dynamic Effects Testing on PipingASME Code Section III, Subparagraph NB-3622.3, "Vibration," requires that vibration effects in piping systems shall be visually observed and where questionable shall be measured and corrected as necessary. The preoperational piping dynamic effects test program at this plant is as follows: (a)The dynamic (steady state and transient) behavior of safety related piping systems designated as ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 is observed during the preoperational testing program. Sample and instrument lines beyond the root valves are normally not included. Also included MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-5WATTS BARWBNP-88in the program are those portions of ANSI B31.1 piping which has a potential to exhibit excessive vibrations.(b)Preoperational tests involving critical piping systems will be in compliance with Regulatory Guide 1.68, "Preoperational and Initial Startup Test Programs for Water-Cooled Power Reactors." (c)For the piping systems discussed in Item a., visual observation of the piping will be performed by trained personnel during predetermined, steady-state and transient modes of operation. The maximum point(s) of representative vibration, as determined by the visual observation, will be instrumented and measurement will be taken to determine actual magnitudes, if it is judged to be excessive.(d)The allowable criteria for measurements shall be either a maximum half-amplitude displacement or velocity value based on an endurance limit stress as defi ned in the ASME B&PV Code (refer to Section 3.7.3.8.1).(e)Should the measured magnitudes actually exceed the allowable, corrective measures will be performed for the piping system. Any new restraints, as required by corrective measures, will be incorporated into the piping system analysis.(f)The flow mode which produced the excessive vibrations will be repeated to assure that vibrations have been reduced to an acceptable level.(g)The flow modes to which the system components will be subjected are defined, in general terms, in the preoperational test program.(h)Vibration measurements will also be taken on the vital pumps at baseline and on a periodic basis so that excessive vibration can be corrected early in the program and/or detected if it gradually becomes a problem.(i)Vibrations of the affected portions of the main steam system during MS isolation valve trip will be tested and the results will be evaluated.(j)Thermal expansion tests will be conducted on the following piping systems: Reactor Coolant System Main SteamSteam Supply to Auxiliary Feedwater Pump TurbineMain Feedwater Pressurizer Relief LineRHR in Shutdown Cooling ModeSteam Generator Blowdown 3.9-6MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79Safety Injection System (those lines adjoining RCS which experience temperature > 200F)Auxiliary FeedwaterCVCS (Charging line from Regen. Hx to RCS, Letdown Line from RCS to Letdown Hx)During the thermal expansion test, pipe deflections will be measured or observed at various locations based on the location of snubbers and hangers and expected large displacement. One complete thermal cycle (i.e., cold position to hot position to cold position ) will be monitored. For most systems, the thermal expansion will be monitored at cold conditions and at normal operating temperature. Intermediate temperatures are generally not practical due to the short time during which the normal operating temperature is reached. For the reactor coolant system and the main steam system, measurements will be made at cold, 250
&deg;F, 350&deg;F, 450&deg;F and normal operating temperatures.Acceptance criteria for the thermal expansion test verify that the piping system is free to expand thermally (i.e., piping does not bind or lock at spring hangers and snubbers nor interfere with structures or other piping), and to confirm that piping displacements do not exceed design limits, as described by ASME Section III (i.e., the induced stresses do not exceed the sum of the basic material allowable stress at design temperature and the allowable stress range for expansion stresses).If thermal motion is not as predicted, the support system will be examined to verify correct function or to locate points of binding of restraints. If binding is found, the restraints will be adjusted to eliminate the unacceptable condition or reanalyzed to verify that the existing condition is acceptable.
3.9.2.2 Seismic Qualification Testing of Safety-Relat ed Mechanical EquipmentDesign of Category I mechanical equipment to withstand seismic, accident, and operational vibratory loadings is provided either by analysis or dynamic testing.Generally tests are run with either of the following two objectives:
(1)To obtain information on parts or systems necessary to perform the required analysis, or (2)To prove the design (stress or operability) adequacy of a given equipment or structure without performing any analysis of this particular equipment or structure.The need for the first type of tests is dictated by lack of information on some of the inputs vital to the performance of an analysis. These tests can be either static (to obtain spring constants) or dynamic (to obtain impedance characteristics).
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-7WATTS BARWBNP-79The need for the second type of test is mainly dictated by the complexity of the structure/equipment under design. This vibration testing is usually performed in a laboratory or shop on a prototype basis, using various sources of energy.For general seismic qualification requirements for mechanical and electrical equipment, see Section 3.7.3.16.Laboratory vibration testing can be conducted by employing various forms of shakers, the variation depending on the source of the driving force. Generally, the primary source of motion may be electromagnetic, mechanical, or hydraulic-pneumatic. Each is subject to inherent limitations which usually dictate the choice.To properly simulate the seismic disturbance, the waveform must be carefully defined. The waveform seen by a given piece of equipment depends on:
(1)The earthquake motion specified for a given site.
(2)The soil-structure interaction.
(3)The building in which the component is housed.
(4)The floor on which the equipment is located.
(5)The support and attachments to the equipment. Components located on rocks or on stiff lower floors of buildings founded on rock are subjected to random-type vibrations. Components located on the upper floors of flexible buildings, in flexible subsystems, or in buildings on soft foundations are roughly subjected to sine beats with a frequency close to fundamental frequency of the building or subsystem.In cases where random vibration inputs are used, extreme care is paid to the selection of random forcing functions having frequency content and energy conservatively approaching those of the ground or buildings motion caused by the specified earthquake(s).The most common and readily available vibration testing facilities could only carry simple harmonic motion. By analytical comparison with time history response obtained with a number of real earthquake motions, it has been found that these time histories can be approximately simulated with wave forms having the shape of sine beats with 5 or 10 cycles per beat, a frequency equal to the component natural frequencies, and maximum amplitude equal to the maximum seismic acceleration to which the component needs to be qualified. For equipment located on building floors, the maximum seismic input acceleration is the maximum floor acceleration. This is obtained from the dynamic analysis of the building or from the appropriate floor response spectrum at the zero period of the equipment.The above procedure adheres closely to the IEEE 344-1971 "IEEE Guide for Seismic Qualification of Class 1 Electric Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations."
3.9-8MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79This standard was specified for equipment for the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant contracted for up to September 1, 1974. New contracts after this date specified IEEE 344-1975 "IEEE Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations." The first test to the IEEE 344-1975 was run in March 1974 on 6.9 kV switch gear. On local panels, test qualification to both standards was used because some instruments and controls mounted there on were procured to each version. This one test revealed that the 1971 version of IEEE 344 was the more severe.As an example, seismic qualification and the demonstration of operability of active Class 2 and 3 pumps, active Class 1, 2, or 3 valves, and their respective drives, operators and vital auxiliary equipment is shown by satisfying the criteria given in Section 3.9.3.2. Other active mechanical equipment will be shown operable by either testing, analysis or a combination of testing and analysis. The operability programs implemented on this other active equipment will be similar to the program described in Section 3.9.3.2 for pumps and valves. Testing procedures similar to the procedures outlined in Section 3.10 for electrical equipment will be used to demonstrate operability if the component is mechanically or structurally complex such that its response cannot be adequately predicted analytically. Analysis may be used if the equipment is amenable to modeling and dynamic analysis.Inactive Seismic Category I equipment will be shown to have structural integrity during all plant conditions in one of the following manners: 1) by analysis satisfying the stress criteria applicable to the particular piece of equipment, or 2) by test showing that the equipment retains its structural integrity under the simulated seismic environment.A list of Category I mechanical equipment and the original method of qualification is provided in the Table 3.7-25.
3.9.2.3  Dynamic Response An alysis of Reactor Internal s Under Operational Flow Transients and St eady-State ConditionsThe vibration characteristics and behavior due to flow induced excitation are very complex and not readily ascertained by analytical means alone. Reactor components are excited by the flowing coolant which causes oscillatory pressures on the surfaces. The integration of these pressures over the applied area should provide the forcing functions to be used in the dynamic analysis of the structures. In view of the complexity of the geometries and the random character of the pressure oscillations, a closed form solution of the vibratory problem by integration of the differential equation of motion is not always practical and realistic. Therefore, the determination of the forcing functions as a direct correlation of pressure oscillations can not be practically performed independently of the dynamic characteristics of the structure. The main objective, then, is to establish the characteristics of the forcing functions that essentially determine the response of the structures. By studying the dynamic properties of the structure from previous analytical and experimental work, the characteristics of the forcing function can be deduced. These studies indicate that the most important forcing functions are flow turbulence, and pump-related excitation. The relevance of such excitations depends on many factors such as type and location of component and flow conditions.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-9WATTS BARWBNP-79The effects of these forcing functions have been studied from test runs on models, prototype plants and in component tests [2,4,5].The Indian Point Unit 2 plant has been established as the prototype for four-loop plant internals verification program and was fully instrumented and tested during initial startup [4]. In addition, the Sequoyah Unit 1 and Trojan Nuclear Plants have also been instrumented to provide prototype data applicable to Watts Bar
[5].Although the Watts Bar plant is similar to Indian Point Unit 2, significant differences are the modifications resulting from the use of 17 x 17 fuel, the replacement of the annular thermal shield with neutron shielding panels, and reactor vessel barrel/baffle upflow flow design. These differences are addressed below.
(1)17 x 17 FuelThe only structural changes in the internals resulting from the design change from the 15 x 15 to the 17 x 17 fuel assembly are the guide tube and control rod drive line. The new 17 x 17 guide tubes are stronger and more rigid, hence they are less susceptible to flow induced vibration. The fuel assembly itself is relatively unchanged in mass and spring rate, and thus no significantdeviation is expected from the 15 x 15 fuel assembly vibration characteristics.
(2)Neutron Shielding Pads Lower InternalsThe primary cause of core barrel excitation is flow turbulence, which is not affected by the upper internals
[3]. The vibration levels due to core barrel excitation for Trojan and Watts Bar both having neutron shielding pads, are expected to be similar. Since Watts Bar has greater velocities than Trojan, vibration levels due to the core barrel excitation is expected to be somewhat greater than that for Trojan (proportional to flow velocity raised to a small power). However, scale model test results and preliminary results from Trojan show that core barrel vibration of plants with neutron shielding pads is significantly less than that of plants with thermal shields. This information and the fact that low core barrel flange stresses with large safety margins were measured at Indian Point Unit 2 (thermal shield configuration) lead to the conclusion that stresses approximately equal to those of Indian Point Unit 2 will result on the Watts Bar internals with the attendant large safety margins.
(3)Reactor Vessel Barrel/Baffle Upflow ConversionThe upflow conversion consists of changes to the reactor vessel components, which are to plug the core barrel inlet flow holes and to provide holes in the top former plate. These modifications change the flow path from being downflow to upflow between the core barrel and the baffle plate and increase core bypass flow from 7.5 to 9.0%. Changing the flow path reduces the pressure differential across the baffle plate, eliminating the jetting of coolant between the joints between the baffle plates. Although defined as a difference between Indian Point 2 and Watts Bar internals, the conversion of the Watts Bar internals to the upflow configuration has no direct impact on the 3.9-10MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-86reactor core system under earthquake conditions. Therefore, the fuel assembly structural integrity during a seismic event is not affected by the modification. The potential effects due to the LOCA contribution, as a result of the upflow modification, has been demonstrated by evaluation that the impact of the change in forces from the initial downflow design to upflow are insignificant. Therefore, the modifications associated with the upflow conversion do not increase the seismic or LOCA induced loads significantly compared to that of the downflow design, and the fuel assembly structural integrity and coolable geometry are maintained. This issue has been reviewed and approved by the NRC [11 & 12].3.9.2.4  Preoperational Fl ow-Induced Vibration Testi ng of Reactor InternalsBecause the Watts Bar reactor internals design configuration is well characterized, as was discussed in Section 3.9.2.3, it is not considered necessary to conduct instrumented tests of the Watts Bar plant hardware. The requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.20 will be met by conducting the confirmatory preoperational testing examination for integrity per Paragraph D, of Regulatory Guide 1.20, "Regulation for Reactor Internals Similar to the Prototype Design."  This examination will include some 35 points (Figure 3.9-1) with special emphasis on the following areas.
(1)All major load-bearing elements of the reactor internals relied upon to retain the core structure in place.
(2)The lateral, vertical and torsional restraints provided within the vessel.
(3)Those locking and bolting devices whose failure could adversely affect the structural integrity of the internals.
(4)Those other locations on the reactor internal components which are similar to those which were examined on the prototype Indian Point Unit 2 design.
(5)The inside of the vessel will be inspected before and after the hot functional test, with all the internals removed, to verify that no loose parts or foreign material are in evidence.A particularly close inspection will be made on the following items or areas using a 5X or 1OX magnifying glass or penetrant testing where applicable.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-11WATTS BARWBNP-79 (1)Lower Internals (a)Upper barrel to flange girth weld.(b)Upper barrel to lower barrel girth weld.(c)Upper core plate aligning pin. Examine bearing surfaces for any shadow marks, burnishing, buffing or scoring. Inspect welds for integrity.(d)Irradiation specimen guide screw locking devices and dowel pins. Check for lockweld integrity.(e)Baffle assembly locking devices. Check for lockweld integrity.(f)Lower barrel to core support girth weld.(g)Neutron shield panel screw locking devices and dowel pin cover plate welds. Examine the interface surfaces for evidence of tightness and for lockweld integrity.(h)Radial support key welds.(i)Insert screw locking devices. Examine soundness of lockwelds.(j)Core support columns and instrumentation guide tubes. Check the joints for tightness and soundness of the locking devices.(k)Secondary core support assembly screw locking devices for lockweld integrity.(l)Lower radial support keys and inserts. Examine for any shadow marks, burnishing, buffing or scoring. Check the integrity of the lockwelds. These members supply the radial and torsional constraint of the internals at the bottom relative to the reactor vessel while permitting axial and radial growth between the two. One would expect to see, on the bearing surfaces of the key and keyway, burnishing, buffing or shadow marks which would indicate pressure loading and relative motion between the two parts. Some scoring of engaging surfaces is also possible and acceptable.(m)Gaps at baffle joints. Check for gaps between baffle and top former and at baffle to baffle joints.
3.9-12MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79 (2)Upper Internals (a)Thermocouple conduits, clamps and couplings.(b)Guide tube, support column, orifice plate, and thermocouple assembly locking devices.(c)Support column and thermocouple conduit assembly clamp welds.(d)Upper core plate alignment inserts. Examine for any shadow marks, burnishing, buffing or scoring. Check the locking devices for integrity of lockwelds.(e)Thermocouple conduit gusset and clamp welds (where applicable).(f)Thermocouple conduit end-plugs. Check for tightness.(g)Guide tube enclosure welds, tube-transition plate welds and card welds.Acceptance standards are the same as required in the shop by the original design drawings and specifications.During the hot functional test, the internals will be subjected to a total operating time at greater than normal full-flow conditions (four pumps operating) of at least 240 hours. This provides a cyclic loading of approximately 10 7 cycles on the main structural elements of the internals. In addition there will be some operating time with only one, two and three pumps operating.When no signs of abnormal wear, no harmful vibrations are detected and no apparent structural changes take place, the four-loop core support structures are considered to be structurally adequate and sound for operation.
3.9.2.5  Dynamic System Analysis of the Reactor Internals Under Faulted ConditionsAnalysis of the reactor internals for blowdown loads resulting from a LOCA is based on the time history response of the internals to simultaneously applied blowdown forcing functions. The forcing functions are defined at points in the system where changes in cross-section or direction of flow occur such that differential loads are generated during the blowdown transient. The dynamic mechanical analysis can employ the displacement method, lumped parameters, stiffness matrix formulations and assumes that all components behave in a linearly elastic manner.In addition, because of the complexity of the system and the components, it is necessary to use finite element stress analysis codes to provide more detailed information at various points.A blowdown digital computer program
[6], which was developed for the purpose of calculating local fluid pressure, flow, and density transients that occur in pressurized MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-13WATTS BARWBNP-79water reactor coolant systems during a LOCA, is applied to the subcooled,transition, and saturated two-phase blowdown regimes. This is in contrast to programs such as WHAM [7], which are applicable only to the subcooled region and which, due to their method of solution, could not be extended into the region in which large changes in the sonic velocities and fluid densities take place. This blowdown code is based on the method of characteristics wherein the resulting set of ordinary differential equations, obtained from the laws of conservation of mass, momentum, and energy, are solved numerically using a fixed mesh in both space and time.Although spatially one-dimensional conservation laws are employed, the code can be applied to describe three-dimensional system geometries by use of the equivalent piping networks. Such piping networks may contain any number of pipes or channels of various diameters, dead ends, branches (with up to six pipes connected to each branch), contractions, expansions, orifices, pumps and free surfaces (such as in the pressurizer). System losses such as friction, contraction, expansion, etc. are considered.The blowdown code evaluates the pressure and velocity transients for a maximum of 2,400 locations throughout the system. These pressure and velocity transients are stored as a permanent tape file and are made available to the program FORCE which utilizes a detailed geometric description in evaluating the loadings on the reactor internals.Each reactor component for which FORCE calculations are required is designated as an element and assigned an element number. Forces acting upon each of the elements are calculated summing the effects of:
(1)The pressure differential across the element.
(2)Flow stagnation on, and unrecovered orifice losses across the element.
(3)Friction losses along the element.Input to the code, in addition to the blowdown pressure and velocity transients, includes the effective area of each element on which the force acts due to the pressure differential across the element, a coefficient to account for flow stagnation and unrecovered orifice losses, and the total area of the element along which the shear


forces act.The mechanical analysis
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-86 3.8B BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA 3.8B.1 INTRODUCTION The buckling design criteria in this appendix are applicable to stiffened circular cylindrical and spherical shells. Section 2.0 sets forth the buckling design criteria for shells stiffened with circumferential stiffeners. Because of existing penetrations, interferences, or large attached masses, it may be expedient to further analyze some areas of the vessel as independent panels. Section 3.0 sets forth the criteria for shells stiffened with a combination of circumferential and vertical stiffeners. Section 4.0 deals with the criteria for a spherical dome. The procedures and data presented were adapted primarily from Chapter 3 of the Shell Analysis Manual, by E. H. Baker, A. P.
[8] has been performed using conservative assumptions. Some of the more significant assumptions are:
Cappelli, L. Kovalevsky, F. L. Rish, and R. M. Verette, National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C., Contractor Report CR-912, April 1968. The criteria given in this section cover only the range of variables needed for the structural steel containment vessel for which these specifications were prepared.
(1)The mechanical and hydraulic analyses have considered the effect of hydroelasticity.
The buckling criteria are specified in terms of unit stresses and membrane forces in the shell. Stresses caused by multiple loads must be combined according to provisions of Table 3.8B-1 for use in these criteria. The values of the load factors and factors of safety used in the buckling criteria are given in Section 5.0. The method of applying the factors of safety to the criteria is shown in Table 3.8B-2.
3.9-14MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79 (2)The reactor internals are represented by a multi-mass system connected with springs and dashpots simulating the elastic response and the viscous damping of the components. The modeling is conducted in such a way that uniform masses are lumped into easily identifiable discrete masses while elastic elements are represented by springs.The model described is considered to have a sufficient number, of degrees of freedom to represent the most important modes of vibration in the vertical direction. This model is conservative in the sense that further mass-spring resolution of the system would lead to further attenuation of the shock effects obtained with the present model.The pressure waves generated within the reactor are highly dependent on the location and nature of the postulated pipe failure. In general, the more rapid the severance of the pipe, the more severe the imposed loadings on the components. A one millisecond severance time is taken as the limiting case.In the case of the hot leg break, the vertical hydraulic forces produce an initial upward lift of the core. A rarefaction wave propagates through the reactor hot leg nozzle into the interior of the upper core barrel. Since the wave has not reached the flow annulus on the outside of the barrel, the upper barrel is subjected to an impulsive compressive wave. Thus, dynamic instability (buckling) or large deflections of the upper core barrel, or both, is a possible response of the barrel during hot leg break results in transverse loading on the upper core components as the fluid exits the hot leg nozzle.In the case of the cold leg break, a rarefaction wave propagates along a reactor inlet pipe, arriving first at the core barrel at the inlet nozzle of the broken loop. The upper barrel is then subjected to a non-axisymmetric expansion radial impulse which changes as the rarefaction wave propagates both around the barrel and down the outer flow annulus between vessel and barrel. After the cold leg break, the initial steady state hydraulic lift forces (upward) decrease rapidly (within a few milliseconds) and then increase in the downward direction. These cause the reactor core and lower support structure to move initially downward.If a simultaneous seismic event with the intensity of the SSE is postulated with the loss of coolant accident, the imposed loading on the internals component may be additive in certain cases; therefore, the combined loading must be considered. In general, however, the loading imposed by the earthquake is small compared to the blowdown loading.The summary of the mechanical analysis follows:
3.8B.2 SHELLS STIFFENED WITH CIRCUMFERENTIAL STIFFENERS 3.8B.2.1 Circular Cylindrical Shells Under Axial Compression The critical buckling stress for a cylinder under axial compression alone is determined by the equation C c Et (cr1 ) = -------------
Vertical Excitation Model for Blowdown For the vertical excitation, the reactor internals are represented by a multi-mass system connected with springs and dashpots simulating the elastic response and the viscous damping of the components. Also incorporated in the multi-mass system is a representation of the motion of the fuel elements relative to the fuel assembly grids. The fuel elements in the fuel assemblies are kept in position by friction forces MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-15WATTS BARWBNP-79originating from the preloaded fuel assembly grid fingers. Coulomb type friction is assumed in the event that sliding between the rods and the grid fingers occurs. In order to obtain an accurate simulation of the reactor internals response, the effects of internal damping, clearances between various internals, snubbing action caused by solid impact, Coulomb friction induced by fuel rod motion relative to the grids, and preloads in hold down springs have been incorporated in the analytical model. The modeling is conducted in such a way that uniform masses are lumped into easily identifiable discrete masses while elastic elements are represented by springs.The appropriate dynamic differential equations for the multi-mass model describing the aforementioned phenomena are formulated and the results obtained using a digital computer program
R for various ranges of cylinder length defined by 2
[8] which computes the response of the multi-mass model when excited by a set of time dependent forcing functions. The appropriate forcing functions are applied simultaneously and independently to each of the masses in the system. The results from the program give the forces, displacements and deflections as functions of time for all the reactor internals components (lumped masses). Reactor internals response to both hot and cold leg pipe ruptures were analyzed.Transverse Excitation Model for Blowdown Various reactor internal components are subjected to transverse excitation during blowdown. Specifically, the barrel, guide tubes, and upper support columns are analyzed to determine their response to this excitation.Core Barrel - For the hydraulic analysis of the pressure transients during hot leg blowdown, the maximum pressure drop across the barrel is a uniform radial compressive impulse. The barrel is then analyzed for dynamic buckling using the following conservative assumptions:
L                2 Z = -----
(1)The effect of the fluid environment is neglected.
Rt The constant Cc is determined from Figure 3.8B-l for the appropriate value of R/t.
(2)The shell is treated as simply supported. During cold leg blowdown, the upper barrel is subjected to a non-axisymmetric expansion radial impulse which changes as the rarefaction wave propagates both around the barrel and down the outer flow annulus between vessel and barrel.The analysis of transverse barrel response to cold leg blowdown is performed as follows: (1)The core barrel is treated as a simply supported cylindrical shell of constant thickness between the upper flange weldment and the lower support plate weldment. No credit is taken for the supports at the barrel midspan offered by the outlet nozzles. This assumption leads to conservative deflection estimates of the upper core barrel.
BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA                                                                        3.8B-1
(2)The core barrel is analyzed as a shell with two variable sections to model the support flange and core barrel.
3.9-16MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79 (3)The barrel with the core and thermal shielding pads is analyzed as a beam fixed at the top and elastically supported at the lower radial support and the dynamic response is obtained.Guide Tubes - The dynamic loads on rod cluster control guide tubes are more severe for a loss-of-coolant accident caused by hot leg rupture than for an accident by cold leg rupture since the cold leg break leads to much smaller changes in the transverse coolant flow over the rod cluster control guide tubes. In addition to analyses of these accidents, guide tubes are also analyzed for intermediate size breaks to ensure no loss of function.The guide tubes in closest proximity to the ruptured outlet nozzle are the most severely loaded. The transverse guide tube forces during the hot leg blowdown decrease with increasing distance from the ruptured nozzle location.A detailed structural analysis of the rod cluster control guide tubes is performed to establish the equivalent cross section properties and elastic end support conditions. An analytical model is verified [8] both dynamically and statically by subjecting the control rod cluster tube to a concentrated force applied at the transition plate. In addition, the guide tube is loaded experim entally using a triangu lar distribution to conservatively approximate the hydraulic loading. The experimental results consists of a load deflection curve for the rod cluster control guide tube plus verification of the deflection criteria to assure rod cluster control insertion.The response of the guide tubes to the transient loading due to blowdown may be found by utilizing the equivalent single degree of freedom system for the guide tube using experimental results for equivalent stiffness and natural frequency.Upper Support Columns - Upper support columns located close to the broken nozzle during hot leg break will be subjected to transverse loads due to cross flow. The loads applied to the columns are computed with a method similar to the one used for the guide tubes; i.e., by taking into consideration the increase in flow across the column during the accident. The columns are studied as beams with variable section and the resulting stresses are obtained using the reduced section modulus and appropriate stress risers for the various sections.The effects of the gaps that could exist between vessel and barrel, between fuel assemblies, and between fuel assemblies and baffle plates are considered in the analysis. Linear analysis will not provide information about the impact forces generated when components impinge each other, but can, and is, applied prior to gap closure. References [8] and [9] provide further details of the blowdown method used in the analysis of the reactor internals.The stresses due to the safe shutdown earthquake (vertical and horizontal components) are combined with the blowdown stresses in order to obtain the largest principal stress and deflection. All reactor internals components were found to be within acceptable stress and deflection limits for both hot leg and cold leg loss-of-coolant accidents occurring simultaneously with the Safe Shutdown Earthquake.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-17WATTS BARWBNP-79The results obtained from the linear analysis indicate that during blowdown, the relative displacement between the components will close the gaps and consequently the structures will impinge on each other, making the linear analysis unrealistic and forcing the application of nonlinear methods to study the problem. Although linear analysis will not provide information about the impact forces generated when components impinge on each other, it can, and is, applied prior to gap closure. The effects of the gaps that could exist between vessel and barrel, between fuel assemblies, between baffle assemblies and baffle plates, and between the control rods and their guide paths were considered in the analysis. Both static and dynamic stress intensities are within acceptable limits. In addition, the cumulative fatigue usage factor is also within the allowable usage factor of unity.The stresses due to the safe shutdown earthquake (vertical and horizontal components) were combined in the most unfavorable manner with the blowdown stresses in order to obtain the largest principal stress and deflection. These results indicate that the maximum deflections and stress in the critical structures are below the established allowable limits. For the transverse excitation, it is shown that the upper barrel does not buckle during a hot-leg break and that it has an allowable stress distribution during a cold leg break.Even though control rod insertion is not required for plant shutdown, this analysis shows that most of the guide tubes will deform within the limits established experimentally to assure control rod insertion. For the guide tubes deflected above the no loss of function limit, it must be assumed that the rods will not drop. However, the core will still shut down due to the negative reactivity insertion in the form of core voiding. Shutdown will be aided by the great majority of rods that do drop. Seismic deflections of the guide tubes are generally negligible by comparison with the no loss of function limit.3.9.2.5.1 Evaluation of Reactor Internal s for Limited Displacement RPV Inlet and Outlet Nozzle Break This section contains an evaluation of the effects of a limited displacement 127 in 2 RPV inlet nozzle safe end break and a limited displacement 127 in 2 RPV outlet nozzle safe end break on the reactor internals. Both breaks are assumed to have a break opening time of one millisecond. The main operational requirement to be met is that the plant be shut down and cooled in an orderly fashion so that the fuel cladding temperature is kept within the specified limits. This implies that the deformation of the reactor internals must be kept sufficiently small to allow core cooling and assure effectiveness of the emergency core cooling system. As a further criterion, the allowable stress criteria used for the core support structures are presented in Section 3.9.3.1. The evaluation of the reactor internals for the RPV inlet break is composed of two parts. The first part is the in-plane response of the core barrel occurring in the vertical plane passing through the broken inlet nozzle. This is taken from the DARI-WOSTAS response described for the RPV support analysis in Section 5.2.1.10.6. The second part of this evaluation is the core-barrel shell response which consists of the various n 3.9-18MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79= 0, 2, 3, etc., ring mode response occurring in the horizontal plane. These ring mode responses are generated as the inlet break rarefaction wave propagates to the core barrel at the inlet nozzle, which subjects the upper barrel to a non-axisymmetric expansion radial impulse which changes as the rarefaction wave propagates both around the barrel and down the outer flow annulus between the barrel and the vessel. This second part, or ring mode evaluation is described in Reference [9] and is independent of the loop forces and cavity pressure. From the moment and shear force time histories resulting from the DARI-WOSTAS response, the core barrel beam bending stresses and shear stresses are obtained. The barrel beam stresses (the first part of the evaluation) are evaluated at the mid-barrel girth weld where the highest stresses in the barrel occur.For the second part of shell mode analysis of the core barrel, the differential pressures across the core barrel wall distributed around the circumference must be determined. These delta-p's are directly obtained from the blowdown analysis. The application of the delta-p's around the barrel circumference (i.e., resolving into Fourier components, etc.) is further described in Reference [6]. It is important to note that unlike the beam analysis, the shell response of the barrel (the various horizontal ring modes 0, 2, 3, 4, etc.) is independent of the response of the vessel on its supports, the response of the fuel, or any combination of these beam mode responses. Even though various phenomena may affect vessel beam behavior, only one set of barrel shell results is included in the stress combination. Also included in the stress results for the barrel is the vertical response from the DARI-WOSTAS analysis. The WOSTAS model presented in Section 5.2.1.10.6 showed that the vertical response of the barrel is considered uniform around the circumference.However, since the DARI-WOSTAS model couples the horizontal beam and the vertical response of the reactor at the vessel supports, variation in horizontal response may be seen in the vertical behavior. To properly evaluate the total stress results in the core barrel, the combination of the horizontal beam, vertical, and shell modes is performed on a time-history basis. This combination is performed at the girth weld, which is the most highly stressed region of the core barrel. The evaluation of the reactor internals for the RPV outlet nozzle break involves primarily three internal components: core barrel, control rod guide tubes, and upper support columns. The rarefaction wave, which is independent of the loop loads and cavity pressure, propagates into the upper plenum from the outlet nozzle break, which subjects the upper core barrel to a uniform radial compressive impulse resulting from the pressure drop across the core barrel. The stability of the barrel is checked to ensure that buckling due to the compressive impulse does not occur. The beam response (including the vertical response of the barrel) and shell mode response are considered in the analysis. The maximum deflections calculated for the core barrel are within the allowable limits established in section 3.9.3.1.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-19WATTS BARWBNP-79Also included in the outlet nozzle break analysis is an evaluation of the control rod guide tubes and upper support columns. The guide tubes and support columns (primarily those close to the broken hot leg nozzle) are subjected to transverse loads due to increased cross flow in the upper plenum. These loads are independent of the loop loads and cavity pressure loads. The analysis results indicate that the deflections are within the allowable limits presented in Section 3.9.3.1; therefore, the internals geometry is maintained and control rod insertion is not significantly impaired.
3.9.2.6  Correlations of Reactor Internal s Vibration Tests With the Analytical ResultsThe dynamic behavior of reactor components has been studied using experimental data obtained from operating reactors along with results of model tests and static and dynamic tests in the fabricators shops and at plant site. Extensive instrumentation programs to measure vibration of reactor internals (including prototype units of various reactors) have been carried out during preoperational flow tests, and reactor operation.From scale model tests, information on stresses, displacements, flow distribution, and fluctuating differential pressures is obtained. Studies have been performed to verify the validity and determine the prediction accuracy of models for determining reactor internals vibration due to flow excitation. Similarity laws were satisfied to assure that the model response can be correlated to the real prototype behavior.Vibration of structural parts during prototype plants preoperational tests is measured using displacement gages, accelerometers, and strain transducers. The signals are recorded with F.M. magnetic tape records. On site and offsite signal analysis is done using both hybrid real time and digital techniques to determine the (approximate) frequency and phase content. In some structural components the spectral content of the signals include nearly discrete frequency or very narrow-band, usually due to excitation by the main coolant pumps and other components that reflect the response of the structure at a natural frequency to broad bands, mechanically and/or flow-induced excitation. Damping factors are also obtained from wave analyses.It is known from the theory of shells that the normal modes of a cylindrical shell can be expressed as sine and cosine combinations with indices m and n indicating the number of axial half waves and circumferential waves, respectively. The shape of each mode and the corresponding natural frequencies are functions of the numbers m and n. The general expression for the radial displacement of a simply supported shell is:The shell vibration at a natural frequency depends on the boundary conditions at the ends. The effect of the ends is negligible for long shells or for higher order m modes, and long shells have the lowest frequency for n = 2 (elliptical mode). For short shells, the effects of the ends are more important, and the shell will tend to vibrate in modes corresponding to values of n > 2.
wxtn 0= m 1=A nm tnB nm tnsin+cos M x L-----------
-sin=
3.9-20MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79In general, studies of the dynamic behavior of components follow two parallel procedures:  1) obtain frequencies and spring constants analytically, and 2) confirm these values from the results of the tests. Damping coefficients are established experimentally. Once these factors are established, the response can be computed analytically. In parallel, the responses of important reactor structures are measured during preoperational reactor tests and the frequencies and mode shapes of the structures are obtained.Theoretical and experimental studies have provided information on the added apparent mass of the water, which has the effect of decreasing the natural frequency of the component. For both cases, cross and parallel, the response is obtained after the forcing function and the damping of the system is determined.Pre- and post-hot functional inspection results, in the case of plants similar to prototypes, serve to confirm predictions that the internals are well behaved. Any gross motion or undue wear would be evident following the application of approximately 10 7 cycles of vibration expected during the test period.
3.9.3  ASME Code Class 1, 2 and 3 Components, Component Supports and Core Support Structures3.9.3.1  Loading Combinations, Design Transients, and Stress Limits3.9.3.1.1  Subsystems and Components Supplied by WestinghouseDesign transients are presented in Section 5.2.1.5. For ASME Code Class 1 components, systems, and supports, loading conditions are presented in Section 5.2.1.10.1, and stress criteria are provided in Section 5.2.1.10.7.
Additional information concerning methods of analysis is presented throughout Section 5.2.1.10. Results of analyses are documented in the stress reports that describe the system or components.For core support structures, design loading conditions are given in Section 4.2.2.3. Loading conditions are discussed in Section 4.2.2.4.In general, for reactor internals components and for core support structures, the criteria for acceptability, with regard to mechanical integrity analyses, are that adequate core cooling and core shutdown must be assured. This implies that the deformation of the reactor internals must be sufficiently small so that the geometry remains substantially intact. Consequently, the limitations established on the internals are concerned principally with the maximum allowable deflections and stability of the parts, in addition to a stress criterion to assure integrity of the components.For the LOCA plus the SSE condition, deflectio ns of critical internal structures are limited. In a hypothesized downward vertical displacement of the internals, energy absorbing devices limit the displacement after contacting the vessel bottom head, ensuring that the geometry of the core remains intact.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-21WATTS BARWBNP-86The following mechanical functional performance criteria apply:
(1)Following the design basis accident, the functional criterion to be met for the reactor internals is that the plant shall be shutdown and cooled in an orderly fashion so that fuel cladding temperature is kept within specified limits. This criterion implies that the deformation of critical components must be kept sufficiently small to allow core cooling.
(2)For large breaks, the reduction in water density greatly reduces the reactivity of the core, thereby shutting down the core whether the rods are tripped or not. The subsequent refilling of the core by the emergency core cooling system uses borated water to maintain the core in a subcritical state. Therefore, the main requirement is to assure effectiveness of the emergency core cooling system. Insertion of the control rods, although not needed, gives further assurance of ability to shut the plant down and keep it in a safe shutdown condition.
(3)The inward upper barrel deflections are controlled to ensure no contacting of the nearest rod cluster control guide tube. The outward upper barrel deflections are controlled in order to maintain an adequate annulus for the coolant between the vessel inner diameter and core barrel outer diameter.
(4)The rod cluster control guide tube deflections are limited to ensure operability of the control rods.
(5)To ensure no column loading of rod cluster control guide tubes, the upper core plate deflection is limited.Methods of analysis and testing for core support structures are discussed in Sections 3.9.1.3, 3.9.1.4.1, 3.9.2.3, 3.9.2.5, and 3.9.2.6. Stress limits and deformation criteria are given in Sections 4.2.2.4 and 4.2.2.5.3.9.3.1.1.1  Plant Conditio ns and Design Loading Comb inations For ASME Code Class 2 and 3 Components Supplied by WestinghouseDesign pressure, temperature, and other loading conditions that provide the bases for design of fluid systems Code Class 2 and 3 components are presented in the sections which describe the systems.
3.9.3.1.1.2 Design Loading Co mbinations by WestinghouseThe design loading combinations for ASME Code Class 2 and 3 equipment and supports are given in Table 3.9-1. The design loading combinations are categorized with respect to Normal, Upset, Emergency, and Faulted Conditions.Stress limits for each of the loading combinations are equipment oriented and are presented in Tables 3.9-2, 3.9-3, 3.9-4, and 3.9-6 for tanks, inactive pumps, valves, 3.9-22MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79and active pumps, respectively. The definition of the stress equations and limits are in accordance with the ASME Code as follows: (a)For tanks, Section III of the ASME Code, 1971 through Summer 1972 Addenda, and Code Case 1607-1.(b)For all other equipment, Section III of the ASME Code, 1971 through Summer 1973 Addenda, and Code Cases 1635-1 and 1636-1.These stress equations have not changed in later editions of the ASME Code. For the actual numerical values of the allowables for specific equipment, the ASME Code Edition applicable to the time period of equipment procurement as specified on the procurement documents is used for the qualification.Active* pumps and valves are discussed in Section 3.9.3.2. The equipment supports will be designed in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 3.9.3.4.
3.9.3.1.1.3  Design Stress Limits By WestinghouseThe design stress limits established for equipment are sufficiently low to assure that violation of the pressure retaining boundary will not occur. These limits, for each of the loading combinations, are equipment oriented and are presented in Tables 3.9-2 through 3.9-4, and 3.9-6. See Section 3.9.3.1.1.2 for discussion of applicable code editions.3.9.3.1.2  Subsystems and Components Analyzed or Specified by TVA (A)ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 Piping.The analytic procedures and modeling of piping systems is discussed in Sections 3.7.3.8 and 3.7.3.3**. As discussed in Section 3.7.3.8.1 the TVA analysis effort has been categorized into two approaches:  Rigorous and Alternate. The loading sources, conditions, and stress limits are described below for each category and the results are summarized for each._____________* Active components are those whose operability is relied upon to perform a safety function (as well as reactor shutdown function) during the transients or events considered in the respective operating condition categories.** Generated reactor coolant loop response spectra curves and movements enveloping the Set B + Set C curves are used for the analysis or reanalysis of auxiliary piping systems attached to the reactor coolant loops. The ASME Code Case N-411 or Regulatory Guide 1.61 damping values can be used when Set B
+ Set C spectra are considered.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-23WATTS BARWBNP-79 (1)Loading Conditions, Stress Limits and Requirements for Rigorous Analysis (a)The loading sources considered in the rigorous analysis of a piping system are defined in Table 3.9-7.(b)The piping is analyzed to the requirements of applicable codes as defined in Section 3.7.3.8.1.(c)The design load combinations are categorized with respect to Normal, Upset, Emergency, and Faulted Conditions. Class 1 piping is analyzed using the limits established in Table 3.9-8 for all applicable loading conditions. The pressurizer surge line is also evaluated for the thermal stratification and thermal striping in response to the NRC Bulletin 88-11. 


Other rigorously analyzed piping meets the limits established in Table 3.9-9 for all applicable loading conditions.(d)Consideration is given to the sequence of events in establishing which load sources are taken as acting concurrently.(e)Equipment nozzle loads are within vendor and/or TVA allowable values. This ensures that functionality and 'Active' equipment operability requirements are met.(f)All equipment (i.e., valves, pumps, bellows, flanges, strainers, etc.) is checked to ensure compliance with vendor limitations.(g)The pipe/valve interface at each active valve is evaluated and the pipe stresses are limited to the levels indicated in Table 3.9-10 unless higher limits are technically justified on a case-by-case basis.(h)Documentation of rupture stress is provided for the locations in the system being analyzed where the stress exceeds the limits for which pipe rupture postulation is required (See Section 3.6). The tabulation identifies the point and tabulates the stress for each point exceeding the limits.(i)Valves with extended operators or structures (including handwheels) meet the dynamic plus gravitational acceleration limits of 3g along the stem axis and 3g (vectorial summation) in the plane perpendicular to the valve stem axis. For 1-inch and smaller valves with handwheels, the dynamic plus gravitational acceleration limit is 3g in each of the three global (or local) directions. These limits apply to any valve orientation and must be maintained during piping analysis.For steel body check valves (which have no external operators or structures) the limit for dynamic plus gravitational acceleration is 10g (vectorial summation of all three orthogonal directions).
WATTS BAR                                                                                            WBNP-92 The critical buckling stress in a cylinder under axial compression and internal pressure is determined by:
3.9-24MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79The valves as a minimum are qualified to the acceleration limits specified above. Higher accelerations are approved based on case-by-case technical justification.(j)Excessive pipe deformation is avoided.  (k)Welded attachment loads and stresses for TVA Class 1 piping are evaluated in accordance with ASME Code Cases N-122 and N-391.For Class 2 and 3 piping, loads and stresses from welded attachments are evaluated in accordance with ASME Code Cases N-318 and N-392.Special cases of other welded attachments are evaluated by detailed finite element analysis or other applicable methods to assure that ASME Code stress allowables are met.The attachment welds are full penetration, partial penetration, or fillet welded as detailed on the support drawings. Attachments are used generally on all piping systems, and locations can be determined from the support drawings.
( 1 ) = ( C + C ) Et cr                                ------
(2)Loading Conditions and Stress Limits for Alternate Analysis (a)The scope of the alternate analysis application is generally limited to systems having the following load sources: self-weight, internal pressure, seismic event, end point displacement, and limited thermal expansion. (Other load sources may be considered for special cases.)(b)The design load combinations are categorized with respect to Normal, Upset, Emergency, and Faulted Conditions. The criteria are developed to meet the stress limits given in Table 3.9-9 considering the applicable load sources.(c)The general limitations imposed on the piping by the application of the Alternate Analysis method are discussed in Section 3.7.3.8.3. For ASME Category I piping designed by alternate analysis, the same levels of valve acceleration and interface/nozzle load requirements of Section 3.9.3.1.2.A shall be maintained. Non-ASME, Category I(L) piping designed by alternate analysis is described in Sections 3.7.3.8.3 and 3.2.1.
c R The constants Cc and Cc are determined from Figures 3.8B-1 and 3.8B-2, respectively. The constant Cc given in Figure 3.8B-2 depends only upon the internal pressure and R/Et.
(3)Considerations for the Faulted ConditionTables 3.9-8 through 3.9-10 identify the load sources and allowed stresses associated with the faulted condition. The stress limits used are those limits established in ASME Section III for the faulted condition.The feedwater system inside containment, from the check valves to the steam generators including the piping components are evaluated for MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-25WATTS BARWBNP-79pressure boundary integrity to withstand the postulated water hammer event due to the feedwater check valve slam following pipe rupture at the main header (Turbine Building) using the ASME Section III Appendix F (1980 Edition through Winter 1982 Addenda) rules and limits. The four main feedwater check valves were evaluated for structural integrity following the feedwater pipe rupture. Energy equivalence methods, in conjunction with nonlinear finite element and linear hand analyses, were used. The evaluations demonstrated that deformations in three of the four valves are within acceptable strain levels following the slam. With the assumption that the fourth valve is not functional, the transient effects of the resulting one steam generator blowdown are bounded by the "Major Rupture of a Main Feedwater Pipe inside containment" per Section 15.4.2.2.Note that during the rigorous analysis phase of most piping systems, the postulated break locations are unknown and the jet impingement loads are unavailable and thus not included in the evaluation of the faulted condition. However, where it is determined by the guidelines of Section 3.6 that jet impingement must be evaluated, the effect of the loads on pipe stress is evaluated during the pipe rupture analysis.
3.8B.2.2 Circular Cylindrical Shells in Circumferential Compression A circular cylindrical shell under a critical external radial or hydrostatic pressure will buckle in circumferential compression. The critical circumferential compressive stress is given by:
(4)Summary of Results - Rigorous Analysis of Class 1 and Class 2/3 Piping Performed by TVA 3.9-26MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-68The results of the piping system analyses performed in accordance with the above paragraphs are presented and consolidated in a calculation with the following documentation: (a)Certification Report for ASME Code Class 1 Analyses.(b)Owner's review for ASME Code Class 1 Analysis.(c)Statement of Compliance with code requirements for ASME Code Class 2/3 Analyses.(d)Problem revision status form - for maintaining the traceability of revision performed on analysis, and correlating various forms affected by each revision.(e)Piping input data for recording all physical data used in the analysis.(f)Table of system operating modes - for identifying the various thermal conditions required and included in analysis.(g)Stress summary - for summarizing the maximum stresses for various loading combinations.(h)Equipment nozzle load qualification to demonstrate satisfaction of limits.(i)Valve acceleration qualification to demonstrate satisfaction of limits.(j)Summary of loads and movements at pipe supports.(k)A mathematical model isometric - for depicting the analytical model utilized, and defining the type and location of pipe supports and restraints.A record copy of these problem calculations is maintained at TVA and is available for review upon request.All computer printouts of final analysis are microfilmed for TVA permanent records.(B)Category I ASME Code Class 2 and 3 Mechanical Equipment (1)Plant Conditions and Design Loading CombinationsDesign pressure, temperature, and other loading conditions that provide the bases for design of fluid systems Code Class 2 and 3 components are presented in the sections which describe the systems.
Kp 2 E t 2 (cr                              - ---
(2)Design Loading Combinations MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-27WATTS BARWBNP-79The design loading combinations for ASME Code Class 2 and 3 equipment and supports are given in Table 3.9-13B. The design loading combinations are categorized with respect to Normal, Upset, Emergency and Faulted Conditions.Stress limits for each of the loading combinations are equipment  oriented and are presented in Tables 3.9-14, 3.9-15 and 3.9-16 for tanks, inactive* pumps, and inactive* valves respectively. The definition of the stress equations and limits are in accordance with the ASME Code as follows: (a)For tanks, Section III of the ASME Code, 1971 through Summer 1972 Addenda, and Code Case 1607-1 (b)For all other equipment, Section III of the ASME Code, 1971 through Summer 1973 Addenda, and Code Cases 1635-1 and 1636-1These stress equations have not changed in later editions of the ASME Code. For the actual numerical values of the allowables for specific equipment, the ASME Code Edition applicable to the time period of equipment procurement as specified on the procurement documents is used for the qualification.____________
2 ) = -------------------------
* Inactive components are those whose operability are not relied upon to perform a safety function during the transients or events considered in the respective operating condition category.Active* pumps and valves are discussed in Section 3.9.3.2.1. The vendor supplied equipment/component supports stress levels are limited to the allowable stress of AISC or ASME Section III subsection NF or other comparable stress limits as delineated in the applicable design specification. Section 3.8.4 describes the allowable stresses used  for TVA-designed equipment/component supports. The design stress limits established for the components are sufficiently low to assure that violation of the pressure retaining boundary will not occur.
12 ( 1 - u )  L2 for various values of Z given in Section 2.1. Curves for determining the constant Kp for both radial and hydrostatic pressure are given in Figure 3.8B-3.
These limits, for each of the loading combinations, are component oriented and are presented in Tables 3.9-14 through 3.9-16.3.9.3.2  Pumps and Valve Operability Assurance 3.9.3.2.1  Active*
3.8B.2.3 Circular Cylindrical Shells Under Torsion The shear buckling stress of the cylinder subject to torsional loads is given by:
ASME Class 1, 2, & 3 Pumps and ValvesThe list of active valves for primary fluid (i.e., water and steam containing components) systems in the Westinghouse scope of supply is presented in Table 3.9-17. The list of active pumps supplied by Westinghouse is presented in Table 3.9-28. The list of pumps and valves for fluid systems within TVA scope of supply are presented in Tables 3.9-25 and 3.9-27. Only ASME Section III pumps and valves that were purchased after September 1, 1974, were considered to be within the scope of WBN compliance with 3.9-28MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-86Regulation Guide 1.48. These pumps and valves meet the special design requirements verifying operability as specified in Regulatory Guide 1.48. The remaining components in Tables        3.9-17, 3.9-25, 3.9-27, and 3.9-28 meet the appropriate qualification requirements in accordance with the guidelines of IEEE 344-1971 and consistent with the ASME Code applicable at the time of the contract date for procuring the component. These qualifications provide an adequate level of operability assurance for all active pumps and valves. The following rules were used to identify active pumps and valves:
Et
(1)Only FSAR Chapter 15 Design Basis Events (DBE's) were assumed. These DBE's were studied to identify the active pumps and valves required to mitigate the DBE and place the plant in a safe shutdown condition.
( 3 ) = C ----------------
(2)Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary (RCPB) - Valves that are a part of the RCPB [defined by 10 CFR Section 50.2(v)] and require movement to isolate the RCS were identified as active.
cr            s RZ 1  4 The shear buckling stress of the cylinder subject to torsion and internal pressure is determined by
(3)Containment Isolation - Containment isolation valves that require movement to isolate the containment were identified as active.
( 3 ) = ( C +  C ) ---------------     Et cr              s              s
(4)Check Valves - Any check valve required to close or cycle when performing its system safety function was identified as active.
                                                                                    -
*Active components are those whose operability is relied upon to perform a safety function (as well as reactor shutdown function) during the transients or events considered in the respective operating condition categories.Any check valve that was only required to open in the performance of its system safety function was not identified as active. This position was justified by: (a) the free-swinging nature of the valves and (b) the normal stress over-design of the valve body.
14 RZ where constants, Cs and Cs, are determined from Figures 3.8B-4 and 3.8B-5. Values of Cs are given for internal radial pressure alone and internal pressure plus an external load equal to the longitudinal force produced by the internal pressure.
(5)Achieve and Maintain a Safe Shutdown Condition - The minimum redundant complement of equipment required to achieve and maintain safe shutdown was selected.3.9.3.2.2 Operability Assurance 3.9.3.2.2.1  Westi nghouse Scope of SupplyMechanical equipment classified as safety-related must be shown capable of performing its function during the life of the plant under postulated plant conditions. Equipment with faulted condition functional requirements include 'active' pumps and valves in fluid systems such as the residual heat removal system, safety injection system, and the containment spray system. Seismic analysis is presented in Section 3.7 and covers all safety-related mechanical equipment.
3.8B-2                                                                               BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-29WATTS BARWBNP-79Operability is assured by satisfying the requirements of the programs specified below. Additionally, equipment specifications include requirements for operability under the specified plant conditions and define appropriate acceptance criteria to ensure that the program requirements defined below are satisfied.Pump and Valve Qualification for Operability ProgramActive pumps are qualified for operability by first, being subjected to rigid tests both prior to installation in the plant and after installation in the plant. The in-shop tests include: 1) hydrostatic tests of pressure retaining parts to 150 percent times the design pressure times the ratio of material allowable stress at room temperature to the allowable stress value at the design temperature, 2) seal leakage tests, and 3) performance tests to determine total developed head, minimum and maximum head, net positive suction head (NPSH) requirements and other pump parameters. Also monitored during these operating tests are bearing temperatures and vibration levels. Bearing temperature limits are determined by the manufacturer, based on the bearing material, clearances, oil type, and rotational speed. These limits are approved by Westinghouse. Vibration limits are also determined by the manufacturer and are approved by Westinghouse. After the pump is installed in the plant, it undergoes the cold hydro-tests, hot functional test, and the required periodic inservice inspection and operation. These tests demonstrate that the pump will function as required during all normal operating conditions for the design life of the plant.In addition to these tests, the safety-related active pumps, are qualified for operability by assuring that the pump will start up, continue operating, and not be damaged during the faulted condition.The pump manufacturer is required to show by analysis correlated by test, prototype tests or existing documented data that the pump will perform its safety function when subjected to loads imposed by the maximum seismic accelerations and the maximum faulted nozzle loads. It is required that test or dynamic analysis be used to show that the lowest natural frequency of the pump is greater than 33 Hz. The pump, when having a natural frequency above 33 Hz, is considered essentially rigid. This frequency is sufficiently high to avoid problems with amplification between the component and structure for all seismic areas. A static shaft deflection analysis of the rotor is performed with the conservative safe shutdown earthquake (SSE) accelerations of 3g horizontal and 2g vertical acting simultaneously. The deflections determined from the static shaft analysis are compared to the allowable rotor clearances. The nature of seismic disturbances dictates that the maximum contact (if it occurs) will be of short duration. If rubbing or impact is predicted, it is required that it be shown by prototype tests or existing documented data that the pump will not be damaged or cease to perform its design function. The effect of impacting on the operation of the pump is evaluated by analysis or by comparison of the impacting surfaces of the pump to similar surfaces of pumps which have been tested.In order to avoid damage during the faulted plant condition, the stresses caused by the combination of normal operating loads, SSE, dynamic system loads are limited to the limits indicated in Table 3.9-6. In addition, the pump casing stresses caused by the maximum faulted nozzle loads are limited to the stresses outlined in Table 3.9-6.
3.9-30MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79The changes in operating rotor clearances caused by casing distortions due to these nozzle loads are considered. The maximum seismic nozzle loads combined with the loads imposed by the seismic accelerations are also considered in an analysis of the pump supports. Furthermore, the calculated misalignment is shown to be less than that misalignment which could cause pump misoperation. The stresses in the supports are below those in Table 3.9-6; therefore, the support distortion is elastic and of short duration (equal to the duration of the seismic event).Performing these analyses with the conservative loads stated and with the restrictive stress limits of Table 3.9-6 as allowables, assure that critical parts of the pump will not be damaged during the short duration of the faulted condition and that, therefore, the reliability of the pump for post-faulted condition operation will not be impaired by the seismic event.If the natural frequency is found to be below 33 Hz, an analysis will be performed to determine the amplified input accelerations necessary to perform the static analysis. The adjusted accelerations will be determined using the same conservatisms contained in the 3g horizontal and 2g vertical accelerations used for 'rigid' structures.
The static analysis will be performed using the adjusted accelerations; the stress limits stated in Table 3.9-6 must still be satisfied.To complete the seismic qualification procedures, the pump motor is qualified for operation during the maximum seismic event. Any auxiliary equipment which is identified to be vital to the operation of the pump or pump motor, and which is not proven adequate for operation by the pump or motor qualifications, is also separately qualified by meeting the requirements of IEEE Standard 344-1971 or -1975, as applicable, with the additional requirements and justifications outlined in this section.The program above gives the required assurance that the safety-related pump/motor assemblies will not be damaged and will c ontinue operating under SSE loadings, and, therefore, will perform their intended functions. These proposed requirements take into account the complex characteristics of the pump and are sufficient to demonstrate and assure the seismic operability of the active pumps.Since the pump is not damaged during the faulted condition, the fu nctional ability of active pumps after the faulted condition is assured since only normal operating loads and steady state nozzle loads exist. Since it is demonstrated that the pumps would not be damaged during the faulted condition, the post-faulted condition operating loads will be identical to the normal plant operating loads. This is assured by requiring that the imposed nozzle loads (steady-state loads) for normal conditions and post-faulted conditions are limited by the magnitudes of the normal condition nozzle loads. The post-faulted condition ability of the pumps to function under these applied loads is proven during the normal operating plant conditions for active pumps.Safety-related active valves must perform their mechanical motion at times of an accident. Assurance must be supplied that these valves will operate during a seismic event. Tests and analyses were conducted to qualify active valves.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-31WATTS BARWBNP-79The safety-related active valves are subjected to a series of stringent tests prior to service and during the plant life. Prior to installation, the following tests are performed:  shell hydrostatic test to ASME Section III requirements, backseat and main seat leakage tests, disc hydrostatic test, and operational tests to verify that the valve will open and close.For the active valves qualification of electric motor operators for the environmental conditions (i.e., aging, radiation, accident environment simulation, etc.) refer to Section 3.11 and Regulatory Guide 1.73. Cold hydro tests, hot functional qualifications tests, periodic inservice inspections, and periodic inservice operations are performed in-situ to verify and assure the functional ability of the valve. These tests guarantee reliability of the valve for the design life of the plant. The valves are constructed in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III.On all active valves, an analysis of the extended structure is also performed for static equivalent seismic SSE loads applied at the center of gravity of the extended structure. The stress limits allowed in these analyses will show structural integrity. The limits that will be used for active Class 2 and 3 valves are shown in Table 3.9-4.In addition to these tests and analyses, a representative electric motor operated valve will be tested for verification of operability during a simulated plant faulted condition event by demonstrating operational capabilities within the specified limits. The testing procedures are described below.The valve will be mounted in a manner which will represent typical valve installations. The valve will include operator and limit switches if such are normally attached to the valve in service. The faulted condition nozzle loads will be considered in the test in either of two ways: 1) loads equivalent to the faulted condition nozzle loads are limited such that the operability of the valve is not affected.The operability of the valve during a faulted condition shall be demonstrated by satisfying the following criteria:
(1)All the active valves shall be designed to have a first natural frequency which is greater than 33 Hz, if it is practical to do so. If the lowest natural frequency of an active  valve is less than 33 Hz, then the valve's mathematical model is included in the piping dynamic analysis, so as to assure the calculated valve acceleration does not exceed the values used in the static tests of the manufacturer's qualification program and to reflect the proper valve dynamic behavior.
(2)The actuator and yoke of the representative motor operated valve system will be statically deflected using an equivalent static load that simulates those conditions applied to the valve under faulted condition accelerations applied at the center of gravity of the operator alone in the direction of the weakest axis of the yoke. The design pressure of the valve will be simultaneously applied to the valve during the static deflection tests.
3.9-32MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-86 (3)The valve will then be cycled while in the deflected position. The time required to open or close the valve in the defected position will be compared to similar data taken in the undeflected condition to evaluate the significance of any change.The accelerations which will be used for the static valve qualification are 3g horizontal and 2g vertical with the valve yoke axis vertical. The piping designer must maintain the operator accelerations to these levels unless higher limits are technically justified on a case-by-case basis.The testing was conducted on the valves with extended structures which are most affected by acceleration, according to mass, length and cross-section of extended structures. Valve sizes which cover the range of sizes in service will be qualified by the tests and the results are used to qualify all valves within the intermediate range of sizes. Valves which are safety-related but can be classified as not having an extended structure, such as check valves and safety valves, are considered separately. Check valves are characteristically simple in design and their operation will not be affected by seismic accelerations or the applied nozzle loads. The check valve design is compact and there are no extended structures or masses whose motion could cause distortions which could restrict operation of the valve. The nozzle loads due to seismic excitation will not affect the functional ability of the valve since the valve disc is typically designed to be isolated from the body wall. The clearance supplied by the design around the disc will prevent the disc from becoming bound or restricted due to any body distortions caused by nozzle loads. Therefore, the design of these valves is such that once the structural integrity of the valve is assured using standard design or analysis methods, the ability of the valve to operate is assured by the design features. In addition to these design considerations, the valve will also undergo the following tests and analysis: 1) in-shop hydrostatic test, 2) in-shop seat leakage test, and 3) periodic in-situ valve exercising and inspection to assure the functional ability of the valve.The pressurizer safety valves are qualified by the following procedures (these valves are also subjected to tests and analysis similar to check valves): stress and deformation analyses of critical items which may affect operability for faulted condition loads, in-shop hydrostatic and seat leakage tests, and periodic in-situ valve inspection. In addition to these tests, a static load equivalent to that applied by the faulted condition will be applied at the top of the bonnet and the pressure will be increased until the valve mechanism actuates. Successful actuation within the design requirements of the valve will assure its overpressurization safety capabilities dur ing a seismic event.Using these methods, active valves will be qualified for operability during a faulted event. These methods proposed conservatively simulate the seismic event and assure that the active valves will perform their safety-related function when necessary. The above testing program for valves is conservative. Alternate valve operability testing, such as dynamic vibration testing, is allowed if it is shown to adequately assure the faulted condition functional ability of the valve system.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-33WATTS BARWBNP-79Pump Motor and Valve Operator QualificationActive pump motors (and vital pump appurtenances) and active valve electric motor operators (and limit switches and pilot solenoid valves), are seismically qualified by meeting the requirements of IEEE Standard 344-1971 or 1975, as applicable. If the testing option is chosen, sine-beat testing will be justified. This justification may be provided by satisfying one or more of the following requirements to demonstrate that multifrequency response is negligible or the sine-beat input is of sufficient magnitude to conservatively account for this effect.
(1)The equipment response is basically due to one mode.
(2)The sine-beat response spectra envelopes the floor response spectra in the region of significant response.
(3)The floor response spectra consists of one dominant mode and has a peak at this frequency.If the degree of coupling in the equipment is small, then single axis testing is justified. Multi-axis testing is required if there is considerable cross coupling; however, if the degree of coupling can be determined, then single axis testing can be used with the input sufficiently increased to include the effect of coupling on the response of the equipment.Seismic qualification by analysis alone, or by a combination of analysis and testing, may be used when justified. The analysis program can be justified by: 1) demonstrating that equipment being qualified is amendable to analysis, and 2) that the analysis be correlated with test or be performed using standard analysis techniques.3.9.3.2.2.2  TVA Scope of SupplyTVA uses the following criteria to prescribe a suitable program to assure the functional adequacy of active Category I fluid system components (pumps and valves) under combined loading conditions. These criteria supplement or amend previously stated requirements for fluid system components in those cases where fluid system components in those cases where the components are judged to be active (i.e., if they perform a required mechanical motion during the course of accomplishing a safety function). These criteria assure that all active seismic Category I fluid system components will maintain structural integrity and perform their safety functions under loadings, including seismic, associated with normal, upset, and faulted conditions. These criteria are similar to the accept ed response to NRC Position for the TVA's Bellefonte Nuclear Plant units 1 and 2 concerning compliance with the requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.48. The exception is that the seismic qualification for Watts Bar is for a 2-dimensional earthquake, while for Bellefonte it is for a 3-dimension earthquake.
3.9-34MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-793.9.3.2.3 Criteria For Assuring Functional Adequacy of Active Seismic Category I Fluid System Components (Pumps and Valves) and Associated Essential Auxiliary Equipment (1)The seismic design adequacy of Category I electrical power and control equipment and instrumentation directly associated with the active Category I pumps and valves is assured by seismically qualifying the components by analysis and/or testing in accordance with the requirements of IEEE Standard 344  (for applicable edition, refer to Section 3.9.2.2).
(2)When either analysis or testing is used to demonstrate the seismic design adequacy of Category I components, the characteristics of the required input motion is specified by either response spectra, power spectral density function or time history data derived from the structure or system seismic analysis. When the testing method is used, random vibration input motion shall be used, but single frequency input, such as sine beats, may be used provided that: (a)The characteristics of the required input motion indicate that the motion is dominated by one frequency.(b)The anticipated response of equipment is adequately represented by one mode.(c)The input has sufficient intensity and duration to excite all modes to the required magnitude, such that the testing response spectra will envelop the corresponding response spectra of the individual modes.For equipment with more than one dominant frequency and for equipment supported near the base of the structure where some random components of the earthquake may remain, single frequency testing may still be applicable provided that the input has sufficient intensity and duration to excite all modes to the required magnitude, such that the testing response spectra will envelop the corresponding response spectra of the individual modes. When equipment responses along one direction are sensitive to the vibration frequencies along another perpendicular direction, in the case of single frequency testing, the time phasing of the inputs in the vertical and horizontal directions is such that a purely rectilinear resultant output is avoided.In both the testing and analysis procedure, the possible amplified design loads for vendor supplied equipment is considered as follows: (a)If supports are tested, they shall be tested with the actual components mounted and operating or if the components are inoperative during the support test, the response at the equipment mounting locations shall be monitored and components shall be tested separately and the actual MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-35WATTS BARWBNP-79input to the equipment shall be more conservative in amplitude and frequency content than the monitored responses.(b)The support analysis shall include the component loads. Seismic restraints shall be used as applicable with their adequacy verified by either testing or analysis as described above.
(3)All active Category I pumps are subjected to tests both prior to installation in the plant and after installation in the plant. The in-shop tests shall include (a) hydrostatic tests of pressure-retaining parts, (b) seal leakage tests, and (c) performance tests, while the pump is operated with flow, to determine total developed head, minimum and maximum head 3 net positive suction head (NPSH) requirements and other pump/motor parameters. Bearing temperatures and vibration levels shall be monitored during these operating tests. Both are shown to be below appropriate limits specified to the manufacturer for design of the pump. After the pump is installed in the plant, it shall undergo cold hydro tests, or operational tests, hot functional tests, and the required periodic in-service inspection and operation.
(4)Active Category I pumps are analyzed to show that the pump will operate normally when subjected to the maximum seismic accelerations and maximum seismic nozzle loads. Tests or dynamic analysis show that the lowest natural frequency of the pump is above 33 Hz, and thus considered essentially rigid. A static shaft deflection analysis of the rotor is performed with the conservative seismic accelerations of 1.5 times the applicable plant floor response spectra. The deflections determined from the static shaft analysis shall be compared to the allowable rotor clearances. Stresses caused by the combination of normal operating loads, seismic, and dynamic system loads shall be limited to the material elastic limit, as indicated in Table 3.9-18. The primary membrane stress (P m) for the faulted conditions loads shall be limited to 1.2S h, or approximately 0.75 S (S =  yield stress). The primary membrane stress plus the primary bending stress (P b) shall be limited to 1.8S h, or approximately 1.lS. In addition, the pump nozzle stresses caused by the maximum seismic nozzle loads shall be limited to stresses outlined in Table 3.9-18. The maximum seismic nozzle loads shall also be considered in an analysis of the pump supports to assure that a system misalignment cannot occur.If the natural frequency is found to be below 33 Hz, and analysis is performed to determine the amplified input accelerations necessary to perform the static analysis. The adjusted accelerations shall be determined using the same conservatism contained in the accelerations used for "rigid" structures. The static analysis is performed using the adjusted accelerations; the stress limits stated in Table 3.9-18 must still be satisfied.
(5)Each type of active Category I pump motor is independently qualified for operating during the maximum seismic event. Any appurtenances which are identified to be vital to the operation of the pump or pump motor and which 3.9-36MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79are not qualified for operation during the pump analysis or motor qualifications, shall also be separately qualified for operation at the accelerations each would see at its mounting. The pump motor and vital appurtenances are qualified by meeting the requirements of IEEE Standard 344- 1971 or 1975 edition, depending on the procurement date (see Section 3.9.2.2.). If the testing option was chosen, sine-beat testing is justified by satisfying one or more of the following requirements to demonstrate that multifrequency response is negligible or the sine-beat input is of sufficient magnitude to conservatively account for this effect.(a)The equipment response is basically due to one mode.(b)The sine-beat response spectra envelops the floor response spectra in the region of significant response.(c)The floor response spectra consists of one dominant mode and has a peak at this frequency. The degree of mass or stiffness coupling in the equipment will, in general, determine if a single or multi-axis test is required. Multi-axis testing is required if there is considerable cross coupling. If coupling is very light, then single axis testing is justified; or, if the degree of coupling can be determined, then single axis testing can be used with the input sufficiently increased to include the effect of coupling on the response of the equipment.
(6)The post-faulted condition operating loads for active Category I pumps is considered identical to the normal plant operating loads. This is assured by requiring that the imposed nozzle loads (steady-state loads) for normal conditions and post-faulted conditions be limited by the magnitudes of the normal condition nozzle loads. Thus, the post-faulted condition ability of the pumps to function under these applied loads is proven during the normal operating plant conditions.
(7)Active Category I valves, except check valves, are subjected to a series of stringent tests prior to installation and after installation in the plant. Prior to installation, the following tests are performed: (a) shell hydrostatic test, (b) backseat and main seat leakage tests, (c) disc hydrostatic test, (d) functional tests to verify that the valve will operate within the specified time limits when subjected to the design differential pressure prior to operating, and (e) operability qualification of air operator control valves for the conditions over their installed life (i.e., aging, radiation, accident environment simulation, etc.) in accordance with the requirements of IEEE Standard 382 (see Section 3.11). Cold hydro qualification tests, preoperational tests, hot functional qualification tests, periodic inservice inspections, and periodic inservice operation are performed after installation to verify and assure functional ability of the valves. To the extent practicable, functional tests are performed after installation to verify that the valve will open and/or close in a time consistent with required safety functions.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-37WATTS BARWBNP-79 (8)Active Category I valves are designed using either stress analyses or the pressure containing minimum wall thickness requirements. An analysis of the extended structure is performed fo r static equivalent seismic loads applied at the center of gravity of the extended structure. The maximum stress limits allowed in these analyses confirms structural integrity and are the limits developed and accepted by the ASME for the particular ASME class of valve analyzed. The stress limits used for active Class 2 and 3 valves are given in Table 3.9-19. Class 1 valves are designed according to the rules of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, NB-3500.
(9)Representative active Category I valves of each design type with overhanging structures (i.e., motor or pneumatic operator) are tested for verification of operability during a simulated seismic event by demonstrating operational capabilities within specified limits. The testing is conducted on a representative number of valves. Valves from each of the primary safety-related design types (e.g., motor- operated gate valves) are tested.
Valve sizes which cover the range of sizes in service are qualified by the tests and the results are used to qualify all valves within the intermediate range of sizes. Stress and deformation analyses are used to support the interpolation.The valve is mounted in a manner which is conservatively representative of a typical plant installation. The valve includes the operator and all appurtenances normally attached to the valve in service. The operability of the valve during a seismic event is verified by satisfying the following requirements: (a)All active valves are designed to have a first natural frequency which is greater than 33 Hz if practical to do so. This may be shown by suitable test or analysis.If the lowest natural frequency of an active valve is less than 33 Hz, the valve's mathematical model is included in the piping dynamic analysis. This assures the calculated valve acceleration does not exceed the values used in the static tests of the manufacturers qualification program and reflects the proper valve dynamic behavior.(b)The actuator and yoke of the valve system are statically loaded an amount greater than that determined by an analysis as representing the applicable seismic accelerations applied at the center of gravity of the operator alone in the direction of the weakest axis of the yoke. The design pressure of the valve is simultaneously applied to the valve during the static deflection tests.
3.9-38MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-86 (c)The valve is then operated while in the deflected position, i.e., from the normal operating mode to the faulted operating mode. The valve must perform its safety-related function within the specified operating time limits.(d)Motor operators and other electrical appurtenances necessary for operation are qualified as operable during the seismic event by analysis and/or testing in accordance with the requirements of IEEE Standards 344 (refer to Section 3.9.2.2 for the applicable edition).The accelerations used for the static valve qualification are 3.0 g horizontal and 2.0 g vertical with the valve yoke axis vertical. The piping designer shall maintain the motor operator accelerations to equivalent levels. If the valve accelerations exceed these levels, an evaluation of the valve is performed to document acceptability on a case-by-case basis. If the frequency of the valve, by test or analysis, is less than 33 Hz, a dynamic analysis of the valve is performed to determine the equivalent acceleration to be applied during the static test. The analysis shall provide the amplification of the input acceleration considering the natural frequency of the valve and piping along with the frequency content of the applicable plant floor response spectra. The adjusted accelerations are determined using the same conservatism contained in the accelerations used for "rigid" valves. The adjusted accelerations are then used in the static analysis and the valve operability is assured by the methods outlined in steps (b), (c), and (d) above using the modified acceleration input.
(10)The design of each active Category I check valve is such that once the structural integrity of the valve is assured using standard design or analysis methods, the ability of the valve to operate is assured by the design features. In addition to design considerations, each active check valve undergoes: (a)Stress analysis including the applicable seismic loads (b)In-shop hydrostatic tests for parts that could affect the operability of the valve, (c)In-shop seat leakage tests, and (d)Preoperational and periodic in-situ testing and inspection to assure functional ability of the valves.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-39WATTS BARWBNP-79 (11)The design of the pressurizer safety valve (Category I) is such that once the structural integrity of the valves is assured using standard design or analysis methods, the ability of the valve to operate is assured by the design features. In addition to design considerations, the pressurizer safety valve is subjected


to: (a)Stress and/or deformation analysis for parts that could affect the operability of the valve for the applicable seismic loads, (b)In-shop hydrostatic and seal leakage tests, and (c)Periodic in-situ valve inspection.In addition to these tests, a static load equivalent to the seismic load is applied to the top of the bonnet and the pressure is increased until the valve mechanism actuates. Successful actuation within the design requirements of the valve has been demonstrated.
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-92 Figure 3.8B-4 is applicable for values of:
(12)Wherever practicable, prototype test and analytical results are utilized to assure functional adequacy of active Category I pumps and valves and their appurtenances.
L2                  2 Z = ----- > 100 Rt For cylinders with length constant Z less than 100, the shear buckling stress is determined by:
3.9.3.3  Design and Instal lation Details for Mounting of Pressure Relief DevicesThe design and installation of pressure relieving devices are consistent with the requirements established by Regulatory Guide 1.67, "Installation of Overpressure Protective Devices."Each main steam line is provided with one power operated atmospheric relief valve and five safety valves sized in ac cordance with ASME, B&PV, Section III.The safety valves are set for progressive relief in intermediate steps of pressure within the allowed range (105% of the design pressure) of pressure settings to prevent more than one valve actuating simultaneously. The valve pressure settings at which the individual valves open are tabulated below in the column identified as "Set Pressure."  The valves are designed to reseat at the pressure values identified in the column "Blowdown Pressure."
2 K' s  E                  t 2 (3) cr  = --------------------------  --- a b 2
3.9-40MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-89Note 1. The licensing basis for the WBN plant is 10% maximum blowdown
12 ( 1 -  ) a for values of:
[13]. This is more conservative than the 5% maximum blowdown specified by the ASME Section III requirements.All valves are connected to a rigidly supported common header that is in turn connected to the main steam piping through branch piping equal in size to the main steam piping. The header and valves are located immediately outside containment in the main steam valve building.The safety valves are mounted on the header such that they produce torsion, bending, and thrust loads in the header during valve operation. The header has been designed to accommodate both dynamic and static loading effects of all valves blowing down simultaneously.The stress produced by the following loading effects assumed to act concurrently are within the code allowable.
2 a                     2 Z = ------           1-Rt 3.8B.2.4 where a is the effective length and b is the circumference of the cylinder. The coefficient K's is given in Figure 3.8B-10.Circular Cylindrical Shells Under Bending The critical buckling stress for the cylinder under bending is computed by the equation:
(1)Deadweight effects (2)Thermal loads and movements (3)Seismic loads and movements (4)Safety valve thrust, moments, torque loading 1 (5)Internal pressure 1The safety valve thrust loads are assumed to occur in the upset plant condition, and do not occur concurrently with an OBE.The nozzles connecting each valve to the header are analyzed to assure that for both dynamic and static loading situations, the stresses produced in the nozzle wall are within the code allowable for the same loading consideration as the header.The safety valves and power-operated atmospheric relief valves are Seismic Category I components. They have been seismically qualified by analyses per criteria presented in Section 3.7.3.16 and Table 3.9-16.Pressure relief valves in auxiliary safety related systems have been installed considering loads carried in the support members produced by:
( 4 ) = C Et cr                  ------
(1)Deadweight of valve and appurtenances,Valve Mark NumberSet Pressure(psig)Accumulation Pressure to fully Open Valve (%)  Maximum Expected Accumulation Pressure at maximum Flow (%) Pressure in Steam Header at Rated Relieving Flow (psig)Rated Flow at Set Pressure + 3%
bR where the buckling constant, Cb is given by Figure 3.8B-6.
Accumulation (lb/hr)Blowdown 1 Pressure Below Set Pressure to Close (%) Pressure In Steam Header at Valve Closing (psig)47W400-10147W400-102 47W400-10347W400-10447W400-105  1185  1195 1205  1215  1224 3 3 3 3 3  8.4  7.5 6.6  5.8  4.9 1284 1284 1284 1284 1284 791,563 798,163 804,764 811,364 817,304 10 10 10 10 10 1066.5 1075.5 1084.5 1093.5 1101.6 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-41WATTS BARWBNP-79 (2)Thermal effects, (3)Seismic effects, (4)Maximum valve thrust, moment, and torque loading effects, and (5)Internal pressure.Relief valves that discharge to the atmosphere are either rigidly supported by their own individual support, or the nozzle and component to which the valve is attached (vessel, tank, or pipe) has been designed to carry the valve static and dynamic loads. Individual supports have been designed to stress levels in accordance with Section 3.9.3.4.2. Stresses in nozzles and components produced by the valve loads considered above are determined per the method delineated in Welding Research Council Bulletin No. 107 or equivalent and are combined with normal loading operational loads for the component. Relief valves blowing down is considered as an upset loading condition for the plant. Therefore, the allowable stress intensity for the component supporting the valve loads is in accordance with those tabulated in Tables 3.9-2, 3.9-8, 3.9-9, or 3.9-14, as applicable.Loading associated with relief valves discharging through piping components to a collector tank are analyzed considering the surge effects of the initial discharge through the pipe. This condition is considered as an upset loading condition for the piping components connecting to the valve and the allowable stress intensity is in accordance with those for piping components tabulated in Tables 3.9-8 and 3.9-9.Pressure relief valves and pertinent operating information for the valves that have been considered in the installation requirements of the valve are tabulated in Table 3.9-20.As related to the design and installation criteria of pressure relieving devices, Westinghouse interfaces with TVA by providing the following:
The critical buckling stress for the cylinder under internal pressure and bending is computed by:
(1)Overpressure Protection Report
( 4 ) = ( C + C ) Et cr                                  ------
[14]. This report documents the compliance for overpressure protection requirements as per the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, NB-7300 and NC-7300, and provides the maximum relieving requirements.
b              b R where Cb and Cb are given by Figures 3.8B-6 and 3.8B-7, respectively.
(2)Mounting brackets on the pressurizer. These brackets can be used as structural supports, if needed.
Figure 3.8B-7 is a function of the internal pressure and the geometry.
(3)Criteria and guidelines. Supplementary criteria specifically applicable to the design and fabrication of nuclear plant safety and relief valve installations are provided.(4)Review of system layout and resultant loads for acceptability, where applicable.
3.8B.2.5 Circular Cylindrical Shell Under Combined Loads The criterion for buckling failure of the cylindrical shell under combined loading is expressed by an interaction equation of stress-ratios of the form:
3.9-42MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-89 3.9.3.4 Comp onent Supports3.9.3.4.1 Subsystem and Component Supports Analyzed or Specified by Westinghouse (1&2)The criteria for Westinghouse supplied supports for ASME Code Class 1 Mechanical Equipment is presented in Section 5.2.1.10.7.
BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA                                                                        3.8B-3
(3)ASME Code - Class 2 and 3 supports are designed as follows: (A)Linear (a)Normal - The allowable stresses of AISC-69 Part 1, a reference basis for Subsection NF of ASME Section III, are employed for normal condition limits.(b)Upset - Stress limits for upset conditions are the same as normal condition stress limits. This is consistent with Subsection NF of ASME Section III (see NF-3320).(c)Emergency - For emergency conditions, the allowable stresses or load ratings are 33% higher than those specified for normal conditions. This is consistent with Subsection NF of ASME Section III in which (see NF-3231) limits for emergency conditions are 33% greater than the normal condition limits.(d)Faulted - Section 5.2.1.10 specifies limits which assure that no large plastic deformations will occur (stress < 1.2S y). If any inelastic behavior is considered in the design, detailed justification is provided for this limit. Otherwise, the supports for active components are designed so that stresses are less than or equal to S
: y. Thus the operability of active components is not endangered by the supports during faulted conditions.Welding was in accordance with the American Welding Society, (AWS) "Structural Welding Code," AWS D1.1, with revisions 1-73 and 1-74, except later editions may be used for prequalified joint details, base materials, and qualification of welding procedures and welders. Nuclear Construction Issues Group documents NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 may be used after June 26, 1985, for weldments that were designed and fabricated to the requirements of AISC/AWS. Visual inspection of structural welds will meet the minimum requirements of NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 as specified on the design drawings or other design output. Inspectors performing visual examination to the criteria of NCIG-01 are trained in the subject criteria.(A)Plates and Shells MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-43WATTS BARWBNP-89The stress limits used for ASME Class 2 and 3 plate and shell component supports are identical to those used for the supported component. These allowed stresses are such that the design requirements for the components and the system structural integrity are maintained. For active Class 2 or 3 pumps, support adequacy is proven by satisfying the criteria in Section 3.9.3.2.1. The requirements consist of both stress analysis and an evaluation of pump/motor support misalignment.Active valves are, in general, supported only by the pipe attached to the body. Exterior supports on the valve are not used.3.9.3.4.2  Subsystem and Component Sup ports Analyzed or Specified by TVA (1)ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 Piping Supports (a)Loading ConditionsThe following conditions have been assigned for support load evaluation for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant support design (not including pipe whip restraints):  normal, upset, emergency, faulted, and test condition. The piping support design loads and combinations are given in Table 3.9-13A.(b)Support Types, Loading Combinations, Stress Limits, and Applicable Codes (1)Linear SupportsThe allowed stresses are defined in Table 3.9-21. The load combinations and allowable stresses are based on and exceed the requirements of NRC Regulatory Standard Review Plan, Directorate of Licensing, Section 3.9.3. The design load is determined by the condition yielding the most conservative support design.Welding was in accordance with the American Welding Society, (AWS) "Structural Welding Code," AWS D1.1 with revisions 1-73 and 1-74, except later editions may be used for prequalified joint details, base materials, and qualification of welding procedures and welders. Nuclear Construction Issues Group documents NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 may be used after June 26, 1985, for weldments that were designed and fabricated to the requirements of AISC/AWS. Visual inspection of structural welds will meet the minimum requirements of NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 as specified on the design drawings or other design output. Inspectors performing visual examination to the criteria of NCIG-01 are trained in the subject criteria.
(2)Standard Support 3.9-44MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79The allowable stresses are defined in Table 3.9-21. The load combinations consider all applicable load sources which induce load into the appropriate type support. The design conforms to the requirements of MSS-SP-58, 1967 edition or ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, subsection


NF.(3)Pre-engineered Support ElementPre-engineered support elements are defined as standard hardware items such as rods, clamps, clevises, and struts used in the installation of either a linear support or a standard support component.The design load is determined from the tabulated loads described above for the linear or standard support component. The allowable loads are given in Table 3.9-21.(c)General Design Requirements (1)The gravitational or actual loads are considered to consist of pipe, fittings, pipe covering, contents of pipe systems, and valves.
WATTS BAR                                                                                                                                WBNP-86 y      z R 1x + R 2 + R 3 = 1 Note that (n)                         (n)                       (n)                 (n)
(2)All thermal modes of operation are considered in load evaluation. Thermal loads are not considered to relieve primary loads induced by gravity, other sustained loads, or seismic events.
N1 F1 N2 F2                                        N m Fm Nk Fk R n = -------------------- + -------------------- +  -----------------------  --------------------
(3)Installation tolerances are not considered a source of load reduction unless special installation requirements are required.
(n)                       (n)                         (n)                 (n) cr t                      cr t                    cr t                cr t where Nm is the compressive or shear membrane force and Fm is the appropriate load factor, given in Section 5.0, for individual loading components in any loading combination. The superscript n refers to the particular type of loading. Superscripts n
(4)The required movement in unrestrained directions for the line being supported is tabulated in the table of support loads. The support design is arranged to accommodate this required movement of the piping. Hangers are designed in such a manner that they cannot become disengaged by any movement of the supported pipe.
      = 1, 2, 3, and 4 represent respectively axial compression, circumferential compression, torsion, and bending loads.
(5)If ASME Code Case N-318-3 is used in the design of integral welded attachments to the piping pressure boundary, the requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.84 are documented in TVA calculations.(d)Deformation LimitsPipe support stiffness/deflection limitations are required for seismic Category I.The following criteria are used for support stiffness requirements:
The following interaction equations were used in the design of the cylindrical shell.
(1)All pipe support structural steel, except as described below, is designed to limit the maximum deflection to 0.0625" (based on the greater of the seismic/dynamic load components of the upset or MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-45WATTS BARWBNP-79faulted loading conditions, or based on the minimum design load). In addition, the maximum deflection is limited to 0.125" (based on the total design load). These analyses were performed independently for each restrained direction (axis) at the point of load application.
(a)   Axial Compression and Circumferential Compression m =k                                  m =k N(m1 ) F m                      N(m2 ) F m
(2)The first dynamic support in each lateral direction adjacent to strain sensitive equipment (i.e., pump, compressor or turbine nozzle) is designed to limit the maximum deflection to 0.0625" (based on the total design load). This analysis is performed independently for each restrained direction (axis) at the point of load application.
                                            ------------------- +
(3)Except for the unbraced cantilevers, baseplate rotation or deflection due to baseplate flexibility are considered insignificant and, therefore, are not considered. Anchor bolt stiffness is not considered for this evaluation.
cr(1) t                  ------------------
(4)For supports with a common member (i.e., gang supports) the deflection at the point under consideration due to the simultaneous application of each pipe's dead weight and thermal loads added algebraically are evaluated to determine the maximum deflection for both the hot and cold pipe conditions. The deflection at the point under consideration resulting from the simultaneous application of each pipe's dynamic loads is determined by SRSS method. The total deflection due to dead weight plus thermal, and dynamic loads is evaluated based on absolute summation of the two deflections calculated above.
cr(2) t
(5)Support components carrying load primarily in axial tension or compression meet the requirements for stiffness without further evaluation. Also, the stiffness/deflection limitations do not apply in the unrestrained support direction (i.e., due to friction loads).
                                                                                                -< 1 m=o                                  m=o (b)   Axial Compression and Bending m =k                                  m=k N(m1 ) Fm                        N(m4 ) Fm
(6)Component standard support elements are considered rigid and therefore, no stiffness/deflection evaluation is necessary except as provided in approved design standards.
                                        ------------------- +
(7)Higher deflection limits may be used if justified on a case-by-case basis.(e)Considerations for the Faulted Condition Table 3.9-21 identifies the allowed stresses associated with the faulted condition. The faulted load conditions, represented by postulated pipe whip and jet impingement, are evaluated as described in Section 3.6 for all systems, piping, equipment, and structures shown on issued TVA drawings. Piping, systems, pipe supports and other structures that are the targets of postulated pipe whip or jet impingement may require 3.9-46MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-91protection to assure safe plant shutdown. This protection is provided by evaluation on a case-by-case basis.For evaluation of field routed piping or other field located equipment a different method is used. For these cases, a minimum allowable separation method is used for screening piping systems, conduit, and instrument lines to assure that adequate separation exists between these systems and postulated breaks or through-wall leakage cracks in fluid piping. Where adequate separation is not available, piping is relocated, supports are strengthened, supports added, or mitigative devices are provided to prevent unacceptable loads. Piping and supports subjected to a jet force from a break in piping of equal or less nominal size and wall thickness are assumed to receive no unacceptable damage, provided the target piping and supports are designed in accordance with accepted codes; i.e. ASME Section III, ANSI B31.1, AISC, etc.(f)ResultsThe design information for pipe supports of systems analyzed by TVA is tabulated on tables of support design loads and included in the problem file as indicated in Section 3.9.3.1.2.
cr(1) t                  ------------------- < 19 cr(4) t m=o                                    m =o (c)   Axial Compression and Torsion m= k                                                                  2 N(m1 ) Fm                  m= k N( 3 ) F
(2)Mechanical Equipment and Component SupportsTVA-designed supports for Category I equipment and components satisfy the AISC allowable stress limits described in Section 3.8.4.5.2 and the stiffness requirements described in Section 3.7.3.16.5. Valve actuator supports are designed as pipe supports. Valve actuator tiebacks have special stiffness requirements to limit valve extended, structure stresses under load.Vendor-supplied equipment and component supporting structures that are provided as part of the equipment assembly, are seismically qualified as part of the equipment package. This qualification is described in Section 3.9.3.1.2. 3.9.4  Control Rod System 3.9.4.1  Descriptive Information of CRDSRefer to Section 4.2.3.
                                        ------------------- +
3.9.4.2  Applicable CRDS Design SpecificationsRefer to Sections 4.2.3.1.4 and 4.2.3.2.2.3.9.4.3  Design Loadings, Stress Limits, a nd Allowable DeformationsRefer to Section 4.2.3.3.1.
m m
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-47WATTS BARWBNP-79 3.9.4.4  CRDS Performance Assurance ProgramRefer to Section 4.2.3.4.2.
                                                                                                - <1
3.9.5  Reactor Pressu re Vessel Internals3.9.5.1  Design ArrangementsFor verification that changes in design from those in previously licensed plants of similar design do not affect the flow-induced vibration behavior, refer to Section 3.9.2.3.3.9.5.2  Design Loading ConditionsRefer to Section 4.2.2.3.3.9.5.3  Design Loading CategoriesRefer to Section 4.2.2.4.3.9.5.4  Design BasisRefer to Section 4.2.2.5.
                                                                              ------------------
3.9.6  Inservice Testin g of Pumps and ValvesInservice testing of ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 pumps and valves will be conducted to the extent practical in accordance with the 1989 Edition of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Subsections IWV and IWP, as required by 10 CFR 50.55a(g). Since the Watts Bar piping systems were designed before the Code was issued, some valves and pump parameters cannot be tested in accordance with Subsections IWP and IWV. These exceptions have been noted in the program submittal made to NRC.The following safety-related pumps will be tested:
cr(1) t                              (3) t m=o                                    m=o            cr 3.8B-4                                                                                                                    BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA
(1)Centrifugal Charging Pumps (2)Safety Injection Pumps (3)Residual Heat Removal Pumps (4)Containment Spray Pumps (5)Component Cooling System Circulation Pumps (6)Auxiliary Feedwater Pumps (7)Essential Raw Cooling Water Pumps (8)Boric Acid Transfer Pumps (9)ERCW Screenwash Pumps (10)Main Control Room Chilled Water Pumps (11)Electrical Board Room Chilled Water Pumps (12)Shutdown Board Room Chilled Water PumpsTable 3.9-26 is a tabulation of the various category valves in each of the systems.
3.9-48MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-91REFERENCES (1)"Documentation of Selected Westinghouse Structural Analysis Computer Codes", WCAP-8252, April 1977.
(2)WCAP-8317-A, "Prediction of the Flow-Induced Vibration of Reactor Internals by Scale Model Tests," March 1974.
(3)WCAP-8517, "UHI Plant Internals Vibration Measurement Program and Pre and Post Hot Functional Examinations," March 1975.
(4) WCAP-7879, "Four Loop PWR Internals Assurance and Test Program," July 1972.(5)Trojan Final Safety Analysis Report, Appendix A-12.
(6)Fabic, S., "Description of the BLODWN-2 Computer Code," WCAP-7918, Revision 1, October 1970.
(7)Fabic, S., "Computer Program WHAM for Calculation of Pressure Velocity, and Force Transients in Liquid Filled Piping Networks, "Kaiser Engineers Report No. 67-49-R, November 1967.
(8)Bohn, G. J., "Indian Point Unit No. 2 Internals Mechanical Analysis for Blowdown Excitation," WCAP-7332-AR-P. November, 1973 (Proprietary) and WCAP-7822-AR, November, 1973 (Non-Proprietary)
(9)Bohm, G. J. and LaFaille, J. P., "Reactor Internals Response Under a Blowdown Accident," First Intl. Conf. on Structural Mechanics in Reactor Technology, Berlin, September 20-24, 1971.
(10)"Bench Mark Problem Solutions Employed for Verification of WECAN Computer Program", WCAP-8929, June 1977.
(11)WCAP-11627, "Upflow Conversion Safety Evaluation Report - Watts Bar Units 1 & 2," September 1987.
(12)Letter from Peter S. Tam, NRC, to M. O. Medford, TVA, "Watts Bar Nuclear Plant - Upflow Conversion Modification to Reactor Internals (TAC M85802 & M85803)", dated July 28, 1993.
(13)Westinghouse letter, WAT-D-7489, "Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Units Numbers 1 and 2 Main Steam Safety Valves Excess Blowdown Analysis - Phase 2",
August 28, 1987.
(14)WCAP-7769, "Topical Report Overpressure Protection for Westinghouse Pressurized Water Reactors," Rev. 1, June, 1972.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-49WATTS BARWBNP-45(A)The responses for each loading combination are combine using the absolute sum method. On a case-by-case basis, algebraic summation may be used when signs are known for final design evaluations.(B)Temperature is used to determine allowable stress only.
(C)Nozzle loads are those loads associated with the particular plant operating conditions for the component under consideration.Revised by Amendment 45Table 3.9-1  Design Loading Combinations For ASME Code Class 2 And 3 Components And Supports Analyzed By Westinghouse, (Excluding Pipe Supports) (A)Condition ClassificationLoading Combination (B, C)Design and NormalDesign pressureDesign temperature, Dead weight, nozzle


loadsUpsetUpset condition pressure,Upset condition metal temaperature, deadweight, OBE, nozzle loadsEmergencyEmergencey condition pressure,emergency condition metal temperature, deadweight, nozzle loadsFaultedFaulted condition pressure, faulted condition metal temperature, deadweig ht, SSE, nozzle loads 3.9-50MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79Table 3.9-2  Stress Criteria For Safety Related Asme Class 2 And 3 Tanks Analyzed By Westinghouse Table 3.9-2 ConditionStress Limits Design and Normal m 1.0 S ( m or  L) +  b 1.5 SUpset m 1.1 S ( m or  L) +  b  1.65 SEmergency m 1.5 S ( m or  L) +  b  1.8 SFaulted m 2.0 S ( m or  L) +  b  2.4 S MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-51WATTS BARWBNP-64*Stress limits are taken from ASME III, Subsections NC and ND, or, for pumps procured prior to the incorporation of these limits into ASME III, from Code Case 1636.**The maximum pressure shall not exceed the tabulated factors listed under P max times the design pressure.Table 3.9-3  Stress Criteria for Category I ASME Code Class 2 and Class 3 Inactive Pumps and Pump Supports Analyzed by WestinghouseConditionStress Limits*P max**Design and Normal m  1.0 S  1.0
WATTS BAR                                                                                                                          WBNP-86 (d)  Axial Compression, Bending, and Torsion m= k                            m =k                              m= k (3)                      2 N(m1 ) Fm                        N(m4 ) Fm                      N m F m
( m or  L) + b  1.5 SUpset m  1.1 S  1.1
                                      ------------------- +
( m or  L) +  b  1.65 SEmergency m 1.5 S  1.2
cr(1 ) t                  ------------------- +
( m or  L) +  b  1.80 SFaulted m 2.0 S  1.5
cr(4) t                  ------------------- < 1 cr(3) t m=o                              m=o                              m=o (e)   Axial Compression, Circumferential Compression, and Torsion m=k                            m= k                                m=k                        2 N(m1 ) Fm                        N(m2 ) Fm                      N(m3 ) Fm
( m or  L) +  b  2.4 S 3.9-52MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-86 Notes:1.Valve nozzle (piping load) stress analysis is not required when both the following conditions are satisfied by calculation:  (1) section modulus and area of a plane, normal to the flow, through the region of valve body crotch is at least 10% greater than the piping connected (or joined) to the valve body inlet and outlet nozzles; and, (2) code allowable stress, S, for valve body material is equal to or greater than the code allowable stress, S, of connected piping material. If the valve body material allowable stress is less than that of the connected piping, the valve section modulus and area as calculated in (1) above shall be multiplied by the ratio of S pipe/S valve. If unable to comply with this requirement, the design 2.Casting quality factor of 1.0 shall be used.
                              ------------------- +
3.These stress limits are applicable to the pressure retaining boundary, and include the effects of loads transmitted by the extended structures, when applicable.4.Design requirements listed in this table are not applicable to valve discs, stems, seat rings, or other parts of valves which are contained within the confines of the body and bonnet, or otherwise not part of the pressure boundary.5.These rules do not apply to Class 2 and 3 safety relief valves. Safety relief valves are designed in accordance with ASME Section III requirements.6.Stress limits are taken from ASME III, Subsections NC and ND, or, for valves procured prior to the incorporation of these limits into ASME III, from Code Case 1635.7.The maximum pressure resulting from upset, emergency or faulted conditions shall not exceed the tabulated factors listed under P max times the design pressure or the rated pressure at the applicable operating condition temperature. If the pressure rating limits are met at the operating conditions, the stress limits in Table 3.9-4 are considered to be satisfied.Table 3.9-4  Stress Criteria For Safety Related ASME Code Class 2 and Class 3 Valves Analyzed by WestinghouseConditionStress Limits (Notes 1-6)P max (Note 7)Design & NormalValve bodies shall conform to the requirements of ASME Section III, NC-3500 (or ND-3500)Upset m  1.1 S1.1 ( m or  L) +  b  1.65 SEmergency m  1.5 S1.2 ( m or  L) +  b  1.80 SFaulted m  2.0 S1.5 ( m or  L) +  b  2.4 S MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-53WATTS BARWBNP-64Table 3.9-5  Deleted by Amendment 64 3.9-54MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79 Note:(1)The stress limits specified for active pumps are more restrictive than the ASME III limits, to provide assurance that operability will not be impaired for any operating condition.Table 3.9-6  Design Criteria For Active Pumps And Pump Supports Analyzed By WestinghouseConditionDesign Criteria(1)Design, Normal and Upset m  1.0 S m  +  b  1.5 SEmergency m  1.2 S m  +  b  1.65 SFaulted m  1.2 S m  +  b  1.8 S MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-55WATTS BARWBNP-86Table 3.9-7  Load SourcesLoadDescriptionBUILDING SETTLEMENTPredicted or Measured Settlement of the Building DBADesign Basis Accident Loading DEADWEIGHTWeight of Pipe, Insulation, and Fluid FLUID TRANSIENTSTransient Loads Due to Valve Operation, Water HammerLOCAReactor Coolant Loop Movements Due to Loss of Coolant AccidentOBEOperating Basis Earthquake PRESSUREInternal (or External) Pressure in Pipe SAMSeismic Anchor Motions SSESafe Shutdown Earthquake THERMALOperating Temperature, Environmental Temperature, Thermal Anchor MovementsVALVE THRUSTRelief Valve Discharge Thrust Loads PIPE RUPTUREJet Impingement and Pipe Whip Loads 3.9-56MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-91Table 3.9-8  Loading Constituents And Stress Limits for ASME Class 1 Piping (Page 1 of 2)
cr(1) t                    ------------------- +
CONDITION LOADING CONSTITUENTS 1STRESSLIMIT  NB-3650EQUATION 2 NOTESPRIMARY STRESS
cr(2) t                  ------------------- < 1 cr(3) t m= o                            m= o                              m= o The longitudinal membrane stresses produced by the nonaxisymmetric pressure loads (NASPL) were considered as caused by bending loads in the interaction equations.
3.8B.3 SHELLS STIFFENED WITH A COMBINATION OF CIRCUMFERENTIAL AND VERTICAL STIFFENERS 3.1   The shell was provided with permanent circumferential and vertical stiffeners.
The circumferential stiffeners were designed to have a spring stiffness at least great enough to enforce nodes in the vertical stiffeners so as to preclude a general instability mode of buckling failure, thus ensuring that if buckling occurs, it will occur in stiffened panels between the circumferential stiffeners.
An acceptable procedure for determining the critical buckling stresses in the vertical stiffeners and stiffened panels is outlined in Section 3.43 Shell Analysis Manual, by E. H. Baker A. P. Cappelli, L. Kovalevsky, F. L. Rish, and R. M. Verette, National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C., Contractor Report CR-912, April 1968.
3.2   In addition for shells stiffened with a combination of circumferential and vertical stiffeners under combined load, the criterion for buckling failure of the shell plate is expressed by an interaction equation of stress ratios in the form y
R 1X + R 2 + R 3Z < 1 similar to the interaction equations of Section 2.5.
The critical buckling stresses for the shell plates between the circumferential and vertical stiffeners were determined by the following equations.
(a)   Curved Panel under Axial Compression.
The critical buckling stress for a curved cylindrical panel under axial compression alone is determined by the equation:
BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA                                                                                                            3.8B-5


DESIGN(Normal
WATTS BAR                                                                                          WBNP-79 Kc 2 E                    2 cr = --------------------------      --t-12 ( 1 -  2 )            b for various ranges of cylinder length given by:
  &
b2 Z = -----  2 Rt The constant Kc is determined from Figure 3.8B-8.
Upset)PRESSURE,DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, OBE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS 1.5S m    9EMERGENCYPRESSURE,DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, OBE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS 2.25S m    9EFAULTEDPRESSURE,DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, SEE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS, DBA INERTIA, LOCA, PIPE RUPTURE 3.0S m    9F  5PRIMARY AND SECONDARY STRESS NORMAL  &
(b)   Curved Panel in Circumferential Compression The critical buckling stress of a curved cylindrical panel under circumferential compression was determined by Section 2.2.
UPSETPRESSURE, THERMAL,THERMAL ANCHOR MOVEMENT, THERMAL LINEAR GRADIENT, THERMAL DISCONTINUITY, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENT, OBE, OBE SAM 3.0S m  10  3PRESSURE, THERMAL,THERMAL ANCHOR MOVEMENT, THERMAL NONLINEAR GRADIENT, THERMAL LINEAR GRADIENT, THERMAL DISCONTINUITY, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENT, OBE, OBE SAM  11  4,8THERMAL, THERMAL ANCHOR MOVEMENTS  3.0S m    12    3 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-57WATTS BARWBNP-91 Notes1.Loads which are not concurrent need not be combined.
(c)   Curved Panel Under Torsion The shear buckling stress of a curved cylindrical panel subjected to torsional loads is given by:
2.All references are for ASME Code, Subsection NB for Class 1 piping.3.If the requirements of equation 10 are not met, then the requirements of equations 12 & 13 must be met.4.S alt for all load sets are calculated per NB-3653.3 and then, the cumulative usage factor per NB-3653.4 and NB-3653.5. The cumulative usage factor shall not exceed 1.0.5.The design measures taken to protect against pipe rupture loads and the evaluation of these loads is described in Section 3.6.6.The allowable pressure value P a is calculated per NB 3640.7.The testing limits are per NB 3226.
Ks2 E                    t 2 cr = --------------------------- --- a  b 12 ( 1 - 2 )  b for values of:
8.If there are more than 10 hydrostatic, pneumatic or other tests, then such extra tests shall be included in the fatigue evaluation.PRESSURE,DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, OBE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS, THERMAL DISCONTINUITY  3.0S m    13    3 TESTINGPRESSURE  0.9S y  7,8PRESSURE,DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS  1.35S yPRESSURE DESIGNDESIGNDESIGN PRESSURE     P a    6UPSETMax. Service PRESSURE      P a    6EMERGENCYMax. Service PRESSURE  1.5P a    6FAULTEDMax. Service PRESSURE  2.0P a    6Table 3.9-8 Loading Constituents And Stress Limits for ASME Class 1 Piping (Page 2 of 2) 3.9-58MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-64Table 3.9-9  Loading Constituents And Stress Limits For Category I ASME Class 2 and 3 Piping CONDITIONLOADINGCONSTITUENTS 1 STRESS LIMIT  NC-3652EQUATION 2NOTESNORMALPRESSURE,DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS    S h    8UPSETPRESSURE,DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, OBE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS  1.2S h    9U    4EMERGENCYPRESSURE,DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, OBE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS  1.8S h    9EFAULTEDPRESSURE,DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, SSE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS, DBA INERTIA, LOCA, PIPE RUPTURE  2.4S h    9F    5 NORMAL  OR UPSET THERMAL,OBE SAM    S A    10  3,4 NORMAL  OR UPSETPRESSURE,DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL, OBE SAM  S A+S h    11  3,4 NORMAL  OR FAULTEDBUILDING SETTLEMENT,DBA SCV MOVEMENT  3.0S c    10ATESTPRESSURE, DEADWEIGHT  1.2S hTESTPRESSURE,DEADWEIGHT, THERMAL S A+S h MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-59WATTS BARWBNP-64 Notes1.Loads which are not concurrent need not be combined.
b2 Z = -----  2 Rt The coefficient, Ks, is given in Figure 3.8B-9. For cylindrical panels with length, a, less than the arc length, b, the shear buckling stress is determined by:
2.All references are for ASME Code, Subsection NC for Class 2 piping. The corresponding equations in ASME Code Subsection ND for Class 3 should be used as applicable.3.The requirements of either Equation 10 or Equation 11 must be met.
K s' 2 E                t 2 cr = -------------------------- --- a b 12 ( 1 - 2 ) a for values of:
4.The effects of OBE Seismic Anchor Movements may be excluded from Equations 10 and 11 if they are included in Equation 9U.5.The design measures taken to protect against pipe rupture loads and the evaluation of these loads is described in Section 3.6.
a2 z = ----- 2 Rt 3.8B-6                                                                              BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA
3.9-60MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79 Notes(1)  Loads which are not concurrent need not be combined.
(2) The design measures taken to protect against pipe rupture loads and the evaluation of these loads are described in Section 3.6.(3) The stress is calculated using the section modulus of the attached pipe.(4)  The value of pipe yield stress, S y, in this table is determined from the code of record for piping analysis (reference Section 3.7.3.8.1).Table 3.9-10  Loading Constituents And Stress Limits for Active Valve EvaluationLOADING CONSTITUENTS (1)STRESS LIMIT (3)PRESSURE, DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL, SSE INERTIA, SSE SAM, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS, DBA INERTIA, LOCA, PIPE RUPTURE (2)0.76S y (4)1.0S y(4) (for swing check valves)
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-61WATTS BARWBNP-64Table 3.9-11  Deleted by Amendment 64 3.9-62MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-64Table 3.9-12  Deleted by Amendment 64 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-63WATTS BARWBNP-64 Notes:1. Loads which are not concurrent need not be combined.
: 2. The design measures taken to protect against pipe rupture loads and the evaluation of these loads is described in Section 3.6.Table 3.9-13a Design Loads For Category I Piping Supports Table 3.9-13a CONDITION  LOADINGCONSTITUENTS 1  NOTESNORMALDEADWEIGHT,OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMALUPSETDEADWEIGHT,OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL, OBE INERTIA, OBE SAM, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTSEMERGENCY DEADWEIGHT,OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL, OBE INERTIA, OBE SAM, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTSFAULTEDDEADWEIGHT,OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL, SEE INERTIA, SSE SAM, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS, DBA INERTIA, LOCA, PIPE RUPTURE    2TESTDEADWEIGHT,OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL 3.9-64MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-91*Temperature is used to determine allowable stress only.**Nozzle loads are those loads associated with the particular plant operating conditions for the component under consideration.***Line-mounted component (valve) design load combinations correspond to the attached piping load combinations for normal, upset, emergency, and faulted conditions.Table 3.9-13b Design Loading Combinations For Category I Asme Code Class 2 and 3 Floor Mounted*** Components And Component Supports Analyzed by TVACondition ClassificationLoading CombinationDesign and NormalDesign pressureDesign temperature*
Dead weight, nozzle loads** (Operating Loads)UpsetUpset condition pressure,Upset condition metal temperature*, deadweight, OBE, nozzle loads** (Operating Loads)EmergencyEmergency condition pressure, emergencycondition metal temperature*, deadweight, OBE, nozzle loads** (Operating Loads)FaultedFaulted condition pressure, faulted condition metal temperature*, deadweight, SSE, nozzle loads** (Operating Loads), DBA MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-65WATTS BARWBNP-68 Notes(1) The stress allowable values given above were permitted for design, evaluation, and modification activities. As an alternative, a simplified approach was also permitted. By the alternative approach, in addition to meeting the applicable design condition requirements, the tank was analyzed for the faulted condition and tank stresses were limited to 1.2 times the applicable ASME code design/normal condition primary stress allowables.(2)The maximum pressure was not permitted to exceed the tabulated factors listed under P max times the design pressure.Table 3.9-14 Stress Criteria for Category I ASME Class 2 and Class 3 Tanks Analyzed by TVAConditionStress Limits (1)P max (2)Design and NormalP m 1.0 S h (P m or P L) + P b  1.5 S h  1.0Upset P m 1.1 S h (P m or P L) + P b 1.65 S h  1.1EmergencyP m  1.5 S h (P m or P L) + P b  1.8 S h  1.2Faulted P m 2.0 S h (P m or P L) + P b 2.4 S h  1.5 P m , P L , P b, and S h are as defined in Table 3.9-18.
3.9-66MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79 Notes:(1)The maximum pressure does not exceed the tabulated factors listed under P max times the design pressure.he stress allowable values given above were permitted for design, evaluation, and modification activities. As an alternative, a simplified approach was permitted for pumps procured prior to September 1, 1974. By this alternative approach, in addition to meeting applicable ASME code design condition requirements, the pump was analyzed for the faulted condition and pump stresses were limited to 1.2 times the applicable ASME code design/normal condition primary


stress allowables.Table 3.9-15  Stress Criteria For Category I ASME Code Class 2 and Class 3 Inactive Pumps Analyzed by TVAConditionStress Limits (2)P max (1)Design and NormalP m  1.0 S h (P m or P L) + P b  1.5 S h  1.0Upset P m  1.1 S h (P m or P L) + P b  1.65 S h  1.1EmergencyP m  1.5 S h (P m or P L) + P b  1.8 S h  1.2Faulted P m  2.0 S h (P m or P L) + P b  2.4 S h  1.5 P m , P L , P b, and S h are as defined in Table 3.9-18.
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-79 Curves for determining Ks, are given in Figure 3.8B-10.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-67WATTS BARWBNP-79 Notes:1.Valve nozzle (Piping load) stress analysis is not required when both the following conditions are satisfied by calculation:  (1) section modulus and area of a plane, normal to the flow, through the region of valve body crotch is at least 10% greater than the piping connected (or joined) to the valve body inlet and outlet nozzles; and, (2)  code allowable stress, S, for valve body material is equal to or greater than the code allowable stress, S, to connected piping material. If the valve body material allowable stress is less than that of the connected piping, the valve section modulus and area as calculated in (1) above shall be multiplied by the ratio of S pipe/Svalve. If unable to comply with this requirement, the design by analysis procedure of NB-3545.2 is an acceptable alternate method.2.Casting quality factor of 1.0 shall be used.
(d)   Curved Panels Under Bending The critical buckling stress for a curved panel in bending shall be computed using the equation for axial compression given in (a) of this section.
3.These stress limits are applicable to the pressure retaining boundary, and include the effects of loads transmitted by the extended structures, when applicable.4.Design requirements listed in this table are not applicable to valve discs, stems, seat rings, or other parts of valves which are contained within the confines of the body and bonnet, or otherwise not part of the pressure boundary. 5.These rules do not apply to Class 2 and 3 safety relief valves. Safety relief valves are designed in accordance with ASME Section III requirements.6.The stress allowable values given above were permitted for design, evaluation, and modification activities. As an alternative, a simplified approach was permitted for valves procured prior to September 1, 1974. By this alternative approach, in addition to meeting the applicable ASME code design condition requirements, the valve was analyzed or tested per IEEE 344-1971 requirements for the faulted condition. When qualified by analysis using this alternative, the valve stresses were limited to 1.2 times the applicable ASME code design/normal condition primary stress allowables and the valve extended structure stresses were limited to 1.33 times the AISC code normal stress allowables.7.The maximum pressure resulting from upset or faulted conditions shall not exceed the tabulated factors listed under P max times the design pressure or the rated pressure at the applicable Table 3.9-16  Stress Criteria For Category I ASME Code Class 2 And Class 3 Inactive Valves Analyzed By TVAConditionStress Limits (Notes 1-6)P max( note 7) Design and NormalP m  S h (P m or P L) + P b  1.5 S h      1.0Upset P m  1.1 S h (P m or P L) + P b  1.65 S h      1.1EmergencyP m  1.5 S h (P m or P L) + P b  1.8 S h      1.2Faulted P m  2.0 S h (P m or P L) + P b  2.4 S h      1.5 P m , P L , P b, and S h are as defined in Table 3.9-18.
3.3  The critical buckling stress in a stiffened hemispherical shell for the analysis required in the bid specification is not treated in the Shell Analysis Manual, and except for external pressure, was determined by the following equation:
3.9-68MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79operating condition temperature. If the pressure rating limits are met at the operating conditions, the stress limits in this table are considered to be satisfied.
t cr = 0.125E ----
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-69WATTS BARWBNP-91Table 3.9-17  Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 1 of 9)System NameTVA Valve No.W Valve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description Chemical andVolume Control System (62)FCV-62-61FCV-62-63 FCV-62-69 1FCV-62-70 1FCV-62-72 FCV-62-73 FCV-62-74 FCV-62-77 FCV-62-84 FCV-62-90 FCV-62-91 FCV-62-76 LCV-62-132 LCV-62-133 LCV-62-135 LCV-62-136 CKV-62-504 RFV-62-505 CKV-62-507 RFV-62-518 CKV-62-519 CKV-62-543 2CKV-62-560 2CKV-62-561 2  8112 8100 LCV-460 LCV-459 8149A 8149B 8149C 8152 8145 8105 8106 8306A LCV-112B LCV-112C LCV-112D LCV-112E 8546 8124
R where:
  ---
t = thickness of shell E = modulus of elasticity R = radius of shell 3.8B.4 SPHERICAL SHELLS 3.8B.4.1 The critical buckling stress in the spherical dome, except for external pressure, was determined by the following equation:
8118 8497 8381  8368A 8368B 4 4 3
Et cr = 0.125 ------
3 2
R where t = thickness of shell E = modulus of elasticity R = radius of shell 3.8B.4.2 Spherical Shell Under Combined Loads The criterion for buckling failure of the dome is expressed by an interaction equation of the stress ratios in the form:
2 2
y R 1X + R 2 + R 3Z < 1 BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA                                                                        3.8B-7
2 3
3 3
2 4
4 8
8 8
:
1
:
3 3 2 2  Motor  Motor Air Air Air Air Air Motor Air Motor Motor Air Motor Motor Motor Motor Self Actuated


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-86 similar to the interaction equation of Section 2.5.
A set of interaction equations similar to those in Section 2.5 was used in the design except that the effects due to torsion were considered.
3.8B.5 FACTOR OF SAFETY The buckling stress criteria were evaluated to determine the factors of safety against buckling inherent in the criteria. The factors which affect stability were determined and the criteria were evaluated to account for these factors. The basis used to evaluate the criteria to account for the factors were (1) how well established are the effects of the factors on stability of these shells (2) amount of supporting data in the literature and (3) margins marked by the critical stresses and interaction equations used in the criteria.
The buckling criteria were found to be very conservative and judged to provide at least a factor of safety of 2.0 against buckling for all loading conditions for which the vessels were designed.
In addition, a load factor of 1.1 will be applied to load conditions which include the Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE). A load factor of 1.25 will be used with all other load conditions.
3.8B-8                                                                      BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA


Self Actuated
BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WATTS BAR Table 3.8B-1 MULTIPLE LOAD COMBINATIONS VARIOUS PLANT CONDITIONS LOADING CONDITIONS (Page 1 of 3)
MSLB Norm.                Accident                  MSLB          Post Const.                Normal  Oper. 1/2  Accident    (Static)  Accident    Accident    Accident Load Components        Cond. Test. Cond. Design    SSE      1/2 SSE    1/2 SSE      SSE      (Static) SSE  Flooding Personnel Access Lock Load                                      X        X Penetration Loads                              X        X          X          X          X            X Containment Vessel and Appurtenances        X          X          X        X          X          X          X            X Dead Loads Walkway Live Loads                              X Spray Header and Lighting Fixtures                              X                                X                        X Live Loads Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE)
Lateral and Vertical                                                                        X            X Loads Design Internal Pressure of Design                  X External Pressure One-half Safe Shutdown                                        X        X          X          X Earthquake (1/2 SSE) Lateral and Vertical Loads 3.8B-9                                                                                                                                                    WBNP-64


Self Actuated Self Actuated   Self  Actuated Self Actuated Self ActuatedGateGate Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Gate Globe Gate Gate Globe Gate Gate Gate Gate Check Relief Check Relief Check CheckCheck CheckContainment IsolationContainment Isolation Letdown Isolation Letdown Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Aux Spray Isolation ECCS Flowpath Integrity ECCS Flowpath Integrity Containment Isolation CVCS Charging Pump Suction CVCS Charging Pump Suction CVCS Charging Pump Suction CVCS Charging Pump Suction CVCS Charging Pump Suction CCP Suction Relief Valve CCP Suction Chem Feed Check Valve PD CHG Pump Discharge Relief Recip, CP Discharge Check Valve Containment Isolation
Table 3.8B-1 MULTIPLE LOAD COMBINATIONS VARIOUS PLANT CONDITIONS 3.8B-10 WATTS BAR LOADING CONDITIONS (Page 2 of 3)
MSLB Norm.                Accident                  MSLB          Post Const.                Normal   Oper. 1/2  Accident    (Static)  Accident    Accident    Accident Load Components      Cond. Test. Cond. Design    SSE      1/2 SSE    1/2 SSE      SSE      (Static) SSE  Flooding Design Internal Pressure or                                                        X                      X Pressure Transient Loads Design Temperature                            X Internal Temperature Range                                      X of 60EF to 120EF Internal Temperature Range                                                  X                      X of 80EF to 250EF Thermal Stress Loads Including                                                    X                      X Shell Temperature Transients Hydrostatic Load Case 1a or 1B                                                      X                      X (See Note 1)
BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA Hydrostatic Load                                                                                                    X Case II (See Note 1)
Wind Loads            X (See Note 2)
Show Loads            X WBNP-64 (See Note 2)


Containment Isolation
Table 3.8B-1 MULTIPLE LOAD COMBINATIONS VARIOUS PLANT CONDITIONS BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WATTS BAR LOADING CONDITIONS (Page 3 of 3)
MSLB Norm.                    Accident                  MSLB          Post Const.                    Normal      Oper. 1/2    Accident      (Static)  Accident    Accident    Accident Load Components      Cond.      Test. Cond. Design        SSE        1/2 SSE      1/2 SSE      SSE      (Static) SSE  Flooding Temporary                X Construction Loads Internal Test                        X Pressure Weight of                            X Contained Air MSLB Pressure                                                                              X                      X Internal Temperature Range                                                                          X                      X of 80EF to 327EF Airlock Live Load                                  X Notes:
: 1. Hydrostatic loads case 1A & 1B, and load case II are shown on TVA drawing 48N400.
: 2. Wind and snow loads do not act simultaneously.
: 3. For allowable stress condition see Table 3.8.B-2.
3.8B-11                                                                                                                                                            WBNP-64


Containment Isolation 3.9-70MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-91CKV-62-562 2CKV-62-563 2CKV-62-576 1CKV-62-577 1CKV-62-578 1CKV-62-579 1CKV-62-638 11-CKV-62-639CKV-62-640 11-RFV-62-649 CKV-62-659 1CKV-62-660 1CKV-62-661 1CKV-62-525CKV-62-532FCV-62-1228FCV-62-1229 1-RFV-62-662 1-RFV-62-1220 1-RFV-62-1221 1-RFV-62-1222  8368C  8368D 8367A 8367B 8367C 8367D 8557 85568378 8379 8377 8481A 8481B  8870B  8870A 8117  2 2 2
3.8B-12 WATTS BAR Table 3.8B-2 Allowable Stress Intensities Plus Buckling Load Factors Loading Conditions                                          Applicable ASME Code                Buckling Load Reference (1) for Stress Intensity        Factors Normal Design Condition                                            NB-3221                      In accordance with Construction Condition                                                                          ASME Code, Section VIII Normal Operation Condition                                          NB-3222                      Load factor = 1.25 for both cylindrical portion and hemispherical head Upset Operation Condition                                          NB-3223                      Load factor = 1.25 for both cylindrical portion and hemispherical head Emergency Operation Condition                                      NB-3224                      Load factor = 1.10 for both cylindrical portion and hemispherical head Test Condition                                                      NB-3226                      NA Post-Accident Fuel Recovery                                        NB-3224                      NA Condition (1) All code references are to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, Nuclear Power Plant Components, 1971 Edition, with Winter 1971 Addenda.
2 2
BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WBNP-91
2 3
: 3 2
3 3 3
4 4 1 1 2
:
:
:: Self Actuated Self Actuated


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                              WBNP-64 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA                                3.8B-13


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                WBNP-64 3.8B-14  BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WBNP-91 Figure 3.8B-1 Buckling Stress Coefficient, CC , for Unstiffened Unpressurized Circular 3.8B-15                                        Cylinders Subjected to Axial Compression


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR 3.8B-16 BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WBNP-91 Figure 3.8B-2 Increase in Axial-Compressive Buckling-Stress Coefficient of Cylinders Due to Internal Pressure


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WBNP-91 Figure 3.8B-3 Buckling Coefficients for Circular Cylinders Subjected to External Pressure 3.8B-17


Self Actuated Self Actuated
WATTS BAR 3.8B-18 BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WBNP-64 Figure 3.8B-4 Buckling Stress Coefficient, CS, for Unstiffened Unpressurized Circular Cylinders Subjected to Torsion


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WBNP-64 Figure 3.8B-5 Increase in Torsional Buckling-Stress Coefficient of Cylinders Due to Internal Pressure 3.8B-19


Self Actuated Self Actuated
WATTS BAR 3.8B-20 BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA Figure 3.8B-6 Buckling-Stress Coefficient, CB, for Unstiffened Unpressurized Circular Cylinders Subjected to Bending WBNP-64


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WBNP-64 Figure 3.8B-7 Increase in Bending Buckling-Stress Coefficient of Cylinders Due to Internal Pressure 3.8B-21


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR 3.8B-22 BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WBNP-64 Figure 3.8B-8 Buckling-Stress Coefficient, KC, For Unpressurized Curved Panels Subjected to Axial Compression


Self Actuated Air Air Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                                              WBNP-64 Figure 3.8B-9 Buckling-Stress Coefficient, KS, for Unpressurized Curved Panels Subjected to Shear BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA                                                                                                3.8B-23


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                                              WBNP-64 Figure 3.8B-10 Buckling-Stress Coefficient, K'S, for Unpressurized Curved Panels Subjected to Shear 3.8B-24                                                                                                  BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                              WBNP- 92 3.8C  DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS 3.8C.1 INTRODUCTION This appendix presents abstracts of the computer programs employed in the design and analysis of the Watts Bar containment vessels. These abstracts explain the purpose of the program and give a brief description of the methods of analysis performed by the program.
Analytical derivations are not contained herein, but are in the CB&I Stress Report.
3.8C.2 PROGRAM 1017-MODAL ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURES USING THE EIGEN VALUE TECHNIQUE The purpose of this program is three-fold:
(1)  To calculate the mass and stiffness matrices associated with the structural model.
(2)  To determine the undamped natural periods of the model.
(3)  To calculate the maximum modal responses of the structure; i.e., deflections, shears, and moments.
The stiffness and mass matrices may be required in order to perform a dynamic analysis of the structure. The maximum modal responses may be used to perform a spectral analysis.
The program has the following options:
(1)  Vertical translation.
(2)  Torsional modes.
(3)  Soil-structure interaction.
(4)  Liquid sloshing.
(5)  Direct introduction of stiffness and mass matrices.
3.8C.3 PROGRAM 1044-SEISMIC ANALYSIS of VESSEL APPENDAGES Appendages to a vessel may not significantly contribute structurally to the dynamic responses of a model of a vessel. However, appendages can effect the vessel locally by vibrating differently from the model of the vessel at the point of attachment.
DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS                                                    3.8C-1


Self ActuatedCheckCheck Check Check Check Check Check CheckCheck Relief CheckCheck Check Check CheckGlobeGlobe Relief Relief Relief ReleifContainment Isolation
WATTS BAR                                                                              WBNP-86 The response spectrum method of analysis is not a strictly adequate way of obtaining the maximum appendage accelerations since it does not include the possible consequences of near resonance between the vessel model and the appendage model.
This paper describes the method used to evaluate the maximum elastic differential accelerations between an independently vibrating appendage model and an elastic beam vessel model at the appendage elevation due to known excitations of the elastic beam model.
The method involves two distinct steps. Firstly, the necessary time-absolute acceleration records are computed at appendage elevations due to model excitations.
Secondly, the maximum differential accelerations between each appendage model and the vessel model at the appendage elevation are obtained.
The time-absolute acceleration records at the appendage elevation are computed by use of a step-by-step matrix analysis procedure. The equations of motion for the vessel model are of the form:
[M] {&#xfc;} + (AT/) [K] {u} + [K] {u} = -[M] {&#xfc;g}
where
[M] =    Mass matrix, order n x n obtained from a modal analysis.
[K] =    Stiffness matrix, order n x n, obtained from a modal analysis.
A  =  Portion of first mode critical damping for the model T  =  First mode of the model
[M] = A diagonal matrix, order n x n, with diagonal elements corresponding to elements of the mass excited by translational accelerations.
{&#xfc;} = n x 1 matrix of relative accelerations between the model base and the n degrees of freedom.
{u} = n x 1 matrix of velocities corresponding to {&#xfc;}
{u} = n x 1 matrix of displacements corresponding to {&#xfc;}
{ug} = n x 1 matrix of translation base acceleration.
n  = Degrees of freedom of vessel model.
By taking a small time increment (smaller than the smallest period obtained from the model analysis) and letting accelerations vary linearly within the selected increment, the equations of motion can be integrated for the quantities {u}, {u}, and {&#xfc;} over the expected time increment[1]. The values obtained are superimposed upon the values of these quantities existing at the beginning of the time increment. This process is 3.8C-2                                                DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS


Containment IsolationCCP Discharge Header Integrity
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-79 repeated for the duration of the excitation. The time-absolute acceleration records for each translational degree of freedom are the sums of {&#xfc;} and {&#xfc;g} taken throughout the history of the excitation.
The second step is similar to the first step. The equation of motion (n = 1) is written for the appendage as a single degree-of-freedom elastic model using the time-absolute acceleration record obtained in Step 1 at the appendage elevation as the excitation.
This equation is solved in the same manner used in Step 1. The maximum absolute value of {&#xfc;} obtained is the quantity desired. It is the maximum differential acceleration between the appendage model and the vessel model due to a known excitation of the vessel mode.
For any appendage, this two-step procedure should be executed three times. This is required to evaluate normal, tangential and vertical appendage accelerations with respect to a vessel cross-section.
3.8C.4 PROGRAM E1668-SPECTRAL ANALYSIS FOR ACCELERATION RECORDS DIGITIZED AT EQUAL INTERVALS Program E1668 evaluates dynamic response spectra at various periods and presents the results on a printed plot. Given the time-acceleration record, the program numerically integrates the normal convolution time integral for various natural periods and damping ratios. The computed relative displacements, relative and pseudo-relative velocities, and absolute and pseudo-absolute accelerations are tabulated for periods from 0.025 seconds to 1 second.
3.8C.5 PROGRAM 1642-TRANSIENT PRESSURE BEAM ANALYSIS The program was developed to perform the numerical integration required for the transient pressure beam analysis. The pressure transient curve for each compartment is read in and stored as a series of coordinates. At any time instant the total force acting at each compartment is calculated by multiplying the pressures by the corresponding areas of the shell over which they act. Each force is then distributed to the vessel model masses directly above and below. The proportion applied to each mass is based upon their respective distances from the force.
For a given increment the program checks the current time, determines the current pressure in each compartment, calculates the current force on each mass and applies a recurrence formula. The deflection values, y(t) and y(t-t) are updated, the current time incremented, and the process is repeated.
The values of the orthogonal deflections are stored and also printed out for a prescribed number of times, every ten increments or so, and the equivalent static forces determined. Equivalent static forces are those which produce deflections identical to the calculated kinetic deflections; they are obtained by multiplying the deflection vector by the stiffness matrix.
[F] equivalent = [K] [Y]
The shears and moments at the particular time are then determined from statics:
DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS                                                        3.8C-3


CCP Discharge Header Integrity
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-88 Q = F M = F . moment arm The maximum moments, M =            M x2 + M y2 and maximum shears, Q =        Q x2 + Q y2 are then printed out at selected locations.
In addition the program will also print out an acceleration trace at the mass points.
3.8C.6 PROGRAM E1623-POST PROCESSOR PROGRAM FOR PROGRAM E1374 Program E1623 was written specifically for the TVA Watts Bar Containment Vessels.
It performs the following operations:
(1)  Using Fourier data generated by Program El374 (Dynamic Shell Analysis),
the summed displacements, forces and stresses found for various points around the shell circumference at each output point on the meridian.
(2)  The maximum of the summed values along with the associated time and azimuth are saved for each elevation and printed out at the end of the problem.
(3)  The following tables are printed:
(1)  Radial deflection, , at each elevation versus azimuth (2)  Longitudinal force, N, at each elevation versus azimuth (3)  Longitudinal moment, M, at each elevation versus azimuth (4)  Circumferential force, N, at each elevation versus azimuth The time basis for these tables is the occurrence of the minimum longitudinal force at the base.
(4)  Ring forces are calculated and then the maximums are pointed out.
(5)  Displacement traces at several elevations can be saved on a tape or disk unit.
(6)  The membrane stress resultants are saved on either a tape or disk unit for input into the buckling check program.
Program E1374 writes the Fourier amplitude results of the fundamental variables (,
        ' B, , Q, N, M, N) on a labeled tape after each timestop. Program E1623 reads this tape, interpolates to obtain the values at the output times, and calculates the remaining forces and all the stresses.
The amplitudes are then summed using the following equation:
3.8C-4                                                  DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS


CCP Discharge Header Integrity
WATTS BAR                                                                            WBNP-88 m                          m f (  , ,t ) =    gn ( x ,t ) cos n +  hn ( x ,t ) sin n n =1                        n=1 where:
where:
x = meridinal coordinate t = time g n (x, t) = amplitudes of cosine harmonics h n (x, t) = amplitudes of sine harmonics
                                                  = azimuth f(x, , t) = Fourier sum m = maximum number of circumferential waves 3.8C.7 PROGRAM E1374-SHELL DYNAMIC ANALYSIS 3.8C.7.1 Introduction Program E1374 is CBI's shell dynamic analysis program. Presently, it is capable of extracting eigenvalues and performing undamped transient analyses.
Non-axisymmetric loads can be handled through the use of appropriate Fourier series.
The equation of motion for a particular Fourier harmonic n of an undamped system is


CCP Discharge Header Integrity
[ Mn ] [ Un ] + [ Kn ] [ Un ] = [ Pn ]
where:
[Mn] = Mass matrix
[Kn] = Stiffness matrix
[Pn] = Applied load DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS                                                  3.8C-5


Normal Charging IsolationSeal Water 1-FCV-62-61 Bypass  Alternate Charging IsolationSeal Water Hx Relief Valve  Normal Charging IsolationAlternate Charging Isolation Auxiliary Spray Isolation Prevent Backflow thru Centrifugal  Charging PumpPrevent Backflow thru Centrifugal  Charging Pump Isolation Valve Isolation Valve
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-79
[Un] = Displacement


Cntmt Isolation Thermal Relief Recip CP Suction Over Pressure CCP 1A-A Over Pressure CCP 1B-B Over PressureTable 3.9-17  Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 2 of 9)
[ U n ] = Acceleration Note that all of the above are functions of n.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-71WATTS BARWBNP-91 SafetyInjection (63)FCV-63-1FCV-63-3 FCV-63-4 FCV-63-5 FCV-63-6FCV-63-7 FCV-63-8 FCV-63-11 FCV-63-23 FCV-63-25 FCV-63-26 FCV-63-47 FCV-63-48  8812  8813 88148806  8807B  8807A 8804A 8804B 8888 8801B 8801A 8923A 8923B 14 2 2
In order to calculate free vibration frequencies and mode shapes the applied load is set equal to zero, [Un] is assumed to be a harmonic function of time, and the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of the resulting equation obtained.
8 4 4 8
If the transient response due to a time-varying load is required, a numerical integration technique is used.
8 1
Since Program E1374 is not set up to handle longitudinal stiffeners, the integration for this portion of the shell is performed using Program 781. The influence values are then converted to stiffness matrix form and stored on disc. After Program E1374 has set up the stiffness matrices for the unstiffened shell, the matrices for segments with stiffening are replaced with the Program 781 matrices from disc. The solution in Program E1374 then continues in the standard manner. This consists of assembling the overall stiffness matrix [Kn] and load vector [Cn], reducing to upper triangular form, and back-substituting.
4 4
3.8C.8 PROGRAM E1622-LOAD GENERATION PREPROCESSOR FOR PROGRAM E1374 In order to perform non-axisymmetric analyses on shells, the load must often be defined using Fourier series representation. The purpose of Program E1622 is to calculate and store on magnetic tape a time history of the Fourier pressure amplitudes.
6 6MotorMotor Motor Motor Motor  Motor Motor Motor Air Motor Motor Motor MotorGateGlobe Globe Gate GateGate Gate Gate Globe Gate Gate Gate GatePrevent Radioactive Release in  Recirc Mode Prevent Radioactive Release in Recirc Mode Prevent Radioactive Release in Recirc Mode Prevent Radioactive Release
The format of this tape is designed specifically for use with Program E1374.
In order to calculate the amplitudes of the harmonics several assumptions are made in the program.
(1)  A linear function in the circumferential direction is assumed between given points.
(2)   Only distributed loads are considered.
(3)  The model consists of a cylindrical shell and optional hemispherical top head.
(4)   The pressure has a block type distribution in the longitudinal direction.
(5)  Any initial pressure acting on the shell can be subtracted from the input pressure histories.
(6)  Amplitudes for both sine and cosine terms can be calculated with the user supplying the range of harmonics to be output.
3.8C-6                                                 DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS


in Recirc Mode Sis Recirc Flowback Integrity Sis Recirc Flowback Integrity Sis Recirc Flowpath Integrity Sis Recirc Flowpath Integrity Containment Isolation ECCS Flowpath Integrity ECCS Flowpath Integrity ECCS Flowpath Integrity ECCS Flowpath IntegrityTable 3.9-17  Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 3 of 9) 3.9-72MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-91 FCV-63-64FCV-63-71 FCV-63-72 FCV-63-73 FCV-63-84 FCV-63-93FCV-63-94 FCV-63-152FCV-63-153 FCV-63-156 FCV-63-157 FCV-63-172 FCV-63-175FCV-63-185CKV-63-524 CKV-63-526CKV-63-543 CKV-63-545 CKV-63-547CKV-63-549CKV-63-551CKV-63-553 8880  8871 8811A 8811B 8964 8809A
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-86 3.8C.9 PROGRAM E1624 SPCGEN-SPECTRAL CURVE GENERATION Program E1624 reads the Fourier amplitudes of the deflection transients stored on magnetic tape from the output of Program E1374. The program calculates the accelerations at uniform time intervals and evaluates the response spectra. From the deflection transient for each harmonic, the acceleration traces are computer generated using three point central difference for the first and last three time steps, and a seven point central difference elsewhere.
3.8C.10 PROGRAM 781, METHOD OF MODELING VERTICAL STIFFENERS N = No. of vertical stiffeners around E = Modulus of elasticity The shell shown in Figure 3.8C-l is modeled using 2 layers. The inside layer represents the shell and, therefore, has the normal isotropic material properties. The outer layer, on the other hand is described as an orthotropic material having the following properties.
t2 = d bN E  = ----------- E 2  2R E2 = 0 G2 = 0 where:
t2 = Thickness of outer layer E2 = Modulus of elasticity of outer layer in longitudinal direction E2 = Modulus of elasticity of outer layer in circumferential direction.
G2 = Shear modulus of outer layer.
3.8C.11 PROGRAM 119-CHECK of FLANGE DESIGN This program is used for the design of bolted flanges. The program checks the flange design based on Appendix II of ASME Code, Section VIII. Bolt and flange stresses are computed for both the bolt-up and design conditions. If the bolt and gasket are not overstressed, the computer automatically calculates the required flange thickness or checks any supplied thickness. The minimum gasket width required to prevent crushing, and the maximum pressure that the flange is capable of resisting under the design conditions are automatically calculated.
3.8C.12 PROGRAM 772-NOZZLE REINFORCEMENT CHECK This is a program for checking nozzle reinforcing. It is designed essentially for containment vessels, and adheres to area replacement criteria specified by ASME DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS                                                      3.8C-7


8809B  8821A  8821B 8802A 8802B 8840 8920  --- 8922A 8922B  8905A 8905C 8905B  8905D  8819A8819B 1 3/4 18 18 3/4 8 8 4 4 4
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-86 Section III and VIII. The program does no design work, merely checking the adequacy of pre-selected reinforcing plate dimensions and weld sizes.
4 12
3.8C.13 PROGRAM 1027-WRC 107 STRESS INTENSITIES AT LOADED ATTACHMENTS FOR SPHERES OR CYLINDERS WITH ROUND OR SQUARE ATTACHMENT This program determines the stress intensities in a sphere or cylinder at a maximum of 12 points around an externally loaded round or square attachment. Stresses resulting from external loads are superimposed on an initial pressure stress situation. The program computes stresses at three levels of plate thicknesses: outside, inside, and centerline of plate. The 12 points investigated are shown in Figure 3.8C-2. Four points at the edge of attachment, at 1/2 RT from the edge of attachment and at the edge of reinforcement.
:: 4 4 2 2
The program determines 3 components for each stress intensity:
2 2 2 2 Air  Air Motor Motor Air Motor
(1)  X =    A normal stress parallel to the vessel's longitudinal axis (2)    =    A normal stress in a circumferential direction (3)    =      A shear stress The program has an option, whereby the influence coefficients can be calculated directly. The program uses the methodology from the "Welding Research Council Bulletin #107", of December 1968. Additionally, the program contains extrapolations of the curves for cylinders in WRC 107 for gamma up to 600. It should be noted that the use of the program requires complete familiarity with WRC 107 publication.
3.8C.14 PROGRAM 1036M-STRESS INTENSITIES IN JUMBO INSERT PLATES This program determines the stress intensities in a "Jumbo" insert plate (a reinforcing plate with multiple penetrations) in a cylindrical vessel at 8 points around one of these penetrations due to the loading on that penetration plus the loadings on the 4 adjacent penetrations all as superimposed on an initial stress situation. It does this at three levels of plate thickness: outside, inside, and centerline of plate. The 8 points investigated are shown in Figure 3.8C-3. The 4 points on radius R are at the junction of the penetration and the insert plate. The other 4 points are other points of interest; normally, they will be at the midpoints in the clear space between penetrations or at the edge of reinforcing. Although 5 penetrations are considered, each point is analyzed as though it were only influenced by 2 (the central penetration plus the penetration on the same axis as the point concerned).
The program also determines 3 components for each stress intensity:
(1)  x =    a normal stress parallel to the vessel's longitudinal axis (2)    = a normal stress in a vessel's circumferential direction (3)    =    a shear stress 3.8C-8                                                  DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS


Motor Motor   Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor  Air Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-86 Each of these is composed of 3 subcomponents:
(1)  One due to the central penetration's loading (2)  One due to the loading on the next adjacent penetration (3)  An initial stress component (input)
The program has an option whereby the penetration loads will be considered reversible or nonreversible in direction. Under the reversible option, (see Figure 3.8C-4) only the data associated with the most severe loading situations is printed out.
Most of the analysis and notation used in the program is taken directly from the "Welding Research Council Bulletin #107" of December 1968. Use of the program requires complete familiarity with this publication.
The analysis in WRC 107 is for a single penetration. This program analyzes the several penetrations individually, using WRC 107 techniques verbatim, and then through superposition obtains the composite results. The adjacent penetrations must be on a cardinal line of the central penetration in order to use WRC 107 methods. This has required a very conservative extension of the WRC 107 analysis. WRC 107 analysis applies only to the points on the penetration to shell juncture. This program makes stress determinations at points removed from the junction by fictitiously extending the radius of any penetration to any point at which a stress determination is desired. This disregards the statement in WRC 107 that "these stresses attenuate very rapidly at points removed from the penetration to shell juncture". Furthermore, in some cases, the moment induced stresses at both the juncture and at points removed from the juncture are increased by 20% per discussion in WRC 107. Figure 3.8C-5 shows the cases for the 20% increase and indicates the thickness used for the calculation of the parameters (per WRC 107) and stresses.
The program contains extrapolations of the curves in WRC 107 for T up to 600. The program is limited to the domains and range of Figures 1A through 4C in WRC 107 (0
        < < 0.5 and 5 < T <600).
REFERENCE (1)   Wilson & Clough, Dynamic Response by Step-By-Step Matrix Analysis DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS                                                    3.8C-9


Self Actuated Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                WBNP-86 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 3.8C-10                  DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                      WBNP-86 Figure 3.8C-1 Vertical Stiffener Model DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS                                          3.8C-11


Self Actuated Self Actuated Self Actuated Self Actuated GlobeGlobe Gate Gate Globe GateGate GateGate Gate Gate Gate GlobeGlobe Check Check Check Check Check Check Check CheckContainment IsolationContainment Isolation CNTMT Sump Isolation CNTMT Sump Isolation Containment Isolation RHR Cold Leg Injection Line Isolation RHR Cold Leg Injection Line Isolation ECCS Flowpath Integrity ECCS Flowpath Integrity ECCS Flowpath Integrity ECCS Flowpath Intgrity RHR Hot Leg Recirc Prevent Radioactive Release
WATTS BAR                                                                          WBNP-64 Figure 3.8C-2 Points of Stress Calculation 3.8C-12                                              DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS


in Recirc Mode Leak Test Line Isolation Prevent Backflow thru Nonoperating Train Prevent Backflow thru Nonoperational Train ECCS Flowpath Integrity RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
WATTS BAR                                                                                            WBNP-64 Figure 3.8C-3 Jumbo Insert Plant Points of Stress Intensities DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS                                                                3.8C-13
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/RCS Press. Bound. ProtECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. ProtTable 3.9-17  Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 4 of 9)
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-73WATTS BARWBNP-91CKV-63-555CKV-63-557 CKV-63-558 CKV-63-559 CKV-63-560 CKV-63-561 CKV-63-562 CKV-63-563 CKV-63-581 CKV-63-586 CKV-63-587 CKV-63-588 CKV-63-589CKV-63-622CKV-63-623 CKV-63-624 CKV-63-625 CKV-63-632 8819C  8819D 8949D 8949B 8948A 8948B 8948C 8948D 8805 8900A 8900B 8900C 8900D  8956A  8956B 8956C 8956D 8818B 2 2 6
6 10 10 10 10 3
1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 10 10 10 10 6 Self Actuated Self Actuated


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                                      WBNP-64 Figure 3.8C-4 Determination of Loads on Center Penetration Associated with Maximum Stress Intensity 3.8C-14                                                                        DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                  WBNP-64 Figure 3.8C-5 Penetration Analysis DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS                                      3.8C-15


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                              WBNP-64 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 3.8C-16                                DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                            WBNP-79 3.8D  COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS Computer programs used for structural analysis and design have been validated by one of the following criteria or procedures:
(a)  The following computer programs are recognized programs in the public domain:
Usage Start Program            Date:Year        Hardware      Source AMG032                      1965            IBM          R&H AMGO33                      1965            IBM          R&H AMGO34                      1965            IBM          R&H ANSYS                      1972            CDC          CDC ASHSD                      1969            IBM          UCB BASEPLATE II                1982            CDC          CDC GENDHK 3                    1969            IBM          UCB GENSHL 2                    1969            IBM          FIRL GENSHL 5                    1968            IBM          FIRL GTSTRUDL                    1979            CDC          GT NASTRAN (MSC)              1974            CDC          CDC SAP IV                      1973            CDC          UCB SAP IV                      1974            IBM          USC SDRC FRAME                  1977            CDC        SDRC PACKAGE SAGS/DAGS SPSTRESS                    1977            CDC          CDC STARDYNE                    1977            CDC          CDC STRESS                      1970              EG          CDC STRUDL (V2 M2)              1972            IBM          ICES STRUDL (Rel. 2.6)          1974            IBM        MCAUTO (Dynal)
STRUDL (Rel. 4.0)          1975            IBM        MCAUTO STRUPAK PACKAGE            1971            CDC          TRW MAP2DF/SAP2DF SUPERB                      1977            CDC          CDC WELDDA                      1983            CDC          CDC WERCO                      1978            CDC          AAA COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS                                              3.8D-1


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                        WBNP-86 All programs on IBM hardware are run under the MVS operating system, on either a 370/165 machine or a 360150 machine. All programs on CDC hardware are run under the SCOPE 3.3 operating system on a 6600 machine.
The following abbreviations are used for program sources:
CDC - Control Data Corporation, Minneapolis, MI FIRL - Franklin Institute Research Labs, Philadelphia, PA GT - Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, GA ICES - Integrated Civil Engineering System, Worcester, MA MCAUTO - McDonnell-Douglas Automation Company, St. Louis, MO R&H - Rohm & Haas Company, Huntsville, AL SDRC - Structural Dynamics Research Corporation, Cincinnati, OH TRW - TRW Systems Group, Redondo, CA UCB - University of California, Berkely, CA USC - University of Southern California, Los Angeles, CA AAA - AAA Technology and Specialties Co., Inc., Houston, TX (b)    The following programs have been validated by comparison with a program in the public domain:
RESPONSE FOR EARTHQUAKE AVERAGING SPECTRAL RESPONSE Summary comparisons of results for these computer programs are provided in Figures 3.8D-l and 3.8D-2.
3.8D-2                                          COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                          WBNP-86 (c)  The following programs have been validated by comparison with hand calculations:
BIAXIAL BENDING - USD CONCRETE STRESS ANALYSIS DL42 PLTDL42 THERMCYL TORSIONAL DYNANAL PNA100 The following programs have been validated by comparison with analytical results published in the technical literature:
BAP222 DYNANAL ROCKING DYNANAL Summary comparison of results for these computer programs are provided in Tables 3.8D-l through 3.8D-10.
COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS                                              3.8D-3


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-86 Table 3.8D-1 BIAXIAL BENDING - USD Moment Capacity (FT-KIPS)
MX                                                MY Hand                                                  Hand Calculations                Program                  Calculations            Program 0                          0                        409                  408 601                        603                        287                  285 850                        850                        164                  165 911                        909                        77                    76 933                        932                          0                    0 Comparison of hand calculations with BIAXIAL BENDING - USD for the moment capacities of a reinforced concrete section for a given direct load.
3.8D-4                                                      COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                            WBNP-86 Table 3.8D-2 Concrete Stress Analysis Concrete Compression Stress (psi)
Hand                                        Program Calculations 436.                                          436.
Row                                          Steel Tensile Stress No.                                                  (psi)
Hand Calculations                                  Program 1                      -3833                                      -3830 2                      -2238                                      -2234 3                      - 644                                      - 639 4                        950                                        957 5                      2417                                        2419 6                      3884                                        3881 7                      5478                                        5477 8                      6275                                        6275 9                      11053                                      11053 Comparison of hand calculations with CONCRETE STRESS ANALYSIS for reinforced concrete beam with 9 rows of steel, subject to combined load of moment and axial force.
COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS                                                3.8D-5


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                        WBNP-86 Table 3.8D-3 Thermcyl Dead        Maximum Concrete                            Steel Load        Compression Stress                        Tensile Stress (psi)              (psi)                                  (psi)
Hand              Program            Hand                Program Calculations                        Calculations 0    770.8              770.9            12,948.              12,950.
10    848.8              848.3            12,285.              12,290.
100    1313.              1316.              8,336.                8,311.
1000    2795.              2793.            -5,010.                -4,990.
3.8D-6                                    COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-79 Table 3.8D-4 Torsional Dynanal Pure Torsion Modal Frequencies Mode                                        Frequency (RAD./SEC.)
No.
Hand Calculations                      Program 1                                2810                            2814 2                                8430                            8430 Comparison of hand calculations with TORSIONAL DYNANAL results for torsional modes of vibration of a thin-walled steel half-tube.
COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS                                                  3.8D-7


Self Actuated Self Actuated Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-79 Table 3.8D-5 DYNANAL Modal Periods Including Effects of Flexural and Shear Deformations Mode                                              Period (SEC)
No.
Published                                  Program Results 1                            1.48                                      1.50 2                            .425                                      .430 3                            .216                                      .222 4                            .149                                      .157 5                            .114                                      .124 Comparison of DYNANAL with analytical procedure presented in Engineering Vibrations, L. S.
Jacobsen and R. S. Ayre, McGraw-Hill, 1958, Chapter 10, Modal Analysis of 200 Ft. shear-wall building including effects of flexural and shear deformations.
3.8D-8                                                      COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-79 Table 3.8D-6 Rocking Dynanal Modal Frequencies of Lumped-Mass Shear Beam Including effects of Base Rocking Mode                                          Frequency (RAD./SEC.)
No.
Published                        Program Results 1                                  5.155                          5.339 2                                  20.52                          19.226 Comparison of ROCKING DYNANAL with Analytical Procedure presented in "Earthquake Stresses in Shear Buildings," M. G. Salvadori, ASCE Transactions, 1953, Paper No. 2666.
Modal analysis of lumped-mass shear beam including effects of base rocking.
COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS                                                    3.8D-9


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-79 Table 3.8D-7 BAP222 Comparison of BAP222 with analytical procedure presented in A Simple Analysis for Eccentrically Loaded Concrete Sections, L. G. Parker and J. J. Scanion, Civil Engineering, October 1940 Published Results            Program Pressure bulb geometry, Z4                                      12 (in.)          12 (in.)
Pressure bulb geometry, Z5                                    6.41 (in.)          6.41 (in.)
Pressure bulb geometry, Z7                                    3.67 (in.)          3.36 (in.)
Concrete pressure force                                      -14.08 (k)          -14.48 (k)
Anchor load 1                                                - 1.715 (k)        - 1.65 (k)
Anchor load 2                                                  5.34 (k)            5.4 (k)
Anchor load 3
                                                                -3.22 (k)          -3.44 (k)
Anchor load 4 3.665 (k)          3.61 (k) 3.8D-10                                                  COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS


Self Actuated Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check CheckECCS Flowpath Integrity/  RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
WATTS BAR                                                                                        WBNP-79 Table 3.8D-8 DL42 Comparison of hand calculations with DL42 for the design of a baseplate resisting a given load.
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
Hand Calculations                Program Safety factor (0.5 SSE)                                        3.232                        3.234 Safety factor (SSE)                                            3.878                        3.881 Maximum plate moment                                      10.535 (k-in)                    10.526 Effective section modulus                                    1.261 (in.)                    1.261 Minimum plate thickness                                      0.417 (in.)                    0.417 COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS                                                          3.8D-11
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. ProtECCS Flowpath Integrity/  RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. ProtTable 3.9-17  Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 5 of 9) 3.9-74MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-91CKV-63-633CKV-63-634 CKV-63-640 CKV-63-635 CKV-63-641 CKV-63-643 CKV-63-644 CKV-63-502 3CKV-63-510 3RFV-63-511 3RFV-63-534 3RFV-63-535 3RFV-63-536 3RFV-63-577 3RFV-63-602 3RFV-63-603 3RFV-63-604 3RFV-63-605 3RFV-63-626 3RFV-63-627 3RFV-63-637 3RFV-63-8358818A8818C 8841A 8818D 8949A 8841B 8949C 8958 8926 88588853A 8851 8853B 8852 8855A 8855B 8855C8855D8856A 8856B 8842
----6 6 8
6 6
8 6
12 8
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 1
1 1
1 1 2 3
3/4 3/4 Self Actuated Self Actuated


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-79 Table 3.8D-9 PLTDL42 Comparison of hand calculations with PLTDL42 for the design of a baseplate resisting a given load.
Hand Calculations                Program Safety factor (0.5 SSE)                                      3.232                      3.234 Safety factor (SSE)                                          3.878                      3.881 Maximum plate moment                                      10.535 (k-in)                  10.526 Effective section modulus                                  1.261 (in.)                  1.261 Minimum plate thickness                                    0.417 (in.)                  0.417 Plate bending stress                                      8.355 (k/in)                  8.348 3.8D-12                                                COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                      WBNP-79 Table 3.8D-10 PNA 100 Nozzle Stresses (PEN X-57) Next to Shell Calc.
Case      Mode                A            B            C            D 1        Program            11,039        16,588        11,224        16,495 Hand              11,036        16,584        11,221        16,491 4        Program            13,074        19,192        12,417        17,974 Hand              13,070        19,187        12,412        17,968 AWAY FROM SHELL Calc.
Case      Mode                A            B            C            D 1        Program            10,358        10,095        10,571        10,330 Hand              10,354        10,090        10,567        10,327 4        Program            12,944        12,621        12,196        11,915 Hand              12,939        12,616        12,190        11,908 Added by Amendment 51 COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS                                        3.8D-13


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                WBNP-79 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 3.8D-14                COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-51 Figure 3.8D-1 Response for Earthquake Averaging COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS                                                  3.8D-15


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                WBNP-51 Figure 3.8D-2 Spectral Response 3.8D-16                                  COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-89 3.8E    CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979 3.8E.1 Application Codes and Standards (a)  American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318-77, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" (b)  American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), "Specification for the Design Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings," 7th edition adopted February 12, 1969, as amended through June 12, 1974 or later editions, except welded construction is in accordance with Item d below.
(c)  American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards (d)  American Welding Society (AWS)
Structural Welding Code, AWS D1.1-72, with Revisions 1-73 and 2-74 except later editions may be used for prequalified joint details, base materials, and qualification of welding procedures and welders.
Visual inspection of structural welds will meet the minimum requirements of Nuclear Construction Issues Group documents NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 as specified on the design drawings or other engineering design output (See Section 3.8.4.1.1, Item 18).
(e)  National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 13 (f)  National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 14 (g)  National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 15 (h)  National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 24 (i)  National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 30 (j)  American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sections III, VIII, and IX (k)  American Nuclear Standard Institute (ANSI) B31.1, "Power Piping" (l)  AWS D1.1-81, "Structural Welding Code" (m)  AISC-ANSI-N690-1984 "Nuclear Facilities Steel Safety-Related Structures for Design, Fabrication and Erection" 3.8E.2 Load Definitions The following terms are used in the load combination equations for structures.
CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF            3.8E-1 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                            WBNP-89 Normal loads, which are those loads to be encountered during normal plant operation and shutdown, include:
D - Lead loads or their related internal moments and forces including any permanent equipment loads; all hydrostatic loads; and earth loads applied to horizontal surfaces.
L - Live loads or their related internal moments and forces including any movable equipment loads and other loads which vary with intensity and occurrence, such as lateral soil pressure.
To - Thermal effects and loads during normal operating or shutdown conditions, based on the most critical transient or steady-state condition.
Ro - Pipe reactions during normal operating or shutdown conditions, based on the most critical transient or steady-state condition.
Severe environmental loads include:
E - Loads generated by the operating basis earthquake (OBE). The term "operating basis earthquake" has the same meaning as "one-half safe shutdown earthquake."
W - Load generated by the design wind specified for the plant.
Extreme environmental loads include:
E' - Load generated by the safe shutdown earthquake (SSE). The term "safe shutdown earthquake" has the same meaning as the term "design basis earthquake" (DBE).
Wt - Loads generated by the design tornado specified for the plant.
Tornado loads include loads due to the tornado wind pressure, the tornado-created differential pressure, and to tornado-generated missiles.
Abnormal loads, which are those loads generated by a postulated high-energy pipe break accident, include:
Pa - Pressure equivalent static load within or across a compartment generated by the postulated break, and including an appropriate dynamic load factor to account for the dynamic nature of the load.
Ta -Thermal loads under thermal conditions generated by the postulated break and includingTo.
Ra -Pipe reactions under thermal conditions generated by the postulated break and including Ro.
3.8E-2                CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979


Self Actuated Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-89 Yr - Equivalent static load on the structure generated by the reaction on the broken high-energy pipe during the postulated break, and including an appropriate dynamic load factor to account for the dynamic nature of the load.
Yj - Jet impingement equivalent static load on a structure generated by the postulated break, and including an appropriate dynamic load factor to account for the dynamic nature of the load.
Ym - Missile impact equivalent static load on a structure generated by or during the postulated break, as from pipe whipping, and including an appropriate dynamic load factor to account for the dynamic nature of the load.
In determining an appropriate equivalent static load for Yr, Yj, and Ym, elasto-plastic behavior may be assumed with appropriate ductility ratios, provided excessive deflections will not result in loss of function of any safety-related system.
Other loads:
C - Construction live loads F' - Hydrostatic load from the probable maximum flood Fa - Flood load generated by a postulated pipe break Concrete capacity:
U - Concrete section strength required to resist design loads based on the strength design methods described in ACI 318-77.
3.8E.3 Load Combinations - Concrete For service load conditions, the strength design method is used, and the following load combinations are considered.
(1)  U = 1.4 D + 1.7 L (2)  U = 1.4 D + 1.7 L + 1.9 E (3)  U = 1.4 D + 1.7 L + 1.7 W CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF            3.8E-3 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                              WBNP-88 If thermal stressses due to To and Ro are present, the following combinations are also considered.
(1a) U = (0.75) (1.4 D + 1.7 L + 1.7 To + 1.7 Ro)
(2a) U = (0.75) (1.4 D + 1.7 L + 1.9 E + 1.7 To + 1.7 Ro)
(3a) U = (0.75) (1.4 D + 1.7 L + 1.7 W + 1.7 To + 1.7 Ro)
Both cases of L having its full value or being completely absent are checked. In addition, the following combinations are considered:
(2a) U = 1.2 D + 1.9 E (3a) U = 1.2 D + 1.7 W (b)    For factored load conditions, which represent extreme environmental, abnormal, abnormal/severe environmental and abnormal/extreme environmental conditions, the strength design method is used; and the following load combinations are considered:
(4)  U = D + L + To + Ro + E' (5)  U = D + L + To + R o + W t (6)  U = D + L + Ta + Ra + 1.5 Pa (7)  U = D + L + Ta + Ra + 1.25 Pa + 1.0 (Yr + Yj + Ym) + 1.25 E (8)  U = D + L + Ta + Ra + 1.0 Pa + 1.0 (Yr + Yj + Ym) + 1.0 E' For the Additional Diesel Generator Building and structures initiated after July 1979, the three individual tornado-generated loads are combined as follows:
Wt = Ww Wt = Wp Wt = Wm Wt = Ww + 0.5Wp Wt = Ww + Wm Wt = Ww + 0.5 Wp + Wm where:
Wt is the total tornado load, Ww is the tornado wind load, Wp is the tornado-generated pressure differential load, and Wm is the tornado missile load.
3.8E-4                  CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-86 In combinations (6), (7), and (8), the maximum values of Pa, Ta, Ra, Yj, Yr, and Ym, including an appropriate dynamic load factor, is used unless a time-history analysis is performed to justify otherwise. Combinations (5), (7), and (8), are satisfied first without the tornado missile load in (5) and without Yr, Yj, and Ym in (7) and (8). When considering these concentrated loads, local section strength capacities may be exceeded provided there is no loss of function of any safety-related system.
(c)    Other load conditions:
(9)  U = 1.4 D + 1.4 C (10) U = D + L + F' (11) U = D + Fa 3.8E.4 Load Combinations - Structural Steel (a)    For service load conditions, the elastic working stress design methods of Part 1 of the AISC specifications is used and the following load combinations are considered.
Allowable Stress          Load Combinations (1)      AISC Allowable*          D+L (2)      AISC Allowable*            D+L+E (3)      AISC Allowable*            D+L+W
            *See Table 3.8E-1 for limiting values If thermal stresses due to To and Ro are present, the following combinations are also considered:
Allowable Stress          Load Combinations (1a)    1.5 x AISC Allowable*      D + L + To + Ro (2a)    1.5 x AISC Allowable*      D + L + To + Ro + E (3a)    1.5 x AISC Allowable*      D + L + To + Ro + W
* The allowable stress shall be limited to the values given in Table 3.8E-1.
Both cases of L having its full value or being completely absent, are checked.
(b)    For factored load conditions, the following load combinations are considered.
CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF              3.8E-5 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                              WBNP-88 Allowable Stress          Load Combinations (4)      1.6 x AISC Allowable*      D + L + To + Ro + E' (5)      1.6 X AISC Allowable*      D + L + To + Ro + Wt (6)      1.6 x AISC Allowable*      D + L + Ta + Ra + Pa (7)    1.6 x AISC Allowable*        D + L + Ta + Ra + Pa
                                          + 1.0 (Yj + Yr + Ym)
                                          +E Allowable Stress            Load Combinations (8)    1.7 x AISC Allowable*      D + L + Ta + Ra + Pa
                                          + 1.0 (Yj + Yr +Ym) + E' (9)    1.6 x AISC Allowable*      D + Fa (10)    Table 3.8E-1 Limiting StressD + L + E' (11)    Table 3.8E-1 Limiting StressD + L + Wt
* If thermal loads are not present, the allowable stress shall be limited to the values given in Table 3.8E-1.
Evaluations of miscellaneous and structural steel designed prior to July 1979, may be performed using load combinations (2), (10), and (11) unless other specific loads of a significant nature exist, in which case, the appropriate load combinations of Section 3.8E.4 must be considered. The design of modifications must meet the load combinations in Section 3.8E.4.
Thermal analyses using linear elastic methods are performed for restrained Category I structures located in high temperature environments.
In combinations (6), (7), and (8), the maximum values of Pa, Ra, Ta, Yj, Yr, and Ym, including an appropriate dynamic load factor, was used unless a time-history analysis was performed to justify otherwise. Combinations (5), (7), and (8) were first satisfied without the tornado missile load in (5) and without Yr, Yj, and Ym in (7) and (8).
3.8E-6                  CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-79 3.9 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9.1 General Topic for Analysis of Seismic Category I ASME Code and Non-Code Items 3.9.1.1 Design Transients Transients used in the design and fatigue analysis for Westinghouse supplied ASME Code Class 1 components and CS components are discussed and presented in Section 5.2.1.5. Specifically, the transients are identified for Class 1 components in Tables 5.2-2 and 5.2-3. The transients used in the design and analysis of CS components are identified in Table 5.2-2.
3.9.1.2 Computer Programs Used in Analysis and Design 3.9.1.2.1 Other Than NSSS Systems, Components, Equipment, and Supports (1)  The following computer programs are used in piping analyses:
(a)  TPIPE Program - TPIPE is a special purpose computer program capable of performing static and dynamic linear elastic analyses of power-related piping systems. The dynamic analysis option includes:
(1) frequency extraction, (2) response spectrum, (3) time history modal superposition, and (4) time history direct integration methods.
In addition to these basic analysis capabilities, the program can perform an ASME Section III, Class 1, 2, or 3 stress evaluation and perform thermal transient heat analysis to provide the linear thermal gradient, T1, nonlinear thermal gradient, T2, and gross discontinuity expansion difference, a Ta - b Tb, required for a Class 1 stress evaluation.
This program is owned and maintained by TVA. It has been fully verified and documented and was compared with PISOL, SAP IV, PIPSD, STARDYNE, and SUPERPIPE with excellent correlation.
These programs are well recognized and utilized throughout the industry.
(b)  Post Processors - The post processors are used in performing the stress evaluations and support load calculations made in the analysis of piping systems.
The programs use moment, force, and deflection data generated by TPIPE. A stress evaluation is made for each joint on the analysis model.
The appropriate stress intensifications/stress indices according to the ASME Section III code are utilized in evaluating stresses for the Normal, Upset, Emergency, and Faulted Conditions. Pipe rupture limits and active valve limits are also evaluated. The allowed stress MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                              3.9-1


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                            WBNP-79 difference for pipe lug attachments and the lug load is calculated for each load condition.
Support and anchor design loads are calculated for each support to meet the requirements given in Section 3.9.3.4.2.
(c)  The following computer programs are also used for piping analysis:
Program            Source                  Program Description ME-101            BECHTEL          Linear elastic analysis of piping systems - Bechtel Western Power CorpSan Francisco, CA.
ANSYS            SWANSON          General purpose finite element program - Swanson Analysis Systems, Inc. Houston, PA.
(2)  The following computer programs are used in support design and equipment/component analysis.
ACRONYM                        PROGRAM DESCRIPTION FAPPS (ME150)              Frame Analysis For Pipe Supports SMAPPS (ME152)              Standard Frame Analysis For Small Bore Pipe Supports MAPPS (ME153)              Miscellaneous Applications For Pipe Supports IAP                        Integral Welded Attachments CONAN                      Allowable Tensile Load For Anchor Bolt Group With Shear Cone Overlap BASEPLATE II                Finite Element Analysis Of Base Plates And Anchor Bolts GT STRUDL                  Structural Analysis Program CASD                        TVA Computer Aided Support Design Program SUPERSAP                    Structural Finite Element Analysis Program ANSYS                      Structural Finite Element Analysis Program STARDYNE                    Structural Analysis Program 3.9-2                                                      MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Self Actuated Self Actuated Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-79 3.9.1.2.2 Programs Used for Category I Components of NSSS Computer programs that Westinghouse uses in analysis to determine structural and functional integrity of Seismic Category I systems, components, equipment and supports are presented in WCAP-8252, Revision 1 [1] and WCAP-8929 [10].
3.9.1.3 Experimental Stress Analysis No experimental stress analysis was used per se, for the reactor internals. However, Westinghouse makes extensive use of measured results from prototype plants and various scale model tests as discussed in the following Sections 3.9.2.4, 3.9.2.5, and 3.9.2.6.
3.9.1.4 Consideration for the Evaluation of the Faulted Condition 3.9.1.4.1 Subsystems and Components Analyzed by Westinghouse The analytical methods used to evaluate stresses for ASME Class 1 systems and components are presented in Section 5.2.1.10. The results of the analyses are documented in the stress reports that describe the system or component.
For reactor internals the faulted condition was evaluated based on a non-linear elastic system analysis and conforms to the requirements of Appendix F of the ASME Code Section III. Analytical methods are described in Section 3.9.2.5.
3.9.1.4.2 Subsystems and Components Analyzed by TVA (1)  Piping Systems - The methods employed in the analysis of ASME Class 1 and Class 2/3 piping systems are elastic analytical methods as described by the equations of Sections NB-3600 and NC-3600 of the ASME Code.
The faulted condition stress limits specified for Class 1 and Class 2/3 systems are in compliance with the elastic method limits set forth in Appendix F subsection F-1360 of the ASME Section III Code.
(2)  Piping System Supports - The methods employed in the analysis of ASME Code Classes 1, 2, and 3 piping system supports are as follows:
(a)  Linear Type - Elastic methods as described by Part I of the AISC, "Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings," February 12, 1969. (Supplements 1, 2, & 3)*
(b)  Standard Components - Elastic or load-rated methods as described by Manufacturers' Standardization Society (MSS) SP-58, 1967 edition, "Pipe Hangers and Supports."
The faulted condition stress limits for Class 1, 2, and 3 pipe supports are specified in Section 3.9.3.4.2. For linear supports these faulted condition limits meet the intent and requirements of the elastic method limits set forth in Appendix F, subsection F-1320 or F-1370, of the MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                3.9-3


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-86 ASME Section III Code. See Section 3.9.3.4.2. For standard components, the allowable stresses or load ratings of MSS-SP-58 are based on a factor of safety of five based on normal operating conditions.
Upset, emergency, faulted, and test conditions were evaluated using Table 3.9-21. This low allowable stress is adequate to assure that active components are properly supported for faulted conditions.
                          *Later edition of the AISC code may be utilized when design safety is not compromised.
(3)  Mechanical Equipment No plastic instability allowable limits given in ASME Section III have been used when dynamic analysis is performed. The limit analysis methods have the limits established by ASME Section III for Normal, Upset and Emergency Conditions. For these cases, the limits are sufficiently low to assure that the elastic system analysis is not invalidated. For ASME Code Class 1 mechanical equipment, the stress limits for faulted loading conditions are specified in Sections 3.9.3.1.2 and 5.2. For ASME Code Class 2 and 3 mechanical equipment the stress limits for faulted loading conditions are specified in Section 3.9.3.1.2. These faulted condition limits are established in such a manner that there is equivalence with the adopted elastic system analysis. Particular cases of concern are checked by readjusting the elastic system analysis.
(4)  Mechanical Equipment Supports The stress limits for the faulted loading condition of mechanical equipment supports are given in Section 3.9.3.4.1 of Westinghouse's scope of supply, and Section 3.9.3.4.2 for TVA's scope of supply.
3.9.2 Dynamic Testing and Analysis 3.9.2.1 Preoperational Vibration and Dynamic Effects Testing on Piping ASME Code Section III, Subparagraph NB-3622.3, "Vibration," requires that vibration effects in piping systems shall be visually observed and where questionable shall be measured and corrected as necessary.
The preoperational piping dynamic effects test program at this plant is as follows:
(a)  The dynamic (steady state and transient) behavior of safety related piping systems designated as ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 is observed during the preoperational testing program. Sample and instrument lines beyond the root valves are normally not included. Also included 3.9-4                                                          MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-88 in the program are those portions of ANSI B31.1 piping which has a potential to exhibit excessive vibrations.
(b)  Preoperational tests involving critical piping systems will be in compliance with Regulatory Guide 1.68, "Preoperational and Initial Startup Test Programs for Water-Cooled Power Reactors."
(c)  For the piping systems discussed in Item a., visual observation of the piping will be performed by trained personnel during predetermined, steady-state and transient modes of operation. The maximum point(s) of representative vibration, as determined by the visual observation, will be instrumented and measurement will be taken to determine actual magnitudes, if it is judged to be excessive.
(d)  The allowable criteria for measurements shall be either a maximum half-amplitude displacement or velocity value based on an endurance limit stress as defined in the ASME B&PV Code (refer to Section 3.7.3.8.1).
(e)  Should the measured magnitudes actually exceed the allowable, corrective measures will be performed for the piping system. Any new restraints, as required by corrective measures, will be incorporated into the piping system analysis.
(f)  The flow mode which produced the excessive vibrations will be repeated to assure that vibrations have been reduced to an acceptable level.
(g)  The flow modes to which the system components will be subjected are defined, in general terms, in the preoperational test program.
(h)  Vibration measurements will also be taken on the vital pumps at baseline and on a periodic basis so that excessive vibration can be corrected early in the program and/or detected if it gradually becomes a problem.
(i)  Vibrations of the affected portions of the main steam system during MS isolation valve trip will be tested and the results will be evaluated.
(j)  Thermal expansion tests will be conducted on the following piping systems:
Reactor Coolant System Main Steam Steam Supply to Auxiliary Feedwater Pump Turbine Main Feedwater Pressurizer Relief Line RHR in Shutdown Cooling Mode Steam Generator Blowdown MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                              3.9-5


Self Actuated Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Angle Angle Angle Angle Angle Angle Angle Angle Angle Angle Angle Angle AngleECCS Flowpath Integrity/ RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-79 Safety Injection System (those lines adjoining RCS which experience temperature > 200F)
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
Auxiliary Feedwater CVCS (Charging line from Regen. Hx to RCS, Letdown Line from RCS to Letdown Hx)
RCS Press Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
During the thermal expansion test, pipe deflections will be measured or observed at various locations based on the location of snubbers and hangers and expected large displacement. One complete thermal cycle (i.e., cold position to hot position to cold position ) will be monitored. For most systems, the thermal expansion will be monitored at cold conditions and at normal operating temperature. Intermediate temperatures are generally not practical due to the short time during which the normal operating temperature is reached. For the reactor coolant system and the main steam system, measurements will be made at cold, 250&deg;F, 350&deg;F, 450&deg;F and normal operating temperatures.
RCS Press Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
Acceptance criteria for the thermal expansion test verify that the piping system is free to expand thermally (i.e., piping does not bind or lock at spring hangers and snubbers nor interfere with structures or other piping), and to confirm that piping displacements do not exceed design limits, as described by ASME Section III (i.e., the induced stresses do not exceed the sum of the basic material allowable stress at design temperature and the allowable stress range for expansion stresses).
RCS Press Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
If thermal motion is not as predicted, the support system will be examined to verify correct function or to locate points of binding of restraints. If binding is found, the restraints will be adjusted to eliminate the unacceptable condition or reanalyzed to verify that the existing condition is acceptable.
RCS Press Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
3.9.2.2 Seismic Qualification Testing of Safety-Related Mechanical Equipment Design of Category I mechanical equipment to withstand seismic, accident, and operational vibratory loadings is provided either by analysis or dynamic testing.
RCS Press Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
Generally tests are run with either of the following two objectives:
RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
(1)  To obtain information on parts or systems necessary to perform the required analysis, or (2)  To prove the design (stress or operability) adequacy of a given equipment or structure without performing any analysis of this particular equipment or structure.
RCS Press. Bound. Prot
The need for the first type of tests is dictated by lack of information on some of the inputs vital to the performance of an analysis. These tests can be either static (to obtain spring constants) or dynamic (to obtain impedance characteristics).
3.9-6                                                            MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


SI Pressure Release
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-79 The need for the second type of test is mainly dictated by the complexity of the structure/equipment under design. This vibration testing is usually performed in a laboratory or shop on a prototype basis, using various sources of energy.
For general seismic qualification requirements for mechanical and electrical equipment, see Section 3.7.3.16.
Laboratory vibration testing can be conducted by employing various forms of shakers, the variation depending on the source of the driving force. Generally, the primary source of motion may be electromagnetic, mechanical, or hydraulic-pneumatic. Each is subject to inherent limitations which usually dictate the choice.
To properly simulate the seismic disturbance, the waveform must be carefully defined.
The waveform seen by a given piece of equipment depends on:
(1)  The earthquake motion specified for a given site.
(2)  The soil-structure interaction.
(3)  The building in which the component is housed.
(4)  The floor on which the equipment is located.
(5)  The support and attachments to the equipment.
Components located on rocks or on stiff lower floors of buildings founded on rock are subjected to random-type vibrations. Components located on the upper floors of flexible buildings, in flexible subsystems, or in buildings on soft foundations are roughly subjected to sine beats with a frequency close to fundamental frequency of the building or subsystem.
In cases where random vibration inputs are used, extreme care is paid to the selection of random forcing functions having frequency content and energy conservatively approaching those of the ground or buildings motion caused by the specified earthquake(s).
The most common and readily available vibration testing facilities could only carry simple harmonic motion. By analytical comparison with time history response obtained with a number of real earthquake motions, it has been found that these time histories can be approximately simulated with wave forms having the shape of sine beats with 5 or 10 cycles per beat, a frequency equal to the component natural frequencies, and maximum amplitude equal to the maximum seismic acceleration to which the component needs to be qualified. For equipment located on building floors, the maximum seismic input acceleration is the maximum floor acceleration. This is obtained from the dynamic analysis of the building or from the appropriate floor response spectrum at the zero period of the equipment.
The above procedure adheres closely to the IEEE 344-1971 "IEEE Guide for Seismic Qualification of Class 1 Electric Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations."
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                3.9-7


SI Pressure Release
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-79 This standard was specified for equipment for the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant contracted for up to September 1, 1974. New contracts after this date specified IEEE 344-1975 "IEEE Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations." The first test to the IEEE 344-1975 was run in March 1974 on 6.9 kV switch gear. On local panels, test qualification to both standards was used because some instruments and controls mounted there on were procured to each version. This one test revealed that the 1971 version of IEEE 344 was the more severe.
As an example, seismic qualification and the demonstration of operability of active Class 2 and 3 pumps, active Class 1, 2, or 3 valves, and their respective drives, operators and vital auxiliary equipment is shown by satisfying the criteria given in Section 3.9.3.2. Other active mechanical equipment will be shown operable by either testing, analysis or a combination of testing and analysis. The operability programs implemented on this other active equipment will be similar to the program described in Section 3.9.3.2 for pumps and valves. Testing procedures similar to the procedures outlined in Section 3.10 for electrical equipment will be used to demonstrate operability if the component is mechanically or structurally complex such that its response cannot be adequately predicted analytically. Analysis may be used if the equipment is amenable to modeling and dynamic analysis.
Inactive Seismic Category I equipment will be shown to have structural integrity during all plant conditions in one of the following manners: 1) by analysis satisfying the stress criteria applicable to the particular piece of equipment, or 2) by test showing that the equipment retains its structural integrity under the simulated seismic environment.
A list of Category I mechanical equipment and the original method of qualification is provided in the Table 3.7-25.
3.9.2.3 Dynamic Response Analysis of Reactor Internals Under Operational Flow Transients and Steady-State Conditions The vibration characteristics and behavior due to flow induced excitation are very complex and not readily ascertained by analytical means alone. Reactor components are excited by the flowing coolant which causes oscillatory pressures on the surfaces.
The integration of these pressures over the applied area should provide the forcing functions to be used in the dynamic analysis of the structures. In view of the complexity of the geometries and the random character of the pressure oscillations, a closed form solution of the vibratory problem by integration of the differential equation of motion is not always practical and realistic. Therefore, the determination of the forcing functions as a direct correlation of pressure oscillations can not be practically performed independently of the dynamic characteristics of the structure. The main objective, then, is to establish the characteristics of the forcing functions that essentially determine the response of the structures. By studying the dynamic properties of the structure from previous analytical and experimental work, the characteristics of the forcing function can be deduced. These studies indicate that the most important forcing functions are flow turbulence, and pump-related excitation. The relevance of such excitations depends on many factors such as type and location of component and flow conditions.
3.9-8                                                          MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


SI Pressure Release
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-79 The effects of these forcing functions have been studied from test runs on models, prototype plants and in component tests [2,4,5].
The Indian Point Unit 2 plant has been established as the prototype for four-loop plant internals verification program and was fully instrumented and tested during initial startup [4]. In addition, the Sequoyah Unit 1 and Trojan Nuclear Plants have also been instrumented to provide prototype data applicable to Watts Bar [5].
Although the Watts Bar plant is similar to Indian Point Unit 2, significant differences are the modifications resulting from the use of 17 x 17 fuel, the replacement of the annular thermal shield with neutron shielding panels, and reactor vessel barrel/baffle upflow flow design. These differences are addressed below.
(1)    17 x 17 Fuel The only structural changes in the internals resulting from the design change from the 15 x 15 to the 17 x 17 fuel assembly are the guide tube and control rod drive line. The new 17 x 17 guide tubes are stronger and more rigid, hence they are less susceptible to flow induced vibration. The fuel assembly itself is relatively unchanged in mass and spring rate, and thus no significant deviation is expected from the 15 x 15 fuel assembly vibration characteristics.
(2)    Neutron Shielding Pads Lower Internals The primary cause of core barrel excitation is flow turbulence, which is not affected by the upper internals [3]. The vibration levels due to core barrel excitation for Trojan and Watts Bar both having neutron shielding pads, are expected to be similar. Since Watts Bar has greater velocities than Trojan, vibration levels due to the core barrel excitation is expected to be somewhat greater than that for Trojan (proportional to flow velocity raised to a small power). However, scale model test results and preliminary results from Trojan show that core barrel vibration of plants with neutron shielding pads is significantly less than that of plants with thermal shields. This information and the fact that low core barrel flange stresses with large safety margins were measured at Indian Point Unit 2 (thermal shield configuration) lead to the conclusion that stresses approximately equal to those of Indian Point Unit 2 will result on the Watts Bar internals with the attendant large safety margins.
(3)    Reactor Vessel Barrel/Baffle Upflow Conversion The upflow conversion consists of changes to the reactor vessel components, which are to plug the core barrel inlet flow holes and to provide holes in the top former plate. These modifications change the flow path from being downflow to upflow between the core barrel and the baffle plate and increase core bypass flow from 7.5 to 9.0%. Changing the flow path reduces the pressure differential across the baffle plate, eliminating the jetting of coolant between the joints between the baffle plates. Although defined as a difference between Indian Point 2 and Watts Bar internals, the conversion of the Watts Bar internals to the upflow configuration has no direct impact on the MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                  3.9-9


SI Pressure Release
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-86 reactor core system under earthquake conditions. Therefore, the fuel assembly structural integrity during a seismic event is not affected by the modification. The potential effects due to the LOCA contribution, as a result of the upflow modification, has been demonstrated by evaluation that the impact of the change in forces from the initial downflow design to upflow are insignificant. Therefore, the modifications associated with the upflow conversion do not increase the seismic or LOCA induced loads significantly compared to that of the downflow design, and the fuel assembly structural integrity and coolable geometry are maintained. This issue has been reviewed and approved by the NRC [11 & 12].
3.9.2.4 Preoperational Flow-Induced Vibration Testing of Reactor Internals Because the Watts Bar reactor internals design configuration is well characterized, as was discussed in Section 3.9.2.3, it is not considered necessary to conduct instrumented tests of the Watts Bar plant hardware. The requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.20 will be met by conducting the confirmatory preoperational testing examination for integrity per Paragraph D, of Regulatory Guide 1.20, "Regulation for Reactor Internals Similar to the Prototype Design." This examination will include some 35 points (Figure 3.9-1) with special emphasis on the following areas.
(1)  All major load-bearing elements of the reactor internals relied upon to retain the core structure in place.
(2)  The lateral, vertical and torsional restraints provided within the vessel.
(3)  Those locking and bolting devices whose failure could adversely affect the structural integrity of the internals.
(4)  Those other locations on the reactor internal components which are similar to those which were examined on the prototype Indian Point Unit 2 design.
(5)  The inside of the vessel will be inspected before and after the hot functional test, with all the internals removed, to verify that no loose parts or foreign material are in evidence.
A particularly close inspection will be made on the following items or areas using a 5X or 1OX magnifying glass or penetrant testing where applicable.
3.9-10                                                          MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


SI Pressure Release
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-79 (1)  Lower Internals (a)  Upper barrel to flange girth weld.
(b)  Upper barrel to lower barrel girth weld.
(c)  Upper core plate aligning pin. Examine bearing surfaces for any shadow marks, burnishing, buffing or scoring. Inspect welds for integrity.
(d)  Irradiation specimen guide screw locking devices and dowel pins.
Check for lockweld integrity.
(e)  Baffle assembly locking devices. Check for lockweld integrity.
(f)  Lower barrel to core support girth weld.
(g)  Neutron shield panel screw locking devices and dowel pin cover plate welds. Examine the interface surfaces for evidence of tightness and for lockweld integrity.
(h)  Radial support key welds.
(i)  Insert screw locking devices. Examine soundness of lockwelds.
(j)  Core support columns and instrumentation guide tubes. Check the joints for tightness and soundness of the locking devices.
(k)  Secondary core support assembly screw locking devices for lockweld integrity.
(l)  Lower radial support keys and inserts. Examine for any shadow marks, burnishing, buffing or scoring. Check the integrity of the lockwelds.
These members supply the radial and torsional constraint of the internals at the bottom relative to the reactor vessel while permitting axial and radial growth between the two. One would expect to see, on the bearing surfaces of the key and keyway, burnishing, buffing or shadow marks which would indicate pressure loading and relative motion between the two parts. Some scoring of engaging surfaces is also possible and acceptable.
(m) Gaps at baffle joints. Check for gaps between baffle and top former and at baffle to baffle joints.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                            3.9-11


SI Pressure Release
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-79 (2)    Upper Internals (a)  Thermocouple conduits, clamps and couplings.
(b)  Guide tube, support column, orifice plate, and thermocouple assembly locking devices.
(c)  Support column and thermocouple conduit assembly clamp welds.
(d)  Upper core plate alignment inserts. Examine for any shadow marks, burnishing, buffing or scoring. Check the locking devices for integrity of lockwelds.
(e)  Thermocouple conduit gusset and clamp welds (where applicable).
(f)  Thermocouple conduit end-plugs. Check for tightness.
(g)  Guide tube enclosure welds, tube-transition plate welds and card welds.
Acceptance standards are the same as required in the shop by the original design drawings and specifications.
During the hot functional test, the internals will be subjected to a total operating time at greater than normal full-flow conditions (four pumps operating) of at least 240 hours.
This provides a cyclic loading of approximately 107 cycles on the main structural elements of the internals. In addition there will be some operating time with only one, two and three pumps operating.
When no signs of abnormal wear, no harmful vibrations are detected and no apparent structural changes take place, the four-loop core support structures are considered to be structurally adequate and sound for operation.
3.9.2.5 Dynamic System Analysis of the Reactor Internals Under Faulted Conditions Analysis of the reactor internals for blowdown loads resulting from a LOCA is based on the time history response of the internals to simultaneously applied blowdown forcing functions. The forcing functions are defined at points in the system where changes in cross-section or direction of flow occur such that differential loads are generated during the blowdown transient. The dynamic mechanical analysis can employ the displacement method, lumped parameters, stiffness matrix formulations and assumes that all components behave in a linearly elastic manner.
In addition, because of the complexity of the system and the components, it is necessary to use finite element stress analysis codes to provide more detailed information at various points.
A blowdown digital computer program [6], which was developed for the purpose of calculating local fluid pressure, flow, and density transients that occur in pressurized 3.9-12                                                          MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


SI Pressure Release
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-79 water reactor coolant systems during a LOCA, is applied to the subcooled,transition, and saturated two-phase blowdown regimes. This is in contrast to programs such as WHAM [7], which are applicable only to the subcooled region and which, due to their method of solution, could not be extended into the region in which large changes in the sonic velocities and fluid densities take place. This blowdown code is based on the method of characteristics wherein the resulting set of ordinary differential equations, obtained from the laws of conservation of mass, momentum, and energy, are solved numerically using a fixed mesh in both space and time.
Although spatially one-dimensional conservation laws are employed, the code can be applied to describe three-dimensional system geometries by use of the equivalent piping networks. Such piping networks may contain any number of pipes or channels of various diameters, dead ends, branches (with up to six pipes connected to each branch), contractions, expansions, orifices, pumps and free surfaces (such as in the pressurizer). System losses such as friction, contraction, expansion, etc. are considered.
The blowdown code evaluates the pressure and velocity transients for a maximum of 2,400 locations throughout the system. These pressure and velocity transients are stored as a permanent tape file and are made available to the program FORCE which utilizes a detailed geometric description in evaluating the loadings on the reactor internals.
Each reactor component for which FORCE calculations are required is designated as an element and assigned an element number. Forces acting upon each of the elements are calculated summing the effects of:
(1)  The pressure differential across the element.
(2)  Flow stagnation on, and unrecovered orifice losses across the element.
(3)  Friction losses along the element.
Input to the code, in addition to the blowdown pressure and velocity transients, includes the effective area of each element on which the force acts due to the pressure differential across the element, a coefficient to account for flow stagnation and unrecovered orifice losses, and the total area of the element along which the shear forces act.
The mechanical analysis [8] has been performed using conservative assumptions.
Some of the more significant assumptions are:
(1)  The mechanical and hydraulic analyses have considered the effect of hydroelasticity.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                            3.9-13


SI Pressure Release SI Pressure Release SI Pressure Release
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-79 (2)  The reactor internals are represented by a multi-mass system connected with springs and dashpots simulating the elastic response and the viscous damping of the components. The modeling is conducted in such a way that uniform masses are lumped into easily identifiable discrete masses while elastic elements are represented by springs.
The model described is considered to have a sufficient number, of degrees of freedom to represent the most important modes of vibration in the vertical direction. This model is conservative in the sense that further mass-spring resolution of the system would lead to further attenuation of the shock effects obtained with the present model.
The pressure waves generated within the reactor are highly dependent on the location and nature of the postulated pipe failure. In general, the more rapid the severance of the pipe, the more severe the imposed loadings on the components. A one millisecond severance time is taken as the limiting case.
In the case of the hot leg break, the vertical hydraulic forces produce an initial upward lift of the core. A rarefaction wave propagates through the reactor hot leg nozzle into the interior of the upper core barrel. Since the wave has not reached the flow annulus on the outside of the barrel, the upper barrel is subjected to an impulsive compressive wave. Thus, dynamic instability (buckling) or large deflections of the upper core barrel, or both, is a possible response of the barrel during hot leg break results in transverse loading on the upper core components as the fluid exits the hot leg nozzle.
In the case of the cold leg break, a rarefaction wave propagates along a reactor inlet pipe, arriving first at the core barrel at the inlet nozzle of the broken loop. The upper barrel is then subjected to a non-axisymmetric expansion radial impulse which changes as the rarefaction wave propagates both around the barrel and down the outer flow annulus between vessel and barrel. After the cold leg break, the initial steady state hydraulic lift forces (upward) decrease rapidly (within a few milliseconds) and then increase in the downward direction. These cause the reactor core and lower support structure to move initially downward.
If a simultaneous seismic event with the intensity of the SSE is postulated with the loss of coolant accident, the imposed loading on the internals component may be additive in certain cases; therefore, the combined loading must be considered. In general, however, the loading imposed by the earthquake is small compared to the blowdown loading.
The summary of the mechanical analysis follows:
Vertical Excitation Model for Blowdown For the vertical excitation, the reactor internals are represented by a multi-mass system connected with springs and dashpots simulating the elastic response and the viscous damping of the components. Also incorporated in the multi-mass system is a representation of the motion of the fuel elements relative to the fuel assembly grids.
The fuel elements in the fuel assemblies are kept in position by friction forces 3.9-14                                                        MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


SI Pressure Release
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-79 originating from the preloaded fuel assembly grid fingers. Coulomb type friction is assumed in the event that sliding between the rods and the grid fingers occurs. In order to obtain an accurate simulation of the reactor internals response, the effects of internal damping, clearances between various internals, snubbing action caused by solid impact, Coulomb friction induced by fuel rod motion relative to the grids, and preloads in hold down springs have been incorporated in the analytical model. The modeling is conducted in such a way that uniform masses are lumped into easily identifiable discrete masses while elastic elements are represented by springs.
The appropriate dynamic differential equations for the multi-mass model describing the aforementioned phenomena are formulated and the results obtained using a digital computer program [8] which computes the response of the multi-mass model when excited by a set of time dependent forcing functions. The appropriate forcing functions are applied simultaneously and independently to each of the masses in the system.
The results from the program give the forces, displacements and deflections as functions of time for all the reactor internals components (lumped masses). Reactor internals response to both hot and cold leg pipe ruptures were analyzed.
Transverse Excitation Model for Blowdown Various reactor internal components are subjected to transverse excitation during blowdown. Specifically, the barrel, guide tubes, and upper support columns are analyzed to determine their response to this excitation.
Core Barrel - For the hydraulic analysis of the pressure transients during hot leg blowdown, the maximum pressure drop across the barrel is a uniform radial compressive impulse. The barrel is then analyzed for dynamic buckling using the following conservative assumptions:
(1)  The effect of the fluid environment is neglected.
(2)  The shell is treated as simply supported. During cold leg blowdown, the upper barrel is subjected to a non-axisymmetric expansion radial impulse which changes as the rarefaction wave propagates both around the barrel and down the outer flow annulus between vessel and barrel.
The analysis of transverse barrel response to cold leg blowdown is performed as follows:
(1)  The core barrel is treated as a simply supported cylindrical shell of constant thickness between the upper flange weldment and the lower support plate weldment. No credit is taken for the supports at the barrel midspan offered by the outlet nozzles. This assumption leads to conservative deflection estimates of the upper core barrel.
(2)  The core barrel is analyzed as a shell with two variable sections to model the support flange and core barrel.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                            3.9-15


SI Pressure Release
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-79 (3)  The barrel with the core and thermal shielding pads is analyzed as a beam fixed at the top and elastically supported at the lower radial support and the dynamic response is obtained.
Guide Tubes - The dynamic loads on rod cluster control guide tubes are more severe for a loss-of-coolant accident caused by hot leg rupture than for an accident by cold leg rupture since the cold leg break leads to much smaller changes in the transverse coolant flow over the rod cluster control guide tubes. In addition to analyses of these accidents, guide tubes are also analyzed for intermediate size breaks to ensure no loss of function.
The guide tubes in closest proximity to the ruptured outlet nozzle are the most severely loaded. The transverse guide tube forces during the hot leg blowdown decrease with increasing distance from the ruptured nozzle location.
A detailed structural analysis of the rod cluster control guide tubes is performed to establish the equivalent cross section properties and elastic end support conditions.
An analytical model is verified [8] both dynamically and statically by subjecting the control rod cluster tube to a concentrated force applied at the transition plate. In addition, the guide tube is loaded experimentally using a triangular distribution to conservatively approximate the hydraulic loading. The experimental results consists of a load deflection curve for the rod cluster control guide tube plus verification of the deflection criteria to assure rod cluster control insertion.
The response of the guide tubes to the transient loading due to blowdown may be found by utilizing the equivalent single degree of freedom system for the guide tube using experimental results for equivalent stiffness and natural frequency.
Upper Support Columns - Upper support columns located close to the broken nozzle during hot leg break will be subjected to transverse loads due to cross flow. The loads applied to the columns are computed with a method similar to the one used for the guide tubes; i.e., by taking into consideration the increase in flow across the column during the accident. The columns are studied as beams with variable section and the resulting stresses are obtained using the reduced section modulus and appropriate stress risers for the various sections.
The effects of the gaps that could exist between vessel and barrel, between fuel assemblies, and between fuel assemblies and baffle plates are considered in the analysis. Linear analysis will not provide information about the impact forces generated when components impinge each other, but can, and is, applied prior to gap closure. References [8] and [9] provide further details of the blowdown method used in the analysis of the reactor internals.
The stresses due to the safe shutdown earthquake (vertical and horizontal components) are combined with the blowdown stresses in order to obtain the largest principal stress and deflection. All reactor internals components were found to be within acceptable stress and deflection limits for both hot leg and cold leg loss-of-coolant accidents occurring simultaneously with the Safe Shutdown Earthquake.
3.9-16                                                      MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


SI Pressure ReleaseTable 3.9-17  Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 6 of 9)
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-79 The results obtained from the linear analysis indicate that during blowdown, the relative displacement between the components will close the gaps and consequently the structures will impinge on each other, making the linear analysis unrealistic and forcing the application of nonlinear methods to study the problem. Although linear analysis will not provide information about the impact forces generated when components impinge on each other, it can, and is, applied prior to gap closure. The effects of the gaps that could exist between vessel and barrel, between fuel assemblies, between baffle assemblies and baffle plates, and between the control rods and their guide paths were considered in the analysis. Both static and dynamic stress intensities are within acceptable limits. In addition, the cumulative fatigue usage factor is also within the allowable usage factor of unity.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-75WATTS BARWBNP-91ReactorCoolant System (68)FCV-68-305FCV-68-307 FCV-68-308 FCV-68-332 FCV-68-333 PCV-68-334 PCV-68-340A CKV-68-559 RFV-68-563 RFV-68-564 RFV-68-565 FSV-68-394 FSV-68-395 FSV-68-396 FSV-68-39780338025 8026 8000A 8000B PCV-456 PCV-455 8097 8010C 8010B 8010A 8012A 8012B 8014B 8014A 3/4 3/8 3/8 3
The stresses due to the safe shutdown earthquake (vertical and horizontal components) were combined in the most unfavorable manner with the blowdown stresses in order to obtain the largest principal stress and deflection. These results indicate that the maximum deflections and stress in the critical structures are below the established allowable limits. For the transverse excitation, it is shown that the upper barrel does not buckle during a hot-leg break and that it has an allowable stress distribution during a cold leg break.
3 3
Even though control rod insertion is not required for plant shutdown, this analysis shows that most of the guide tubes will deform within the limits established experimentally to assure control rod insertion. For the guide tubes deflected above the no loss of function limit, it must be assumed that the rods will not drop. However, the core will still shut down due to the negative reactivity insertion in the form of core voiding. Shutdown will be aided by the great majority of rods that do drop. Seismic deflections of the guide tubes are generally negligible by comparison with the no loss of function limit.
3 4
3.9.2.5.1 Evaluation of Reactor Internals for Limited Displacement RPV Inlet and Outlet Nozzle Break This section contains an evaluation of the effects of a limited displacement 127 in2 RPV inlet nozzle safe end break and a limited displacement 127 in2 RPV outlet nozzle safe end break on the reactor internals. Both breaks are assumed to have a break opening time of one millisecond. The main operational requirement to be met is that the plant be shut down and cooled in an orderly fashion so that the fuel cladding temperature is kept within the specified limits. This implies that the deformation of the reactor internals must be kept sufficiently small to allow core cooling and assure effectiveness of the emergency core cooling system. As a further criterion, the allowable stress criteria used for the core support structures are presented in Section 3.9.3.1.
6 6
The evaluation of the reactor internals for the RPV inlet break is composed of two parts. The first part is the in-plane response of the core barrel occurring in the vertical plane passing through the broken inlet nozzle. This is taken from the DARI-WOSTAS response described for the RPV support analysis in Section 5.2.1.10.6. The second part of this evaluation is the core-barrel shell response which consists of the various n MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                               3.9-17
6 1
1 1
1 Air Air Air Motor Motor Solenoid Solenoid Self Actuated


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-79
      = 0, 2, 3, etc., ring mode response occurring in the horizontal plane. These ring mode responses are generated as the inlet break rarefaction wave propagates to the core barrel at the inlet nozzle, which subjects the upper barrel to a non-axisymmetric expansion radial impulse which changes as the rarefaction wave propagates both around the barrel and down the outer flow annulus between the barrel and the vessel.
This second part, or ring mode evaluation is described in Reference [9] and is independent of the loop forces and cavity pressure.
From the moment and shear force time histories resulting from the DARI-WOSTAS response, the core barrel beam bending stresses and shear stresses are obtained.
The barrel beam stresses (the first part of the evaluation) are evaluated at the mid-barrel girth weld where the highest stresses in the barrel occur.
For the second part of shell mode analysis of the core barrel, the differential pressures across the core barrel wall distributed around the circumference must be determined.
These delta-p's are directly obtained from the blowdown analysis. The application of the delta-p's around the barrel circumference (i.e., resolving into Fourier components, etc.) is further described in Reference [6]. It is important to note that unlike the beam analysis, the shell response of the barrel (the various horizontal ring modes 0, 2, 3, 4, etc.) is independent of the response of the vessel on its supports, the response of the fuel, or any combination of these beam mode responses. Even though various phenomena may affect vessel beam behavior, only one set of barrel shell results is included in the stress combination. Also included in the stress results for the barrel is the vertical response from the DARI-WOSTAS analysis. The WOSTAS model presented in Section 5.2.1.10.6 showed that the vertical response of the barrel is considered uniform around the circumference.
However, since the DARI-WOSTAS model couples the horizontal beam and the vertical response of the reactor at the vessel supports, variation in horizontal response may be seen in the vertical behavior.
To properly evaluate the total stress results in the core barrel, the combination of the horizontal beam, vertical, and shell modes is performed on a time-history basis. This combination is performed at the girth weld, which is the most highly stressed region of the core barrel.
The evaluation of the reactor internals for the RPV outlet nozzle break involves primarily three internal components: core barrel, control rod guide tubes, and upper support columns. The rarefaction wave, which is independent of the loop loads and cavity pressure, propagates into the upper plenum from the outlet nozzle break, which subjects the upper core barrel to a uniform radial compressive impulse resulting from the pressure drop across the core barrel. The stability of the barrel is checked to ensure that buckling due to the compressive impulse does not occur. The beam response (including the vertical response of the barrel) and shell mode response are considered in the analysis. The maximum deflections calculated for the core barrel are within the allowable limits established in section 3.9.3.1.
3.9-18                                                      MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                          WBNP-79 Also included in the outlet nozzle break analysis is an evaluation of the control rod guide tubes and upper support columns. The guide tubes and support columns (primarily those close to the broken hot leg nozzle) are subjected to transverse loads due to increased cross flow in the upper plenum. These loads are independent of the loop loads and cavity pressure loads. The analysis results indicate that the deflections are within the allowable limits presented in Section 3.9.3.1; therefore, the internals geometry is maintained and control rod insertion is not significantly impaired.
3.9.2.6 Correlations of Reactor Internals Vibration Tests With the Analytical Results The dynamic behavior of reactor components has been studied using experimental data obtained from operating reactors along with results of model tests and static and dynamic tests in the fabricators shops and at plant site. Extensive instrumentation programs to measure vibration of reactor internals (including prototype units of various reactors) have been carried out during preoperational flow tests, and reactor operation.
From scale model tests, information on stresses, displacements, flow distribution, and fluctuating differential pressures is obtained. Studies have been performed to verify the validity and determine the prediction accuracy of models for determining reactor internals vibration due to flow excitation. Similarity laws were satisfied to assure that the model response can be correlated to the real prototype behavior.
Vibration of structural parts during prototype plants preoperational tests is measured using displacement gages, accelerometers, and strain transducers. The signals are recorded with F.M. magnetic tape records. On site and offsite signal analysis is done using both hybrid real time and digital techniques to determine the (approximate) frequency and phase content. In some structural components the spectral content of the signals include nearly discrete frequency or very narrow-band, usually due to excitation by the main coolant pumps and other components that reflect the response of the structure at a natural frequency to broad bands, mechanically and/or flow-induced excitation. Damping factors are also obtained from wave analyses.
It is known from the theory of shells that the normal modes of a cylindrical shell can be expressed as sine and cosine combinations with indices m and n indicating the number of axial half waves and circumferential waves, respectively. The shape of each mode and the corresponding natural frequencies are functions of the numbers m and n. The general expression for the radial displacement of a simply supported shell is:
Mx w ( x, , t ) = n=0 m =1 A nm ( t ) cos n + B nm ( t ) sin n sin ------------
L The shell vibration at a natural frequency depends on the boundary conditions at the ends. The effect of the ends is negligible for long shells or for higher order m modes, and long shells have the lowest frequency for n = 2 (elliptical mode). For short shells, the effects of the ends are more important, and the shell will tend to vibrate in modes corresponding to values of n > 2.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                    3.9-19


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-79 In general, studies of the dynamic behavior of components follow two parallel procedures: 1) obtain frequencies and spring constants analytically, and 2) confirm these values from the results of the tests. Damping coefficients are established experimentally. Once these factors are established, the response can be computed analytically. In parallel, the responses of important reactor structures are measured during preoperational reactor tests and the frequencies and mode shapes of the structures are obtained.
Theoretical and experimental studies have provided information on the added apparent mass of the water, which has the effect of decreasing the natural frequency of the component. For both cases, cross and parallel, the response is obtained after the forcing function and the damping of the system is determined.
Pre- and post-hot functional inspection results, in the case of plants similar to prototypes, serve to confirm predictions that the internals are well behaved. Any gross motion or undue wear would be evident following the application of approximately 107 cycles of vibration expected during the test period.
3.9.3 ASME Code Class 1, 2 and 3 Components, Component Supports and Core Support Structures 3.9.3.1 Loading Combinations, Design Transients, and Stress Limits 3.9.3.1.1 Subsystems and Components Supplied by Westinghouse Design transients are presented in Section 5.2.1.5.
For ASME Code Class 1 components, systems, and supports, loading conditions are presented in Section 5.2.1.10.1, and stress criteria are provided in Section 5.2.1.10.7.
Additional information concerning methods of analysis is presented throughout Section 5.2.1.10. Results of analyses are documented in the stress reports that describe the system or components.
For core support structures, design loading conditions are given in Section 4.2.2.3.
Loading conditions are discussed in Section 4.2.2.4.
In general, for reactor internals components and for core support structures, the criteria for acceptability, with regard to mechanical integrity analyses, are that adequate core cooling and core shutdown must be assured. This implies that the deformation of the reactor internals must be sufficiently small so that the geometry remains substantially intact. Consequently, the limitations established on the internals are concerned principally with the maximum allowable deflections and stability of the parts, in addition to a stress criterion to assure integrity of the components.
For the LOCA plus the SSE condition, deflections of critical internal structures are limited. In a hypothesized downward vertical displacement of the internals, energy absorbing devices limit the displacement after contacting the vessel bottom head, ensuring that the geometry of the core remains intact.
3.9-20                                                        MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid SolenoidDaphragmGlobe Globe Gate Gate Globe Globe Check Angle Angle Angle Globe Globe Globe GlobeContainment IsolationContainment Isolation Containment Isolation PORV Isolation PORV Isolation PORV PORV Containment Isolation RCS Pressure Release RCS Pressure Release RCS Pressure Release Head Vent Head Vent Head Vent Head VentContainment Spray System (72)FCV-72-2 FCV-72-21 FCV-72-22 FCV-72-39 FCV-72-40 FCV-72-41 FCV-72-44 FCV-72-45 CKV-72-506 CKV-72-507RFV-72-508RFV-72-509 CKV-72-548CKV-72-549 CKV-72-5629001B9017B 9017A 9001A 9026A 9026B 9020A 9020B 9018A 9018B9019A9019B 9011A9011B 9022A 10 12 12 10 8
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-86 The following mechanical functional performance criteria apply:
8 12 12 12 12 0.75 0.75 10 10 8MotorMotor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Self Actuated
(1)  Following the design basis accident, the functional criterion to be met for the reactor internals is that the plant shall be shutdown and cooled in an orderly fashion so that fuel cladding temperature is kept within specified limits. This criterion implies that the deformation of critical components must be kept sufficiently small to allow core cooling.
(2)   For large breaks, the reduction in water density greatly reduces the reactivity of the core, thereby shutting down the core whether the rods are tripped or not. The subsequent refilling of the core by the emergency core cooling system uses borated water to maintain the core in a subcritical state.
Therefore, the main requirement is to assure effectiveness of the emergency core cooling system. Insertion of the control rods, although not needed, gives further assurance of ability to shut the plant down and keep it in a safe shutdown condition.
(3)  The inward upper barrel deflections are controlled to ensure no contacting of the nearest rod cluster control guide tube. The outward upper barrel deflections are controlled in order to maintain an adequate annulus for the coolant between the vessel inner diameter and core barrel outer diameter.
(4)  The rod cluster control guide tube deflections are limited to ensure operability of the control rods.
(5)  To ensure no column loading of rod cluster control guide tubes, the upper core plate deflection is limited.
Methods of analysis and testing for core support structures are discussed in Sections 3.9.1.3, 3.9.1.4.1, 3.9.2.3, 3.9.2.5, and 3.9.2.6. Stress limits and deformation criteria are given in Sections 4.2.2.4 and 4.2.2.5.
3.9.3.1.1.1 Plant Conditions and Design Loading Combinations For ASME Code Class 2 and 3 Components Supplied by Westinghouse Design pressure, temperature, and other loading conditions that provide the bases for design of fluid systems Code Class 2 and 3 components are presented in the sections which describe the systems.
3.9.3.1.1.2 Design Loading Combinations by Westinghouse The design loading combinations for ASME Code Class 2 and 3 equipment and supports are given in Table 3.9-1. The design loading combinations are categorized with respect to Normal, Upset, Emergency, and Faulted Conditions.
Stress limits for each of the loading combinations are equipment oriented and are presented in Tables 3.9-2, 3.9-3, 3.9-4, and 3.9-6 for tanks, inactive pumps, valves, MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                              3.9-21


Self Actuated Self Actuated Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-79 and active pumps, respectively. The definition of the stress equations and limits are in accordance with the ASME Code as follows:
(a)  For tanks, Section III of the ASME Code, 1971 through Summer 1972 Addenda, and Code Case 1607-1.
(b)  For all other equipment, Section III of the ASME Code, 1971 through Summer 1973 Addenda, and Code Cases 1635-1 and 1636-1.
These stress equations have not changed in later editions of the ASME Code. For the actual numerical values of the allowables for specific equipment, the ASME Code Edition applicable to the time period of equipment procurement as specified on the procurement documents is used for the qualification.
Active* pumps and valves are discussed in Section 3.9.3.2. The equipment supports will be designed in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 3.9.3.4.
3.9.3.1.1.3 Design Stress Limits By Westinghouse The design stress limits established for equipment are sufficiently low to assure that violation of the pressure retaining boundary will not occur. These limits, for each of the loading combinations, are equipment oriented and are presented in Tables 3.9-2 through 3.9-4, and 3.9-6. See Section 3.9.3.1.1.2 for discussion of applicable code editions.
3.9.3.1.2 Subsystems and Components Analyzed or Specified by TVA (A)    ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 Piping.
The analytic procedures and modeling of piping systems is discussed in Sections 3.7.3.8 and 3.7.3.3**. As discussed in Section 3.7.3.8.1 the TVA analysis effort has been categorized into two approaches: Rigorous and Alternate. The loading sources, conditions, and stress limits are described below for each category and the results are summarized for each.
_____________
* Active components are those whose operability is relied upon to perform a safety function (as well as reactor shutdown function) during the transients or events considered in the respective operating condition categories.
                ** Generated reactor coolant loop response spectra curves and movements enveloping the Set B + Set C curves are used for the analysis or reanalysis of auxiliary piping systems attached to the reactor coolant loops. The ASME Code Case N-411 or Regulatory Guide 1.61 damping values can be used when Set B
                + Set C spectra are considered.
3.9-22                                                          MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Self Actuated Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-79 (1)  Loading Conditions, Stress Limits and Requirements for Rigorous Analysis (a)  The loading sources considered in the rigorous analysis of a piping system are defined in Table 3.9-7.
(b)  The piping is analyzed to the requirements of applicable codes as defined in Section 3.7.3.8.1.
(c)  The design load combinations are categorized with respect to Normal, Upset, Emergency, and Faulted Conditions. Class 1 piping is analyzed using the limits established in Table 3.9-8 for all applicable loading conditions. The pressurizer surge line is also evaluated for the thermal stratification and thermal striping in response to the NRC Bulletin 88-11.
Other rigorously analyzed piping meets the limits established in Table 3.9-9 for all applicable loading conditions.
(d)  Consideration is given to the sequence of events in establishing which load sources are taken as acting concurrently.
(e)  Equipment nozzle loads are within vendor and/or TVA allowable values.
This ensures that functionality and 'Active' equipment operability requirements are met.
(f)  All equipment (i.e., valves, pumps, bellows, flanges, strainers, etc.) is checked to ensure compliance with vendor limitations.
(g)  The pipe/valve interface at each active valve is evaluated and the pipe stresses are limited to the levels indicated in Table 3.9-10 unless higher limits are technically justified on a case-by-case basis.
(h)  Documentation of rupture stress is provided for the locations in the system being analyzed where the stress exceeds the limits for which pipe rupture postulation is required (See Section 3.6). The tabulation identifies the point and tabulates the stress for each point exceeding the limits.
(i)  Valves with extended operators or structures (including handwheels) meet the dynamic plus gravitational acceleration limits of 3g along the stem axis and 3g (vectorial summation) in the plane perpendicular to the valve stem axis. For 1-inch and smaller valves with handwheels, the dynamic plus gravitational acceleration limit is 3g in each of the three global (or local) directions. These limits apply to any valve orientation and must be maintained during piping analysis.
For steel body check valves (which have no external operators or structures) the limit for dynamic plus gravitational acceleration is 10g (vectorial summation of all three orthogonal directions).
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                              3.9-23


Self ActuatedGate Gate Gate Gate Gate Gate Gate Gate Check Check Relief Relief Check Check CheckContainment IsolationContainment Sump Recirculation Containment Sump Recirculation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Sump Recirculation Containment Sump Recirculation Containment Sump Recirculation Containment Sump RecirculationContainment Spray PMP A Suction Pressure Relief Containment Spray PMP B Suction Pressure Relief Containment Isolation Containment Isolation
WATTS BAR                                                                        WBNP-79 The valves as a minimum are qualified to the acceleration limits specified above. Higher accelerations are approved based on case-by-case technical justification.
(j)  Excessive pipe deformation is avoided.
(k)  Welded attachment loads and stresses for TVA Class 1 piping are evaluated in accordance with ASME Code Cases N-122 and N-391.
For Class 2 and 3 piping, loads and stresses from welded attachments are evaluated in accordance with ASME Code Cases N-318 and N-392.
Special cases of other welded attachments are evaluated by detailed finite element analysis or other applicable methods to assure that ASME Code stress allowables are met.
The attachment welds are full penetration, partial penetration, or fillet welded as detailed on the support drawings. Attachments are used generally on all piping systems, and locations can be determined from the support drawings.
(2) Loading Conditions and Stress Limits for Alternate Analysis (a)  The scope of the alternate analysis application is generally limited to systems having the following load sources: self-weight, internal pressure, seismic event, end point displacement, and limited thermal expansion. (Other load sources may be considered for special cases.)
(b)  The design load combinations are categorized with respect to Normal, Upset, Emergency, and Faulted Conditions. The criteria are developed to meet the stress limits given in Table 3.9-9 considering the applicable load sources.
(c)  The general limitations imposed on the piping by the application of the Alternate Analysis method are discussed in Section 3.7.3.8.3. For ASME Category I piping designed by alternate analysis, the same levels of valve acceleration and interface/nozzle load requirements of Section 3.9.3.1.2.A shall be maintained. Non-ASME, Category I(L) piping designed by alternate analysis is described in Sections 3.7.3.8.3 and 3.2.1.
(3) Considerations for the Faulted Condition Tables 3.9-8 through 3.9-10 identify the load sources and allowed stresses associated with the faulted condition. The stress limits used are those limits established in ASME Section III for the faulted condition.
The feedwater system inside containment, from the check valves to the steam generators including the piping components are evaluated for 3.9-24                                                MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


RHR IsolationTable 3.9-17  Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 7 of 9) 3.9-76MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-91Residual HeatRemoval System (74)CKV-72-563 FCV-74-1FCV-74-2 FCV-74-3 FCV-74-8 FCV-74-9 FCV-74-12 FCV-74-21 FCV-74-24 FCV-74-33 FCV-74-35 RFV-74-505 CKV-74-514CKV-74-515 CKV-74-544 CKV-74-5459022B87028701 8700A 8703 8704 FCV-610 8700B FCV-611 8716A 8716B 8708 8730A8730B 8 14 14 14 10 10 3
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-79 pressure boundary integrity to withstand the postulated water hammer event due to the feedwater check valve slam following pipe rupture at the main header (Turbine Building) using the ASME Section III Appendix F (1980 Edition through Winter 1982 Addenda) rules and limits.
14 3
The four main feedwater check valves were evaluated for structural integrity following the feedwater pipe rupture. Energy equivalence methods, in conjunction with nonlinear finite element and linear hand analyses, were used. The evaluations demonstrated that deformations in three of the four valves are within acceptable strain levels following the slam. With the assumption that the fourth valve is not functional, the transient effects of the resulting one steam generator blowdown are bounded by the "Major Rupture of a Main Feedwater Pipe inside containment" per Section 15.4.2.2.
8 8
Note that during the rigorous analysis phase of most piping systems, the postulated break locations are unknown and the jet impingement loads are unavailable and thus not included in the evaluation of the faulted condition.
3 8 8 8
However, where it is determined by the guidelines of Section 3.6 that jet impingement must be evaluated, the effect of the loads on pipe stress is evaluated during the pipe rupture analysis.
8 Self ActuatedMotorMotor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Self Actuated
(4)  Summary of Results - Rigorous Analysis of Class 1 and Class 2/3 Piping Performed by TVA MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                             3.9-25


Self Actuated Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-68 The results of the piping system analyses performed in accordance with the above paragraphs are presented and consolidated in a calculation with the following documentation:
(a)  Certification Report for ASME Code Class 1 Analyses.
(b)  Owner's review for ASME Code Class 1 Analysis.
(c)  Statement of Compliance with code requirements for ASME Code Class 2/3 Analyses.
(d)  Problem revision status form - for maintaining the traceability of revision performed on analysis, and correlating various forms affected by each revision.
(e)  Piping input data for recording all physical data used in the analysis.
(f)  Table of system operating modes - for identifying the various thermal conditions required and included in analysis.
(g)  Stress summary - for summarizing the maximum stresses for various loading combinations.
(h)  Equipment nozzle load qualification to demonstrate satisfaction of limits.
(i)  Valve acceleration qualification to demonstrate satisfaction of limits.
(j)  Summary of loads and movements at pipe supports.
(k)  A mathematical model isometric - for depicting the analytical model utilized, and defining the type and location of pipe supports and restraints.
A record copy of these problem calculations is maintained at TVA and is available for review upon request.
All computer printouts of final analysis are microfilmed for TVA permanent records.
(B)  Category I ASME Code Class 2 and 3 Mechanical Equipment (1)  Plant Conditions and Design Loading Combinations Design pressure, temperature, and other loading conditions that provide the bases for design of fluid systems Code Class 2 and 3 components are presented in the sections which describe the systems.
(2)  Design Loading Combinations 3.9-26                                                      MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-79 The design loading combinations for ASME Code Class 2 and 3 equipment and supports are given in Table 3.9-13B. The design loading combinations are categorized with respect to Normal, Upset, Emergency and Faulted Conditions.
Stress limits for each of the loading combinations are equipment oriented and are presented in Tables 3.9-14, 3.9-15 and 3.9-16 for tanks, inactive*
pumps, and inactive* valves respectively. The definition of the stress equations and limits are in accordance with the ASME Code as follows:
(a)  For tanks, Section III of the ASME Code, 1971 through Summer 1972 Addenda, and Code Case 1607-1 (b)  For all other equipment, Section III of the ASME Code, 1971 through Summer 1973 Addenda, and Code Cases 1635-1 and 1636-1 These stress equations have not changed in later editions of the ASME Code.
For the actual numerical values of the allowables for specific equipment, the ASME Code Edition applicable to the time period of equipment procurement as specified on the procurement documents is used for the qualification.
____________
* Inactive components are those whose operability are not relied upon to perform a safety function during the transients or events considered in the respective operating condition category.
Active* pumps and valves are discussed in Section 3.9.3.2.1. The vendor supplied equipment/component supports stress levels are limited to the allowable stress of AISC or ASME Section III subsection NF or other comparable stress limits as delineated in the applicable design specification.
Section 3.8.4 describes the allowable stresses used for TVA-designed equipment/component supports.
The design stress limits established for the components are sufficiently low to assure that violation of the pressure retaining boundary will not occur.
These limits, for each of the loading combinations, are component oriented and are presented in Tables 3.9-14 through 3.9-16.
3.9.3.2 Pumps and Valve Operability Assurance 3.9.3.2.1 Active* ASME Class 1, 2, & 3 Pumps and Valves The list of active valves for primary fluid (i.e., water and steam containing components) systems in the Westinghouse scope of supply is presented in Table 3.9-17. The list of active pumps supplied by Westinghouse is presented in Table 3.9-28. The list of pumps and valves for fluid systems within TVA scope of supply are presented in Tables 3.9-25 and 3.9-27. Only ASME Section III pumps and valves that were purchased after September 1, 1974, were considered to be within the scope of WBN compliance with MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                              3.9-27


Self Actuated CheckGateGate Gate Gate Gate Globe Gate Globe Gate Gate Relief Check Check Check Check RHR IsolationRCS Pressure Boundary ProtectionRCS Pressure Boundary Protection ECCS Flowpath Integrity RCS Pressure Boundary Protection RCS Pressure Boundary Protection
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-86 Regulation Guide 1.48. These pumps and valves meet the special design requirements verifying operability as specified in Regulatory Guide 1.48. The remaining components in Tables          3.9-17, 3.9-25, 3.9-27, and 3.9-28 meet the appropriate qualification requirements in accordance with the guidelines of IEEE 344-1971 and consistent with the ASME Code applicable at the time of the contract date for procuring the component. These qualifications provide an adequate level of operability assurance for all active pumps and valves.
The following rules were used to identify active pumps and valves:
(1)  Only FSAR Chapter 15 Design Basis Events (DBE's) were assumed. These DBE's were studied to identify the active pumps and valves required to mitigate the DBE and place the plant in a safe shutdown condition.
(2)  Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary (RCPB) - Valves that are a part of the RCPB [defined by 10 CFR Section 50.2(v)] and require movement to isolate the RCS were identified as active.
(3)  Containment Isolation - Containment isolation valves that require movement to isolate the containment were identified as active.
(4)  Check Valves - Any check valve required to close or cycle when performing its system safety function was identified as active.


RHR Mini-Flow ECCS Flowpath Integrity
          *Active components are those whose operability is relied upon to perform a safety function (as well as reactor shutdown function) during the transients or events considered in the respective operating condition categories.
Any check valve that was only required to open in the performance of its system safety function was not identified as active. This position was justified by: (a) the free-swinging nature of the valves and (b) the normal stress over-design of the valve body.
(5)  Achieve and Maintain a Safe Shutdown Condition - The minimum redundant complement of equipment required to achieve and maintain safe shutdown was selected.
3.9.3.2.2 Operability Assurance 3.9.3.2.2.1 Westinghouse Scope of Supply Mechanical equipment classified as safety-related must be shown capable of performing its function during the life of the plant under postulated plant conditions.
Equipment with faulted condition functional requirements include 'active' pumps and valves in fluid systems such as the residual heat removal system, safety injection system, and the containment spray system. Seismic analysis is presented in Section 3.7 and covers all safety-related mechanical equipment.
3.9-28                                                          MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


RHR Mini-Flow ECCS Flowpath Integrity ECCS Flowpath Integrity RHR Pump Suction Prevent Backflow thru Nonoperating Train Prevent Backflow thru Nonoperating Train Prevents pump-to-pump Interaction Prevents pump-to-pump InteractionWaste Disposal System (77)FCV-77-9FCV-77-10 FCV-77-16FCV-77-17FCV-77-18 FCV-77-19 FCV-77-20 FCV-77-127 FCV-77-128 CKV-77-849 CKV-77-868 RFV-77-28759170FCV-1003 9159A9159B9160A 9160B 9157 3 3 3/4 3/4 1 1
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-79 Operability is assured by satisfying the requirements of the programs specified below.
1 2
Additionally, equipment specifications include requirements for operability under the specified plant conditions and define appropriate acceptance criteria to ensure that the program requirements defined below are satisfied.
2 3/4 1
Pump and Valve Qualification for Operability Program Active pumps are qualified for operability by first, being subjected to rigid tests both prior to installation in the plant and after installation in the plant. The in-shop tests include: 1) hydrostatic tests of pressure retaining parts to 150 percent times the design pressure times the ratio of material allowable stress at room temperature to the allowable stress value at the design temperature, 2) seal leakage tests, and 3) performance tests to determine total developed head, minimum and maximum head, net positive suction head (NPSH) requirements and other pump parameters. Also monitored during these operating tests are bearing temperatures and vibration levels.
1/2 Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Self Actuated
Bearing temperature limits are determined by the manufacturer, based on the bearing material, clearances, oil type, and rotational speed. These limits are approved by Westinghouse. Vibration limits are also determined by the manufacturer and are approved by Westinghouse. After the pump is installed in the plant, it undergoes the cold hydro-tests, hot functional test, and the required periodic inservice inspection and operation. These tests demonstrate that the pump will function as required during all normal operating conditions for the design life of the plant.
In addition to these tests, the safety-related active pumps, are qualified for operability by assuring that the pump will start up, continue operating, and not be damaged during the faulted condition.
The pump manufacturer is required to show by analysis correlated by test, prototype tests or existing documented data that the pump will perform its safety function when subjected to loads imposed by the maximum seismic accelerations and the maximum faulted nozzle loads. It is required that test or dynamic analysis be used to show that the lowest natural frequency of the pump is greater than 33 Hz. The pump, when having a natural frequency above 33 Hz, is considered essentially rigid. This frequency is sufficiently high to avoid problems with amplification between the component and structure for all seismic areas. A static shaft deflection analysis of the rotor is performed with the conservative safe shutdown earthquake (SSE) accelerations of 3g horizontal and 2g vertical acting simultaneously. The deflections determined from the static shaft analysis are compared to the allowable rotor clearances. The nature of seismic disturbances dictates that the maximum contact (if it occurs) will be of short duration. If rubbing or impact is predicted, it is required that it be shown by prototype tests or existing documented data that the pump will not be damaged or cease to perform its design function. The effect of impacting on the operation of the pump is evaluated by analysis or by comparison of the impacting surfaces of the pump to similar surfaces of pumps which have been tested.
In order to avoid damage during the faulted plant condition, the stresses caused by the combination of normal operating loads, SSE, dynamic system loads are limited to the limits indicated in Table 3.9-6. In addition, the pump casing stresses caused by the maximum faulted nozzle loads are limited to the stresses outlined in Table 3.9-6.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                3.9-29


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-79 The changes in operating rotor clearances caused by casing distortions due to these nozzle loads are considered. The maximum seismic nozzle loads combined with the loads imposed by the seismic accelerations are also considered in an analysis of the pump supports. Furthermore, the calculated misalignment is shown to be less than that misalignment which could cause pump misoperation. The stresses in the supports are below those in Table 3.9-6; therefore, the support distortion is elastic and of short duration (equal to the duration of the seismic event).
Performing these analyses with the conservative loads stated and with the restrictive stress limits of Table 3.9-6 as allowables, assure that critical parts of the pump will not be damaged during the short duration of the faulted condition and that, therefore, the reliability of the pump for post-faulted condition operation will not be impaired by the seismic event.
If the natural frequency is found to be below 33 Hz, an analysis will be performed to determine the amplified input accelerations necessary to perform the static analysis.
The adjusted accelerations will be determined using the same conservatisms contained in the 3g horizontal and 2g vertical accelerations used for 'rigid' structures.
The static analysis will be performed using the adjusted accelerations; the stress limits stated in Table 3.9-6 must still be satisfied.
To complete the seismic qualification procedures, the pump motor is qualified for operation during the maximum seismic event. Any auxiliary equipment which is identified to be vital to the operation of the pump or pump motor, and which is not proven adequate for operation by the pump or motor qualifications, is also separately qualified by meeting the requirements of IEEE Standard 344-1971 or -1975, as applicable, with the additional requirements and justifications outlined in this section.
The program above gives the required assurance that the safety-related pump/motor assemblies will not be damaged and will continue operating under SSE loadings, and, therefore, will perform their intended functions. These proposed requirements take into account the complex characteristics of the pump and are sufficient to demonstrate and assure the seismic operability of the active pumps.
Since the pump is not damaged during the faulted condition, the functional ability of active pumps after the faulted condition is assured since only normal operating loads and steady state nozzle loads exist. Since it is demonstrated that the pumps would not be damaged during the faulted condition, the post-faulted condition operating loads will be identical to the normal plant operating loads. This is assured by requiring that the imposed nozzle loads (steady-state loads) for normal conditions and post-faulted conditions are limited by the magnitudes of the normal condition nozzle loads. The post-faulted condition ability of the pumps to function under these applied loads is proven during the normal operating plant conditions for active pumps.
Safety-related active valves must perform their mechanical motion at times of an accident. Assurance must be supplied that these valves will operate during a seismic event. Tests and analyses were conducted to qualify active valves.
3.9-30                                                      MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Self ActuatedDiaphragmDiaphragm GlobeGlobeGlobe Globe Globe Plug Plug Check Check ReliefContainment IsolationContainment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment IsolationContainment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Thermal Relief Valve Penetration X41Table 3.9-17  Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 8 of 9)
WATTS BAR                                                                                        WBNP-79 The safety-related active valves are subjected to a series of stringent tests prior to service and during the plant life. Prior to installation, the following tests are performed:
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-77WATTS BARWBNP-91 1  Testing not required as part of Inservice Testing Program.
shell hydrostatic test to ASME Section III requirements, backseat and main seat leakage tests, disc hydrostatic test, and operational tests to verify that the valve will open and close.
2  Testing not required as part of Inservice Testing Program. Testing not required to meet 10 CFR 50 Appendix J. See Table 6.2
For the active valves qualification of electric motor operators for the environmental conditions (i.e., aging, radiation, accident environment simulation, etc.) refer to Section 3.11 and Regulatory Guide 1.73. Cold hydro tests, hot functional qualifications tests, periodic inservice inspections, and periodic inservice operations are performed in-situ to verify and assure the functional ability of the valve. These tests guarantee reliability of the valve for the design life of the plant. The valves are constructed in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III.
.4-1.3 These components were not committed to meet the requirements of RG 1.48 since these were procured under contracts issued prior to September 1, 1974.Spent Fuel Pool Cooling (78)0-CKV-78-5090-CKV-78-510 0-ISV-78-5810-ISV-78-582 0-CKV-78-5860-ISV-78-5870-ISV-78-588 8 8 10 10 8 8 8 Self Actuated Self Actuated ManualManual Self ActuatedManualManual Check Check GateGate CheckGateGatePump A-A Discharge Check ValvePump B-B Discharge Check Valve Standby Pump Train A Suction Isolation Valve Standby Pump Train B Suction Isolation Valve Pump C-S Discharge Check Valve Standby Pump Train B Discharge Isolation Valve Standby Pump Train A Discharge Isolation ValveTable 3.9-17  Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 9 of 9) 3.9-78MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-91 S h =Material allowable stress at maximum operating temperature from ASME Edition including Summer 1973 Addenda or the applicable code edition specified at the time of procurement.
On all active valves, an analysis of the extended structure is also performed for static equivalent seismic SSE loads applied at the center of gravity of the extended structure.
P m =Primary general membrane stress, the average primary stress across the solid section under consideration. Excludes effects of discontinuities and concentrations. Produced by pressure, mechanical loads.
The stress limits allowed in these analyses will show structural integrity. The limits that will be used for active Class 2 and 3 valves are shown in Table 3.9-4.
P b =Primary bending stress. This stress is produced by pressure and mechanical loads including inertia earthquake effects but excluding effects of discontinuities and concentrations.
In addition to these tests and analyses, a representative electric motor operated valve will be tested for verification of operability during a simulated plant faulted condition event by demonstrating operational capabilities within the specified limits. The testing procedures are described below.
P L =Primary local membrane stress, the average stress across any solid section under consideration. Considers effects of discontinuities but not concentrations. Produced by pressure and mechanical loads including inertia earthquake effects.
The valve will be mounted in a manner which will represent typical valve installations.
Notes:
The valve will include operator and limit switches if such are normally attached to the valve in service. The faulted condition nozzle loads will be considered in the test in either of two ways: 1) loads equivalent to the faulted condition nozzle loads are limited such that the operability of the valve is not affected.
1.The stress allowables given above were permitted for design, evaluation, and modification activities. As an alternative, a simplified approach was permitted for pumps procured prior to September 1, 1974. By this alternative approach, in addition to  meeting applicable ASME Code design condition requirements, the pump was analyzed for the faulted condition and pump stresses were limited to 1.2 times the applicable ASME Code design/normal condition primary stress allowables.2.Active pumps procured after September 1, 1974 also complied with operability tests and analysis requirements describe d in Section 3.9.3.2.2.2.Table 3.9-18  Stress Limits for Active Category I ASME Class 2 and 3 PumpsConditionStress Limits(1) (2) DesignNormal and UpsetP m  1.0 S h (P m or P L) + P b  1.5 S hEmergencyP m  1.1 S h (P m or P L) + P b  1.65 S hFaultedP m  1.2 S h (P m or P L) + P b  1.8 S h MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-79WATTS BARWBNP-79 Notes:1.S h , P m , P b, and P L  are defined in Table 3.9-18. 2.Valve nozzle (piping load) stress analysis is not required when section modulus and area of a plane, normal to the flow, through the region of valve body crotch is at least 10% greater than the piping connected (or joined) to the valve body inlet and outlet nozzles. 3.Stress in the valve nozzles resulting from connecting pipe does not exceed the limits listed in this table where S is based on the valve material. To ensure this, the attached pipe stress is limited in accordance with Table 3.9-10 unless justified on a case-by-case basis.4.Design requirements listed in this table are not applicable to valve discs, stems, cast rings, or other parts of valves which are contained within the confines of the body and bonnet.5.The stress allowables given above were permitted for design, evaluation, and modification activities. As an alternative, a simplified approach was permitted for valves procured prior to September 1, 1974. By this alternative approach, in addition to meeting the applicable ASME code design condition requirements, the valve was analyzed or tested on IEEE 344-1971 requirements for the faulted condition. When qualified by analysis using this alternative, the valve stresses were limited to 1.2 times the applicable ASME code design/normal condition primary stress allowables and the valve extended structure stresses were limited to 1.33 times the AISC Code normal stress allowable.6.Active valves procured after September 1, 1974 also complied with operability test and analysis requirements of R.G. 1.48.Table 3.9-19  Stress Limits for Active Category I ASME Class 2 and 3 ValvesConditionStress Limits (Notes 1-6) Design & NormalP m  1.0 S h (P m or P L) + P b  1.5 S hUpsetP m  1.1 S h (P m or P L) + P b  1.65 S hEmergencyP m  1.5 S h (P m or P L) + P b  1.8 S hFaultedP m  2.0 S h (P m or P L) + P b  2.4 S h 3.9-80MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-89 **Water-steam Mixture Downstream of ValvePRT  - Pressurizer Relief Tank***Safety Class B Discharge PipingVCT  - Volume Control TankHT  - Holdup TanksTable 3.9-20  Relief Valves in Class 2 Auxiliary SystemsSystem  No. Location  Fluid  Relieving TemperatureValve  Set PressureMaximum Required Flow RateDischargeSIS 1Accumulator Tanks/
The operability of the valve during a faulted condition shall be demonstrated by satisfying the following criteria:
N 2 SupplyNitrogen or Borated Water120F 700/750 psig1500 cfmAtmosphereSIS  2S. I. Pump SuctionBorated Water100F 220 psig  25 gpmto PRT SIS 3S. I. Pump DischargeBorated Water100F1750 psig  20 gpmto PRT SIS 4Boron Injection TankBorated Water180F2735 psig  20 gpmto HT RHR 5Residual Pump SuctionBorated Water350F**200F 450 psig 450 psig 480 gpm 690 gpmto PRTto PRTRHR 6Residual Pump DischargeBorated Water120F  600 psig  20 gpmto PRTCVCS 7Letdown Line OrificeBorated Water347F** 600 psig 227 gpmto PRTCVCS 8Seal Water Return LineBorated Water250F** 150 psig 225 gpmto PRTCVCS 9Letdown Line  Borated Water200F 200 psig 200 gpmto VCT***CVCS 10Seal Water Return LineBorated Water150F 200 psig 180 gpmto VCT***CVCS 11Volume Control TankHydrogenNitrogen or Borated Water130F  70 psig 350 gpmto HT***CVCS  12Charging Pump SuctionBorated Water100F 220 psig 25 gpmto PRT CVCS 13Positive Displacement Charging Pump DischargeBorated Water 250F2735 psig 100 gpmto VCT***WDS 14Downstream of 1-FCV-77-127Liquid Radwaste140F50 psig1 gpmupstream of 1-FCV-77-127 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-81WATTS BARWBNP-89Table 3.9-21  Support Design Allowable Stresses For Category I Piping SupportsLoad ConditionSupplementalStructuralSteel, Welds &Structural Bolts(2)   Component   Standard Supports  W/ LCDS' Except  Unistrut ClampsComponentStandard SupportsW/O LCDS' ExceptUnistrut Clamps (1)Normal &FrictionNormal AISCAllowable  Manufacturer's  LCDS for Level AManufacturer'sAllowable CatalogValueUpsetNormal AISCAllowable X 1.33 Manufacturer's LCDS for Level BManufacturer'sAllowable CatalogValue X 1.2EmergencyNormal AISCAllowable X 1.5  Manufacturer's LCDS for Level CManufacturer'sAllowable CatalogValue X 1.5FaultedNormal AISCAllowable X 1.5  Manufacturer's  LCDS for Level DManufacturer'sAllowable CatalogValue X 1.5TestNormal AISCAllowable  Manufacturer's  LCDS for Level A  X 1.33Manufacturer'sAllowable CatalogValue X 1.33 Notes:(1)The allowable loads for both U-bolts and unistrut clamps were developed based on the load testing per the requirements of ASME Section III 1974, Subsection NF including Winter 1974, Addenda.
(1)  All the active valves shall be designed to have a first natural frequency which is greater than 33 Hz, if it is practical to do so. If the lowest natural frequency of an active valve is less than 33 Hz, then the valve's mathematical model is included in the piping dynamic analysis, so as to assure the calculated valve acceleration does not exceed the values used in the static tests of the manufacturer's qualification program and to reflect the proper valve dynamic behavior.
(2)Tensile stresses do not exceed 0.9F y and shear stresses do not exceed  For compressive loads, the stress does not exceed 2/3 critical buckling
(2)   The actuator and yoke of the representative motor operated valve system will be statically deflected using an equivalent static load that simulates those conditions applied to the valve under faulted condition accelerations applied at the center of gravity of the operator alone in the direction of the weakest axis of the yoke. The design pressure of the valve will be simultaneously applied to the valve during the static deflection tests.
.3/F 0.9 y 3.9-82MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-51Table 3.9-22  Deleted by Amendment 51 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-83WATTS BARWBNP-51Table 3.9-23  Deleted by Amendment 51 3.9-84MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-51Table 3.9-24  Deleted by Amendment 51 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-85WATTS BARWBNP-90Table 3.9-25  Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 1 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/DescriptionMain Steam (1)FCV-1-4PCV-1-5FCV-1-7FCV-1-11 PCV-1-12FCV-1-14FCV-1-22 PCV-1-23FCV-1-25FCV-1-29 PCV-1-30FCV-1-32FCV-1-51FCV-1-52 FCV-1-147 FCV-1-148 FCV-1-149 FCV-1-150 FCV-1-181 FCV-1-182 FCV-1-183 FCV-1-184 32 6 4 32 6 4 32 6 4 32 6 4 4 4 2
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                   3.9-31
2 2
2 4
4 4
4 Air AirSolenoid Air AirSolenoid Air AirSolenoid Air AirSolenoidMotorHydraulic Air Air Air Air Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe GlobeMain steam and containment isolation SG pressure control and relief Blowdown and containment isolation Main steam and containment isolation SG  pressure control and relief Blowdown and containment isolation Main steam and containment isolation SG pressure control and relief Blowdown and containment isolation Main steam and containment isolation SG pressure control and relief Blowdown and containment isolation AFW pump turbine operation AFW pump turbine operation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation 3.9-86MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-90SFV-1-512SFV-1-513 SFV-1-514 SFV-1-515 SFV-1-516 SFV-1-517 SFV-1-518 SFV-1-519 SFV-1-520 SFV-1-521 SFV-1-522 SFV-1-523SFV-1-5246x106x10 6x10 6x10 6x10 6x10 6x10 6x10 6x10 6x10 6x10 6x106x10Self-actuatedSelf-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuatedSelf-actuated Angle relief Angle relief


Angle relief
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-86 (3)  The valve will then be cycled while in the deflected position. The time required to open or close the valve in the defected position will be compared to similar data taken in the undeflected condition to evaluate the significance of any change.
The accelerations which will be used for the static valve qualification are 3g horizontal and 2g vertical with the valve yoke axis vertical. The piping designer must maintain the operator accelerations to these levels unless higher limits are technically justified on a case-by-case basis.
The testing was conducted on the valves with extended structures which are most affected by acceleration, according to mass, length and cross-section of extended structures. Valve sizes which cover the range of sizes in service will be qualified by the tests and the results are used to qualify all valves within the intermediate range of sizes.
Valves which are safety-related but can be classified as not having an extended structure, such as check valves and safety valves, are considered separately. Check valves are characteristically simple in design and their operation will not be affected by seismic accelerations or the applied nozzle loads. The check valve design is compact and there are no extended structures or masses whose motion could cause distortions which could restrict operation of the valve. The nozzle loads due to seismic excitation will not affect the functional ability of the valve since the valve disc is typically designed to be isolated from the body wall. The clearance supplied by the design around the disc will prevent the disc from becoming bound or restricted due to any body distortions caused by nozzle loads. Therefore, the design of these valves is such that once the structural integrity of the valve is assured using standard design or analysis methods, the ability of the valve to operate is assured by the design features. In addition to these design considerations, the valve will also undergo the following tests and analysis: 1) in-shop hydrostatic test, 2) in-shop seat leakage test, and 3) periodic in-situ valve exercising and inspection to assure the functional ability of the valve.
The pressurizer safety valves are qualified by the following procedures (these valves are also subjected to tests and analysis similar to check valves): stress and deformation analyses of critical items which may affect operability for faulted condition loads, in-shop hydrostatic and seat leakage tests, and periodic in-situ valve inspection.
In addition to these tests, a static load equivalent to that applied by the faulted condition will be applied at the top of the bonnet and the pressure will be increased until the valve mechanism actuates. Successful actuation within the design requirements of the valve will assure its overpressurization safety capabilities during a seismic event.
Using these methods, active valves will be qualified for operability during a faulted event. These methods proposed conservatively simulate the seismic event and assure that the active valves will perform their safety-related function when necessary.
The above testing program for valves is conservative. Alternate valve operability testing, such as dynamic vibration testing, is allowed if it is shown to adequately assure the faulted condition functional ability of the valve system.
3.9-32                                                        MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Angle relief
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-79 Pump Motor and Valve Operator Qualification Active pump motors (and vital pump appurtenances) and active valve electric motor operators (and limit switches and pilot solenoid valves), are seismically qualified by meeting the requirements of IEEE Standard 344-1971 or 1975, as applicable. If the testing option is chosen, sine-beat testing will be justified. This justification may be provided by satisfying one or more of the following requirements to demonstrate that multifrequency response is negligible or the sine-beat input is of sufficient magnitude to conservatively account for this effect.
(1)  The equipment response is basically due to one mode.
(2)  The sine-beat response spectra envelopes the floor response spectra in the region of significant response.
(3)  The floor response spectra consists of one dominant mode and has a peak at this frequency.
If the degree of coupling in the equipment is small, then single axis testing is justified.
Multi-axis testing is required if there is considerable cross coupling; however, if the degree of coupling can be determined, then single axis testing can be used with the input sufficiently increased to include the effect of coupling on the response of the equipment.
Seismic qualification by analysis alone, or by a combination of analysis and testing, may be used when justified. The analysis program can be justified by: 1) demonstrating that equipment being qualified is amendable to analysis, and 2) that the analysis be correlated with test or be performed using standard analysis techniques.
3.9.3.2.2.2 TVA Scope of Supply TVA uses the following criteria to prescribe a suitable program to assure the functional adequacy of active Category I fluid system components (pumps and valves) under combined loading conditions. These criteria supplement or amend previously stated requirements for fluid system components in those cases where fluid system components in those cases where the components are judged to be active (i.e., if they perform a required mechanical motion during the course of accomplishing a safety function). These criteria assure that all active seismic Category I fluid system components will maintain structural integrity and perform their safety functions under loadings, including seismic, associated with normal, upset, and faulted conditions.
These criteria are similar to the accepted response to NRC Position for the TVA's Bellefonte Nuclear Plant units 1 and 2 concerning compliance with the requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.48. The exception is that the seismic qualification for Watts Bar is for a 2-dimensional earthquake, while for Bellefonte it is for a 3-dimension earthquake.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                3.9-33


Angle relief
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-79 3.9.3.2.3 Criteria For Assuring Functional Adequacy of Active Seismic Category I Fluid System Components (Pumps and Valves) and Associated Essential Auxiliary Equipment (1)    The seismic design adequacy of Category I electrical power and control equipment and instrumentation directly associated with the active Category I pumps and valves is assured by seismically qualifying the components by analysis and/or testing in accordance with the requirements of IEEE Standard 344 (for applicable edition, refer to Section 3.9.2.2).
(2)    When either analysis or testing is used to demonstrate the seismic design adequacy of Category I components, the characteristics of the required input motion is specified by either response spectra, power spectral density function or time history data derived from the structure or system seismic analysis. When the testing method is used, random vibration input motion shall be used, but single frequency input, such as sine beats, may be used provided that:
(a)  The characteristics of the required input motion indicate that the motion is dominated by one frequency.
(b)  The anticipated response of equipment is adequately represented by one mode.
(c)  The input has sufficient intensity and duration to excite all modes to the required magnitude, such that the testing response spectra will envelop the corresponding response spectra of the individual modes.
For equipment with more than one dominant frequency and for equipment supported near the base of the structure where some random components of the earthquake may remain, single frequency testing may still be applicable provided that the input has sufficient intensity and duration to excite all modes to the required magnitude, such that the testing response spectra will envelop the corresponding response spectra of the individual modes. When equipment responses along one direction are sensitive to the vibration frequencies along another perpendicular direction, in the case of single frequency testing, the time phasing of the inputs in the vertical and horizontal directions is such that a purely rectilinear resultant output is avoided.
In both the testing and analysis procedure, the possible amplified design loads for vendor supplied equipment is considered as follows:
(a)  If supports are tested, they shall be tested with the actual components mounted and operating or if the components are inoperative during the support test, the response at the equipment mounting locations shall be monitored and components shall be tested separately and the actual 3.9-34                                                          MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Angle relief
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-79 input to the equipment shall be more conservative in amplitude and frequency content than the monitored responses.
(b)    The support analysis shall include the component loads. Seismic restraints shall be used as applicable with their adequacy verified by either testing or analysis as described above.
(3)  All active Category I pumps are subjected to tests both prior to installation in the plant and after installation in the plant. The in-shop tests shall include (a) hydrostatic tests of pressure-retaining parts, (b) seal leakage tests, and (c) performance tests, while the pump is operated with flow, to determine total developed head, minimum and maximum head 3 net positive suction head (NPSH) requirements and other pump/motor parameters. Bearing temperatures and vibration levels shall be monitored during these operating tests. Both are shown to be below appropriate limits specified to the manufacturer for design of the pump. After the pump is installed in the plant, it shall undergo cold hydro tests, or operational tests, hot functional tests, and the required periodic in-service inspection and operation.
(4)  Active Category I pumps are analyzed to show that the pump will operate normally when subjected to the maximum seismic accelerations and maximum seismic nozzle loads. Tests or dynamic analysis show that the lowest natural frequency of the pump is above 33 Hz, and thus considered essentially rigid. A static shaft deflection analysis of the rotor is performed with the conservative seismic accelerations of 1.5 times the applicable plant floor response spectra. The deflections determined from the static shaft analysis shall be compared to the allowable rotor clearances. Stresses caused by the combination of normal operating loads, seismic, and dynamic system loads shall be limited to the material elastic limit, as indicated in Table 3.9-18. The primary membrane stress (Pm) for the faulted conditions loads shall be limited to 1.2Sh, or approximately 0.75 S (S = yield stress). The primary membrane stress plus the primary bending stress (Pb) shall be limited to 1.8Sh, or approximately 1.lS. In addition, the pump nozzle stresses caused by the maximum seismic nozzle loads shall be limited to stresses outlined in Table 3.9-18. The maximum seismic nozzle loads shall also be considered in an analysis of the pump supports to assure that a system misalignment cannot occur.
If the natural frequency is found to be below 33 Hz, and analysis is performed to determine the amplified input accelerations necessary to perform the static analysis. The adjusted accelerations shall be determined using the same conservatism contained in the accelerations used for "rigid" structures. The static analysis is performed using the adjusted accelerations; the stress limits stated in Table 3.9-18 must still be satisfied.
(5)  Each type of active Category I pump motor is independently qualified for operating during the maximum seismic event. Any appurtenances which are identified to be vital to the operation of the pump or pump motor and which MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                3.9-35


Angle relief
WATTS BAR                                                                              WBNP-79 are not qualified for operation during the pump analysis or motor qualifications, shall also be separately qualified for operation at the accelerations each would see at its mounting. The pump motor and vital appurtenances are qualified by meeting the requirements of IEEE Standard 344- 1971 or 1975 edition, depending on the procurement date (see Section 3.9.2.2.). If the testing option was chosen, sine-beat testing is justified by satisfying one or more of the following requirements to demonstrate that multifrequency response is negligible or the sine-beat input is of sufficient magnitude to conservatively account for this effect.
(a)    The equipment response is basically due to one mode.
(b)    The sine-beat response spectra envelops the floor response spectra in the region of significant response.
(c)    The floor response spectra consists of one dominant mode and has a peak at this frequency. The degree of mass or stiffness coupling in the equipment will, in general, determine if a single or multi-axis test is required. Multi-axis testing is required if there is considerable cross coupling. If coupling is very light, then single axis testing is justified; or, if the degree of coupling can be determined, then single axis testing can be used with the input sufficiently increased to include the effect of coupling on the response of the equipment.
(6) The post-faulted condition operating loads for active Category I pumps is considered identical to the normal plant operating loads. This is assured by requiring that the imposed nozzle loads (steady-state loads) for normal conditions and post-faulted conditions be limited by the magnitudes of the normal condition nozzle loads. Thus, the post-faulted condition ability of the pumps to function under these applied loads is proven during the normal operating plant conditions.
(7) Active Category I valves, except check valves, are subjected to a series of stringent tests prior to installation and after installation in the plant. Prior to installation, the following tests are performed: (a) shell hydrostatic test, (b) backseat and main seat leakage tests, (c) disc hydrostatic test, (d) functional tests to verify that the valve will operate within the specified time limits when subjected to the design differential pressure prior to operating, and (e) operability qualification of air operator control valves for the conditions over their installed life (i.e., aging, radiation, accident environment simulation, etc.)
in accordance with the requirements of IEEE Standard 382 (see Section 3.11). Cold hydro qualification tests, preoperational tests, hot functional qualification tests, periodic inservice inspections, and periodic inservice operation are performed after installation to verify and assure functional ability of the valves. To the extent practicable, functional tests are performed after installation to verify that the valve will open and/or close in a time consistent with required safety functions.
3.9-36                                                      MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Angle relief
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-79 (8)  Active Category I valves are designed using either stress analyses or the pressure containing minimum wall thickness requirements. An analysis of the extended structure is performed for static equivalent seismic loads applied at the center of gravity of the extended structure. The maximum stress limits allowed in these analyses confirms structural integrity and are the limits developed and accepted by the ASME for the particular ASME class of valve analyzed. The stress limits used for active Class 2 and 3 valves are given in Table 3.9-19. Class 1 valves are designed according to the rules of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, NB-3500.
(9)  Representative active Category I valves of each design type with overhanging structures (i.e., motor or pneumatic operator) are tested for verification of operability during a simulated seismic event by demonstrating operational capabilities within specified limits. The testing is conducted on a representative number of valves. Valves from each of the primary safety-related design types (e.g., motor- operated gate valves) are tested.
Valve sizes which cover the range of sizes in service are qualified by the tests and the results are used to qualify all valves within the intermediate range of sizes. Stress and deformation analyses are used to support the interpolation.
The valve is mounted in a manner which is conservatively representative of a typical plant installation. The valve includes the operator and all appurtenances normally attached to the valve in service. The operability of the valve during a seismic event is verified by satisfying the following requirements:
(a)    All active valves are designed to have a first natural frequency which is greater than 33 Hz if practical to do so. This may be shown by suitable test or analysis.
If the lowest natural frequency of an active valve is less than 33 Hz, the valve's mathematical model is included in the piping dynamic analysis.
This assures the calculated valve acceleration does not exceed the values used in the static tests of the manufacturers qualification program and reflects the proper valve dynamic behavior.
(b)    The actuator and yoke of the valve system are statically loaded an amount greater than that determined by an analysis as representing the applicable seismic accelerations applied at the center of gravity of the operator alone in the direction of the weakest axis of the yoke. The design pressure of the valve is simultaneously applied to the valve during the static deflection tests.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                              3.9-37


Angle relief
WATTS BAR                                                                              WBNP-86 (c)    The valve is then operated while in the deflected position, i.e., from the normal operating mode to the faulted operating mode. The valve must perform its safety-related function within the specified operating time limits.
(d)    Motor operators and other electrical appurtenances necessary for operation are qualified as operable during the seismic event by analysis and/or testing in accordance with the requirements of IEEE Standards 344 (refer to Section 3.9.2.2 for the applicable edition).
The accelerations used for the static valve qualification are 3.0 g horizontal and 2.0 g vertical with the valve yoke axis vertical. The piping designer shall maintain the motor operator accelerations to equivalent levels. If the valve accelerations exceed these levels, an evaluation of the valve is performed to document acceptability on a case-by-case basis.
If the frequency of the valve, by test or analysis, is less than 33 Hz, a dynamic analysis of the valve is performed to determine the equivalent acceleration to be applied during the static test. The analysis shall provide the amplification of the input acceleration considering the natural frequency of the valve and piping along with the frequency content of the applicable plant floor response spectra. The adjusted accelerations are determined using the same conservatism contained in the accelerations used for "rigid" valves. The adjusted accelerations are then used in the static analysis and the valve operability is assured by the methods outlined in steps (b), (c), and (d) above using the modified acceleration input.
(10) The design of each active Category I check valve is such that once the structural integrity of the valve is assured using standard design or analysis methods, the ability of the valve to operate is assured by the design features.
In addition to design considerations, each active check valve undergoes:
(a)    Stress analysis including the applicable seismic loads (b)    In-shop hydrostatic tests for parts that could affect the operability of the valve, (c)    In-shop seat leakage tests, and (d)    Preoperational and periodic in-situ testing and inspection to assure functional ability of the valves.
3.9-38                                                  MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Angle relief
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-79 (11) The design of the pressurizer safety valve (Category I) is such that once the structural integrity of the valves is assured using standard design or analysis methods, the ability of the valve to operate is assured by the design features.
In addition to design considerations, the pressurizer safety valve is subjected to:
(a)  Stress and/or deformation analysis for parts that could affect the operability of the valve for the applicable seismic loads, (b)  In-shop hydrostatic and seal leakage tests, and (c)  Periodic in-situ valve inspection.
In addition to these tests, a static load equivalent to the seismic load is applied to the top of the bonnet and the pressure is increased until the valve mechanism actuates. Successful actuation within the design requirements of the valve has been demonstrated.
(12) Wherever practicable, prototype test and analytical results are utilized to assure functional adequacy of active Category I pumps and valves and their appurtenances.
3.9.3.3 Design and Installation Details for Mounting of Pressure Relief Devices The design and installation of pressure relieving devices are consistent with the requirements established by Regulatory Guide 1.67, "Installation of Overpressure Protective Devices."
Each main steam line is provided with one power operated atmospheric relief valve and five safety valves sized in accordance with ASME, B&PV, Section III.
The safety valves are set for progressive relief in intermediate steps of pressure within the allowed range (105% of the design pressure) of pressure settings to prevent more than one valve actuating simultaneously. The valve pressure settings at which the individual valves open are tabulated below in the column identified as "Set Pressure."
The valves are designed to reseat at the pressure values identified in the column "Blowdown Pressure."
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                              3.9-39


Angle relief
WATTS BAR                                                                                              WBNP-89 Maximum Expected                    Rated Flow at Accumulation  Accumulation Pressure in    Set Pressure + Blowdown1      Pressure In Set      Pressure to  Pressure at  Steam Header at 3%            Pressure Below  Steam Header Valve Mark    Pressure  fully Open    maximum      Rated Relieving Accumulation  Set Pressure to at Valve Closing Number        (psig)    Valve (%)    Flow (%)    Flow (psig)    (lb/hr)        Close (%)      (psig) 47W400-101      1185    3              8.4        1284            791,563      10              1066.5 47W400-102      1195    3              7.5        1284            798,163      10              1075.5 47W400-103      1205    3              6.6        1284            804,764      10              1084.5 47W400-104      1215    3              5.8        1284            811,364      10              1093.5 47W400-105      1224    3              4.9        1284            817,304      10              1101.6 Note 1. The licensing basis for the WBN plant is 10% maximum blowdown[13].
This is more conservative than the 5% maximum blowdown specified by the ASME Section III requirements.
All valves are connected to a rigidly supported common header that is in turn connected to the main steam piping through branch piping equal in size to the main steam piping. The header and valves are located immediately outside containment in the main steam valve building.
The safety valves are mounted on the header such that they produce torsion, bending, and thrust loads in the header during valve operation. The header has been designed to accommodate both dynamic and static loading effects of all valves blowing down simultaneously.
The stress produced by the following loading effects assumed to act concurrently are within the code allowable.
(1)  Deadweight effects (2)  Thermal loads and movements (3)  Seismic loads and movements (4)  Safety valve thrust, moments, torque loading1 (5)  Internal pressure 1
The safety valve thrust loads are assumed to occur in the upset plant condition, and do not occur concurrently with an OBE.
The nozzles connecting each valve to the header are analyzed to assure that for both dynamic and static loading situations, the stresses produced in the nozzle wall are within the code allowable for the same loading consideration as the header.
The safety valves and power-operated atmospheric relief valves are Seismic Category I components. They have been seismically qualified by analyses per criteria presented in Section 3.7.3.16 and Table 3.9-16.
Pressure relief valves in auxiliary safety related systems have been installed considering loads carried in the support members produced by:
(1)  Deadweight of valve and appurtenances, 3.9-40                                                                MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Angle relief Angle reliefSteam generator safety reliefSteam generator safety relief Steam generator safety relief Steam generator safety relief Steam generator safety relief Steam generator safety relief Steam generator safety relief Steam generator safety relief Steam generator safety relief Steam generator safety relief Steam generator safety relief Steam generator safety reliefSteam generator safety reliefTable 3.9-25  Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 2 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-87WATTS BARWBNP-90Main Steam (1)(Continued)SFV-1-525SFV-1-526 SFV-1-527 SFV-1-528 SFV-1-529SFV-1-530SFV-1-531FCV-1-15FCV-1-16 FCV-1-17 FCV-1-18 CKV-1-891 CKV-1-8926x106x10 6x10 6x10 6x10 6x10 6x10 4 4 4
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-79 (2)  Thermal effects, (3)  Seismic effects, (4)  Maximum valve thrust, moment, and torque loading effects, and (5)  Internal pressure.
4 4
Relief valves that discharge to the atmosphere are either rigidly supported by their own individual support, or the nozzle and component to which the valve is attached (vessel, tank, or pipe) has been designed to carry the valve static and dynamic loads. Individual supports have been designed to stress levels in accordance with Section 3.9.3.4.2.
4Self-actuatedSelf-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated MotorMotor Motor Motor Self-actuated Self-actuated Angle relief Angle-relief
Stresses in nozzles and components produced by the valve loads considered above are determined per the method delineated in Welding Research Council Bulletin No.
107 or equivalent and are combined with normal loading operational loads for the component. Relief valves blowing down is considered as an upset loading condition for the plant. Therefore, the allowable stress intensity for the component supporting the valve loads is in accordance with those tabulated in Tables 3.9-2, 3.9-8, 3.9-9, or 3.9-14, as applicable.
Loading associated with relief valves discharging through piping components to a collector tank are analyzed considering the surge effects of the initial discharge through the pipe. This condition is considered as an upset loading condition for the piping components connecting to the valve and the allowable stress intensity is in accordance with those for piping components tabulated in Tables 3.9-8 and 3.9-9.
Pressure relief valves and pertinent operating information for the valves that have been considered in the installation requirements of the valve are tabulated in Table 3.9-20.
As related to the design and installation criteria of pressure relieving devices, Westinghouse interfaces with TVA by providing the following:
(1)  Overpressure Protection Report[14]. This report documents the compliance for overpressure protection requirements as per the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, NB-7300 and NC-7300, and provides the maximum relieving requirements.
(2)  Mounting brackets on the pressurizer. These brackets can be used as structural supports, if needed.
(3)  Criteria and guidelines. Supplementary criteria specifically applicable to the design and fabrication of nuclear plant safety and relief valve installations are provided.
(4)  Review of system layout and resultant loads for acceptability, where applicable.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                3.9-41


Angle-relief
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-89 3.9.3.4 Component Supports 3.9.3.4.1 Subsystem and Component Supports Analyzed or Specified by Westinghouse (1&2)The criteria for Westinghouse supplied supports for ASME Code Class 1 Mechanical Equipment is presented in Section 5.2.1.10.7.
(3)  ASME Code - Class 2 and 3 supports are designed as follows:
(A)  Linear (a)  Normal - The allowable stresses of AISC-69 Part 1, a reference basis for Subsection NF of ASME Section III, are employed for normal condition limits.
(b)  Upset - Stress limits for upset conditions are the same as normal condition stress limits. This is consistent with Subsection NF of ASME Section III (see NF-3320).
(c)  Emergency - For emergency conditions, the allowable stresses or load ratings are 33% higher than those specified for normal conditions. This is consistent with Subsection NF of ASME Section III in which (see NF-3231) limits for emergency conditions are 33% greater than the normal condition limits.
(d)  Faulted - Section 5.2.1.10 specifies limits which assure that no large plastic deformations will occur (stress < 1.2Sy). If any inelastic behavior is considered in the design, detailed justification is provided for this limit.
Otherwise, the supports for active components are designed so that stresses are less than or equal to Sy. Thus the operability of active components is not endangered by the supports during faulted conditions.
Welding was in accordance with the American Welding Society, (AWS)
                        "Structural Welding Code," AWS D1.1, with revisions 1-73 and 1-74, except later editions may be used for prequalified joint details, base materials, and qualification of welding procedures and welders.
Nuclear Construction Issues Group documents NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 may be used after June 26, 1985, for weldments that were designed and fabricated to the requirements of AISC/AWS. Visual inspection of structural welds will meet the minimum requirements of NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 as specified on the design drawings or other design output.
Inspectors performing visual examination to the criteria of NCIG-01 are trained in the subject criteria.
(A)  Plates and Shells 3.9-42                                                      MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Angle-relief
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-89 The stress limits used for ASME Class 2 and 3 plate and shell component supports are identical to those used for the supported component. These allowed stresses are such that the design requirements for the components and the system structural integrity are maintained.
For active Class 2 or 3 pumps, support adequacy is proven by satisfying the criteria in Section 3.9.3.2.1. The requirements consist of both stress analysis and an evaluation of pump/motor support misalignment.
Active valves are, in general, supported only by the pipe attached to the body. Exterior supports on the valve are not used.
3.9.3.4.2 Subsystem and Component Supports Analyzed or Specified by TVA (1)  ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 Piping Supports (a)    Loading Conditions The following conditions have been assigned for support load evaluation for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant support design (not including pipe whip restraints): normal, upset, emergency, faulted, and test condition. The piping support design loads and combinations are given in Table 3.9-13A.
(b)    Support Types, Loading Combinations, Stress Limits, and Applicable Codes (1)    Linear Supports The allowed stresses are defined in Table 3.9-21. The load combinations and allowable stresses are based on and exceed the requirements of NRC Regulatory Standard Review Plan, Directorate of Licensing, Section 3.9.3.
The design load is determined by the condition yielding the most conservative support design.
Welding was in accordance with the American Welding Society, (AWS)
                    "Structural Welding Code," AWS D1.1 with revisions 1-73 and 1-74, except later editions may be used for prequalified joint details, base materials, and qualification of welding procedures and welders. Nuclear Construction Issues Group documents NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 may be used after June 26, 1985, for weldments that were designed and fabricated to the requirements of AISC/AWS. Visual inspection of structural welds will meet the minimum requirements of NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 as specified on the design drawings or other design output. Inspectors performing visual examination to the criteria of NCIG-01 are trained in the subject criteria.
(2)  Standard Support MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                              3.9-43


Angle-relief
WATTS BAR                                                                            WBNP-79 The allowable stresses are defined in Table 3.9-21. The load combinations consider all applicable load sources which induce load into the appropriate type support. The design conforms to the requirements of MSS-SP-58, 1967 edition or ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, subsection NF.
(3) Pre-engineered Support Element Pre-engineered support elements are defined as standard hardware items such as rods, clamps, clevises, and struts used in the installation of either a linear support or a standard support component.
The design load is determined from the tabulated loads described above for the linear or standard support component. The allowable loads are given in Table 3.9-21.
(c)    General Design Requirements (1)  The gravitational or actual loads are considered to consist of pipe, fittings, pipe covering, contents of pipe systems, and valves.
(2)  All thermal modes of operation are considered in load evaluation.
Thermal loads are not considered to relieve primary loads induced by gravity, other sustained loads, or seismic events.
(3)  Installation tolerances are not considered a source of load reduction unless special installation requirements are required.
(4)  The required movement in unrestrained directions for the line being supported is tabulated in the table of support loads. The support design is arranged to accommodate this required movement of the piping. Hangers are designed in such a manner that they cannot become disengaged by any movement of the supported pipe.
(5)  If ASME Code Case N-318-3 is used in the design of integral welded attachments to the piping pressure boundary, the requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.84 are documented in TVA calculations.
(d)    Deformation Limits Pipe support stiffness/deflection limitations are required for seismic Category I.
The following criteria are used for support stiffness requirements:
(1)  All pipe support structural steel, except as described below, is designed to limit the maximum deflection to 0.0625" (based on the greater of the seismic/dynamic load components of the upset or 3.9-44                                                  MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Angle relief
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-79 faulted loading conditions, or based on the minimum design load).
In addition, the maximum deflection is limited to 0.125" (based on the total design load). These analyses were performed independently for each restrained direction (axis) at the point of load application.
(2)    The first dynamic support in each lateral direction adjacent to strain sensitive equipment (i.e., pump, compressor or turbine nozzle) is designed to limit the maximum deflection to 0.0625" (based on the total design load). This analysis is performed independently for each restrained direction (axis) at the point of load application.
(3)    Except for the unbraced cantilevers, baseplate rotation or deflection due to baseplate flexibility are considered insignificant and, therefore, are not considered. Anchor bolt stiffness is not considered for this evaluation.
(4)    For supports with a common member (i.e., gang supports) the deflection at the point under consideration due to the simultaneous application of each pipe's dead weight and thermal loads added algebraically are evaluated to determine the maximum deflection for both the hot and cold pipe conditions. The deflection at the point under consideration resulting from the simultaneous application of each pipe's dynamic loads is determined by SRSS method. The total deflection due to dead weight plus thermal, and dynamic loads is evaluated based on absolute summation of the two deflections calculated above.
(5)    Support components carrying load primarily in axial tension or compression meet the requirements for stiffness without further evaluation. Also, the stiffness/deflection limitations do not apply in the unrestrained support direction (i.e., due to friction loads).
(6)    Component standard support elements are considered rigid and therefore, no stiffness/deflection evaluation is necessary except as provided in approved design standards.
(7)    Higher deflection limits may be used if justified on a case-by-case basis.
(e)  Considerations for the Faulted Condition Table 3.9-21 identifies the allowed stresses associated with the faulted condition. The faulted load conditions, represented by postulated pipe whip and jet impingement, are evaluated as described in Section 3.6 for all systems, piping, equipment, and structures shown on issued TVA drawings. Piping, systems, pipe supports and other structures that are the targets of postulated pipe whip or jet impingement may require MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                3.9-45


Angle relief
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-91 protection to assure safe plant shutdown. This protection is provided by evaluation on a case-by-case basis.
For evaluation of field routed piping or other field located equipment a different method is used. For these cases, a minimum allowable separation method is used for screening piping systems, conduit, and instrument lines to assure that adequate separation exists between these systems and postulated breaks or through-wall leakage cracks in fluid piping. Where adequate separation is not available, piping is relocated, supports are strengthened, supports added, or mitigative devices are provided to prevent unacceptable loads.
Piping and supports subjected to a jet force from a break in piping of equal or less nominal size and wall thickness are assumed to receive no unacceptable damage, provided the target piping and supports are designed in accordance with accepted codes; i.e. ASME Section III, ANSI B31.1, AISC, etc.
(f)  Results The design information for pipe supports of systems analyzed by TVA is tabulated on tables of support design loads and included in the problem file as indicated in Section 3.9.3.1.2.
(2)  Mechanical Equipment and Component Supports TVA-designed supports for Category I equipment and components satisfy the AISC allowable stress limits described in Section 3.8.4.5.2 and the stiffness requirements described in Section 3.7.3.16.5. Valve actuator supports are designed as pipe supports. Valve actuator tiebacks have special stiffness requirements to limit valve extended, structure stresses under load.
Vendor-supplied equipment and component supporting structures that are provided as part of the equipment assembly, are seismically qualified as part of the equipment package. This qualification is described in Section 3.9.3.1.2.
3.9.4 Control Rod System 3.9.4.1 Descriptive Information of CRDS Refer to Section 4.2.3.
3.9.4.2 Applicable CRDS Design Specifications Refer to Sections 4.2.3.1.4 and 4.2.3.2.2.
3.9.4.3 Design Loadings, Stress Limits, and Allowable Deformations Refer to Section 4.2.3.3.1.
3.9-46                                                      MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Gate Gate Gate Gate Check CheckSteam generator safety reliefSteam generator safety relief Steam generator safety relief Steam generator safety relief Steam generator safety relief Steam generator safety relief Steam generator safety relief AFW pump turbine operationAFW pump turbine operation AFW pump turbine operation AFW pump turbine operation Prvnt bkflw btwn stm gen Prvnt bkflw btwn stm genTable 3.9-25  Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 3 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description 3.9-88MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-90Feedwater (3)FCV-3-33FCV-3-47 FCV-3-87 FCV-3-100 FCV-3-116A FCV-3-116B PCV-3-122 FCV-3-126A FCV-3-126B PCV-3-132 FCV-3-136A FCV-3-136B LCV-3-148 LCV-3-148A LCV-3-156 LCV-3-156A LCV-3-164 LCV-3-164A LCV-3-171 LCV-3-171A LCV-3-172 LCV-3-173 LCV-3-174LCV-3-175FCV-3-179A FCV-3-179B FCV-3-185 FCV-3-186 FCV-3-187 FCV-3-188 16 16 16 16 4
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-79 3.9.4.4 CRDS Performance Assurance Program Refer to Section 4.2.3.4.2.
4 4
3.9.5 Reactor Pressure Vessel Internals 3.9.5.1 Design Arrangements For verification that changes in design from those in previously licensed plants of similar design do not affect the flow-induced vibration behavior, refer to Section 3.9.2.3.
4 4
3.9.5.2 Design Loading Conditions Refer to Section 4.2.2.3.
4 6
3.9.5.3 Design Loading Categories Refer to Section 4.2.2.4.
6 4
3.9.5.4 Design Basis Refer to Section 4.2.2.5.
2 4
3.9.6 Inservice Testing of Pumps and Valves Inservice testing of ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 pumps and valves will be conducted to the extent practical in accordance with the 1989 Edition of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Subsections IWV and IWP, as required by 10 CFR 50.55a(g).
2 4
Since the Watts Bar piping systems were designed before the Code was issued, some valves and pump parameters cannot be tested in accordance with Subsections IWP and IWV. These exceptions have been noted in the program submittal made to NRC.
2 4
The following safety-related pumps will be tested:
2 3
(1)  Centrifugal Charging Pumps (2)  Safety Injection Pumps (3)  Residual Heat Removal Pumps (4)  Containment Spray Pumps (5)  Component Cooling System Circulation Pumps (6)  Auxiliary Feedwater Pumps (7)  Essential Raw Cooling Water Pumps (8)  Boric Acid Transfer Pumps (9)  ERCW Screenwash Pumps (10)  Main Control Room Chilled Water Pumps (11)  Electrical Board Room Chilled Water Pumps (12)  Shutdown Board Room Chilled Water Pumps Table 3.9-26 is a tabulation of the various category valves in each of the systems.
3 3 3 6 6
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                            3.9-47
2 2
2 2MotorMotor Motor Motor Motor Motor Air Motor Motor Air Motor Motor Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air/Nitrogen Air/Nitrogen Air/NitrogenAir/NitrogenMotor Motor Air Air Air Air Gate Gate Gate Gate Gate Gate Globe Gate Gate Globe Gate Gate Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Gate Gate Globe Globe Globe Globe Main feedwater isolation Main feedwater isolation


Main feedwater isolation
WATTS BAR                                                                          WBNP-91 REFERENCES (1)  "Documentation of Selected Westinghouse Structural Analysis Computer Codes", WCAP-8252, April 1977.
(2)  WCAP-8317-A, "Prediction of the Flow-Induced Vibration of Reactor Internals by Scale Model Tests," March 1974.
(3)  WCAP-8517, "UHI Plant Internals Vibration Measurement Program and Pre and Post Hot Functional Examinations," March 1975.
(4)  WCAP-7879, "Four Loop PWR Internals Assurance and Test Program," July 1972.
(5)  Trojan Final Safety Analysis Report, Appendix A-12.
(6)  Fabic, S., "Description of the BLODWN-2 Computer Code," WCAP-7918, Revision 1, October 1970.
(7)  Fabic, S., "Computer Program WHAM for Calculation of Pressure Velocity, and Force Transients in Liquid Filled Piping Networks, "Kaiser Engineers Report No. 67-49-R, November 1967.
(8)  Bohn, G. J., "Indian Point Unit No. 2 Internals Mechanical Analysis for Blowdown Excitation," WCAP-7332-AR-P. November, 1973 (Proprietary) and WCAP-7822-AR, November, 1973 (Non-Proprietary)
(9)  Bohm, G. J. and LaFaille, J. P., "Reactor Internals Response Under a Blowdown Accident," First Intl. Conf. on Structural Mechanics in Reactor Technology, Berlin, September 20-24, 1971.
(10) "Bench Mark Problem Solutions Employed for Verification of WECAN Computer Program", WCAP-8929, June 1977.
(11) WCAP-11627, "Upflow Conversion Safety Evaluation Report - Watts Bar Units 1 & 2," September 1987.
(12) Letter from Peter S. Tam, NRC, to M. O. Medford, TVA, "Watts Bar Nuclear Plant - Upflow Conversion Modification to Reactor Internals (TAC M85802 &
M85803)", dated July 28, 1993.
(13) Westinghouse letter, WAT-D-7489, "Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Units Numbers 1 and 2 Main Steam Safety Valves Excess Blowdown Analysis - Phase 2",
August 28, 1987.
(14) WCAP-7769, "Topical Report Overpressure Protection for Westinghouse Pressurized Water Reactors," Rev. 1, June, 1972.
3.9-48                                                  MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Main feedwater isolation AFW flow path integrity AFW flow path integrity Maintain head on pump AFW flow path integrity AFW flow path integrity Maintain head on pump AFW flow path integrity AFW flow path integrity Steam generator level control Steam generator level control Steam generator level control Steam generator level control Steam generator level control Steam generator level control Steam generator level control Steam generator level control Steam generator level control Steam generator level control Steam generator level controlSteam generator level controlAFW flow path integrity AFW flow path integrity FW pressure integrity FW pressure integrity FW pressure integrity FW pressure integrityTable 3.9-25  Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 4 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-89WATTS BARWBNP-90Feedwater (3) (Continued)FCV-3-236FCV-3-239 FCV-3-242 FCV-3-245 CKV-3-508 CKV-3-509 CKV-3-510 CKV-3-511 CKV-3-638 CKV-3-644 CKV-3-645 CKV-3-652 CKV-3-655 CKV-3-656 CKV-3-669 CKV-3-670 CKV-3-678 CKV-3-679 CKV-3-805 CKV-3-806 CKV-3-810 CKV-3-830 CKV-3-831CKV-3-832CKV-3-833 CKV-3-861 CKV-3-862 CKV-3-871 CKV-3-872 CKV-3-873 CKV-3-874 CKV-3-921 CKV-3-922 6 6 6
WATTS BAR                                                                                        WBNP-45 Table 3.9-1 Design Loading Combinations For ASME Code Class 2 And 3 Components And Supports Analyzed By Westinghouse, (Excluding Pipe Supports) (A)
6 16 16 16 16 6
Condition Classification                            Loading Combination (B, C)
6 6
Design and Normal                                  Design pressure Design temperature, Dead weight, nozzle loads Upset                                              Upset condition pressure, Upset condition metal temaperature, deadweight, OBE, nozzle loads Emergency                                          Emergencey condition pressure, emergency condition metal temperature, deadweight, nozzle loads Faulted                                            Faulted condition pressure, faulted condition metal temperature, deadweight, SSE, nozzle loads (A)The responses for each loading combination are combine using the absolute sum method. On a case-by-case basis, algebraic summation may be used when signs are known for final design evaluations.
6 6
(B)Temperature is used to determine allowable stress only.
6 6
(C)Nozzle loads are those loads associated with the particular plant operating conditions for the component under consideration.
6 6
Revised by Amendment 45 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                   3.9-49
6 6
6 10 4
4 4 4 4
4 4
4 4
4 4
4 Air Air Air Air Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuatedSelf-actuatedSelf-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuatedGlobeGlobe Globe Globe Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Main feedwater isolation Main feedwater isolation


Main feedwater isolation
WATTS BAR                                                                          WBNP-79 Table 3.9-2 Stress Criteria For Safety Related Asme Class 2 And 3 Tanks Analyzed By Westinghouse Table 3.9-2 Condition                      Stress Limits Design and Normal              m #1.0 S (m or L) + b #1.5 S Upset                          m # 1.1 S (m or L) + b # 1.65 S Emergency                      m # 1.5 S (m or L) + b # 1.8 S Faulted                        m # 2.0 S (m or L) + b # 2.4 S 3.9-50                                                  MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Main feedwater isolation Pipe break protection Pipe break protection Pipe break protection Pipe break protection Pipe break protection Pipe break protection Pipe break protection Pipe break protection Pipe break protection Pipe break protection Pipe break protection Pipe break protection Pipe break protection Pipe break protection ERCW flowpath integrity ERCW flowpath integrity ERCW flowpath integrity Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrityMaintain TDAFW pump flow path integrityMaintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity Containment Isolation Containment IsolationTable 3.9-25  Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 5 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description 3.9-90MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-90Fuel Oil (18)CKV-18-556A-ACKV-18-556A-B CKV-18-557B-A CKV-18-557B-B CKV-18-558A-A CKV-18-558A-B CKV-18-559A-A CKV-18-559A-B RFV-18-560A-A RFV-18-560A-B CKV-18-563A-A CKV-18-563A-B CKV-18-565B-A CKV-18-565B-B CKV-18-566B-A CKV-18-566B-B RFV-18-567B-A RFV-18-567B-B CKV-18-570B-A CKV-18-570B-B CKV-18-686A CKV-18-686B CKV-18-687ACKV-18-687BRFV-18-688A RFV-18-688B CKV-18-689A CKV-18-689B CKV-18-787A CKV-18-787B1.5001.500 1.500 1.500 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.375 0.375 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.375 0.375 1.000 1.000 1.500 1.500 1.0001.0001.500 1.500 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000Self-actuatedSelf-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuatedSelf-actuatedSelf-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Relief Relief Check Check Check Check Check Check Relief Relief Check Check Check Check Check Check Relief Relief Check Check Check Check7-DAY MDP #1 ISOL7-DAY MDP #1 ISOL 7-DAY MDP #2 ISOL 7-DAY MDP #2 ISOL DAY TK #1 MDP ISOL DAY TK #1 MDP ISOL DAY TK #1 EDP ISOL DAY TK #1 EDP ISOL DAY TK #1 MDP DISC DAY TK #1 MDP DISC DAY TK #1 MDP DISC DAY TK #1 MDP DISC DAY TK #2 MDP ISOL DAY TK #2 MDP ISOL DAY TK #2 EDP ISOL DAY TK #2 EDP ISOL DAY TK #2 MDP DISC DAY TK #2 MDP DISC DAY TK #2 MDP DISC DAY TK #2 MDP DISC 7-DAY MDP #1 ISOL 7-DAY MDP #2 ISOL DAY TK #1 EDP ISOLDAY TK #1 MDP ISOLDAY TK #2 MDP DISC DAY TK #1 MDP DISC DAY TK MDP #2 DISC DAY TK MDP #1 DISC DAY TK #2 MDP ISOL DAY TK #2 EDP ISOLHigh-PressureFire Protection System (26)FCV-26-240FCV-26-243 26-1260 26-1296 4 4 4
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-64 Table 3.9-3 Stress Criteria for Category I ASME Code Class 2 and Class 3 Inactive Pumps and Pump Supports Analyzed by Westinghouse Condition                              Stress Limits*                      Pmax**
4MotorMotor Self-actuated Self-actuatedGateGate Check CheckContainment isolationContainment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolationTable 3.9-25  Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 6 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-91WATTS BARWBNP-90Ventilation (30)FCV-30-2FCV-30-5 FCV-30-7 FCV-30-8 FCV-30-9 FCV-30-10 FCV-30-12 FCV-30-14 FCV-30-15 FCV-30-16 FCV-30-17 FCV-30-19 FCV-30-20 FCV-30-37 FCV-30-40 FCV-30-50 FCV-30-51 FCV-30-52 FCV-30-53 FCV-30-54 FCV-30-56 FCV-30-57 FCV-30-58FCV-30-59FCV-30-61 FCV-30-62 1-FSV-30-134*
Design and Normal                      m # 1.0 S                          1.0 (m or L) + b # 1.5 S Upset                                  m # 1.1 S                          1.1 (m or L) + b # 1.65 S Emergency                              m # 1.5 S                          1.2 (m or L) + b # 1.80 S Faulted                                m # 2.0 S                          1.5 (m or L) + b # 2.4 S
1-FSV-30-135*
  *Stress limits are taken from ASME III, Subsections NC and ND, or, for pumps procured prior to the incorporation of these limits into ASME III, from Code Case 1636.
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 10 10 8
  **The maximum pressure shall not exceed the tabulated factors listed under Pmax times the design pressure.
8 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 10 10 24 24 1
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                 3.9-51
1 Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Solenoid Solenoid Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Solenoid SolenoidIsolation ValveIsolation Valve Containment Isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Isolation Valve Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Isolation Valve Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolationContainment isolationIsolation Valve Isolation Valve Containment isolation Containment isolation*Unit 2 valves were deleted under ECN 5663Table 3.9-25  Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 7 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description 3.9-92MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-90 Air-Conditioning System (31)FCV-31-305FCV-31-306 FCV-31-308 FCV-31-309 FCV-31-326 FCV-31-327 FCV-31-329 FCV-31-330 CKV-31-3378 CKV-31-3392 CKV-31-3407 CKV-31-3421 2 2 2
2 2
2 2
2 2
2 2
2 Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Self Actuated


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                            WBNP-86 Table 3.9-4 Stress Criteria For Safety Related ASME Code Class 2 and Class 3 Valves Analyzed by Westinghouse Condition                      Stress Limits (Notes 1-6)                            Pmax (Note 7)
Design & Normal                Valve bodies shall conform to the requirements of ASME Section III, NC-3500 (or ND-3500)
Upset                          m # 1.1 S                                          1.1 (m or L) + b # 1.65 S Emergency                      m # 1.5 S                                          1.2 (m or L) + b # 1.80 S Faulted                        m # 2.0 S                                          1.5 (m or L) + b # 2.4 S Notes:
: 1. Valve nozzle (piping load) stress analysis is not required when both the following conditions are satisfied by calculation: (1) section modulus and area of a plane, normal to the flow, through the region of valve body crotch is at least 10% greater than the piping connected (or joined) to the valve body inlet and outlet nozzles; and, (2) code allowable stress, S, for valve body material is equal to or greater than the code allowable stress, S, of connected piping material. If the valve body material allowable stress is less than that of the connected piping, the valve section modulus and area as calculated in (1) above shall be multiplied by the ratio of S pipe/S valve. If unable to comply with this requirement, the design
: 2. Casting quality factor of 1.0 shall be used.
: 3. These stress limits are applicable to the pressure retaining boundary, and include the effects of loads transmitted by the extended structures, when applicable.
: 4. Design requirements listed in this table are not applicable to valve discs, stems, seat rings, or other parts of valves which are contained within the confines of the body and bonnet, or otherwise not part of the pressure boundary.
: 5. These rules do not apply to Class 2 and 3 safety relief valves. Safety relief valves are designed in accordance with ASME Section III requirements.
: 6. Stress limits are taken from ASME III, Subsections NC and ND, or, for valves procured prior to the incorporation of these limits into ASME III, from Code Case 1635.
: 7. The maximum pressure resulting from upset, emergency or faulted conditions shall not exceed the tabulated factors listed under Pmax times the design pressure or the rated pressure at the applicable operating condition temperature. If the pressure rating limits are met at the operating conditions, the stress limits in Table 3.9-4 are considered to be satisfied.
3.9-52                                                                MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                    WBNP-64 Table 3.9-5 Deleted by Amendment 64 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                              3.9-53


Self ActuatedGateGate Gate Gate Gate Gate Gate Gate Check Check Check CheckContainment IsolationContainment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Control Air System (32)0-FCV-32-70 0-CKV-32-70A 0-CKV-32-70B 0-CKV-32-70C 0-CKV-32-70D 0-FCV-32-71 0-FCV-32-72 0-FCV-32-73 1-FCV-32-80 2-FCV-32-81 0-FCV-32-820-FCV-32-850-FCV-32-94 0-CKV-32-94A 0-CKV-32-94B 0-CKV-32-94C 0-CKV-32-94D 0-FCV-32-95 0-FCV-32-96 0-FCV-32-97 1 1 1
WATTS BAR                                                                                            WBNP-79 Table 3.9-6 Design Criteria For Active Pumps And Pump Supports Analyzed By Westinghouse Condition                          Design Criteria(1)
1 1
Design, Normal and Upset          m # 1.0 S m + b # 1.5 S Emergency                          m # 1.2 S m + b # 1.65 S Faulted                            m # 1.2 S m + b # 1.8 S Note:
1 1
(1)The stress limits specified for active pumps are more restrictive than the ASME III limits, to provide assurance that operability will not be impaired for any operating condition.
1 2
3.9-54                                                                MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS
2 2 2 1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1Motor Self Actuated


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                            WBNP-86 Table 3.9-7 Load Sources Load                              Description BUILDING SETTLEMENT                Predicted or Measured Settlement of the Building DBA                                Design Basis Accident Loading DEADWEIGHT                        Weight of Pipe, Insulation, and Fluid FLUID TRANSIENTS                  Transient Loads Due to Valve Operation, Water Hammer LOCA                              Reactor Coolant Loop Movements Due to Loss of Coolant Accident OBE                                Operating Basis Earthquake PRESSURE                          Internal (or External) Pressure in Pipe SAM                                Seismic Anchor Motions SSE                                Safe Shutdown Earthquake THERMAL                            Operating Temperature, Environmental Temperature, Thermal Anchor Movements VALVE THRUST                      Relief Valve Discharge Thrust Loads PIPE RUPTURE                      Jet Impingement and Pipe Whip Loads MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                        3.9-55


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                        WBNP-91 Table 3.9-8 Loading Constituents And Stress Limits for ASME Class 1 Piping (Page 1 of 2)
LOADING                            STRESS        NB-3650 CONDITION      CONSTITUENTS1                        LIMIT    EQUATION2      NOTES PRIMARY STRESS DESIGN          PRESSURE,                            1.5Sm            9 (Normal        DEADWEIGHT,
  &            OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, Upset)        OBE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS EMERGENCY      PRESSURE,                            2.25Sm          9E DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, OBE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS FAULTED        PRESSURE,                            3.0Sm          9F            5 DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, SEE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS, DBA INERTIA, LOCA, PIPE RUPTURE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY STRESS NORMAL          PRESSURE, THERMAL,                    3.0Sm          10            3
  &              THERMAL ANCHOR MOVEMENT, UPSET          THERMAL LINEAR GRADIENT, THERMAL DISCONTINUITY, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENT, OBE, OBE SAM PRESSURE, THERMAL,                                  11          4,8 THERMAL ANCHOR MOVEMENT, THERMAL NONLINEAR GRADIENT, THERMAL LINEAR GRADIENT, THERMAL DISCONTINUITY, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENT, OBE, OBE SAM THERMAL,                              3.0Sm          12            3 THERMAL ANCHOR MOVEMENTS 3.9-56                                                  MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Self Actuated Motor Motor Motor Air Air Air AirMotor Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                          WBNP-91 Table 3.9-8 Loading Constituents And Stress Limits for ASME Class 1 Piping (Page 2 of 2)
PRESSURE,                                    3.0Sm            13              3 DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, OBE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS, THERMAL DISCONTINUITY TESTING PRESSURE                                0.9Sy                              7,8 PRESSURE,                              1.35Sy DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS PRESSURE DESIGN DESIGN              DESIGN PRESSURE                            Pa                                6 UPSET                Max. Service PRESSURE                      Pa                                6 EMERGENCY            Max. Service PRESSURE                    1.5Pa                                6 FAULTED              Max. Service PRESSURE                    2.0Pa                                6 Notes
: 1. Loads which are not concurrent need not be combined.
: 2. All references are for ASME Code, Subsection NB for Class 1 piping.
: 3. If the requirements of equation 10 are not met, then the requirements of equations 12 & 13 must be met.
: 4. Salt for all load sets are calculated per NB-3653.3 and then, the cumulative usage factor per NB-3653.4 and NB-3653.5. The cumulative usage factor shall not exceed 1.0.
: 5. The design measures taken to protect against pipe rupture loads and the evaluation of these loads is described in Section 3.6.
: 6. The allowable pressure value Pa is calculated per NB 3640.
: 7. The testing limits are per NB 3226.
: 8. If there are more than 10 hydrostatic, pneumatic or other tests, then such extra tests shall be included in the fatigue evaluation.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                      3.9-57


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                        WBNP-64 Table 3.9-9 Loading Constituents And Stress Limits For Category I ASME Class 2 and 3 Piping LOADING                            STRESS        NC-3652 CONDITION      CONSTITUENTS1                        LIMIT    EQUATION2      NOTES NORMAL        PRESSURE,                              Sh            8 DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS UPSET          PRESSURE,                            1.2Sh          9U            4 DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, OBE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS EMERGENCY      PRESSURE,                            1.8Sh          9E DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, OBE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS FAULTED        PRESSURE,                            2.4Sh          9F            5 DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, SSE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS, DBA INERTIA, LOCA, PIPE RUPTURE NORMAL        THERMAL,                              SA            10          3,4 OR            OBE SAM UPSET NORMAL        PRESSURE,                            SA+Sh          11          3,4 OR            DEADWEIGHT, UPSET          OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL, OBE SAM NORMAL        BUILDING SETTLEMENT,                3.0Sc          10A OR            DBA SCV MOVEMENT FAULTED TEST        PRESSURE,                            1.2Sh DEADWEIGHT TEST          PRESSURE,                            SA+Sh DEADWEIGHT, THERMAL 3.9-58                                                MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-64 Notes
: 1. Loads which are not concurrent need not be combined.
: 2. All references are for ASME Code, Subsection NC for Class 2 piping. The corresponding equations in ASME Code Subsection ND for Class 3 should be used as applicable.
: 3. The requirements of either Equation 10 or Equation 11 must be met.
: 4. The effects of OBE Seismic Anchor Movements may be excluded from Equations 10 and 11 if they are included in Equation 9U.
: 5. The design measures taken to protect against pipe rupture loads and the evaluation of these loads is described in Section 3.6.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                3.9-59


Self Actuated Motor Motor Motor Ball Check Check Check Check Ball Ball Ball Globe Globe GlobeGlobe Ball Check Check Check Check Ball Ball BallAux. Dryer Purge ControlAir Dryer Purge Check Valve Air Dryer Purge Check Valve Air Dryer Purge Check Valve Air Dryer Purge Check Valve Aux. Dryer Purge Control Aux. Dryer Purge Control Aux. Dryer Purge Control Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Control Air Normal Flow IsolControl Air Normal Flow IsolAux. Dryer Purge Control Air Dryer Purge Check Valve Air Dryer Purge Check Valve Air Dryer Purge Check Valve Air Dryer Purge Check Valve Aux. Dryer Purge Control Aux. Dryer Purge Control Aux. Dryer Purge ControlTable 3.9-25  Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 8 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-93WATTS BARWBNP-90 Control AirSystem (32)
WATTS BAR                                                                                              WBNP-79 Table 3.9-10 Loading Constituents And Stress Limits for Active Valve Evaluation LOADING                                        STRESS CONSTITUENTS(1)                               LIMIT(3)
(cont)1-FCV-32-1022-FCV-32-103 1-FCV-32-110 2-FCV-32-111 0-CKV-32-240 0-CKV-32-256 0-CKV-32-264 0-CKV-32-279 1-32-293 1-32-303 1-32-313 2-32-323 2-32-333 2-32-343 2 2 2
PRESSURE,                                      0.76Sy(4)
2 2
DEADWEIGHT,                                    1.0Sy(4) (for swing check valves)
2 2
OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL, SSE INERTIA, SSE SAM, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS, DBA INERTIA, LOCA, PIPE RUPTURE(2)
2 2
Notes (1) Loads which are not concurrent need not be combined.
2 2
(2) The design measures taken to protect against pipe rupture loads and the evaluation of these loads are described in Section 3.6.
2 2
(3) The stress is calculated using the section modulus of the attached pipe.
2 Air Air Air Air Self Actuated
(4) The value of pipe yield stress, Sy, in this table is determined from the code of record for piping analysis (reference Section 3.7.3.8.1).
3.9-60                                                                  MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                      WBNP-64 Table 3.9-11 Deleted by Amendment 64 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                3.9-61


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                        WBNP-64 Table 3.9-12 Deleted by Amendment 64 3.9-62                                MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-64 Table 3.9-13a Design Loads For Category I Piping Supports Table 3.9-13a LOADING CONDITION                  CONSTITUENTS1                              NOTES NORMAL                      DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL UPSET                      DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL, OBE INERTIA, OBE SAM, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS EMERGENCY                  DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL, OBE INERTIA, OBE SAM, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS FAULTED                    DEADWEIGHT,                                  2 OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL, SEE INERTIA, SSE SAM, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS, DBA INERTIA, LOCA, PIPE RUPTURE TEST                        DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL Notes:
: 1. Loads which are not concurrent need not be combined.
: 2. The design measures taken to protect against pipe rupture loads and the evaluation of these loads is described in Section 3.6.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                3.9-63


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                          WBNP-91 Table 3.9-13b Design Loading Combinations For Category I Asme Code Class 2 and 3 Floor Mounted*** Components And Component Supports Analyzed by TVA Condition Classification                  Loading Combination Design and Normal                        Design pressure Design temperature*
Dead weight, nozzle loads** (Operating Loads)
Upset                                    Upset condition pressure, Upset condition metal temperature*, deadweight, OBE, nozzle loads** (Operating Loads)
Emergency                                Emergency condition pressure, emergency condition metal temperature*, deadweight, OBE, nozzle loads** (Operating Loads)
Faulted condition pressure, faulted condition metal temperature*, deadweight, SSE, nozzle loads** (Operating Faulted                                  Loads), DBA
    *Temperature is used to determine allowable stress only.
    **Nozzle loads are those loads associated with the particular plant operating conditions for the component under consideration.
    ***Line-mounted component (valve) design load combinations correspond to the attached piping load combinations for normal, upset, emergency, and faulted conditions.
3.9-64                                                              MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                        WBNP-68 Table 3.9-14 Stress Criteria for Category I ASME Class 2 and Class 3 Tanks Analyzed by TVA Condition                          Stress Limits(1)                                  Pmax(2)
Design and Normal                  Pm # 1.0 Sh                                        1.0 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.5 Sh Upset                              Pm # 1.1 Sh                                        1.1 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.65 Sh Emergency                          Pm # 1.5 Sh                                        1.2 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.8 Sh Faulted                            Pm # 2.0 Sh                                        1.5 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 2.4 Sh Pm, PL, Pb, and Sh are as defined in Table 3.9-18.
Notes (1) The stress allowable values given above were permitted for design, evaluation, and modification activities. As an alternative, a simplified approach was also permitted. By the alternative approach, in addition to meeting the applicable design condition requirements, the tank was analyzed for the faulted condition and tank stresses were limited to 1.2 times the applicable ASME code design/normal condition primary stress allowables.
(2) The maximum pressure was not permitted to exceed the tabulated factors listed under Pmax times the design pressure.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                  3.9-65


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                          WBNP-79 Table 3.9-15 Stress Criteria For Category I ASME Code Class 2 and Class 3 Inactive Pumps Analyzed by TVA Condition                          Stress Limits(2)                                    Pmax(1)
Design and Normal                  Pm # 1.0 Sh                                            1.0 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.5 Sh Upset                              Pm # 1.1 Sh                                            1.1 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.65 Sh Emergency                          Pm # 1.5 Sh                                            1.2 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.8 Sh Faulted                            Pm # 2.0 Sh                                            1.5 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 2.4 Sh Pm, PL, Pb, and Sh are as defined in Table 3.9-18.
Notes:
(1)The maximum pressure does not exceed the tabulated factors listed under Pmax times the design pressure.
he stress allowable values given above were permitted for design, evaluation, and modification activities. As an alternative, a simplified approach was permitted for pumps procured prior to September 1, 1974. By this alternative approach, in addition to meeting applicable ASME code design condition requirements, the pump was analyzed for the faulted condition and pump stresses were limited to 1.2 times the applicable ASME code design/normal condition primary stress allowables.
3.9-66                                                              MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                          WBNP-79 Table 3.9-16 Stress Criteria For Category I ASME Code Class 2 And Class 3 Inactive Valves Analyzed By TVA Condition                      Stress Limits (Notes 1-6)                          Pmax( note 7)
Design and Normal              P m # Sh                                              1.0 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.5 Sh Upset                          Pm # 1.1 Sh                                            1.1 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.65 Sh Emergency                      Pm # 1.5 Sh                                            1.2 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.8 Sh Faulted                        Pm # 2.0 Sh                                            1.5 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 2.4 Sh Pm, PL, Pb, and Sh are as defined in Table 3.9-18.
Notes:
: 1. Valve nozzle (Piping load) stress analysis is not required when both the following conditions are satisfied by calculation: (1) section modulus and area of a plane, normal to the flow, through the region of valve body crotch is at least 10% greater than the piping connected (or joined) to the valve body inlet and outlet nozzles; and, (2) code allowable stress, S, for valve body material is equal to or greater than the code allowable stress, S, to connected piping material. If the valve body material allowable stress is less than that of the connected piping, the valve section modulus and area as calculated in (1) above shall be multiplied by the ratio of Spipe/Svalve. If unable to comply with this requirement, the design by analysis procedure of NB-3545.2 is an acceptable alternate method.
: 2. Casting quality factor of 1.0 shall be used.
: 3. These stress limits are applicable to the pressure retaining boundary, and include the effects of loads transmitted by the extended structures, when applicable.
: 4. Design requirements listed in this table are not applicable to valve discs, stems, seat rings, or other parts of valves which are contained within the confines of the body and bonnet, or otherwise not part of the pressure boundary.
: 5. These rules do not apply to Class 2 and 3 safety relief valves. Safety relief valves are designed in accordance with ASME Section III requirements.
: 6. The stress allowable values given above were permitted for design, evaluation, and modification activities. As an alternative, a simplified approach was permitted for valves procured prior to September 1, 1974. By this alternative approach, in addition to meeting the applicable ASME code design condition requirements, the valve was analyzed or tested per IEEE 344-1971 requirements for the faulted condition. When qualified by analysis using this alternative, the valve stresses were limited to 1.2 times the applicable ASME code design/normal condition primary stress allowables and the valve extended structure stresses were limited to 1.33 times the AISC code normal stress allowables.
: 7. The maximum pressure resulting from upset or faulted conditions shall not exceed the tabulated factors listed under Pmax times the design pressure or the rated pressure at the applicable MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                      3.9-67


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                        WBNP-79 operating condition temperature. If the pressure rating limits are met at the operating conditions, the stress limits in this table are considered to be satisfied.
3.9-68                                                                MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Self ActuatedGlobeGlobe Globe Globe Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check CheckContainment isolationContainment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Air Dryer Purge Check Valve Air Dryer Purge Check Valve Air Dryer Purge Check Valve Air Dryer Purge Check Valve Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolationService AirSystem (33)1-33-7942-33-7971/21/2 Self Actuated Self Actuated Check CheckContainment isolationContainment isolationTable 3.9-25  Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 9 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description 3.9-94MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-90Sampling andWater Quality (43)FCV-43-2FCV-43-3 FCV-43-11 FCV-43-12 FCV-43-22 FCV-43-23 FCV-43-34 FCV-43-35 FCV-43-55 FCV-43-58 FCV-43-61 FCV-43-64 FCV-43-75 FCV-43-77 1-PCV-43-200A 1-PCV-43-200B FCV-43-201 FCV-43-202 FCV-43-207 FCV-43-208 1-PCV-43-210A 1-PCV-43-210B3/83/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 1-1/3 3/8 3/8 1-1/3 1-1/3 1-1/3 1-1/3 3/8 3/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/4 1/4Solenoid Air Solenoid Air Solenoid Air Solenoid Air Air Air Air Air Solenoid Air Self Actuated
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 1 of 9)
System Name    TVA Valve No.      W Valve No. Size Inches  Actuation      Type        Function/Description Chemical and  FCV-62-61            8112          4            Motor          Gate        Containment Isolation Volume        FCV-62-63            8100          4            Motor          Gate        Containment Isolation Control        FCV-62-691          LCV-460      3             Air            Globe      Letdown Isolation System (62)    FCV-62-701          LCV-459      3            Air            Globe      Letdown Isolation FCV-62-72            8149A        2            Air            Globe      Containment Isolation FCV-62-73            8149B        2            Air            Globe      Containment Isolation FCV-62-74            8149C        2            Air            Globe      Containment Isolation FCV-62-77            8152          2            Motor          Gate        Containment Isolation FCV-62-84            8145          3            Air            Globe      Aux Spray Isolation FCV-62-90            8105          3            Motor          Gate        ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-62-91            8106          3            Motor          Gate        ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-62-76            8306A        2            Air            Globe      Containment Isolation LCV-62-132          LCV-112B      4            Motor          Gate        CVCS Charging Pump Suction LCV-62-133          LCV-112C      4            Motor          Gate        CVCS Charging Pump Suction LCV-62-135          LCV-112D      8            Motor          Gate        CVCS Charging Pump Suction LCV-62-136          LCV-112E      8            Motor          Gate        CVCS Charging Pump Suction CKV-62-504          8546          8            Self Actuated  Check      CVCS Charging Pump Suction RFV-62-505          8124          :            Self Actuated  Relief      CCP Suction Relief Valve CKV-62-507          ---           1             Self Actuated  Check      CCP Suction Chem Feed Check Valve RFV-62-518          8118          :            Self Actuated  Relief      PD CHG Pump Discharge Relief CKV-62-519          8497          3             Self Actuated  Check      Recip, CP Discharge Check Valve CKV-62-5432          8381          3                             Check      Containment Isolation Self CKV-62-5602          8368A        2              Actuated      Check      Containment Isolation Self CKV-62-5612          8368B        2              Actuated      Check      Containment Isolation Self Actuated 3.9-69                                                                                                                                                              WBNP-91


Self Actuated Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Self Actuated
Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 2 of 9) 3.9-70 WATTS BAR CKV-62-5622        8368C        2            Self Actuated   Check        Containment Isolation CKV-62-5632        8368D        2            Self Actuated   Check        Containment Isolation CKV-62-5761        8367A        2            Self Actuated  Check        CCP Discharge Header Integrity CKV-62-5771        8367B        2            Self Actuated  Check        CCP Discharge Header Integrity CKV-62-5781        8367C        2            Self Actuated  Check        CCP Discharge Header Integrity CKV-62-5791        8367D        2            Self Actuated  Check        CCP Discharge Header Integrity CKV-62-6381        8557          3            Self Actuated  Check        Normal Charging Isolation 1-CKV-62-639 CKV-62-6401                      :            Self Actuated  Check        Seal Water 1-FCV-62-61 Bypass 8556          3            Self Actuated  Check        Alternate Charging Isolation 1-RFV-62-649                      2            Self Actuated  Relief CKV-62-6591        8378          3            Self Actuated  Check        Seal Water Hx Relief Valve Normal Charging Isolation CKV-62-6601        8379          3            Self Actuated  Check Alternate Charging Isolation CKV-62-6611        8377          3            Self Actuated  Check Auxiliary Spray Isolation CKV-62-525          8481A        4            Self Actuated  Check MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS Prevent Backflow thru Centrifugal CKV-62-532          8481B        4            Self Actuated  Check          Charging Pump Prevent Backflow thru Centrifugal FCV-62-1228        8870B        1            Air            Globe          Charging Pump FCV-62-1229        8870A        1            Air            Globe        Isolation Valve 1-RFV-62-662        8117          2            Self Actuated  Relief      Isolation Valve 1-RFV-62-1220                    :            Self Actuated  Relief      Cntmt Isolation Thermal Relief 1-RFV-62-1221                    :            Self Actuated  Relief      Recip CP Suction Over Pressure 1-RFV-62-1222                    ::          Self Actuated  Releif      CCP 1A-A Over Pressure CCP 1B-B Over Pressure WBNP-91


Self ActuatedGlobeGlobe Globe Globe Globe Gate Globe Globe Gate Gate Gate Gate Globe Globe Regulating Regulating Globe Globe Globe Globe Regulating RegulatingContainment isolationContainment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation LOCA H2 Cntmt Monitor Press Reg LOCA H2 Cntmt Monitor Press Reg Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation LOCA H2 Cntmt Monitor Press Reg LOCA H2 Cntmt Monitor Press RegSampling and Water Quality (43)
Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 3 of 9)
(Continued)FCV-43-433FCV-43-434FCV-43-435 FCV-43-436 1-CKV-43-834 1-CKV-43-841 1-CKV-43-883 1-CKV-43-884 1-PREG-43-1470A-A 1-PREG-43-1470B-A 1-PREG-43-1471A-B 1-PREG-43-1471B-B3/83/83/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4SolenoidSolenoidSolenoid Solenoid Self Actuated
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR Safety          FCV-63-1        8812          14          Motor        Gate          Prevent Radioactive Release in Injection (63)                                                                             Recirc Mode FCV-63-3        8813          2            Motor        Globe          Prevent Radioactive Release in Recirc Mode FCV-63-4        8814          2            Motor        Globe          Prevent Radioactive Release in Recirc Mode FCV-63-5        8806          8            Motor        Gate          Prevent Radioactive Release in Recirc Mode FCV-63-6        8807B        4              Motor      Gate          Sis Recirc Flowback Integrity FCV-63-7        8807A        4              Motor      Gate          Sis Recirc Flowback Integrity FCV-63-8        8804A        8              Motor      Gate          Sis Recirc Flowpath Integrity FCV-63-11        8804B        8              Motor      Gate          Sis Recirc Flowpath Integrity FCV-63-23        8888          1             Air        Globe          Containment Isolation FCV-63-25        8801B        4              Motor      Gate          ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-63-26        8801A        4              Motor      Gate          ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-63-47        8923A        6              Motor      Gate          ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-63-48        8923B        6              Motor      Gate          ECCS Flowpath Integrity 3.9-71                                                                                                                                                        WBNP-91


Self Actuated
Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 4 of 9) 3.9-72 WATTS BAR FCV-63-64        8880          1            Air            Globe        Containment Isolation FCV-63-71        8871          3/4          Air            Globe        Containment Isolation FCV-63-72        8811A        18            Motor          Gate        CNTMT Sump Isolation FCV-63-73        8811B        18            Motor          Gate        CNTMT Sump Isolation FCV-63-84        8964          3/4          Air            Globe        Containment Isolation FCV-63-93        8809A        8            Motor          Gate        RHR Cold Leg Injection Line Isolation FCV-63-94        8809B        8              Motor        Gate        RHR Cold Leg Injection Line Isolation FCV-63-152        8821A        4              Motor        Gate        ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-63-153        8821B        4              Motor        Gate        ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-63-156        8802A        4              Motor        Gate        ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-63-157        8802B        4              Motor        Gate        ECCS Flowpath Intgrity FCV-63-172        8840          12            Motor        Gate        RHR Hot Leg Recirc FCV-63-175        8920          :              Motor        Globe        Prevent Radioactive Release in Recirc Mode FCV-63-185        ---          :            Air            Globe        Leak Test Line Isolation CKV-63-524        8922A        4            Self Actuated   Check        Prevent Backflow thru Nonoperating CKV-63-526        8922B        4            Self Actuated  Check        Train Prevent Backflow thru Nonoperational CKV-63-543        8905A        2            Self Actuated  Check        Train ECCS Flowpath Integrity CKV-63-545        8905C        2            Self Actuated  Check        RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS CKV-63-547        8905B        2            Self Actuated  Check        RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
CKV-63-549        8905D        2            Self Actuated  Check        RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
CKV-63-551        8819A        2            Self Actuated  Check        RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-553      8819B          2            Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot WBNP-91


Self Actuated
Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 5 of 9)
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR CKV-63-555      8819C          2            Self Actuated   Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-557        8819D        2            Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-558        8949D        6            Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-559        8949B        6            Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-560        8948A        10          Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-561        8948B        10          Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-562        8948C        10          Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-563        8948D        10          Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-581        8805          3            Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-586        8900A        1-1/2        Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-587        8900B        1-1/2        Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-588        8900C        1-1/2        Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-589        8900D        1-1/2        Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-622        8956A        10          Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-623        8956B        10          Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-624        8956C        10          Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-625        8956D        10          Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-632        8818B        6            Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
WBNP-91 RCS Press. Bound. Prot 3.9-73


Self Actuated
Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 6 of 9) 3.9-74 WATTS BAR CKV-63-633        8818A          6            Self Actuated   Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/ RCS Press.
Bound. Prot CKV-63-634        8818C          6            Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-640        8841A          8            Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press Bound. Prot CKV-63-635        8818D          6            Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press Bound. Prot CKV-63-641        8949A          6            Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press Bound. Prot CKV-63-643        8841B          8            Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press Bound. Prot CKV-63-644        8949C          6            Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press Bound. Prot CKV-63-5023      8958          12          Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-5103      8926          8            Self Actuated  Check        ECCS Flowpath Integrity/
RCS Press. Bound. Prot RFV-63-5113      8858          3/4          Self Actuated  Angle        SI Pressure Release RFV-63-5343      8853A          3/4          Self Actuated  Angle        SI Pressure Release RFV-63-5353      8851          3/4          Self Actuated  Angle        SI Pressure Release RFV-63-5363      8853B          3/4          Self Actuated  Angle        SI Pressure Release RFV-63-5773      8852          1            Self Actuated  Angle        SI Pressure Release RFV-63-6023      8855A          1            Self Actuated  Angle        SI Pressure Release MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS RFV-63-6033      8855B          1            Self Actuated  Angle        SI Pressure Release RFV-63-6043      8855C          1            Self Actuated  Angle        SI Pressure Release RFV-63-6053      8855D          1            Self Actuated  Angle        SI Pressure Release RFV-63-6263      8856A          2            Self Actuated  Angle        SI Pressure Release RFV-63-6273      8856B          3            Self Actuated  Angle        SI Pressure Release RFV-63-6373      8842          3/4          Self Actuated  Angle        SI Pressure Release RFV-63-835        ----          3/4          Self Actuated  Angle        SI Pressure Release WBNP-91


Self Actuated
Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 7 of 9)
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR Reactor      FCV-68-305        8033          3/4          Air            Daphragm    Containment Isolation Coolant      FCV-68-307        8025          3/8          Air            Globe        Containment Isolation System (68)  FCV-68-308        8026          3/8          Air            Globe        Containment Isolation FCV-68-332        8000A          3            Motor          Gate        PORV Isolation FCV-68-333        8000B          3            Motor          Gate        PORV Isolation PCV-68-334        PCV-456        3            Solenoid        Globe        PORV PCV-68-340A      PCV-455        3            Solenoid        Globe        PORV CKV-68-559        8097          4            Self Actuated   Check        Containment Isolation RFV-68-563        8010C          6            Self Actuated  Angle        RCS Pressure Release RFV-68-564        8010B          6            Self Actuated  Angle        RCS Pressure Release RFV-68-565        8010A          6            Self Actuated  Angle        RCS Pressure Release FSV-68-394        8012A          1            Solenoid        Globe        Head Vent FSV-68-395        8012B          1            Solenoid        Globe        Head Vent FSV-68-396        8014B          1            Solenoid        Globe        Head Vent FSV-68-397        8014A          1            Solenoid        Globe        Head Vent Containment  FCV-72-2          9001B          10          Motor          Gate        Containment Isolation Spray        FCV-72-21        9017B          12          Motor          Gate        Containment Sump Recirculation System (72)  FCV-72-22        9017A          12          Motor          Gate        Containment Sump Recirculation FCV-72-39        9001A          10          Motor          Gate        Containment Isolation FCV-72-40        9026A          8            Motor          Gate        Containment Isolation FCV-72-41        9026B          8            Motor          Gate        Containment Isolation FCV-72-44        9020A          12          Motor          Gate        Containment Sump Recirculation FCV-72-45        9020B          12          Motor          Gate        Containment Sump Recirculation CKV-72-506        9018A          12          Self Actuated  Check        Containment Sump Recirculation CKV-72-507        9018B          12          Self Actuated  Check        Containment Sump Recirculation RFV-72-508        9019A          0.75        Self Actuated  Relief      Containment Spray PMP A Suction Pressure Relief RFV-72-509        9019B          0.75        Self Actuated  Relief      Containment Spray PMP B Suction Pressure Relief CKV-72-548        9011A          10          Self Actuated  Check        Containment Isolation CKV-72-549        9011B          10          Self Actuated  Check        Containment Isolation CKV-72-562        9022A          8            Self Actuated  Check        RHR Isolation 3.9-75                                                                                                                                                        WBNP-91


Self Actuated
Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 8 of 9) 3.9-76 WATTS BAR CKV-72-563        9022B          8            Self Actuated   Check        RHR Isolation Residual Heat  FCV-74-1            8702          14          Motor          Gate        RCS Pressure Boundary Protection Removal System FCV-74-2            8701          14          Motor          Gate        RCS Pressure Boundary Protection (74)          FCV-74-3            8700A          14          Motor          Gate        ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-74-8            8703          10          Motor          Gate        RCS Pressure Boundary Protection FCV-74-9            8704          10          Motor          Gate        RCS Pressure Boundary Protection FCV-74-12          FCV-610        3            Motor          Globe        RHR Mini-Flow FCV-74-21          8700B          14          Motor          Gate        ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-74-24          FCV-611        3            Motor          Globe        RHR Mini-Flow FCV-74-33          8716A          8            Motor          Gate        ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-74-35          8716B          8            Motor          Gate        ECCS Flowpath Integrity RFV-74-505          8708          3            Self Actuated  Relief      RHR Pump Suction CKV-74-514          8730A          8            Self Actuated  Check        Prevent Backflow thru Nonoperating Train CKV-74-515        8730B          8            Self Actuated  Check        Prevent Backflow thru Nonoperating Train CKV-74-544                      8            Self Actuated  Check        Prevents pump-to-pump Interaction CKV-74-545                      8            Self Actuated  Check        Prevents pump-to-pump Interaction Waste Disposal  FCV-77-9          9170          3            Air            Diaphragm    Containment Isolation MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS System (77)      FCV-77-10        FCV-1003      3            Air            Diaphragm    Containment Isolation FCV-77-16        9159A          3/4          Air            Globe        Containment Isolation FCV-77-17        9159B          3/4          Air            Globe        Containment Isolation FCV-77-18        9160A          1            Air            Globe        Containment Isolation FCV-77-19        9160B          1            Air            Globe        Containment Isolation FCV-77-20        9157          1            Air            Globe        Containment Isolation FCV-77-127                      2            Air            Plug        Containment Isolation FCV-77-128                      2            Air            Plug        Containment Isolation CKV-77-849                      3/4          Self Actuated  Check        Containment Isolation CKV-77-868                      1            Self Actuated  Check        Containment Isolation RFV-77-2875                      1/2          Self Actuated  Relief      Thermal Relief Valve Penetration X41 WBNP-91


Self Actuated
Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 9 of 9)
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR Spent Fuel      0-CKV-78-509                            8            Self Actuated   Check            Pump A-A Discharge Check Valve Pool Cooling (78) 0-CKV-78-510                            8            Self Actuated  Check            Pump B-B Discharge Check Valve 0-ISV-78-581                            10            Manual          Gate              Standby Pump Train A Suction Isolation Valve 0-ISV-78-582                          10            Manual          Gate              Standby Pump Train B Suction Isolation Valve 0-CKV-78-586                          8            Self Actuated  Check            Pump C-S Discharge Check Valve 0-ISV-78-587                          8            Manual          Gate              Standby Pump Train B Discharge Isolation Valve 0-ISV-78-588                          8            Manual          Gate              Standby Pump Train A Discharge Isolation Valve 1
Testing not required as part of Inservice Testing Program.
2 Testing not required as part of Inservice Testing Program. Testing not required to meet 10 CFR 50 Appendix J. See Table 6.2.4-1.
3 These components were not committed to meet the requirements of RG 1.48 since these were procured under contracts issued prior to September 1, 1974.
3.9-77                                                                                                                                                                        WBNP-91


Self ActuatedGlobeGlobeGlobe Globe Check Check Check Check Regulating Regulating Regulating RegulatingContainment isolationContainment isolationContainment isolation Containment isolation Cntmt Isolation PASS Waste Holdup Tank Cntmt Isolation PASS Waste Holdup Tank Cntmt Isolation PASS Cntmt Air Return Cntmt Isolation PASS Cntmt Air Return O2 Reagent Gas for H2 Monitor Press Reg O2 Reagent Gas for H2 Monitor Press Reg O2 Reagent Gas for H2 Monitor Press Reg O2 Reagent Gas for H2 Monitor Press RegTable 3.9-25  Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 10 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-95WATTS BARWBNP-90Ice Condenser (61)CKV-61-533CKV-61-680 CKV-61-692 CKV-61-745 FCV-61-96 FCV-61-97 FCV-61-110 FCV-61-122 FCV-61-191 FCV-61-192 FCV-61-193 FCV-61-1943/83/8 3/8 3/8 2
WATTS BAR                                                                                          WBNP-91 Table 3.9-18 Stress Limits for Active Category I ASME Class 2 and 3 Pumps Condition                                          Stress Limits(1) (2)
2 2
Design Normal and Upset                                    Pm # 1.0 Sh (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.5 Sh Emergency                                          Pm # 1.1 Sh (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.65 Sh Faulted                                            Pm # 1.2 Sh (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.8 Sh Sh =Material allowable stress at maximum operating temperature from ASME Edition including Summer 1973 Addenda or the applicable code edition specified at the time of procurement.
2 4
Pm =Primary general membrane stress, the average primary stress across the solid section under consideration. Excludes effects of discontinuities and concentrations. Produced by pressure, mechanical loads.
4 4
Pb =Primary bending stress. This stress is produced by pressure and mechanical loads including inertia earthquake effects but excluding effects of discontinuities and concentrations.
4 Self Actuated Self Actuated
PL =Primary local membrane stress, the average stress across any solid section under consideration. Considers effects of discontinuities but not concentrations. Produced by pressure and mechanical loads including inertia earthquake effects.
Notes:
: 1. The stress allowables given above were permitted for design, evaluation, and modification activities. As an alternative, a simplified approach was permitted for pumps procured prior to September 1, 1974. By this alternative approach, in addition to meeting applicable ASME Code design condition requirements, the pump was analyzed for the faulted condition and pump stresses were limited to 1.2 times the applicable ASME Code design/normal condition primary stress allowables.
: 2. Active pumps procured after September 1, 1974 also complied with operability tests and analysis requirements described in Section 3.9.3.2.2.2.
3.9-78                                                                MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Self Actuated
WATTS BAR                                                                                          WBNP-79 Table 3.9-19 Stress Limits for Active Category I ASME Class 2 and 3 Valves Condition                                Stress Limits (Notes 1-6)
Design & Normal                          Pm # 1.0 Sh (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.5 Sh Upset                                    Pm # 1.1 Sh (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.65 Sh Emergency                                Pm # 1.5 Sh (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.8 Sh Faulted                                  Pm # 2.0 Sh (Pm or PL) + Pb # 2.4 Sh Notes:
: 1. Sh, Pm, Pb, and PL are defined in Table 3.9-18.
: 2. Valve nozzle (piping load) stress analysis is not required when section modulus and area of a plane, normal to the flow, through the region of valve body crotch is at least 10% greater than the piping connected (or joined) to the valve body inlet and outlet nozzles.
: 3. Stress in the valve nozzles resulting from connecting pipe does not exceed the limits listed in this table where S is based on the valve material. To ensure this, the attached pipe stress is limited in accordance with Table 3.9-10 unless justified on a case-by-case basis.
: 4. Design requirements listed in this table are not applicable to valve discs, stems, cast rings, or other parts of valves which are contained within the confines of the body and bonnet.
: 5. The stress allowables given above were permitted for design, evaluation, and modification activities. As an alternative, a simplified approach was permitted for valves procured prior to September 1, 1974. By this alternative approach, in addition to meeting the applicable ASME code design condition requirements, the valve was analyzed or tested on IEEE 344-1971 requirements for the faulted condition. When qualified by analysis using this alternative, the valve stresses were limited to 1.2 times the applicable ASME code design/normal condition primary stress allowables and the valve extended structure stresses were limited to 1.33 times the AISC Code normal stress allowable.
: 6. Active valves procured after September 1, 1974 also complied with operability test and analysis requirements of R.G. 1.48.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                      3.9-79


Self Actuated
3.9-80 WATTS BAR Table 3.9-20 Relief Valves in Class 2 Auxiliary Systems Valve          Maximum Relieving    Set          Required System        No.          Location                  Fluid        Temperature  Pressure      Flow Rate  Discharge SIS          1          Accumulator Tanks/        Nitrogen or  120EF          700/750 psig  1500 cfm    Atmosphere N2 Supply                  Borated Water SIS          2          S. I. Pump Suction        Borated Water 100EF          220 psig        25 gpm    to PRT SIS          3          S. I. Pump Discharge      Borated Water 100EF          1750 psig      20 gpm    to PRT SIS          4          Boron Injection Tank      Borated Water 180EF          2735 psig      20 gpm    to HT RHR          5          Residual Pump Suction      Borated Water 350EF**        450 psig        480 gpm    to PRT 200EF          450 psig        690 gpm    to PRT RHR          6          Residual Pump Discharge    Borated Water 120EF          600 psig        20 gpm    to PRT CVCS          7          Letdown Line Orifice      Borated Water 347EF**        600 psig        227 gpm    to PRT CVCS          8          Seal Water Return Line    Borated Water 250EF**        150 psig        225 gpm    to PRT CVCS          9          Letdown Line              Borated Water 200EF          200 psig        200 gpm    to VCT***
CVCS          10        Seal Water Return Line    Borated Water 150EF          200 psig        180 gpm    to VCT***
CVCS          11        Volume Control Tank        Hydrogen      130EF            70 psig        350 gpm    to HT***
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS Nitrogen or Borated Water CVCS          12        Charging Pump Suction      Borated Water 100EF          220 psig        25 gpm    to PRT CVCS          13        Positive Displacement      Borated Water  250EF        2735 psig      100 gpm    to VCT***
Charging Pump Discharge WDS          14        Downstream of 1-FCV    Liquid          140EF        50 psig        1 gpm      upstream of 127                        Radwaste                                                1-FCV-77-127
                                          **Water-steam Mixture Downstream of ValvePRT - Pressurizer Relief Tank WBNP-89
                                      ***Safety Class B Discharge PipingVCT - Volume Control Tank HT - Holdup Tanks


Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Check Check Check Check Diaphragm Diaphragm Diaphragm Diaphragm Diaphragm Diaphragm Diaphragm DiaphragmContainment isolationContainment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolationChemical and Volume Control System (62)FCV-62-1228FCV-62-1229 1 1 Air AirDiaphragmDiaphragmIsolation of Hydrogen vent for charging pumps suction side piping Isolation of Hydrogen vent for charging pumps suction side piping Emergency Gas Treatment System (65)1-FCV-65-81-FCV-65-10 0-FCV-65-24 0-FCV-65-28A 0-FCV-65-28B 1-FCV-65-300-FCV-65-430-FCV-65-47A 0-FCV-65-47B 1-FCV-65-51 1-FCV-65-52 1-FCV-65-53 1-PCV-65-81 1-PCV-65-83 1-PCV-65-86 1-PCV-65-87 8 24 8
WATTS BAR                                                                                        WBNP-89 Table 3.9-21 Support Design Allowable Stresses For Category I Piping Supports Supplemental                    Component                    Component Structural                Standard Supports            Standard Supports Load            Steel, Welds &                W/ LCDS' Except            W/O LCDS' Except Condition          Structural Bolts(2)             Unistrut Clamps            Unistrut Clamps(1)
8 8
Normal &            Normal AISC                  Manufacturer's              Manufacturer's Friction              Allowable                  LCDS for Level A            Allowable Catalog Value Upset              Normal AISC                  Manufacturer's              Manufacturer's Allowable X 1.33              LCDS for Level B            Allowable Catalog Value X 1.2 Emergency            Normal AISC                  Manufacturer's              Manufacturer's Allowable X 1.5                LCDS for Level C            Allowable Catalog Value X 1.5 Faulted            Normal AISC                  Manufacturer's              Manufacturer's Allowable X 1.5                LCDS for Level D            Allowable Catalog Value X 1.5 Test              Normal AISC                  Manufacturer's              Manufacturer's Allowable                  LCDS for Level A            Allowable Catalog X 1.33                    Value X 1.33 Notes:
24 8 8 8
(1)            The allowable loads for both U-bolts and unistrut clamps were developed based on the load testing per the requirements of ASME Section III 1974, Subsection NF including Winter 1974, Addenda.
8 14 14 16 16 16 16 Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Gate Butterfly ButterflyGate Gate Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly ButterflyEGTS Tr A Unit 1 Suction DamperEGTS Tr A Unit 1 Suction Damper EGTS Tr A Fan Isolation Damper EGTS Tr A Decay Cooling Damper EGTS Tr A Decay Cooling Damper EGTS Tr B Unit 1 Suction DamperEGTS Tr B Fan Isolation DamperEGTS Tr B Decay Cooling Damper EGTS Tr B Decay Cooling Damper EGTS Tr B Unit 1 Suction Damper Cntmt Annulus Vacuum Fan Isolation Damper Cntmt Annulus Vacuum Fan Isolation Damper Shield Bldg & Cntmt Annulus Isol Damper Shield Bldg & Cntmt Annulus Isol Damper EGTS Cntmt Annulus Isolation Damper EGTS Cntmt Annulus Isolation DamperTable 3.9-25  Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 11 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description 3.9-96MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-90 Essential RawCooling Water (67) FCV-67-9AFCV-67-9B FCV-67-10A FCV-67-10B FCV-67-83 FCV-67-87 FCV-67-88 1-FCV-67-89 FCV-67-91 FCV-67-95 FCV-67-96 1-FCV-67-97 FCV-67-99 4 4 4
(2)                                                                                     0.9 F y / 3 .
4 6
Tensile stresses do not exceed 0.9Fy and shear stresses do not exceed For compressive loads, the stress does not exceed 2/3 critical buckling MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                                   3.9-81
6 6
6 6
6 6
6 6MotorMotor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Ball Ball Ball Ball Butterfly


Butterfly
WATTS BAR                                                        WBNP-51 Table 3.9-22 Deleted by Amendment 51 3.9-82                                MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly
WATTS BAR                                                    WBNP-51 Table 3.9-23 Deleted by Amendment 51 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                              3.9-83


Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly ERCW strainer ERCW strainer
WATTS BAR                                                        WBNP-51 Table 3.9-24 Deleted by Amendment 51 3.9-84                                MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


ERCW strainer
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 1 of 20)
System Name      Valve No.            Size Inches      Actuation      Type    Function/Description Main Steam (1)  FCV-1-4              32                Air            Globe  Main steam and containment isolation PCV-1-5              6                Air            Globe  SG pressure control and relief FCV-1-7              4                Solenoid        Globe  Blowdown and containment isolation FCV-1-11            32                Air            Globe  Main steam and containment isolation PCV-1-12            6                Air            Globe  SG pressure control and relief FCV-1-14            4                Solenoid        Globe  Blowdown and containment isolation FCV-1-22            32                Air            Globe  Main steam and containment isolation PCV-1-23            6                Air            Globe  SG pressure control and relief FCV-1-25            4                Solenoid        Globe  Blowdown and containment isolation FCV-1-29            32                Air            Globe  Main steam and containment isolation PCV-1-30            6                Air            Globe  SG pressure control and relief FCV-1-32            4                Solenoid        Globe  Blowdown and containment isolation FCV-1-51            4                Motor          Globe  AFW pump turbine operation FCV-1-52            4                Hydraulic      Globe  AFW pump turbine operation FCV-1-147            2                Air            Globe  Containment isolation FCV-1-148            2                Air            Globe  Containment isolation FCV-1-149            2                Air            Globe  Containment isolation FCV-1-150            2                Air            Globe  Containment isolation FCV-1-181            4                Solenoid        Globe  Containment isolation FCV-1-182            4                Solenoid        Globe  Containment isolation FCV-1-183            4                Solenoid        Globe  Containment isolation FCV-1-184            4                Solenoid        Globe  Containment isolation 3.9-85                                                                                                                                              WBNP-90


ERCW strainer Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolationTable 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 12 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-97WATTS BARWBNP-90 Essential RawCooling Water (67) (Continued)FCV-67-103FCV-67-104 1-FCV-67-105 FCV-67-107 FCV-67-111 FCV-67-112 1-FCV-67-113 FCV-67-123 FCV-67-124 FCV-67-125 FCV-67-126 FCV-67-130 FCV-67-131 FCV-67-133 FCV-67-134 FCV-67-138 FCV-67-139 FCV-67-141 FCV-67-142 FCV-67-143 O-FCV-67-144 O-FCV-67-152 1-TCV-67-1582-TCV-67-1581-FCV-67-162 1-FCV-67-164 6 6 6
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-86 WATTS BAR (Page 2 of 20)
6 6
System Name  Valve No.           Size Inches      Actuation      Type        Function/Description SFV-1-512            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-513            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-514            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-515            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-516            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-517            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-518            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-519            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-520            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-521            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-522            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle relief Steam generator safety relief MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS SFV-1-523            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-524            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle relief Steam generator safety relief WBNP-90
6 6
18 18 18 18 2
2 2
2 2
2 2
2 12 16 24 6 6 2 2MotorMotor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor MotorMotor Air Air Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly


Plug Plug Plug Plug Plug Plug Plug Plug Globe Globe Butterfly Butterfly ButterflyGlobe GlobeContainment isolationContainment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment spray cooling Containment spray cooling Containment spray cooling Containment spray cooling Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation ERCW flow path integrity ERCW flow path integrity CCS flow path integrity SBR temperature controlSBR temperature controlERCW to pump room coolers ERCW to pump room coolersTable 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 13 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description 3.9-98MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-90 Essential RawCooling Water (67)
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 3 of 20)
(Continued)0-FCV-67-176FCV-67-182 FCV-67-184 FCV-67-186 0-FCV-67-205 0-FCV-67-2081-FCV-67-2131-FCV-67-215 2-FCV-67-217 2-FCV-67-219 FCV-67-295 FCV-67-296 FCV-67-297 FCV-67-298 2-FCV-67-336 2-FCV-67-338 FCV-67-342 FCV-67-344 FCV-67-346 FCV-67-348 FCV-67-350 FCV-67-352FCV-67-354FCV-67-356 0-CKV-67-503A 0-CKV-67-503B 0-CKV-67-503C 0-TCV-67-1050-A 0-TCV-67-1051-A 0-TCV-67-1052-B1-1/21-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 4
System Name      Valve No.           Size Inches      Actuation      Type        Function/Description Main Steam (1)  SFV-1-525            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle relief Steam generator safety relief (Continued)
41-1/21-1/2 2
SFV-1-526            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle-relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-527            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle-relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-528            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle-relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-529            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle-relief Steam generator safety relief 6x10              Self-actuated  Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-530 SFV-1-531            6x10              Self-actuated  Angle relief Steam generator safety relief FCV-1-15            4                Motor          Gate        AFW pump turbine operation FCV-1-16            4                Motor          Gate        AFW pump turbine operation FCV-1-17            4                Motor          Gate        AFW pump turbine operation FCV-1-18            4                Motor          Gate        AFW pump turbine operation CKV-1-891            4                 Self-actuated   Check        Prvnt bkflw btwn stm gen CKV-1-892            4                Self-actuated   Check        Prvnt bkflw btwn stm gen 3.9-87                                                                                                                                                  WBNP-90
2 2
2 2
2 1
1 2
2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/21-1/21-1/2 20 20 20 3
3 3
3 8
8 Air Air Air Air Motor Motor Air Air Air Air Motor Motor Motor Motor Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Air Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated


Self-Actuated
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-88 WATTS BAR (Page 4 of 20)
System Name    Valve No.            Size Inches      Actuation      Type    Function/Description Feedwater (3)  FCV-3-33              16                Motor          Gate    Main feedwater isolation FCV-3-47              16                Motor          Gate    Main feedwater isolation FCV-3-87              16                Motor          Gate    Main feedwater isolation FCV-3-100            16                Motor          Gate    Main feedwater isolation FCV-3-116A            4                Motor          Gate    AFW flow path integrity FCV-3-116B            4                Motor          Gate    AFW flow path integrity PCV-3-122            4                Air            Globe  Maintain head on pump FCV-3-126A            4                Motor          Gate    AFW flow path integrity FCV-3-126B            4                Motor          Gate    AFW flow path integrity PCV-3-132            4                Air            Globe  Maintain head on pump FCV-3-136A            6                Motor          Gate    AFW flow path integrity FCV-3-136B            6                Motor          Gate    AFW flow path integrity LCV-3-148            4                Air            Globe  Steam generator level control LCV-3-148A            2                Air            Globe  Steam generator level control LCV-3-156            4                Air            Globe  Steam generator level control LCV-3-156A            2                Air            Globe  Steam generator level control LCV-3-164            4                Air            Globe  Steam generator level control LCV-3-164A            2                Air            Globe  Steam generator level control LCV-3-171            4                Air            Globe  Steam generator level control LCV-3-171A            2                Air            Globe  Steam generator level control LCV-3-172            3                Air/Nitrogen    Globe  Steam generator level control MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS LCV-3-173            3                Air/Nitrogen    Globe  Steam generator level control LCV-3-174            3                Air/Nitrogen    Globe  Steam generator level control LCV-3-175            3                Air/Nitrogen    Globe  Steam generator level control FCV-3-179A            6                Motor          Gate    AFW flow path integrity FCV-3-179B            6                Motor          Gate    AFW flow path integrity FCV-3-185            2                Air            Globe  FW pressure integrity FCV-3-186            2                Air            Globe  FW pressure integrity FCV-3-187            2                Air            Globe  FW pressure integrity FCV-3-188            2                Air            Globe  FW pressure integrity WBNP-90


Self-Actuated
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 5 of 20)
System Name    Valve No.            Size Inches      Actuation      Type    Function/Description Feedwater (3)  FCV-3-236            6                Air            Globe  Main feedwater isolation (Continued)    FCV-3-239            6                Air            Globe  Main feedwater isolation FCV-3-242            6                Air            Globe  Main feedwater isolation FCV-3-245            6                Air            Globe  Main feedwater isolation CKV-3-508            16                Self-actuated  Check  Pipe break protection CKV-3-509            16                Self-actuated  Check  Pipe break protection CKV-3-510            16                Self-actuated  Check  Pipe break protection CKV-3-511            16                Self-actuated  Check  Pipe break protection CKV-3-638            6                Self-actuated  Check  Pipe break protection CKV-3-644            6                Self-actuated  Check  Pipe break protection CKV-3-645            6                Self-actuated  Check  Pipe break protection CKV-3-652            6                Self-actuated  Check  Pipe break protection CKV-3-655            6                Self-actuated  Check  Pipe break protection CKV-3-656            6                Self-actuated  Check  Pipe break protection CKV-3-669            6                Self-actuated  Check  Pipe break protection CKV-3-670            6                Self-actuated  Check  Pipe break protection CKV-3-678            6                Self-actuated  Check  Pipe break protection CKV-3-679            6                Self-actuated  Check  Pipe break protection CKV-3-805            6                Self-actuated  Check  ERCW flowpath integrity CKV-3-806            6                Self-actuated  Check  ERCW flowpath integrity CKV-3-810            10                Self-actuated  Check  ERCW flowpath integrity CKV-3-830            4                Self-actuated  Check  Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity CKV-3-831            4                Self-actuated  Check  Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity CKV-3-832            4                Self-actuated  Check  Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity CKV-3-833            4                Self-actuated  Check  Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity CKV-3-861            4                Self-actuated  Check  Containment Isolation CKV-3-862            4                Self-actuated  Check  Containment Isolation CKV-3-871            4                Self-actuated  Check  Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity CKV-3-872            4                Self-actuated  Check  Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity CKV-3-873            4                Self-actuated  Check  Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity CKV-3-874            4                Self-actuated  Check  Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity CKV-3-921            4                Self-actuated  Check  Containment Isolation WBNP-90 CKV-3-922            4                Self-actuated  Check  Containment Isolation 3.9-89


Self-ActuatedGlobeGlobe Globe Globe Butterfly ButterflyGlobeGlobe Globe Globe Plug Plug Plug Plug Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe Globe GlobeGlobeGlobe Check Check Check Globe Globe Globe Globe Check Check CheckERCW to pump room coolersERCW to pump room coolers ERCW to pump room coolers ERCW to pump room coolers Nonessential equipment isolation Nonessential Equipment isolationERCW to pump room coolersERCW to pump room coolers ERCW to pump room coolers ERCW to pump room coolers Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation Containment isolation ERCW to pump room coolers ERCW to pump room coolers ERCW to pump room coolers ERCW to pump room coolers ERCW to pump room coolers ERCW to pump room coolers ERCW to pump room coolers ERCW to pump room coolersERCW to pump room coolersERCW to pump room coolers ERCW flow path integrity ERCW flow path integrity ERCW flow path integrity EBR condenser temperature control MCR condenser temperature control EBR condenser temperature control MCR condenser temperature control ERCW flow path integrity ERCW flow path integrity ERCW flow path integrityTable 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 14 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-99WATTS BARWBNP-90 Essential RawCooling Water (67)
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-90 WATTS BAR (Page 6 of 20)
(Continued)0-TCV-67-1053-BCKV-67-508A CKV-67-508B 0-CKV-67-508A 0-CKV-67-508B 0-CKV-67-513A 0-CKV-67-513B 0-CKV-67-517A 0-CKV-67-512A 1-CKV-67-940A 2-CKV-67-935B CKV-67-513A CKV-67-513B 0-CKV-67-503D 0-CKV-67-503E 0-CKV-67-503F 0-CKV-67-503G 0-CKV-67-503H CKV-67-575A CKV-67-575B CKV-67-575C CKV-67-575D CKV-67-580A      CKV-67-580B      CKV-67-580C CKV-67-580D CKV-67-585A CKV-67-585B CKV-67-585C CKV-67-585D 8 8 8
System Name      Valve No.             Size Inches      Actuation      Type    Function/Description Fuel Oil (18)    CKV-18-556A-A        1.500            Self-actuated  Check    7-DAY MDP #1 ISOL CKV-18-556A-B        1.500            Self-actuated  Check    7-DAY MDP #1 ISOL CKV-18-557B-A        1.500            Self-actuated  Check    7-DAY MDP #2 ISOL CKV-18-557B-B        1.500            Self-actuated  Check    7-DAY MDP #2 ISOL CKV-18-558A-A        1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK #1 MDP ISOL CKV-18-558A-B        1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK #1 MDP ISOL CKV-18-559A-A        1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK #1 EDP ISOL CKV-18-559A-B        1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK #1 EDP ISOL RFV-18-560A-A        0.375            Self-actuated  Relief  DAY TK #1 MDP DISC RFV-18-560A-B        0.375            Self-actuated  Relief  DAY TK #1 MDP DISC CKV-18-563A-A        1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK #1 MDP DISC CKV-18-563A-B        1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK #1 MDP DISC CKV-18-565B-A        1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK #2 MDP ISOL CKV-18-565B-B        1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK #2 MDP ISOL CKV-18-566B-A        1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK #2 EDP ISOL CKV-18-566B-B        1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK #2 EDP ISOL RFV-18-567B-A        0.375            Self-actuated  Relief  DAY TK #2 MDP DISC RFV-18-567B-B        0.375            Self-actuated  Relief  DAY TK #2 MDP DISC CKV-18-570B-A        1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK #2 MDP DISC CKV-18-570B-B        1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK #2 MDP DISC CKV-18-686A          1.500            Self-actuated  Check    7-DAY MDP #1 ISOL MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS CKV-18-686B          1.500            Self-actuated  Check    7-DAY MDP #2 ISOL CKV-18-687A          1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK #1 EDP ISOL CKV-18-687B          1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK #1 MDP ISOL RFV-18-688A          1.500            Self-actuated  Relief  DAY TK #2 MDP DISC RFV-18-688B          1.500            Self-actuated  Relief  DAY TK #1 MDP DISC CKV-18-689A          1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK MDP #2 DISC CKV-18-689B          1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK MDP #1 DISC CKV-18-787A          1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK #2 MDP ISOL CKV-18-787B          1.000            Self-actuated  Check    DAY TK #2 EDP ISOL High-Pressure    FCV-26-240            4                Motor          Gate    Containment isolation Fire Protection  FCV-26-243            4                Motor          Gate    Containment isolation WBNP-90 System (26)        26-1260            4                Self-actuated  Check    Containment isolation 26-1296            4                Self-actuated  Check    Containment isolation
8 10 10 3
3 8
8 20 20 20 20 20 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 2
2 2
21/21/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 Self-Actuated Self-Actuated


Self-Actuated
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 7 of 20)
System Name        Valve No.                Size Inches      Actuation      Type        Function/Description Ventilation (30)  FCV-30-2                  24              Air            Butterfly  Isolation Valve FCV-30-5                  24              Air            Butterfly  Isolation Valve FCV-30-7                  24              Air            Butterfly  Containment Isolation FCV-30-8                  24              Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-9                  24              Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-10                24              Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-12                24              Air            Butterfly  Isolation Valve FCV-30-14                24              Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-15                24              Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-16                24              Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-17                24              Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-19                10              Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-20                10              Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-37                8                Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-40                8                Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-50                24              Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-51                24              Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-52                24              Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-53                24              Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-54                24              Air            Butterfly  Isolation Valve FCV-30-56                24              Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-57                24              Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-58                10              Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-59                10              Air            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-30-61                24              Air            Butterfly  Isolation Valve FCV-30-62                24              Air            Butterfly  Isolation Valve 1-FSV-30-134*            1                Solenoid        Solenoid    Containment isolation 1-FSV-30-135*            1                Solenoid        Solenoid    Containment isolation
                                    *Unit 2 valves were deleted under ECN 5663 3.9-91                                                                                                                                                WBNP-90


Self-Actuated
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-92 WATTS BAR (Page 8 of 20)
System Name        Valve No.              Size Inches      Actuation      Type    Function/Description Air-Conditioning  FCV-31-305              2                Air            Gate    Containment Isolation System (31)        FCV-31-306              2                Air            Gate    Containment Isolation FCV-31-308              2                Air            Gate    Containment Isolation FCV-31-309              2                Air            Gate    Containment Isolation FCV-31-326              2                Air            Gate    Containment Isolation FCV-31-327              2                Air            Gate    Containment Isolation FCV-31-329              2                Air            Gate    Containment Isolation FCV-31-330              2                Air            Gate    Containment Isolation CKV-31-3378            2                Self Actuated  Check  Containment Isolation CKV-31-3392            2                Self Actuated   Check  Containment Isolation CKV-31-3407            2                Self Actuated  Check  Containment Isolation CKV-31-3421            2                Self Actuated  Check  Containment Isolation Control Air        0-FCV-32-70            1                Motor          Ball    Aux. Dryer Purge Control System (32)        0-CKV-32-70A            1                Self Actuated  Check  Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-70B            1                Self Actuated  Check  Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-70C            1                Self Actuated  Check  Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-70D            1                Self Actuated  Check  Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-FCV-32-71            1                Motor          Ball    Aux. Dryer Purge Control 0-FCV-32-72            1                Motor          Ball    Aux. Dryer Purge Control 0-FCV-32-73            1                Motor          Ball    Aux. Dryer Purge Control 1-FCV-32-80            2                Air            Globe  Containment Isolation MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 2-FCV-32-81            2                Air            Globe  Containment Isolation 0-FCV-32-82            2                Air            Globe  Control Air Normal Flow Isol 0-FCV-32-85            2                Air            Globe  Control Air Normal Flow Isol 0-FCV-32-94            1                Motor          Ball    Aux. Dryer Purge Control 0-CKV-32-94A            1                Self Actuated  Check  Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-94B            1                Self Actuated  Check  Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-94C            1                Self Actuated  Check  Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-94D            1                Self Actuated  Check  Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-FCV-32-95            1                Motor          Ball    Aux. Dryer Purge Control 0-FCV-32-96            1                Motor          Ball    Aux. Dryer Purge Control 0-FCV-32-97            1                Motor          Ball    Aux. Dryer Purge Control WBNP-90


Self-Actuated
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 9 of 20)
System Name  Valve No.              Size Inches      Actuation      Type    Function/Description Control Air  1-FCV-32-102            2                Air            Globe  Containment isolation System (32)  2-FCV-32-103            2                Air            Globe  Containment isolation (cont)        1-FCV-32-110            2                Air            Globe  Containment isolation 2-FCV-32-111            2                Air            Globe  Containment isolation 0-CKV-32-240            2                Self Actuated  Check  Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-256            2                Self Actuated  Check  Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-264            2                Self Actuated  Check  Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-279            2                Self Actuated  Check  Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 1-32-293              2                Self Actuated  Check  Containment isolation 1-32-303              2                Self Actuated  Check  Containment isolation 1-32-313              2                Self Actuated  Check  Containment isolation 2-32-323              2                Self Actuated  Check  Containment isolation 2-32-333              2                Self Actuated  Check  Containment isolation 2-32-343              2                Self Actuated  Check  Containment isolation Service Air  1-33-794                1/2              Self Actuated  Check  Containment isolation System (33)  2-33-797                1/2              Self Actuated   Check  Containment isolation 3.9-93                                                                                                                                            WBNP-90


Self-Actuated
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-94 WATTS BAR (Page 10 of 20)
System Name    Valve No.                Size Inches      Actuation        Type        Function/Description Sampling and    FCV-43-2                3/8              Solenoid        Globe        Containment isolation Water Quality  FCV-43-3                3/8              Air              Globe        Containment isolation (43)            FCV-43-11                3/8              Solenoid        Globe        Containment isolation FCV-43-12                3/8              Air              Globe        Containment isolation FCV-43-22                3/8              Solenoid        Globe        Containment isolation FCV-43-23                1-1/3            Air              Gate        Containment isolation FCV-43-34                3/8              Solenoid        Globe        Containment isolation FCV-43-35                3/8              Air              Globe        Containment isolation FCV-43-55                1-1/3            Air              Gate        containment isolation FCV-43-58                1-1/3            Air              Gate        Containment isolation FCV-43-61                1-1/3            Air              Gate        Containment isolation FCV-43-64                1-1/3            Air              Gate        Containment isolation FCV-43-75                3/8              Solenoid        Globe        Containment isolation FCV-43-77                3/8              Air              Globe        Containment isolation 1-PCV-43-200A            1/4              Self Actuated    Regulating  LOCA H2 Cntmt Monitor Press Reg 1-PCV-43-200B            1/4              Self Actuated    Regulating  LOCA H2 Cntmt Monitor Press Reg FCV-43-201              3/8              Solenoid        Globe        Containment isolation FCV-43-202              3/8              Solenoid        Globe        Containment isolation FCV-43-207              3/8              Solenoid        Globe        Containment isolation FCV-43-208              3/8              Solenoid        Globe        Containment isolation 1-PCV-43-210A            1/4              Self Actuated    Regulating  LOCA H2 Cntmt Monitor Press Reg MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 1-PCV-43-210B            1/4              Self Actuated    Regulating  LOCA H2 Cntmt Monitor Press Reg Sampling and    FCV-43-433              3/8              Solenoid        Globe        Containment isolation Water Quality  FCV-43-434              3/8              Solenoid        Globe        Containment isolation (43)            FCV-43-435              3/8              Solenoid        Globe        Containment isolation (Continued)    FCV-43-436              3/8              Solenoid        Globe        Containment isolation 1-CKV-43-834            1/2              Self Actuated    Check        Cntmt Isolation PASS Waste Holdup Tank 1-CKV-43-841            1/2              Self Actuated    Check        Cntmt Isolation PASS Waste Holdup Tank 1-CKV-43-883            1/2              Self Actuated    Check        Cntmt Isolation PASS Cntmt Air Return 1-CKV-43-884            1/2              Self Actuated    Check        Cntmt Isolation PASS Cntmt Air Return 1-PREG-43-1470A-A        1/4              Self Actuated    Regulating  O2 Reagent Gas for H2 Monitor Press Reg 1-PREG-43-1470B-A        1/4              Self Actuated    Regulating  O2 Reagent Gas for H2 Monitor Press Reg WBNP-90 1-PREG-43-1471A-B        1/4              Self Actuated    Regulating  O2 Reagent Gas for H2 Monitor Press Reg 1-PREG-43-1471B-B        1/4              Self Actuated   Regulating  O2 Reagent Gas for H2 Monitor Press Reg


Self-Actuated
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 11 of 20)
System Name      Valve No.              Size Inches      Actuation        Type        Function/Description Ice Condenser    CKV-61-533              3/8              Self Actuated    Check      Containment isolation (61)            CKV-61-680              3/8              Self Actuated   Check      Containment isolation CKV-61-692              3/8              Self Actuated    Check      Containment isolation CKV-61-745              3/8              Self Actuated    Check      Containment isolation FCV-61-96              2                Air              Diaphragm  Containment isolation FCV-61-97              2                Air              Diaphragm  Containment isolation FCV-61-110              2                Air              Diaphragm  Containment isolation FCV-61-122              2                Air              Diaphragm  Containment isolation FCV-61-191              4                Air              Diaphragm  Containment isolation FCV-61-192              4                Air              Diaphragm  Containment isolation FCV-61-193              4                Air              Diaphragm  Containment isolation FCV-61-194              4                Air              Diaphragm  Containment isolation Chemical and    FCV-62-1228            1                Air              Diaphragm  Isolation of Hydrogen vent for charging pumps Volume                                                                                  suction side piping Control System  FCV-62-1229            1                Air              Diaphragm  Isolation of Hydrogen vent for charging pumps (62)                                                                                    suction side piping Emergency Gas    1-FCV-65-8              8                Air              Butterfly  EGTS Tr A Unit 1 Suction Damper Treatment        1-FCV-65-10            24                Air              Butterfly  EGTS Tr A Unit 1 Suction Damper System (65)      0-FCV-65-24            8                Air              Butterfly  EGTS Tr A Fan Isolation Damper 0-FCV-65-28A            8                Air              Butterfly  EGTS Tr A Decay Cooling Damper 0-FCV-65-28B            8                Air              Gate        EGTS Tr A Decay Cooling Damper 1-FCV-65-30            24                Air              Butterfly  EGTS Tr B Unit 1 Suction Damper 0-FCV-65-43            8                Air              Butterfly  EGTS Tr B Fan Isolation Damper 0-FCV-65-47A            8                Air              Gate        EGTS Tr B Decay Cooling Damper 0-FCV-65-47B            8                Air              Gate        EGTS Tr B Decay Cooling Damper 1-FCV-65-51            8                Air              Butterfly  EGTS Tr B Unit 1 Suction Damper 1-FCV-65-52            14                Air              Butterfly  Cntmt Annulus Vacuum Fan Isolation Damper 1-FCV-65-53            14                Air              Butterfly  Cntmt Annulus Vacuum Fan Isolation Damper 1-PCV-65-81            16                Air              Butterfly  Shield Bldg & Cntmt Annulus Isol Damper 1-PCV-65-83            16                Air              Butterfly  Shield Bldg & Cntmt Annulus Isol Damper 1-PCV-65-86            16                Air              Butterfly  EGTS Cntmt Annulus Isolation Damper WBNP-90 1-PCV-65-87            16                Air              Butterfly  EGTS Cntmt Annulus Isolation Damper 3.9-95


Self-Actuated
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-96 WATTS BAR (Page 12 of 20)
System Name    Valve No.              Size Inches      Actuation        Type        Function/Description Essential Raw  FCV-67-9A              4                Motor            Ball        ERCW strainer Cooling Water  FCV-67-9B              4                Motor            Ball        ERCW strainer (67)            FCV-67-10A            4                Motor            Ball        ERCW strainer FCV-67-10B            4                Motor            Ball        ERCW strainer FCV-67-83              6                Motor            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-67-87              6                Motor            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-67-88              6                Motor            Butterfly  Containment isolation 1-FCV-67-89            6                Motor            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-67-91              6                Motor            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-67-95              6                Motor            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-67-96              6                Motor            Butterfly  Containment isolation 1-FCV-67-97            6                Motor            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-67-99              6                Motor            Butterfly  Containment isolation MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WBNP-90


Self-Actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuatedSelf-actuatedSelf-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check CheckERCW flow path integrityERCW flow path integrity ERCW flow path integrity ERCW flow path integrity ERCW flow path integrity ERCW flow path integrity ERCW flow path integrity ERCW flow path integrity ERCW flow path integrity ERCW flowpath integrity ERCW flowpath integrity ERCW flowpath integrity ERCW flowpath integrity ERCW flowpath integrity Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment IsolationContainment IsolationContainment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment IsolationTable 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 15 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description 3.9-100MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-901-CKV-67-1054A    1-CKV-67-1054B 1-CKV-67-1054C 1-CKV-67-1054D 0-CKV-67-502A 0-CKV-67-502B 0-CKV-67-502C 0-CKV-67-502D 0-CKV-67-502E 0-CKV-67-502F 0-CKV-67-502G 0-CKV-67-502H 0-FSV-67-1221-A 0-PCV-67-1222 0-TCV-67-1222A 0-TCV-67-1222B 0-FSV-67-1223-B 0-PCV-67-1224 0-TCV-67-1224A 0-TCV-67-1224B1/21/2 1/2 1/2 2
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 13 of 20)
2 2
System Name        Valve No.               Size Inches      Actuation        Type        Function/Description Essential Raw      FCV-67-103              6                Motor            Butterfly  Containment isolation Cooling Water      FCV-67-104              6                Motor            Butterfly  Containment isolation (67) (Continued)  1-FCV-67-105            6                Motor            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-67-107              6                Motor            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-67-111              6                Motor            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-67-112              6                Motor            Butterfly  Containment isolation 1-FCV-67-113            6                Motor            Butterfly  Containment isolation FCV-67-123              18                Motor            Butterfly  Containment spray cooling FCV-67-124              18                Motor            Butterfly  Containment spray cooling FCV-67-125              18                Motor            Butterfly  Containment spray cooling FCV-67-126              18                Motor            Butterfly  Containment spray cooling FCV-67-130              2                Motor            Plug        Containment isolation FCV-67-131              2                Motor            Plug        Containment isolation FCV-67-133              2                Motor            Plug        Containment isolation FCV-67-134              2                Motor            Plug        Containment isolation FCV-67-138              2                Motor            Plug        Containment isolation FCV-67-139              2                Motor            Plug        Containment isolation FCV-67-141              2                Motor            Plug        Containment isolation FCV-67-142              2                Motor            Plug        Containment isolation FCV-67-143              12                Motor            Globe      ERCW flow path integrity O-FCV-67-144            16                Motor            Globe      ERCW flow path integrity O-FCV-67-152            24                Motor            Butterfly  CCS flow path integrity 1-TCV-67-158            6                Motor            Butterfly  SBR temperature control 2-TCV-67-158            6                Motor            Butterfly  SBR temperature control 1-FCV-67-162            2                Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers 1-FCV-67-164            2                Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers 3.9-97                                                                                                                                                    WBNP-90
2 2
2 2 1 1 1/2 3/4 1
1 1/2 3/4Self-actuatedSelf-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Solenoid Self Self Self Solenoid Self Self Self Solenoid Self Self Self Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Globe Check Check Check Globe Regulating


Regulating
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-98 WATTS BAR (Page 14 of 20)
System Name    Valve No.              Size Inches      Actuation        Type        Function/Description Essential Raw  0-FCV-67-176            1-1/2            Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers Cooling Water  FCV-67-182              1-1/2            Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers (67)            FCV-67-184              1-1/2            Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers (Continued)    FCV-67-186              1-1/2            Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers 0-FCV-67-205            4                Motor            Butterfly  Nonessential equipment isolation 0-FCV-67-208            4                Motor            Butterfly  Nonessential Equipment isolation 1-FCV-67-213            1-1/2            Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers 1-FCV-67-215            1-1/2            Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers 2-FCV-67-217            2                Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers 2-FCV-67-219            2                Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers FCV-67-295              2                Motor            Plug        Containment isolation FCV-67-296              2                Motor            Plug        Containment isolation FCV-67-297              2                Motor            Plug        Containment isolation FCV-67-298              2                Motor            Plug        Containment isolation 2-FCV-67-336            1                Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers 2-FCV-67-338            1                Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers FCV-67-342              2                Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers FCV-67-344              2                Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers FCV-67-346              1-1/2            Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers FCV-67-348              1-1/2            Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS FCV-67-350              1-1/2            Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers FCV-67-352              1-1/2            Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers FCV-67-354              1-1/2            Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers FCV-67-356              1-1/2            Air              Globe      ERCW to pump room coolers 0-CKV-67-503A          20                Self-actuated    Check      ERCW flow path integrity 0-CKV-67-503B          20                Self-actuated    Check      ERCW flow path integrity 0-CKV-67-503C          20                Self-actuated    Check      ERCW flow path integrity 0-TCV-67-1050-A        3                Self-actuated    Globe      EBR condenser temperature control 0-TCV-67-1051-A        3                Self-actuated    Globe      MCR condenser temperature control 0-TCV-67-1052-B        3                Self-actuated    Globe      EBR condenser temperature control 3                Self-actuated    Globe      MCR condenser temperature control WBNP-90 8                Self-Actuated    Check      ERCW flow path integrity 8                Self-Actuated    Check      ERCW flow path integrity Self-Actuated    Check      ERCW flow path integrity


Regulating
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 15 of 20)
System Name    Valve No.            Size Inches      Actuation        Type    Function/Description Essential Raw  0-TCV-67-1053-B      8                Self-Actuated    Check  ERCW flow path integrity Cooling Water  CKV-67-508A          8                Self-Actuated    Check  ERCW flow path integrity (67)            CKV-67-508B          8                Self-Actuated    Check  ERCW flow path integrity (Continued)    0-CKV-67-508A        8                Self-Actuated    Check  ERCW flow path integrity 0-CKV-67-508B        10                Self-Actuated    Check  ERCW flow path integrity 0-CKV-67-513A        10                Self-Actuated    Check  ERCW flow path integrity 0-CKV-67-513B        3                Self-Actuated    Check  ERCW flow path integrity 0-CKV-67-517A        3                Self-Actuated    Check  ERCW flow path integrity 0-CKV-67-512A        8                Self-Actuated    Check  ERCW flow path integrity 1-CKV-67-940A        8                Self-actuated    Check  ERCW flowpath integrity 2-CKV-67-935B        20                Self-actuated    Check  ERCW flowpath integrity CKV-67-513A          20                Self-actuated    Check  ERCW flowpath integrity CKV-67-513B          20                Self-actuated    Check  ERCW flowpath integrity 0-CKV-67-503D        20                Self-actuated    Check  ERCW flowpath integrity 0-CKV-67-503E        20                Self-actuated    Check  Containment Isolation 0-CKV-67-503F        1/2              Self-actuated    Check  Containment Isolation 0-CKV-67-503G        1/2              Self-actuated    Check  Containment Isolation 0-CKV-67-503H        1/2              Self-actuated    Check  Containment Isolation CKV-67-575A        1/2              Self-actuated    Check  Containment Isolation CKV-67-575B        2                Self-actuated    Check  Containment Isolation CKV-67-575C        2                Self-actuated    Check  Containment Isolation CKV-67-575D        2                Self-actuated    Check  Containment Isolation CKV-67-580A        2                Self-actuated    Check  Containment Isolation CKV-67-580B        1/2              Self-actuated    Check  Containment Isolation CKV-67-580C        1/2              Self-actuated    Check  Containment Isolation CKV-67-580D        1/2              Self-actuated    Check  Containment Isolation CKV-67-585A        1/2              Self-actuated    Check  Containment Isolation CKV-67-585B        1/2              Self-actuated    Check  Containment Isolation CKV-67-585C        1/2              Self-actuated    Check  Containment Isolation CKV-67-585D        1/2              Self-actuated    Check  Containment Isolation 3.9-99                                                                                                                                          WBNP-90


Globe Regulating
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-100 WATTS BAR (Page 16 of 20)
System Name    Valve No.            Size Inches      Actuation        Type        Function/Description 1-CKV-67-1054A      1/2              Self-actuated    Check        Containment Isolation 1-CKV-67-1054B      1/2              Self-actuated    Check        Containment Isolation 1-CKV-67-1054C      1/2              Self-actuated    Check        Containment Isolation 1-CKV-67-1054D      1/2              Self-actuated    Check        Containment Isolation 0-CKV-67-502A      2                Self-actuated    Check        Air release 0-CKV-67-502B      2                Self-actuated    Check        Air release 0-CKV-67-502C      2                Self-actuated    Check        Air release 0-CKV-67-502D      2                Self-actuated    Check        Air release 0-CKV-67-502E      2                Solenoid        Globe       Air release 0-CKV-67-502F      2                Self            Check        Air release 0-CKV-67-502G      2                Self            Check        Air release 0-CKV-67-502H                        Self            Check        Air release 0-FSV-67-1221-A    1                Solenoid        Globe        ERCW Supply 0-PCV-67-1222      1                Self            Regulating  Press Cntr for ERCW to Aux Air Comp A 0-TCV-67-1222A      1/2              Self            Regulating  Throttles ERCW to Aux Air Comp A cyl jacket 0-TCV-67-1222B      3/4              Self            Regulating  Throttles ERCW to Aux Air Comp A cyl jacket 0-FSV-67-1223-B    1                Solenoid        Globe        ERCW Supply 0-PCV-67-1224      1                Self            Regulating  Press Cntr for ERCW to Aux Air Comp B 0-TCV-67-1224A      1/2              Self            Regulating  Throttles ERCW to Aux Air Comp B cyl jacket 0-TCV-67-1224B      3/4              Self            Regulating   Throttles ERCW to Aux Air Comp B cyl jacket Component        FCV-70-85            6                Air              Butterfly    Containment Isolation MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS Cooling Water    FCV-70-87            3                Motor            Gate        Containment Isolation (70)            FCV-70-89            6                Motor            Butterfly    Containment Isolation FCV-70-90            3                Motor            Gate        Containment Isolation FCV-70-92            6                Motor            Butterfly    Containment Isolation WBNP-90


Regulating
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 17 of 20)
System Name        Valve No.                Size Inches    Actuation        Type        Function/Description Component          1-FCV-70-100              6              Motor            Butterfly  Containment Isolation Cooling Water      FCV-70-133              3              Motor            Gate        RCP Thermal Barrier Isolation (70) (Continued)    FCV-70-134              3              Motor            Gate        Containment Isolation FCV-70-140              6              Motor            Butterfly  Containment Isolation FCV-70-143              6              Motor            Butterfly  Containment Isolation FCV-70-156              18            Motor            Butterfly  RHR Hx Isolation FCV-70-168              10            Motor            Butterfly  BAE Isolation Valve 0-FCV-70-194              20            Motor            Butterfly  Spent Fuel Pit Hx Isolation FCV-70-197              20            Motor            Butterfly  Spent fuel pit Hx isolation 0-CKV-70-504              16            Self-actuated    Check      Prevent backflow through CCP CKV-70-504A              16            Self-actuated    Check      Prevent backflow through CCP CKV-70-504B              16            Self-actuated    Check      Prevent backflow through CCP 1-CKV-70-679              3              Self-actuated    Check      Containment isolation CCP CKV-70-698              3/4            Self-actuated    Check      Containment isolation CCP 0-CKV-70-753              8              Self-actuated    Check      CDWE Return Check 1-CKV-70-790              3/4            Self-actuated    Check      Containment isolation 1,2-FCV-70-183            3              Motor            Gate        Sample Hx Isolation 1,2-FCV-70-215            3              Motor            Gate        Sample Hx Isolation 1-FCV-70-66              2              Air              Angle      CCS surge tank isolation 2-FCV-70-66              2              Air              Angle      CCS surge tank isolation 1-RFV-70-538              3X4            Self actuated    Relief      Surge tank 1A/1B relief 1-CKV-70-681-A, B, C, D  1-1/2          Self actuated    Check      Overpressurization protection 1-CKV-70-682-A, B, C, D  1-1/2          Self actuated    Check      Overpressurization protection 1-CKV-70-687              3/4            Self actuated    Check      RCP thermal barrier isolation 1-RFV-70-703              3/4            Self actuated    Relief      Excess letdown HX relief 1-RFV-70-835              3/4 x 1        Self actuated    Relief      RCP thermal barrier supply relief Primary Water      FCV-81-12                3              Air              Gate        Primary water to RCS PRT System (81)        CKV-81-502                3              Self-actuated    Gate        Primary water to RCS PRT 3.9-101                                                                                                                                                          WBNP-90


RegulatingContainment IsolationContainment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-102 WATTS BAR (Page 18 of 20)
System Name      Valve No.            Size Inches      Actuation        Type    Function/Description Standby Diesel    1-FCV-82-160        1.500            Air              Diaph  Flow Cont 1A1 TK A Generators (82)  1-FSV-82-160-A      0.370            Elec            Sol V  Air ST SOL 1A1 (A) 1-FCV-82-161        1.500            Air              Diaph  Flow Cont 1A2 TK A 1-FSV-82-161-A      0.370            Elec            Sol V  Air ST SOL 1A2 (A) 1-PCV-82-162A        2.000            Air              Diaph  PR RED V 1A1 TK A 1-PREG-82-162B      0.250            Self            Diaph  PR REG V 1A1 TK A 1-PCV-82-163A        2.000            Air              Diaph  PR RED V 1A2 TK A 1-PREG-82-163B      0.250            Self            Diaph  PR REG V 1A2 TK A 1-FCV-82-170        1.500            Air              Diaph  FLOW CONT 1A1 TK B 1-FSV-82-170-A      0.370            Elec            Sol V  AIR ST SOL 1A1 (B) 1-FCV-82-171        1.500            Air              Diaph  FLOW CONT 1A2 TK B 1-FSV-82-171-A      0.370            Elec            Sol V  AIR ST SOL 1A2 (B) 1-PCV-82-172A        2.000            Air              Diaph  PR RED V 1A1 TK B 1-PREG-82-172B      0.250            Self            Diaph  PR REG V 1A1 TK B 1-PCV-82-173A        2.000            Air              Diaph  PR RED V 1A2 TK B 1-PREG-82-173B      0.250            Self            Diaph  PR REG V 1A2 TK B 1-FCV-82-190        1.500            Air              Diaph  FLOW CONT 1B1 TK A 1-FSV-82-190-A      0.370            Elec            Sol V  AIR ST SOL 1B1(A) 1-FCV-82-191        1.500            Air              Diaph  FLOW CONT 1B2 TK A 1-FSV-82-191-A      0.370            Elec            Sol V  AIR ST SOL 1B2 (A) 1-PCV-82-192A        2.000            Air              Diaph  PR RED V 1B1 TK A MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 1-PREG-82-192B      0.250            Self            Diaph  PR REG V 1B1 TK A WBNP-90


Air release
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 19 of 20)
System Name      Valve No.            Size Inches      Actuation        Type    Function/Description Standby Diesel    0-FCV-82-310          1.500            Air             Diaph  FLOW CONT 0C1 TK B Generators (82)  0-FSV-82-310-S        0.370            Elec            Sol V  AIR ST SOL 0C1 (B)
(Continued)      0-FCV-82-311          1.500            Air              Diaph  FLOW CONT 0C2 TK B 0-FSV-82-311-S        0.370            Elec            Sol V  AIR ST SOL 0C2 (B) 0-PCV-82-312A        2.000            Air              Diaph  PR RED V 0C1 TK B 0-PCV-82-312B        0.250            Self            Diaph  PR REG V 0C1 TK B 0-PCV-82-313A        2.000            Air              Diaph  PR RED V 0C2 TK B 0-PCV-82-313B        0.250            Self            Diaph  PR REG V 0C2 TK B CKV-82-502A1          0.750            Self            Check  TK SUP A1 (A)
CKV-82-502A2          0.750            Self            Check  TK SUP B1 (A)
CKV-82-505A1          0.750            Self            Check  TK SUP A1 (B)
CKV-82-505A2          0.750            Self            Check  TK SUP B1 (B)
CKV-82-509A1          0.750            Self            Check  CROSS CONN CK A1 CKV-82-509A2          0.750            Self            Check  CROSS CONN CK B1 CKV-82-523A1          0.750            Self            Check  RELAY CK A1 (A)
CKV-82-523A2          0.750            Self            Check  RELAY CK B1 (A)
SPV-82-524A1          0.375            Self            Check  SLIDE VLV A1 SPV-82-524A2          0.375            Self            Check  SLIDE VLV B1 CKV-82-531A1          0.750            Self            Check  RELAY CK A1 (B)
CKV-82-531A2          0.750            Self            Check  RELAY CK B1 (B)
CKV-82-536B1          0.750            Self            Check  TK SUP A2 (A)
CKV-82-536B2          0.750            Self            Check  TK SUP B2 (A)
CKV-82-539B1          0.750            Self            Check  TK SUP A2 (B)
CKV-82-539B2          0.750            Self            Check  TK SUP B2 (B)
CKV-82-543B1          0.750            Self            Check  CROSS CONN CK A2 CKV-82-543B2          0.750            Self            Check  CROSS CONN CK B2 CKV-82-557B1          0.750            Self            Check  RELAY CK A2 (A)
CKV-82-557B2          0.750            Self            Check  RELAY CK B2 (A)
SPV-82-558B1          0.375            Self            Check  SLIDE VLV A2 SPV-82-558B2          0.375            Self            Check  SLIDE VLV B2 CKV-82-565B1          0.750            Self            Check  RELAY CK A2 (B)
CKV-82-565B2          0.750            Self            Check  RELAY CK B2 (B)
WBNP-90 0-CKV-82-561          0.750            Self            Check  TK SUP 0C1 (A) 3.9-103 0-CKV-82-562          0.750            Self            Check  TK SUP 0C2 (A)


Air release
Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-104 WATTS BAR (Page 20 of 20)
System Name      Valve No.              Size Inches      Actuation        Type    Function/Description Standby Diesel    0-CKV-82-567            0.750            Self            Check  TK SUP 0C1 (B)
Generators (82)  0-CKV-82-568            0.750            Self            Check  TK SUP 0C2 (B)
(Continued)      0-CKV-82-572            0.750            Self            Check  CROSS CONN CK 0C2 0-CKV-82-573            0.750            Self            Check  CROSS CONN CK 0C1 0-CKV-82-589            0.750            Self            Check  RELAY CK 0C1 (A) 0-CKV-82-590            0.750            Self            Check  RELAY CK 0C2 (A) 0-CKV-82-591            0.750            Self            Check  RELAY CK 0C1 (B) 0-CKV-82-592            0.750            Self            Check  RELAY CK 0C2 (B) 0-SPV-82-593            0.375            Self            Check  SLIDE VLV 0C1 0-SPV-82-594            0.375            Self            Check  SLIDE VLV 0C2 Radiation        1,2-FCV-90-107          1-1/2            Motor            Gate    Containment Isolation Monitoring (90)  1,2-FCV-90-108          1-1/2            Motor            Gate    Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-109          1-1/2            Motor            Gate    Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-108          1-1/2            Motor            Gate    Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-109          1-1/2            Motor            Gate    Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-110          1-1/2            Motor            Gate    Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-111          1-1/2            Motor            Gate    Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-113          1-1/2            Motor            Gate    Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-114          1-1/2            Motor            Gate    Containment Isolation MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 1,2-FCV-90-115          1-1/2            Motor            Gate    Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-116          1-1/2            Motor            Gate    Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-117          1-1/2            Motor            Gate    Containment Isolation WBNP-90


Air release
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-91 Table 3.9-26 Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 1 of 6)
SYSTEM          CATEGORY      CLASS                        VALVES MAIN STEAM                  B          B    FCV-1-4, FCV-1-11, FCV-1-22, FCV-1-29, 47W801-1                                      FCV-1-147, FCV-1-148, FCV-1-149, FCV-1-150 B          B    PCV-1-5, PCV-1-12, PCV-1-23, PCV-1-30, 1-ISV                                              619, 1-ISV-1-620, 1-ISV-1-621, 1-ISV-1-622 C          B    1-512, 1-513, 1-514, 1-515, 1-516, 1-517, 1-518, 1-519, 1-520, 1-521, 1,522, 1-523, 1-524, 1-525, 1-526, 1-527, 1-528, 1-529, 1-530, 1-531 STEAM GENERATOR            B          B    FCV-1-7, FCV-1-14, FCV-1-25, FCV-1-32, BLOWDOWN SYSTEM                              FCV-1-181, FCV-1-182, FCV-1-183, FCV-1-184 47W801-2 CONDENSATE                  C          C      2-667 47W804-1 FEEDWATER                  B          B    FCV-3-33, FCV-3-47, FCV-3-87, FCV-3-100 47W803-1                                      FCV-3-185, FCV-3-186, FCV-3-187, FCV-3-188, FCV-3-236, FCV-3-239, FCV-3-242, FCV-3-245 B          C      FCV-3-35, FCV-3-35A, FCV-3-48, FCV-3-48A, FCV-3-90, FCV-3-90A, FCV-3-103, FCV-3-103A C          B    3-508, 3-509, 3-510, 3-511, 3-638, 3-652, 3-669, 3-678, 3-644, 3-645, 3-655, 3-656, 3-670, 3-679 AUXILIARY                  B          B    FCV-1-15, FCV-1-16, FCV-1-18 FEEDWATER 47W803-2 B          C      LCV-3-148, LCV-3-148A, LCV-3-156, LCV-3-156A, LCV-3-164, LCV-3-164A, LCV-3-171, LCV-3-171A, LCV-3-172, LCV-3-173, LCV-3-174, FCV-3-175, FCV-1-17, FCV-3-116A, FCV-3-116B, FCV-3-126A, FCV-3-126B, FCV-3-136A, FCV-3-136B, FCV                                              179A, FCV-3-179B,FCV-1-51, PCV-3-122, PCV-3-132 C          B    3-830, 3-831, 3-832, 3-833, 3-861, 3-862, 3-864, 3-871, 3-872, 3-873, 3-874, 1-891, 1-892, 3-921, 3-922 C          C      3-805, 3-806, 3-810, 3-814, 3-815, 3-818 CHEMICAL &                  A          B    FCV-62-61, FCV-62-63, FCV-62-72, FCV-62-73 VOLUME                                        FCV-62-74, FCV-62-77, FCV-62-76 CONTROL 47W809-1, -2, -5 AC          B    62-639, 62-662, 62-523, 62-525, 62-530, 62-532 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                          3.9-105


Air release
WATTS BAR                                                                              WBNP-91 Table 3.9-26 Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 2 of 6)
SYSTEM        CATEGORY      CLASS                        VALVES B          B    LCV-62-132, LCV-62-133, LCV-62-135, LCV                                              136, FCV-62-138, FCV-62-144,FCV-62-1228, FCV                                              1229, FCV-62-90, FCV-62-91 C          B    62-504, 62-505, 62-518, 62-636, 62-649, 62-675, 62-688, 62-1220, 62-1221, 62-1222 B          C      FCV-62-138 C          C      FCV-62-930, FCV-62-1052-A, FCV-62-1052-B C          B    FCV-62-955, FCV-62-1079 RESIDUAL HEAT            A          A    FCV-74-1, FCV-74-2, REMOVAL                                    FCV-74-8, FCV-74-9 47W810-1 B          B    FCV-74-3, FCV-74-12, FCV-74-21,FCV-74-24, FCV-74-33, FCV-74-35 C          B    74-505, 74-514, 74-515, 74-544, 74-545 SAFETY INJECTION        A          B    FCV-63-23, FCV-63-64, FCV-63-71, FCV-63-84 AC          A      63-543, 63-545, 63-547, 63-549, 63-551, 63-553, 63-555, 63-557, 63-558, 63-559, 63-560, 63-561, 63-562, 63-563, 63-622, 63-623, 63-624, 63-625, 63-632, 63-633, 63-634, 63-635, 63-640, 63-641, 63-643, 63-644 A          A 63-581, 63-586, 63-587, 63-588, 63-589 AC          B FCV-63-524, FCV-63-526, FCV-63-528, FCV                                              530 3.9-106                                                  MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Air release
WATTS BAR                                                                              WBNP-91 Table 3.9-26 Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 3 of 6)
SYSTEM          CATEGORY    CLASS                        VALVES B          B    FCV-63-1, FCV-63-3, FCV-63-4, FCV-63-5, FCV-63-6, FCV-63-7, FCV-63-8, FCV-63-11, FCV-63-22, FCV-63-25, FCV-63-26, FCV-63-47, FCV-63-48, FCV-63-72, FCV-63-73, FCV-63-93, FCV-63-94, FCV-63-152, FCV-63-153, FCV-63-156, FCV-63-157, FCV-63-172, FCV-63-175, FCV                            C          B 185 63-502, 63-510, 63-511, 63-534, 63-535, 63-536, 63-577, 63-602, 63-603, 63-604, 63-605, 63-626, 63-627, 63-637, 63-725, 63-835, 63-868 CONTAINMENT                A          B    FCV-72-2, FCV-72-39, FCV-72-40, FCV-72-41 SPRAY 47W812-1 B          B    FCV-72-13, FCV-72-21, FCV-72-22, FCV-72-34, FCV-72-44, FCV-72-45 C          B    72-506, 72-507, 72-508, 72-509, 72-524, 72-525, 72-548, 72-549, 72-562, 72-563 REACTOR COOLANT            A          B    FCV-68-305, FCV-68-307, FCV-63-308 47W813-1 B          A    FCV-68-332, FCV-68-333, PCV-68-334, PCV                                              340A B          B    FSV-68-394, FSV-68-395, FSV-68-396, FSV-68-397 C          A    68-563, 68-564, 68-565 C          B    68-559, 68-849 ESSENTIAL RAW              A          B    FCV-67-83, FCV-67-87, FCV-67-88, 1-FCV COOLING WATER                                89,FCV-67-91, 47W845-1,2,3,4                              FCV-67-95, FCV-67-96, 1-FCV-67-97, FCV-67-99, FCV-67-103, FCV-67-104, 1-FCV-67-105, FCV-67-107, FCV                                              111, FCV-67-112, 1-FCV-67-113, FCV-67-130, FCV-67-131, FCV-67-133, FCV-67-134, FCV-67-138, FCV-67-139, FCV-67-141, FCV                                              142, FCV-67-295, FCV-67-296, FCV-67-297, FCV-67-298 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                        3.9-107


Air release
WATTS BAR                                                                              WBNP-91 Table 3.9-26 Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 4 of 6)
SYSTEM          CATEGORY      CLASS                        VALVES AC          B    2-67-562A, 2-67-562B, 2-67-562C, 2-67-562D, 67-575A, 67-575B, 67-575C, 67-575D, 67-580A, 67-580B, 67-580C, 67-580D, 67-585A, 67-585B, 67-585C, 67-585D, 1-67-1054A, 1-67-1054B, 1                                                1054C, 1-67-1054D B          C    FCV-67-65, FCV-67-68, FCV-67-123, FCV-67-124, FCV-67-125, FCV-67-126, FCV-67-143, FCV-67-144, FCV                                                152, FCV-67-162, FCV-67-164, FCV-67-176, FCV-67-182, FCV                                                184, FCV-67-186, FCV-67-205, FCV-67-208, FCV-67-213, FCV-67-215, FCV-67-342, FCV-67-344, FCV-67-346, FCV-67-348, FCV-67-350, FCV                                                352, FCV-67-354, FCV-67-356, 2-FCV-67-217, 2-FCV-67-219, 2-FCV-67-336, 2-FCV-67-338, FCV-67-9A, FCV                                                9B, FCV-67-10A, FCV-67-10B, FCV-67-22, FCV                                                81, FCV-67-82, FCV-67-147, 2-FCV-67-354, 2-FCV-67-356 C          C    67-503A, 67-503B, 67-503C, 67-503D, 67-503E, 67-503F, 67-503G, 67-503H, 67-508A, 67-508B, 67-513A, 67-513B, 67-502A thru H, 1-67-940A, 2                                                935B COMPONENT                  A          B    FCV-70-85, FCV-70-87, FCV-70-89, FCV-70-90, COOLING WATER                                FCV-70-92, 47W859-1, -2, -3                              1-FCV-70-100, FCV-70-134, FCV-70-140, FCV                                                143 AC          B    70-679, 70-687, 70-698, 70-703, 1-70-790 B          C    FCV-70-66, FCV-70-133, FCV-70-153, FCV-70-156, FCV-70-183, FCV-70-197, FCV-70-215 C          C    70-504, 70-504A, 70-504B, 70-538, 70-753, 70-539, 70-681A, 70-681B, 70-681C, 70-681D, 70-682A, 70-682B, 70-682C, 70-682D PRIMARY WATER              A          B    FCV-81-1247W819-47819-1 AC          B    81-502 WASTE DISPOSAL              A          B    FCV-77-9, FCV-77-10, FCV-77-16, FCV-70-17, 47W830-1, -6                                  FCV-77-18, FCV-77-19, FCV-77-20, FCV-77-127, FCV-77-128 AC          B    77-2875 3.9-108                                                    MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


Air release
WATTS BAR                                                                              WBNP-91 Table 3.9-26 Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 5 of 6)
SYSTEM        CATEGORY      CLASS                        VALVES FIRE PROTECTION            A          B    FCV-26-240, FCV-26-243 47W850-9 AC          B    26-1260, 26-1296 HEATING AND                A          B    FCV-30-7, FCV-30-8, FCV-30-9, FCV-30-10, FCV-VENTILATION                                  30-14, FCV-30-15, FCV-30-16, FCV-30-17, 47W866-1                                      FCV-30-19, FCV-30-20, FCV-30-37, FCV-30-40, FCV-30-50, FCV-30-51, FCV-30-52, FCV-30-53, FCV-30-56, FCV-30-57, FCV-30-58, FCV-30-59, FCV-30-134, FCV-30-135 AIR CONDITIONING            A          B    FCV-31-305, FCV-31-306, FCV-31-308, FCV 47W865-5, -3, -7, -8                          309, FCV-31-326, FCV-31-327, FCV-31-329, FCV                                              330 AIR CONDITIONING          AC          B    31-3378, 31-3392, 31-3407, 31-3421 (continued) 47W865-5, -3, -7, -8 C        Note 1  0-31-2193, 0-31-2235, 0-31-2210, 0-31-2252, 0                                              2307, 0-31-2364, 0-31-2326, 0-31-2383, 0-31-2607.
0-31-2649, 0-31-2623, 0-31-2665 CONTROL AIR                A          B    FCV-32-80, FCV-32-102, FCV-32-110, FCV-32-288, 47W848-1                                      BYV-32-298, BYV-32-308 AC          B    32-293, 32-303, 32-313 SERVICE AIR                A          B    33-713 AC          B    33-714 RADIATION                  A          B    FCV-43-2, FCV-43-3, FCV-43-11, FCV-43-12, FCV-SAMPLING                                      43-22, FCV-43-23, FCV-43-34, FCV-43-35, FCV 47W625-1, -2, -7,                            75, FCV-43-77, FCV-43-201, FCV-43-202, FCV -11, -15                                      207, FCV-43-208, FSV-43-250, FSV-43-251, FSV-43-287, FSV                                              288, FSV-43-307, FSV-43-309, FSV-43-310, FSV                                              318, B          B FSV-43-319, FSV-43-325, FSV-43-341, FSV-43-342 FCV-43-54D, FCV-43-55, FCV-43-56D, FCV-43-58, FCV-43-59D, FCV-43-61, FCV-43-63D, FCV-43-64 AC          B    43-834, 43-841, 43-883, 43-884 SYSTEM TEST                A          B    52-500, 52-501, 52-502, 52-503, 52-504, 52-505, FACILITY                                      52-506, 52-507 47W331-3 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS                                                          3.9-109


Air release
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-91 Table 3.9-26 Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 6 of 6)
SYSTEM            CATEGORY      CLASS                        VALVES DEMINERALIZED                A          B      59-522, 59-698 WATER AND CASK DECONTAMINATION 47W856-1 ICE CONDENSER                A          B      FCV-61-96, FCV-61-97, FCV-61-110, FCV-61-122, 47W814-2                                        FCV-61-191, FCV-61-192, FCV-61-193, FCV                                                  194 AC          B      61-533, 61-680, 61-692, 61-745 C          C      61-658, 61-659, 61-660, 61-661, 61-662, 61-663, 61-664, 61-665, 61-666, 61-667, 61-668, 61-669, 61-670, 61-671, 61-672, 61-673, 61-674, 61-675, 61-676, 61-677 BORATION MAKEUP              A          B      84-530 RADIATION                    A          B      FCV-90-107, FCV-90-108, FCV-90-109, FCV  MONITORING                                      110, 47W610-90-3                                    FCV-90-111, FCV-90-113, FCV-90-114, FCV                                                  115, FCV-90-116, FCV-90-117 FUEL POOL                    A          B      78-557, 78-558, 78-560, 78-561 COOLING AND CLEANING 47W855-1 Note 1: Not Constructed to an ASME Code Class.
3.9-110                                                      MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


ERCW Supply Press Cntr for ERCW to Aux Air Comp AThrottles ERCW to Aux Air Comp A cyl jacketThrottles ERCW to Aux Air Comp A cyl jacket ERCW Supply Press Cntr for ERCW to Aux Air Comp BThrottles ERCW to Aux Air Comp B cyl jacketThrottles ERCW to Aux Air Comp B cyl jacketComponent Cooling Water (70)  FCV-70-85  FCV-70-87 FCV-70-89  FCV-70-90  FCV-70-92 6 3 6 3 6 AirMotor MotorMotorMotor ButterflyGate ButterflyGate ButterflyContainment IsolationContainment Isolation Containment IsolationContainment IsolationContainment IsolationTable 3.9-25  Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 16 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-101WATTS BARWBNP-90Component Cooling Water (70) (Continued)1-FCV-70-100  FCV-70-133 FCV-70-134 FCV-70-140 FCV-70-143 FCV-70-156 FCV-70-168 0-FCV-70-194 FCV-70-197 0-CKV-70-504 CKV-70-504A CKV-70-504B 1-CKV-70-679 CKV-70-698 0-CKV-70-753 1-CKV-70-790 1,2-FCV-70-183 1,2-FCV-70-215 1-FCV-70-66 2-FCV-70-66 1-RFV-70-538 1-CKV-70-681-A, B, C, D 1-CKV-70-682-A, B, C, D1-CKV-70-6871-RFV-70-703 1-RFV-70-835 6 3 3
Table 3.9-27 Active Section III ASME-Coded Components (Except Valves) In TVA Scope Of Supply(1)
6 6
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR System Name                Component              ANS Safety Class  Normal Mode  Post LOCA Mode Reason Feedwater (3)             Auxiliary feedwater pumps:
18 10 20 20 16 16 16 3
Motor driven 1A-A                        2B              OFF            ON        Provide heat removal for chapter 1B-B                        2B              OFF            ON        15 events.
3/4 8
2A-A                        2B              OFF            ON 2B-B                        2B              OFF            ON Steam driven 1A-S                        2B              OFF            ON        Provide heat removal for chapter 2A-S                        2B              OFF            ON        15 events.
3/4 3
Control Air (32)          Auxiliary air                2B              OFF            ON        Provide control air for safety-compressors A & B                                                      related equipment.
3 2
Essential Raw              ERCW pump A-A               2B              ON            ON        Provide cooling water flow for Cooling Water (67)        B-A                         2B              ON            ON        component cooling system and C-A                          2B              ON            ON        other heat removal systems.
2 3X4 1-1/2 1-1/23/43/4 3/4 x 1MotorMotor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Self-actuated Motor Motor Air Air Self actuated Self actuated Self actuatedSelf actuatedSelf actuated Self actuated ButterflyGate Gate Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly Butterfly
D-A                          2B              ON            ON E-B                          2B              ON            ON F-B 2B              ON            ON G-B 2B              ON            ON H-B 2B              ON            ON Component Cooling (70) Component cooling pumps1A                          2B              ON            ON        Provide cooling water flow for 1B                              2B              ON            ON        refrigerated equipment served by 2A                              2B              ON            ON        the CCS.
2B                              2B              ON            ON C-S 2B              ON            ON Note:(1) As defined in Regulatory Guide 1.48 3.9-111                                                                                                                                                                  WBNP-86


Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Gate Gate Angle Angle Relief Check Check Check Relief ReliefContainment IsolationRCP Thermal Barrier Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation RHR Hx Isolation BAE Isolation Valve Spent Fuel Pit Hx Isolation Spent fuel pit Hx isolation Prevent backflow through CCP Prevent backflow through CCP Prevent backflow through CCP Containment isolation CCP Containment isolation CCP CDWE Return Check Containment isolation Sample Hx Isolation Sample Hx Isolation CCS surge tank isolation CCS surge tank isolation Surge tank 1A/1B relief Overpressurization protection Overpressurization protectionRCP thermal barrier isolationExcess letdown HX relief RCP thermal barrier supply reliefPrimary Water System (81)FCV-81-12CKV-81-502 3 3 AirSelf-actuatedGateGatePrimary water to RCS PRTPrimary water to RCS PRTTable 3.9-25  Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 17 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description 3.9-102MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-90Standby Diesel Generators (82)1-FCV-82-1601-FSV-82-160-A 1-FCV-82-161 1-FSV-82-161-A 1-PCV-82-162A
3.9-112 WATTS BAR Table 3.9-28 Active Pumps For Primary Fluid Systems In Westinghouse Scope Of Supply As Applied To Watts Bar Nuclear Plant System Name        Component              ANS Safety Class  Normal Mode    PST LOCA Mode    Reason CVCS (62)           Centrifugal Charging Pumps 1A-A                        2A              ON              ON        To provide emergency core 2A-A                        2A              ON              ON        cooling, reactivity control and 1B-B                        2A              ON              ON        RCP seal injection flow.
2B-2B                        2A              ON              ON Safety Injection    SIS Pump Systems            1A-A                        2A              OFF              ON        To provide emergency core 1B-B                        2A              OFF              ON        cooling and reactivity control.
2A-A                        2A              OFF              ON 2B-B                        2A              OFF              ON Containment Spray  Pump (72)                1A-A                         2A              OFF              ON        Provide cooling water flow to 2A-A                        2A              OFF              ON        control containment temperature 1B-B                        2A              OFF              ON        and pressure.
2B-B                        2A              OFF              ON Residual Heat      Pump Removal (74)        1A-A                        2A              OFF              ON        To provide emergency core 1B-B                        2A              OFF              ON        cooling and reactivity control MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 2A-A                         2A              OFF              ON        and containment temperature 2B-B                        2A              OFF              ON        and pressure control.
WBNP-79


1-PREG-82-162B 1-PCV-82-163A
WATTS BAR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WBNP-55 Figure 3.9-1 Vibration Check-Out Functional Test Inspection Data 3.9-7


1-PREG-82-163B 1-FCV-82-170 1-FSV-82-170-A 1-FCV-82-171 1-FSV-82-171-A 1-PCV-82-172A
WATTS BAR                                                        WBNP-55 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 3.9-8                                  MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS


1-PREG-82-172B 1-PCV-82-173A
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-79 3.10 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT Seismic Category I instrumentation and electrical equipment for the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant was either furnished by Westinghouse or purchased by TVA. TVA's seismic qualification program for instrumentation and electrical equipment at Watts Bar is based on the requirements of IEEE 344-1971 and the NRC Standard Review Plan, Section 3.10 (specifically, acceptance criteria for plants with Construction Permit application docketed before October 27, 1972) as discussed in Section 3.7.3.16.
Instrumentation and electrical equipment was purchased in assemblies except for local panel instrumentation as described in Section 3.10.1. TVA provided the vendor with a required response spectrum as a part of the equipment specification in order that the vendor could qualify the equipment. The derivation of the response spectrum is described in Section 3.7.
3.10.1 Seismic Qualification Criteria TVA Supplied Class 1E Power Equipment Table 3.10-1 lists the procurement packages for Class 1E power equipment. TVA's seismic qualification criteria is based on IEEE 344-1971 or IEEE 344-1975 as discussed above.
The capability of ESF circuits and the Class 1E system to withstand seismic disturbances is established by seismic analysis and/or testing of each system component. The qualification criteria used in the design of Seismic Category I electrical equipment are given below.
(1)    Safety-related equipment designated as Seismic Category I, when subjected to the vertical and horizontal acceleration of the safe shutdown earthquake (SSE), shall perform as follows:
(a)  Equipment shall retain its structural integrity during and after the seismic event.
(b)  Equipment shall be capable of performing its design function during and after the seismic event.
(c)  Maximum displacement of the equipment during the earthquake shall not cause loss of function of any externally connected parts, such as conduit, cable, or bus connections.
Equipment anchorage/support design is discussed in Section 3.10.3.1. Other considerations for the seismic qualification of Category I electrical equipment are described in Section 3.7.3.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                            3.10-1


1-PREG-82-173B 1-FCV-82-190 1-FSV-82-190-A 1-FCV-82-191 1-FSV-82-191-A 1-PCV-82-192A
WATTS BAR                                                                              WBNP-90 Local Instrumentation TVA supplied instruments were classified as Seismic Category I in accordance with the system served and instrument function. Seismic Category I systems are qualified in accordance with IEEE-344-1971 or 1975, as applicable, and are listed in Table 3.10-1.
Type testing for seismic qualification has been performed on the Seismic Category I instruments. The active instruments are capable of performing their function during and following a SSE. They are qualified to the response acceleration which exceeds the response of the support structure. Tests and/or analyses were conducted on critical rack-instrumentation configurations to confirm the conservatism of the seismic test level for the instruments.
Westinghouse Supplied The reactor trip system, and engineered safety features actuation system are designed so that they are capable of providing the necessary protective actions during and after a SSE; therefore, the reactor protection system is capable of tripping the reactor during and after a SSE. The engineered safety features actuation system and the safety features systems are designed to initiate their protective functions during and after an SSE.
The following list identifies the instrumentation and electrical equipment requiring seismic qualification by the supplier of the Nuclear Steam Supply System (NSSS).
(1)  Foxboro Model E-11 pressure transmitter and Model E-13 differential pressure transmitter.
(2) Foxboro Process Control Equipment cabinets.
(3) Westinghouse Solid-State Protection System cabinets.
(4) Nuclear Instrumentation System cabinets.
(5) Safeguards Test Racks.
(6) Resistance Temperature Detectors.
(7) Power range Neutron Detectors.
(8) Reactor trip breakers.
(9) Barton Models 332 and 386 differential pressure transmitters.
(10) Eagle-21 Process Protection System Seismic qualification testing of Items 1 through 9 is documented in References [1]
through [10]. Reference [10] presents the theory and practice, as well as justification, for the use of single axis sine beat test inputs used in the seismic qualification of electrical equipment. In addition, it is noted that Westinghouse has conducted a seismic qualification "Demonstration Test Program" (reference Letter NS-CE-692, C.
Eicheldinger (W), to D. B. Vassallo (NRC), 7/10/75) to confirm equipment operability during a seismic event. This program is documented in References [12] through [15]
(Proprietary) and References [16] through [20] (Non-Proprietary). Seismic qualification testing of Item 10 to IEEE 344-1975 is documented in References [21],
[22], and [23].
3.10-2                    SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT


1-PREG-82-192B1.5000.370 1.500 0.370 2.000 0.250 2.000 0.250 1.500 0.370 1.500 0.370 2.000 0.250 2.000 0.250 1.500 0.370 1.500 0.370 2.000 0.250 Air Elec Air Elec Air Self Air Self Air Elec Air Elec Air Self Air Self Air Elec Air Elec Air Self Diaph Sol V Diaph Sol V Diaph Diaph Diaph Diaph Diaph Sol V Diaph Sol V Diaph Diaph Diaph Diaph Diaph Sol V Diaph Sol V Diaph DiaphFlow Cont 1A1 TK AAir ST SOL 1A1 (A)
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-92 The Watts Bar Nuclear Plant complies with paragraph IV, "Conclusions and Regulatory Positions" of the "Mechanical Engineering Branch Report on Seismic Audit of Westinghouse Electrical Equipment." All topical reports have been completed and are included in the reference list. The non-proprietary topical reports have been referenced as a group above. The structural capability of the NIS rack is discussed in References [14], [19], and [24].
Flow Cont 1A2 TK A Air ST SOL 1A2 (A)
The demonstration test program, in conjunction with the justification for the use of single axis sine beat tests, presented in WCAP-8373, and the original tests, documented in References [2] through [10], meet the requirements of IEEE Standard 344-1975 "IEEE Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations" for the seismic qualification of Westinghouse electrical equipment outside of containment. Environmental qualification for equipment inside of containment is described in Section 3.11.
The peak accelerations used in the type testing are conservative values that are checked against those derived by structural analyses of SSE loadings of the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant. For the SSE there may be permanent deformation of the equipment provided that the capability to perform its function is maintained.
Resistance temperature detectors used to sense the temperature in the main coolant loops are rigid, ruggedly built devices designed to withstand the high temperature, high pressure, and flow vibration induced acceleration forces which they are subjected to when installed in the coolant loops. The natural frequency of this device is designed to be higher than the frequencies associated with the seismic disturbance. Seismic qualification of these resistance temperature detectors is presented in Reference [9].
The nuclear instrumentation system power range neutron detector has been vibration tested in both the transverse (horizontal) direction and longitudinal (vertical) direction at acceleration levels greater than those expected during a seismic disturbance at the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant site. Detector current measurements were made during the tests and neutron sensitivity, resistance, and capacitance checks were made after the test. No significant changes were seen. There was no mechanical damage to the detector.
Typical switches and indicators which could defeat automatic operation of a required safety function have been tested to determine their ability to withstand seismic excitation without malfunction. The control boards are stiff and past experience indicates that the amplification due to the board structure is sufficiently low so that the acceleration seen by the device is considerably less than that used in testing.
All safety-related instruments of the reactor protection system and the engineered safety feature circuits are mounted on Seismic Category I supporting structures. They are designed to withstand horizontal and vertical accelerations at each floor level for the SSE. The instrument supporting structures located throughout the plant (local panels) have been standardized in design and have been seismically qualified by testing. The local panels were tested using response spectra for the highest elevation SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                            3.10-3


PR RED V 1A1 TK A PR REG V 1A1 TK A
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-92 on which any of these panels are mounted. The test criteria were in accordance with IEEE 344-1971 or IEEE 344-1975, as discussed above.
Where space requirements preclude the use of the standard local panels, a small wall-mounted panel is used. This panel is qualified, to the same criteria as the local panels, by analysis and/or test.
3.10.2 Methods And Procedures For Qualifying Electrical Equipment And Instrumentation For the original seismic qualification methods of selected Category I electrical equipment and instrumentation, see Tables 3.10-1 and 3.10-2.
Instrumentation The seismic type testing performed by the NSSS supplier (Westinghouse) is described in References [1] through [10], and [21]. For References [1] through [10], the test method used was the sine beat procedure described in IEEE 344-1971 and Reference
[11]. In addition, as noted in Section 3.10.1, Westinghouse conducted a "Demonstration Test Program" which, when considered in conjunction with the tests presented in References [11] through [13], results in meeting the requirements of IEEE 344-1975.
Supporting Structures (Panels, Racks, Cabinets, and Boards)
The qualification of the supporting structures for Seismic Category I instruments has been accomplished by either analysis or testing. The method commonly used is testing under simulated conditions. All tests by TVA before September 1, 1974 on these supporting structures were similar. The support structure was mounted on a vibration generator in a manner that simulated the intended service mounting. The vibratory forces were applied to each of the three major perpendicular axes independently. Maximum service dead loads were simulated. Selected points were monitored to establish amplification of loads. Testing was done at the structure's resonant frequencies. The resonant frequencies were determined by an exploratory test using a sinusoidal steady-state input of low amplitude, (two continuous sweeps from 1 to 33 Hz at a rate of 1 octave per minute). The qualification test was conducted using the sine beat method at the resonant frequencies using the appropriate acceleration input as determined from the building response acceleration spectra.
Also, reference Section 3.7.3.16 for additional details.
Later qualification tests typically used multi-frequency time history input motion for which the test response spectra enveloped the required response spectra in accordance with IEEE 344-1975 guidelines.
3.10.3 Methods of Qualifying TVA-Designed Supports for Electrical Equipment Instrumentation and Cables The methods and procedures of design and analysis or testing of electrical equipment and instrumentation supports, cable trays, cable tray supports, conduit, conduit supports, and conduit banks are provided in the following sections.
3.10-4                    SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT


PR RED V 1A2 TK A PR REG V 1A2 TK A FLOW CONT 1A1 TK B AIR ST SOL 1A1 (B)
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-86 3.10.3.1 Electrical Equipment and Instrumentation Assemblies TVA-designed supports and anchorage for Category I electrical equipment assemblies ensure compatibility with the equipment seismic qualifications test or analysis as described in Section 3.7.3.16.5. Design of these supports is in accordance with Section 3.8.4.5.2.
FLOW CONT 1A2 TK B AIR ST SOL 1A2 (B)
All floor/wall mounted Category I electrical equipment assemblies such as battery racks, instrument racks, and control consoles are attached by TVA to the building structure. The attachments are made by bolting or welding to structural members.
Anchorages to concrete are made by welding to embedded plates cast in the concrete with stud anchors, or by bolting to anchors set in the hardened concrete (self-drilling bolts, wedge bolts, undercut expansion anchors, or grouted anchors).
3.10.3.2 Cable Trays and Supports 3.10.3.2.1 Cable Trays Cable trays containing Class 1E cables located in Category I structures are considered safety-related and are designed to resist gravity and SSE forces.
Cable tray acceptance criteria are derived from testing. A factor of safety of 1.25 against the tested capacity, is maintained for the vertical moment. A ductility factor of 3 is used to establish tray capacity in the transverse direction. These limits are used in an interaction equation to evaluate tray sections for the SSE loading condition.
Seismic loadings are developed based on the applicable response spectra. In addition, all trays are evaluated to ensure a minimum factor of safety of 3 against test capacity for dead load only.
Figure 3.10-1 defines the orientation of the transverse and vertical moments.
Cable tray X and T fittings are evaluated for vertical loading to ensure a minimum factor of safety of 1.25 against the formation of a first hinge.
All other cable tray components are evaluated using AISI or AISC allowables (as applicable) with increase factors as allowed by Standard Review Plan Section 3.8.4.
Where test data is used to establish capacities of bolted parts, a factor of safety of 1.5 is maintained against the ultimate test load for the SSE loading condition.
3.10.3.2.2 Supports All cable tray supports located in Category I structures are designated Seismic Category I and designed to resist seismic forces applied to the weight of trays and cables. Each support in Category I structures is designed independently to support its appropriate length of tray. Seismic load inputs are based on the methods described in Section 3.7 and the damping requirements described in Table 3.7-2.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                            3.10-5


PR RED V 1A1 TK B PR REG V 1A1 TK B
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-89 Trays are designed to carry a load of 30 pounds per square foot (which is equivalent to 45 pounds per linear foot for an 18 inch wide tray) and an additional construction load of 30 pounds per linear foot on the top tray. Actual tray loading may be used on a case by case basis.
For load combinations and allowables applicable for cable tray supports, see Table 3.10-5.
Welding was in accordance with the American Welding Society (AWS), "Structural Welding Code," AWS D1.1 with revision 1-73 and 1-74, except later editions may be used for prequalified joint details, base materials, and qualification of welding procedures and welders. Nuclear Construction Issues Group documents NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 may be used after June 26, 1985, for weldments that were designed and fabricated to the requirements of AISC/AWS. Visual inspection of structural welds will meet the minimum requirements of NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 as specified on the design drawings or other design output. Inspectors performing visual examination to the criteria of NCIG-01 are trained in the subject criteria.
3.10.3.3 Conduit and Supports 3.10.3.3.1 Conduit Conduit containing Class 1E cables located in Category I structures are considered safety-related and designed to resist gravity and SSE forces applied to the conduit and cable. The seismic qualification utilizes the same analysis methods as Seismic Category I subsystems described in Section 3.7.3 and limits allowable stress to 90%
of the yield stress of the conduit material. The applicable damping requirements are defined in Table 3.7-2.
3.10.3.3.2 Supports All conduit supports in Category I structures are designed to resist gravity and SSE forces applied to the conduit and cables. Supports for conduit containing Class 1E cables are designated Category I and stresses are limited to 90% of the yield stress of the material involved. Seismic load inputs are based on methods described in Section 3.7 and damping requirements are defined in Table 3.7-2. Supports for conduit containing only non-Class 1E cables are designated Category I(L) and designed and constructed to preclude a failure which could reduce the ability of Category I structures, systems, and components to perform their intended safety function.
Welding was in accordance with the American Welding Society (AWS), "Structural Welding Code," AWS D1.1 with revision 1-73 and 1-74, except later editions may be used for prequalified joint details, base materials, and qualification of welding procedures and welders. Nuclear Construction Issues Group documents NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 may be used after June 26, 1985, for weldments that were designed and fabricated to the requirements of AISC/AWS. Visual inspection of structural welds will meet the minimum requirements of NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 as specified on the design drawings or other design output. Inspectors performing visual examination to the criteria of NCIG-01 are trained in the subject criteria.
3.10-6                      SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT


PR RED V 1A2 TK B PR REG V 1A2 TK B FLOW CONT 1B1 TK A AIR ST SOL 1B1(A)
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-89 3.10.3.4 Conduit Banks The Category I underground electrical conduit banks, which run from the Auxiliary Building to the Diesel Generator Building and to the Intake Pumping Station, were analyzed for seismic loads by the method outlined in Section 3.7.2.1.3. The conduit banks are designed in accordance with Section 3.8.4.2.
FLOW CONT 1B2 TK A AIR ST SOL 1B2 (A)
3.10.4 Operating License Review 3.10.4.1 TVA Supplied Instrumentation and Electrical Equipment The results of the seismic qualification program for the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant described in Section 3.10.1, 3.10.2, and 3.10.3 are summarized by the following listing for Class 1E equipment and by Tables 3.10-1, 3.10-3, and 3.10-4.
Equipment              TVA Contract No.
AC Auxiliary Power System    6.9kV Switchgear            74C2-84376 6.9kV Shutdown              75K2-85354 Logic Relay Panels 6.9kV/480V Transformer      74C2-84647 480V Switchgear            74C2-84647 480V Motor Control          74C5-84646 Centers 480V Distribution          75K3-86476 Panelboards for Pressurizer Heater Backup Groups Diesel Generator            74C63-83090 Transfer Switches          75K5-87048 125V DC Class 1E System      Transfer Switches          75K5-87048 Battery Chargers            74C8-85251 Vital Batteries            76K3-85763 Vital Battery              75C2-85281 Boards 120V AC Class 1E System      AC Vital Instrument        74C4-85216 Power Boards SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                          3.10-7


PR RED V 1B1 TK A PR REG V 1B1 TK ATable 3.9-25  Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 18 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-103WATTS BARWBNP-90Standby Diesel Generators (82)
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-79 Equipment            TVA Contract No.
(Continued)0-FCV-82-3100-FSV-82-310-S 0-FCV-82-311 0-FSV-82-311-S 0-PCV-82-312A 0-PCV-82-312B 0-PCV-82-313A 0-PCV-82-313B CKV-82-502A1 CKV-82-502A2 CKV-82-505A1 CKV-82-505A2 CKV-82-509A1 CKV-82-509A2 CKV-82-523A1 CKV-82-523A2 SPV-82-524A1 SPV-82-524A2 CKV-82-531A1 CKV-82-531A2 CKV-82-536B1 CKV-82-536B2 CKV-82-539B1CKV-82-539B2CKV-82-543B1 CKV-82-543B2 CKV-82-557B1 CKV-82-557B2 SPV-82-558B1 SPV-82-558B2 CKV-82-565B1 CKV-82-565B2 0-CKV-82-561 0-CKV-82-5621.5000.370 1.500 0.370 2.000 0.250 2.000 0.250 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.375 0.375 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.7500.7500.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.375 0.375 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 Air Elec Air Elec Air Self Air Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Diaph Sol V Diaph Sol V Diaph Diaph Diaph Diaph Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check CheckFLOW CONT 0C1 TK BAIR ST SOL 0C1 (B)
Vital Inverters            34327 Miscellaneous Class 1E        Electrical Penetrations    76K61-87064 Equipment BOP I&C Equipment          MultipleContract No.
FLOW CONT 0C2 TK B AIR ST SOL 0C2 (B)
Emergency DC Lighting      75C2-85737-1


PR RED V 0C1 TK B PR REG V 0C1 TK B
==REFERENCES:==


PR RED V 0C2 TK B PR REG V 0C2 TK B TK SUP A1 (A)
(1) Morrone, A., "Seismic Vibration Testing with Sine Beats," WCAP-7558, October, 1971.
TK SUP B1 (A)
(2) Vogeding, E. L., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment,"
TK SUP A1 (B)
WCAP-7397-L (Proprietary) and WCAP-7817 (NonProprietary), December, 1971.
TK SUP B1 (B)
(3) Vogeding, E. L., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment (WCID Process Control Equipment)," WCAP-7817, Supplement 1, December, 1971.
CROSS CONN CK A1 CROSS CONN CK B1 RELAY CK A1 (A)
(4)  Potochnik, L. M., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment (Low Seismic Plants)," WCAP-7817, Supplement 2, December, 1971.
RELAY CK B1 (A)
(5)  Vogeding, E. L., "Seismic Testing of Electric and Control Equipment (Westinghouse Solid State Protection System) (Low Seismic Plants),"
SLIDE VLV A1 SLIDE VLV B1 RELAY CK A1 (B)
WCAP-7817, Supplement 3, December, 1971.
RELAY CK B1 (B)
(6) Reid, J. B., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment (WCID NUCANA 7300 Series) (Low Seismic Plants)," WCAP-7817, Supplement 4, November, 1972.
TK SUP A2 (A)
(7)  Vogeding, E. L., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment (Instrument Bus Distribution Panel)," WCAP-7817, Supplement 5, March, 1974.
TK SUP B2 (A)
(8)  Faust III, C. E., Tang, D. T., and Yalich, M., "Equipment Qualification Test Report Reactor Trip Switchgear," WCAP 8687, Supplement 2-E20B, Revision 1, July, 1981.
TK SUP A2 (B)TK SUP B2 (B)CROSS CONN CK A2 CROSS CONN CK B2 RELAY CK A2 (A)
(9) Resistance Temperature Detectors - Equipment Qualification Data Packages: EQDP-ESE-6, Revision 7; EQDP-ESE-7, Revision 7; and, EQDP-ESE-66A, Revision 1 - WCAP-8587.
RELAY CK B2 (A)
3.10-8                    SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
SLIDE VLV A2 SLIDE VLV B2 RELAY CK A2 (B)
RELAY CK B2 (B)
TK SUP 0C1 (A)
TK SUP 0C2 (A)Table 3.9-25  Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 19 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description 3.9-104MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-90Standby Diesel Generators (82)
(Continued)0-CKV-82-5670-CKV-82-568 0-CKV-82-572 0-CKV-82-573 0-CKV-82-589 0-CKV-82-590 0-CKV-82-591 0-CKV-82-592 0-SPV-82-593 0-SPV-82-5940.7500.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.375 0.375 Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Self Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check TK SUP 0C1 (B)
TK SUP 0C2 (B)
CROSS CONN CK 0C2 CROSS CONN CK 0C1 RELAY CK 0C1 (A)
RELAY CK 0C2 (A)
RELAY CK 0C1 (B)
RELAY CK 0C2 (B)
SLIDE VLV 0C1 SLIDE VLV 0C2 Radiation Monitoring (90)1,2-FCV-90-1071,2-FCV-90-108 1,2-FCV-90-1091,2-FCV-90-1081,2-FCV-90-109 1,2-FCV-90-110 1,2-FCV-90-111 1,2-FCV-90-113 1,2-FCV-90-114 1,2-FCV-90-115 1,2-FCV-90-116 1,2-FCV-90-1171-1/21-1/2 1-1/21-1/21-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2MotorMotor MotorMotorMotor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor MotorGateGate GateGateGate Gate Gate Gate Gate Gate Gate GateContainment IsolationContainment Isolation Containment IsolationContainment IsolationContainment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment Isolation Containment IsolationTable 3.9-25  Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 20 of 20)System NameValve No.Size InchesActuationTypeFunction/Description MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-105WATTS BARWBNP-91Table 3.9-26  Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 1 of 6)SYSTEMCATEGORYCLASSVALVESMAIN STEAM47W801-1BBFCV-1-4, FCV-1-11, FCV-1-22, FCV-1-29,FCV-1-147, FCV-1-148, FCV-1-149, FCV-1-150BBPCV-1-5, PCV-1-12, PCV-1-23, PCV-1-30, 1-ISV-1-619, 1-ISV-1-620, 1-ISV-1-621, 1-ISV-1-622 CB1-512, 1-513, 1-514, 1-515, 1-516, 1-517, 1-518,1-519, 1-520, 1-521, 1,522, 1-523, 1-524, 1-525, 1-526, 1-527, 1-528, 1-529, 1-530, 1-531STEAM GENERATORBLOWDOWN SYSTEM 47W801-2BBFCV-1-7, FCV-1-14, FCV-1-25, FCV-1-32,FCV-1-181, FCV-1-182, FCV-1-183, FCV-1-184 CONDENSATE47W804-1CC2-667FEEDWATER47W803-1BBFCV-3-33, FCV-3-47, FCV-3-87, FCV-3-100FCV-3-185, FCV-3-186, FCV-3-187, FCV-3-188, FCV-3-236, FCV-3-239, FCV-3-242, FCV-3-245BCFCV-3-35, FCV-3-35A, FCV-3-48, FCV-3-48A, FCV-3-90, FCV-3-90A, FCV-3-103, FCV-3-103ACB3-508, 3-509, 3-510, 3-511, 3-638, 3-652, 3-669,3-678, 3-644, 3-645, 3-655, 3-656, 3-670, 3-679AUXILIARYFEEDWATER 47W803-2BBFCV-1-15, FCV-1-16, FCV-1-18BCLCV-3-148, LCV-3-148A, LCV-3-156, LCV-3-156A, LCV-3-164, LCV-3-164A, LCV-3-171, LCV-3-171A, LCV-3-172, LCV-3-173, LCV-3-174, FCV-3-175, FCV-1-17, FCV-3-116A, FCV-3-116B, FCV-3-126A, FCV-3-126B, FCV-3-136A, FCV-3-136B, FCV-3-179A, FCV-3-179B,FCV-1-51, PCV-3-122, PCV-3-132 CB3-830, 3-831, 3-832, 3-833, 3-861, 3-862, 3-864, 3-871, 3-872, 3-873, 3-874, 1-891, 1-892, 3-921, 3-922CC3-805, 3-806, 3-810, 3-814, 3-815, 3-818 CHEMICAL &
VOLUME CONTROL 47W809-1, -2, -5ABFCV-62-61, FCV-62-63, FCV-62-72, FCV-62-73FCV-62-74, FCV-62-77, FCV-62-76ACB62-639, 62-662, 62-523, 62-525, 62-530, 62-532 3.9-106MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-91BBLCV-62-132, LCV-62-133, LCV-62-135, LCV-62-136, FCV-62-138, FCV-62-144,FCV-62-1228, FCV 1229, FCV-62-90, FCV-62-91CB62-504, 62-505, 62-518, 62-636, 62-649, 62-675,62-688, 62-1220, 62-1221, 62-1222 B C C C C BFCV-62-138FCV-62-930, FCV-62-1052-A, FCV-62-1052-B FCV-62-955, FCV-62-1079RESIDUAL HEATREMOVAL 47W810-1AAFCV-74-1, FCV-74-2, FCV-74-8, FCV-74-9BBFCV-74-3, FCV-74-12, FCV-74-21,FCV-74-24,FCV-74-33, FCV-74-35CB74-505, 74-514, 74-515, 74-544, 74-545SAFETY INJECTION A AC A AC B A A BFCV-63-23, FCV-63-64, FCV-63-71, FCV-63-8463-543, 63-545, 63-547, 63-549, 63-551, 63-553,63-555, 63-557, 63-558, 63-559, 63-560, 63-561, 63-562, 63-563, 63-622, 63-623, 63-624, 63-625, 63-632, 63-633, 63-634, 63-635, 63-640, 63-641, 63-643, 63-64463-581, 63-586, 63-587, 63-588, 63-589 FCV-63-524, FCV-63-526, FCV-63-528, FCV 530Table 3.9-26  Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 2 of 6)SYSTEMCATEGORYCLASSVALVES MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-107WATTS BARWBNP-91 B C B BFCV-63-1, FCV-63-3, FCV-63-4, FCV-63-5, FCV-63-6, FCV-63-7, FCV-63-8, FCV-63-11, FCV-63-22, FCV-63-25, FCV-63-26, FCV-63-47, FCV-63-48, FCV-63-72, FCV-63-73, FCV-63-93, FCV-63-94, FCV-63-152, FCV-63-153, FCV-63-156, FCV-63-157, FCV-63-172, FCV-63-175, FCV 18563-502, 63-510, 63-511, 63-534, 63-535, 63-536, 63-577, 63-602, 63-603, 63-604, 63-605, 63-626, 63-627, 63-637, 63-725, 63-835, 63-868CONTAINMENT SPRAY 47W812-1ABFCV-72-2, FCV-72-39, FCV-72-40, FCV-72-41 BBFCV-72-13, FCV-72-21, FCV-72-22, FCV-72-34, FCV-72-44, FCV-72-45CB72-506, 72-507, 72-508, 72-509, 72-524, 72-525,72-548, 72-549, 72-562, 72-563 REACTOR COOLANT47W813-1ABFCV-68-305, FCV-68-307, FCV-63-308BAFCV-68-332, FCV-68-333, PCV-68-334, PCV-68-340ABBFSV-68-394, FSV-68-395, FSV-68-396, FSV-68-397CA68-563, 68-564, 68-565 CB68-559, 68-849ESSENTIAL RAWCOOLING WATER 47W845-1,2,3,4 ABFCV-67-83, FCV-67-87, FCV-67-88, 1-FCV-67-89,FCV-67-91, FCV-67-95, FCV-67-96, 1-FCV-67-97, FCV-67-99, FCV-67-103, FCV-67-104, 1-FCV-67-105, FCV-67-107, FCV 111, FCV-67-112, 1-FCV-67-113, FCV-67-130, FCV-67-131, FCV-67-133, FCV-67-134, FCV-67-138, FCV-67-139, FCV-67-141, FCV 142, FCV-67-295, FCV-67-296, FCV-67-297, FCV-67-298Table 3.9-26  Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 3 of 6)SYSTEMCATEGORYCLASSVALVES 3.9-108MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-91ACB2-67-562A, 2-67-562B, 2-67-562C, 2-67-562D, 67-575A, 67-575B, 67-575C, 67-575D, 67-580A, 67-580B, 67-580C, 67-580D, 67-585A, 67-585B, 67-585C, 67-585D, 1-67-1054A, 1-67-1054B, 1 1054C, 1-67-1054DBCFCV-67-65, FCV-67-68, FCV-67-123, FCV-67-124, FCV-67-125, FCV-67-126, FCV-67-143, FCV-67-144, FCV 152, FCV-67-162, FCV-67-164, FCV-67-176, FCV-67-182, FCV 184, FCV-67-186, FCV-67-205, FCV-67-208, FCV-67-213, FCV-67-215, FCV-67-342, FCV-67-344, FCV-67-346, FCV-67-348, FCV-67-350, FCV 352, FCV-67-354, FCV-67-356, 2-FCV-67-217, 2-FCV-67-219, 2-FCV-67-336, 2-FCV-67-338, FCV-67-9A, FCV 9B, FCV-67-10A, FCV-67-10B, FCV-67-22, FCV 81, FCV-67-82, FCV-67-147, 2-FCV-67-354, 2-FCV-67-356 CC67-503A, 67-503B, 67-503C, 67-503D, 67-503E, 67-503F, 67-503G, 67-503H, 67-508A, 67-508B, 67-513A, 67-513B, 67-502A thru H, 1-67-940A, 2 935BCOMPONENT COOLING WATER 47W859-1, -2, -3ABFCV-70-85, FCV-70-87, FCV-70-89, FCV-70-90, FCV-70-92, 1-FCV-70-100, FCV-70-134, FCV-70-140, FCV 143ACB70-679, 70-687, 70-698, 70-703, 1-70-790BCFCV-70-66, FCV-70-133, FCV-70-153, FCV-70-156, FCV-70-183, FCV-70-197, FCV-70-215CC70-504, 70-504A, 70-504B, 70-538, 70-753, 70-539, 70-681A, 70-681B, 70-681C, 70-681D, 70-682A, 70-682B, 70-682C, 70-682DPRIMARY WATER 47819-1ABFCV-81-1247W819-ACB81-502WASTE DISPOSAL47W830-1, -6ABFCV-77-9, FCV-77-10, FCV-77-16, FCV-70-17, FCV-77-18, FCV-77-19, FCV-77-20, FCV-77-127, FCV-77-128 AC  B 77-2875 Table 3.9-26  Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 4 of 6)SYSTEMCATEGORYCLASSVALVES MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-109WATTS BARWBNP-91 FIRE PROTECTION47W850-9ABFCV-26-240, FCV-26-243ACB26-1260, 26-1296 HEATING AND VENTILATION 47W866-1ABFCV-30-7, FCV-30-8, FCV-30-9, FCV-30-10, FCV-30-14, FCV-30-15, FCV-30-16, FCV-30-17, FCV-30-19, FCV-30-20, FCV-30-37, FCV-30-40, FCV-30-50, FCV-30-51, FCV-30-52, FCV-30-53, FCV-30-56, FCV-30-57, FCV-30-58, FCV-30-59, FCV-30-134, FCV-30-135 AIR CONDITIONING47W865-5, -3, -7, -8ABFCV-31-305, FCV-31-306, FCV-31-308, FCV-31-309, FCV-31-326, FCV-31-327, FCV-31-329, FCV 330 AIR CONDITIONING(continued) 47W865-5, -3, -7, -8ACB31-3378, 31-3392, 31-3407, 31-3421CNote 10-31-2193, 0-31-2235, 0-31-2210, 0-31-2252, 0-31-2307, 0-31-2364, 0-31-2326, 0-31-2383, 0-31-2607.
0-31-2649, 0-31-2623, 0-31-2665 CONTROL AIR47W848-1ABFCV-32-80, FCV-32-102, FCV-32-110, FCV-32-288,BYV-32-298, BYV-32-308ACB32-293, 32-303, 32-313SERVICE AIRAB33-713ACB33-714RADIATION SAMPLING 47W625-1, -2, -7,  
-11, -15 A B B BFCV-43-2, FCV-43-3, FCV-43-11, FCV-43-12, FCV-43-22, FCV-43-23, FCV-43-34, FCV-43-35, FCV 75, FCV-43-77, FCV-43-201, FCV-43-202, FCV 207, FCV-43-208, FSV-43-250, FSV-43-251, FSV-43-287, FSV 288, FSV-43-307, FSV-43-309, FSV-43-310, FSV 318, FSV-43-319, FSV-43-325, FSV-43-341, FSV-43-342FCV-43-54D, FCV-43-55, FCV-43-56D, FCV-43-58,FCV-43-59D, FCV-43-61, FCV-43-63D, FCV-43-64ACB43-834, 43-841, 43-883, 43-884 SYSTEM TESTFACILITY 47W331-3AB52-500, 52-501, 52-502, 52-503, 52-504, 52-505, 52-506, 52-507Table 3.9-26 Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 5 of 6)SYSTEMCATEGORYCLASSVALVES 3.9-110MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-91Note 1: Not Constructed to an ASME Code Class.DEMINERALIZEDWATER AND CASK DECONTAMINATION 47W856-1AB59-522, 59-698ICE CONDENSER47W814-2ABFCV-61-96, FCV-61-97, FCV-61-110, FCV-61-122, FCV-61-191, FCV-61-192, FCV-61-193, FCV 194ACB61-533, 61-680, 61-692, 61-745 CC61-658, 61-659, 61-660, 61-661, 61-662, 61-663, 61-664, 61-665, 61-666, 61-667, 61-668, 61-669, 61-670, 61-671, 61-672, 61-673, 61-674, 61-675, 61-676, 61-677BORATION MAKEUPAB84-530 RADIATION MONITORING 47W610-90-3ABFCV-90-107, FCV-90-108, FCV-90-109, FCV-90-110, FCV-90-111, FCV-90-113, FCV-90-114, FCV 115, FCV-90-116, FCV-90-117 FUEL POOL COOLING AND CLEANING 47W855-1AB78-557, 78-558, 78-560, 78-561Table 3.9-26  Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 6 of 6)SYSTEMCATEGORYCLASSVALVES MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-111WATTS BARWBNP-86Note:(1)  As defined in Regulatory Guide 1.48Table 3.9-27  Active Section III ASME-Coded Components (Except Valves) In TVA Scope Of Supply (1)System NameComponentANS Safety ClassNormal ModePost LOCA ModeReasonFeedwater (3)  Auxiliaryfeedwater pumps:            Motor driven1A-A 1B-B 2A-A 2B-B 2B 2B 2B 2B OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ONProvide heat removal for chapter 15 events.Steam driven1A-S2A-S 2B 2B OFF OFF ON ONProvide heat removal for chapter 15 events.Control Air (32)    Auxiliary air compressors A & B2BOFFONProvide control air for safety-related equipment.Essential Raw      Cooling Water (67)
ERCW pump A-A B-A C-A D-A E-B F-B G-B H-B 2B 2B 2B 2B 2B 2B 2B 2B ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ONProvide cooling water flow for component cooling system and other heat removal systems.Component Cooling (70)Component cooling pumps1A 1B 2A 2B C-S 2B 2B 2B 2B 2B ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ONProvide cooling water flow for refrigerated equipment served by


the CCS.
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-93 (10) Fischer, E. G. and Jerecki, S. J., "Qualification of Westinghouse Seismic Testing Procedure for Electrical Equipment Tested Prior to May 1974,"
3.9-112MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BARWBNP-79 Table 3.9-28  Active Pumps For Primary Fluid Systems In Westinghouse Scope Of Supply As Applied To Watts Bar Nuclear PlantSystem NameComponentANS Safety ClassNormal ModePST LOCA ModeReasonCVCS (62)Centrifugal Charging    Pumps 1A-A 2A-A 1B-B 2B-2B 2A 2A 2A 2A ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ONTo provide emergency core cooling, reactivity control and RCP seal injection flow.Safety Injection SystemsSIS Pump 1A-A 1B-B 2A-A 2B-B 2A 2A 2A 2A OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ONTo provide emergency core cooling and reactivity control.Containment Spray (72)Pump 1A-A 2A-A 1B-B 2B-B 2A 2A 2A 2A OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ONProvide cooling water flow to control containment temperature and pressure.Residual Heat Removal (74)Pump 1A-A 1B-B 2A-A 2B-B 2A 2A 2A 2A OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ONTo provide emergency core cooling and reactivity control and containment temperature and pressure control.
WCAP-8373, August, 1974.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-7WATTS BAR WBNP-55Figure 3.9-1  Vibration Check-Out Functional Test Inspection Data
(11) Wyle Laboratory T. R. 42377-1, "Seismic Simulation Test Program on Instrument Rack."
(12) Jareck, S. J., "General Method of Developing Multifrequency Biaxial Test Inputs for Bistables," WCAP-8624 (Proprietary) September, 1975.
(13) Jareck, S. J. and Vogeding, E. L., "Multifrequency and Direction Seismic Testing of Relays," WCAP-8673 (Proprietary) December, 1975.
(14) Jareck, S. J., Coslow, B. J., Croasdaile, T. R., and Lipchak, J. B., "Seismic Operability Demonstration Testing of the Nuclear Instrumentation System Bistable Amplifier," WCAP-8830 (Proprietary) October, 1976.
(15) Jareck, S. J. Coslow B. J., Ellis, A. E., and Miller, R. B., "Seismic Operability Demonstration Testing of the Foxboro H-Line Series Process Instrumentation System Bistables," WCAP-8848 (Proprietary) November, 1976.
(16) Miller, R. B., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment (low Seismic Plants)," WCAP-7817, Supplement 8 (Non-Proprietary) June, 1975.
(17) Jareck, S. J., "General Method of Developing Multifrequency Biaxial Test Inputs for Bistables," WCAP-8695 (Non-Proprietary) September 1975.
(18) Jareck, S. J. and Vogeding, E. L., "Multifrequency and Direction Seismic Testing of Relays," WCAP-8674 (Non-Proprietary) December 1975.
(19) Jareck, S. J., Coslow, B. J., Croasdaile, T. R., and Lipchak, J. B., "Seismic Operability Demonstration Testing of the Nuclear Instrumentation System Bistable Amplifier," WCAP-8831 (Non-Proprietary) October 1976.
(20) Jareck, S. J., Coslow, B. J., Ellis, A. E., and Miller R. B., "Seismic Operability Demonstration Testing of the Foxboro H-Line Series Process Instrumentation System Bistables," WCAP-8849 (Non-Proprietary)
November 1976.
(21) WCAP-8687, Supplement 2 - E69A, "Equipment Qualification Test Report, Eagle 21 Process Protection system" (Proprietary), May 1988.
(22) WCAP-8687, Supplement 2 - E69B, "Equipment Qualification Test Report, Eagle 21 Process Protection System Components" (Proprietary), February 1990.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                            3.10-9


3.9-8MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTSWATTS BAR WBNP-55 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-1WATTS BARWBNP-793.10  SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENTSeismic Category I instrumentation and electrical equipment for the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant was either furnished by Westinghouse or purchased by TVA. TVA's seismic qualification program for instrumentation and electrical equipment at Watts Bar is based on the requirements of IEEE 344-1971 and the NRC Standard Review Plan, Section 3.10 (specifically, acceptance criteria for plants with Construction Permit application docketed before October 27, 1972) as discussed in Section 3.7.3.16.Instrumentation and electrical equipment was purchased in assemblies except for local panel instrumentation as described in Section 3.10.1. TVA provided the vendor with a required response spectrum as a part of the equipment specification in order that the vendor could qualify the equipment. The derivation of the response spectrum is described in Section 3.7.3.10.1  Seismic Qualification CriteriaTVA SuppliedClass 1E Power EquipmentTable 3.10-1 lists the procurement packages for Class 1E power equipment. TVA's seismic qualification criteria is based on IEEE 344-1971 or IEEE 344-1975 as discussed above. The capability of ESF circuits and the Class 1E system to withstand seismic disturbances is established by seismic analysis and/or testing of each system component. The qualification criteria used in the design of Seismic Category I electrical equipment are given below.
WATTS BAR                                                                         WBNP-79 (23) WCAP-8687, Supplement 2 - E69C, "Equipment Qualification Test Report, Eagle 21 Process Protection System Components" (Proprietary), February 1991.
(1)Safety-related equipment designated as Seismic Category I, when subjected to the vertical and horizontal acceleration of the safe shutdown earthquake (SSE), shall perform as follows: (a)Equipment shall retain its structural integrity during and after the seismic event.(b)Equipment shall be capable of performing its design function during and after the seismic event.(c)Maximum displacement of the equipment during the earthquake shall not cause loss of function of any externally connected parts, such as conduit, cable, or bus connections.Equipment anchorage/support design is discussed in Section 3.10.3.1. Other considerations for the seismic qualification of Category I electrical equipment are described in Section 3.7.3.
(24) System Description, N3-92-4003, "Neutron Monitoring System".
3.10-10            SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT


3.10-2SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-90Local InstrumentationTVA supplied instruments were classified as Seismic Category I in accordance with the system served and instrument function. Seismic Category I systems are qualified in accordance with IEEE-344-1971 or 1975, as applicable, and are listed in Table 3.10-1.Type testing for seismic qualification has been performed on the Seismic Category I instruments. The active instruments are capable of performing their function during and following a SSE. They are qualified to the response acceleration which exceeds the response of the support structure. Tests and/or analyses were conducted on critical rack-instrumentation configurations to confirm the conservatism of the seismic test level for the instruments.Westinghouse SuppliedThe reactor trip system, and engineered safety features actuation system are designed so that they are capable of providing the necessary protective actions during and after a SSE; therefore, the reactor protection system is capable of tripping the reactor during and after a SSE. The engineered safety features actuation system and the safety features systems are designed to initiate their protective functions during and after an SSE.The following list identifies the instrumentation and electrical equipment requiring seismic qualification by the supplier of the Nuclear Steam Supply System (NSSS).
3.10-11 WATTS BAR Table 3.10-1 WBNP Instrumentation And Electrical Equipment Seismic Qualification Summary (Sheet 1 of 3)
(1)Foxboro Model E-11 pressure transmitter and Model E-13 differential pressure transmitter.
TVA                                                        QUALIFICA LOCATION    CONTRACT                              SEISMIC                TION EQUIPMENT            BLDG/EL*      NO.         VENDOR          QUALIFICATION CRITERIA        METHOD    TEST METHOD      TEST LAB CONTROL INSTRUMENT LOOPS      MULTIPLE    73C3-92784  BAILEY METER    IEEE 344-1971                  TEST        SINGLE AXIS    ACTION CO                                                                        ENVIRON-LOCATIONS                                                                                          MENTAL TESTING CORP.
(2)Foxboro Process Control Equipment cabinets.
INSTRUMENTATION              MULTIPLE    77K3-87352  ROBERTSHAW      IEEE 344-1974                  TEST        RANDOM        WYLE LAB SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS                                          CONTROLS                                                    FREQUENCY, LOCATIONS                CORP                                                        MULTIAXIS FABRICATION OF LOCAL PANELS  MULTIPLE    73C38-      H. K. PORTER    IEEE 344-1974                  TEST        MULTIFREQUE    WYLE LAB AND INSTALLATION OF                      92800                        (DRAFT REVISION TO IEEE                    NCY, BIAXIAL INSTRUMENTS                  LOCATIONS                                344-1971)
(3)Westinghouse Solid-State Protection System cabinets.
PRESSURE GAUGES, PRESSURE SEE NOTE 1 SWITCHES, & LEVEL SWITCHES STANDBY POWER SYSTEM          D-742      74C63-       MORRISON-83090        KNUDSON POWER SYSTEMS DIV.
(4)Nuclear Instrumentation System cabinets.
DIESEL GENERATOR                                                        IEEE 344-1971                  TEST        BIAXIAL        WYLE LAB PROTECTIVE RELAY PANELS                                                                                            MULTIFREQUE NCY DIESEL GENERATOR                                                        IEEE 344-1971                  TEST        BIAXIAL        WYLE LAB CONTROL PANELS                                                                                                    MULTIFREQUE NCY DC DISTRIBUTION PANELS                                                  IEEE 344-1971                  TEST        BIAXIAL        WYLE LAB MULTIFREQUE NCY 125V DIESEL BATTERIES                                                  IEEE 344-1971                  TEST        BIAXIAL        WYLE LAB AND BATTERY RACKS                                                                                                  MULTIFREQUE NCY BATTERY CHARGERS                                                        IEEE 344-1971                  TEST        BIAXIAL        WYLE LAB WBNP-35 MULTIFREQUE NCY
(5)Safeguards Test Racks.
(6)Resistance Temperature Detectors.
(7)Power range Neutron Detectors.
(8)Reactor trip breakers.
(9)Barton Models 332 and 386 differential pressure transmitters.
(10)Eagle-21 Process Protection SystemSeismic qualification testing of Items 1 through 9 is documented in References [1] through [10]. Reference [10] presents the theory and practice, as well as justification, for the use of single axis sine beat test inputs used in the seismic qualification of electrical equipment. In addition, it is noted that Westinghouse has conducted a seismic qualification "Demonstration Test Program" (reference Letter NS-CE-692, C. Eicheldinger (W), to D. B. Vassallo (NRC), 7/10/75) to confirm equipment operability during a seismic event. This program is documented in References [12] through [15] (Proprietary) and References [16] through [20] (Non-Proprietary). Seismic qualification testing of Item 10 to  IEEE 344-1975 is documented in References [21], [22], and [23].


SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-3WATTS BARWBNP-92The Watts Bar Nuclear Plant complies with paragraph IV, "Conclusions and Regulatory Positions" of the "Mechanical Engineering Branch Report on Seismic Audit of Westinghouse Electrical Equipment."  All topical reports have been completed and are included in the reference list. The non-proprietary topical reports have been referenced as a group above. The structural capability of the NIS rack is discussed in References [14], [19], and [24].The demonstration test program, in conjunction with the justification for the use of single axis sine beat tests, presented in WCAP-8373, and the original tests, documented in References [2] through [10], meet the requirements of IEEE Standard 344-1975 "IEEE Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations" for the seismic qualification of Westinghouse electrical equipment outside of containment. Environmental qualification for equipment inside of containment is described in Section 3.11.The peak accelerations used in the type testing are conservative values that are checked against those derived by structural analyses of SSE loadings of the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant. For the SSE there may be permanent deformation of the equipment provided that the capability to perform its function is maintained.Resistance temperature detectors used to sense the temperature in the main coolant loops are rigid, ruggedly built devices designed to withstand the high temperature, high pressure, and flow vibration induced acceleration forces which they are subjected to when installed in the coolant loops. The natural frequency of this device is designed to be higher than the frequencies associated with the seismic disturbance. Seismic qualification of these resistance temperature detectors is presented in Reference [9].The nuclear instrumentation system power range neutron detector has been vibration tested in both the transverse (horizontal) direction and longitudinal (vertical) direction at acceleration levels greater than those expected during a seismic disturbance at the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant site. Detector current measurements were made during the tests and neutron sensitivity, resistance, and capacitance checks were made after the test. No significant changes were seen. There was no mechanical damage to the detector.Typical switches and indicators which could defeat automatic operation of a required safety function have been tested to determine their ability to withstand seismic excitation without malfunction. The control boards are stiff and past experience indicates that the amplification due to the board structure is sufficiently low so that the acceleration seen by the device is considerably less than that used in testing.All safety-related instruments of the reactor protection system and the engineered safety feature circuits are mounted on Seismic Category I supporting structures. They are designed to withstand horizontal and vertical accelerations at each floor level for the SSE. The instrument supporting structures located throughout the plant (local panels) have been standardized in design and have been seismically qualified by testing. The local panels were tested using response spectra for the highest elevation 3.10-4SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-92on which any of these panels are mounted. The test criteria were in accordance with IEEE 344-1971 or IEEE 344-1975, as discussed above.Where space requirements preclude the use of the standard local panels, a small wall-mounted panel is used. This panel is qualified, to the same criteria as the local panels, by analysis and/or test.
Table 3.10-1 WBNP Instrumentation And Electrical Equipment SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BAR Seismic Qualification Summary (Sheet 2 of 3)
3.10.2  Methods And Procedures For Qu alifying Electrical Equipment And InstrumentationFor the original seismic qualification methods of selected Category I electrical equipment and instrumentation, see Tables 3.10-1 and 3.10-2.InstrumentationThe seismic type testing performed by the NSSS supplier (Westinghouse) is described in References [1] through [10], and [21]. For References [1] through [10], the test method used was the sine beat procedure described in IEEE 344-1971 and Reference
TVA                                                        QUALIFICA LOCATION  CONTRACT                              SEISMIC                TION EQUIPMENT          BLDG/EL*      NO.           VENDOR        QUALIFICATION CRITERIA        METHOD    TEST METHOD      TEST LAB STANDBY DIESEL GENERATORS                                            IEEE 344-1971                 ANALYSIS EMERGENCY DC                A-757      75C2-85737- GRAYBAR          IEEE 344-1971                  TEST        MULTIFREQUE    WYLE LAB LIGHTING                    1-772      1          ELECTRIC, INC.                                               NCY, BIAXIAL ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS      R-(ALL    76K6I-87064  CONAX CORP      IEEE 344-1971                 ANALYSIS LEVELS) 125V DC VITAL BATTERIES      A-757      76K3-85763    GOULD IND.     IEEE 344-1975; IEE P535,       TEST        RANDOM,         WYLE LAB DRAFT 2 DATED NOV. 15,                     BIAXIAL, 1974                                       MULTIFREQUE NCY TRANSFER SWITCHES            A-772      75K5-87048    B-K ELECT      IEEE 344-1971                  TEST        SINGLE AXIS,    AERO NAU LAB A-757                    PROD                                                      SINE BEAT 125V DC VITAL CHARGERS      A-772      74C8-85251    PWR. CONV.     IEEE 344-1971, DRAFT 5         TEST        MULTIFREQUE    WYLE LAB PROD.                                                     NCY, RANDOM, BIAXIAL 125V DC BATTERY BOARDS      A-757      75C2-85281    WESTINGHOUSE IEEE 344-1971, ENCLOSURE          TEST        SINE BEAT,     WESTINGHOUS NO. 5                                         BIAXIAL, FOUR  E POSITIONS 120V AC VITAL INVERTERS      A-772      34327        AMETEK SCI      IEEE 344-1971, DRAFT 5        TEST        MULTIFREQUE    WYLE LAB NCY, RANDOM, BIAXIAL 120 AC VITAL INSTR. BOARDS  A-757      74C4-85216    WESTINGHOUSE IEEE 344-1971, ENCLOSURE          TEST        SINE BEAT,     WESTINGHOUS NO. 5                                        BIAXIAL,       E FOUR POSITIONS WBNP-92 6.9KV SD BD LOGIC PANELS    A-757      75K2-85354    H. K. PORTER    IEEE 344, R3 (FEB. 15, 1974)  TEST        MULTIFREQUE    WYLE LAB 3.10-12 NCY, RANDOM, BIAXIAL
[11]. In addition, as noted in Section 3.10.1, Westinghouse conducted a "Demonstration Test Program" which, when considered in conjunction with the tests presented in References [11] through [13], results in meeting the requirements of IEEE 344-1975.Supporting Structures (Panels, Racks, Cabinets, and Boards)The qualification of the supporting structures for Seismic Category I instruments has been accomplished by either analysis or testing. The method commonly used is testing under simulated conditions. All tests by TVA before September 1, 1974 on these supporting structures were similar. The support structure was mounted on a vibration generator in a manner that simulated the intended service mounting. The vibratory forces were applied to each of the three major perpendicular axes independently. Maximum service dead loads were simulated. Selected points were monitored to establish amplification of loads. Testing was done at the structure's resonant frequencies. The resonant frequencies were determined by an exploratory test using a sinusoidal steady-state input of low amplitude, (two continuous sweeps from 1 to 33 Hz at a rate of 1 octave per minute). The qualification test was conducted using the sine beat method at the resonant frequencies using the appropriate acceleration input as determined from the building response acceleration spectra. Also, reference Section 3.7.3.16 for additional details.Later qualification tests typically used multi-frequency time history input motion for which the test response spectra enveloped the required response spectra in accordance with IEEE 344-1975 guidelines.
3.10.3  Methods of Qualif ying TVA-Designed Supports for Electrical Equipment Instrumentation and CablesThe methods and procedures of design and analysis or testing of electrical equipment and instrumentation supports, cable trays, cable tray supports, conduit, conduit supports, and conduit banks are provided in the following sections.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-5WATTS BARWBNP-863.10.3.1  Electrical Equipment and Instrumentation AssembliesTVA-designed supports and anchorage for Category I electrical equipment assemblies ensure compatibility with the equipment seismic qualifications test or analysis as described in Section 3.7.3.16.5. Design of these supports is in accordance with Section 3.8.4.5.2.All floor/wall mounted Category I electrical equipment assemblies such as battery racks, instrument racks, and control consoles are attached by TVA to the building structure. The attachments are made by bolting or welding to structural members. Anchorages to concrete are made by welding to embedded plates cast in the concrete with stud anchors, or by bolting to anchors set in the hardened concrete (self-drilling bolts, wedge bolts, undercut expansion anchors, or grouted anchors).
3.10.3.2  Cable Trays and Supports 3.10.3.2.1  Cable TraysCable trays containing Class 1E cables located in Category I structures are considered safety-related and are designed to resist gravity and SSE forces.Cable tray acceptance criteria are derived from testing. A factor of safety of 1.25 against the tested capacity, is maintained for the vertical moment. A ductility factor of 3 is used to establish tray capacity in the transverse direction. These limits are used in an interaction equation to evaluate tray sections for the SSE loading condition. Seismic loadings are developed based on the applicable response spectra. In addition, all trays are evaluated to ensure a minimum factor of safety of 3 against test capacity for dead load only.Figure 3.10-1 defines the orientation of the transverse and vertical moments.Cable tray X and T fittings are evaluated for vertical loading to ensure a minimum factor of safety of 1.25 against the formation of a first hinge.All other cable tray components are evaluated using AISI or AISC allowables (as applicable) with increase factors as allowed by Standard Review Plan Section 3.8.4. Where test data is used to establish capacities of bolted parts, a factor of safety of 1.5 is maintained against the ultimate test load for the SSE loading condition.
3.10.3.2.2  SupportsAll cable tray supports located in Category I structures are designated Seismic Category I and designed to resist seismic forces applied to the weight of trays and cables. Each support in Category I structures is designed independently to support its appropriate length of tray. Seismic load inputs are based on the methods described in Section 3.7 and the damping requirements described in Table 3.7-2.
3.10-6SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-89Trays are designed to carry a load of 30 pounds per square foot (which is equivalent to 45 pounds per linear foot for an 18 inch wide tray) and an ad ditional construction load of 30 pounds per linear foot on the top tray. Actual tray loading may be used on a case by case basis.For load combinations and allowables applicable for cable tray supports, see Table 3.10-5.Welding was in accordance with the American Welding Society (AWS), "Structural Welding Code," AWS D1.1 with revision 1-73 and 1-74, except later editions may be used for prequalified joint details, base materials, and qualification of welding procedures and welders. Nuclear Construction Issues Group documents NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 may be used after June 26, 1985, for weldments that were designed and fabricated to the requirements of AISC/AWS. Visual inspection of structural welds will meet the minimum requirements of NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 as specified on the design drawings or other design output. Inspectors performing visual examination to the criteria of NCIG-01 are trained in the subject criteria.
3.10.3.3  Conduit and Supports 3.10.3.3.1  ConduitConduit containing Class 1E cables located in Category I structures are considered safety-related and designed to resist gravity and SSE forces applied to the conduit and cable. The seismic qualification utilizes the same analysis methods as Seismic Category I subsystems described in Section 3.7.3 and limits allowable stress to 90% of the yield stress of the conduit material. The applicable damping requirements are defined in Table 3.7-2.
3.10.3.3.2  SupportsAll conduit supports in Category I structures are designed to resist gravity and SSE forces applied to the conduit and cables. Supports for conduit containing Class 1E cables are designated Category I and stresses are limited to 90% of the yield stress of the material involved. Seismic load inputs are based on methods described in Section 3.7 and damping requirements are defined in Table 3.7-2. Supports for conduit containing only non-Class 1E cables are designated Category I(L) and designed and constructed to preclude a failure which could reduce the ability of Category I structures, systems, and components to perform their intended safety function.Welding was in accordance with the American Welding Society (AWS), "Structural Welding Code," AWS D1.1 with revision 1-73 and 1-74, except later editions may be used for prequalified joint details, base materials, and qualification of welding procedures and welders. Nuclear Construction Issues Group documents NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 may be used after June 26, 1985, for weldments that were designed and fabricated to the requirements of AISC/AWS. Visual inspection of structural welds will meet the minimum requirements of NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 as specified on the design drawings or other design output. Inspectors performing visual examination to the criteria of NCIG-01 are trained in the subject criteria.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-7WATTS BARWBNP-89 3.10.3.4  Conduit BanksThe Category I underground electrical conduit banks, which run from the Auxiliary Building to the Diesel Generator Building and to the Intake Pumping Station, were analyzed for seismic loads by the method outlined in Section 3.7.2.1.3. The conduit banks are designed in accordance with Section 3.8.4.2.
3.10.4  Operating License Review3.10.4.1  TVA Supplied Instrument ation and Electrical EquipmentThe results of the seismic qualification program for the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant described in Section 3.10.1, 3.10.2, and 3.10.3 are summarized by the following listing for Class 1E equipment and by Tables 3.10-1, 3.10-3, and 3.10-4. EquipmentTVA Contract No.AC Auxiliary Power System6.9kV Switchgear74C2-843766.9kV Shutdown75K2-85354 Logic Relay Panels 6.9kV/480V Transformer74C2-84647 480V Switchgear74C2-84647 480V Motor Control74C5-84646 Centers480V Distribution75K3-86476Panelboards for Pressurizer Heater Backup Groups Diesel Generator74C63-83090 Transfer Switches75K5-87048125V DC Class 1E SystemTransfer Switches75K5-87048Battery Chargers74C8-85251 Vital Batteries76K3-85763 Vital Battery75C2-85281 Boards120V AC Class 1E SystemAC Vital Instrument74C4-85216Power Boards 3.10-8SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-79


==REFERENCES:==
Table 3.10-1 WBNP Instrumentation And Electrical Equipment SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BAR Seismic Qualification Summary (Sheet 3 of 3)
TVA                                                            QUALIFICA LOCATION      CONTRACT                                SEISMIC                  TION EQUIPMENT                BLDG/EL*          NO.            VENDOR        QUALIFICATION CRITERIA          METHOD        TEST METHOD    TEST LAB 6.9KV SD BDS                      A-757          74C2-84376    G. E.              IEEE 344, DRAFT REV. 5          TEST          MULTIFREQUE  WYLE LAB NCY, RANDOM, BIAXIAL 480V SD BDS, TRANSFORMERS        A-772          74C2-84647    WESTINGHOUSE IEEE 344, R3, AND                      TEST          MULTIFREQUE  WYLE LAB AND                              A-782                                    ENCLOSURE NO. 5                                      NCY, PRESS. HTR. TRANSFORMERS                                                                                                          RANDOM, BIAXIAL 480 DISTRIBUTION                  A-782          75K3-86476    EL TEX              IEEE 344, DRAFT R5              TEST          MULTIFREQUE  WYLE LAB PANELBOARDS FOR                                                                                                                  NCY, PRESSURIZER HEATER BACKUP                                                                                                        RANDOM, GROUP                                                                                                                            BIAXIAL 480V MOTOR CONTROL                A-772          74C5-84646    ITE                IEEE 344, DRAFT 3 (FEB. 15,    TEST          SINE BEAT    WYLE LAB CENTERS                          A-757                                            1974)
                                                                          *R-REACTOR BLDG.
A-AUXILIARY BLDG C-CONTROL BLDG.
D-DIESEL GEN. BLDG.
NOTE 1 - These instruments were purchased under various TVA contract and were tested to IEEE 344-1971 and 344-1974 criteria.
3.10-13                                                                                                                                                                                                                              WBNP-93


(1)Morrone, A., "Seismic Vibration Testing with Sine Beats," WCAP-7558, October, 1971.
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-91 Table 3.10-2 QUALIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT (Sheet 1 of 2)
(2)Vogeding, E. L., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment," WCAP-7397-L (Proprietary) and WCAP-7817 (NonProprietary), December, 1971.(3)Vogeding, E. L., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment (WCID Process Control Equipment)," WCAP-7817, Supplement 1, December, 1971.
Organization Performance Qualification            Standard to        Testing/Analysis and Equipment                       Method*                  Which Qualified*  Date of Completion Reactor Trip and Bypass        1 & 3 testing                                Westinghouse Breakers Solid State Protection System  1 & 2 testing                                Westinghouse Eagle-21 Process Protection    3 testing                                    Westinghouse System Nuclear Instrument System       1 & 2 testing                                Westinghouse Neutron Detectors              1 testing                                    Westinghouse Process Transmitters            1 & 2 testing                                Westinghouse Containment Pressure            3 testing Transmitters Solid State Protection system   1 & 2 testing                                Westinghouse Output Relays Engineered Safeguards Test     1 testing                                    Westinghouse Cabinets Control Room Panels              1 & 4 testing and                            Westinghouse analysis Safety System Status Monitoring System Post Accident Monitoring        1 & 2 testing                                Westinghouse System Post Accident Monitoring       2 & 5 testing                                Westinghouse Recorders 3.10-14                        SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
(4)Potochnik, L. M., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment (Low Seismic Plants)," WCAP-7817, Supplement 2, December, 1971.
(5)Vogeding, E. L., "Seismic Testing of Electric and Control Equipment (Westinghouse Solid State Protection System) (Low Seismic Plants)," WCAP-7817, Supplement 3, December, 1971.
(6)Reid, J. B., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment (WCID NUCANA 7300 Series) (Low Seismic Plants)," WCAP-7817, Supplement 4, November, 1972.
(7)Vogeding, E. L., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment (Instrument Bus Distribution Panel)," WCAP-7817, Supplement 5, March, 1974.(8)Faust III, C. E., Tang, D. T., and Yalich, M., "Equipment Qualification Test Report Reactor Trip Switchgear,"  WCAP 8687, Supplement 2-E20B, Revision 1, July, 1981.
(9)Resistance Temperature Detectors - Equipment Qualification Data Packages: EQDP-ESE-6, Revision 7; EQDP-ESE-7, Revision 7; and, EQDP-ESE-66A, Revision 1 - WCAP-8587.Vital Inverters34327Miscellaneous Class 1E EquipmentElectrical Penetrations76K61-87064BOP I&C EquipmentMultipleContract No.Emergency DC Lighting75C2-85737-1  EquipmentTVA Contract No.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-9WATTS BARWBNP-93 (10)Fischer, E. G. and Jerecki, S. J., "Qualification of Westinghouse Seismic Testing Procedure for Electrical Equipment Tested Prior to May 1974," WCAP-8373, August, 1974.
(11)Wyle Laboratory T. R. 42377-1, "Seismic Simulation Test Program on Instrument Rack." (12)Jareck, S. J., "General Method of Developing Multifrequency Biaxial Test Inputs for Bistables," WCAP-8624 (Proprietary) September, 1975.
(13)Jareck, S. J. and Vogeding, E. L., "Multifrequency and Direction Seismic Testing of Relays," WCAP-8673 (Proprietary) December, 1975.
(14)Jareck, S. J., Coslow, B. J., Croasdaile, T. R., and Lipchak, J. B., "Seismic Operability Demonstration Testing of the Nuclear Instrumentation System Bistable Amplifier," WCAP-8830 (Proprietary) October, 1976.
(15)Jareck, S. J. Coslow B. J., Ellis, A. E., and Miller, R. B., "Seismic Operability Demonstration Testing of the Foxboro H-Line Series Process Instrumentation System Bistables," WCAP-8848 (Proprietary) November, 1976.(16)Miller, R. B., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment (low Seismic Plants)," WCAP-7817, Supplement 8 (Non-Proprietary) June, 1975.
(17)Jareck, S. J., "General Method of Developing Multifrequency Biaxial Test Inputs for Bistables," WCAP-8695 (Non-Proprietary) September 1975.
(18)Jareck, S. J. and Vogeding, E. L., "Multifrequency and Direction Seismic Testing of Relays," WCAP-8674 (Non-Proprietary) December 1975.
(19)Jareck, S. J., Coslow, B. J., Croasdaile, T. R., and Lipchak, J. B., "Seismic Operability Demonstration Testing of the Nuclear Instrumentation System Bistable Amplifier," WCAP-8831 (Non-Proprietary) October 1976.
(20)Jareck, S. J., Coslow, B. J., Ellis, A. E., and Miller R. B., "Seismic Operability Demonstration Testing of the Foxboro H-Line Series Process Instrumentation System Bistables," WCAP-8849 (Non-Proprietary) November 1976.
(21)WCAP-8687, Supplement 2 - E69A, "Equipment Qualification Test Report, Eagle 21 Process Protection system" (Proprietary), May 1988.
(22) WCAP-8687, Supplement 2 - E69B, "Equ ipment Qualific ation Test Report, Eagle 21 Process Protection System Components" (Proprietary), February 1990.
3.10-10SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-79 (23)WCAP-8687, Supplement 2 - E69C, "Equipment Qualification Test Report, Eagle 21 Process Protection System Components" (Proprietary), February 1991.(24)System Description, N3-92-4003, "Neutron Monitoring System".
3.10-11SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-35Table 3.10-1  WBNP Instrumentation And Electrical EquipmentSeismic Qualification Summary (Sheet 1 of 3)EQUIPMENTLOCATIONBLDG/EL*TVACONTRACT NO.VENDORSEISMICQUALIFICATION CRITERIAQUALIFICATIONMETHODTEST METHODTEST LABCONTROL INSTRUMENT LOOPSMULTIPLE


LOCATIONS73C3-92784BAILEY METER COIEEE 344-1971TESTSINGLE AXISACTION ENVIRON-MENTAL TESTING CORP.INSTRUMENTATIONAND CONTROLSMULTIPLE LOCATIONS77K3-87352ROBERTSHAWCONTROLS CORPIEEE 344-1974TESTRANDOM FREQUENCY, MULTIAXISWYLE LABFABRICATION OF LOCAL PANELSAND INSTALLATION OF INSTRUMENTSMULTIPLE LOCATIONS 73C38-92800H. K. PORTERIEEE 344-1974(DRAFT REVISION TO IEEE 344-1971)TESTMULTIFREQUENCY, BIAXIALWYLE LABPRESSURE GAUGES, PRESSURE SWITCHES, & LEVEL SWITCHESSEE NOTE 1STANDBY POWER SYSTEMD-74274C63-83090MORRISON-KNUDSON POWER SYSTEMS DIV.DIESEL GENERATORPROTECTIVE RELAY PANELSIEEE 344-1971TESTBIAXIALMULTIFREQUE NCYWYLE LABDIESEL GENERATORCONTROL PANELSIEEE 344-1971TESTBIAXIAL MULTIFREQUE NCYWYLE LABDC DISTRIBUTION PANELSIEEE 344-1971TESTBIAXIAL MULTIFREQUE NCYWYLE LAB125V DIESEL BATTERIES AND BATTERY RACKSIEEE 344-1971TESTBIAXIAL MULTIFREQUE NCYWYLE LABBATTERY CHARGERSIEEE 344-1971TESTBIAXIAL MULTIFREQUE NCYWYLE LAB SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-12WATTS BARWBNP-92STANDBY DIESEL GENERATORSIEEE 344-1971ANALYSISEMERGENCY DC LIGHTING A-757 1-77275C2-85737-1GRAYBARELECTRIC, INC.IEEE 344-1971TESTMULTIFREQUENCY, BIAXIALWYLE LABELECTRICAL PENETRATIONSR-(ALL LEVELS)76K6I-87064CONAX CORPIEEE 344-1971ANALYSIS125V DC VITAL BATTERIESA-75776K3-85763GOULD IND.IEEE 344-1975; IEE P535, DRAFT 2 DATED NOV. 15, 1974TESTRANDOM, BIAXIAL, MULTIFREQUE NCYWYLE LABTRANSFER SWITCHESA-772A-75775K5-87048B-K ELECT PRODIEEE 344-1971TESTSINGLE AXIS,SINE BEATAERO NAU LAB125V DC VITAL CHARGERSA-77274C8-85251PWR. CONV. PROD.IEEE 344-1971, DRAFT 5TESTMULTIFREQUENCY, RANDOM, BIAXIALWYLE LAB125V DC BATTERY BOARDSA-75775C2-85281WESTINGHOUSEIEEE 344-1971, ENCLOSURE NO. 5TESTSINE BEAT, BIAXIAL, FOUR POSITIONSWESTINGHOUS E120V AC VITAL INVERTERSA-77234327AMETEK SCIIEEE 344-1971, DRAFT 5TESTMULTIFREQUENCY,
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-79 Table 3.10-2 QUALIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT (Continued)
: RANDOM, BIAXIALWYLE LAB120 AC VITAL INSTR. BOARDSA-75774C4-85216WESTINGHOUSEIEEE 344-1971, ENCLOSURE NO. 5TESTSINE BEAT, BIAXIAL, FOUR POSITIONSWESTINGHOUS E6.9KV SD BD LOGIC PANELSA-75775K2-85354H. K. PORTERIEEE 344, R3 (FEB. 15, 1974)TESTMULTIFREQUENCY, RANDOM, BIAXIALWYLE LABTable 3.10-1  WBNP Instrumentation And Electrical EquipmentSeismic Qualification Summary (Sheet 2 of 3)EQUIPMENTLOCATIONBLDG/EL*TVACONTRACT NO.VENDORSEISMICQUALIFICATION CRITERIAQUALIFICATIONMETHODTEST METHODTEST LAB SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-13WATTS BARWBNP-936.9KV SD BDSA-75774C2-84376G. E.IEEE 344, DRAFT REV. 5TESTMULTIFREQUENCY,
(Sheet 2 of 2)
: RANDOM, BIAXIALWYLE LAB480V SD BDS, TRANSFORMERS AND PRESS. HTR. TRANSFORMERSA-772A-78274C2-84647WESTINGHOUSEIEEE 344, R3, AND ENCLOSURE NO. 5TESTMULTIFREQUENCY,
QUALIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT (Continued)
: RANDOM, BIAXIALWYLE LAB480 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS FOR PRESSURIZER HEATER BACKUP GROUPA-78275K3-86476EL TEXIEEE 344, DRAFT R5TESTMULTIFREQUENCY,
        *Qualification                                      Description of Method                                              Method 1               Sine beat; single axis (Ref. WCAP-7558, WCAP-7817 and its supplements, and WCAP-8373, as per IEEE-344-1971).
: RANDOM, BIAXIALWYLE LAB480V MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS A-772A-75774C5-84646ITEIEEE 344, DRAFT 3 (FEB. 15, 1974)TESTSINE BEATWYLE LAB*R-REACTOR BLDG. A-AUXILIARY BLDG C-CONTROL BLDG.
2                Demonstration Test Program biaxial test inputs with multifrequency forcing functions, as per requirements of IEEE-344-1975.
D-DIESEL GEN. BLDG.NOTE 1 - These instruments were purchased under various TVA contract and were tested to IEEE 344-1971 and 344-1974 criteria.Table 3.10-1  WBNP Instrumentation And Electrical EquipmentSeismic Qualification Summary (Sheet 3 of 3)EQUIPMENTLOCATIONBLDG/EL*TVACONTRACT NO.VENDORSEISMICQUALIFICATION CRITERIAQUALIFICATIONMETHODTEST METHODTEST LAB 3.10-14SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-91Table 3.10-2  QUALIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT (Sheet 1 of 2)
3               IEEE-344-1975 4                Analysis 5                Test documented in WCAP-8687, Supplement 2-E15A (Proprietary) and WCAP-8587, Supplement 2-E15A (Non-Proprietary)
EquipmentQualificationMethod*Standard to Which Qualified*Organization Performance Testing/Analysis and Date of CompletionReactor Trip and Bypass Breakers1 & 3 testingWestinghouse Solid State Protection System1 & 2 testingWestinghouseEagle-21 Process  Protection System3 testingWestinghouseNuclear Instrument System1 & 2 testingWestinghouseNeutron Detectors 1 testing Westinghouse Process Transmitters1 & 2 testingWestinghouse
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                             3.10-15


Containment Pressure Transmitters 3 testing Solid State Protection system Output Relays1 & 2 testingWestinghouseEngineered Safeguards Test Cabinets1 testingWestinghouseControl Room Panels 1 & 4 testing and analysis Westinghouse Safety System Status Monitoring SystemPost Accident Monitoring System1 & 2 testingWestinghousePost Accident Monitoring Recorders2 & 5 testingWestinghouse SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-15WATTS BARWBNP-79(Sheet 2 of 2)QUALIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT (Continued)
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBPN-90 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Sheet 1 of 26)
*QualificationMethodDescription ofMethod1Sine beat; single axis (Ref. WCAP-7558, WCAP-7817 and its supplements, and WCAP-8373, as per IEEE-344-1971).2Demonstration Test Program biaxial test inputs with multifrequency forcing functions, as per requirements of IEEE-344-1975.3IEEE-344-1975 4Analysis 5Test documented in WCAP-8687, Supplement 2-E15A (Proprietary) and WCAP-8587, Supplement 2-E15A (Non-Proprietary)Table 3.10-2  QUALIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT  (Continued) 3.10-16SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBPN-90Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Sheet 1 of 26)
Equipment:             Metalclad Switchgear Equipment Rating:       6.9 kV, 60 Hz, 3-phase Mounting:               The switchgear was bolted to test table to simulate in-service configuration.
Equipment:Metalclad SwitchgearEquipment Rating:6.9 kV, 60 Hz, 3-phaseMounting:The switchgear was bolted to test table to simulate in-service configuration.Seismic Test:The control circuits of the switchgear were energized with 125 VDC and subjected to the following tests:1.Exploratory tests (Resonant Search)--Consisting of a low level single axis sweep from 1 Hz to 35 Hz at a rate of two octaves per minute and at a level of 0.2 g per peak. Resonant search test was performed in the front-to-front and side-to-side orientation.2.Proof Test-Consisting of biaxial multifrequency random tests in front-to-back and side-to-side orientations. More than 5 OBE'S and one SSE were performed in each orientation.Monitoring:A multichannel recorder was used to monitor electrical continuity contact chatter and change of state before, during, and after tests.Results:The specimen's structural integrity was not compromised and circuit continuity was maintained.
Seismic Test:           The control circuits of the switchgear were energized with 125 VDC and subjected to the following tests:
: 1. Exploratory tests (Resonant Search)--Consisting of a low level single axis sweep from 1 Hz to 35 Hz at a rate of two octaves per minute and at a level of 0.2 g per peak. Resonant search test was performed in the front-to-front and side-to-side orientation.
: 2. Proof Test-Consisting of biaxial multifrequency random tests in front-to-back and side-to-side orientations. More than 5 OBE'S and one SSE were performed in each orientation.
Monitoring:             A multichannel recorder was used to monitor electrical continuity contact chatter and change of state before, during, and after tests.
Results:               The specimen's structural integrity was not compromised and circuit continuity was maintained.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Wyle Laboratories Report No. 42868-1.
Wyle Laboratories Report No. 42868-1.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-17WATTS BARWBNP-35 Equipment:6900V Shutdown Board Logic Panels.Electrical Rating:Not applicable.Mounting:The specimen was mounted with its base flush to the test table and welded to the table top, simulating the in-service configuration.Seismic Test:The specimen control circuits were energized (125V DC) and the specimen was subjected to the following tests:1.Exploratory Test (Resonant Search) - Consists of low-level (0.2g horizontal and 0.1g vertical) multiaxis sine sweep from 1 Hz to 35 Hz to 1 Hz in front-to-back and side-to-side orientations to determine major equipment resonance points.2.Proof Test (Multifrequency)-- consisting of simultaneous horizontal and vertical incoherent inputs of random motion at frequencies spaced 1/3 octave apart from 1-4 OHz in front-to-back and side-to-side orientations. Aging was obtained with a minimum of five half-level SSE tests in each orientation prior to pe rforming th e full-level SSE test.Monitoring:A multichannel recorder was used to monitor electrical continuity, contact chatter, and change of state before, during, and after the seismic
3.10-16                SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT


test.Results:The specimen's structural integrity was not compromised. A"b" contact of the normally de-energized DC auxiliary relay controlled by the AC undervoltage relay experienced contact chatter.
WATTS BAR                                                                                          WBNP-35 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 2 of 26)
Equipment:                    6900V Shutdown Board Logic Panels.
Electrical Rating:            Not applicable.
Mounting:                      The specimen was mounted with its base flush to the test table and welded to the table top, simulating the in-service configuration.
Seismic Test:                  The specimen control circuits were energized (125V DC) and the specimen was subjected to the following tests:
: 1. Exploratory Test (Resonant Search) - Consists of low-level (0.2g horizontal and 0.1g vertical) multiaxis sine sweep from 1 Hz to 35 Hz to 1 Hz in front-to-back and side-to-side orientations to determine major equipment resonance points.
: 2. Proof Test (Multifrequency)-- consisting of simultaneous horizontal and vertical incoherent inputs of random motion at frequencies spaced 1/3 octave apart from 1-4 OHz in front-to-back and side-to-side orientations. Aging was obtained with a minimum of five half-level SSE tests in each orientation prior to performing the full-level SSE test.
Monitoring:                    A multichannel recorder was used to monitor electrical continuity, contact chatter, and change of state before, during, and after the seismic test.
Results:                       The specimen's structural integrity was not compromised. A"b" contact of the normally de-energized DC auxiliary relay controlled by the AC undervoltage relay experienced contact chatter.
Based upon further analysis of the "b" contact, it was determined that the contact chatter was of such an extremely short-term duration that it will not in any way affect system operation.
Based upon further analysis of the "b" contact, it was determined that the contact chatter was of such an extremely short-term duration that it will not in any way affect system operation.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Wyle Test Report No. 43137-1.Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 2 of 26) 3.10-18SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-86 Equipment:Power TransformersElectrical Ratings:6900 to 480-V AC, 60-Hz, 3 phase in ratings of 500*, 1000* and 2000 KVA (
Wyle Test Report No. 43137-1.
* qualified by analysis). Mounting:The 2000 KVA transformer was bolted to the test table to simulate actual in-service mounting.Seismic Tests:The transformer was energized to 480V AC on the secondary and subjected to the following tests:1Resonance Search--A low level (0.2g) biaxial, sinusoidal sweep from 0.5 Hz to 40 Hz to 0.5 Hz was performed to determine resonance.2.Proof Testing--The transformer was subjected to a 30 second biaxial random motion input wave with sine beats added to ensure enveloping of the required response spectra by the test response spectra. Five OBE's followed by one SSE were performed in each of four orientations (45, 135, 225, and 315 to the axis of the test table). After proof tests another resonance search was performed in the last orientation.3.Analysis--The 500 and 1000 KVA transformer were compared to the 2000 KVA transformer actually tested. It was shown that the two smaller transformers have lower weights, smaller dimensions and less coolant than, but are of the same skin thickness as the 2000 KVA transformer and therefore, have lower stresses for the same seismic excitation.Monitoring:Data was recorded on three ink-type oscillographs.Input acceleration was anlayzed on a spectral dynamics shock spectrum analyzerResults:No structural damage occurred and the 2000 KVA trans-former remained fully operational during and after testing. The 500 and 1000 KVA transformers were analytically found to be capable of successfully withstanding a seismic excitation equial to that of the 2000 KVA transformer.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                                  3.10-17
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                        WBNP-86 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 3 of 26)
Equipment:                   Power Transformers Electrical Ratings:           6900 to 480-V AC, 60-Hz, 3 phase in ratings of 500*, 1000* and 2000 KVA (
* qualified by analysis).
Mounting:                     The 2000 KVA transformer was bolted to the test table to simulate actual in-service mounting.
Seismic Tests:               The transformer was energized to 480V AC on the secondary and subjected to the following tests:
1 Resonance Search--A low level (0.2g) biaxial, sinusoidal sweep from 0.5 Hz to 40 Hz to 0.5 Hz was performed to determine resonance.
: 2. Proof Testing--The transformer was subjected to a 30 second biaxial random motion input wave with sine beats added to ensure enveloping of the required response spectra by the test response spectra. Five OBE's followed by one SSE were performed in each of four orientations (45E, 135E, 225E, and 315E to the axis of the test table). After proof tests another resonance search was performed in the last orientation.
: 3. Analysis--The 500 and 1000 KVA transformer were compared to the 2000 KVA transformer actually tested. It was shown that the two smaller transformers have lower weights, smaller dimensions and less coolant than, but are of the same skin thickness as the 2000 KVA transformer and therefore, have lower stresses for the same seismic excitation.
Monitoring:                   Data was recorded on three ink-type oscillographs.
Input acceleration was anlayzed on a spectral dynamics shock spectrum analyzer Results:                     No structural damage occurred and the 2000 KVA trans-former remained fully operational during and after testing. The 500 and 1000 KVA transformers were analytically found to be capable of successfully withstanding a seismic excitation equial to that of the 2000 KVA transformer.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Seismic Test Report No. XAL 71789, SD 3036, Westing-house Seismic Design Analysis Report No. SBR-75-7.Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 3 of 26)
Seismic Test Report No. XAL 71789, SD 3036, Westing-house Seismic Design Analysis Report No. SBR-75-7.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-19WATTS BARWBNP-86 Equipment:480V metal enclosed switchgear, Westinghouse type DS.Electrical Rating:480V AC, 60 Hz, 3 phase.Mounting:The test specimen, consisting of two typical units, was bolted to the test table to simulate actual mounting.Seismic Tests:The test specimen was energized to 480V AC and 125V AC (control circuits) and subjected to the following tests:1.Resonance Search--A low level (0.2g) biaxial sinusoidal sweep from 1.0 Hz to 40 Hz to 1.0 Hz was performed on the specimen in the 225 (to the test table axis) orientation.2.Proof Test--The specimen was subjected to an input wave made up of decaying sinusoids from 1.25 Hz to 35 Hz with two sine beats added to achieve enveloping of the required response spectra by the test response spectra. A minimum of five OBE's followed by a minimum of four SSE's were performed in the 225 and 315 orientations. In the 45 and 135 orientations only SSE's were performed. A second sine sweep for resonance was performed after proof testing.Monitoring:Contact monitoring was performed by an event recorder and seismic monitoring by four ink-type oscillographs. Additionally, 20 accelerometers, 5 strain bolts and a strain gage were also used for monitoring.Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 4 of 26) 3.10-20SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-91Results:The specimen maintained its structural integrity and there were no failures that would jeopardize proper functioning of the equipment.
3.10-18                      SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                        WBNP-86 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 4 of 26)
Equipment:                     480V metal enclosed switchgear, Westinghouse type DS.
Electrical Rating:             480V AC, 60 Hz, 3 phase.
Mounting:                     The test specimen, consisting of two typical units, was bolted to the test table to simulate actual mounting.
Seismic Tests:                 The test specimen was energized to 480V AC and 125V AC (control circuits) and subjected to the following tests:
: 1. Resonance Search--A low level (0.2g) biaxial sinusoidal sweep from 1.0 Hz to 40 Hz to 1.0 Hz was performed on the specimen in the 225E (to the test table axis) orientation.
: 2. Proof Test--The specimen was subjected to an input wave made up of decaying sinusoids from 1.25 Hz to 35 Hz with two sine beats added to achieve enveloping of the required response spectra by the test response spectra. A minimum of five OBE's followed by a minimum of four SSE's were performed in the 225E and 315E orientations. In the 45E and 135E orientations only SSE's were performed. A second sine sweep for resonance was performed after proof testing.
Monitoring:                   Contact monitoring was performed by an event recorder and seismic monitoring by four ink-type oscillographs. Additionally, 20 accelerometers, 5 strain bolts and a strain gage were also used for monitoring.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                                3.10-19
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-91 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 5 of 26)
Results:               The specimen maintained its structural integrity and there were no failures that would jeopardize proper functioning of the equipment.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Westinghouse Seismic Qualification Report, type DS low voltage metal enclosed switchgear, with attached Westinghouse Astronuclear Laboratory Report (XAL 71706, SD 3027). (WCAP-10448)Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 5 of 26)
Westinghouse Seismic Qualification Report, type DS low voltage metal enclosed switchgear, with attached Westinghouse Astronuclear Laboratory Report (XAL 71706, SD 3027). (WCAP-10448) 3.10-20                SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-21WATTS BARWBNP-92 Equipment:480V Motor Control Centers--I-T-E Imperial Corporation, subsidiary of Gould, Inc., Type 5600.Electrical Rating:480V AC, 60 Hz, 3-phase, 22KA short circuit bracing.Mounting:The specimen which consisted of 3 panels was welded to the test table simulating the in-service condition.Seismic Test:Control circuits (120V AC) of the specimen were energized and the specimen was subjected to the following tests:1.Exploratory Tests (Resonant Search)--Consisting of low level (approximately 0.2 g horizontal and 0.1 g vertical) biaxial sine sweep from 1 Hz to 35 Hz in front-to-back/vertical axes test and side-to-side/vertical axes test to determine major equipment resonances.
 
Resonant frequencies at 8,75 Hz and 35 Hz were found for the front-to-back/vertical axes test and resonant frequencies of 10 Hz and 35 Hz were found for the side-to-side/vertical axes test.2.Proof Test (Biaxial Sine Beat)--Consisting of biaxial sine beats at equipment resonances listed above. Aging was accomplished during the 8.75 and 10 Hz tests with 4 one-half level phase coherent half level tests and 4 half level incoherent tests. Full level (1.37 g input) tests were performed at each resonance for energized, deenergized, in phase, and out-of-phase conditions.3.Main circuits (480V AC) were deenergized during tests.Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 6 of 26) 3.10-22SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-86Monitoring:A 14-channel recorder was used to monitor electrical continuity, current/voltage levels, spurious operation, and contact chatter before, during, and after the seismic tests.Results:It was demonstrated that the specimen possessed sufficient integrity to withstand, without compromise of structure, the prescribed seismic environment. Some contact chatter was encountered during the testing; however, full-level tests were performed without chatter after corrective action was taken by the I-T-E Technical Representative.
WATTS BAR                                                                                          WBNP-92 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 6 of 26)
Equipment:                     480V Motor Control Centers--I-T-E Imperial Corporation, subsidiary of Gould, Inc., Type 5600.
Electrical Rating:             480V AC, 60 Hz, 3-phase, 22KA short circuit bracing.
Mounting:                     The specimen which consisted of 3 panels was welded to the test table simulating the in-service condition.
Seismic Test:                 Control circuits (120V AC) of the specimen were energized and the specimen was subjected to the following tests:
: 1. Exploratory Tests (Resonant Search)--Consisting of low level (approximately 0.2 g horizontal and 0.1 g vertical) biaxial sine sweep from 1 Hz to 35 Hz in front-to-back/vertical axes test and side-to-side/vertical axes test to determine major equipment resonances.
Resonant frequencies at 8,75 Hz and 35 Hz were found for the front-to-back/vertical axes test and resonant frequencies of 10 Hz and 35 Hz were found for the side-to-side/vertical axes test.
: 2. Proof Test (Biaxial Sine Beat)--Consisting of biaxial sine beats at equipment resonances listed above. Aging was accomplished during the 8.75 and 10 Hz tests with 4 one-half level phase coherent half level tests and 4 half level incoherent tests. Full level (1.37 g input) tests were performed at each resonance for energized, deenergized, in phase, and out-of-phase conditions.
: 3. Main circuits (480V AC) were deenergized during tests.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                                3.10-21
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-86 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 7 of 26)
Monitoring:             A 14-channel recorder was used to monitor electrical continuity, current/voltage levels, spurious operation, and contact chatter before, during, and after the seismic tests.
Results:                 It was demonstrated that the specimen possessed sufficient integrity to withstand, without compromise of structure, the prescribed seismic environment. Some contact chatter was encountered during the testing; however, full-level tests were performed without chatter after corrective action was taken by the I-T-E Technical Representative.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
I-T-E Imperial (Subsidiary of Gould, Inc.), Seismic Certification SC077 and Wyle Test Report TR-42926-1.Table 3.10-3  Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications  (Continued) (Sheet 7 of 26)
I-T-E Imperial (Subsidiary of Gould, Inc.), Seismic Certification SC077 and Wyle Test Report TR-42926-1.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-23WATTS BARWBNP-86 Equipment:480V Power Distribution CabinetElectrical Rating:480V AC, 60 Hz, 3-phaseMounting:Specimen was wall-mounted with commercially available bolts, nuts, and washers to a wall-mounting fixture which was welded to the test table. Mounting simulated the in-service configuration.Seismic Test:The specimen was subjected to the following tests:1.Exploratory Test (Resonant Search)--Consisting of a low level (0.2 g horizontal and vertical) biaxial sine sweep from 1-33 Hz in both front-to back and side-to-side orientation to obtain major resonance points of the equipment.2.Proof Test (Multifrequency)--Consists of simultaneous horizontal and vertical incoherent inputs of random motion at frequencies spaced 1/3 octave apart from 1-31.6 Hz in front-to-back and side-to-side orientations. Aging was accomplished with a minimum of 5 half-level SSE tests followed by one full level SSE test performed in both orientations.Monitoring:A multichannel recorder was used to monitor electrical continuity, contact chatter, and change of state before, during, and after the seismic
3.10-22                SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT


test.Results:The specimen's structural integrity and circuit continuity was not compromised.
WATTS BAR                                                                                          WBNP-86 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 8 of 26)
Equipment:                    480V Power Distribution Cabinet Electrical Rating:            480V AC, 60 Hz, 3-phase Mounting:                      Specimen was wall-mounted with commercially available bolts, nuts, and washers to a wall-mounting fixture which was welded to the test table. Mounting simulated the in-service configuration.
Seismic Test:                  The specimen was subjected to the following tests:
: 1. Exploratory Test (Resonant Search)--Consisting of a low level (0.2 g horizontal and vertical) biaxial sine sweep from 1-33 Hz in both front-to back and side-to-side orientation to obtain major resonance points of the equipment.
: 2. Proof Test (Multifrequency)--Consists of simultaneous horizontal and vertical incoherent inputs of random motion at frequencies spaced 1/3 octave apart from 1-31.6 Hz in front-to-back and side-to-side orientations. Aging was accomplished with a minimum of 5 half-level SSE tests followed by one full level SSE test performed in both orientations.
Monitoring:                    A multichannel recorder was used to monitor electrical continuity, contact chatter, and change of state before, during, and after the seismic test.
Results:                       The specimen's structural integrity and circuit continuity was not compromised.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Wyle Test Report No. 43039-1.Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 8 of 26) 3.10-24SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-86 Equipment:The components of the Emergency Diesel Generator.Seismic Test:An analysis was performed on the components listed on page 12 of this table for the seismic conditions and criteria as specified in TVA Specification WB-DC-40-31.2.1.The natural frequencies of the engine and the generator system were determined by analysis.2.Selected critical components 1-9 were analyzed for 3 g horizontal and 2 g vertical accelerations (above seismic criteria), whereas, components 10-21 were analyzed for 1.62 g horizontal accelerations and 1.08 vertical accelerations (as specified by seismic criteria).Results:The system was found to be rigid with natural frequencies above the seismic range. All the components analyzed had conservative margins of safety in all cases under the maximum combined loadings.
Wyle Test Report No. 43039-1.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                                3.10-23
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-86 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 9 of 26)
Equipment:                 The components of the Emergency Diesel Generator.
Seismic Test:             An analysis was performed on the components listed on page 12 of this table for the seismic conditions and criteria as specified in TVA Specification WB-DC-40-31.2.
: 1. The natural frequencies of the engine and the generator system were determined by analysis.
: 2. Selected critical components 1-9 were analyzed for 3 g horizontal and 2 g vertical accelerations (above seismic criteria), whereas, components 10-21 were analyzed for 1.62 g horizontal accelerations and 1.08 vertical accelerations (as specified by seismic criteria).
Results:                   The system was found to be rigid with natural frequencies above the seismic range. All the components analyzed had conservative margins of safety in all cases under the maximum combined loadings.


==References:==
==References:==
Corporate Consulting and Development Co., Ltd. CCL Report No. A-27-74, CCL Project No. 74-1110, DDL Report No. A-5-73A, CCL Project No. 73-1024.Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 9 of 26)
Corporate Consulting and Development Co., Ltd. CCL Report No. A                             74, CCL Project No. 74-1110, DDL Report No. A-5-73A, CCL Project No.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-25WATTS BARWBNP-86Diesel Generator Components1.Air intake filter at Mounting Bracket2.Accessory Rack at Base3.Engine Tube Oil filter at Accessory Rack.4.Water Expansion Tank at Accessory Tack 5.Governor (Hydraulic Actuating).6.Primary Oil Pump at Engine.7.Scavenging Oil Filter at Engine 8.Scavenging Oil Pump at Engine 9.Engine Lube Oil Cooler10.Engine at Base11.Generator at Base 12.Engine at Foundation13.Generator at Foundation14.Heat Exchanger 15.Air Turning Box16.Air Intake Filter at Foundation17.Air Tank Saddle at Bolts 18.Air Tank at U-Bolts19.Critical Weld in Air Tank Saddle Mount20.Maximum Pull Out of Concrete Insert.
73-1024.
21..Maximum Shear in Concrete InsertTable 3.10-3  Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications  (Continued) (Sheet 10 of 26) 3.10-26SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-88 Equipment:Diesel Generator Control Panel, D. C. Distribution Panel, and Battery Charger.Mounting:As per test specifications, the equipment was mounted on the Wyle Multi-Axis Simulator.Seismic Test:1.A resonant search test was conducted consisting of two low level (approximately 0.2g horizontally and 0.1g vertically) multi-axis sine sweeps in each test one octave per minute.2.Two sine beat tests in-phase and two sine beat tests out-of-phase were performed at each resonant frequency. The sine beat consisted of 15 oscillations per beat. A train of five beats with a two-second interval between beats was used at each test frequency.Monitoring:Three to four electrical monitoring channels were recorded on an oscillograph recorder to ascertain el ectrical continuity, current/voltage levels, spurious operations, contact chatter, before, during, and after the seismic excitation.Results:The equipment listed above withstood the prescribed simulated seismic environment without any loss of electrical functions and structural
3.10-24                  SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
 
WATTS BAR                                                                  WBNP-86 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 10 of 26)
Diesel Generator Components
: 1.     Air intake filter at Mounting Bracket
: 2.     Accessory Rack at Base
: 3.     Engine Tube Oil filter at Accessory Rack.
: 4.     Water Expansion Tank at Accessory Tack
: 5.     Governor (Hydraulic Actuating).
: 6.     Primary Oil Pump at Engine.
: 7.     Scavenging Oil Filter at Engine
: 8.     Scavenging Oil Pump at Engine
: 9.     Engine Lube Oil Cooler
: 10. Engine at Base
: 11. Generator at Base
: 12. Engine at Foundation
: 13. Generator at Foundation
: 14. Heat Exchanger
: 15. Air Turning Box
: 16. Air Intake Filter at Foundation
: 17. Air Tank Saddle at Bolts
: 18. Air Tank at U-Bolts
: 19. Critical Weld in Air Tank Saddle Mount
: 20. Maximum Pull Out of Concrete Insert.
: 21.     .Maximum Shear in Concrete Insert SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT         3.10-25


failures.
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-88 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 11 of 26)
Equipment:                Diesel Generator Control Panel, D. C. Distribution Panel, and Battery Charger.
Mounting:                  As per test specifications, the equipment was mounted on the Wyle Multi-Axis Simulator.
Seismic Test:              1. A resonant search test was conducted consisting of two low level (approximately 0.2g horizontally and 0.1g vertically) multi-axis sine sweeps in each test one octave per minute.
: 2. Two sine beat tests in-phase and two sine beat tests out-of-phase were performed at each resonant frequency. The sine beat consisted of 15 oscillations per beat. A train of five beats with a two-second interval between beats was used at each test frequency.
Monitoring:                Three to four electrical monitoring channels were recorded on an oscillograph recorder to ascertain electrical continuity, current/voltage levels, spurious operations, contact chatter, before, during, and after the seismic excitation.
Results:                  The equipment listed above withstood the prescribed simulated seismic environment without any loss of electrical functions and structural failures.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Wyle Report No. 42879-1.Wyle Job No. 42879.Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 11 of 26)
Wyle Report No. 42879-1.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-27WATTS BARWBNP-91 Equipment:The main components of the Emergency Diesel Generator analyzed are as follows:1.Stator Frame2.Rotor Shaft3.Pole Doetail 4.Pole Heads5.Bearings6.End Bells 7.Mounting Feet8.Hold Down BoltsSeismic Test:An analysis was performed on the components listed above for seismic criteria as specified by TVA Specification WB-DC-40-31-2.1.The components listed above were analyzed for a seismic loading of 2.7 g horizontal acceleration and 1.8 g vertical acceleration acting concurrently.2.The mechanical response of the rotor and stator in terms of deflections and stresses was evaluated from static considerations and vertical seismic loads, acting concurrently.Results:All the stresses calculated were within the respective material working levels as called out in the material specs.
Wyle Job No. 42879.
3.10-26                  SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                          WBNP-91 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 12 of 26)
Equipment:                     The main components of the Emergency Diesel Generator analyzed are as follows:
: 1. Stator Frame
: 2. Rotor Shaft
: 3. Pole Doetail
: 4. Pole Heads
: 5. Bearings
: 6. End Bells
: 7. Mounting Feet
: 8. Hold Down Bolts Seismic Test:                 An analysis was performed on the components listed above for seismic criteria as specified by TVA Specification WB-DC-40-31-2.
: 1. The components listed above were analyzed for a seismic loading of 2.7 g horizontal acceleration and 1.8 g vertical acceleration acting concurrently.
: 2. The mechanical response of the rotor and stator in terms of deflections and stresses was evaluated from static considerations and vertical seismic loads, acting concurrently.
Results:                       All the stresses calculated were within the respective material working levels as called out in the material specs.


==References:==
==References:==
Elective Products Division, Portec, Inc., Cleveland, Ohio. Analysis (B07 891005 019)Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 12 of 26) 3.10-28SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-92 Equipment:Emergency Diesel Generator Atlas Jacket Water Cooler.Seismic Test:An analysis was performed on the Atlas Water Jacket Cooler for seismic conditions as specified in TVA Specification WB-DC-40-31-2.1.The analysis evaluated the base natural frequency of the structure to determine the appropriate acceleration from the response spectra.2.For emergency, upset, and normal conditions, the analysis considered the adequacy of the anchor bolts, supports, shell at the supports, and tubes, due to a combination of seismic loads, nozzle loads, deadweight, and pressure.3.When emergency condition stresses were less than normal condition allowables, separate upset and normal load case calculations were omitted.Results:All the calculated stresses at the various points on the cooler were well below the allowable stresses under all possible conditions.
Elective Products Division, Portec, Inc., Cleveland, Ohio. Analysis (B07 891005 019)
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                                3.10-27
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-92 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 13 of 26)
Equipment:                 Emergency Diesel Generator Atlas Jacket Water Cooler.
Seismic Test:             An analysis was performed on the Atlas Water Jacket Cooler for seismic conditions as specified in TVA Specification WB-DC-40-31-2.
: 1. The analysis evaluated the base natural frequency of the structure to determine the appropriate acceleration from the response spectra.
: 2. For emergency, upset, and normal conditions, the analysis considered the adequacy of the anchor bolts, supports, shell at the supports, and tubes, due to a combination of seismic loads, nozzle loads, deadweight, and pressure.
: 3. When emergency condition stresses were less than normal condition allowables, separate upset and normal load case calculations were omitted.
Results:                   All the calculated stresses at the various points on the cooler were well below the allowable stresses under all possible conditions.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Dynatech Project No. AIM-20.Dynatech Report No. 1237.Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 13 of 26)
Dynatech Project No. AIM-20.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-29WATTS BARWBNP-86 Equipment:Diesel Generator Relay Boards.Electrical Rating:125V DC, and 120V AC, 60 Hz, 1 phase.Mounting:The test specimen was welded to a steel plate which in turn was welded to the seismic test machine.Seismic Testing:1.Resonance Search--A resonance search was conducted using an input level of 0.2 g in the frequency range of 1 to 33 Hz with a frequency sweep rate of 1 octave per minute. The resonance search was conducted with the horizontal and vertical axis simultaneously, first in phase and then with the horizontal 180 from the original phase. The resonance search was then repeated in the second horizontal and vertical axis. The two horizontal axis were identified as longitudinal and lateral. Two control and six response accelerometers were utilized during the resonance search. The output of each accelerometer was recorded on a direct readout recorder.2.Sine Beat Test--A sine beat test composed of ten oscillations per beat was performed at each resonance frequency determined from the resonance search. Each sine beat was applied five times at each frequency, first with one horizontal and the vertical inputs in phase and then with the horizontal input 180 from the original phase. A two-second interval between each sine beat was used.
Dynatech Report No. 1237.
The maximum peak acceleration for the horizontal axes was 1.08 g and for the vertical axes was 0.72 g. In addition to the resonance frequencies, the sine beat test was performed at each one-half octave over the frequency range of 1 to 33 HzMonitoring:A 125V dc voltage source was used to energize relay circuits during testing. A source of 120V ac was applied to monitor an ac voltmeter on the front panel of the specimen. Two chatter/transfer detectors were utilized to monitor a total of 14 channels of relay contacts during testing. The chatter/transfer detectors were set for a time duration of 1.0 millisecond or greater. During testing all monitored circuits were tested in the transfer, or open, mode. In the event of a momentary closure of a duration of 1.0 millisecond or greater, a red indicator light for that particular circuit would illuminate and remain illumina ted until a reset button was pushed to reset the circuit.Results:Visual examination of the test specimen after each test revealed no structural damage due to the seismic tests. Of the 14 channels monitored during testing, only one circuit (Westinghouse type CM relay) indicated chatter. TVA circuits show that this relay will only be used during testing phases of the diesel generator system; therefore, it cannot prevent operation of the diesel generators during or after a seismic event because of contact chatter.
3.10-28                  SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                          WBNP-86 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 14 of 26)
Equipment:                     Diesel Generator Relay Boards.
Electrical Rating:             125V DC, and 120V AC, 60 Hz, 1 phase.
Mounting:                     The test specimen was welded to a steel plate which in turn was welded to the seismic test machine.
Seismic Testing:               1. Resonance Search--A resonance search was conducted using an input level of 0.2 g in the frequency range of 1 to 33 Hz with a frequency sweep rate of 1 octave per minute. The resonance search was conducted with the horizontal and vertical axis simultaneously, first in phase and then with the horizontal 180E from the original phase. The resonance search was then repeated in the second horizontal and vertical axis. The two horizontal axis were identified as longitudinal and lateral. Two control and six response accelerometers were utilized during the resonance search. The output of each accelerometer was recorded on a direct readout recorder.
: 2. Sine Beat Test--A sine beat test composed of ten oscillations per beat was performed at each resonance frequency determined from the resonance search. Each sine beat was applied five times at each frequency, first with one horizontal and the vertical inputs in phase and then with the horizontal input 180E from the original phase. A two-second interval between each sine beat was used.
The maximum peak acceleration for the horizontal axes was 1.08 g and for the vertical axes was 0.72 g. In addition to the resonance frequencies, the sine beat test was performed at each one-half octave over the frequency range of 1 to 33 Hz Monitoring:                   A 125V dc voltage source was used to energize relay circuits during testing. A source of 120V ac was applied to monitor an ac voltmeter on the front panel of the specimen. Two chatter/transfer detectors were utilized to monitor a total of 14 channels of relay contacts during testing.
The chatter/transfer detectors were set for a time duration of 1.0 millisecond or greater. During testing all monitored circuits were tested in the transfer, or open, mode. In the event of a momentary closure of a duration of 1.0 millisecond or greater, a red indicator light for that particular circuit would illuminate and remain illuminated until a reset button was pushed to reset the circuit.
Results:                       Visual examination of the test specimen after each test revealed no structural damage due to the seismic tests. Of the 14 channels monitored during testing, only one circuit (Westinghouse type CM relay) indicated chatter. TVA circuits show that this relay will only be used during testing phases of the diesel generator system; therefore, it cannot prevent operation of the diesel generators during or after a seismic event because of contact chatter.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Wyle Laboratories Report No. 54064.Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 14 of 26) 3.10-30SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-79 Equipment:Emergency Generator Starting and Control System including:Test Series 11 Battery (six cells), C & D 3DCU-9 with Rack PSD-0070121 Battery Charger, C & D ARR130HK-501 Fuel Oil Pump, Viking GG195D 1 Soakback Oil Pump, EMD 82745071 Contactor/Relay System consisting of:1 Square D Temperature Switch, Class 9025, Type BGW3971 Fenwall Temperature Switch, No. 20800 1 Barksdale Pressure Switch, E1HM90V1 Overspeed Trip Limit Switch, EMD 8246095 1 Crankcase Pressure Switch, EMD 83703622 Square D Relays, Class 8501, Type KPTest Series 21 Engine Control Panel, PSD-A990F02501 1 Anode Transformer, GE-278G121AATest Series 31 Switchgear Exciter Assembly, PSD-A990F11000Mounting:As per test specifications, the equipment was mounted on the Wyle Multi-Axis Simulator.Seismic Test:1.A resonant search consisting of a low level single axis sine sweep from 1 Hz to 33 Hz was performed to establish natural frequencies. The input acceleration level for all pieces of equipment was 0.2 g in the vertical direction and 0.4 g in the horizontal direction (when specified as needed).Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 15 of 26)
Wyle Laboratories Report No. 54064.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-31WATTS BARWBNP-352.Sine beat tests were performed at the natural frequencies detected in the resonant search test. The sine beat tests were performed as a train of beats with the number of beats per train depending upon the resonant frequency of each piece of equipment. The vertical and horizontal accelerations in the sine beat test were varied according to the piece of equipment being tested.Monitoring:All specimens shall be operating during full level testing, and specified functions will be monitored and recorded.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                                  3.10-29
Electrical powering of 480V AC, 3 phase will be furnished for operation of the switchgear, battery charger, soakback pump and the anode transformer. For operation of the Fuel Oil Pump, 125 VDC will be furnished.
 
The battery discharge rate (10 amps), the charger output rate, the anode transformer secondary voltage and the discharge pressure of both pumps will be recorded on an oscillograph recorder. continuity circuits on the Switchgear Assembly, the Engine Control Panel and the contactor/Relay System will be monitored for a change of state and a monitor trace recorded on an oscillograph recorder.Results: The equipment demonstrated the ability to withstand the prescribed seismic environment without any loss of electrical function or significant operational change. No structural degradation was noted during the tests.
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-79 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 15 of 26)
Equipment:                 Emergency Generator Starting and Control System including:
Test Series 1 1 Battery (six cells), C & D 3DCU-9 with Rack PSD-007012 1 Battery Charger, C & D ARR130HK-50 1 Fuel Oil Pump, Viking GG195D 1 Soakback Oil Pump, EMD 8274507 1 Contactor/Relay System consisting of:
1 Square D Temperature Switch, Class 9025, Type BGW397 1 Fenwall Temperature Switch, No. 20800 1 Barksdale Pressure Switch, E1HM90V 1 Overspeed Trip Limit Switch, EMD 8246095 1 Crankcase Pressure Switch, EMD 8370362 2 Square D Relays, Class 8501, Type KP Test Series 2 1 Engine Control Panel, PSD-A990F02501 1 Anode Transformer, GE-278G121AA Test Series 3 1 Switchgear Exciter Assembly, PSD-A990F11000 Mounting:                 As per test specifications, the equipment was mounted on the Wyle Multi-Axis Simulator.
Seismic Test:             1. A resonant search consisting of a low level single axis sine sweep from 1 Hz to 33 Hz was performed to establish natural frequencies.
The input acceleration level for all pieces of equipment was 0.2 g in the vertical direction and 0.4 g in the horizontal direction (when specified as needed).
3.10-30                  SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                        WBNP-35 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 16 of 26)
: 2. Sine beat tests were performed at the natural frequencies detected in the resonant search test. The sine beat tests were performed as a train of beats with the number of beats per train depending upon the resonant frequency of each piece of equipment. The vertical and horizontal accelerations in the sine beat test were varied according to the piece of equipment being tested.
Monitoring:                   All specimens shall be operating during full level testing, and specified functions will be monitored and recorded. Electrical powering of 480V AC, 3 phase will be furnished for operation of the switchgear, battery charger, soakback pump and the anode transformer. For operation of the Fuel Oil Pump, 125 VDC will be furnished.
The battery discharge rate (10 amps), the charger output rate, the anode transformer secondary voltage and the discharge pressure of both pumps will be recorded on an oscillograph recorder. continuity circuits on the Switchgear Assembly, the Engine Control Panel and the contactor/Relay System will be monitored for a change of state and a monitor trace recorded on an oscillograph recorder.
Results:                       The equipment demonstrated the ability to withstand the prescribed seismic environment without any loss of electrical function or significant operational change. No structural degradation was noted during the tests.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Wyle Report No. 42749-1.Wyle Job No. 42749.Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 16 of 26) 3.10-32SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-86 Equipment:Transfer Switch Circuit Breaker Assemblies and Safety Switch.Electrical Ratings:1.480V AC, 400A, manual circuit breaker assembly, NEMA 1 enclosure.2.480V AC, 600A, manual circuit breaker assembly, NEMA 1 enclosure.3.600V AC, 60A, 3 pole, non-fusible safety switch NEMA 1 enclosure.Mounting:The switches were mounted to the test fixture to simulate actual mounting, The 400A circuit breaker assembly and the safety switch were tested on the same fixture. The 600A circuit breaker assembly was tested separately.Seismic Tests:The switches were energized to 480V and subjected to the following tests:1.Resonance Search--The switches were subjected to a continuous sinusoidal search from 1 to 35 Hz in each of three mutually perpendicular axes. The frequency was adjusted in discrete 1 Hz steps with vibration maintained for at least 20 seconds in each step.
Wyle Report No. 42749-1.
Peak acceleration varied from 0.1 g to 0.31 g above 5 Hz and 0.01 g to 0.26 g from 1 Hz to 5 Hz.Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 17 of 26)
Wyle Job No. 42749.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-33WATTS BARWBNP-792.Proof Testing--The switches were subjected to a 30 second 0.5 SSE of 0.76 g followed by a 30 second SSE of 1.51 g's at each half octave over the range from 1 Hz to 35 Hz where no resonant frequencies were present. Where resonance was present, a 0.5 SSE (0.76 g) followed by a SSE (1.51 g's) were perf ormed at those resonant frequencies. Testing was conducted in the front-to-back, side-to-side and vertical axes.Monitoring:The switches were monitored for proper operation during the testing.Results:No external physical damage or malfunction was noted as a result of these tests.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                                3.10-31
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-86 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 17 of 26)
Equipment:                   Transfer Switch Circuit Breaker Assemblies and Safety Switch.
Electrical Ratings:           1. 480V AC, 400A, manual circuit breaker assembly, NEMA 1 enclosure.
: 2. 480V AC, 600A, manual circuit breaker assembly, NEMA 1 enclosure.
: 3. 600V AC, 60A, 3 pole, non-fusible safety switch NEMA 1 enclosure.
Mounting:                     The switches were mounted to the test fixture to simulate actual mounting, The 400A circuit breaker assembly and the safety switch were tested on the same fixture. The 600A circuit breaker assembly was tested separately.
Seismic Tests:               The switches were energized to 480V and subjected to the following tests:
: 1. Resonance Search--The switches were subjected to a continuous sinusoidal search from 1 to 35 Hz in each of three mutually perpendicular axes. The frequency was adjusted in discrete 1 Hz steps with vibration maintained for at least 20 seconds in each step.
Peak acceleration varied from 0.1 g to 0.31 g above 5 Hz and 0.01 g to 0.26 g from 1 Hz to 5 Hz.
3.10-32                      SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-79 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 18 of 26)
: 2. Proof Testing--The switches were subjected to a 30 second 0.5 SSE of 0.76 g followed by a 30 second SSE of 1.51 g's at each half octave over the range from 1 Hz to 35 Hz where no resonant frequencies were present. Where resonance was present, a 0.5 SSE (0.76 g) followed by a SSE (1.51 g's) were performed at those resonant frequencies. Testing was conducted in the front-to-back, side-to-side and vertical axes.
Monitoring:                   The switches were monitored for proper operation during the testing.
Results:                       No external physical damage or malfunction was noted as a result of these tests.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Aero Nov Laboratories, Inc., Test Report No.5-6156, dated October 31, 1975.Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 18 of 26) 3.10-34SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-92 Equipment:125V-dc Battery Charger.Electrical Rating:ac input-480V, 60Hz, 3.dc output--125V, 100 Amperes.Mounting:The battery charger channel sill was welded to the Wyle simulator table in a manner duplicating the expected in-service configuration at WBNP.The control accelerometers were recorded on tape oscillograph recorders. The resulting table motion was analyzed by a spectrum analyzer at a damping of two percent (2%) and plotted at one-third octave frequency intervals over the frequency range of interest.Five, one-half-level RRS tests followed by a full-level RRS test were performed in each orientation with the specimen energized and operating in its normal charging mode.Full-level RRS tests were also performed in the front-to-back/vertical orientation during which the specimen's ac and dc circuit breakers were tripped using a low voltage ac current source.Monitoring:A multichannel recorder and three accelerometer devices were used to monitor the test results. Each accelerometer device consisted of two sensors, one oriented for the vertical axis and the other for the horizontal axis, the horizontal axis accelerometers were realigned for the direction of motion after the charger was rotated 90 degrees on the horizontal plan. Three channels of the multichannel recorder were used to monitor (1) input voltage, (2) state of a parallel circuit consisting of the NO alarm contacts, and (3) output voltage.Results:The oscillograph traces revealed no alarm contact chatter or breaker misoperation. No apparent physical damage was noticed in the visual checks. The charger performed satisfactorily before, during, and after the tests. The two DC meters mounted on the front of the charger cabinet would "peg" during the full SSE but each time th ey would return pretest readings with no recalibration necessary.
Aero Nov Laboratories, Inc., Test Report No.
5-6156, dated October 31, 1975.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                              3.10-33
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                            WBNP-92 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 19 of 26)
Equipment:                   125V-dc Battery Charger.
Electrical Rating:           ac input-480V, 60Hz, 3.
dc output--125V, 100 Amperes.
Mounting:                     The battery charger channel sill was welded to the Wyle simulator table in a manner duplicating the expected in-service configuration at WBNP.
The control accelerometers were recorded on tape oscillograph recorders. The resulting table motion was analyzed by a spectrum analyzer at a damping of two percent (2%) and plotted at one-third octave frequency intervals over the frequency range of interest.
Five, one-half-level RRS tests followed by a full-level RRS test were performed in each orientation with the specimen energized and operating in its normal charging mode.
Full-level RRS tests were also performed in the front-to-back/vertical orientation during which the specimen's ac and dc circuit breakers were tripped using a low voltage ac current source.
Monitoring:                   A multichannel recorder and three accelerometer devices were used to monitor the test results. Each accelerometer device consisted of two sensors, one oriented for the vertical axis and the other for the horizontal axis, the horizontal axis accelerometers were realigned for the direction of motion after the charger was rotated 90 degrees on the horizontal plan. Three channels of the multichannel recorder were used to monitor (1) input voltage, (2) state of a parallel circuit consisting of the NO alarm contacts, and (3) output voltage.
Results:                     The oscillograph traces revealed no alarm contact chatter or breaker misoperation. No apparent physical damage was noticed in the visual checks. The charger performed satisfactorily before, during, and after the tests. The two DC meters mounted on the front of the charger cabinet would "peg" during the full SSE but each time they would return pretest readings with no recalibration necessary.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Wyle Laborator's Seismic Test Report No. 42959-1.Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 19 of 26)
Wyle Laborator's Seismic Test Report No. 42959-1.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-35WATTS BARWBNP-92 Equipment:125-Volt Battery (Cell type NCX-2100).Electrical Rating:Two-hour rate--696 amperes to minimum battery terminal voltage of 105 volts at 60 F initial electrolyte temperature.Mounting:Test rack containing the batteries was welded to the test table.Seismic Test:Battery (3 cells) was energized to an approximate 20-ampere restive load and subjected to the following tests;1.Exploratory test (resonant search) consisting of a low level (approximately 0.2 g horizontally and vertically) sine sweep was performed to determine the specimen resonance frequencies in each of the three orthogonal axes. The sweep rate was 1 octave per minute over the frequency range of 1 Hz to 35 Hz.2.Proof test (multifrequency) consisting of 30-second duration simultaneous horizontal and vertical inputs of random motion consisting of frequency bandwidths spaced one-third octave apart over the frequency range of 1 Hz to 35 Hz. The amplitude of each one-third octave bandwidth was independently adjusted in each axes until the TRS enveloped the RRs.Monitoring:The output voltage of the battery was monitored on an oscillograph recorder during the seismic excitation.
3.10-34                      SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                          WBNP-92 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 20 of 26)
Equipment:                     125-Volt Battery (Cell type NCX-2100).
Electrical Rating:             Two-hour rate--696 amperes to minimum battery terminal voltage of 105 volts at 60 F initial electrolyte temperature.
Mounting:                     Test rack containing the batteries was welded to the test table.
Seismic Test:                 Battery (3 cells) was energized to an approximate 20-ampere restive load and subjected to the following tests;
: 1. Exploratory test (resonant search) consisting of a low level (approximately 0.2 g horizontally and vertically) sine sweep was performed to determine the specimen resonance frequencies in each of the three orthogonal axes. The sweep rate was 1 octave per minute over the frequency range of 1 Hz to 35 Hz.
: 2. Proof test (multifrequency) consisting of 30-second duration simultaneous horizontal and vertical inputs of random motion consisting of frequency bandwidths spaced one-third octave apart over the frequency range of 1 Hz to 35 Hz. The amplitude of each one-third octave bandwidth was independently adjusted in each axes until the TRS enveloped the RRs.
Monitoring:                   The output voltage of the battery was monitored on an oscillograph recorder during the seismic excitation.
The following parameter was monitored:
The following parameter was monitored:
Output voltage +4 Percent.Results:The battery performed satisfactorily and all parameters monitored were within their prescribed tolerances before, during, and after the test.
Output voltage +4 Percent.
Results:                       The battery performed satisfactorily and all parameters monitored were within their prescribed tolerances before, during, and after the test.


==References:==
==References:==
Wyle Laboratories Test Report No. 43479-1.
Wyle Laboratories Test Report No. 43479-1.
Equipment:Battery Rack.Seismic Test:The battery rack was qualified by analysis as described below:1.Natural Frequency--The calculations for natural frequency were based upon a static analysis where all the component parts were analyzed for deflection. The sum of the deflections was then used to calculate the natural frequency of the rack.2.After determination of the natural frequency of the rack, a stress analysis was again performed on each individual component part.
Equipment:                     Battery Rack.
The absolute combined stress was then calculated by peak value analysis.3.Data was provided with the analysis to show that all the critical acceleration response spectra was enveloped in this test.Results:The data showed that the rack will meet the requirements as laid out by TVA specifications and IEEE 344-1971 and will perf orm adequately during and after a seismic event.
Seismic Test:                 The battery rack was qualified by analysis as described below:
: 1. Natural Frequency--The calculations for natural frequency were based upon a static analysis where all the component parts were analyzed for deflection. The sum of the deflections was then used to calculate the natural frequency of the rack.
: 2. After determination of the natural frequency of the rack, a stress analysis was again performed on each individual component part.
The absolute combined stress was then calculated by peak value analysis.
: 3. Data was provided with the analysis to show that all the critical acceleration response spectra was enveloped in this test.
Results:                       The data showed that the rack will meet the requirements as laid out by TVA specifications and IEEE 344-1971 and will perform adequately during and after a seismic event.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Gould, Inc., Industrial Battery Division, 60 NCX-2550 and SO 7-074526-806. WYLE Report NO. 43479-1Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 20 of 26) 3.10-36SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-91 Equipment:125V DC Vital Battery Boards.Electrical Rating:125V Dc, 20,000 amperes short-circuit.Mounting:The equipment was bolted to the vibration generator in a manner that simulated the intended service mounting including bolt size and configuration.Seismic Tests;1.A resonant search test in test direction No. 1 using a sinusoidal input level of approximately 0.2 g from 1 to 33 Hz, and at a sweep rate of one octave per minute.2.A sine beat test in test direction No. 1 with maximum peak acceleration corresponding to the SSE. The beat test was conducted at each natural frequency. Before each SSE beat test, five 1/2 SSE beat tests were applied.3.Steps 1 and 2 repeated for 3 more directions.\Monitoring:1.Six accelerometers were mounted on the test table and throughout the boards to monitor input and output accelerations. The output was recorded on graphs made from oscillographs.2.Ten circuit breakers carrying 90 percent of rated current were monitored for contact opening.3.Alarm reset light was energized during all tests and was visually monitored.4.Undervoltage relay was energized and the normally closed contact was monitored during all tests.5.Each fuse checked for continuity after testing.Results:The testing proved the integrity of the board/component system since no failures developed.
Gould, Inc., Industrial Battery Division, 60 NCX-2550 and SO 7-074526-806. WYLE Report NO. 43479-1 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                                  3.10-35
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-91 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 21 of 26)
Equipment:                   125V DC Vital Battery Boards.
Electrical Rating:           125V Dc, 20,000 amperes short-circuit.
Mounting:                     The equipment was bolted to the vibration generator in a manner that simulated the intended service mounting including bolt size and configuration.
Seismic Tests;               1. A resonant search test in test direction No. 1 using a sinusoidal input level of approximately 0.2 g from 1 to 33 Hz, and at a sweep rate of one octave per minute.
: 2. A sine beat test in test direction No. 1 with maximum peak acceleration corresponding to the SSE. The beat test was conducted at each natural frequency. Before each SSE beat test, five 1/2 SSE beat tests were applied.
: 3. Steps 1 and 2 repeated for 3 more directions.\
Monitoring:                   1. Six accelerometers were mounted on the test table and throughout the boards to monitor input and output accelerations. The output was recorded on graphs made from oscillographs.
: 2. Ten circuit breakers carrying 90 percent of rated current were monitored for contact opening.
: 3. Alarm reset light was energized during all tests and was visually monitored.
: 4. Undervoltage relay was energized and the normally closed contact was monitored during all tests.
: 5. Each fuse checked for continuity after testing.
Results:                     The testing proved the integrity of the board/component system since no failures developed.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Westinghouse Seismic Test Procedure No. CO-33697.PEI-TR-852001-12Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 21 of 26)
Westinghouse Seismic Test Procedure No. CO-33697.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-37WATTS BARWBNP-92 Equipment:120V AC Vital Instrument Power Boards.Electrical Rating:120V AC, 60 Hz and 5,000 amperes short-circuit.Mounting:The equipment was bolted to the vibration generator in a manner that simulated the intended service mounting including bolt size and configuration.Seismic Tests:1.A resonant search test in test direction No. 1 using a sinusoidal input level of approximately 0.2 g from 1 to 33 Hz, and at a sweep of 1 octave per minute.2.A sine beat test in test direction No. with maximum peak acceleration corresponding to the SSE. The beat test was conducted at each natural frequency. Before each SSE beat test, five 1/2 SSE beat tests were applied.3.Steps 1 and 2 repeated for 3 more directions.Monitoring:1.Six accelerometers were mounted on the test table and throughout the boards to monitor input and output accelerations. The output was recorded on graphs made from oscillographs.2.Ten circuit breakers carrying 90% of rated current were monitored for contact opening.3.Lights were energized during all tests and were visually monitored.4.Undervoltage relay was energized and the normally closed contact was monitored during all tests.5.Fuses checked for continuity after testing.Results:The testing proved the integrity of the board/component since no failures developed.
PEI-TR-852001-12 3.10-36                      SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                        WBNP-92 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 22 of 26)
Equipment:                     120V AC Vital Instrument Power Boards.
Electrical Rating:             120V AC, 60 Hz and 5,000 amperes short-circuit.
Mounting:                     The equipment was bolted to the vibration generator in a manner that simulated the intended service mounting including bolt size and configuration.
Seismic Tests:                 1. A resonant search test in test direction No. 1 using a sinusoidal input level of approximately 0.2 g from 1 to 33 Hz, and at a sweep of 1 octave per minute.
: 2. A sine beat test in test direction No. with maximum peak acceleration corresponding to the SSE. The beat test was conducted at each natural frequency. Before each SSE beat test, five 1/2 SSE beat tests were applied.
: 3. Steps 1 and 2 repeated for 3 more directions.
Monitoring:                   1. Six accelerometers were mounted on the test table and throughout the boards to monitor input and output accelerations. The output was recorded on graphs made from oscillographs.
: 2. Ten circuit breakers carrying 90% of rated current were monitored for contact opening.
: 3. Lights were energized during all tests and were visually monitored.
: 4. Undervoltage relay was energized and the normally closed contact was monitored during all tests.
: 5. Fuses checked for continuity after testing.
Results:                       The testing proved the integrity of the board/component since no failures developed.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Westinghouse Seismic Test Procedure No. CO-33419.Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 22 of 26) 3.10-38SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-79 Equipment:120V AC, 60 Hz Vital Instrument Static Inverter.Electrical Rating:AC input--480V, 60 Hz, 3 phase, DC input--125V.AC out--120V, 60 Hz, Single phase.
Westinghouse Seismic Test Procedure No. CO-33419.
KVA out--20kVa.Mounting:The inverter channel sills were welded to the shake table in the exact manner they would be installed on steel floor plates at Watts Bar.Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 23 of 26)
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                                3.10-37
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-39WATTS BARWBNP-92Seismic Test:The inverter was energized to 480V, 3 phase and subjected to the following tests:1.Exploratory Search--A low level (approximately 0.2 g horizontally and vertically) performed on each test configuration from 1 Hz to 33 Hz to establish major resonances. The sweep rate was one octave per minute.2.Multifrequency Tests--The specimen was subjected to simultaneous horizontal and vertical inputs of random motion consisting of frequencies spaced 1/3 octave apart over the range of 1 Hz to 40 Hz. The amplitude of each 1/3 octave frequency was independently adjusted in each axis until the test response spectra enveloped the required response spectra. The resulting test table motion was analyzed at one percent damping by a spectrum analyzer and plotted at one-third octave intervals over the frequency range of interest. The duration of the tests was 30 seconds. The horizontal and vertical input accelerations levels were phase incoherent. Five 1/2-level SSE's and one SSE were performed on the invertor.Monitoring:The equipment used to monitor the test included a visual counter for output frequency; a 3-channel recorder to monitor (1) input voltage, (2) state of a parallel circuit of 12 NO alarm relay contacts, and (3) output voltage: and 5 accelerometers. Each accelerometer device consisted of two sensors, one oriented for vertical axes, and the other for horizontal axes.Results:The inverter withstood the seismic test satisfactorily without any failures.Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 24 of 26) 3.10-40SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-92
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-79 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 23 of 26)
Equipment:                   120V AC, 60 Hz Vital Instrument Static Inverter.
Electrical Rating:           AC input--480V, 60 Hz, 3 phase, DC input--125V.
AC out--120V, 60 Hz, Single phase.
KVA out--20kVa.
Mounting:                     The inverter channel sills were welded to the shake table in the exact manner they would be installed on steel floor plates at Watts Bar.
3.10-38                      SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                          WBNP-92 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 24 of 26)
Seismic Test:                 The inverter was energized to 480V, 3 phase and subjected to the following tests:
: 1. Exploratory Search--A low level (approximately 0.2 g horizontally and vertically) performed on each test configuration from 1 Hz to 33 Hz to establish major resonances. The sweep rate was one octave per minute.
: 2. Multifrequency Tests--The specimen was subjected to simultaneous horizontal and vertical inputs of random motion consisting of frequencies spaced 1/3 octave apart over the range of 1 Hz to 40 Hz. The amplitude of each 1/3 octave frequency was independently adjusted in each axis until the test response spectra enveloped the required response spectra. The resulting test table motion was analyzed at one percent damping by a spectrum analyzer and plotted at one-third octave intervals over the frequency range of interest. The duration of the tests was 30 seconds. The horizontal and vertical input accelerations levels were phase incoherent. Five 1/2-level SSE's and one SSE were performed on the invertor.
Monitoring:                   The equipment used to monitor the test included a visual counter for output frequency; a 3-channel recorder to monitor (1) input voltage, (2) state of a parallel circuit of 12 NO alarm relay contacts, and (3) output voltage: and 5 accelerometers. Each accelerometer device consisted of two sensors, one oriented for vertical axes, and the other for horizontal axes.
Results:                       The inverter withstood the seismic test satisfactorily without any failures.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                                3.10-39
 
WATTS BAR                                                                            WBNP-92 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 25 of 26)


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Wyle Laboratories Seismic Test Report No.51133-1.Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued) (Sheet 25 of 26)
Wyle Laboratories Seismic Test Report No.51133-1.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-41WATTS BARWBNP-92 Equipment:Electrical penetrations
3.10-40                SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
[1] (all types and voltages used at Watts Bar).Seismic Test:Seismic qualification was done by analysis. The seismic analysis done on the penetrations consider the seismic loads imposed for both a safe shutdown earthquake and a 1/2 safe shutdown earthquake in accordance with paragraph NA-3250 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 111, Nuclear Power Plant Components.
 
[2]1.The analysis calculated the natural frequencies during a seismic event using standard formulas for stress and strain by the R. Roark or Rayleigh's methods.2.Maximum stresses for the normal and seismic load conditions were calculated. Seismic loads were considered to act in the vertical direction and in two horizontal directions.Results:The analysis indicated that the penetrations were able to withstand all seismic stresses from a one and a one-half safe shutdown earthquake without any loss of function.
WATTS BAR                                                                                        WBNP-92 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)
(Sheet 26 of 26)
Equipment:                     Electrical penetrations[1] (all types and voltages used at Watts Bar).
Seismic Test:                 Seismic qualification was done by analysis. The seismic analysis done on the penetrations consider the seismic loads imposed for both a safe shutdown earthquake and a 1/2 safe shutdown earthquake in accordance with paragraph NA-3250 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 111, Nuclear Power Plant Components.[2]
: 1. The analysis calculated the natural frequencies during a seismic event using standard formulas for stress and strain by the R. Roark or Rayleigh's methods.
: 2. Maximum stresses for the normal and seismic load conditions were calculated. Seismic loads were considered to act in the vertical direction and in two horizontal directions.
Results:                       The analysis indicated that the penetrations were able to withstand all seismic stresses from a one and a one-half safe shutdown earthquake without any loss of function.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
1.Conax Report IPS-212, Rev. A and addendum to IPS-212, Rev.A. IPS-209, IPS-752, IPS-13482.TVA Design Specification WBNP-DS-1805-2697-00.Table 3.10-3  Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications  (Continued) (Sheet 26 of 26) 3.10-42SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-91Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic QualificationSample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 1 of 7)1.Transmitters2.Power Supplies3.Summing Amplifiers 4.Current-to-Current Converters5.Square Root Converters6.Alarm Units 7.Recorders8.Indicating controllers9.Manual Loading Stations 10.Panels (cabinets) 11.Dual Alarm Units12.Square Root converters13.Proportional Amplifiers 14.Millivolt Transmitters15.Power Supplies16.Current Isolators 17.Controllers (single case)18.Controllers (dual case)19.Setpoint Stations 20.Manual Loaders21.Recorders22.Hi-Fi Relays 23.Instrumentation Racks (local panels)24.Single and Four Bay Instrument Cabinets25.Lighting Panel Boards & Cabinets SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-43WATTS BARWBNP-92 WBNP-86 Equipment:BOP I&C (See equipment list on Page 1 of this table, Items 1-10)Mounting:Several separate tests were run to qualify the instruments and cabinets. Each instrument type was tested separately (that is not mounted in the cabinets) and the cabinets were tested fully loaded with a representation of most instrument types installed. Instruments as well as cabinets were mounted directly to the Wyle Lab seismic test device.Seismic Test:An exploratory test was run in the form of a continuous sweep frequency search using a sinusoidal steady-state input at approximately 0.2 g. The search included two continuous sweeps from 1 to 35 to 1 Hz at a rate of one octave per minute.The specimens were then subjected to sine beat tests consisting of ten oscillations per beat with a time pause of approximately two seconds between each of the five beats. A sine beat test was performed two times, in each of the four orientations, at one-third octave frequencies of 1, 1.25, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.2, 4, 5, 6.3, 8, 10, 12.5, 16, 20, 25, 32, and at 35 Hz.The test level was 4.25 g's or greater, within the limits of the test machine, at a location near the driving point of the actuator. The 4.25 g input yielded an effective g force of 3.0 g's in both the horizontal and vertical axes, simultaneously.Monitoring:Simulated inputs were made during tests and outputs were monitored for each type instrument.Results:All instruments (and the cabinet) performed satisfactorily with no loss of function of ability to function properly before, during, and after the test.
: 1. Conax Report IPS-212, Rev. A and addendum to IPS-212, Rev.A.
IPS-209, IPS-752, IPS-1348
: 2. TVA Design Specification WBNP-DS-1805-2697-00.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                               3.10-41
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-91 Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic Qualification Sample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 1 of 7)
: 1. Transmitters
: 2. Power Supplies
: 3. Summing Amplifiers
: 4. Current-to-Current Converters
: 5. Square Root Converters
: 6. Alarm Units
: 7. Recorders
: 8. Indicating controllers
: 9. Manual Loading Stations
: 10. Panels (cabinets)
: 11. Dual Alarm Units
: 12. Square Root converters
: 13. Proportional Amplifiers
: 14. Millivolt Transmitters
: 15. Power Supplies
: 16. Current Isolators
: 17. Controllers (single case)
: 18. Controllers (dual case)
: 19. Setpoint Stations
: 20. Manual Loaders
: 21. Recorders
: 22. Hi-Fi Relays
: 23. Instrumentation Racks (local panels)
: 24. Single and Four Bay Instrument Cabinets
: 25. Lighting Panel Boards & Cabinets 3.10-42                      SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                            WBNP-92 Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic Qualification Sample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 2 of 7)
WBNP-86 Equipment:                     BOP I&C (See equipment list on Page 1 of this table, Items 1-10)
Mounting:                     Several separate tests were run to qualify the instruments and cabinets.
Each instrument type was tested separately (that is not mounted in the cabinets) and the cabinets were tested fully loaded with a representation of most instrument types installed. Instruments as well as cabinets were mounted directly to the Wyle Lab seismic test device.
Seismic Test:                 An exploratory test was run in the form of a continuous sweep frequency search using a sinusoidal steady-state input at approximately 0.2 g. The search included two continuous sweeps from 1 to 35 to 1 Hz at a rate of one octave per minute.
The specimens were then subjected to sine beat tests consisting of ten oscillations per beat with a time pause of approximately two seconds between each of the five beats. A sine beat test was performed two times, in each of the four orientations, at one-third octave frequencies of 1, 1.25, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.2, 4, 5, 6.3, 8, 10, 12.5, 16, 20, 25, 32, and at 35 Hz.
The test level was 4.25 g's or greater, within the limits of the test machine, at a location near the driving point of the actuator. The 4.25 g input yielded an effective g force of 3.0 g's in both the horizontal and vertical axes, simultaneously.
Monitoring:                   Simulated inputs were made during tests and outputs were monitored for each type instrument.
Results:                       All instruments (and the cabinet) performed satisfactorily with no loss of function of ability to function properly before, during, and after the test.


==References:==
==References:==
Wyle Lab Test Report Nos: 43522-142434-1 43280-1 43675-1 43859-1Table 3.10-4  Watts Bar Seismic QualificationSample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 2 of 7) 3.10-44SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-86 Equipment:BOP I&C (see equipment list on Page 1 of this table, Items 11-22).Mounting:All instruments were mounted in a rack mounting chassis which was modified for seismic use.Seismic Testing:1.A resonant search test was conducted in each of the three orthogonal directions. Each search consisted of two sweeps over the frequency range from 1 to 35 Hz and return to 1 Hz at a sweep rate of 1 octave/minute. The input "G" level to the vibration table
Wyle Lab Test Report Nos: 43522-1 42434-1 43280-1 43675-1 43859-1 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                                   3.10-43


was 0.5 g's.2.A sine beat test was conducted at each resonant frequency found by step 1 and at the resonant frequencies found for the single and four-bay cabinets. The number of beats at each test frequency was 10 and the number of test frequencies cycled per beat was 10. The time between beats was of sufficient duration to preclude significant superimposition of motion. The input level was 3 g's horizontal and 2 g's vertical.Monitoring:1.A 30 mA signal was applied to the input of each analog device requiring an external input. The output of the analog devices was monitored on a brush recorder.2.The electrical contact of the discrete output devices were monitored for discontinuity (chatter) in excess of 100 microseconds.Results:There was no evidence of physical damage, contact chatter or output shift.
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-86 Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic Qualification Sample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 3 of 7)
Equipment:                  BOP I&C (see equipment list on Page 1 of this table, Items 11-22).
Mounting:                  All instruments were mounted in a rack mounting chassis which was modified for seismic use.
Seismic Testing:            1. A resonant search test was conducted in each of the three orthogonal directions. Each search consisted of two sweeps over the frequency range from 1 to 35 Hz and return to 1 Hz at a sweep rate of 1 octave/minute. The input "G" level to the vibration table was 0.5 g's.
: 2. A sine beat test was conducted at each resonant frequency found by step 1 and at the resonant frequencies found for the single and four-bay cabinets. The number of beats at each test frequency was 10 and the number of test frequencies cycled per beat was 10. The time between beats was of sufficient duration to preclude significant superimposition of motion. The input level was 3 g's horizontal and 2 g's vertical.
: 1. A 30 mA signal was applied to the input of each analog device requiring an external input. The output of the analog devices was Monitoring:                      monitored on a brush recorder.
: 2. The electrical contact of the discrete output devices were monitored for discontinuity (chatter) in excess of 100 microseconds.
There was no evidence of physical damage, contact chatter or output Results:                    shift.
Action Environmental Testing Corp. Report No. 10348-2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Action Environmental Testing Corp. Report No. 10348-2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -7, -8, -9, -10, -11, -12, and -13.Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic QualificationSample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 3 of 7)
7, -8, -9, -10, -11, -12, and -13.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-45WATTS BARWBNP-79 Equipment:Instrumentation rack (local panel).Mounting:The rack was bolted directly to the seismic simulator.Seismic Testing:1.Two low level (approximately 0.1g) single axis sine sweeps from 1 Hz to 35 Hz to 1 Hz were performed to establish major resonances for each major axis. The sweep rate was 1 octave per minute.2.A sine beat test was conducted at each resonant frequency found by step 1. The sine beat tests consisted of five beats per test. Each beat contained two oscillations and was separated by a sufficient time span to allow all equipment motion to cease. The sine beat test levels were approximately 0.3 g for the vertical direction and 0.8 g for each horizontal direction.3.The specimen was also subjected to a 45-second simultaneous horizontal and vertical inputs of multi-frequency random motion consisting of frequencies spaced 1/3 octave apart over the frequency range of 1 to 40 Hz in the front-to-back/vertical and the side-to-side/vertical orientation. The excitation was biaxial and phase incoherent. The amplitude of each 1/3 octave acceleration was independently adjusted in each axis until the Test Response Spectra (TRS) enveloped the Required Response Spectra (RRS).
3.10-44                  SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
The resulting TRS was analyzed at 2% damping by a spectrum analyzer and plotted at 1/3 octave intervals over the frequency range of interest.Approximately three one-half level or greater Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE) tests were performed. A mini mum of one full level test was performed after completion of the one-half level tests.Monitoring:None of the devices mounted on the rack were monitored.Results:There was no evidence of any physical damage. The test indicated that the instrument mounting locations would not see "g" levels greater than 2 g's in the vertical direction and 3 g's in the horizontal direction during the postulated seismic event.
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                            WBNP-79 Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic Qualification Sample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 4 of 7)
Equipment:                     Instrumentation rack (local panel).
Mounting:                     The rack was bolted directly to the seismic simulator.
: 1. Two low level (approximately 0.1g) single axis sine sweeps from 1 Hz to 35 Hz to 1 Hz were performed to establish major resonances Seismic Testing:                    for each major axis. The sweep rate was 1 octave per minute.
: 2. A sine beat test was conducted at each resonant frequency found by step 1. The sine beat tests consisted of five beats per test. Each beat contained two oscillations and was separated by a sufficient time span to allow all equipment motion to cease. The sine beat test levels were approximately 0.3 g for the vertical direction and 0.8 g for each horizontal direction.
: 3. The specimen was also subjected to a 45-second simultaneous horizontal and vertical inputs of multi-frequency random motion consisting of frequencies spaced 1/3 octave apart over the frequency range of 1 to 40 Hz in the front-to-back/vertical and the side-to-side/vertical orientation. The excitation was biaxial and phase incoherent. The amplitude of each 1/3 octave acceleration was independently adjusted in each axis until the Test Response Spectra (TRS) enveloped the Required Response Spectra (RRS).
The resulting TRS was analyzed at 2% damping by a spectrum analyzer and plotted at 1/3 octave intervals over the frequency range of interest.
Approximately three one-half level or greater Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE) tests were performed. A minimum of one full level test was performed after completion of the one-half level tests.
Monitoring:                   None of the devices mounted on the rack were monitored.
There was no evidence of any physical damage. The test indicated that the instrument mounting locations would not see "g" levels greater than 2 g's in the vertical direction and 3 g's in the horizontal direction during Results:                      the postulated seismic event.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Wyle Laboratories' Seismic Simulation Test Report No. 42807-1.Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic QualificationSample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 4 of 7) 3.10-46SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-79 Equipment:Single bay and four bay instrument cabinets.Mounting:The test samples were mounted by their normal mounting means to the test fixture.Seismic Testing:1.A resonant search test was conducted in each of the three orthogonal directions. Each search consisted of two sweeps over the frequency range from 1 to 35 Hz and return to 1 Hz at a sweep rate of 1 octave/minute. The input "G" level to the vibration table  
Wyle Laboratories' Seismic Simulation Test Report No. 42807-1.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                                  3.10-45
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-79 Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic Qualification Sample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 5 of 7)
Equipment:                 Single bay and four bay instrument cabinets.
The test samples were mounted by their normal mounting means to the Mounting:                  test fixture.
: 1. A resonant search test was conducted in each of the three orthogonal directions. Each search consisted of two sweeps over the frequency range from 1 to 35 Hz and return to 1 Hz at a sweep rate of 1 octave/minute. The input "G" level to the vibration table Seismic Testing:                was 0.2 g's.
: 2. A sine beat test was conducted at each resonant frequency found by step 1. The number of beats at each test frequency was 10 and the number of test frequencies cycle per beat was 10. The time between beats was of sufficient duration to preclude significant superimposition of motion. The input level was 0.36 g's horizontal and 0.24 g's vertical.
Monitoring:                None of the devices mounted in the cabinets were monitored.
There was no evidence of any physical damage and in no case did the "G" levels exceed 3.0 g's in the horizontal axes or 2.0 g's in the vertical Results:                    axis during the beat test.
3.10-46                  SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT


was 0.2 g's.2.A sine beat test was conducted at each resonant frequency found by step 1. The number of beats at each test frequency was 10 and the number of test frequencies cycle per beat was 10. The time between beats was of sufficient duration to preclude significant superimposition of motion. The input level was 0.36 g's horizontal and 0.24 g's vertical.Monitoring:None of the devices mounted in the cabinets were monitored.Results:There was no evidence of any physical damage and in no case did the "G" levels exceed 3.0 g's in the horizontal axes or 2.0 g's in the vertical axis during the beat test.Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic QualificationSample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 5 of 7)
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-79 Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic Qualification Sample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 6 of 7)
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-47WATTS BARWBNP-79


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Action Environmental Test Corporation Report Nos. 10348, 10348-1Table 3.10-4  Watts Bar Seismic QualificationSample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 6 of 7) 3.10-48SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-35 Equipment:Lighting Panel Boards and CabinetsElectrical Rating:125V DC Cabinets, 120/208V AC Panels, 60 Hz, 3-PhaseMounting:Specimen was wall-mounted with commercially available bolts, nuts, and washers to a wall-mounting fixture which in turn was welded to the test table. Mounting simulated the in-service configuration.Seismic Test:The specimens were subjected to the following tests:1.Exploratory Test (Resonant Search) - consists of low level (0.2 g horizontal and vertical) biaxial sine sweep from 1-33 Hz in front-to-back and side-to-side orientation to determine major equipment resonance points.2.Proof Test (Multifrequency) - Consisting of simultaneous horizontal and vertical incoherent inputs of random motion at frequencies spaced 1/3 octave apart from 1-31.6 Hz in front-to-back and side-to-side orientations. Aging was obtained with three half-level SSE tests followed by one full-level SSE test performed in front-to-back and side-to-side orientations.Monitoring:A multichannel recorder was used to monitor electrical continuity, contact chatter, and change of state before, during, and after the seismic
Action Environmental Test Corporation Report Nos. 10348, 10348-1 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                         3.10-47


test.Results:The specimen's structural integrity was not compromised and circuit continuity was maintained.
WATTS BAR                                                                                      WBNP-35 Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic Qualification Sample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 7 of 7)
Equipment:                  Lighting Panel Boards and Cabinets Electrical Rating:          125V DC Cabinets, 120/208V AC Panels, 60 Hz, 3-Phase Specimen was wall-mounted with commercially available bolts, nuts, and washers to a wall-mounting fixture which in turn was welded to the Mounting:                  test table. Mounting simulated the in-service configuration.
The specimens were subjected to the following tests:
: 1. Exploratory Test (Resonant Search) - consists of low level (0.2 g horizontal and vertical) biaxial sine sweep from 1-33 Hz in front-to-back and side-to-side orientation to determine major equipment resonance points.
: 2. Proof Test (Multifrequency) - Consisting of simultaneous horizontal and vertical incoherent inputs of random motion at frequencies spaced 1/3 octave apart from 1-31.6 Hz in front-to-back and side-to-side orientations. Aging was obtained with three half-level SSE tests followed by one full-level SSE test performed in front-to-back Seismic Test:                    and side-to-side orientations.
A multichannel recorder was used to monitor electrical continuity, contact chatter, and change of state before, during, and after the seismic Monitoring:                 test.
The specimen's structural integrity was not compromised and circuit Results:                    continuity was maintained.


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Wyle Test Report 42979-1.Table 3.10-4  Watts Bar Seismic QualificationSample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 7 of 7)
Wyle Test Report 42979-1.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-49WATTS BARWBNP-92Table 3.10-5 Allowable Stresses For Cable Tray SupportsLoad CaseAllowable StressLoad Combination 2Case IAISC AllowableD + LCase IAAISC AllowableD + E Case IB1.5 x AISC Allowable 1D + E + T oCase II1.5 x AISC Allowable 1D + E'Case IIA1.5 x AISC Allowable 1D + E' + T oCase III1.5 x AISC Allowable 1D + E'  + P a + T a1.Allowable stresses are limited not to exceed 0.9 F y, except for shear, which is limited not to exceed 0.52F y, and buckling, which is limited not to exceed 0.9 F CR.2.Key:D = DeadweightL  = Live loadsE  = Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE) loads E' = Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE) loads T o = Thermal effects and loads during normal operating or shutdown conditions based on the most critical transient or steady-state condition.
3.10-48                  SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
T a = Thermal effects and loads during conditions generated by the design basis accident (DBA) transient condition and including T o.P a = Pressure load effects from a DBA, such as steel containment vessel (SCV) dynamic movements and cavity pressurization.
 
3.10-50SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-92 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT3.10-51WATTS BAR WBNP-68Figure 3.10-1  Orientation of Cable Tray Axes
WATTS BAR                                                                                          WBNP-92 Table 3.10-5 Allowable Stresses For Cable Tray Supports Load Case                            Allowable Stress                Load Combination2 Case I                              AISC Allowable                  D+L Case IA                              AISC Allowable                  D+E Case IB                              1.5 x AISC Allowable1            D + E + To 1
Case II                              1.5 x AISC Allowable             D + E Case IIA                            1.5 x AISC Allowable1            D + E + To 1
Case III                            1.5 x AISC Allowable             D + E + Pa + Ta
: 1. Allowable stresses are limited not to exceed 0.9 Fy, except for shear, which is limited not to exceed 0.52Fy, and buckling, which is limited not to exceed 0.9 FCR.
: 2. Key:
D = Deadweight L = Live loads E = Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE) loads E = Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE) loads To = Thermal effects and loads during normal operating or shutdown conditions based on the most critical transient or steady-state condition.
Ta = Thermal effects and loads during conditions generated by the design basis accident (DBA) transient condition and including To.
Pa = Pressure load effects from a DBA, such as steel containment vessel (SCV) dynamic movements and cavity pressurization.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                                 3.10-49


3.10-52SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENTWATTS BAR WBNP-68 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.11-1WATTS BARWBNP-863.11  ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENTThe method of assuring that mechanical and electrical components of safety-related equipment are qualified for their potential normal operational and worst-case accident environments is described in this section. Two programs are in place to environmentally qualify safety-related electrical equipment (including cable) and active safety-related mechanical equipment to function or not fail for event mitigation. These programs involve:
WATTS BAR                                                              WBNP-92 3.10-50  SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
(1)Safety-related electrical equipment within the scope of 10CFR50.49.
(2)Active, safety-related mechanical equipment located in a harsh environment.Equipment within the scope of 10 CFR 50.49 excludes that equipment located in mild or essentially mild environments. A mild environment is defined as a room or building zone where (1) the temperature, pressure, or relative humidity resulting from the direct effects of a design basis event (DBE) (e.g., temperature rise due to steam release) are no more severe than those which would occur during an abnormal plant operational condition, (2) the temperature does not exceed 130&deg;F due to the indirect effects of a DBE (e.g., increased heat loads from electrical equipment), (3) the event radiation dose is less than or equal to 1 x 10 4 rads, and (4) the total event plus the 40 year TID (total integrated dose) is less than or equal to 5 x 10 4 rad[2].The Mechanical Equipment Qualification (MEQ) program assures that active, safety-related mechanical equipment located in harsh environments will adequately perform the required design safety functions under all normal, abnormal, accident and post-accident environmental conditions in accordance with 10 CFR Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 4 (GDC-4).
3.11.1    Equipmen t Identification and En vironmental Conditions 3.11.1.1  Identification of Safe ty Systems and JustificationAll systems whose functioning is required to mitigate a loss-of-coolant accident (LOCA) or high-energy line break (HELB) for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant harsh environment areas are listed in Table 3.11-1. These systems were determined by identifying all the systems upon which the safety analyses in the Final Safety Analysis Report and other referenced documents are dependent. Further, any systems which are necessary to support systems so identified were included in this table.
3.11.1.2  Identification of E quipment in Harsh EnvironmentsThe identification of the harsh environment is provided in Section 3.11.2. With the harsh environments defined, a survey of the safety-related electrical and active safety-related mechanical equipment in the affected areas was conducted. This survey was conducted using electrical instrument tabulations, mechanical piping drawings, mechanical heating and ventilation drawings, instrumentation and control drawings, electrical equipment drawings, and conduit and grounding drawings to identify the


3.11-2ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-86required components. The electrical components are identified in the Category and Operating Times Calculati ons. These calculations establish the 10 CFR 50.49 operating category and times for these components. 10 CFR 50.49 Category A or B electrical components located in a harsh environment are qualified in environmental qualification packages, which are referred to as the Environmental Qualification (EQ) Binders. These are a comprehensive set of documentation packages that demonstrate compliance with 10 CFR 50.49. In some instances Category A or B equipment may be contained in "Essentially Mild" (EM) calculations. EM calculations evaluate the 1E equipment located in plant harsh environments for the specific DBE(s). This evaluation concludes that for the specific DBE(s) for which the equipment must function, the environmental conditions (including normal plus accident dose) do not impose a significant environmental stress on the device.Mechanical components are identified in the Mechanical Equipment List. This list identifies the active safety-related equipment which is required to perform a mechanical motion during the course of accomplishing a system safety function. This calculation identifies all mechanical equipment in the portions of safety system flow paths which are required to mitigate 10 CFR 50.49 accidents. This equipment includes, but is not limited to valves, pumps, dampers, and fans. Verification of qualification levels for equipment within the scope of 10 CFR 50.49 has been accomplished by a field walkdown of the installed components to provide traceability between the qualification documents and the in-situ equipment. This field verification walkdown is documented in the EQ binders. The active safety-related mechanical equipment located within harsh environmental areas in the plant was identified by use of design data and confirmed by field verification walkdowns. This information is documented in the MEQ binders.
WATTS BAR                                                                                        WBNP-68 Figure 3.10-1 Orientation of Cable Tray Axes SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                             3.10-51
3.11.2  Environmental Conditions3.11.2.1  Harsh EnvironmentEnvironmental conditions have been established for all harsh environment areas which contain safety-related electrical and active mechanical equipment exposed to a harsh environment resulting from a design basis event. Temperature, relative humidity, pressure, radiation dose, area type, chemical spray, and flooding were the parameters considered.  (Only temperature and radiation were considered for mechanical equipment. The other parameters have no significant detrimental effect on mechanical equipment.)  All values were based upon the following operational conditions:
(1)Normal operating conditions - The environmental service conditions which the plant environmental control systems are designed to maintain on a normal design day.


ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.11-3WATTS BARWBNP-86 (2)Abnormal operating conditions - The environmental service conditions which result from outside temperature excursions, temporary greater than design heat loads, or degraded environmental control system operations. This condition can exist for up to 8 hours per excursion and will occur less than 1%
WATTS BAR                                                                            WBNP-68 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 3.10-52                  SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-86 3.11 ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT The method of assuring that mechanical and electrical components of safety-related equipment are qualified for their potential normal operational and worst-case accident environments is described in this section.
Two programs are in place to environmentally qualify safety-related electrical equipment (including cable) and active safety-related mechanical equipment to function or not fail for event mitigation. These programs involve:
(1)    Safety-related electrical equipment within the scope of 10CFR50.49.
(2)    Active, safety-related mechanical equipment located in a harsh environment.
Equipment within the scope of 10 CFR 50.49 excludes that equipment located in mild or essentially mild environments. A mild environment is defined as a room or building zone where (1) the temperature, pressure, or relative humidity resulting from the direct effects of a design basis event (DBE) (e.g., temperature rise due to steam release) are no more severe than those which would occur during an abnormal plant operational condition, (2) the temperature does not exceed 130&deg;F due to the indirect effects of a DBE (e.g., increased heat loads from electrical equipment), (3) the event radiation dose is less than or equal to 1 x 104 rads, and (4) the total event plus the 40 year TID (total integrated dose) is less than or equal to 5 x 104 rad[2].
The Mechanical Equipment Qualification (MEQ) program assures that active, safety-related mechanical equipment located in harsh environments will adequately perform the required design safety functions under all normal, abnormal, accident and post-accident environmental conditions in accordance with 10 CFR Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 4 (GDC-4).
3.11.1  Equipment Identification and Environmental Conditions 3.11.1.1 Identification of Safety Systems and Justification All systems whose functioning is required to mitigate a loss-of-coolant accident (LOCA) or high-energy line break (HELB) for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant harsh environment areas are listed in Table 3.11-1. These systems were determined by identifying all the systems upon which the safety analyses in the Final Safety Analysis Report and other referenced documents are dependent. Further, any systems which are necessary to support systems so identified were included in this table.
3.11.1.2 Identification of Equipment in Harsh Environments The identification of the harsh environment is provided in Section 3.11.2. With the harsh environments defined, a survey of the safety-related electrical and active safety-related mechanical equipment in the affected areas was conducted. This survey was conducted using electrical instrument tabulations, mechanical piping drawings, mechanical heating and ventilation drawings, instrumentation and control drawings, electrical equipment drawings, and conduit and grounding drawings to identify the ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                                  3.11-1
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-86 required components. The electrical components are identified in the Category and Operating Times Calculations. These calculations establish the 10 CFR 50.49 operating category and times for these components. 10 CFR 50.49 Category A or B electrical components located in a harsh environment are qualified in environmental qualification packages, which are referred to as the Environmental Qualification (EQ)
Binders. These are a comprehensive set of documentation packages that demonstrate compliance with 10 CFR 50.49. In some instances Category A or B equipment may be contained in "Essentially Mild" (EM) calculations. EM calculations evaluate the 1E equipment located in plant harsh environments for the specific DBE(s).
This evaluation concludes that for the specific DBE(s) for which the equipment must function, the environmental conditions (including normal plus accident dose) do not impose a significant environmental stress on the device.
Mechanical components are identified in the Mechanical Equipment List. This list identifies the active safety-related equipment which is required to perform a mechanical motion during the course of accomplishing a system safety function. This calculation identifies all mechanical equipment in the portions of safety system flow paths which are required to mitigate 10 CFR 50.49 accidents. This equipment includes, but is not limited to valves, pumps, dampers, and fans.
Verification of qualification levels for equipment within the scope of 10 CFR 50.49 has been accomplished by a field walkdown of the installed components to provide traceability between the qualification documents and the in-situ equipment. This field verification walkdown is documented in the EQ binders.
The active safety-related mechanical equipment located within harsh environmental areas in the plant was identified by use of design data and confirmed by field verification walkdowns. This information is documented in the MEQ binders.
3.11.2 Environmental Conditions 3.11.2.1 Harsh Environment Environmental conditions have been established for all harsh environment areas which contain safety-related electrical and active mechanical equipment exposed to a harsh environment resulting from a design basis event. Temperature, relative humidity, pressure, radiation dose, area type, chemical spray, and flooding were the parameters considered. (Only temperature and radiation were considered for mechanical equipment. The other parameters have no significant detrimental effect on mechanical equipment.) All values were based upon the following operational conditions:
(1)    Normal operating conditions - The environmental service conditions which the plant environmental control systems are designed to maintain on a normal design day.
3.11-2                              ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-86 (2)   Abnormal operating conditions - The environmental service conditions which result from outside temperature excursions, temporary greater than design heat loads, or degraded environmental control system operations. This condition can exist for up to 8 hours per excursion and will occur less than 1%
of the plant life.
of the plant life.
(3)Loss of Coolant Accident (LOCA) or High Energy Line Break (HELB) conditions resulting from small, intermediate, or large main steam line breaks inside containment.
(3)   Loss of Coolant Accident (LOCA) or High Energy Line Break (HELB) conditions resulting from small, intermediate, or large main steam line breaks inside containment.
(4)High Energy Line Break conditions outside primary containment resulting from ruptures and critical cracks in various high energy lines throughout the Auxiliary Building and steam valve vaults.
(4)   High Energy Line Break conditions outside primary containment resulting from ruptures and critical cracks in various high energy lines throughout the Auxiliary Building and steam valve vaults.
(5)Tornado depressurization conditions resulting from a design basis tornado.
(5)   Tornado depressurization conditions resulting from a design basis tornado.
(6)Inadvertent containment spray initiation conditions resulting from accidental operation of the containment spray system.
(6)   Inadvertent containment spray initiation conditions resulting from accidental operation of the containment spray system.
(7)Fuel handling accidentThe service conditions, resulting from the operational conditions listed above, are presented in Reference [4] and its associated environmental data drawings (47E235 Series). Temperature, pressure, and relative humidity vs. time curves are also provided on the drawings to clearly define the effects of various worst case HELB combinations on the area. These drawings include the environmental conditions for mild as well as harsh environmental areas.For the purpose of 10 CFR 50.49, only design basis events 3, 4, and 7, above, are considered design basis accidents. Tornados, floods, or other natural phenomenon, including seismic, are expressly excluded from the scope of 10 CFR 50.49. Refer to Section 3.10 for Seismic Qualification.
(7)   Fuel handling accident The service conditions, resulting from the operational conditions listed above, are presented in Reference [4] and its associated environmental data drawings (47E235 Series). Temperature, pressure, and relative humidity vs. time curves are also provided on the drawings to clearly define the effects of various worst case HELB combinations on the area. These drawings include the environmental conditions for mild as well as harsh environmental areas.
3.11.2.2 Mild EnvironmentMild environment qualification is applied to Class 1E electrical equipment only and is required by 10 CFR 50 Appendix A, Criterion 4. Watts Bar satisfies the intent of NRC Generic Letter 82-09 by utilization of a preventive maintenance, surveillance, and testing program, as discussed in that generic letter.For Class 1E equipment located in a mild environment and procured or installed before April 20, 1982 (date of issuance of NRC Generic letter 82-09), WBN demonstrates qualification by site preventative maintenance, testing, and surveillance programs.For Class 1E equipment located in a mild environment and procured on or after April 20, 1982, WBN demonstrates qualification by the design or purchase specifications which identify environmental conditions and any other applicable design requirements as appropriate. These design activities are augmented by the site preventative maintenance, testing, and surveillance programs.
For the purpose of 10 CFR 50.49, only design basis events 3, 4, and 7, above, are considered design basis accidents. Tornados, floods, or other natural phenomenon, including seismic, are expressly excluded from the scope of 10 CFR 50.49. Refer to Section 3.10 for Seismic Qualification.
3.11-4ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-86 3.11.3 Electrical Equipment Within the Scope of 10 CFR 50.49The process assuring that electrical equipment/cable is capable of performing its safety function is described in this section. A description of TVA's environmental qualification program is presented in Reference [1]. This reference provides documentation on the program and initial EQ binder preparation to denote that the components are qualified. TVA has implemented a program to ensure that all components will be fully qualified in accordance with 10 CFR 50.49 at fuel load. The EQ binders are maintained as controlled documents.Safety-related electrical devices located in a harsh environment and required to function or not fail for mitigation of a specific DBA are identified on the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant 10 CFR 50.49 List (1E electrical equipment requiring qualification under 10 CFR 50.49). The methodology for establishing the 10 CFR 50.49 List for Watts Bar Unit 1 is located in Section III.2 of Reference [1]. The operating category, operating time, and safety function for the 10 CFR 50.49 devices are established by the Category and Operating Time Calculations. All devices on the 10 CFR 50.49 List are analyzed for qualification to the requirements defined by 10 CFR 50.49 and documented in the EQ binders.
3.11.2.2 Mild Environment Mild environment qualification is applied to Class 1E electrical equipment only and is required by 10 CFR 50 Appendix A, Criterion 4. Watts Bar satisfies the intent of NRC Generic Letter 82-09 by utilization of a preventive maintenance, surveillance, and testing program, as discussed in that generic letter.
3.11.4 Qualification Tests and AnalysesQualification tests and analyses for safety-related electrical equipment were conducted in accordance with the requirements of 10 CFR 50.49 and the guidelines of NUREG-0588
For Class 1E equipment located in a mild environment and procured or installed before April 20, 1982 (date of issuance of NRC Generic letter 82-09), WBN demonstrates qualification by site preventative maintenance, testing, and surveillance programs.
[3]. See Table 3.11-3 for compliance with NRC criteria and standards.
For Class 1E equipment located in a mild environment and procured on or after April 20, 1982, WBN demonstrates qualification by the design or purchase specifications which identify environmental conditions and any other applicable design requirements as appropriate. These design activities are augmented by the site preventative maintenance, testing, and surveillance programs.
3.11.5 Qualification Test ResultsQualification test results are included or referenced in the EQ binder for safety-related electrical equipment in the 10CFR50.49 program.
ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                                     3.11-3
3.11.6 Loss of Heating, Ventila ting, and Air-C onditioning (HVAC)All plant locations containing safety-related equipment that need a controlled environment to perform required accident mitigation operations are served by fully redundant environmental control systems, or specific operator actions to limit minimum and maximum temperatures are required (see Section 9.4 for details). Such redundancy assures that no loss of safety-related equipment will occur from a single failure of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) equipment provided for controlling the local environment for this equipment. All data describing controlled local environmental conditions during accidents is valid for situations in which a loss of one train of HVAC has occurred.
 
3.11.7 Estimated Chemical and Radiation Environment 3.11.7.1 Chemical SprayThe worst case environment (normal or post-accident) chemical composition of the containment spray was based on the following sources and assumptions:
WATTS BAR                                                                                  WBNP-86 3.11.3 Electrical Equipment Within the Scope of 10 CFR 50.49 The process assuring that electrical equipment/cable is capable of performing its safety function is described in this section. A description of TVA's environmental qualification program is presented in Reference [1]. This reference provides documentation on the program and initial EQ binder preparation to denote that the components are qualified. TVA has implemented a program to ensure that all components will be fully qualified in accordance with 10 CFR 50.49 at fuel load. The EQ binders are maintained as controlled documents.
(1)Ice Condenser ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.11-5WATTS BARWBNP-79 (2)Boron Injection Tank (3)Cold Leg Injection Accumulators (4 tanks)
Safety-related electrical devices located in a harsh environment and required to function or not fail for mitigation of a specific DBA are identified on the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant 10 CFR 50.49 List (1E electrical equipment requiring qualification under 10 CFR 50.49). The methodology for establishing the 10 CFR 50.49 List for Watts Bar Unit 1 is located in Section III.2 of Reference [1]. The operating category, operating time, and safety function for the 10 CFR 50.49 devices are established by the Category and Operating Time Calculations. All devices on the 10 CFR 50.49 List are analyzed for qualification to the requirements defined by 10 CFR 50.49 and documented in the EQ binders.
(4)Refueling Water Storage Tank (5)Reactor Coolant SystemThe following assumptions were used in this analysis:
3.11.4 Qualification Tests and Analyses Qualification tests and analyses for safety-related electrical equipment were conducted in accordance with the requirements of 10 CFR 50.49 and the guidelines of NUREG-0588 [3]. See Table 3.11-3 for compliance with NRC criteria and standards.
(1)Calculations based on maximum pipe/tank volumes and boron concentrations and on minimum ice mass and sodium tetraborate concentration.
3.11.5 Qualification Test Results Qualification test results are included or referenced in the EQ binder for safety-related electrical equipment in the 10CFR50.49 program.
(2)All soluiions including completely melted ice mix completely.
3.11.6 Loss of Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC)
(3)Mass ratio of NaOH to boron in the ice is 1.85.
All plant locations containing safety-related equipment that need a controlled environment to perform required accident mitigation operations are served by fully redundant environmental control systems, or specific operator actions to limit minimum and maximum temperatures are required (see Section 9.4 for details). Such redundancy assures that no loss of safety-related equipment will occur from a single failure of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) equipment provided for controlling the local environment for this equipment. All data describing controlled local environmental conditions during accidents is valid for situations in which a loss of one train of HVAC has occurred.
(4)Density of borated water is equal to that of water.
3.11.7 Estimated Chemical and Radiation Environment 3.11.7.1 Chemical Spray The worst case environment (normal or post-accident) chemical composition of the containment spray was based on the following sources and assumptions:
(5)Fission products, corrosion products, etc., will be neglected.
(1)   Ice Condenser 3.11-4                              ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
(6)Results -The sources stated above yield a mixture of boric acid and sodium tetraborate with a pH of 8.1 [5]
 
3.11.7.2 Radiation 3.11.7.2.1 Inside ContainmentThe 40-year integrated normal operating dose and the maximum hypothetical accident doses are shown on the environmental data drawings (47?'235 Series). The radiation exposure inside containment after a design basis LOCA was calculated based on a release to the containment atmosphere of 100 percent of the core inventory of noble gas, 25 'percent of the core inventory of iodine, and 1 percent of the core inventory of solid fission products (equivalent to TID-l4844 releases). Removal of iodine is assumed to be due to interaction with the ice condenser only. The calculation of activity in containment after a LOCA is described in Section 15.5. Maximum gamma doses were calculated in the upper compartment, lower compartment, and ice condenser using a point-kernel-with-buildup computer clJde. Doses were integrated to determine equipment exposure for a one-year period after the accident. Beta doses were calculated only for surfaces using the semi-infinite cloud equation in Regulatory Guide 1.4.
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-79 (2)   Boron Injection Tank (3)   Cold Leg Injection Accumulators (4 tanks)
3.11-6ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-86The calculation of radiation conditions inside containment complies with Paragraph 1.4 of NUREG-0588 except a:; noted below:
(4)   Refueling Water Storage Tank (5)   Reactor Coolant System The following assumptions were used in this analysis:
(1)Paragraph 1.4(3) -The initial distribution of activity was assumed uniform throughout the containmEmt even though the containment is broken up into upper compartment, lower compartment, and ice condenser. Air return deck fans are provided to aid mixing between these compartments.
(1)   Calculations based on maximum pipe/tank volumes and boron concentrations and on minimum ice mass and sodium tetraborate concentration.
(2)Paragraph 1.4(5) -Natural deposition was not considered. Applicable deposition rates are unknown and actions of containment spray in the upper compartment, and stearn condensation in the lower compartment can be expected to wash the deposited activity into the sump.
(2)   All soluiions including completely melted ice mix completely.
3.11.7.2.2 Radiation -
(3)   Mass ratio of NaOH to boron in the ice is 1.85.
Auxiliary Building SpacesThe normal operating radiation environment in the Auxiliary Building is shown on the Environmental data draw'ings (47E235 Series). The radiation exposure in the general spaces of the auxiliary building after a design basis LOCA is due to (1) containment sump fluid being circulated in the RHR, CS, and SI systems, (2) airborne activity in the Auxiliary Building, and (3) shine from activity in the containment. The source terms used for this accident are those suggested by the NRC for use in response to NUREG-0588 and correspond to TID-14844 releases. Flow diagrams and equipment layouts were reviewed to determine the flow paths which would be used after an accident and to determine the volume and physical locations of contaminated fluids in the Auxiliary Building. The layout of the shield walls and equipment within the rooms were conservatively modeled. Source terms were calculated at various times after an accident. Dose rates were then calculated at several positions in the Auxiliary Building with respect to the contained sources and at various times after an accident. The locations where dose rates were calculated were chosen to conservatively calculate the dose rates in corridors, outside equipment cubicles, in adjacent rooms, and within the equipment cubicles. These dose rates were then integrated to determine equipment exposure for a one-year period after the accident. Airborne activity in the Auxiliary Building is due to gaseous leakage from the containment which is processed and exhausted through HEPA and charcoal filters in the Auxiliary Building gas treatment system. The dose rates through the Reactor Shield Building from activity released into the containment atmosphere were also calculated.The calculation of radiation conditions outside containment in the Auxiliary Building complies with Paragraph 1.4 of NUREG-0588.
(4)   Density of borated water is equal to that of water.
ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.11-7WATTS BARWBNP-79REFERENCES (1)September 30, 1986, Letter from R. Gridley to B. Youngblood, "Environmental Qualification of Electrical Equipment Important to Safety for Nuclear Power Plants ~'Summary Status Report -Watts Bar Nuclear Plant -
(5)   Fission products, corrosion products, etc., will be neglected.
Unit 1".(2)Watts Bar Design Criteria, WB-DC-40-54, "Environmental Qualification to 10 CFR 50.49," Revision 2.
(6)   Results -The sources stated above yield a mixture of boric acid and sodium tetraborate with a pH of 8.1 [5]
(3)NUREG 0588, Interim Staff Report on Environmental Qualification of Safety-Related Electrical Equipment, Revisio-n 1, July 1, 1981.
3.11.7.2 Radiation 3.11.7.2.1 Inside Containment The 40-year integrated normal operating dose and the maximum hypothetical accident doses are shown on the environmental data drawings (47?235 Series). The radiation exposure inside containment after a design basis LOCA was calculated based on a release to the containment atmosphere of 100 percent of the core inventory of noble gas, 25 'percent of the core inventory of iodine, and 1 percent of the core inventory of solid fission products (equivalent to TID-l4844 releases). Removal of iodine is assumed to be due to interaction with the ice condenser only. The calculation of activity in containment after a LOCA is described in Section 15.5. Maximum gamma doses were calculated in the upper compartment, lower compartment, and ice condenser using a point-kernel-with-buildup computer clJde. Doses were integrated to determine equipment exposure for a one-year period after the accident. Beta doses were calculated only for surfaces using the semi-infinite cloud equation in Regulatory Guide 1.4.
(4)Watts Bar Design Criteria, WB-DC-40-42, Revision 2, "Envirorunental Design" .(5)Westinghouse letter WAT-D-8902, Revision 1, dated July 8, 1992.
ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                                 3.11-5
3.11-8ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-91Table 3.11-1 Systems (Or Portions Of Systems) Required To Mitigate Loss-Of-Coolant Accidents And/Or High Energy Line BreaksStandby AC Power System (Includes Diesel Generators)120V Vital AC System Vital 125V DC Control Power System Diesel Generator Fuel Oil System Diesel Air Starting System Emergency Lighting System Auxiliary Control Air System Nuclear Instrumentation System Reactor Protection System Hydrogen Recombination System Containment Isolation Systems Ice Condenser System Containment Spray System Residual Heat Removal System Safety Injection System Reactor Coolant System  
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                WBNP-86 The calculation of radiation conditions inside containment complies with Paragraph 1.4 of NUREG-0588 except a:; noted below:
(1)   Paragraph 1.4(3) -The initial distribution of activity was assumed uniform throughout the containmEmt even though the containment is broken up into upper compartment, lower compartment, and ice condenser. Air return deck fans are provided to aid mixing between these compartments.
(2)   Paragraph 1.4(5) -Natural deposition was not considered. Applicable deposition rates are unknown and actions of containment spray in the upper compartment, and stearn condensation in the lower compartment can be expected to wash the deposited activity into the sump.
3.11.7.2.2 Radiation - Auxiliary Building Spaces The normal operating radiation environment in the Auxiliary Building is shown on the Environmental data draw'ings (47E235 Series). The radiation exposure in the general spaces of the auxiliary building after a design basis LOCA is due to (1) containment sump fluid being circulated in the RHR, CS, and SI systems, (2) airborne activity in the Auxiliary Building, and (3) shine from activity in the containment. The source terms used for this accident are those suggested by the NRC for use in response to NUREG-0588 and correspond to TID-14844 releases. Flow diagrams and equipment layouts were reviewed to determine the flow paths which would be used after an accident and to determine the volume and physical locations of contaminated fluids in the Auxiliary Building. The layout of the shield walls and equipment within the rooms were conservatively modeled. Source terms were calculated at various times after an accident. Dose rates were then calculated at several positions in the Auxiliary Building with respect to the contained sources and at various times after an accident. The locations where dose rates were calculated were chosen to conservatively calculate the dose rates in corridors, outside equipment cubicles, in adjacent rooms, and within the equipment cubicles. These dose rates were then integrated to determine equipment exposure for a one-year period after the accident. Airborne activity in the Auxiliary Building is due to gaseous leakage from the containment which is processed and exhausted through HEPA and charcoal filters in the Auxiliary Building gas treatment system. The dose rates through the Reactor Shield Building from activity released into the containment atmosphere were also calculated.
The calculation of radiation conditions outside containment in the Auxiliary Building complies with Paragraph 1.4 of NUREG-0588.
3.11-6                              ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
 
WATTS BAR                                                                              WBNP-79 REFERENCES (1) September 30, 1986, Letter from R. Gridley to B. Youngblood, "Environmental Qualification of Electrical Equipment Important to Safety for Nuclear Power Plants ~'Summary Status Report -Watts Bar Nuclear Plant -
Unit 1".
(2) Watts Bar Design Criteria, WB-DC-40-54, "Environmental Qualification to 10 CFR 50.49," Revision 2.
(3) NUREG 0588, Interim Staff Report on Environmental Qualification of Safety-Related Electrical Equipment, Revisio-n 1, July 1, 1981.
(4) Watts Bar Design Criteria, WB-DC-40-42, Revision 2, "Envirorunental Design" .
(5) Westinghouse letter WAT-D-8902, Revision 1, dated July 8, 1992.
ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT                               3.11-7
 
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-91 Table 3.11-1 Systems (Or Portions Of Systems) Required To Mitigate Loss-Of-Coolant Accidents And/Or High Energy Line Breaks Standby AC Power System (Includes Diesel Generators) 120V Vital AC System Vital 125V DC Control Power System Diesel Generator Fuel Oil System Diesel Air Starting System Emergency Lighting System Auxiliary Control Air System Nuclear Instrumentation System Reactor Protection System Hydrogen Recombination System Containment Isolation Systems Ice Condenser System Containment Spray System Residual Heat Removal System Safety Injection System Reactor Coolant System Auxiliary Feedwater System Containment Air Return Fan System Essential Raw Cooling Water System Component Cooling System Main Steam System Radiation Monitoring System Chemical and Volume Control System Emergency Gas Treatment Air Cleanup System Auxiliary Building Gas Treatment System Control Room Area Ventilation System Engineered Safety Feature Coolers Auxiliary Building Ventilation Subsystems:
            - Shutdown Board Room Air Conditioning System
            - Auxiliary Board Rooms Air Conditioning System
            - Turbine-Driven Auxiliary Feedwater Pump Ventilation
            - Shutdown Transformer Room Ventilation System Spent Fuel Pool Cooling System Main Feedwater System Steam Generator Blowdown System Feedwater Control System Sampling System Containment Lower Compartment Cooling System: Fan only (HELB only)
Reactor Building Purge Air Filter Trains Diesel Generator Building Ventilation System Additional Diesel Generator Building Ventilation System 3.11-8                                    ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT


Auxiliary Feed water System Containment Air Return Fan System Essential Raw Cooling Water System Component Cooling System Main Steam System Radiation Monitoring System Chemical and Volume Control System Emergency Gas Treatment Air Cleanup System Auxiliary Building Gas Treatment System Control Room Area Ventilation System Engineered Safety Feature Coolers Auxiliary Building Vent ilation Subsystems:  - Shutdown Board Room Air Conditioning System - Auxiliary Board Rooms Air Conditioning System - Turbine-Driven Auxiliary Feedwater Pump Ventilation - Shutdown Transformer Room Ventilation SystemSpent Fuel Pool Cooling System Main Feedwater System Steam Generator Blowdown System Feedwater Control System Sampling System Containment Lower Compartment Cooling System:  Fan only (HELB only)Reactor Building Purge Air Filter Trains
WATTS BAR                                                      WBNP-50 Table 3.11-2 Deleted by Amendment 50 ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT      3.11-9


Diesel Generator Building Ventilation SystemAdditional Diesel Generator Building Ventilation System ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.11-9WATTS BARWBNP-50Table 3.11-2  Deleted by Amendment 50 3.11-10ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BARWBNP-64Table 3.11-3 Compliance With Nrc Criteria And StandardsGeneral Design Criteria 1See Chapter 17General Design Criteria 4See Sections 3.5, 3.6General Design Criteria 23See Sections 7.1, 7.3General Design Criteria 50See Section 6.2 10 CFR 50, Appendix B, Criterion IIISee Chapter 17 Regulatory Guide 1.30Current activities generally conform to the requirements of N45.2.4.Regulatory Guide 1.40See Table 7.1-1 Regulatory Guide 1.63See Paragraph 8.3 Regulatory Guide 1.73See Table 7.1-1 Regulatory Guide 1.89All 10 CFR 50.49 Equipment was qualified to IEEE 323-1971, or IEEE 323-197410 CFR 50.49/NUREG-0588See References 1 and 3}}
WATTS BAR                                                                                    WBNP-64 Table 3.11-3 Compliance With Nrc Criteria And Standards General Design Criteria 1                                    See Chapter 17 General Design Criteria 4                                    See Sections 3.5, 3.6 General Design Criteria 23                                  See Sections 7.1, 7.3 General Design Criteria 50                                  See Section 6.2 10 CFR 50, Appendix B, Criterion III                        See Chapter 17 Regulatory Guide 1.30                                        Current activities generally conform to the requirements of N45.2.4.
Regulatory Guide 1.40                                        See Table 7.1-1 Regulatory Guide 1.63                                        See Paragraph 8.3 Regulatory Guide 1.73                                        See Table 7.1-1 Regulatory Guide 1.89                                        All 10 CFR 50.49 Equipment was qualified to IEEE 323-1971, or IEEE 323-1974 10 CFR 50.49/NUREG-0588                                      See References 1 and 3 3.11-10                              ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT}}

Revision as of 05:37, 14 November 2019

Final Safety Analysis Report (Fsar), Amendment 93, Section 3.8.5 Through Page 3.11-10
ML091400650
Person / Time
Site: Watts Bar Tennessee Valley Authority icon.png
Issue date: 04/30/2009
From:
Tennessee Valley Authority
To:
Office of Nuclear Reactor Regulation
References
Download: ML091400650 (274)
v • d • e


Text

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 3.8.5 Foundations and Concrete Supports 3.8.5.1 Description of Foundations and Supports 3.8.5.1.1 Primary Containment The primary containment foundation consists of a 9-foot-thick circular reinforced concrete structural slab, measuring 131 feet 7 inches in diameter. The outer 5 feet, where adjacent to other structures (225° of the slab), is thickened to 16 feet, while the remaining 135° portion is thickened to 12 feet for the outer 13 feet. These deepened portions are transitioned upward on a 2 to 1 slope to the bottom of the 9-foot-thick portion. The slab is keyed into rock in the central portion by the 8-foot-thick walls of the reactor cavity extending a total of 26 feet into rock. A 3-foot-thick concrete subpour underlies the structural concrete and caps the top of the irregular rock surface. This serves to preserve the rock in its native state of being under pressure, thus preventing deterioration of the rock surface. The base rock consists of interbedded shales and limestones. See Section 2.5.1 for additional discussion of the rock base and foundation treatment.

The interior concrete structures described in Section 3.8.3 constitute the support system for all equipment in the containment structures. All major equipment supported on the foundation (steam generators and reactor coolant pumps) is anchored through the steel liner plate into the 9-foot-thick concrete base slab, thus preventing the liner from becoming a stress carrying member.

The base liner plate is anchored to the foundation through the use of embedded 'Tee' shaped steel sections which have provisions for leveling before concrete is placed.

The embedded anchors are used as screens during the placement of the concrete to ensure that a flat surface is obtained coincident with the top of the anchors. All welded joints in the base liner plate are made at anchors. All joints in the base liner plate are equipped with leak chases to facilitate testing for leaktightness.

3.8.5.1.2 Foundations of Other Category I Structures Auxiliary-Control Building and Associate Structure All of the Auxiliary-Control Building, except the waste packaging structure, and the condensate demineralizer waste evaporator structure portion is supported by a reinforced concrete slab placed on a 4-inch-minimum-thick concrete subpour which caps the top of the irregular rock surface.

The Auxiliary Building portion of the base slab is 7 feet thick while the control bay portion is 5 feet thick. The entire base slab is located on three different levels with continuity between these levels being provided through thick walls. The thicknesses of the slab were selected primarily to provide sufficient rigidity to minimize differential vertical movements of columns and walls and secondarily to reduce shearing stresses in the slab itself. Due to the thickness of the slab, anchorage into rock was not required to resist hydrostatic up-lift pressures from maximum flood conditions.

Foundations and Concrete Supports 3.8.5-1

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 The waste packaging structure is separated from the rest of the Auxiliary Building by 2 inches of fiberglass expansion joint material. The 45-inch-thick base slab at grade elevation 728 is supported below elevation 723.25 by crushed stone backfill placed in 4-inch layers and compacted to a minimum of 70% relative density.

The base slab of the condensate demineralizer waste evaporator structure is 2-feet, 9-inches thick, except for the access tunnel part of the building which is 2-feet, 3-inches thick. The structure is supported on H-bearing piles. The access tunnel is separated from the rest of the Auxiliary Building by two inches of fiberglass expansion joint material.

Intake Pumping Station The intake structure is supported by a reinforced concrete slab placed on a 4-inch-minimum-thick concrete subpour which caps the top of the irregular rock surface. The base slab is 4 feet thick with a 6-foot-wide by 10-foot deep key located at the back of the structure. This key extends the full width of the structure. The base slab extends 10 feet past the back wall and has two areas of 26 feet by 29 feet on each side that extend beyond the walls.

The concrete retaining walls at the intake structure are designed to protect the forebay of the intake against earth slides during an earthquake. The base slabs of these cantilevered walls are keyed into rock. The walls are separated from the structure with expansion joint material.

North Steam Valve Room The north steam valve room is supported by a grillage of reinforced concrete foundation walls to base rock. These walls span vertically from base rock at El. 683.0 to the bottom of the valve room base slab at El. 722.0. There are four 4-foot thick walls running in a north-south direction and these walls are tied together by a singular 4-foot thick wall running in an east-west direction. Three closed cells are formed by these walls in combination with the Reactor Building wall. These closed cells are backfilled with a noncompacted crushed stone. The valve room foundation walls are separated from the Reactor Building foundation and wall by a 2-inch fiberglass expansion joint material.

Diesel Generator Building The base slab of the Diesel Generator Building is discussed in Section 3.8.5.5.2.

Based on soils laboratory tests, it could not be assured that the existing material between the top of firm gravel at elevation 713 and base slab was capable of safely supporting the structure. Therefore, this material was removed and replaced with crushed stone fill placed in 4-inch layers and compacted to a minimum of 70% relative density (see Section 2.5.4.5.2.). A slope stability analysis was performed in order to assure stability of the slope below the building.

3.8.5-2 Foundations and Concrete Supports

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Refueling Water Storage Tank The refueling water storage tank foundation is a solid, circular reinforced concrete structure placed on engineered granular fill over firm natural granular soil. The foundation is constructed with shear keys to prevent sliding displacement and with retaining walls to contain a reservoir of borated water after a postulated rupture of the storage tank. The foundation is protected from missiles by a concrete apron.

Discharge Overflow Structure See Section 3.8.4.1.7 for a description of the discharge overflow structure foundation.

Class 1E Electrical System Manholes and Duct Banks The manholes and a portion of the duct banks are supported on in-situ soil. The duct banks at the intake pumping station are supported on in-situ soil, piles, and a bracket on the pumping station wall, see Section 3.8.4.1.4 for additional information.

ERCW Standpipe Structures See Section 3.8.4.1.7 for the standpipe structures.

ERCW Pipe Supporting Slabs and Beams See Section 3.8.4.1.7 for a description of the beams and slab.

ERCW Valve Covers See Section 3.8.4.1.7 for a description of these structures.

Additional Diesel Generator Building The base slab of the additional Diesel Generator Building is discussed in Section 3.8.4.4.8. Similar to the Diesel Generator Building, it could not be assured that the existing soil between the top of firm gravel at elevation 713.0 and the bottom of the base slab at elevation 730.0 could safely support this structure. Therefore, the building was supported on end bearing steel H-Piles driven to refusal in sound rock or other suitable material. For additional information on this structure, see Section 3.8.4.1.8.

3.8.5.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications See Sections 3.8.1.2, 3.8.3.2, and 3.8.4.2.

3.8.5.3 Loads and Loading Combinations The loads and loading combinations are described in Sections 3.8.1.3, 3.8.3.3, and 3.8.4.3. For loads and loading combinations on the Additional Diesel Generator Building, see Table 3.8.4-22.

Foundations and Concrete Supports 3.8.5-3

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 3.8.5.4 Design and Analysis Procedure 3.8.5.4.1 Primary Containment Foundation The foundation was analyzed as a slab on a rigid foundation. The slab was analyzed using computer code Gendek 3 Finite Element Analysis of Stiffened Plates.

Maximum tangential and radial moments were obtained using the finite element analysis of the various load combinations. Shear stresses were obtained by conventional analysis for the containment vessel anchorage and major equipment loadings.

3.8.5.4.2 Auxiliary-Control Building The reinforced concrete base slab of the Auxiliary-Control Building was designed in compliance with the ACI Building Code 318-63. It was analyzed by the ICES STRUDL-II finite element method as a slab on an elastic foundation. In the ICES STRUDL- II program the foundation material was modeled by assigning a vertical spring to each node of the grid system which was used to represent the base slab. The base slab was divided into elements with wall stiffnesses being recognized by introducing flexural rigidity along the wall and torsional rigidity being recognized by including a rotational spring. Superposition of the various loading conditions were used to obtain maximum stresses. Manual calculations gave results for the bending moments which checked reasonably close with those obtained from the ICES STRUDL-II analysis. A standard frame analysis was also performed in order to determine the shearing forces in the slab.

Shear walls fixed to the base slab transmit lateral force to the slab; the base slab itself is keyed and anchored into foundation rock to transmit shear from the structure into the rock.

The 45-inch-thick slab of the waste packaging area was designed for a uniform distribution of base pressure to span as a flat plate between the load bearing walls.

Walls were thicker than necessary for structural purposes because of shielding requirements.

The base slab of the condensate demineralizer waste evaporator building portion was designed as a pile supported foundation. Batter piles were used around the perimeter of the structure to transmit lateral loads from the structure to the foundation media.

3.8.5.4.3 Intake Pumping Station The design of the base slab was controlled for the most part by uplift considerations under assumed unwatered conditions with one bay dry and full uplift over 100% of the area between the slab and the base rock. The backfilled portion of the base slab was controlled by the load from the saturated fill.

3.8.5.4.4 Soil-Supported Structures A uniform or linear distribution of base pressure was assumed in the design of all soil-supported structures and all base slabs were essentially designed as flat plates.

3.8.5-4 Foundations and Concrete Supports

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 3.8.5.4.5 Pile Supported Structures Pile supported structures were designed using conventional frame analysis or through the use of ICES STRUDL-II finite element computer program.

3.8.5.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria 3.8.5.5.1 Primary Containment Foundation The base slab design contained the following conservative features:

(1) No allowance was made for the additional spread of reactions under the walls or the additional section modulus due to the 3-foot structural fill over the base slab.

(2) In the outer area of the slab, where the additional depth is in excess of the 2-foot, 8-inch recess in the upper surface, no allowance has been made for the additional thickness which increases the stiffness of the slab and thus lowers the stresses.

3.8.5.5.2 Foundations of Other Category I Structures Auxiliary-Control Building The base slab as designed has its maximum flexural stresses and shearing stresses within the allowable working stress design limits of Table 3.8.4-1 for all loading combinations. Design Case I (dead load plus live load), which generally controlled the design, was investigated by the ICES STRUDL-II program for several loading conditions created by the three different levels of the slab and by the early conditions were superimposed in various combinations to ensure that the slab was designed for the maximum possible stresses.

The maximum calculated compression of the base slab was approximately 12 ksf. The maximum allowable compression on rock is 26 ksf (180 psi). In probable maximum flood conditions, with the dead load of the structure alone assumed to resist the buoyant force, the factor of safety against floatation is 1.53.

Intake Pumping Station The base slab of the intake pumping station serves as a water barrier under maintenance conditions with one bay unwatered. It also adds to the stability of the structure. Backfill on the extended areas of the slab add weight to the structure and the key provides resistance to sliding. The maximum calculated compression on the base slab was approximately 12 ksf. The maximum allowable compression on rock is 26 ksf (180 psi).

North Steam Valve Room The valve room foundation walls were designed to resist the maximum overturning effect on the building. This effect was due to pressure as the result of the rupture of a main steam pipe, its associated jet impingement load, and the Safe Shutdown Earthquake. This resistance to overturning was obtained by converting the maximum overturning moment on the structure into a resisting active soil pressure on the Foundations and Concrete Supports 3.8.5-5

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 foundation walls. For overturning in the east-west direction, four of the foundation walls were considered effective. For overturning in the north-south direction, the singular cross-wall was considered to be resisting the overturning. Using this pressure as a load on the walls, they were modeled as plate structures utilizing the STRUDL-II Finite Element computer program. The walls were considered to span between bedrock, the bottom of the valve room base slab and other foundation walls framing into them.

Waste Packaging Structure This structure is situated on well-compacted crushed stone backfill above rock and was designed for a normal allowable uniform bearing pressure of 4 ksf and a maximum allowable pressure with 70% or more of the base in compression of 8 ksf under maximum overturning forces. Actual calculated bearing pressures were 1.4 ksf for uniform loading and 6.7 ksf with 72% of the base in compression for maximum overturning forces.

Diesel Generator Building The structure is situated as described in Section 3.8.5.1.2. The base slab of the Diesel Generator Building is 9 feet 9 inches thick founded on crushed stone backfill and located above the PMF elevation. The structure was designed for a normal allowable uniform bearing pressure of 4 ksf and a maximum allowable pressure of 8 ksf under maximum overturning forces. Actual calculated bearing pressures for the Diesel Generator Building were 2.0 ksf for uniform loading and 4.9 ksf for maximum overturning forces with 100% of the base in compression.

Additional Diesel Generator Building For discussions on this pile supported structure see Section 3.8.4.4.8. Also, rotational restraint from the piles was not considered due to the large difference in stiffness between the 12 foot thickness of the base slab and that of the steel H-piles.

3.8.5.6 Materials, Quality Control, and Special Construction Techniques General See Section 3.8.1.6.

3.8.5.6.1 Materials Concrete and Reinforcing Steel See Section 3.8.1.6.1 Backfill Materials Backfill material was taken only from areas designated by the soils investigation program (see Section 2.5.4.5.2) as suitable for backfill material.

3.8.5-6 Foundations and Concrete Supports

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 3.8.5.6.2 Quality Control Concrete and Reinforcing Steel Concrete production and testing were as in Section 3.8.1.6.2, except some concrete used to protect rock surfaces was purchased as ready mix in conformance with ASTM C94-69.

The protective concrete for rock surfaces was specified as 2,000 psi at 90 days age.

It was in conformance to specifications.

The Shield Building base slab and the north steam valve rooms foundation walls used concrete specified as 5,000 psi at 90 days.

Some concrete did not meet specification requirements. This was evaluated and documented in the Report CEB-86-19C "Concrete Quality Evaluation". Results have been documented in affected calculation packages and drawings.

Testing of reinforcing steel was as in Section 3.8.1.6.2.

Base Rock The base area of all rock-supported structures was inspected by the principal civil design engineer in conjunction with an experienced TVA geologist during final cleanup of rock surfaces to determine its suitability as a foundation.

Backfill Quality control requirements for backfill material were as specified in Section 2.5.4.5.

3.8.5.6.3 Special Construction Techniques No special construction techniques were used.

Foundations and Concrete Supports 3.8.5-7

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 3.8.5-8 Foundations and Concrete Supports

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 3.8.6 Category I(L) Cranes 3.8.6.1 Polar Cranes 3.8.6.1.1 Description See Figures 3.8.6-1 through 3.8.6-6.

There are two polar cranes, one in each of the Reactor Buildings. Each crane is a single two-part trolley, overhead, electric traveling type; operating on an 86-foot 0-inch-diameter rail at the top of the crane wall and above the reactor. Each crane has a main hoist capacity of 175 tons and an auxiliary hoist capacity of 35 tons.

The main and auxiliary hoist motions are driven by dc motors with stepless regulated speed control. The bridge and trolley are driven by ac motors with static, stepless regulated speed control.

Structural portions of the crane bridges consist of welded boxtype girders and welded, haunched, box-type end ties. Structural portions of the trolleys consist of welded box-type trucks and welded cross girts.

Control of each crane is from a cab located below the bridge walkway at one end of a girder.

3.8.6.1.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications The following codes, standards, and specifications were used in the design of the cranes:

National Electric Code, 1971 edition.

National Electrical Manufacturers Association, Motor and Generator Standards, Standard MG-1, 1970 edition.

Crane Manufacturers Association of American, Inc., Specification #70, 1970 edition.

Federal Specification RR-W-410C American Society for Testing and Materials, 'Material Standards,' 1974 edition.

American Welding Society, D1.1-72 with 73 Revisions, Structural Welding Code.

Section 1.23, Part 1, 'Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings,' Manual of Steel Construction, Part 5, American Institute for Steel Construction, 7th edition, 1970.

American Gear Manufacturers Association Standards for Spur, Helical, Herringbone, and Beval Gears.

Category I(L) Cranes 3.8.6-1

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Where date of edition, copyright, or addendum is specified, earlier versions of the listed documents were not used. In some instances, later revisions of the listed documents were used where design safety was not compromised.

The cranes meet applicable requirements of the listed codes, standards, and specifications.

3.8.6.1.3 Loads, Loading Combinations, and Allowable Stresses Loads, loading combinations, and allowable stresses are shown in Table 3.8.6-1.

3.8.6.1.4 Design and Analysis Procedure The bridge girders and end ties for each crane were designed as simple beams in the vertical plane and as a continuous frame in the horizontal plane. Stresses in the girders and end ties were computed with the trolley positioned to produce maximum stresses.

Seismic restraints are located on the bottom of each girder and these restraints are designed to withstand seismically applied loads to ensure the crane will not fall during an earthquake.

Trolley positions used were the maximum end position, third point, and the point near the center which produces maximum bending moments.

Trolley members were designed as simple beams. Design of the bridge girders and end ties was by TVA. Mechanical parts and structural members except the bridge girders and end ties were designed by the contractor. Calculations and designs made by the contractor were reviewed by TVA design engineers.

In designing for earthquake conditions, forces due to accelerations at the crane bridge rails were used as static loads for determining component and member sizes. After establishing component and member sizes, a dynamic analysis, using appropriate response spectra, was made of the total crane to determine that allowable stresses had not been exceeded.

Earthquake accelerations at the bridge rails were determined by dynamic analysis of the structures supporting the crane rails.

The polar crane was also evaluated for seismic loads based on the Set B seismic response spectra using 2% damping for OBE and 4% damping for SSE. The polar crane was initially evaluated for seismic loads based upon Set A seismic response spectra.

3.8.6.1.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria Allowable stresses for all load combinations used for the various crane parts are given in Table 3.8.6-1. For normal load conditions, the allowable stresses provide safety factors of 2 to 1 on yield for structural parts and 5 to 1 on ultimate for mechanical parts, except for wire ropes which have a minimum safety factor of 5 to 1 on ultimate. For limiting conditions, such as an SSE earthquake or stall, stresses do not exceed .9 yield.

3.8.6-2 Category I(L) Cranes

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 3.8.6.1.6 Materials, Quality Controls, and Special Construction Techniques A36 steel was used for the major structural portions of the crane. Design by TVA and erection by TVA were in accordance with TVA's quality assurance program. Design and fabrication by the contractor were in accordance with the contractor's quality assurance program which was reviewed and approved by TVA's design engineers.

The contractor's quality assurance program covers the criteria in Appendix B of 10 CFR 50. Fabrication procedures such as welding, stress relieving, and nondestructive testing were included in appendices to the contractor's quality assurance program.

ASTM standards were used for all material specifications and certified mill test reports were provided by the contractor for materials used for all load-carrying members.

This crane is covered by TVA's Augmented Quality Assurance Program for Seismic Category I(L) Structures.

3.8.6.1.7 Testing and Inservice Surveillance Requirements Upon completion of erection and adjustments on each crane, all crane motions and operating parts were thoroughly tested with the crane handling 125 percent of rated capacity. Tests were made to prove the ability of each crane to handle its rated capacity and smaller loads smoothly at any speed within the specified speed range.

Each brake was tested to demonstrate its ability to hold the required load.

After the initial test, periodic visual inspections of each crane are to be made. Parts inspected during the visual inspection are to include all bolted parts, couplings, brakes, hoist ropes, hoist blocks, limit switches, and equalizer systems.

3.8.6.1.8 Safety Features The cranes were designed to withstand an SSE and to maintain any load up to rated capacity during and after the earthquake period.

The bridges are equipped with double flange wheels, spring-set, electrically-released brakes which set and firmly lock two of the wheels when the bridge drive machinery is not operating or when power is lost for any reason, hold down lugs which run under the rail heads, and seismic restraints located on the bottom of each girder. During an earthquake the crane rail will yield before the crane wheels fail, thus allowing the crane to move until the seismic restraints on each girder contact the crane wall. These restraints hold the crane on the runway. Guide rollers, mounted on each extreme corner truck, travel against the outer surface of the bridge rail to assure bridge truck alignment.

The trolleys are each equipped with double flange wheels, two spring-set, electrically-released brakes which set and firmly lock the driving wheels when the trolley drive machinery is not operating or when power is lost for any reason, and hold down lugs which run under the rail heads. Positive wheel and bumper stops are provided at both ends of the bridge. During an earthquake, the trolley could be displaced, but it will not leave its rails which are firmly attached to the bridge structure.

Category I(L) Cranes 3.8.6-3

WATTS BAR WBNP-68 Safety features provided for each hoist include two independent gearing systems, connected by a cross shaft to prevent windup, two brakes with each of the brakes operating through one of the independent gearing systems, two upper travel limit switches, one lower travel limit switch, over-speed switches set to trip at 120% of maximum rated speed, and emergency dynamic braking for controlled lowering in case of simultaneous failure of ac power source and holding brakes. In addition, each hoist incorporates a symmetrical cross reeving system designed to hold the load level with either rope. Each hoist is also provided with a hydraulic equalizing system to prevent dropping the load and to limit shock loading in case of a single rope failure. Each hoist is also provided with a load sensing system which provides cessation of hoisting when a load of 100% of the rated capacity is applied. The main hoist is also provided with an audible alarm which activates at 100% of rated capacity, as well as a load display on the control console and a load display board which is visible from the Reactor Building refueling floor (elevation 757.0). Holding brakes for the hoists are the spring-set, electrically released type with provisions for manual release of the brakes.

The capacity of each main hoist brake is sufficient to stop a 100% rated load traveling at the maximum rated hoisting speed within a distance of 6 inches.

Safety control features provided for all motions consist of overcurrent protection, undervoltage protection, control actuators which return to the stop position when released, and an emergency-stop pushbutton.

3.8.6.2 Auxiliary Building Crane 3.8.6.2.1 Description See Figure 3.8.6-7 through 3.8.6-11.

The crane in the Auxiliary Building is a single trolley, overhead, electric traveling type with a span of 77 feet. The crane has a main hoist capacity of 125 tons and an auxiliary hoist capacity of 10 tons.

The main and auxiliary hoists are driven by dc motors with regenerative braking and stepless speed control. DC power is supplied by solid-state thyristor-silicon controlled rectifiers. The bridge and trolley travel motions are ac operated with static-stepless regulated speed control.

Structural portions of the crane bridge consist of welded, box-type girders and welded, haunches, box-type end ties. Structural portions of the trolley consist of welded, box-type trucks and welded cross girts.

Control of the crane is from a control console in the operator cab which is located at midspan of the crane beneath the south girder.

3.8.6-4 Category I(L) Cranes

WATTS BAR WBNP-90 The one crane serves the needs of two reactor units. It handles the fuel casks, new fuel shipments to the new fuel storage, shield plugs at the equipment access doors, and any large pieces of equipment going into or out of the Reactor Buildings via the Auxiliary Building.

3.8.6.2.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications The following codes, standards, and specifications were used in the design of the crane:

National Electric Code, 1970 Edition.

NEMA Standard MG1, 1970 Edition.

Crane Manufacturers Association of American, Inc., Specification No. 70, 1970 Edition.

Federal Specification RR-W-410C.

ASTM Material Standards, 1974 Edition.

AWS, D1.1-72 with 1973 Revisions, Structural Welding Code.

Section 1.23, Part I, Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings; AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 7th Edition, 1970.

American Gear Manufacturers Association Standards for Spur, Helical, Herringbone, and Bevel Gears.

Where date of edition, copyright, or addendum is specified, earlier versions of the listed documents were not used. In some instances, later revisions of the listed documents were used where design safety was not compromised.

The cranes meet applicable requirements of the listed codes, standards, and specifications.

3.8.6.2.3 Loads, Loading Combinations, and Allowable Stresses Loads, loading combinations, and allowable stresses are shown in Table 3.8.6-2.

3.8.6.2.4 Design and Analysis Procedure The bridge girders and end ties for the crane were designed as simple beams in the vertical plane and as a continuous frame in the horizontal plane. Stresses in the girders and end ties were computed with the trolley positioned to produce maximum stresses. Trolley positions used were the maximum end position.

Category I(L) Cranes 3.8.6-5

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 third point, and the point near the center which produces maximum bending moments.

The end tie and girder connections are designed to withstand seismically applied loads to ensure that the crane will not fall during an earthquake.

Trolley members were designed as simple beams. Design of the bridge girders and end ties was by TVA. Mechanical parts and structural members except the bridge girders and end ties were designed by the contractor. Calculations and designs made by the contractor were reviewed by TVA.

In designing for earthquake conditions, forces due to accelerations at the crane rails were used as static loads for determining component and member sizes. After establishing component and member sizes, a dynamic analysis, using appropriate response spectra, was made of the total crane to determine that allowable stresses had not been exceeded.

Earthquake accelerations at the crane rails were determined by dynamic analysis of the supporting structure of the Auxiliary Building.

The Auxiliary Building crane was initially evaluated for seismic loads based upon Set A seismic response spectra.

The Auxiliary Building crane was also evaluated for seismic loads based upon Set B seismic response spectra using 4% damping for SSE.

3.8.6.2.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria Allowable stresses for all load combinations used for the various crane parts are given in Table 3.8.6-2. For normal load conditions, the allowable stresses provide a safety factor of 2 to 1 on yield for structural parts and 5 to 1 on ultimate for mechanical parts, except for wire ropes which have a minimum safety factor of 5 to 1 on ultimate. For limiting conditions, such as a SSE or stall, stresses do not exceed 0.9 yield.

Since the design stresses for SSE do not exceed 0.9 yield, OBE, which results in lower design loads, does not govern.

3.8.6.2.6 Materials, Quality Controls, and Special Construction Techniques ASTM A 36 steel was used for the major structural portions of the crane. Design by TVA and erection by TVA were in accordance with the TVA quality assurance program.

Design and fabrication by the contractor were in accordance with the contractor's quality assurance program which was reviewed and approved by TVA's design engineers. The contractor quality assurance program covers the criteria in Appendix B of 10 CFR 5O. Fabrication procedures such as welding, stress relieving, and nondestructive testing, were included in appendices to the contractor's quality assurance program.

ASTM standards were used for all material specifications and certified mill tests reports were provided by the contractor for materials used for all load-carrying members.

3.8.6-6 Category I(L) Cranes

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 This crane is covered by TVA's Augmented Quality Assurance Program for Seismic Category I(L) Structures.

3.8.6.2.7 Testing and Inservice Surveillance Requirements Upon completion of erection and adjustments on the crane, all crane motions and operating parts were thoroughly tested with crane handling 125% of rated capacity.

Tests were made to prove the ability of the crane to handle its rated capacity and smaller loads smoothly at any speed within the specified speed range. Each brake was tested to demonstrate its ability to hold the required load.

After the initial test, periodic visual inspections of the crane are to be made. Parts inspected during the visual inspection are to include all bolted parts, couplings, brakes, hoist ropes, hoist blocks, limit switches, and equalizer systems.

3.8.6.2.8 Safety Features The crane was designed to withstand an SSE and to maintain any load up to rated capacity during and after the earthquake period.

The bridge is equipped with double flange wheels, hold down lugs which run under the rail heads, one spring-released hydraulically set brake, and one spring-set electrically released brake which sets and firmly locks the wheels when the bridge drive machinery is not operating or when power is lost for any reason. During an earthquake the crane rail will yield before failure of the crane wheels and allow the end ties to contact the adjacent concrete wall, thus restraining the crane and preventing it from falling.

Positive wheel and bumper stops are provided at each end of the bridge travel.

The trolley is equipped with double flange wheels, two spring-set, electrically released brakes which set and firmly lock the driving wheels when the trolley drive machinery is not operating or when power is lost for any reason, and hold down lugs which run under the rail heads. Positive wheel and bumper stops are provided at both ends of the bridge. During an earthquake, the trolley could be displaced, but it will not leave the rails which are firmly attached to the bridge structure.

Safety features provided for each hoist include two independent gearing systems, connected by a cross shaft to prevent windup, two brakes with each of the brakes operating through one of the independent gearing systems, two upper traveling limit switches, one lower travel limit switch, over-speed switches set to trip at 120% of maximum rated speed, and emergency dynamic braking for controlled lowering in case of simultaneous failure of ac power source and holding brakes. In addition, the main hoist incorporates a symmetrical cross reeving system designed to hold the load level with either rope and to limit the shock loading in case of a single rope failure, and a hydraulic sheave equalizing system to prevent dropping the load and to limit shock loading in case of a single rope failure. The main hoist is also provided with a load sensing system which provides cessation of hoisting when a load of 100% of the rated capacity is applied. The main hoist is also provided with an audible alarm which activates at 100% of rated capacity, as well as a load display on the control console and a load display board which is visible from the Auxiliary Building refueling floor Category I(L) Cranes 3.8.6-7

WATTS BAR WBNP-68 (elevation 757.0). The auxiliary hoist has a two-part whip-style reeving so that a single rope failure will not drop the load. Holding brakes for the hoists are the spring-set, electrically released type with provisions for manual release of the brakes. The capacity of each main hoist brake is sufficient to stop at 100% rated load traveling at the maximum rated hoisting speed within a distance of 6 inches.

The interlocks will not be bypassed for any loads except the fuel transfer gates and for new fuel handling. All loads in excess of 2,059 lbs, or which would have a kinetic energy greater than that of a spent fuel assembly from its normal handling height, will be transported around the spent fuel pit, rather than over, with the interlocks activated, via the normal paths used for heavy loads (see Figure Q10.6-2).

Safety control features provided for all motions consist of overcurrent protection, undervoltage protection, control actuators which return to the stop position when released, and an emergency-stop pushbutton.

The electrical interlocks and mechanical stops will be administratively bypassed to allow use of the crane for handling the fuel transfer canal gate. The bypass is accomplished by means of a keyed switch, operation of which bypasses all interlocks controlling crane movements and activates a green indicating light located beneath the operator's cab. The indicating light is visible from any point on the operating floor.

Control of the bypass key by administrative personnel and the ability of administrative personnel to stop the crane by means of any one of three pushbutton stations ensure that administrative personnel control all bypass operations.

Two pushbutton stations are located on the west wall and one pushbutton station is located on the east wall of the Auxiliary Building about four feet above the elevation 757.0 operating floor. These stations are readily accessible to administrative personnel on the operating floor.

Testing of bypass interlocks is accomplished on a periodic basis in accordance with approved WBNP surveillance instructions. Testing must occur within seven calendar days prior to initial use, and every seven calendar days during continued regular usage. Each limit switch is manually operated to ascertain proper functioning of interlock circuits. To verify that the interlock system is functioning properly, each limit switch is moved to its actuated position, and all affected crane controls operated to ensure that crane movement does not occur.

3.8.6-8 Category I(L) Cranes

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Table 3.8.6-1 Polar Cranes Loads, Loading Combinations, and Allowable Stresses (Page 1 of 2)

No. Load Combinations Allowable Stresses (psi)

Tension Compre Shear ssion(2)

Bridge Structure I Dead Live 0.50 Fy 0.48 Fy 0.33 Fy Impact Trolley tractive II Dead Live 0.50 Fy 0.48 Fy 0.33 Fy Impact Bridge tractive III Dead Live 0.62 Fy 0.59 Fy 0.41 Fy Trolley collision IV Dead Trolley weight 0.90 Fy 0.90 Fy 0.50 Fy Stall at 275% capacity V Dead Live at 100% capacity 0.90 Fy 0.90 Fy 0.50 Fy SSE No. Load Combinations Allowable Stresses (psi)

Tension Compression(2) Shear Trolley Structure I Dead Live 0.5 FY 0.48 FY 0.33 FY Impact II Dead 0.9 FY(4) 0.9 FY 0.5 FY Stall at 275% capacity 0.62 FY(3) 0.59 FY 0.41 FY III Same as case V for bridge Mechanical Parts No. Load Combinations Allowable Stresses (psi)

Tension and Shear Compression(2)

Parts Other Than Wheel Axles and Saddle Truck Connecting Pins Category I(L) Cranes 3.8.6-9

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Table 3.8.6-1 Polar Cranes Loads, Loading Combinations, and Allowable Stresses (Page 2 of 2)

I Dead Ult 2 x Ult Live 5 15 II Dead 0.9 FY 0.5 FY Stall at 275% capacity Wheel Axles and Connecting Pins I Dead Ult 2 x Ult Live 5 15 Impact II Dead Ult 2 x Ult Live 5 15 Collision No. Load Combinations Allowable Stresses (psi)

Tension and Shear Compression(2)

Wheel Axles and Connecting Pins (Continued)

III Dead 0.40 FY 0.50 FY Stall at 275% capacity IV Dead 0.90 FY 0.50 FY Live at 100% capacity SSE Notes:

(1)Acts in one horizontal direction at any given time and acts in the vertical and horizontal directions simultaneously.

(2)The value given for allowable compression stress is the maximum value permitted, when buckling does not control. The critical buckling stress, Fcr, shall be used in place of FY when buckling controls.

(3)For sheave frames, cross girts, and their respective connections (4)For all other members 3.8.6-10 Category I(L) Cranes

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Table 3.8.6-2 Auxiliary Building Crane Loads, Loading Combinations, And Allowable Stresses (Page 1 of 2)

No. Load Combinations Allowable Stresses (psi)

Tension Compression(2) Shear Bridge Structure I Dead Live 0.50 Fy 0.48 Fy 0.33 Fy Impact Trolley tractive II Dead Live 0.50 Fy 0.48 Fy 0.33 Fy Impact Bridge tractive III Dead Live 0.62 Fy 0.59 Fy 0.41 Fy Trolley collision IV Dead Live 0.62 Fy 0.59 Fy 0.41 Fy Bridge collision V Dead Trolley weight 0.90 Fy 0.90 Fy 0.50 Fy Stall at 275% capacity VI Dead 0.90 Fy 0.90 Fy 0.50 Fy Live at 100% capacity SSE No. Load Combinations Allowable Stresses (psi)

Tension Compression(2) Shear Trolley Structure I Dead Live 0.5 FY 0.48 FY 0.33 FY Impact II Dead 0.9 FY(4) 0.9 FY 0.50 FY Stall at 275% capacity 0.62 FY(3) 0.59 FY 0.41 FY III Same as case VI for bridge Mechanical Parts No. Load Combinations Allowable Stresses (psi)

Tension and Shear Compression(2)

Parts Other Than Wheel Axles and Saddle Truck Connecting Pins Category I(L) Cranes 3.8.6-11

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Table 3.8.6-2 Auxiliary Building Crane Loads, Loading Combinations, And Allowable Stresses (Page 2 of 2)

I Dead Ult 2 x Ult Live 5 15 II Dead 0.9 FY 0.50 FY Stall at 275% capacity Wheel Axles and Connecting Pins I Dead Ult 2 x Ult Live 5 15 Impact II Dead Ult 2 x Ult Live 5 15 Collision III Dead 0.9 FY 0.5 FY Stall at 275% capacity IV Dead 0.9 FY 0.50 FY Live at 100% capacity SSE Notes:

(1) Acts in one horizontal direction at any given time and acts in the vertical and horizontal directions simultaneously.

(2) The value given for allowable compression stress is the maximum value permitted, when buckling does not control. The critical buckling stress, Fcr, shall be used in place of FY when buckling controls.

(3) For sheave frames, cross girts, and their respective connections (4) For all other members 3.8.6-12 Category I(L) Cranes

Category I (L) Cranes WATTS BAR WBNP-71 Figure 3.8.6-1 Reactor Building Units 1 & 2 175 Ton Polar Cranes Arrangement 3.8.6-13

Category I (L) Cranes WATTS BAR WBNP-48 Figure 3.8.6-2 Reactor Building Units 1 & 2 175 Ton Polar Cranes Trolley Arrangement and Details (Sheet 1) 3.8.6-14

Category I (L) Cranes WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Figure 3.8.6-3 Reactor Building Units 1 & 2 175 Ton Polar Cranes Trolley Arrangement and Details (Sheet 2) 3.8.6-15

Category I (L) Cranes WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Figure 3.8.6-4 175 Ton Polar Cranes Bridge Details 3.8.6-16

Category I (L) Cranes WATTS BAR Figure 3.8.6-5 Reactor Building Units 1 & 2 175 Ton Polar Cranes Miscellaneous Details (Sheet 1)

WBNP-89 3.8.6-17

Category I (L) Cranes WATTS BAR WBNP-44 Figure 3.8.6-6 Reactor Building Units 1 & 2 175 Ton Polar Cranes Miscellaneous Details (Sheet 2) 3.8.6-18

Security-Related Information - Withheld Under 10CFR2.390 WATTS BAR WBNP-71 Figure 3.8.6-7 Auxiliary Building Units 1 & 2 125 Ton Crane Arrangement Category I (L) Cranes 3.8.6-19

Category I (L) Cranes WATTS BAR Figure 3.8.6-8 Auxiliary Building Units 1 & 2 125 Ton Crane Trolley Arrangement WBNP-89 3.8.6-20

Category I (L) Cranes WATTS BAR Figure 3.8.6-9 Auxiliary Building Units 1 & 2 125 Ton Crane Trolley Details WBNP-89 3.8.6-21

Category I (L) Cranes WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Figure 3.8.6-10 Auxiliary Building Units 1 & 2 125 Ton Crane Bridge Details 3.8.6-22

Category I (L) Cranes WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Figure 3.8.6-11 125 Ton Crane Limit Switch and Mechanical Stop Arrangement 3.8.6-23

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK Category I (L) Cranes 3.8.6-24

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 3.8ASHELL TEMPERATURE TRANSIENTS Figure 3.8A-1 presents average shell temperatures adjacent to the three compartments as a function of time after the DBA. The DBA is a double end rupture of the reactor coolant pipe with the reactor decay heat released into the lower compartment as steam. Initially the steam is condensed in the ice compartment. After the ice melts, the steam is condensed in the upper compartment by a water spray.

The lower compartment temperature rises to 250°F, essentially instantaneously, then is reduced to 220°F very shortly after the blowdown is completed. The blowdown is completed before the shell adjacent to the lower compartment reaches 220°F, as illustrated by the smooth curve presented in Figure 3.8A-1.

The upper compartment temperature rises essentially instantaneously due to compression of the noncondensable gases into the upper compartment. The sharp rise at 7,000 seconds simulates the disappearance of the ice from the ice compartment. The shell temperature will rise at a maximum of 0.11 degree per second during the rise from 140°F to 190°F. The subsequent temperature decrease of the shell adjacent to the upper compartment is due to the reduction in decay heat.

The curve labeled shell adjacent to the ice compartment indicates the temperature of the shell adjacent to the ice compartment. The shell is separated from the ice compartment with a thick layer of insulation, hence the rather slow response for the temperature of the shell adjacent to the ice compartment. After the ice is all melted the temperature inside the ice compartment will be the same as the temperature in the lower compartment; however, the shell temperature adjacent to the ice compartment will always be less than the temperature in the ice compartment because of insulation.

The temperature of the shell adjacent to the ice compartment will peak at less than 220°F.

The curves in Figure 3.8A-1 are an average shell temperature representative for the bulk of the shell. Some areas near boundaries between compartments and near the base will differ significantly from the bulk. The lower portion of the lower compartment shell will be insulated for the purpose of minimizing the transient effects. Figure 3.8A-2 is a plot of shell temperature versus distance above Elevation 702.78 for various times after a LOCA. In establishing these curves it was assumed that top of the concrete slab is at Elevation 702.78 inches, and that the top of the insulation is at Elevation 707.11, and the top 8 inches of insulation is tapered from 2 inches thick to 1/4-inch thick.

SHELL TEMPERATURE TRANSIENTS 3.8A-1

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 3.8A-2 SHELL TEMPERATURE TRANSIENTS

WATTS BAR SHELL TEMPERATURE TRANSIENTS Figure 3.8A-1 Shell Wall Temperature Versus Time After Loss of Coolant WBNP-79 3.8A-3

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Figure 3.8A-2 Typical Temperature Transient Lower Compartment Wall 3.8A-4 SHELL TEMPERATURE TRANSIENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 3.8B BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA 3.8B.1 INTRODUCTION The buckling design criteria in this appendix are applicable to stiffened circular cylindrical and spherical shells. Section 2.0 sets forth the buckling design criteria for shells stiffened with circumferential stiffeners. Because of existing penetrations, interferences, or large attached masses, it may be expedient to further analyze some areas of the vessel as independent panels. Section 3.0 sets forth the criteria for shells stiffened with a combination of circumferential and vertical stiffeners. Section 4.0 deals with the criteria for a spherical dome. The procedures and data presented were adapted primarily from Chapter 3 of the Shell Analysis Manual, by E. H. Baker, A. P.

Cappelli, L. Kovalevsky, F. L. Rish, and R. M. Verette, National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C., Contractor Report CR-912, April 1968. The criteria given in this section cover only the range of variables needed for the structural steel containment vessel for which these specifications were prepared.

The buckling criteria are specified in terms of unit stresses and membrane forces in the shell. Stresses caused by multiple loads must be combined according to provisions of Table 3.8B-1 for use in these criteria. The values of the load factors and factors of safety used in the buckling criteria are given in Section 5.0. The method of applying the factors of safety to the criteria is shown in Table 3.8B-2.

3.8B.2 SHELLS STIFFENED WITH CIRCUMFERENTIAL STIFFENERS 3.8B.2.1 Circular Cylindrical Shells Under Axial Compression The critical buckling stress for a cylinder under axial compression alone is determined by the equation C c Et (cr1 ) = -------------

R for various ranges of cylinder length defined by 2

L 2 Z = -----

Rt The constant Cc is determined from Figure 3.8B-l for the appropriate value of R/t.

BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA 3.8B-1

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 The critical buckling stress in a cylinder under axial compression and internal pressure is determined by:

( 1 ) = ( C + C ) Et cr ------

c R The constants Cc and Cc are determined from Figures 3.8B-1 and 3.8B-2, respectively. The constant Cc given in Figure 3.8B-2 depends only upon the internal pressure and R/Et.

3.8B.2.2 Circular Cylindrical Shells in Circumferential Compression A circular cylindrical shell under a critical external radial or hydrostatic pressure will buckle in circumferential compression. The critical circumferential compressive stress is given by:

Kp 2 E t 2 (cr - ---

2 ) = -------------------------

12 ( 1 - u ) L2 for various values of Z given in Section 2.1. Curves for determining the constant Kp for both radial and hydrostatic pressure are given in Figure 3.8B-3.

3.8B.2.3 Circular Cylindrical Shells Under Torsion The shear buckling stress of the cylinder subject to torsional loads is given by:

Et

( 3 ) = C ----------------

cr s RZ 1 4 The shear buckling stress of the cylinder subject to torsion and internal pressure is determined by

( 3 ) = ( C + C ) --------------- Et cr s s

-

14 RZ where constants, Cs and Cs, are determined from Figures 3.8B-4 and 3.8B-5. Values of Cs are given for internal radial pressure alone and internal pressure plus an external load equal to the longitudinal force produced by the internal pressure.

3.8B-2 BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 Figure 3.8B-4 is applicable for values of:

L2 2 Z = ----- > 100 Rt For cylinders with length constant Z less than 100, the shear buckling stress is determined by:

2 K' s E t 2 (3) cr = -------------------------- --- a b 2

12 ( 1 - ) a for values of:

2 a 2 Z = ------ 1-Rt 3.8B.2.4 where a is the effective length and b is the circumference of the cylinder. The coefficient K's is given in Figure 3.8B-10.Circular Cylindrical Shells Under Bending The critical buckling stress for the cylinder under bending is computed by the equation:

( 4 ) = C Et cr ------

bR where the buckling constant, Cb is given by Figure 3.8B-6.

The critical buckling stress for the cylinder under internal pressure and bending is computed by:

( 4 ) = ( C + C ) Et cr ------

b b R where Cb and Cb are given by Figures 3.8B-6 and 3.8B-7, respectively.

Figure 3.8B-7 is a function of the internal pressure and the geometry.

3.8B.2.5 Circular Cylindrical Shell Under Combined Loads The criterion for buckling failure of the cylindrical shell under combined loading is expressed by an interaction equation of stress-ratios of the form:

BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA 3.8B-3

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 y z R 1x + R 2 + R 3 = 1 Note that (n) (n) (n) (n)

N1 F1 N2 F2 N m Fm Nk Fk R n = -------------------- + -------------------- + ----------------------- --------------------

(n) (n) (n) (n) cr t cr t cr t cr t where Nm is the compressive or shear membrane force and Fm is the appropriate load factor, given in Section 5.0, for individual loading components in any loading combination. The superscript n refers to the particular type of loading. Superscripts n

= 1, 2, 3, and 4 represent respectively axial compression, circumferential compression, torsion, and bending loads.

The following interaction equations were used in the design of the cylindrical shell.

(a) Axial Compression and Circumferential Compression m =k m =k N(m1 ) F m N(m2 ) F m

+

cr(1) t ------------------

cr(2) t

-< 1 m=o m=o (b) Axial Compression and Bending m =k m=k N(m1 ) Fm N(m4 ) Fm

+

cr(1) t ------------------- < 19 cr(4) t m=o m =o (c) Axial Compression and Torsion m= k 2 N(m1 ) Fm m= k N( 3 ) F

+

m m

- <1

cr(1) t (3) t m=o m=o cr 3.8B-4 BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 (d) Axial Compression, Bending, and Torsion m= k m =k m= k (3) 2 N(m1 ) Fm N(m4 ) Fm N m F m

+

cr(1 ) t ------------------- +

cr(4) t ------------------- < 1 cr(3) t m=o m=o m=o (e) Axial Compression, Circumferential Compression, and Torsion m=k m= k m=k 2 N(m1 ) Fm N(m2 ) Fm N(m3 ) Fm

+

cr(1) t ------------------- +

cr(2) t ------------------- < 1 cr(3) t m= o m= o m= o The longitudinal membrane stresses produced by the nonaxisymmetric pressure loads (NASPL) were considered as caused by bending loads in the interaction equations.

3.8B.3 SHELLS STIFFENED WITH A COMBINATION OF CIRCUMFERENTIAL AND VERTICAL STIFFENERS 3.1 The shell was provided with permanent circumferential and vertical stiffeners.

The circumferential stiffeners were designed to have a spring stiffness at least great enough to enforce nodes in the vertical stiffeners so as to preclude a general instability mode of buckling failure, thus ensuring that if buckling occurs, it will occur in stiffened panels between the circumferential stiffeners.

An acceptable procedure for determining the critical buckling stresses in the vertical stiffeners and stiffened panels is outlined in Section 3.43 Shell Analysis Manual, by E. H. Baker A. P. Cappelli, L. Kovalevsky, F. L. Rish, and R. M. Verette, National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C., Contractor Report CR-912, April 1968.

3.2 In addition for shells stiffened with a combination of circumferential and vertical stiffeners under combined load, the criterion for buckling failure of the shell plate is expressed by an interaction equation of stress ratios in the form y

R 1X + R 2 + R 3Z < 1 similar to the interaction equations of Section 2.5.

The critical buckling stresses for the shell plates between the circumferential and vertical stiffeners were determined by the following equations.

(a) Curved Panel under Axial Compression.

The critical buckling stress for a curved cylindrical panel under axial compression alone is determined by the equation:

BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA 3.8B-5

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Kc 2 E 2 cr = -------------------------- --t-12 ( 1 - 2 ) b for various ranges of cylinder length given by:

b2 Z = ----- 2 Rt The constant Kc is determined from Figure 3.8B-8.

(b) Curved Panel in Circumferential Compression The critical buckling stress of a curved cylindrical panel under circumferential compression was determined by Section 2.2.

(c) Curved Panel Under Torsion The shear buckling stress of a curved cylindrical panel subjected to torsional loads is given by:

Ks2 E t 2 cr = --------------------------- --- a b 12 ( 1 - 2 ) b for values of:

b2 Z = ----- 2 Rt The coefficient, Ks, is given in Figure 3.8B-9. For cylindrical panels with length, a, less than the arc length, b, the shear buckling stress is determined by:

K s' 2 E t 2 cr = -------------------------- --- a b 12 ( 1 - 2 ) a for values of:

a2 z = ----- 2 Rt 3.8B-6 BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Curves for determining Ks, are given in Figure 3.8B-10.

(d) Curved Panels Under Bending The critical buckling stress for a curved panel in bending shall be computed using the equation for axial compression given in (a) of this section.

3.3 The critical buckling stress in a stiffened hemispherical shell for the analysis required in the bid specification is not treated in the Shell Analysis Manual, and except for external pressure, was determined by the following equation:

t cr = 0.125E ----

R where:

t = thickness of shell E = modulus of elasticity R = radius of shell 3.8B.4 SPHERICAL SHELLS 3.8B.4.1 The critical buckling stress in the spherical dome, except for external pressure, was determined by the following equation:

Et cr = 0.125 ------

R where t = thickness of shell E = modulus of elasticity R = radius of shell 3.8B.4.2 Spherical Shell Under Combined Loads The criterion for buckling failure of the dome is expressed by an interaction equation of the stress ratios in the form:

y R 1X + R 2 + R 3Z < 1 BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA 3.8B-7

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 similar to the interaction equation of Section 2.5.

A set of interaction equations similar to those in Section 2.5 was used in the design except that the effects due to torsion were considered.

3.8B.5 FACTOR OF SAFETY The buckling stress criteria were evaluated to determine the factors of safety against buckling inherent in the criteria. The factors which affect stability were determined and the criteria were evaluated to account for these factors. The basis used to evaluate the criteria to account for the factors were (1) how well established are the effects of the factors on stability of these shells (2) amount of supporting data in the literature and (3) margins marked by the critical stresses and interaction equations used in the criteria.

The buckling criteria were found to be very conservative and judged to provide at least a factor of safety of 2.0 against buckling for all loading conditions for which the vessels were designed.

In addition, a load factor of 1.1 will be applied to load conditions which include the Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE). A load factor of 1.25 will be used with all other load conditions.

3.8B-8 BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA

BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WATTS BAR Table 3.8B-1 MULTIPLE LOAD COMBINATIONS VARIOUS PLANT CONDITIONS LOADING CONDITIONS (Page 1 of 3)

MSLB Norm. Accident MSLB Post Const. Normal Oper. 1/2 Accident (Static) Accident Accident Accident Load Components Cond. Test. Cond. Design SSE 1/2 SSE 1/2 SSE SSE (Static) SSE Flooding Personnel Access Lock Load X X Penetration Loads X X X X X X Containment Vessel and Appurtenances X X X X X X X X Dead Loads Walkway Live Loads X Spray Header and Lighting Fixtures X X X Live Loads Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE)

Lateral and Vertical X X Loads Design Internal Pressure of Design X External Pressure One-half Safe Shutdown X X X X Earthquake (1/2 SSE) Lateral and Vertical Loads 3.8B-9 WBNP-64

Table 3.8B-1 MULTIPLE LOAD COMBINATIONS VARIOUS PLANT CONDITIONS 3.8B-10 WATTS BAR LOADING CONDITIONS (Page 2 of 3)

MSLB Norm. Accident MSLB Post Const. Normal Oper. 1/2 Accident (Static) Accident Accident Accident Load Components Cond. Test. Cond. Design SSE 1/2 SSE 1/2 SSE SSE (Static) SSE Flooding Design Internal Pressure or X X Pressure Transient Loads Design Temperature X Internal Temperature Range X of 60EF to 120EF Internal Temperature Range X X of 80EF to 250EF Thermal Stress Loads Including X X Shell Temperature Transients Hydrostatic Load Case 1a or 1B X X (See Note 1)

BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA Hydrostatic Load X Case II (See Note 1)

Wind Loads X (See Note 2)

Show Loads X WBNP-64 (See Note 2)

Table 3.8B-1 MULTIPLE LOAD COMBINATIONS VARIOUS PLANT CONDITIONS BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WATTS BAR LOADING CONDITIONS (Page 3 of 3)

MSLB Norm. Accident MSLB Post Const. Normal Oper. 1/2 Accident (Static) Accident Accident Accident Load Components Cond. Test. Cond. Design SSE 1/2 SSE 1/2 SSE SSE (Static) SSE Flooding Temporary X Construction Loads Internal Test X Pressure Weight of X Contained Air MSLB Pressure X X Internal Temperature Range X X of 80EF to 327EF Airlock Live Load X Notes:

1. Hydrostatic loads case 1A & 1B, and load case II are shown on TVA drawing 48N400.
2. Wind and snow loads do not act simultaneously.
3. For allowable stress condition see Table 3.8.B-2.

3.8B-11 WBNP-64

3.8B-12 WATTS BAR Table 3.8B-2 Allowable Stress Intensities Plus Buckling Load Factors Loading Conditions Applicable ASME Code Buckling Load Reference (1) for Stress Intensity Factors Normal Design Condition NB-3221 In accordance with Construction Condition ASME Code,Section VIII Normal Operation Condition NB-3222 Load factor = 1.25 for both cylindrical portion and hemispherical head Upset Operation Condition NB-3223 Load factor = 1.25 for both cylindrical portion and hemispherical head Emergency Operation Condition NB-3224 Load factor = 1.10 for both cylindrical portion and hemispherical head Test Condition NB-3226 NA Post-Accident Fuel Recovery NB-3224 NA Condition (1) All code references are to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III, Nuclear Power Plant Components, 1971 Edition, with Winter 1971 Addenda.

BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WBNP-91

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA 3.8B-13

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 3.8B-14 BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA

WATTS BAR BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WBNP-91 Figure 3.8B-1 Buckling Stress Coefficient, CC , for Unstiffened Unpressurized Circular 3.8B-15 Cylinders Subjected to Axial Compression

WATTS BAR 3.8B-16 BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WBNP-91 Figure 3.8B-2 Increase in Axial-Compressive Buckling-Stress Coefficient of Cylinders Due to Internal Pressure

WATTS BAR BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WBNP-91 Figure 3.8B-3 Buckling Coefficients for Circular Cylinders Subjected to External Pressure 3.8B-17

WATTS BAR 3.8B-18 BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WBNP-64 Figure 3.8B-4 Buckling Stress Coefficient, CS, for Unstiffened Unpressurized Circular Cylinders Subjected to Torsion

WATTS BAR BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WBNP-64 Figure 3.8B-5 Increase in Torsional Buckling-Stress Coefficient of Cylinders Due to Internal Pressure 3.8B-19

WATTS BAR 3.8B-20 BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA Figure 3.8B-6 Buckling-Stress Coefficient, CB, for Unstiffened Unpressurized Circular Cylinders Subjected to Bending WBNP-64

WATTS BAR BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WBNP-64 Figure 3.8B-7 Increase in Bending Buckling-Stress Coefficient of Cylinders Due to Internal Pressure 3.8B-21

WATTS BAR 3.8B-22 BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA WBNP-64 Figure 3.8B-8 Buckling-Stress Coefficient, KC, For Unpressurized Curved Panels Subjected to Axial Compression

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 Figure 3.8B-9 Buckling-Stress Coefficient, KS, for Unpressurized Curved Panels Subjected to Shear BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA 3.8B-23

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 Figure 3.8B-10 Buckling-Stress Coefficient, K'S, for Unpressurized Curved Panels Subjected to Shear 3.8B-24 BUCKLING STRESS CRITERIA

WATTS BAR WBNP- 92 3.8C DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS 3.8C.1 INTRODUCTION This appendix presents abstracts of the computer programs employed in the design and analysis of the Watts Bar containment vessels. These abstracts explain the purpose of the program and give a brief description of the methods of analysis performed by the program.

Analytical derivations are not contained herein, but are in the CB&I Stress Report.

3.8C.2 PROGRAM 1017-MODAL ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURES USING THE EIGEN VALUE TECHNIQUE The purpose of this program is three-fold:

(1) To calculate the mass and stiffness matrices associated with the structural model.

(2) To determine the undamped natural periods of the model.

(3) To calculate the maximum modal responses of the structure; i.e., deflections, shears, and moments.

The stiffness and mass matrices may be required in order to perform a dynamic analysis of the structure. The maximum modal responses may be used to perform a spectral analysis.

The program has the following options:

(1) Vertical translation.

(2) Torsional modes.

(3) Soil-structure interaction.

(4) Liquid sloshing.

(5) Direct introduction of stiffness and mass matrices.

3.8C.3 PROGRAM 1044-SEISMIC ANALYSIS of VESSEL APPENDAGES Appendages to a vessel may not significantly contribute structurally to the dynamic responses of a model of a vessel. However, appendages can effect the vessel locally by vibrating differently from the model of the vessel at the point of attachment.

DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS 3.8C-1

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 The response spectrum method of analysis is not a strictly adequate way of obtaining the maximum appendage accelerations since it does not include the possible consequences of near resonance between the vessel model and the appendage model.

This paper describes the method used to evaluate the maximum elastic differential accelerations between an independently vibrating appendage model and an elastic beam vessel model at the appendage elevation due to known excitations of the elastic beam model.

The method involves two distinct steps. Firstly, the necessary time-absolute acceleration records are computed at appendage elevations due to model excitations.

Secondly, the maximum differential accelerations between each appendage model and the vessel model at the appendage elevation are obtained.

The time-absolute acceleration records at the appendage elevation are computed by use of a step-by-step matrix analysis procedure. The equations of motion for the vessel model are of the form:

[M] {ü} + (AT/) [K] {u} + [K] {u} = -[M] {üg}

where

[M] = Mass matrix, order n x n obtained from a modal analysis.

[K] = Stiffness matrix, order n x n, obtained from a modal analysis.

A = Portion of first mode critical damping for the model T = First mode of the model

[M] = A diagonal matrix, order n x n, with diagonal elements corresponding to elements of the mass excited by translational accelerations.

{ü} = n x 1 matrix of relative accelerations between the model base and the n degrees of freedom.

{u} = n x 1 matrix of velocities corresponding to {ü}

{u} = n x 1 matrix of displacements corresponding to {ü}

{ug} = n x 1 matrix of translation base acceleration.

n = Degrees of freedom of vessel model.

By taking a small time increment (smaller than the smallest period obtained from the model analysis) and letting accelerations vary linearly within the selected increment, the equations of motion can be integrated for the quantities {u}, {u}, and {ü} over the expected time increment[1]. The values obtained are superimposed upon the values of these quantities existing at the beginning of the time increment. This process is 3.8C-2 DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 repeated for the duration of the excitation. The time-absolute acceleration records for each translational degree of freedom are the sums of {ü} and {üg} taken throughout the history of the excitation.

The second step is similar to the first step. The equation of motion (n = 1) is written for the appendage as a single degree-of-freedom elastic model using the time-absolute acceleration record obtained in Step 1 at the appendage elevation as the excitation.

This equation is solved in the same manner used in Step 1. The maximum absolute value of {ü} obtained is the quantity desired. It is the maximum differential acceleration between the appendage model and the vessel model due to a known excitation of the vessel mode.

For any appendage, this two-step procedure should be executed three times. This is required to evaluate normal, tangential and vertical appendage accelerations with respect to a vessel cross-section.

3.8C.4 PROGRAM E1668-SPECTRAL ANALYSIS FOR ACCELERATION RECORDS DIGITIZED AT EQUAL INTERVALS Program E1668 evaluates dynamic response spectra at various periods and presents the results on a printed plot. Given the time-acceleration record, the program numerically integrates the normal convolution time integral for various natural periods and damping ratios. The computed relative displacements, relative and pseudo-relative velocities, and absolute and pseudo-absolute accelerations are tabulated for periods from 0.025 seconds to 1 second.

3.8C.5 PROGRAM 1642-TRANSIENT PRESSURE BEAM ANALYSIS The program was developed to perform the numerical integration required for the transient pressure beam analysis. The pressure transient curve for each compartment is read in and stored as a series of coordinates. At any time instant the total force acting at each compartment is calculated by multiplying the pressures by the corresponding areas of the shell over which they act. Each force is then distributed to the vessel model masses directly above and below. The proportion applied to each mass is based upon their respective distances from the force.

For a given increment the program checks the current time, determines the current pressure in each compartment, calculates the current force on each mass and applies a recurrence formula. The deflection values, y(t) and y(t-t) are updated, the current time incremented, and the process is repeated.

The values of the orthogonal deflections are stored and also printed out for a prescribed number of times, every ten increments or so, and the equivalent static forces determined. Equivalent static forces are those which produce deflections identical to the calculated kinetic deflections; they are obtained by multiplying the deflection vector by the stiffness matrix.

[F] equivalent = [K] [Y]

The shears and moments at the particular time are then determined from statics:

DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS 3.8C-3

WATTS BAR WBNP-88 Q = F M = F . moment arm The maximum moments, M = M x2 + M y2 and maximum shears, Q = Q x2 + Q y2 are then printed out at selected locations.

In addition the program will also print out an acceleration trace at the mass points.

3.8C.6 PROGRAM E1623-POST PROCESSOR PROGRAM FOR PROGRAM E1374 Program E1623 was written specifically for the TVA Watts Bar Containment Vessels.

It performs the following operations:

(1) Using Fourier data generated by Program El374 (Dynamic Shell Analysis),

the summed displacements, forces and stresses found for various points around the shell circumference at each output point on the meridian.

(2) The maximum of the summed values along with the associated time and azimuth are saved for each elevation and printed out at the end of the problem.

(3) The following tables are printed:

(1) Radial deflection, , at each elevation versus azimuth (2) Longitudinal force, N, at each elevation versus azimuth (3) Longitudinal moment, M, at each elevation versus azimuth (4) Circumferential force, N, at each elevation versus azimuth The time basis for these tables is the occurrence of the minimum longitudinal force at the base.

(4) Ring forces are calculated and then the maximums are pointed out.

(5) Displacement traces at several elevations can be saved on a tape or disk unit.

(6) The membrane stress resultants are saved on either a tape or disk unit for input into the buckling check program.

Program E1374 writes the Fourier amplitude results of the fundamental variables (,

' B, , Q, N, M, N) on a labeled tape after each timestop. Program E1623 reads this tape, interpolates to obtain the values at the output times, and calculates the remaining forces and all the stresses.

The amplitudes are then summed using the following equation:

3.8C-4 DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS

WATTS BAR WBNP-88 m m f ( , ,t ) = gn ( x ,t ) cos n + hn ( x ,t ) sin n n =1 n=1 where:

where:

x = meridinal coordinate t = time g n (x, t) = amplitudes of cosine harmonics h n (x, t) = amplitudes of sine harmonics

= azimuth f(x, , t) = Fourier sum m = maximum number of circumferential waves 3.8C.7 PROGRAM E1374-SHELL DYNAMIC ANALYSIS 3.8C.7.1 Introduction Program E1374 is CBI's shell dynamic analysis program. Presently, it is capable of extracting eigenvalues and performing undamped transient analyses.

Non-axisymmetric loads can be handled through the use of appropriate Fourier series.

The equation of motion for a particular Fourier harmonic n of an undamped system is

[ Mn ] [ Un ] + [ Kn ] [ Un ] = [ Pn ]

where:

[Mn] = Mass matrix

[Kn] = Stiffness matrix

[Pn] = Applied load DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS 3.8C-5

WATTS BAR WBNP-79

[Un] = Displacement

[ U n ] = Acceleration Note that all of the above are functions of n.

In order to calculate free vibration frequencies and mode shapes the applied load is set equal to zero, [Un] is assumed to be a harmonic function of time, and the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of the resulting equation obtained.

If the transient response due to a time-varying load is required, a numerical integration technique is used.

Since Program E1374 is not set up to handle longitudinal stiffeners, the integration for this portion of the shell is performed using Program 781. The influence values are then converted to stiffness matrix form and stored on disc. After Program E1374 has set up the stiffness matrices for the unstiffened shell, the matrices for segments with stiffening are replaced with the Program 781 matrices from disc. The solution in Program E1374 then continues in the standard manner. This consists of assembling the overall stiffness matrix [Kn] and load vector [Cn], reducing to upper triangular form, and back-substituting.

3.8C.8 PROGRAM E1622-LOAD GENERATION PREPROCESSOR FOR PROGRAM E1374 In order to perform non-axisymmetric analyses on shells, the load must often be defined using Fourier series representation. The purpose of Program E1622 is to calculate and store on magnetic tape a time history of the Fourier pressure amplitudes.

The format of this tape is designed specifically for use with Program E1374.

In order to calculate the amplitudes of the harmonics several assumptions are made in the program.

(1) A linear function in the circumferential direction is assumed between given points.

(2) Only distributed loads are considered.

(3) The model consists of a cylindrical shell and optional hemispherical top head.

(4) The pressure has a block type distribution in the longitudinal direction.

(5) Any initial pressure acting on the shell can be subtracted from the input pressure histories.

(6) Amplitudes for both sine and cosine terms can be calculated with the user supplying the range of harmonics to be output.

3.8C-6 DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 3.8C.9 PROGRAM E1624 SPCGEN-SPECTRAL CURVE GENERATION Program E1624 reads the Fourier amplitudes of the deflection transients stored on magnetic tape from the output of Program E1374. The program calculates the accelerations at uniform time intervals and evaluates the response spectra. From the deflection transient for each harmonic, the acceleration traces are computer generated using three point central difference for the first and last three time steps, and a seven point central difference elsewhere.

3.8C.10 PROGRAM 781, METHOD OF MODELING VERTICAL STIFFENERS N = No. of vertical stiffeners around E = Modulus of elasticity The shell shown in Figure 3.8C-l is modeled using 2 layers. The inside layer represents the shell and, therefore, has the normal isotropic material properties. The outer layer, on the other hand is described as an orthotropic material having the following properties.

t2 = d bN E = ----------- E 2 2R E2 = 0 G2 = 0 where:

t2 = Thickness of outer layer E2 = Modulus of elasticity of outer layer in longitudinal direction E2 = Modulus of elasticity of outer layer in circumferential direction.

G2 = Shear modulus of outer layer.

3.8C.11 PROGRAM 119-CHECK of FLANGE DESIGN This program is used for the design of bolted flanges. The program checks the flange design based on Appendix II of ASME Code,Section VIII. Bolt and flange stresses are computed for both the bolt-up and design conditions. If the bolt and gasket are not overstressed, the computer automatically calculates the required flange thickness or checks any supplied thickness. The minimum gasket width required to prevent crushing, and the maximum pressure that the flange is capable of resisting under the design conditions are automatically calculated.

3.8C.12 PROGRAM 772-NOZZLE REINFORCEMENT CHECK This is a program for checking nozzle reinforcing. It is designed essentially for containment vessels, and adheres to area replacement criteria specified by ASME DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS 3.8C-7

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Section III and VIII. The program does no design work, merely checking the adequacy of pre-selected reinforcing plate dimensions and weld sizes.

3.8C.13 PROGRAM 1027-WRC 107 STRESS INTENSITIES AT LOADED ATTACHMENTS FOR SPHERES OR CYLINDERS WITH ROUND OR SQUARE ATTACHMENT This program determines the stress intensities in a sphere or cylinder at a maximum of 12 points around an externally loaded round or square attachment. Stresses resulting from external loads are superimposed on an initial pressure stress situation. The program computes stresses at three levels of plate thicknesses: outside, inside, and centerline of plate. The 12 points investigated are shown in Figure 3.8C-2. Four points at the edge of attachment, at 1/2 RT from the edge of attachment and at the edge of reinforcement.

The program determines 3 components for each stress intensity:

(1) X = A normal stress parallel to the vessel's longitudinal axis (2) = A normal stress in a circumferential direction (3) = A shear stress The program has an option, whereby the influence coefficients can be calculated directly. The program uses the methodology from the "Welding Research Council Bulletin #107", of December 1968. Additionally, the program contains extrapolations of the curves for cylinders in WRC 107 for gamma up to 600. It should be noted that the use of the program requires complete familiarity with WRC 107 publication.

3.8C.14 PROGRAM 1036M-STRESS INTENSITIES IN JUMBO INSERT PLATES This program determines the stress intensities in a "Jumbo" insert plate (a reinforcing plate with multiple penetrations) in a cylindrical vessel at 8 points around one of these penetrations due to the loading on that penetration plus the loadings on the 4 adjacent penetrations all as superimposed on an initial stress situation. It does this at three levels of plate thickness: outside, inside, and centerline of plate. The 8 points investigated are shown in Figure 3.8C-3. The 4 points on radius R are at the junction of the penetration and the insert plate. The other 4 points are other points of interest; normally, they will be at the midpoints in the clear space between penetrations or at the edge of reinforcing. Although 5 penetrations are considered, each point is analyzed as though it were only influenced by 2 (the central penetration plus the penetration on the same axis as the point concerned).

The program also determines 3 components for each stress intensity:

(1) x = a normal stress parallel to the vessel's longitudinal axis (2) = a normal stress in a vessel's circumferential direction (3) = a shear stress 3.8C-8 DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Each of these is composed of 3 subcomponents:

(1) One due to the central penetration's loading (2) One due to the loading on the next adjacent penetration (3) An initial stress component (input)

The program has an option whereby the penetration loads will be considered reversible or nonreversible in direction. Under the reversible option, (see Figure 3.8C-4) only the data associated with the most severe loading situations is printed out.

Most of the analysis and notation used in the program is taken directly from the "Welding Research Council Bulletin #107" of December 1968. Use of the program requires complete familiarity with this publication.

The analysis in WRC 107 is for a single penetration. This program analyzes the several penetrations individually, using WRC 107 techniques verbatim, and then through superposition obtains the composite results. The adjacent penetrations must be on a cardinal line of the central penetration in order to use WRC 107 methods. This has required a very conservative extension of the WRC 107 analysis. WRC 107 analysis applies only to the points on the penetration to shell juncture. This program makes stress determinations at points removed from the junction by fictitiously extending the radius of any penetration to any point at which a stress determination is desired. This disregards the statement in WRC 107 that "these stresses attenuate very rapidly at points removed from the penetration to shell juncture". Furthermore, in some cases, the moment induced stresses at both the juncture and at points removed from the juncture are increased by 20% per discussion in WRC 107. Figure 3.8C-5 shows the cases for the 20% increase and indicates the thickness used for the calculation of the parameters (per WRC 107) and stresses.

The program contains extrapolations of the curves in WRC 107 for T up to 600. The program is limited to the domains and range of Figures 1A through 4C in WRC 107 (0

< < 0.5 and 5 < T <600).

REFERENCE (1) Wilson & Clough, Dynamic Response by Step-By-Step Matrix Analysis DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS 3.8C-9

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 3.8C-10 DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Figure 3.8C-1 Vertical Stiffener Model DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS 3.8C-11

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 Figure 3.8C-2 Points of Stress Calculation 3.8C-12 DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 Figure 3.8C-3 Jumbo Insert Plant Points of Stress Intensities DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS 3.8C-13

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 Figure 3.8C-4 Determination of Loads on Center Penetration Associated with Maximum Stress Intensity 3.8C-14 DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 Figure 3.8C-5 Penetration Analysis DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS 3.8C-15

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 3.8C-16 DOCUMENTATION OF CB&I COMPUTER PROGRAMS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 3.8D COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS Computer programs used for structural analysis and design have been validated by one of the following criteria or procedures:

(a) The following computer programs are recognized programs in the public domain:

Usage Start Program Date:Year Hardware Source AMG032 1965 IBM R&H AMGO33 1965 IBM R&H AMGO34 1965 IBM R&H ANSYS 1972 CDC CDC ASHSD 1969 IBM UCB BASEPLATE II 1982 CDC CDC GENDHK 3 1969 IBM UCB GENSHL 2 1969 IBM FIRL GENSHL 5 1968 IBM FIRL GTSTRUDL 1979 CDC GT NASTRAN (MSC) 1974 CDC CDC SAP IV 1973 CDC UCB SAP IV 1974 IBM USC SDRC FRAME 1977 CDC SDRC PACKAGE SAGS/DAGS SPSTRESS 1977 CDC CDC STARDYNE 1977 CDC CDC STRESS 1970 EG CDC STRUDL (V2 M2) 1972 IBM ICES STRUDL (Rel. 2.6) 1974 IBM MCAUTO (Dynal)

STRUDL (Rel. 4.0) 1975 IBM MCAUTO STRUPAK PACKAGE 1971 CDC TRW MAP2DF/SAP2DF SUPERB 1977 CDC CDC WELDDA 1983 CDC CDC WERCO 1978 CDC AAA COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 3.8D-1

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 All programs on IBM hardware are run under the MVS operating system, on either a 370/165 machine or a 360150 machine. All programs on CDC hardware are run under the SCOPE 3.3 operating system on a 6600 machine.

The following abbreviations are used for program sources:

CDC - Control Data Corporation, Minneapolis, MI FIRL - Franklin Institute Research Labs, Philadelphia, PA GT - Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, GA ICES - Integrated Civil Engineering System, Worcester, MA MCAUTO - McDonnell-Douglas Automation Company, St. Louis, MO R&H - Rohm & Haas Company, Huntsville, AL SDRC - Structural Dynamics Research Corporation, Cincinnati, OH TRW - TRW Systems Group, Redondo, CA UCB - University of California, Berkely, CA USC - University of Southern California, Los Angeles, CA AAA - AAA Technology and Specialties Co., Inc., Houston, TX (b) The following programs have been validated by comparison with a program in the public domain:

RESPONSE FOR EARTHQUAKE AVERAGING SPECTRAL RESPONSE Summary comparisons of results for these computer programs are provided in Figures 3.8D-l and 3.8D-2.

3.8D-2 COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 (c) The following programs have been validated by comparison with hand calculations:

BIAXIAL BENDING - USD CONCRETE STRESS ANALYSIS DL42 PLTDL42 THERMCYL TORSIONAL DYNANAL PNA100 The following programs have been validated by comparison with analytical results published in the technical literature:

BAP222 DYNANAL ROCKING DYNANAL Summary comparison of results for these computer programs are provided in Tables 3.8D-l through 3.8D-10.

COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 3.8D-3

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Table 3.8D-1 BIAXIAL BENDING - USD Moment Capacity (FT-KIPS)

MX MY Hand Hand Calculations Program Calculations Program 0 0 409 408 601 603 287 285 850 850 164 165 911 909 77 76 933 932 0 0 Comparison of hand calculations with BIAXIAL BENDING - USD for the moment capacities of a reinforced concrete section for a given direct load.

3.8D-4 COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Table 3.8D-2 Concrete Stress Analysis Concrete Compression Stress (psi)

Hand Program Calculations 436. 436.

Row Steel Tensile Stress No. (psi)

Hand Calculations Program 1 -3833 -3830 2 -2238 -2234 3 - 644 - 639 4 950 957 5 2417 2419 6 3884 3881 7 5478 5477 8 6275 6275 9 11053 11053 Comparison of hand calculations with CONCRETE STRESS ANALYSIS for reinforced concrete beam with 9 rows of steel, subject to combined load of moment and axial force.

COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 3.8D-5

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Table 3.8D-3 Thermcyl Dead Maximum Concrete Steel Load Compression Stress Tensile Stress (psi) (psi) (psi)

Hand Program Hand Program Calculations Calculations 0 770.8 770.9 12,948. 12,950.

10 848.8 848.3 12,285. 12,290.

100 1313. 1316. 8,336. 8,311.

1000 2795. 2793. -5,010. -4,990.

3.8D-6 COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.8D-4 Torsional Dynanal Pure Torsion Modal Frequencies Mode Frequency (RAD./SEC.)

No.

Hand Calculations Program 1 2810 2814 2 8430 8430 Comparison of hand calculations with TORSIONAL DYNANAL results for torsional modes of vibration of a thin-walled steel half-tube.

COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 3.8D-7

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.8D-5 DYNANAL Modal Periods Including Effects of Flexural and Shear Deformations Mode Period (SEC)

No.

Published Program Results 1 1.48 1.50 2 .425 .430 3 .216 .222 4 .149 .157 5 .114 .124 Comparison of DYNANAL with analytical procedure presented in Engineering Vibrations, L. S.

Jacobsen and R. S. Ayre, McGraw-Hill, 1958, Chapter 10, Modal Analysis of 200 Ft. shear-wall building including effects of flexural and shear deformations.

3.8D-8 COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.8D-6 Rocking Dynanal Modal Frequencies of Lumped-Mass Shear Beam Including effects of Base Rocking Mode Frequency (RAD./SEC.)

No.

Published Program Results 1 5.155 5.339 2 20.52 19.226 Comparison of ROCKING DYNANAL with Analytical Procedure presented in "Earthquake Stresses in Shear Buildings," M. G. Salvadori, ASCE Transactions, 1953, Paper No. 2666.

Modal analysis of lumped-mass shear beam including effects of base rocking.

COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 3.8D-9

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.8D-7 BAP222 Comparison of BAP222 with analytical procedure presented in A Simple Analysis for Eccentrically Loaded Concrete Sections, L. G. Parker and J. J. Scanion, Civil Engineering, October 1940 Published Results Program Pressure bulb geometry, Z4 12 (in.) 12 (in.)

Pressure bulb geometry, Z5 6.41 (in.) 6.41 (in.)

Pressure bulb geometry, Z7 3.67 (in.) 3.36 (in.)

Concrete pressure force -14.08 (k) -14.48 (k)

Anchor load 1 - 1.715 (k) - 1.65 (k)

Anchor load 2 5.34 (k) 5.4 (k)

Anchor load 3

-3.22 (k) -3.44 (k)

Anchor load 4 3.665 (k) 3.61 (k) 3.8D-10 COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.8D-8 DL42 Comparison of hand calculations with DL42 for the design of a baseplate resisting a given load.

Hand Calculations Program Safety factor (0.5 SSE) 3.232 3.234 Safety factor (SSE) 3.878 3.881 Maximum plate moment 10.535 (k-in) 10.526 Effective section modulus 1.261 (in.) 1.261 Minimum plate thickness 0.417 (in.) 0.417 COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 3.8D-11

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.8D-9 PLTDL42 Comparison of hand calculations with PLTDL42 for the design of a baseplate resisting a given load.

Hand Calculations Program Safety factor (0.5 SSE) 3.232 3.234 Safety factor (SSE) 3.878 3.881 Maximum plate moment 10.535 (k-in) 10.526 Effective section modulus 1.261 (in.) 1.261 Minimum plate thickness 0.417 (in.) 0.417 Plate bending stress 8.355 (k/in) 8.348 3.8D-12 COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.8D-10 PNA 100 Nozzle Stresses (PEN X-57) Next to Shell Calc.

Case Mode A B C D 1 Program 11,039 16,588 11,224 16,495 Hand 11,036 16,584 11,221 16,491 4 Program 13,074 19,192 12,417 17,974 Hand 13,070 19,187 12,412 17,968 AWAY FROM SHELL Calc.

Case Mode A B C D 1 Program 10,358 10,095 10,571 10,330 Hand 10,354 10,090 10,567 10,327 4 Program 12,944 12,621 12,196 11,915 Hand 12,939 12,616 12,190 11,908 Added by Amendment 51 COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 3.8D-13

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 3.8D-14 COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

WATTS BAR WBNP-51 Figure 3.8D-1 Response for Earthquake Averaging COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 3.8D-15

WATTS BAR WBNP-51 Figure 3.8D-2 Spectral Response 3.8D-16 COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 3.8E CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979 3.8E.1 Application Codes and Standards (a) American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318-77, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" (b) American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), "Specification for the Design Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings," 7th edition adopted February 12, 1969, as amended through June 12, 1974 or later editions, except welded construction is in accordance with Item d below.

(c) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards (d) American Welding Society (AWS)

Structural Welding Code, AWS D1.1-72, with Revisions 1-73 and 2-74 except later editions may be used for prequalified joint details, base materials, and qualification of welding procedures and welders.

Visual inspection of structural welds will meet the minimum requirements of Nuclear Construction Issues Group documents NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 as specified on the design drawings or other engineering design output (See Section 3.8.4.1.1, Item 18).

(e) National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 13 (f) National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 14 (g) National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 15 (h) National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 24 (i) National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 30 (j) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sections III, VIII, and IX (k) American Nuclear Standard Institute (ANSI) B31.1, "Power Piping" (l) AWS D1.1-81, "Structural Welding Code" (m) AISC-ANSI-N690-1984 "Nuclear Facilities Steel Safety-Related Structures for Design, Fabrication and Erection" 3.8E.2 Load Definitions The following terms are used in the load combination equations for structures.

CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF 3.8E-1 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Normal loads, which are those loads to be encountered during normal plant operation and shutdown, include:

D - Lead loads or their related internal moments and forces including any permanent equipment loads; all hydrostatic loads; and earth loads applied to horizontal surfaces.

L - Live loads or their related internal moments and forces including any movable equipment loads and other loads which vary with intensity and occurrence, such as lateral soil pressure.

To - Thermal effects and loads during normal operating or shutdown conditions, based on the most critical transient or steady-state condition.

Ro - Pipe reactions during normal operating or shutdown conditions, based on the most critical transient or steady-state condition.

Severe environmental loads include:

E - Loads generated by the operating basis earthquake (OBE). The term "operating basis earthquake" has the same meaning as "one-half safe shutdown earthquake."

W - Load generated by the design wind specified for the plant.

Extreme environmental loads include:

E' - Load generated by the safe shutdown earthquake (SSE). The term "safe shutdown earthquake" has the same meaning as the term "design basis earthquake" (DBE).

Wt - Loads generated by the design tornado specified for the plant.

Tornado loads include loads due to the tornado wind pressure, the tornado-created differential pressure, and to tornado-generated missiles.

Abnormal loads, which are those loads generated by a postulated high-energy pipe break accident, include:

Pa - Pressure equivalent static load within or across a compartment generated by the postulated break, and including an appropriate dynamic load factor to account for the dynamic nature of the load.

Ta -Thermal loads under thermal conditions generated by the postulated break and includingTo.

Ra -Pipe reactions under thermal conditions generated by the postulated break and including Ro.

3.8E-2 CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Yr - Equivalent static load on the structure generated by the reaction on the broken high-energy pipe during the postulated break, and including an appropriate dynamic load factor to account for the dynamic nature of the load.

Yj - Jet impingement equivalent static load on a structure generated by the postulated break, and including an appropriate dynamic load factor to account for the dynamic nature of the load.

Ym - Missile impact equivalent static load on a structure generated by or during the postulated break, as from pipe whipping, and including an appropriate dynamic load factor to account for the dynamic nature of the load.

In determining an appropriate equivalent static load for Yr, Yj, and Ym, elasto-plastic behavior may be assumed with appropriate ductility ratios, provided excessive deflections will not result in loss of function of any safety-related system.

Other loads:

C - Construction live loads F' - Hydrostatic load from the probable maximum flood Fa - Flood load generated by a postulated pipe break Concrete capacity:

U - Concrete section strength required to resist design loads based on the strength design methods described in ACI 318-77.

3.8E.3 Load Combinations - Concrete For service load conditions, the strength design method is used, and the following load combinations are considered.

(1) U = 1.4 D + 1.7 L (2) U = 1.4 D + 1.7 L + 1.9 E (3) U = 1.4 D + 1.7 L + 1.7 W CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF 3.8E-3 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979

WATTS BAR WBNP-88 If thermal stressses due to To and Ro are present, the following combinations are also considered.

(1a) U = (0.75) (1.4 D + 1.7 L + 1.7 To + 1.7 Ro)

(2a) U = (0.75) (1.4 D + 1.7 L + 1.9 E + 1.7 To + 1.7 Ro)

(3a) U = (0.75) (1.4 D + 1.7 L + 1.7 W + 1.7 To + 1.7 Ro)

Both cases of L having its full value or being completely absent are checked. In addition, the following combinations are considered:

(2a) U = 1.2 D + 1.9 E (3a) U = 1.2 D + 1.7 W (b) For factored load conditions, which represent extreme environmental, abnormal, abnormal/severe environmental and abnormal/extreme environmental conditions, the strength design method is used; and the following load combinations are considered:

(4) U = D + L + To + Ro + E' (5) U = D + L + To + R o + W t (6) U = D + L + Ta + Ra + 1.5 Pa (7) U = D + L + Ta + Ra + 1.25 Pa + 1.0 (Yr + Yj + Ym) + 1.25 E (8) U = D + L + Ta + Ra + 1.0 Pa + 1.0 (Yr + Yj + Ym) + 1.0 E' For the Additional Diesel Generator Building and structures initiated after July 1979, the three individual tornado-generated loads are combined as follows:

Wt = Ww Wt = Wp Wt = Wm Wt = Ww + 0.5Wp Wt = Ww + Wm Wt = Ww + 0.5 Wp + Wm where:

Wt is the total tornado load, Ww is the tornado wind load, Wp is the tornado-generated pressure differential load, and Wm is the tornado missile load.

3.8E-4 CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 In combinations (6), (7), and (8), the maximum values of Pa, Ta, Ra, Yj, Yr, and Ym, including an appropriate dynamic load factor, is used unless a time-history analysis is performed to justify otherwise. Combinations (5), (7), and (8), are satisfied first without the tornado missile load in (5) and without Yr, Yj, and Ym in (7) and (8). When considering these concentrated loads, local section strength capacities may be exceeded provided there is no loss of function of any safety-related system.

(c) Other load conditions:

(9) U = 1.4 D + 1.4 C (10) U = D + L + F' (11) U = D + Fa 3.8E.4 Load Combinations - Structural Steel (a) For service load conditions, the elastic working stress design methods of Part 1 of the AISC specifications is used and the following load combinations are considered.

Allowable Stress Load Combinations (1) AISC Allowable* D+L (2) AISC Allowable* D+L+E (3) AISC Allowable* D+L+W

  • See Table 3.8E-1 for limiting values If thermal stresses due to To and Ro are present, the following combinations are also considered:

Allowable Stress Load Combinations (1a) 1.5 x AISC Allowable* D + L + To + Ro (2a) 1.5 x AISC Allowable* D + L + To + Ro + E (3a) 1.5 x AISC Allowable* D + L + To + Ro + W

  • The allowable stress shall be limited to the values given in Table 3.8E-1.

Both cases of L having its full value or being completely absent, are checked.

(b) For factored load conditions, the following load combinations are considered.

CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF 3.8E-5 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979

WATTS BAR WBNP-88 Allowable Stress Load Combinations (4) 1.6 x AISC Allowable* D + L + To + Ro + E' (5) 1.6 X AISC Allowable* D + L + To + Ro + Wt (6) 1.6 x AISC Allowable* D + L + Ta + Ra + Pa (7) 1.6 x AISC Allowable* D + L + Ta + Ra + Pa

+ 1.0 (Yj + Yr + Ym)

+E Allowable Stress Load Combinations (8) 1.7 x AISC Allowable* D + L + Ta + Ra + Pa

+ 1.0 (Yj + Yr +Ym) + E' (9) 1.6 x AISC Allowable* D + Fa (10) Table 3.8E-1 Limiting StressD + L + E' (11) Table 3.8E-1 Limiting StressD + L + Wt

  • If thermal loads are not present, the allowable stress shall be limited to the values given in Table 3.8E-1.

Evaluations of miscellaneous and structural steel designed prior to July 1979, may be performed using load combinations (2), (10), and (11) unless other specific loads of a significant nature exist, in which case, the appropriate load combinations of Section 3.8E.4 must be considered. The design of modifications must meet the load combinations in Section 3.8E.4.

Thermal analyses using linear elastic methods are performed for restrained Category I structures located in high temperature environments.

In combinations (6), (7), and (8), the maximum values of Pa, Ra, Ta, Yj, Yr, and Ym, including an appropriate dynamic load factor, was used unless a time-history analysis was performed to justify otherwise. Combinations (5), (7), and (8) were first satisfied without the tornado missile load in (5) and without Yr, Yj, and Ym in (7) and (8).

3.8E-6 CODES, LOAD DEFINITIONS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR THE MODIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF NEW FEATURES ADDED TO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND THE DESIGN OF STRUCTURES INITIATED AFTER JULY 1979

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 3.9 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9.1 General Topic for Analysis of Seismic Category I ASME Code and Non-Code Items 3.9.1.1 Design Transients Transients used in the design and fatigue analysis for Westinghouse supplied ASME Code Class 1 components and CS components are discussed and presented in Section 5.2.1.5. Specifically, the transients are identified for Class 1 components in Tables 5.2-2 and 5.2-3. The transients used in the design and analysis of CS components are identified in Table 5.2-2.

3.9.1.2 Computer Programs Used in Analysis and Design 3.9.1.2.1 Other Than NSSS Systems, Components, Equipment, and Supports (1) The following computer programs are used in piping analyses:

(a) TPIPE Program - TPIPE is a special purpose computer program capable of performing static and dynamic linear elastic analyses of power-related piping systems. The dynamic analysis option includes:

(1) frequency extraction, (2) response spectrum, (3) time history modal superposition, and (4) time history direct integration methods.

In addition to these basic analysis capabilities, the program can perform an ASME Section III, Class 1, 2, or 3 stress evaluation and perform thermal transient heat analysis to provide the linear thermal gradient, T1, nonlinear thermal gradient, T2, and gross discontinuity expansion difference, a Ta - b Tb, required for a Class 1 stress evaluation.

This program is owned and maintained by TVA. It has been fully verified and documented and was compared with PISOL, SAP IV, PIPSD, STARDYNE, and SUPERPIPE with excellent correlation.

These programs are well recognized and utilized throughout the industry.

(b) Post Processors - The post processors are used in performing the stress evaluations and support load calculations made in the analysis of piping systems.

The programs use moment, force, and deflection data generated by TPIPE. A stress evaluation is made for each joint on the analysis model.

The appropriate stress intensifications/stress indices according to the ASME Section III code are utilized in evaluating stresses for the Normal, Upset, Emergency, and Faulted Conditions. Pipe rupture limits and active valve limits are also evaluated. The allowed stress MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-1

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 difference for pipe lug attachments and the lug load is calculated for each load condition.

Support and anchor design loads are calculated for each support to meet the requirements given in Section 3.9.3.4.2.

(c) The following computer programs are also used for piping analysis:

Program Source Program Description ME-101 BECHTEL Linear elastic analysis of piping systems - Bechtel Western Power CorpSan Francisco, CA.

ANSYS SWANSON General purpose finite element program - Swanson Analysis Systems, Inc. Houston, PA.

(2) The following computer programs are used in support design and equipment/component analysis.

ACRONYM PROGRAM DESCRIPTION FAPPS (ME150) Frame Analysis For Pipe Supports SMAPPS (ME152) Standard Frame Analysis For Small Bore Pipe Supports MAPPS (ME153) Miscellaneous Applications For Pipe Supports IAP Integral Welded Attachments CONAN Allowable Tensile Load For Anchor Bolt Group With Shear Cone Overlap BASEPLATE II Finite Element Analysis Of Base Plates And Anchor Bolts GT STRUDL Structural Analysis Program CASD TVA Computer Aided Support Design Program SUPERSAP Structural Finite Element Analysis Program ANSYS Structural Finite Element Analysis Program STARDYNE Structural Analysis Program 3.9-2 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 3.9.1.2.2 Programs Used for Category I Components of NSSS Computer programs that Westinghouse uses in analysis to determine structural and functional integrity of Seismic Category I systems, components, equipment and supports are presented in WCAP-8252, Revision 1 [1] and WCAP-8929 [10].

3.9.1.3 Experimental Stress Analysis No experimental stress analysis was used per se, for the reactor internals. However, Westinghouse makes extensive use of measured results from prototype plants and various scale model tests as discussed in the following Sections 3.9.2.4, 3.9.2.5, and 3.9.2.6.

3.9.1.4 Consideration for the Evaluation of the Faulted Condition 3.9.1.4.1 Subsystems and Components Analyzed by Westinghouse The analytical methods used to evaluate stresses for ASME Class 1 systems and components are presented in Section 5.2.1.10. The results of the analyses are documented in the stress reports that describe the system or component.

For reactor internals the faulted condition was evaluated based on a non-linear elastic system analysis and conforms to the requirements of Appendix F of the ASME Code Section III. Analytical methods are described in Section 3.9.2.5.

3.9.1.4.2 Subsystems and Components Analyzed by TVA (1) Piping Systems - The methods employed in the analysis of ASME Class 1 and Class 2/3 piping systems are elastic analytical methods as described by the equations of Sections NB-3600 and NC-3600 of the ASME Code.

The faulted condition stress limits specified for Class 1 and Class 2/3 systems are in compliance with the elastic method limits set forth in Appendix F subsection F-1360 of the ASME Section III Code.

(2) Piping System Supports - The methods employed in the analysis of ASME Code Classes 1, 2, and 3 piping system supports are as follows:

(a) Linear Type - Elastic methods as described by Part I of the AISC, "Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings," February 12, 1969. (Supplements 1, 2, & 3)*

(b) Standard Components - Elastic or load-rated methods as described by Manufacturers' Standardization Society (MSS) SP-58, 1967 edition, "Pipe Hangers and Supports."

The faulted condition stress limits for Class 1, 2, and 3 pipe supports are specified in Section 3.9.3.4.2. For linear supports these faulted condition limits meet the intent and requirements of the elastic method limits set forth in Appendix F, subsection F-1320 or F-1370, of the MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-3

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 ASME Section III Code. See Section 3.9.3.4.2. For standard components, the allowable stresses or load ratings of MSS-SP-58 are based on a factor of safety of five based on normal operating conditions.

Upset, emergency, faulted, and test conditions were evaluated using Table 3.9-21. This low allowable stress is adequate to assure that active components are properly supported for faulted conditions.

  • Later edition of the AISC code may be utilized when design safety is not compromised.

(3) Mechanical Equipment No plastic instability allowable limits given in ASME Section III have been used when dynamic analysis is performed. The limit analysis methods have the limits established by ASME Section III for Normal, Upset and Emergency Conditions. For these cases, the limits are sufficiently low to assure that the elastic system analysis is not invalidated. For ASME Code Class 1 mechanical equipment, the stress limits for faulted loading conditions are specified in Sections 3.9.3.1.2 and 5.2. For ASME Code Class 2 and 3 mechanical equipment the stress limits for faulted loading conditions are specified in Section 3.9.3.1.2. These faulted condition limits are established in such a manner that there is equivalence with the adopted elastic system analysis. Particular cases of concern are checked by readjusting the elastic system analysis.

(4) Mechanical Equipment Supports The stress limits for the faulted loading condition of mechanical equipment supports are given in Section 3.9.3.4.1 of Westinghouse's scope of supply, and Section 3.9.3.4.2 for TVA's scope of supply.

3.9.2 Dynamic Testing and Analysis 3.9.2.1 Preoperational Vibration and Dynamic Effects Testing on Piping ASME Code Section III, Subparagraph NB-3622.3, "Vibration," requires that vibration effects in piping systems shall be visually observed and where questionable shall be measured and corrected as necessary.

The preoperational piping dynamic effects test program at this plant is as follows:

(a) The dynamic (steady state and transient) behavior of safety related piping systems designated as ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 is observed during the preoperational testing program. Sample and instrument lines beyond the root valves are normally not included. Also included 3.9-4 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-88 in the program are those portions of ANSI B31.1 piping which has a potential to exhibit excessive vibrations.

(b) Preoperational tests involving critical piping systems will be in compliance with Regulatory Guide 1.68, "Preoperational and Initial Startup Test Programs for Water-Cooled Power Reactors."

(c) For the piping systems discussed in Item a., visual observation of the piping will be performed by trained personnel during predetermined, steady-state and transient modes of operation. The maximum point(s) of representative vibration, as determined by the visual observation, will be instrumented and measurement will be taken to determine actual magnitudes, if it is judged to be excessive.

(d) The allowable criteria for measurements shall be either a maximum half-amplitude displacement or velocity value based on an endurance limit stress as defined in the ASME B&PV Code (refer to Section 3.7.3.8.1).

(e) Should the measured magnitudes actually exceed the allowable, corrective measures will be performed for the piping system. Any new restraints, as required by corrective measures, will be incorporated into the piping system analysis.

(f) The flow mode which produced the excessive vibrations will be repeated to assure that vibrations have been reduced to an acceptable level.

(g) The flow modes to which the system components will be subjected are defined, in general terms, in the preoperational test program.

(h) Vibration measurements will also be taken on the vital pumps at baseline and on a periodic basis so that excessive vibration can be corrected early in the program and/or detected if it gradually becomes a problem.

(i) Vibrations of the affected portions of the main steam system during MS isolation valve trip will be tested and the results will be evaluated.

(j) Thermal expansion tests will be conducted on the following piping systems:

Reactor Coolant System Main Steam Steam Supply to Auxiliary Feedwater Pump Turbine Main Feedwater Pressurizer Relief Line RHR in Shutdown Cooling Mode Steam Generator Blowdown MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-5

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Safety Injection System (those lines adjoining RCS which experience temperature > 200F)

Auxiliary Feedwater CVCS (Charging line from Regen. Hx to RCS, Letdown Line from RCS to Letdown Hx)

During the thermal expansion test, pipe deflections will be measured or observed at various locations based on the location of snubbers and hangers and expected large displacement. One complete thermal cycle (i.e., cold position to hot position to cold position ) will be monitored. For most systems, the thermal expansion will be monitored at cold conditions and at normal operating temperature. Intermediate temperatures are generally not practical due to the short time during which the normal operating temperature is reached. For the reactor coolant system and the main steam system, measurements will be made at cold, 250°F, 350°F, 450°F and normal operating temperatures.

Acceptance criteria for the thermal expansion test verify that the piping system is free to expand thermally (i.e., piping does not bind or lock at spring hangers and snubbers nor interfere with structures or other piping), and to confirm that piping displacements do not exceed design limits, as described by ASME Section III (i.e., the induced stresses do not exceed the sum of the basic material allowable stress at design temperature and the allowable stress range for expansion stresses).

If thermal motion is not as predicted, the support system will be examined to verify correct function or to locate points of binding of restraints. If binding is found, the restraints will be adjusted to eliminate the unacceptable condition or reanalyzed to verify that the existing condition is acceptable.

3.9.2.2 Seismic Qualification Testing of Safety-Related Mechanical Equipment Design of Category I mechanical equipment to withstand seismic, accident, and operational vibratory loadings is provided either by analysis or dynamic testing.

Generally tests are run with either of the following two objectives:

(1) To obtain information on parts or systems necessary to perform the required analysis, or (2) To prove the design (stress or operability) adequacy of a given equipment or structure without performing any analysis of this particular equipment or structure.

The need for the first type of tests is dictated by lack of information on some of the inputs vital to the performance of an analysis. These tests can be either static (to obtain spring constants) or dynamic (to obtain impedance characteristics).

3.9-6 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 The need for the second type of test is mainly dictated by the complexity of the structure/equipment under design. This vibration testing is usually performed in a laboratory or shop on a prototype basis, using various sources of energy.

For general seismic qualification requirements for mechanical and electrical equipment, see Section 3.7.3.16.

Laboratory vibration testing can be conducted by employing various forms of shakers, the variation depending on the source of the driving force. Generally, the primary source of motion may be electromagnetic, mechanical, or hydraulic-pneumatic. Each is subject to inherent limitations which usually dictate the choice.

To properly simulate the seismic disturbance, the waveform must be carefully defined.

The waveform seen by a given piece of equipment depends on:

(1) The earthquake motion specified for a given site.

(2) The soil-structure interaction.

(3) The building in which the component is housed.

(4) The floor on which the equipment is located.

(5) The support and attachments to the equipment.

Components located on rocks or on stiff lower floors of buildings founded on rock are subjected to random-type vibrations. Components located on the upper floors of flexible buildings, in flexible subsystems, or in buildings on soft foundations are roughly subjected to sine beats with a frequency close to fundamental frequency of the building or subsystem.

In cases where random vibration inputs are used, extreme care is paid to the selection of random forcing functions having frequency content and energy conservatively approaching those of the ground or buildings motion caused by the specified earthquake(s).

The most common and readily available vibration testing facilities could only carry simple harmonic motion. By analytical comparison with time history response obtained with a number of real earthquake motions, it has been found that these time histories can be approximately simulated with wave forms having the shape of sine beats with 5 or 10 cycles per beat, a frequency equal to the component natural frequencies, and maximum amplitude equal to the maximum seismic acceleration to which the component needs to be qualified. For equipment located on building floors, the maximum seismic input acceleration is the maximum floor acceleration. This is obtained from the dynamic analysis of the building or from the appropriate floor response spectrum at the zero period of the equipment.

The above procedure adheres closely to the IEEE 344-1971 "IEEE Guide for Seismic Qualification of Class 1 Electric Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations."

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-7

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 This standard was specified for equipment for the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant contracted for up to September 1, 1974. New contracts after this date specified IEEE 344-1975 "IEEE Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations." The first test to the IEEE 344-1975 was run in March 1974 on 6.9 kV switch gear. On local panels, test qualification to both standards was used because some instruments and controls mounted there on were procured to each version. This one test revealed that the 1971 version of IEEE 344 was the more severe.

As an example, seismic qualification and the demonstration of operability of active Class 2 and 3 pumps, active Class 1, 2, or 3 valves, and their respective drives, operators and vital auxiliary equipment is shown by satisfying the criteria given in Section 3.9.3.2. Other active mechanical equipment will be shown operable by either testing, analysis or a combination of testing and analysis. The operability programs implemented on this other active equipment will be similar to the program described in Section 3.9.3.2 for pumps and valves. Testing procedures similar to the procedures outlined in Section 3.10 for electrical equipment will be used to demonstrate operability if the component is mechanically or structurally complex such that its response cannot be adequately predicted analytically. Analysis may be used if the equipment is amenable to modeling and dynamic analysis.

Inactive Seismic Category I equipment will be shown to have structural integrity during all plant conditions in one of the following manners: 1) by analysis satisfying the stress criteria applicable to the particular piece of equipment, or 2) by test showing that the equipment retains its structural integrity under the simulated seismic environment.

A list of Category I mechanical equipment and the original method of qualification is provided in the Table 3.7-25.

3.9.2.3 Dynamic Response Analysis of Reactor Internals Under Operational Flow Transients and Steady-State Conditions The vibration characteristics and behavior due to flow induced excitation are very complex and not readily ascertained by analytical means alone. Reactor components are excited by the flowing coolant which causes oscillatory pressures on the surfaces.

The integration of these pressures over the applied area should provide the forcing functions to be used in the dynamic analysis of the structures. In view of the complexity of the geometries and the random character of the pressure oscillations, a closed form solution of the vibratory problem by integration of the differential equation of motion is not always practical and realistic. Therefore, the determination of the forcing functions as a direct correlation of pressure oscillations can not be practically performed independently of the dynamic characteristics of the structure. The main objective, then, is to establish the characteristics of the forcing functions that essentially determine the response of the structures. By studying the dynamic properties of the structure from previous analytical and experimental work, the characteristics of the forcing function can be deduced. These studies indicate that the most important forcing functions are flow turbulence, and pump-related excitation. The relevance of such excitations depends on many factors such as type and location of component and flow conditions.

3.9-8 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 The effects of these forcing functions have been studied from test runs on models, prototype plants and in component tests [2,4,5].

The Indian Point Unit 2 plant has been established as the prototype for four-loop plant internals verification program and was fully instrumented and tested during initial startup [4]. In addition, the Sequoyah Unit 1 and Trojan Nuclear Plants have also been instrumented to provide prototype data applicable to Watts Bar [5].

Although the Watts Bar plant is similar to Indian Point Unit 2, significant differences are the modifications resulting from the use of 17 x 17 fuel, the replacement of the annular thermal shield with neutron shielding panels, and reactor vessel barrel/baffle upflow flow design. These differences are addressed below.

(1) 17 x 17 Fuel The only structural changes in the internals resulting from the design change from the 15 x 15 to the 17 x 17 fuel assembly are the guide tube and control rod drive line. The new 17 x 17 guide tubes are stronger and more rigid, hence they are less susceptible to flow induced vibration. The fuel assembly itself is relatively unchanged in mass and spring rate, and thus no significant deviation is expected from the 15 x 15 fuel assembly vibration characteristics.

(2) Neutron Shielding Pads Lower Internals The primary cause of core barrel excitation is flow turbulence, which is not affected by the upper internals [3]. The vibration levels due to core barrel excitation for Trojan and Watts Bar both having neutron shielding pads, are expected to be similar. Since Watts Bar has greater velocities than Trojan, vibration levels due to the core barrel excitation is expected to be somewhat greater than that for Trojan (proportional to flow velocity raised to a small power). However, scale model test results and preliminary results from Trojan show that core barrel vibration of plants with neutron shielding pads is significantly less than that of plants with thermal shields. This information and the fact that low core barrel flange stresses with large safety margins were measured at Indian Point Unit 2 (thermal shield configuration) lead to the conclusion that stresses approximately equal to those of Indian Point Unit 2 will result on the Watts Bar internals with the attendant large safety margins.

(3) Reactor Vessel Barrel/Baffle Upflow Conversion The upflow conversion consists of changes to the reactor vessel components, which are to plug the core barrel inlet flow holes and to provide holes in the top former plate. These modifications change the flow path from being downflow to upflow between the core barrel and the baffle plate and increase core bypass flow from 7.5 to 9.0%. Changing the flow path reduces the pressure differential across the baffle plate, eliminating the jetting of coolant between the joints between the baffle plates. Although defined as a difference between Indian Point 2 and Watts Bar internals, the conversion of the Watts Bar internals to the upflow configuration has no direct impact on the MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-9

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 reactor core system under earthquake conditions. Therefore, the fuel assembly structural integrity during a seismic event is not affected by the modification. The potential effects due to the LOCA contribution, as a result of the upflow modification, has been demonstrated by evaluation that the impact of the change in forces from the initial downflow design to upflow are insignificant. Therefore, the modifications associated with the upflow conversion do not increase the seismic or LOCA induced loads significantly compared to that of the downflow design, and the fuel assembly structural integrity and coolable geometry are maintained. This issue has been reviewed and approved by the NRC [11 & 12].

3.9.2.4 Preoperational Flow-Induced Vibration Testing of Reactor Internals Because the Watts Bar reactor internals design configuration is well characterized, as was discussed in Section 3.9.2.3, it is not considered necessary to conduct instrumented tests of the Watts Bar plant hardware. The requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.20 will be met by conducting the confirmatory preoperational testing examination for integrity per Paragraph D, of Regulatory Guide 1.20, "Regulation for Reactor Internals Similar to the Prototype Design." This examination will include some 35 points (Figure 3.9-1) with special emphasis on the following areas.

(1) All major load-bearing elements of the reactor internals relied upon to retain the core structure in place.

(2) The lateral, vertical and torsional restraints provided within the vessel.

(3) Those locking and bolting devices whose failure could adversely affect the structural integrity of the internals.

(4) Those other locations on the reactor internal components which are similar to those which were examined on the prototype Indian Point Unit 2 design.

(5) The inside of the vessel will be inspected before and after the hot functional test, with all the internals removed, to verify that no loose parts or foreign material are in evidence.

A particularly close inspection will be made on the following items or areas using a 5X or 1OX magnifying glass or penetrant testing where applicable.

3.9-10 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 (1) Lower Internals (a) Upper barrel to flange girth weld.

(b) Upper barrel to lower barrel girth weld.

(c) Upper core plate aligning pin. Examine bearing surfaces for any shadow marks, burnishing, buffing or scoring. Inspect welds for integrity.

(d) Irradiation specimen guide screw locking devices and dowel pins.

Check for lockweld integrity.

(e) Baffle assembly locking devices. Check for lockweld integrity.

(f) Lower barrel to core support girth weld.

(g) Neutron shield panel screw locking devices and dowel pin cover plate welds. Examine the interface surfaces for evidence of tightness and for lockweld integrity.

(h) Radial support key welds.

(i) Insert screw locking devices. Examine soundness of lockwelds.

(j) Core support columns and instrumentation guide tubes. Check the joints for tightness and soundness of the locking devices.

(k) Secondary core support assembly screw locking devices for lockweld integrity.

(l) Lower radial support keys and inserts. Examine for any shadow marks, burnishing, buffing or scoring. Check the integrity of the lockwelds.

These members supply the radial and torsional constraint of the internals at the bottom relative to the reactor vessel while permitting axial and radial growth between the two. One would expect to see, on the bearing surfaces of the key and keyway, burnishing, buffing or shadow marks which would indicate pressure loading and relative motion between the two parts. Some scoring of engaging surfaces is also possible and acceptable.

(m) Gaps at baffle joints. Check for gaps between baffle and top former and at baffle to baffle joints.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-11

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 (2) Upper Internals (a) Thermocouple conduits, clamps and couplings.

(b) Guide tube, support column, orifice plate, and thermocouple assembly locking devices.

(c) Support column and thermocouple conduit assembly clamp welds.

(d) Upper core plate alignment inserts. Examine for any shadow marks, burnishing, buffing or scoring. Check the locking devices for integrity of lockwelds.

(e) Thermocouple conduit gusset and clamp welds (where applicable).

(f) Thermocouple conduit end-plugs. Check for tightness.

(g) Guide tube enclosure welds, tube-transition plate welds and card welds.

Acceptance standards are the same as required in the shop by the original design drawings and specifications.

During the hot functional test, the internals will be subjected to a total operating time at greater than normal full-flow conditions (four pumps operating) of at least 240 hours0.00278 days <br />0.0667 hours <br />3.968254e-4 weeks <br />9.132e-5 months <br />.

This provides a cyclic loading of approximately 107 cycles on the main structural elements of the internals. In addition there will be some operating time with only one, two and three pumps operating.

When no signs of abnormal wear, no harmful vibrations are detected and no apparent structural changes take place, the four-loop core support structures are considered to be structurally adequate and sound for operation.

3.9.2.5 Dynamic System Analysis of the Reactor Internals Under Faulted Conditions Analysis of the reactor internals for blowdown loads resulting from a LOCA is based on the time history response of the internals to simultaneously applied blowdown forcing functions. The forcing functions are defined at points in the system where changes in cross-section or direction of flow occur such that differential loads are generated during the blowdown transient. The dynamic mechanical analysis can employ the displacement method, lumped parameters, stiffness matrix formulations and assumes that all components behave in a linearly elastic manner.

In addition, because of the complexity of the system and the components, it is necessary to use finite element stress analysis codes to provide more detailed information at various points.

A blowdown digital computer program [6], which was developed for the purpose of calculating local fluid pressure, flow, and density transients that occur in pressurized 3.9-12 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 water reactor coolant systems during a LOCA, is applied to the subcooled,transition, and saturated two-phase blowdown regimes. This is in contrast to programs such as WHAM [7], which are applicable only to the subcooled region and which, due to their method of solution, could not be extended into the region in which large changes in the sonic velocities and fluid densities take place. This blowdown code is based on the method of characteristics wherein the resulting set of ordinary differential equations, obtained from the laws of conservation of mass, momentum, and energy, are solved numerically using a fixed mesh in both space and time.

Although spatially one-dimensional conservation laws are employed, the code can be applied to describe three-dimensional system geometries by use of the equivalent piping networks. Such piping networks may contain any number of pipes or channels of various diameters, dead ends, branches (with up to six pipes connected to each branch), contractions, expansions, orifices, pumps and free surfaces (such as in the pressurizer). System losses such as friction, contraction, expansion, etc. are considered.

The blowdown code evaluates the pressure and velocity transients for a maximum of 2,400 locations throughout the system. These pressure and velocity transients are stored as a permanent tape file and are made available to the program FORCE which utilizes a detailed geometric description in evaluating the loadings on the reactor internals.

Each reactor component for which FORCE calculations are required is designated as an element and assigned an element number. Forces acting upon each of the elements are calculated summing the effects of:

(1) The pressure differential across the element.

(2) Flow stagnation on, and unrecovered orifice losses across the element.

(3) Friction losses along the element.

Input to the code, in addition to the blowdown pressure and velocity transients, includes the effective area of each element on which the force acts due to the pressure differential across the element, a coefficient to account for flow stagnation and unrecovered orifice losses, and the total area of the element along which the shear forces act.

The mechanical analysis [8] has been performed using conservative assumptions.

Some of the more significant assumptions are:

(1) The mechanical and hydraulic analyses have considered the effect of hydroelasticity.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-13

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 (2) The reactor internals are represented by a multi-mass system connected with springs and dashpots simulating the elastic response and the viscous damping of the components. The modeling is conducted in such a way that uniform masses are lumped into easily identifiable discrete masses while elastic elements are represented by springs.

The model described is considered to have a sufficient number, of degrees of freedom to represent the most important modes of vibration in the vertical direction. This model is conservative in the sense that further mass-spring resolution of the system would lead to further attenuation of the shock effects obtained with the present model.

The pressure waves generated within the reactor are highly dependent on the location and nature of the postulated pipe failure. In general, the more rapid the severance of the pipe, the more severe the imposed loadings on the components. A one millisecond severance time is taken as the limiting case.

In the case of the hot leg break, the vertical hydraulic forces produce an initial upward lift of the core. A rarefaction wave propagates through the reactor hot leg nozzle into the interior of the upper core barrel. Since the wave has not reached the flow annulus on the outside of the barrel, the upper barrel is subjected to an impulsive compressive wave. Thus, dynamic instability (buckling) or large deflections of the upper core barrel, or both, is a possible response of the barrel during hot leg break results in transverse loading on the upper core components as the fluid exits the hot leg nozzle.

In the case of the cold leg break, a rarefaction wave propagates along a reactor inlet pipe, arriving first at the core barrel at the inlet nozzle of the broken loop. The upper barrel is then subjected to a non-axisymmetric expansion radial impulse which changes as the rarefaction wave propagates both around the barrel and down the outer flow annulus between vessel and barrel. After the cold leg break, the initial steady state hydraulic lift forces (upward) decrease rapidly (within a few milliseconds) and then increase in the downward direction. These cause the reactor core and lower support structure to move initially downward.

If a simultaneous seismic event with the intensity of the SSE is postulated with the loss of coolant accident, the imposed loading on the internals component may be additive in certain cases; therefore, the combined loading must be considered. In general, however, the loading imposed by the earthquake is small compared to the blowdown loading.

The summary of the mechanical analysis follows:

Vertical Excitation Model for Blowdown For the vertical excitation, the reactor internals are represented by a multi-mass system connected with springs and dashpots simulating the elastic response and the viscous damping of the components. Also incorporated in the multi-mass system is a representation of the motion of the fuel elements relative to the fuel assembly grids.

The fuel elements in the fuel assemblies are kept in position by friction forces 3.9-14 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 originating from the preloaded fuel assembly grid fingers. Coulomb type friction is assumed in the event that sliding between the rods and the grid fingers occurs. In order to obtain an accurate simulation of the reactor internals response, the effects of internal damping, clearances between various internals, snubbing action caused by solid impact, Coulomb friction induced by fuel rod motion relative to the grids, and preloads in hold down springs have been incorporated in the analytical model. The modeling is conducted in such a way that uniform masses are lumped into easily identifiable discrete masses while elastic elements are represented by springs.

The appropriate dynamic differential equations for the multi-mass model describing the aforementioned phenomena are formulated and the results obtained using a digital computer program [8] which computes the response of the multi-mass model when excited by a set of time dependent forcing functions. The appropriate forcing functions are applied simultaneously and independently to each of the masses in the system.

The results from the program give the forces, displacements and deflections as functions of time for all the reactor internals components (lumped masses). Reactor internals response to both hot and cold leg pipe ruptures were analyzed.

Transverse Excitation Model for Blowdown Various reactor internal components are subjected to transverse excitation during blowdown. Specifically, the barrel, guide tubes, and upper support columns are analyzed to determine their response to this excitation.

Core Barrel - For the hydraulic analysis of the pressure transients during hot leg blowdown, the maximum pressure drop across the barrel is a uniform radial compressive impulse. The barrel is then analyzed for dynamic buckling using the following conservative assumptions:

(1) The effect of the fluid environment is neglected.

(2) The shell is treated as simply supported. During cold leg blowdown, the upper barrel is subjected to a non-axisymmetric expansion radial impulse which changes as the rarefaction wave propagates both around the barrel and down the outer flow annulus between vessel and barrel.

The analysis of transverse barrel response to cold leg blowdown is performed as follows:

(1) The core barrel is treated as a simply supported cylindrical shell of constant thickness between the upper flange weldment and the lower support plate weldment. No credit is taken for the supports at the barrel midspan offered by the outlet nozzles. This assumption leads to conservative deflection estimates of the upper core barrel.

(2) The core barrel is analyzed as a shell with two variable sections to model the support flange and core barrel.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-15

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 (3) The barrel with the core and thermal shielding pads is analyzed as a beam fixed at the top and elastically supported at the lower radial support and the dynamic response is obtained.

Guide Tubes - The dynamic loads on rod cluster control guide tubes are more severe for a loss-of-coolant accident caused by hot leg rupture than for an accident by cold leg rupture since the cold leg break leads to much smaller changes in the transverse coolant flow over the rod cluster control guide tubes. In addition to analyses of these accidents, guide tubes are also analyzed for intermediate size breaks to ensure no loss of function.

The guide tubes in closest proximity to the ruptured outlet nozzle are the most severely loaded. The transverse guide tube forces during the hot leg blowdown decrease with increasing distance from the ruptured nozzle location.

A detailed structural analysis of the rod cluster control guide tubes is performed to establish the equivalent cross section properties and elastic end support conditions.

An analytical model is verified [8] both dynamically and statically by subjecting the control rod cluster tube to a concentrated force applied at the transition plate. In addition, the guide tube is loaded experimentally using a triangular distribution to conservatively approximate the hydraulic loading. The experimental results consists of a load deflection curve for the rod cluster control guide tube plus verification of the deflection criteria to assure rod cluster control insertion.

The response of the guide tubes to the transient loading due to blowdown may be found by utilizing the equivalent single degree of freedom system for the guide tube using experimental results for equivalent stiffness and natural frequency.

Upper Support Columns - Upper support columns located close to the broken nozzle during hot leg break will be subjected to transverse loads due to cross flow. The loads applied to the columns are computed with a method similar to the one used for the guide tubes; i.e., by taking into consideration the increase in flow across the column during the accident. The columns are studied as beams with variable section and the resulting stresses are obtained using the reduced section modulus and appropriate stress risers for the various sections.

The effects of the gaps that could exist between vessel and barrel, between fuel assemblies, and between fuel assemblies and baffle plates are considered in the analysis. Linear analysis will not provide information about the impact forces generated when components impinge each other, but can, and is, applied prior to gap closure. References [8] and [9] provide further details of the blowdown method used in the analysis of the reactor internals.

The stresses due to the safe shutdown earthquake (vertical and horizontal components) are combined with the blowdown stresses in order to obtain the largest principal stress and deflection. All reactor internals components were found to be within acceptable stress and deflection limits for both hot leg and cold leg loss-of-coolant accidents occurring simultaneously with the Safe Shutdown Earthquake.

3.9-16 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 The results obtained from the linear analysis indicate that during blowdown, the relative displacement between the components will close the gaps and consequently the structures will impinge on each other, making the linear analysis unrealistic and forcing the application of nonlinear methods to study the problem. Although linear analysis will not provide information about the impact forces generated when components impinge on each other, it can, and is, applied prior to gap closure. The effects of the gaps that could exist between vessel and barrel, between fuel assemblies, between baffle assemblies and baffle plates, and between the control rods and their guide paths were considered in the analysis. Both static and dynamic stress intensities are within acceptable limits. In addition, the cumulative fatigue usage factor is also within the allowable usage factor of unity.

The stresses due to the safe shutdown earthquake (vertical and horizontal components) were combined in the most unfavorable manner with the blowdown stresses in order to obtain the largest principal stress and deflection. These results indicate that the maximum deflections and stress in the critical structures are below the established allowable limits. For the transverse excitation, it is shown that the upper barrel does not buckle during a hot-leg break and that it has an allowable stress distribution during a cold leg break.

Even though control rod insertion is not required for plant shutdown, this analysis shows that most of the guide tubes will deform within the limits established experimentally to assure control rod insertion. For the guide tubes deflected above the no loss of function limit, it must be assumed that the rods will not drop. However, the core will still shut down due to the negative reactivity insertion in the form of core voiding. Shutdown will be aided by the great majority of rods that do drop. Seismic deflections of the guide tubes are generally negligible by comparison with the no loss of function limit.

3.9.2.5.1 Evaluation of Reactor Internals for Limited Displacement RPV Inlet and Outlet Nozzle Break This section contains an evaluation of the effects of a limited displacement 127 in2 RPV inlet nozzle safe end break and a limited displacement 127 in2 RPV outlet nozzle safe end break on the reactor internals. Both breaks are assumed to have a break opening time of one millisecond. The main operational requirement to be met is that the plant be shut down and cooled in an orderly fashion so that the fuel cladding temperature is kept within the specified limits. This implies that the deformation of the reactor internals must be kept sufficiently small to allow core cooling and assure effectiveness of the emergency core cooling system. As a further criterion, the allowable stress criteria used for the core support structures are presented in Section 3.9.3.1.

The evaluation of the reactor internals for the RPV inlet break is composed of two parts. The first part is the in-plane response of the core barrel occurring in the vertical plane passing through the broken inlet nozzle. This is taken from the DARI-WOSTAS response described for the RPV support analysis in Section 5.2.1.10.6. The second part of this evaluation is the core-barrel shell response which consists of the various n MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-17

WATTS BAR WBNP-79

= 0, 2, 3, etc., ring mode response occurring in the horizontal plane. These ring mode responses are generated as the inlet break rarefaction wave propagates to the core barrel at the inlet nozzle, which subjects the upper barrel to a non-axisymmetric expansion radial impulse which changes as the rarefaction wave propagates both around the barrel and down the outer flow annulus between the barrel and the vessel.

This second part, or ring mode evaluation is described in Reference [9] and is independent of the loop forces and cavity pressure.

From the moment and shear force time histories resulting from the DARI-WOSTAS response, the core barrel beam bending stresses and shear stresses are obtained.

The barrel beam stresses (the first part of the evaluation) are evaluated at the mid-barrel girth weld where the highest stresses in the barrel occur.

For the second part of shell mode analysis of the core barrel, the differential pressures across the core barrel wall distributed around the circumference must be determined.

These delta-p's are directly obtained from the blowdown analysis. The application of the delta-p's around the barrel circumference (i.e., resolving into Fourier components, etc.) is further described in Reference [6]. It is important to note that unlike the beam analysis, the shell response of the barrel (the various horizontal ring modes 0, 2, 3, 4, etc.) is independent of the response of the vessel on its supports, the response of the fuel, or any combination of these beam mode responses. Even though various phenomena may affect vessel beam behavior, only one set of barrel shell results is included in the stress combination. Also included in the stress results for the barrel is the vertical response from the DARI-WOSTAS analysis. The WOSTAS model presented in Section 5.2.1.10.6 showed that the vertical response of the barrel is considered uniform around the circumference.

However, since the DARI-WOSTAS model couples the horizontal beam and the vertical response of the reactor at the vessel supports, variation in horizontal response may be seen in the vertical behavior.

To properly evaluate the total stress results in the core barrel, the combination of the horizontal beam, vertical, and shell modes is performed on a time-history basis. This combination is performed at the girth weld, which is the most highly stressed region of the core barrel.

The evaluation of the reactor internals for the RPV outlet nozzle break involves primarily three internal components: core barrel, control rod guide tubes, and upper support columns. The rarefaction wave, which is independent of the loop loads and cavity pressure, propagates into the upper plenum from the outlet nozzle break, which subjects the upper core barrel to a uniform radial compressive impulse resulting from the pressure drop across the core barrel. The stability of the barrel is checked to ensure that buckling due to the compressive impulse does not occur. The beam response (including the vertical response of the barrel) and shell mode response are considered in the analysis. The maximum deflections calculated for the core barrel are within the allowable limits established in section 3.9.3.1.

3.9-18 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Also included in the outlet nozzle break analysis is an evaluation of the control rod guide tubes and upper support columns. The guide tubes and support columns (primarily those close to the broken hot leg nozzle) are subjected to transverse loads due to increased cross flow in the upper plenum. These loads are independent of the loop loads and cavity pressure loads. The analysis results indicate that the deflections are within the allowable limits presented in Section 3.9.3.1; therefore, the internals geometry is maintained and control rod insertion is not significantly impaired.

3.9.2.6 Correlations of Reactor Internals Vibration Tests With the Analytical Results The dynamic behavior of reactor components has been studied using experimental data obtained from operating reactors along with results of model tests and static and dynamic tests in the fabricators shops and at plant site. Extensive instrumentation programs to measure vibration of reactor internals (including prototype units of various reactors) have been carried out during preoperational flow tests, and reactor operation.

From scale model tests, information on stresses, displacements, flow distribution, and fluctuating differential pressures is obtained. Studies have been performed to verify the validity and determine the prediction accuracy of models for determining reactor internals vibration due to flow excitation. Similarity laws were satisfied to assure that the model response can be correlated to the real prototype behavior.

Vibration of structural parts during prototype plants preoperational tests is measured using displacement gages, accelerometers, and strain transducers. The signals are recorded with F.M. magnetic tape records. On site and offsite signal analysis is done using both hybrid real time and digital techniques to determine the (approximate) frequency and phase content. In some structural components the spectral content of the signals include nearly discrete frequency or very narrow-band, usually due to excitation by the main coolant pumps and other components that reflect the response of the structure at a natural frequency to broad bands, mechanically and/or flow-induced excitation. Damping factors are also obtained from wave analyses.

It is known from the theory of shells that the normal modes of a cylindrical shell can be expressed as sine and cosine combinations with indices m and n indicating the number of axial half waves and circumferential waves, respectively. The shape of each mode and the corresponding natural frequencies are functions of the numbers m and n. The general expression for the radial displacement of a simply supported shell is:

Mx w ( x, , t ) = n=0 m =1 A nm ( t ) cos n + B nm ( t ) sin n sin ------------

L The shell vibration at a natural frequency depends on the boundary conditions at the ends. The effect of the ends is negligible for long shells or for higher order m modes, and long shells have the lowest frequency for n = 2 (elliptical mode). For short shells, the effects of the ends are more important, and the shell will tend to vibrate in modes corresponding to values of n > 2.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-19

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 In general, studies of the dynamic behavior of components follow two parallel procedures: 1) obtain frequencies and spring constants analytically, and 2) confirm these values from the results of the tests. Damping coefficients are established experimentally. Once these factors are established, the response can be computed analytically. In parallel, the responses of important reactor structures are measured during preoperational reactor tests and the frequencies and mode shapes of the structures are obtained.

Theoretical and experimental studies have provided information on the added apparent mass of the water, which has the effect of decreasing the natural frequency of the component. For both cases, cross and parallel, the response is obtained after the forcing function and the damping of the system is determined.

Pre- and post-hot functional inspection results, in the case of plants similar to prototypes, serve to confirm predictions that the internals are well behaved. Any gross motion or undue wear would be evident following the application of approximately 107 cycles of vibration expected during the test period.

3.9.3 ASME Code Class 1, 2 and 3 Components, Component Supports and Core Support Structures 3.9.3.1 Loading Combinations, Design Transients, and Stress Limits 3.9.3.1.1 Subsystems and Components Supplied by Westinghouse Design transients are presented in Section 5.2.1.5.

For ASME Code Class 1 components, systems, and supports, loading conditions are presented in Section 5.2.1.10.1, and stress criteria are provided in Section 5.2.1.10.7.

Additional information concerning methods of analysis is presented throughout Section 5.2.1.10. Results of analyses are documented in the stress reports that describe the system or components.

For core support structures, design loading conditions are given in Section 4.2.2.3.

Loading conditions are discussed in Section 4.2.2.4.

In general, for reactor internals components and for core support structures, the criteria for acceptability, with regard to mechanical integrity analyses, are that adequate core cooling and core shutdown must be assured. This implies that the deformation of the reactor internals must be sufficiently small so that the geometry remains substantially intact. Consequently, the limitations established on the internals are concerned principally with the maximum allowable deflections and stability of the parts, in addition to a stress criterion to assure integrity of the components.

For the LOCA plus the SSE condition, deflections of critical internal structures are limited. In a hypothesized downward vertical displacement of the internals, energy absorbing devices limit the displacement after contacting the vessel bottom head, ensuring that the geometry of the core remains intact.

3.9-20 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 The following mechanical functional performance criteria apply:

(1) Following the design basis accident, the functional criterion to be met for the reactor internals is that the plant shall be shutdown and cooled in an orderly fashion so that fuel cladding temperature is kept within specified limits. This criterion implies that the deformation of critical components must be kept sufficiently small to allow core cooling.

(2) For large breaks, the reduction in water density greatly reduces the reactivity of the core, thereby shutting down the core whether the rods are tripped or not. The subsequent refilling of the core by the emergency core cooling system uses borated water to maintain the core in a subcritical state.

Therefore, the main requirement is to assure effectiveness of the emergency core cooling system. Insertion of the control rods, although not needed, gives further assurance of ability to shut the plant down and keep it in a safe shutdown condition.

(3) The inward upper barrel deflections are controlled to ensure no contacting of the nearest rod cluster control guide tube. The outward upper barrel deflections are controlled in order to maintain an adequate annulus for the coolant between the vessel inner diameter and core barrel outer diameter.

(4) The rod cluster control guide tube deflections are limited to ensure operability of the control rods.

(5) To ensure no column loading of rod cluster control guide tubes, the upper core plate deflection is limited.

Methods of analysis and testing for core support structures are discussed in Sections 3.9.1.3, 3.9.1.4.1, 3.9.2.3, 3.9.2.5, and 3.9.2.6. Stress limits and deformation criteria are given in Sections 4.2.2.4 and 4.2.2.5.

3.9.3.1.1.1 Plant Conditions and Design Loading Combinations For ASME Code Class 2 and 3 Components Supplied by Westinghouse Design pressure, temperature, and other loading conditions that provide the bases for design of fluid systems Code Class 2 and 3 components are presented in the sections which describe the systems.

3.9.3.1.1.2 Design Loading Combinations by Westinghouse The design loading combinations for ASME Code Class 2 and 3 equipment and supports are given in Table 3.9-1. The design loading combinations are categorized with respect to Normal, Upset, Emergency, and Faulted Conditions.

Stress limits for each of the loading combinations are equipment oriented and are presented in Tables 3.9-2, 3.9-3, 3.9-4, and 3.9-6 for tanks, inactive pumps, valves, MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-21

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 and active pumps, respectively. The definition of the stress equations and limits are in accordance with the ASME Code as follows:

(a) For tanks,Section III of the ASME Code, 1971 through Summer 1972 Addenda, and Code Case 1607-1.

(b) For all other equipment,Section III of the ASME Code, 1971 through Summer 1973 Addenda, and Code Cases 1635-1 and 1636-1.

These stress equations have not changed in later editions of the ASME Code. For the actual numerical values of the allowables for specific equipment, the ASME Code Edition applicable to the time period of equipment procurement as specified on the procurement documents is used for the qualification.

Active* pumps and valves are discussed in Section 3.9.3.2. The equipment supports will be designed in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 3.9.3.4.

3.9.3.1.1.3 Design Stress Limits By Westinghouse The design stress limits established for equipment are sufficiently low to assure that violation of the pressure retaining boundary will not occur. These limits, for each of the loading combinations, are equipment oriented and are presented in Tables 3.9-2 through 3.9-4, and 3.9-6. See Section 3.9.3.1.1.2 for discussion of applicable code editions.

3.9.3.1.2 Subsystems and Components Analyzed or Specified by TVA (A) ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 Piping.

The analytic procedures and modeling of piping systems is discussed in Sections 3.7.3.8 and 3.7.3.3**. As discussed in Section 3.7.3.8.1 the TVA analysis effort has been categorized into two approaches: Rigorous and Alternate. The loading sources, conditions, and stress limits are described below for each category and the results are summarized for each.

_____________

  • Active components are those whose operability is relied upon to perform a safety function (as well as reactor shutdown function) during the transients or events considered in the respective operating condition categories.

+ Set C spectra are considered.

3.9-22 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 (1) Loading Conditions, Stress Limits and Requirements for Rigorous Analysis (a) The loading sources considered in the rigorous analysis of a piping system are defined in Table 3.9-7.

(b) The piping is analyzed to the requirements of applicable codes as defined in Section 3.7.3.8.1.

(c) The design load combinations are categorized with respect to Normal, Upset, Emergency, and Faulted Conditions. Class 1 piping is analyzed using the limits established in Table 3.9-8 for all applicable loading conditions. The pressurizer surge line is also evaluated for the thermal stratification and thermal striping in response to the NRC Bulletin 88-11.

Other rigorously analyzed piping meets the limits established in Table 3.9-9 for all applicable loading conditions.

(d) Consideration is given to the sequence of events in establishing which load sources are taken as acting concurrently.

(e) Equipment nozzle loads are within vendor and/or TVA allowable values.

This ensures that functionality and 'Active' equipment operability requirements are met.

(f) All equipment (i.e., valves, pumps, bellows, flanges, strainers, etc.) is checked to ensure compliance with vendor limitations.

(g) The pipe/valve interface at each active valve is evaluated and the pipe stresses are limited to the levels indicated in Table 3.9-10 unless higher limits are technically justified on a case-by-case basis.

(h) Documentation of rupture stress is provided for the locations in the system being analyzed where the stress exceeds the limits for which pipe rupture postulation is required (See Section 3.6). The tabulation identifies the point and tabulates the stress for each point exceeding the limits.

(i) Valves with extended operators or structures (including handwheels) meet the dynamic plus gravitational acceleration limits of 3g along the stem axis and 3g (vectorial summation) in the plane perpendicular to the valve stem axis. For 1-inch and smaller valves with handwheels, the dynamic plus gravitational acceleration limit is 3g in each of the three global (or local) directions. These limits apply to any valve orientation and must be maintained during piping analysis.

For steel body check valves (which have no external operators or structures) the limit for dynamic plus gravitational acceleration is 10g (vectorial summation of all three orthogonal directions).

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-23

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 The valves as a minimum are qualified to the acceleration limits specified above. Higher accelerations are approved based on case-by-case technical justification.

(j) Excessive pipe deformation is avoided.

(k) Welded attachment loads and stresses for TVA Class 1 piping are evaluated in accordance with ASME Code Cases N-122 and N-391.

For Class 2 and 3 piping, loads and stresses from welded attachments are evaluated in accordance with ASME Code Cases N-318 and N-392.

Special cases of other welded attachments are evaluated by detailed finite element analysis or other applicable methods to assure that ASME Code stress allowables are met.

The attachment welds are full penetration, partial penetration, or fillet welded as detailed on the support drawings. Attachments are used generally on all piping systems, and locations can be determined from the support drawings.

(2) Loading Conditions and Stress Limits for Alternate Analysis (a) The scope of the alternate analysis application is generally limited to systems having the following load sources: self-weight, internal pressure, seismic event, end point displacement, and limited thermal expansion. (Other load sources may be considered for special cases.)

(b) The design load combinations are categorized with respect to Normal, Upset, Emergency, and Faulted Conditions. The criteria are developed to meet the stress limits given in Table 3.9-9 considering the applicable load sources.

(c) The general limitations imposed on the piping by the application of the Alternate Analysis method are discussed in Section 3.7.3.8.3. For ASME Category I piping designed by alternate analysis, the same levels of valve acceleration and interface/nozzle load requirements of Section 3.9.3.1.2.A shall be maintained. Non-ASME, Category I(L) piping designed by alternate analysis is described in Sections 3.7.3.8.3 and 3.2.1.

(3) Considerations for the Faulted Condition Tables 3.9-8 through 3.9-10 identify the load sources and allowed stresses associated with the faulted condition. The stress limits used are those limits established in ASME Section III for the faulted condition.

The feedwater system inside containment, from the check valves to the steam generators including the piping components are evaluated for 3.9-24 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 pressure boundary integrity to withstand the postulated water hammer event due to the feedwater check valve slam following pipe rupture at the main header (Turbine Building) using the ASME Section III Appendix F (1980 Edition through Winter 1982 Addenda) rules and limits.

The four main feedwater check valves were evaluated for structural integrity following the feedwater pipe rupture. Energy equivalence methods, in conjunction with nonlinear finite element and linear hand analyses, were used. The evaluations demonstrated that deformations in three of the four valves are within acceptable strain levels following the slam. With the assumption that the fourth valve is not functional, the transient effects of the resulting one steam generator blowdown are bounded by the "Major Rupture of a Main Feedwater Pipe inside containment" per Section 15.4.2.2.

Note that during the rigorous analysis phase of most piping systems, the postulated break locations are unknown and the jet impingement loads are unavailable and thus not included in the evaluation of the faulted condition.

However, where it is determined by the guidelines of Section 3.6 that jet impingement must be evaluated, the effect of the loads on pipe stress is evaluated during the pipe rupture analysis.

(4) Summary of Results - Rigorous Analysis of Class 1 and Class 2/3 Piping Performed by TVA MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-25

WATTS BAR WBNP-68 The results of the piping system analyses performed in accordance with the above paragraphs are presented and consolidated in a calculation with the following documentation:

(a) Certification Report for ASME Code Class 1 Analyses.

(b) Owner's review for ASME Code Class 1 Analysis.

(c) Statement of Compliance with code requirements for ASME Code Class 2/3 Analyses.

(d) Problem revision status form - for maintaining the traceability of revision performed on analysis, and correlating various forms affected by each revision.

(e) Piping input data for recording all physical data used in the analysis.

(f) Table of system operating modes - for identifying the various thermal conditions required and included in analysis.

(g) Stress summary - for summarizing the maximum stresses for various loading combinations.

(h) Equipment nozzle load qualification to demonstrate satisfaction of limits.

(i) Valve acceleration qualification to demonstrate satisfaction of limits.

(j) Summary of loads and movements at pipe supports.

(k) A mathematical model isometric - for depicting the analytical model utilized, and defining the type and location of pipe supports and restraints.

A record copy of these problem calculations is maintained at TVA and is available for review upon request.

All computer printouts of final analysis are microfilmed for TVA permanent records.

(B) Category I ASME Code Class 2 and 3 Mechanical Equipment (1) Plant Conditions and Design Loading Combinations Design pressure, temperature, and other loading conditions that provide the bases for design of fluid systems Code Class 2 and 3 components are presented in the sections which describe the systems.

(2) Design Loading Combinations 3.9-26 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 The design loading combinations for ASME Code Class 2 and 3 equipment and supports are given in Table 3.9-13B. The design loading combinations are categorized with respect to Normal, Upset, Emergency and Faulted Conditions.

Stress limits for each of the loading combinations are equipment oriented and are presented in Tables 3.9-14, 3.9-15 and 3.9-16 for tanks, inactive*

pumps, and inactive* valves respectively. The definition of the stress equations and limits are in accordance with the ASME Code as follows:

(a) For tanks,Section III of the ASME Code, 1971 through Summer 1972 Addenda, and Code Case 1607-1 (b) For all other equipment,Section III of the ASME Code, 1971 through Summer 1973 Addenda, and Code Cases 1635-1 and 1636-1 These stress equations have not changed in later editions of the ASME Code.

For the actual numerical values of the allowables for specific equipment, the ASME Code Edition applicable to the time period of equipment procurement as specified on the procurement documents is used for the qualification.

____________

  • Inactive components are those whose operability are not relied upon to perform a safety function during the transients or events considered in the respective operating condition category.

Active* pumps and valves are discussed in Section 3.9.3.2.1. The vendor supplied equipment/component supports stress levels are limited to the allowable stress of AISC or ASME Section III subsection NF or other comparable stress limits as delineated in the applicable design specification.

Section 3.8.4 describes the allowable stresses used for TVA-designed equipment/component supports.

The design stress limits established for the components are sufficiently low to assure that violation of the pressure retaining boundary will not occur.

These limits, for each of the loading combinations, are component oriented and are presented in Tables 3.9-14 through 3.9-16.

3.9.3.2 Pumps and Valve Operability Assurance 3.9.3.2.1 Active* ASME Class 1, 2, & 3 Pumps and Valves The list of active valves for primary fluid (i.e., water and steam containing components) systems in the Westinghouse scope of supply is presented in Table 3.9-17. The list of active pumps supplied by Westinghouse is presented in Table 3.9-28. The list of pumps and valves for fluid systems within TVA scope of supply are presented in Tables 3.9-25 and 3.9-27. Only ASME Section III pumps and valves that were purchased after September 1, 1974, were considered to be within the scope of WBN compliance with MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-27

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Regulation Guide 1.48. These pumps and valves meet the special design requirements verifying operability as specified in Regulatory Guide 1.48. The remaining components in Tables 3.9-17, 3.9-25, 3.9-27, and 3.9-28 meet the appropriate qualification requirements in accordance with the guidelines of IEEE 344-1971 and consistent with the ASME Code applicable at the time of the contract date for procuring the component. These qualifications provide an adequate level of operability assurance for all active pumps and valves.

The following rules were used to identify active pumps and valves:

(1) Only FSAR Chapter 15 Design Basis Events (DBE's) were assumed. These DBE's were studied to identify the active pumps and valves required to mitigate the DBE and place the plant in a safe shutdown condition.

(2) Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary (RCPB) - Valves that are a part of the RCPB [defined by 10 CFR Section 50.2(v)] and require movement to isolate the RCS were identified as active.

(3) Containment Isolation - Containment isolation valves that require movement to isolate the containment were identified as active.

(4) Check Valves - Any check valve required to close or cycle when performing its system safety function was identified as active.

  • Active components are those whose operability is relied upon to perform a safety function (as well as reactor shutdown function) during the transients or events considered in the respective operating condition categories.

Any check valve that was only required to open in the performance of its system safety function was not identified as active. This position was justified by: (a) the free-swinging nature of the valves and (b) the normal stress over-design of the valve body.

(5) Achieve and Maintain a Safe Shutdown Condition - The minimum redundant complement of equipment required to achieve and maintain safe shutdown was selected.

3.9.3.2.2 Operability Assurance 3.9.3.2.2.1 Westinghouse Scope of Supply Mechanical equipment classified as safety-related must be shown capable of performing its function during the life of the plant under postulated plant conditions.

Equipment with faulted condition functional requirements include 'active' pumps and valves in fluid systems such as the residual heat removal system, safety injection system, and the containment spray system. Seismic analysis is presented in Section 3.7 and covers all safety-related mechanical equipment.

3.9-28 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Operability is assured by satisfying the requirements of the programs specified below.

Additionally, equipment specifications include requirements for operability under the specified plant conditions and define appropriate acceptance criteria to ensure that the program requirements defined below are satisfied.

Pump and Valve Qualification for Operability Program Active pumps are qualified for operability by first, being subjected to rigid tests both prior to installation in the plant and after installation in the plant. The in-shop tests include: 1) hydrostatic tests of pressure retaining parts to 150 percent times the design pressure times the ratio of material allowable stress at room temperature to the allowable stress value at the design temperature, 2) seal leakage tests, and 3) performance tests to determine total developed head, minimum and maximum head, net positive suction head (NPSH) requirements and other pump parameters. Also monitored during these operating tests are bearing temperatures and vibration levels.

Bearing temperature limits are determined by the manufacturer, based on the bearing material, clearances, oil type, and rotational speed. These limits are approved by Westinghouse. Vibration limits are also determined by the manufacturer and are approved by Westinghouse. After the pump is installed in the plant, it undergoes the cold hydro-tests, hot functional test, and the required periodic inservice inspection and operation. These tests demonstrate that the pump will function as required during all normal operating conditions for the design life of the plant.

In addition to these tests, the safety-related active pumps, are qualified for operability by assuring that the pump will start up, continue operating, and not be damaged during the faulted condition.

The pump manufacturer is required to show by analysis correlated by test, prototype tests or existing documented data that the pump will perform its safety function when subjected to loads imposed by the maximum seismic accelerations and the maximum faulted nozzle loads. It is required that test or dynamic analysis be used to show that the lowest natural frequency of the pump is greater than 33 Hz. The pump, when having a natural frequency above 33 Hz, is considered essentially rigid. This frequency is sufficiently high to avoid problems with amplification between the component and structure for all seismic areas. A static shaft deflection analysis of the rotor is performed with the conservative safe shutdown earthquake (SSE) accelerations of 3g horizontal and 2g vertical acting simultaneously. The deflections determined from the static shaft analysis are compared to the allowable rotor clearances. The nature of seismic disturbances dictates that the maximum contact (if it occurs) will be of short duration. If rubbing or impact is predicted, it is required that it be shown by prototype tests or existing documented data that the pump will not be damaged or cease to perform its design function. The effect of impacting on the operation of the pump is evaluated by analysis or by comparison of the impacting surfaces of the pump to similar surfaces of pumps which have been tested.

In order to avoid damage during the faulted plant condition, the stresses caused by the combination of normal operating loads, SSE, dynamic system loads are limited to the limits indicated in Table 3.9-6. In addition, the pump casing stresses caused by the maximum faulted nozzle loads are limited to the stresses outlined in Table 3.9-6.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-29

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 The changes in operating rotor clearances caused by casing distortions due to these nozzle loads are considered. The maximum seismic nozzle loads combined with the loads imposed by the seismic accelerations are also considered in an analysis of the pump supports. Furthermore, the calculated misalignment is shown to be less than that misalignment which could cause pump misoperation. The stresses in the supports are below those in Table 3.9-6; therefore, the support distortion is elastic and of short duration (equal to the duration of the seismic event).

Performing these analyses with the conservative loads stated and with the restrictive stress limits of Table 3.9-6 as allowables, assure that critical parts of the pump will not be damaged during the short duration of the faulted condition and that, therefore, the reliability of the pump for post-faulted condition operation will not be impaired by the seismic event.

If the natural frequency is found to be below 33 Hz, an analysis will be performed to determine the amplified input accelerations necessary to perform the static analysis.

The adjusted accelerations will be determined using the same conservatisms contained in the 3g horizontal and 2g vertical accelerations used for 'rigid' structures.

The static analysis will be performed using the adjusted accelerations; the stress limits stated in Table 3.9-6 must still be satisfied.

To complete the seismic qualification procedures, the pump motor is qualified for operation during the maximum seismic event. Any auxiliary equipment which is identified to be vital to the operation of the pump or pump motor, and which is not proven adequate for operation by the pump or motor qualifications, is also separately qualified by meeting the requirements of IEEE Standard 344-1971 or -1975, as applicable, with the additional requirements and justifications outlined in this section.

The program above gives the required assurance that the safety-related pump/motor assemblies will not be damaged and will continue operating under SSE loadings, and, therefore, will perform their intended functions. These proposed requirements take into account the complex characteristics of the pump and are sufficient to demonstrate and assure the seismic operability of the active pumps.

Since the pump is not damaged during the faulted condition, the functional ability of active pumps after the faulted condition is assured since only normal operating loads and steady state nozzle loads exist. Since it is demonstrated that the pumps would not be damaged during the faulted condition, the post-faulted condition operating loads will be identical to the normal plant operating loads. This is assured by requiring that the imposed nozzle loads (steady-state loads) for normal conditions and post-faulted conditions are limited by the magnitudes of the normal condition nozzle loads. The post-faulted condition ability of the pumps to function under these applied loads is proven during the normal operating plant conditions for active pumps.

Safety-related active valves must perform their mechanical motion at times of an accident. Assurance must be supplied that these valves will operate during a seismic event. Tests and analyses were conducted to qualify active valves.

3.9-30 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 The safety-related active valves are subjected to a series of stringent tests prior to service and during the plant life. Prior to installation, the following tests are performed:

shell hydrostatic test to ASME Section III requirements, backseat and main seat leakage tests, disc hydrostatic test, and operational tests to verify that the valve will open and close.

For the active valves qualification of electric motor operators for the environmental conditions (i.e., aging, radiation, accident environment simulation, etc.) refer to Section 3.11 and Regulatory Guide 1.73. Cold hydro tests, hot functional qualifications tests, periodic inservice inspections, and periodic inservice operations are performed in-situ to verify and assure the functional ability of the valve. These tests guarantee reliability of the valve for the design life of the plant. The valves are constructed in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III.

On all active valves, an analysis of the extended structure is also performed for static equivalent seismic SSE loads applied at the center of gravity of the extended structure.

The stress limits allowed in these analyses will show structural integrity. The limits that will be used for active Class 2 and 3 valves are shown in Table 3.9-4.

In addition to these tests and analyses, a representative electric motor operated valve will be tested for verification of operability during a simulated plant faulted condition event by demonstrating operational capabilities within the specified limits. The testing procedures are described below.

The valve will be mounted in a manner which will represent typical valve installations.

The valve will include operator and limit switches if such are normally attached to the valve in service. The faulted condition nozzle loads will be considered in the test in either of two ways: 1) loads equivalent to the faulted condition nozzle loads are limited such that the operability of the valve is not affected.

The operability of the valve during a faulted condition shall be demonstrated by satisfying the following criteria:

(1) All the active valves shall be designed to have a first natural frequency which is greater than 33 Hz, if it is practical to do so. If the lowest natural frequency of an active valve is less than 33 Hz, then the valve's mathematical model is included in the piping dynamic analysis, so as to assure the calculated valve acceleration does not exceed the values used in the static tests of the manufacturer's qualification program and to reflect the proper valve dynamic behavior.

(2) The actuator and yoke of the representative motor operated valve system will be statically deflected using an equivalent static load that simulates those conditions applied to the valve under faulted condition accelerations applied at the center of gravity of the operator alone in the direction of the weakest axis of the yoke. The design pressure of the valve will be simultaneously applied to the valve during the static deflection tests.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-31

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 (3) The valve will then be cycled while in the deflected position. The time required to open or close the valve in the defected position will be compared to similar data taken in the undeflected condition to evaluate the significance of any change.

The accelerations which will be used for the static valve qualification are 3g horizontal and 2g vertical with the valve yoke axis vertical. The piping designer must maintain the operator accelerations to these levels unless higher limits are technically justified on a case-by-case basis.

The testing was conducted on the valves with extended structures which are most affected by acceleration, according to mass, length and cross-section of extended structures. Valve sizes which cover the range of sizes in service will be qualified by the tests and the results are used to qualify all valves within the intermediate range of sizes.

Valves which are safety-related but can be classified as not having an extended structure, such as check valves and safety valves, are considered separately. Check valves are characteristically simple in design and their operation will not be affected by seismic accelerations or the applied nozzle loads. The check valve design is compact and there are no extended structures or masses whose motion could cause distortions which could restrict operation of the valve. The nozzle loads due to seismic excitation will not affect the functional ability of the valve since the valve disc is typically designed to be isolated from the body wall. The clearance supplied by the design around the disc will prevent the disc from becoming bound or restricted due to any body distortions caused by nozzle loads. Therefore, the design of these valves is such that once the structural integrity of the valve is assured using standard design or analysis methods, the ability of the valve to operate is assured by the design features. In addition to these design considerations, the valve will also undergo the following tests and analysis: 1) in-shop hydrostatic test, 2) in-shop seat leakage test, and 3) periodic in-situ valve exercising and inspection to assure the functional ability of the valve.

The pressurizer safety valves are qualified by the following procedures (these valves are also subjected to tests and analysis similar to check valves): stress and deformation analyses of critical items which may affect operability for faulted condition loads, in-shop hydrostatic and seat leakage tests, and periodic in-situ valve inspection.

In addition to these tests, a static load equivalent to that applied by the faulted condition will be applied at the top of the bonnet and the pressure will be increased until the valve mechanism actuates. Successful actuation within the design requirements of the valve will assure its overpressurization safety capabilities during a seismic event.

Using these methods, active valves will be qualified for operability during a faulted event. These methods proposed conservatively simulate the seismic event and assure that the active valves will perform their safety-related function when necessary.

The above testing program for valves is conservative. Alternate valve operability testing, such as dynamic vibration testing, is allowed if it is shown to adequately assure the faulted condition functional ability of the valve system.

3.9-32 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Pump Motor and Valve Operator Qualification Active pump motors (and vital pump appurtenances) and active valve electric motor operators (and limit switches and pilot solenoid valves), are seismically qualified by meeting the requirements of IEEE Standard 344-1971 or 1975, as applicable. If the testing option is chosen, sine-beat testing will be justified. This justification may be provided by satisfying one or more of the following requirements to demonstrate that multifrequency response is negligible or the sine-beat input is of sufficient magnitude to conservatively account for this effect.

(1) The equipment response is basically due to one mode.

(2) The sine-beat response spectra envelopes the floor response spectra in the region of significant response.

(3) The floor response spectra consists of one dominant mode and has a peak at this frequency.

If the degree of coupling in the equipment is small, then single axis testing is justified.

Multi-axis testing is required if there is considerable cross coupling; however, if the degree of coupling can be determined, then single axis testing can be used with the input sufficiently increased to include the effect of coupling on the response of the equipment.

Seismic qualification by analysis alone, or by a combination of analysis and testing, may be used when justified. The analysis program can be justified by: 1) demonstrating that equipment being qualified is amendable to analysis, and 2) that the analysis be correlated with test or be performed using standard analysis techniques.

3.9.3.2.2.2 TVA Scope of Supply TVA uses the following criteria to prescribe a suitable program to assure the functional adequacy of active Category I fluid system components (pumps and valves) under combined loading conditions. These criteria supplement or amend previously stated requirements for fluid system components in those cases where fluid system components in those cases where the components are judged to be active (i.e., if they perform a required mechanical motion during the course of accomplishing a safety function). These criteria assure that all active seismic Category I fluid system components will maintain structural integrity and perform their safety functions under loadings, including seismic, associated with normal, upset, and faulted conditions.

These criteria are similar to the accepted response to NRC Position for the TVA's Bellefonte Nuclear Plant units 1 and 2 concerning compliance with the requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.48. The exception is that the seismic qualification for Watts Bar is for a 2-dimensional earthquake, while for Bellefonte it is for a 3-dimension earthquake.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-33

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 3.9.3.2.3 Criteria For Assuring Functional Adequacy of Active Seismic Category I Fluid System Components (Pumps and Valves) and Associated Essential Auxiliary Equipment (1) The seismic design adequacy of Category I electrical power and control equipment and instrumentation directly associated with the active Category I pumps and valves is assured by seismically qualifying the components by analysis and/or testing in accordance with the requirements of IEEE Standard 344(for applicable edition, refer to Section 3.9.2.2).

(2) When either analysis or testing is used to demonstrate the seismic design adequacy of Category I components, the characteristics of the required input motion is specified by either response spectra, power spectral density function or time history data derived from the structure or system seismic analysis. When the testing method is used, random vibration input motion shall be used, but single frequency input, such as sine beats, may be used provided that:

(a) The characteristics of the required input motion indicate that the motion is dominated by one frequency.

(b) The anticipated response of equipment is adequately represented by one mode.

(c) The input has sufficient intensity and duration to excite all modes to the required magnitude, such that the testing response spectra will envelop the corresponding response spectra of the individual modes.

For equipment with more than one dominant frequency and for equipment supported near the base of the structure where some random components of the earthquake may remain, single frequency testing may still be applicable provided that the input has sufficient intensity and duration to excite all modes to the required magnitude, such that the testing response spectra will envelop the corresponding response spectra of the individual modes. When equipment responses along one direction are sensitive to the vibration frequencies along another perpendicular direction, in the case of single frequency testing, the time phasing of the inputs in the vertical and horizontal directions is such that a purely rectilinear resultant output is avoided.

In both the testing and analysis procedure, the possible amplified design loads for vendor supplied equipment is considered as follows:

(a) If supports are tested, they shall be tested with the actual components mounted and operating or if the components are inoperative during the support test, the response at the equipment mounting locations shall be monitored and components shall be tested separately and the actual 3.9-34 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 input to the equipment shall be more conservative in amplitude and frequency content than the monitored responses.

(b) The support analysis shall include the component loads. Seismic restraints shall be used as applicable with their adequacy verified by either testing or analysis as described above.

(3) All active Category I pumps are subjected to tests both prior to installation in the plant and after installation in the plant. The in-shop tests shall include (a) hydrostatic tests of pressure-retaining parts, (b) seal leakage tests, and (c) performance tests, while the pump is operated with flow, to determine total developed head, minimum and maximum head 3 net positive suction head (NPSH) requirements and other pump/motor parameters. Bearing temperatures and vibration levels shall be monitored during these operating tests. Both are shown to be below appropriate limits specified to the manufacturer for design of the pump. After the pump is installed in the plant, it shall undergo cold hydro tests, or operational tests, hot functional tests, and the required periodic in-service inspection and operation.

(4) Active Category I pumps are analyzed to show that the pump will operate normally when subjected to the maximum seismic accelerations and maximum seismic nozzle loads. Tests or dynamic analysis show that the lowest natural frequency of the pump is above 33 Hz, and thus considered essentially rigid. A static shaft deflection analysis of the rotor is performed with the conservative seismic accelerations of 1.5 times the applicable plant floor response spectra. The deflections determined from the static shaft analysis shall be compared to the allowable rotor clearances. Stresses caused by the combination of normal operating loads, seismic, and dynamic system loads shall be limited to the material elastic limit, as indicated in Table 3.9-18. The primary membrane stress (Pm) for the faulted conditions loads shall be limited to 1.2Sh, or approximately 0.75 S (S = yield stress). The primary membrane stress plus the primary bending stress (Pb) shall be limited to 1.8Sh, or approximately 1.lS. In addition, the pump nozzle stresses caused by the maximum seismic nozzle loads shall be limited to stresses outlined in Table 3.9-18. The maximum seismic nozzle loads shall also be considered in an analysis of the pump supports to assure that a system misalignment cannot occur.

If the natural frequency is found to be below 33 Hz, and analysis is performed to determine the amplified input accelerations necessary to perform the static analysis. The adjusted accelerations shall be determined using the same conservatism contained in the accelerations used for "rigid" structures. The static analysis is performed using the adjusted accelerations; the stress limits stated in Table 3.9-18 must still be satisfied.

(5) Each type of active Category I pump motor is independently qualified for operating during the maximum seismic event. Any appurtenances which are identified to be vital to the operation of the pump or pump motor and which MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-35

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 are not qualified for operation during the pump analysis or motor qualifications, shall also be separately qualified for operation at the accelerations each would see at its mounting. The pump motor and vital appurtenances are qualified by meeting the requirements of IEEE Standard 344- 1971 or 1975 edition, depending on the procurement date (see Section 3.9.2.2.). If the testing option was chosen, sine-beat testing is justified by satisfying one or more of the following requirements to demonstrate that multifrequency response is negligible or the sine-beat input is of sufficient magnitude to conservatively account for this effect.

(a) The equipment response is basically due to one mode.

(b) The sine-beat response spectra envelops the floor response spectra in the region of significant response.

(c) The floor response spectra consists of one dominant mode and has a peak at this frequency. The degree of mass or stiffness coupling in the equipment will, in general, determine if a single or multi-axis test is required. Multi-axis testing is required if there is considerable cross coupling. If coupling is very light, then single axis testing is justified; or, if the degree of coupling can be determined, then single axis testing can be used with the input sufficiently increased to include the effect of coupling on the response of the equipment.

(6) The post-faulted condition operating loads for active Category I pumps is considered identical to the normal plant operating loads. This is assured by requiring that the imposed nozzle loads (steady-state loads) for normal conditions and post-faulted conditions be limited by the magnitudes of the normal condition nozzle loads. Thus, the post-faulted condition ability of the pumps to function under these applied loads is proven during the normal operating plant conditions.

(7) Active Category I valves, except check valves, are subjected to a series of stringent tests prior to installation and after installation in the plant. Prior to installation, the following tests are performed: (a) shell hydrostatic test, (b) backseat and main seat leakage tests, (c) disc hydrostatic test, (d) functional tests to verify that the valve will operate within the specified time limits when subjected to the design differential pressure prior to operating, and (e) operability qualification of air operator control valves for the conditions over their installed life (i.e., aging, radiation, accident environment simulation, etc.)

in accordance with the requirements of IEEE Standard 382(see Section 3.11). Cold hydro qualification tests, preoperational tests, hot functional qualification tests, periodic inservice inspections, and periodic inservice operation are performed after installation to verify and assure functional ability of the valves. To the extent practicable, functional tests are performed after installation to verify that the valve will open and/or close in a time consistent with required safety functions.

3.9-36 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 (8) Active Category I valves are designed using either stress analyses or the pressure containing minimum wall thickness requirements. An analysis of the extended structure is performed for static equivalent seismic loads applied at the center of gravity of the extended structure. The maximum stress limits allowed in these analyses confirms structural integrity and are the limits developed and accepted by the ASME for the particular ASME class of valve analyzed. The stress limits used for active Class 2 and 3 valves are given in Table 3.9-19. Class 1 valves are designed according to the rules of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III, NB-3500.

(9) Representative active Category I valves of each design type with overhanging structures (i.e., motor or pneumatic operator) are tested for verification of operability during a simulated seismic event by demonstrating operational capabilities within specified limits. The testing is conducted on a representative number of valves. Valves from each of the primary safety-related design types (e.g., motor- operated gate valves) are tested.

Valve sizes which cover the range of sizes in service are qualified by the tests and the results are used to qualify all valves within the intermediate range of sizes. Stress and deformation analyses are used to support the interpolation.

The valve is mounted in a manner which is conservatively representative of a typical plant installation. The valve includes the operator and all appurtenances normally attached to the valve in service. The operability of the valve during a seismic event is verified by satisfying the following requirements:

(a) All active valves are designed to have a first natural frequency which is greater than 33 Hz if practical to do so. This may be shown by suitable test or analysis.

If the lowest natural frequency of an active valve is less than 33 Hz, the valve's mathematical model is included in the piping dynamic analysis.

This assures the calculated valve acceleration does not exceed the values used in the static tests of the manufacturers qualification program and reflects the proper valve dynamic behavior.

(b) The actuator and yoke of the valve system are statically loaded an amount greater than that determined by an analysis as representing the applicable seismic accelerations applied at the center of gravity of the operator alone in the direction of the weakest axis of the yoke. The design pressure of the valve is simultaneously applied to the valve during the static deflection tests.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-37

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 (c) The valve is then operated while in the deflected position, i.e., from the normal operating mode to the faulted operating mode. The valve must perform its safety-related function within the specified operating time limits.

(d) Motor operators and other electrical appurtenances necessary for operation are qualified as operable during the seismic event by analysis and/or testing in accordance with the requirements of IEEE Standards 344 (refer to Section 3.9.2.2 for the applicable edition).

The accelerations used for the static valve qualification are 3.0 g horizontal and 2.0 g vertical with the valve yoke axis vertical. The piping designer shall maintain the motor operator accelerations to equivalent levels. If the valve accelerations exceed these levels, an evaluation of the valve is performed to document acceptability on a case-by-case basis.

If the frequency of the valve, by test or analysis, is less than 33 Hz, a dynamic analysis of the valve is performed to determine the equivalent acceleration to be applied during the static test. The analysis shall provide the amplification of the input acceleration considering the natural frequency of the valve and piping along with the frequency content of the applicable plant floor response spectra. The adjusted accelerations are determined using the same conservatism contained in the accelerations used for "rigid" valves. The adjusted accelerations are then used in the static analysis and the valve operability is assured by the methods outlined in steps (b), (c), and (d) above using the modified acceleration input.

(10) The design of each active Category I check valve is such that once the structural integrity of the valve is assured using standard design or analysis methods, the ability of the valve to operate is assured by the design features.

In addition to design considerations, each active check valve undergoes:

(a) Stress analysis including the applicable seismic loads (b) In-shop hydrostatic tests for parts that could affect the operability of the valve, (c) In-shop seat leakage tests, and (d) Preoperational and periodic in-situ testing and inspection to assure functional ability of the valves.

3.9-38 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 (11) The design of the pressurizer safety valve (Category I) is such that once the structural integrity of the valves is assured using standard design or analysis methods, the ability of the valve to operate is assured by the design features.

In addition to design considerations, the pressurizer safety valve is subjected to:

(a) Stress and/or deformation analysis for parts that could affect the operability of the valve for the applicable seismic loads, (b) In-shop hydrostatic and seal leakage tests, and (c) Periodic in-situ valve inspection.

In addition to these tests, a static load equivalent to the seismic load is applied to the top of the bonnet and the pressure is increased until the valve mechanism actuates. Successful actuation within the design requirements of the valve has been demonstrated.

(12) Wherever practicable, prototype test and analytical results are utilized to assure functional adequacy of active Category I pumps and valves and their appurtenances.

3.9.3.3 Design and Installation Details for Mounting of Pressure Relief Devices The design and installation of pressure relieving devices are consistent with the requirements established by Regulatory Guide 1.67, "Installation of Overpressure Protective Devices."

Each main steam line is provided with one power operated atmospheric relief valve and five safety valves sized in accordance with ASME, B&PV,Section III.

The safety valves are set for progressive relief in intermediate steps of pressure within the allowed range (105% of the design pressure) of pressure settings to prevent more than one valve actuating simultaneously. The valve pressure settings at which the individual valves open are tabulated below in the column identified as "Set Pressure."

The valves are designed to reseat at the pressure values identified in the column "Blowdown Pressure."

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-39

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Maximum Expected Rated Flow at Accumulation Accumulation Pressure in Set Pressure + Blowdown1 Pressure In Set Pressure to Pressure at Steam Header at 3% Pressure Below Steam Header Valve Mark Pressure fully Open maximum Rated Relieving Accumulation Set Pressure to at Valve Closing Number (psig) Valve (%) Flow (%) Flow (psig) (lb/hr) Close (%) (psig) 47W400-101 1185 3 8.4 1284 791,563 10 1066.5 47W400-102 1195 3 7.5 1284 798,163 10 1075.5 47W400-103 1205 3 6.6 1284 804,764 10 1084.5 47W400-104 1215 3 5.8 1284 811,364 10 1093.5 47W400-105 1224 3 4.9 1284 817,304 10 1101.6 Note 1. The licensing basis for the WBN plant is 10% maximum blowdown[13].

This is more conservative than the 5% maximum blowdown specified by the ASME Section III requirements.

All valves are connected to a rigidly supported common header that is in turn connected to the main steam piping through branch piping equal in size to the main steam piping. The header and valves are located immediately outside containment in the main steam valve building.

The safety valves are mounted on the header such that they produce torsion, bending, and thrust loads in the header during valve operation. The header has been designed to accommodate both dynamic and static loading effects of all valves blowing down simultaneously.

The stress produced by the following loading effects assumed to act concurrently are within the code allowable.

(1) Deadweight effects (2) Thermal loads and movements (3) Seismic loads and movements (4) Safety valve thrust, moments, torque loading1 (5) Internal pressure 1

The safety valve thrust loads are assumed to occur in the upset plant condition, and do not occur concurrently with an OBE.

The nozzles connecting each valve to the header are analyzed to assure that for both dynamic and static loading situations, the stresses produced in the nozzle wall are within the code allowable for the same loading consideration as the header.

The safety valves and power-operated atmospheric relief valves are Seismic Category I components. They have been seismically qualified by analyses per criteria presented in Section 3.7.3.16 and Table 3.9-16.

Pressure relief valves in auxiliary safety related systems have been installed considering loads carried in the support members produced by:

(1) Deadweight of valve and appurtenances, 3.9-40 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 (2) Thermal effects, (3) Seismic effects, (4) Maximum valve thrust, moment, and torque loading effects, and (5) Internal pressure.

Relief valves that discharge to the atmosphere are either rigidly supported by their own individual support, or the nozzle and component to which the valve is attached (vessel, tank, or pipe) has been designed to carry the valve static and dynamic loads. Individual supports have been designed to stress levels in accordance with Section 3.9.3.4.2.

Stresses in nozzles and components produced by the valve loads considered above are determined per the method delineated in Welding Research Council Bulletin No.

107 or equivalent and are combined with normal loading operational loads for the component. Relief valves blowing down is considered as an upset loading condition for the plant. Therefore, the allowable stress intensity for the component supporting the valve loads is in accordance with those tabulated in Tables 3.9-2, 3.9-8, 3.9-9, or 3.9-14, as applicable.

Loading associated with relief valves discharging through piping components to a collector tank are analyzed considering the surge effects of the initial discharge through the pipe. This condition is considered as an upset loading condition for the piping components connecting to the valve and the allowable stress intensity is in accordance with those for piping components tabulated in Tables 3.9-8 and 3.9-9.

Pressure relief valves and pertinent operating information for the valves that have been considered in the installation requirements of the valve are tabulated in Table 3.9-20.

As related to the design and installation criteria of pressure relieving devices, Westinghouse interfaces with TVA by providing the following:

(1) Overpressure Protection Report[14]. This report documents the compliance for overpressure protection requirements as per the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III, NB-7300 and NC-7300, and provides the maximum relieving requirements.

(2) Mounting brackets on the pressurizer. These brackets can be used as structural supports, if needed.

(3) Criteria and guidelines. Supplementary criteria specifically applicable to the design and fabrication of nuclear plant safety and relief valve installations are provided.

(4) Review of system layout and resultant loads for acceptability, where applicable.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-41

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 3.9.3.4 Component Supports 3.9.3.4.1 Subsystem and Component Supports Analyzed or Specified by Westinghouse (1&2)The criteria for Westinghouse supplied supports for ASME Code Class 1 Mechanical Equipment is presented in Section 5.2.1.10.7.

(3) ASME Code - Class 2 and 3 supports are designed as follows:

(A) Linear (a) Normal - The allowable stresses of AISC-69 Part 1, a reference basis for Subsection NF of ASME Section III, are employed for normal condition limits.

(b) Upset - Stress limits for upset conditions are the same as normal condition stress limits. This is consistent with Subsection NF of ASME Section III (see NF-3320).

(c) Emergency - For emergency conditions, the allowable stresses or load ratings are 33% higher than those specified for normal conditions. This is consistent with Subsection NF of ASME Section III in which (see NF-3231) limits for emergency conditions are 33% greater than the normal condition limits.

(d) Faulted - Section 5.2.1.10 specifies limits which assure that no large plastic deformations will occur (stress < 1.2Sy). If any inelastic behavior is considered in the design, detailed justification is provided for this limit.

Otherwise, the supports for active components are designed so that stresses are less than or equal to Sy. Thus the operability of active components is not endangered by the supports during faulted conditions.

Welding was in accordance with the American Welding Society, (AWS)

"Structural Welding Code," AWS D1.1, with revisions 1-73 and 1-74, except later editions may be used for prequalified joint details, base materials, and qualification of welding procedures and welders.

Nuclear Construction Issues Group documents NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 may be used after June 26, 1985, for weldments that were designed and fabricated to the requirements of AISC/AWS. Visual inspection of structural welds will meet the minimum requirements of NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 as specified on the design drawings or other design output.

Inspectors performing visual examination to the criteria of NCIG-01 are trained in the subject criteria.

(A) Plates and Shells 3.9-42 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 The stress limits used for ASME Class 2 and 3 plate and shell component supports are identical to those used for the supported component. These allowed stresses are such that the design requirements for the components and the system structural integrity are maintained.

For active Class 2 or 3 pumps, support adequacy is proven by satisfying the criteria in Section 3.9.3.2.1. The requirements consist of both stress analysis and an evaluation of pump/motor support misalignment.

Active valves are, in general, supported only by the pipe attached to the body. Exterior supports on the valve are not used.

3.9.3.4.2 Subsystem and Component Supports Analyzed or Specified by TVA (1) ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 Piping Supports (a) Loading Conditions The following conditions have been assigned for support load evaluation for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant support design (not including pipe whip restraints): normal, upset, emergency, faulted, and test condition. The piping support design loads and combinations are given in Table 3.9-13A.

(b) Support Types, Loading Combinations, Stress Limits, and Applicable Codes (1) Linear Supports The allowed stresses are defined in Table 3.9-21. The load combinations and allowable stresses are based on and exceed the requirements of NRC Regulatory Standard Review Plan, Directorate of Licensing, Section 3.9.3.

The design load is determined by the condition yielding the most conservative support design.

Welding was in accordance with the American Welding Society, (AWS)

"Structural Welding Code," AWS D1.1 with revisions 1-73 and 1-74, except later editions may be used for prequalified joint details, base materials, and qualification of welding procedures and welders. Nuclear Construction Issues Group documents NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 may be used after June 26, 1985, for weldments that were designed and fabricated to the requirements of AISC/AWS. Visual inspection of structural welds will meet the minimum requirements of NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 as specified on the design drawings or other design output. Inspectors performing visual examination to the criteria of NCIG-01 are trained in the subject criteria.

(2) Standard Support MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-43

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 The allowable stresses are defined in Table 3.9-21. The load combinations consider all applicable load sources which induce load into the appropriate type support. The design conforms to the requirements of MSS-SP-58, 1967 edition or ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III, subsection NF.

(3) Pre-engineered Support Element Pre-engineered support elements are defined as standard hardware items such as rods, clamps, clevises, and struts used in the installation of either a linear support or a standard support component.

The design load is determined from the tabulated loads described above for the linear or standard support component. The allowable loads are given in Table 3.9-21.

(c) General Design Requirements (1) The gravitational or actual loads are considered to consist of pipe, fittings, pipe covering, contents of pipe systems, and valves.

(2) All thermal modes of operation are considered in load evaluation.

Thermal loads are not considered to relieve primary loads induced by gravity, other sustained loads, or seismic events.

(3) Installation tolerances are not considered a source of load reduction unless special installation requirements are required.

(4) The required movement in unrestrained directions for the line being supported is tabulated in the table of support loads. The support design is arranged to accommodate this required movement of the piping. Hangers are designed in such a manner that they cannot become disengaged by any movement of the supported pipe.

(5) If ASME Code Case N-318-3 is used in the design of integral welded attachments to the piping pressure boundary, the requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.84 are documented in TVA calculations.

(d) Deformation Limits Pipe support stiffness/deflection limitations are required for seismic Category I.

The following criteria are used for support stiffness requirements:

(1) All pipe support structural steel, except as described below, is designed to limit the maximum deflection to 0.0625" (based on the greater of the seismic/dynamic load components of the upset or 3.9-44 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 faulted loading conditions, or based on the minimum design load).

In addition, the maximum deflection is limited to 0.125" (based on the total design load). These analyses were performed independently for each restrained direction (axis) at the point of load application.

(2) The first dynamic support in each lateral direction adjacent to strain sensitive equipment (i.e., pump, compressor or turbine nozzle) is designed to limit the maximum deflection to 0.0625" (based on the total design load). This analysis is performed independently for each restrained direction (axis) at the point of load application.

(3) Except for the unbraced cantilevers, baseplate rotation or deflection due to baseplate flexibility are considered insignificant and, therefore, are not considered. Anchor bolt stiffness is not considered for this evaluation.

(4) For supports with a common member (i.e., gang supports) the deflection at the point under consideration due to the simultaneous application of each pipe's dead weight and thermal loads added algebraically are evaluated to determine the maximum deflection for both the hot and cold pipe conditions. The deflection at the point under consideration resulting from the simultaneous application of each pipe's dynamic loads is determined by SRSS method. The total deflection due to dead weight plus thermal, and dynamic loads is evaluated based on absolute summation of the two deflections calculated above.

(5) Support components carrying load primarily in axial tension or compression meet the requirements for stiffness without further evaluation. Also, the stiffness/deflection limitations do not apply in the unrestrained support direction (i.e., due to friction loads).

(6) Component standard support elements are considered rigid and therefore, no stiffness/deflection evaluation is necessary except as provided in approved design standards.

(7) Higher deflection limits may be used if justified on a case-by-case basis.

(e) Considerations for the Faulted Condition Table 3.9-21 identifies the allowed stresses associated with the faulted condition. The faulted load conditions, represented by postulated pipe whip and jet impingement, are evaluated as described in Section 3.6 for all systems, piping, equipment, and structures shown on issued TVA drawings. Piping, systems, pipe supports and other structures that are the targets of postulated pipe whip or jet impingement may require MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-45

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 protection to assure safe plant shutdown. This protection is provided by evaluation on a case-by-case basis.

For evaluation of field routed piping or other field located equipment a different method is used. For these cases, a minimum allowable separation method is used for screening piping systems, conduit, and instrument lines to assure that adequate separation exists between these systems and postulated breaks or through-wall leakage cracks in fluid piping. Where adequate separation is not available, piping is relocated, supports are strengthened, supports added, or mitigative devices are provided to prevent unacceptable loads.

Piping and supports subjected to a jet force from a break in piping of equal or less nominal size and wall thickness are assumed to receive no unacceptable damage, provided the target piping and supports are designed in accordance with accepted codes; i.e. ASME Section III, ANSI B31.1, AISC, etc.

(f) Results The design information for pipe supports of systems analyzed by TVA is tabulated on tables of support design loads and included in the problem file as indicated in Section 3.9.3.1.2.

(2) Mechanical Equipment and Component Supports TVA-designed supports for Category I equipment and components satisfy the AISC allowable stress limits described in Section 3.8.4.5.2 and the stiffness requirements described in Section 3.7.3.16.5. Valve actuator supports are designed as pipe supports. Valve actuator tiebacks have special stiffness requirements to limit valve extended, structure stresses under load.

Vendor-supplied equipment and component supporting structures that are provided as part of the equipment assembly, are seismically qualified as part of the equipment package. This qualification is described in Section 3.9.3.1.2.

3.9.4 Control Rod System 3.9.4.1 Descriptive Information of CRDS Refer to Section 4.2.3.

3.9.4.2 Applicable CRDS Design Specifications Refer to Sections 4.2.3.1.4 and 4.2.3.2.2.

3.9.4.3 Design Loadings, Stress Limits, and Allowable Deformations Refer to Section 4.2.3.3.1.

3.9-46 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 3.9.4.4 CRDS Performance Assurance Program Refer to Section 4.2.3.4.2.

3.9.5 Reactor Pressure Vessel Internals 3.9.5.1 Design Arrangements For verification that changes in design from those in previously licensed plants of similar design do not affect the flow-induced vibration behavior, refer to Section 3.9.2.3.

3.9.5.2 Design Loading Conditions Refer to Section 4.2.2.3.

3.9.5.3 Design Loading Categories Refer to Section 4.2.2.4.

3.9.5.4 Design Basis Refer to Section 4.2.2.5.

3.9.6 Inservice Testing of Pumps and Valves Inservice testing of ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 pumps and valves will be conducted to the extent practical in accordance with the 1989 Edition of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Subsections IWV and IWP, as required by 10 CFR 50.55a(g).

Since the Watts Bar piping systems were designed before the Code was issued, some valves and pump parameters cannot be tested in accordance with Subsections IWP and IWV. These exceptions have been noted in the program submittal made to NRC.

The following safety-related pumps will be tested:

(1) Centrifugal Charging Pumps (2) Safety Injection Pumps (3) Residual Heat Removal Pumps (4) Containment Spray Pumps (5) Component Cooling System Circulation Pumps (6) Auxiliary Feedwater Pumps (7) Essential Raw Cooling Water Pumps (8) Boric Acid Transfer Pumps (9) ERCW Screenwash Pumps (10) Main Control Room Chilled Water Pumps (11) Electrical Board Room Chilled Water Pumps (12) Shutdown Board Room Chilled Water Pumps Table 3.9-26 is a tabulation of the various category valves in each of the systems.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-47

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 REFERENCES (1) "Documentation of Selected Westinghouse Structural Analysis Computer Codes", WCAP-8252, April 1977.

(2) WCAP-8317-A, "Prediction of the Flow-Induced Vibration of Reactor Internals by Scale Model Tests," March 1974.

(3) WCAP-8517, "UHI Plant Internals Vibration Measurement Program and Pre and Post Hot Functional Examinations," March 1975.

(4) WCAP-7879, "Four Loop PWR Internals Assurance and Test Program," July 1972.

(5) Trojan Final Safety Analysis Report, Appendix A-12.

(6) Fabic, S., "Description of the BLODWN-2 Computer Code," WCAP-7918, Revision 1, October 1970.

(7) Fabic, S., "Computer Program WHAM for Calculation of Pressure Velocity, and Force Transients in Liquid Filled Piping Networks, "Kaiser Engineers Report No. 67-49-R, November 1967.

(8) Bohn, G. J., "Indian Point Unit No. 2 Internals Mechanical Analysis for Blowdown Excitation," WCAP-7332-AR-P. November, 1973 (Proprietary) and WCAP-7822-AR, November, 1973 (Non-Proprietary)

(9) Bohm, G. J. and LaFaille, J. P., "Reactor Internals Response Under a Blowdown Accident," First Intl. Conf. on Structural Mechanics in Reactor Technology, Berlin, September 20-24, 1971.

(10) "Bench Mark Problem Solutions Employed for Verification of WECAN Computer Program", WCAP-8929, June 1977.

(11) WCAP-11627, "Upflow Conversion Safety Evaluation Report - Watts Bar Units 1 & 2," September 1987.

(12) Letter from Peter S. Tam, NRC, to M. O. Medford, TVA, "Watts Bar Nuclear Plant - Upflow Conversion Modification to Reactor Internals (TAC M85802 &

M85803)", dated July 28, 1993.

(13) Westinghouse letter, WAT-D-7489, "Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Units Numbers 1 and 2 Main Steam Safety Valves Excess Blowdown Analysis - Phase 2",

August 28, 1987.

(14) WCAP-7769, "Topical Report Overpressure Protection for Westinghouse Pressurized Water Reactors," Rev. 1, June, 1972.

3.9-48 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-45 Table 3.9-1 Design Loading Combinations For ASME Code Class 2 And 3 Components And Supports Analyzed By Westinghouse, (Excluding Pipe Supports) (A)

Condition Classification Loading Combination (B, C)

Design and Normal Design pressure Design temperature, Dead weight, nozzle loads Upset Upset condition pressure, Upset condition metal temaperature, deadweight, OBE, nozzle loads Emergency Emergencey condition pressure, emergency condition metal temperature, deadweight, nozzle loads Faulted Faulted condition pressure, faulted condition metal temperature, deadweight, SSE, nozzle loads (A)The responses for each loading combination are combine using the absolute sum method. On a case-by-case basis, algebraic summation may be used when signs are known for final design evaluations.

(B)Temperature is used to determine allowable stress only.

(C)Nozzle loads are those loads associated with the particular plant operating conditions for the component under consideration.

Revised by Amendment 45 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-49

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.9-2 Stress Criteria For Safety Related Asme Class 2 And 3 Tanks Analyzed By Westinghouse Table 3.9-2 Condition Stress Limits Design and Normal m #1.0 S (m or L) + b #1.5 S Upset m # 1.1 S (m or L) + b # 1.65 S Emergency m # 1.5 S (m or L) + b # 1.8 S Faulted m # 2.0 S (m or L) + b # 2.4 S 3.9-50 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 Table 3.9-3 Stress Criteria for Category I ASME Code Class 2 and Class 3 Inactive Pumps and Pump Supports Analyzed by Westinghouse Condition Stress Limits* Pmax**

Design and Normal m # 1.0 S 1.0 (m or L) + b # 1.5 S Upset m # 1.1 S 1.1 (m or L) + b # 1.65 S Emergency m # 1.5 S 1.2 (m or L) + b # 1.80 S Faulted m # 2.0 S 1.5 (m or L) + b # 2.4 S

  • Stress limits are taken from ASME III, Subsections NC and ND, or, for pumps procured prior to the incorporation of these limits into ASME III, from Code Case 1636.
    • The maximum pressure shall not exceed the tabulated factors listed under Pmax times the design pressure.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-51

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Table 3.9-4 Stress Criteria For Safety Related ASME Code Class 2 and Class 3 Valves Analyzed by Westinghouse Condition Stress Limits (Notes 1-6) Pmax (Note 7)

Design & Normal Valve bodies shall conform to the requirements of ASME Section III, NC-3500 (or ND-3500)

Upset m # 1.1 S 1.1 (m or L) + b # 1.65 S Emergency m # 1.5 S 1.2 (m or L) + b # 1.80 S Faulted m # 2.0 S 1.5 (m or L) + b # 2.4 S Notes:

1. Valve nozzle (piping load) stress analysis is not required when both the following conditions are satisfied by calculation: (1) section modulus and area of a plane, normal to the flow, through the region of valve body crotch is at least 10% greater than the piping connected (or joined) to the valve body inlet and outlet nozzles; and, (2) code allowable stress, S, for valve body material is equal to or greater than the code allowable stress, S, of connected piping material. If the valve body material allowable stress is less than that of the connected piping, the valve section modulus and area as calculated in (1) above shall be multiplied by the ratio of S pipe/S valve. If unable to comply with this requirement, the design
2. Casting quality factor of 1.0 shall be used.
3. These stress limits are applicable to the pressure retaining boundary, and include the effects of loads transmitted by the extended structures, when applicable.
4. Design requirements listed in this table are not applicable to valve discs, stems, seat rings, or other parts of valves which are contained within the confines of the body and bonnet, or otherwise not part of the pressure boundary.
5. These rules do not apply to Class 2 and 3 safety relief valves. Safety relief valves are designed in accordance with ASME Section III requirements.
6. Stress limits are taken from ASME III, Subsections NC and ND, or, for valves procured prior to the incorporation of these limits into ASME III, from Code Case 1635.
7. The maximum pressure resulting from upset, emergency or faulted conditions shall not exceed the tabulated factors listed under Pmax times the design pressure or the rated pressure at the applicable operating condition temperature. If the pressure rating limits are met at the operating conditions, the stress limits in Table 3.9-4 are considered to be satisfied.

3.9-52 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 Table 3.9-5 Deleted by Amendment 64 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-53

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.9-6 Design Criteria For Active Pumps And Pump Supports Analyzed By Westinghouse Condition Design Criteria(1)

Design, Normal and Upset m # 1.0 S m + b # 1.5 S Emergency m # 1.2 S m + b # 1.65 S Faulted m # 1.2 S m + b # 1.8 S Note:

(1)The stress limits specified for active pumps are more restrictive than the ASME III limits, to provide assurance that operability will not be impaired for any operating condition.

3.9-54 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Table 3.9-7 Load Sources Load Description BUILDING SETTLEMENT Predicted or Measured Settlement of the Building DBA Design Basis Accident Loading DEADWEIGHT Weight of Pipe, Insulation, and Fluid FLUID TRANSIENTS Transient Loads Due to Valve Operation, Water Hammer LOCA Reactor Coolant Loop Movements Due to Loss of Coolant Accident OBE Operating Basis Earthquake PRESSURE Internal (or External) Pressure in Pipe SAM Seismic Anchor Motions SSE Safe Shutdown Earthquake THERMAL Operating Temperature, Environmental Temperature, Thermal Anchor Movements VALVE THRUST Relief Valve Discharge Thrust Loads PIPE RUPTURE Jet Impingement and Pipe Whip Loads MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-55

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 Table 3.9-8 Loading Constituents And Stress Limits for ASME Class 1 Piping (Page 1 of 2)

LOADING STRESS NB-3650 CONDITION CONSTITUENTS1 LIMIT EQUATION2 NOTES PRIMARY STRESS DESIGN PRESSURE, 1.5Sm 9 (Normal DEADWEIGHT,

& OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, Upset) OBE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS EMERGENCY PRESSURE, 2.25Sm 9E DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, OBE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS FAULTED PRESSURE, 3.0Sm 9F 5 DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, SEE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS, DBA INERTIA, LOCA, PIPE RUPTURE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY STRESS NORMAL PRESSURE, THERMAL, 3.0Sm 10 3

& THERMAL ANCHOR MOVEMENT, UPSET THERMAL LINEAR GRADIENT, THERMAL DISCONTINUITY, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENT, OBE, OBE SAM PRESSURE, THERMAL, 11 4,8 THERMAL ANCHOR MOVEMENT, THERMAL NONLINEAR GRADIENT, THERMAL LINEAR GRADIENT, THERMAL DISCONTINUITY, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENT, OBE, OBE SAM THERMAL, 3.0Sm 12 3 THERMAL ANCHOR MOVEMENTS 3.9-56 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 Table 3.9-8 Loading Constituents And Stress Limits for ASME Class 1 Piping (Page 2 of 2)

PRESSURE, 3.0Sm 13 3 DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, OBE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS, THERMAL DISCONTINUITY TESTING PRESSURE 0.9Sy 7,8 PRESSURE, 1.35Sy DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS PRESSURE DESIGN DESIGN DESIGN PRESSURE Pa 6 UPSET Max. Service PRESSURE Pa 6 EMERGENCY Max. Service PRESSURE 1.5Pa 6 FAULTED Max. Service PRESSURE 2.0Pa 6 Notes

1. Loads which are not concurrent need not be combined.
2. All references are for ASME Code, Subsection NB for Class 1 piping.
3. If the requirements of equation 10 are not met, then the requirements of equations 12 & 13 must be met.
4. Salt for all load sets are calculated per NB-3653.3 and then, the cumulative usage factor per NB-3653.4 and NB-3653.5. The cumulative usage factor shall not exceed 1.0.
5. The design measures taken to protect against pipe rupture loads and the evaluation of these loads is described in Section 3.6.
6. The allowable pressure value Pa is calculated per NB 3640.
7. The testing limits are per NB 3226.
8. If there are more than 10 hydrostatic, pneumatic or other tests, then such extra tests shall be included in the fatigue evaluation.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-57

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 Table 3.9-9 Loading Constituents And Stress Limits For Category I ASME Class 2 and 3 Piping LOADING STRESS NC-3652 CONDITION CONSTITUENTS1 LIMIT EQUATION2 NOTES NORMAL PRESSURE, Sh 8 DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS UPSET PRESSURE, 1.2Sh 9U 4 DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, OBE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS EMERGENCY PRESSURE, 1.8Sh 9E DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, OBE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS FAULTED PRESSURE, 2.4Sh 9F 5 DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, SSE INERTIA, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS, DBA INERTIA, LOCA, PIPE RUPTURE NORMAL THERMAL, SA 10 3,4 OR OBE SAM UPSET NORMAL PRESSURE, SA+Sh 11 3,4 OR DEADWEIGHT, UPSET OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL, OBE SAM NORMAL BUILDING SETTLEMENT, 3.0Sc 10A OR DBA SCV MOVEMENT FAULTED TEST PRESSURE, 1.2Sh DEADWEIGHT TEST PRESSURE, SA+Sh DEADWEIGHT, THERMAL 3.9-58 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 Notes

1. Loads which are not concurrent need not be combined.
2. All references are for ASME Code, Subsection NC for Class 2 piping. The corresponding equations in ASME Code Subsection ND for Class 3 should be used as applicable.
3. The requirements of either Equation 10 or Equation 11 must be met.
4. The effects of OBE Seismic Anchor Movements may be excluded from Equations 10 and 11 if they are included in Equation 9U.
5. The design measures taken to protect against pipe rupture loads and the evaluation of these loads is described in Section 3.6.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-59

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.9-10 Loading Constituents And Stress Limits for Active Valve Evaluation LOADING STRESS CONSTITUENTS(1) LIMIT(3)

PRESSURE, 0.76Sy(4)

DEADWEIGHT, 1.0Sy(4) (for swing check valves)

OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL, SSE INERTIA, SSE SAM, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS, DBA INERTIA, LOCA, PIPE RUPTURE(2)

Notes (1) Loads which are not concurrent need not be combined.

(2) The design measures taken to protect against pipe rupture loads and the evaluation of these loads are described in Section 3.6.

(3) The stress is calculated using the section modulus of the attached pipe.

(4) The value of pipe yield stress, Sy, in this table is determined from the code of record for piping analysis (reference Section 3.7.3.8.1).

3.9-60 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 Table 3.9-11 Deleted by Amendment 64 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-61

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 Table 3.9-12 Deleted by Amendment 64 3.9-62 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 Table 3.9-13a Design Loads For Category I Piping Supports Table 3.9-13a LOADING CONDITION CONSTITUENTS1 NOTES NORMAL DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL UPSET DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL, OBE INERTIA, OBE SAM, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS EMERGENCY DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL, OBE INERTIA, OBE SAM, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS FAULTED DEADWEIGHT, 2 OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL, SEE INERTIA, SSE SAM, VALVE THRUST, FLUID TRANSIENTS, DBA INERTIA, LOCA, PIPE RUPTURE TEST DEADWEIGHT, OTHER SUSTAINED LOADS, THERMAL Notes:

1. Loads which are not concurrent need not be combined.
2. The design measures taken to protect against pipe rupture loads and the evaluation of these loads is described in Section 3.6.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-63

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 Table 3.9-13b Design Loading Combinations For Category I Asme Code Class 2 and 3 Floor Mounted*** Components And Component Supports Analyzed by TVA Condition Classification Loading Combination Design and Normal Design pressure Design temperature*

Dead weight, nozzle loads** (Operating Loads)

Upset Upset condition pressure, Upset condition metal temperature*, deadweight, OBE, nozzle loads** (Operating Loads)

Emergency Emergency condition pressure, emergency condition metal temperature*, deadweight, OBE, nozzle loads** (Operating Loads)

Faulted condition pressure, faulted condition metal temperature*, deadweight, SSE, nozzle loads** (Operating Faulted Loads), DBA

  • Temperature is used to determine allowable stress only.
    • Nozzle loads are those loads associated with the particular plant operating conditions for the component under consideration.
      • Line-mounted component (valve) design load combinations correspond to the attached piping load combinations for normal, upset, emergency, and faulted conditions.

3.9-64 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-68 Table 3.9-14 Stress Criteria for Category I ASME Class 2 and Class 3 Tanks Analyzed by TVA Condition Stress Limits(1) Pmax(2)

Design and Normal Pm # 1.0 Sh 1.0 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.5 Sh Upset Pm # 1.1 Sh 1.1 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.65 Sh Emergency Pm # 1.5 Sh 1.2 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.8 Sh Faulted Pm # 2.0 Sh 1.5 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 2.4 Sh Pm, PL, Pb, and Sh are as defined in Table 3.9-18.

Notes (1) The stress allowable values given above were permitted for design, evaluation, and modification activities. As an alternative, a simplified approach was also permitted. By the alternative approach, in addition to meeting the applicable design condition requirements, the tank was analyzed for the faulted condition and tank stresses were limited to 1.2 times the applicable ASME code design/normal condition primary stress allowables.

(2) The maximum pressure was not permitted to exceed the tabulated factors listed under Pmax times the design pressure.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-65

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.9-15 Stress Criteria For Category I ASME Code Class 2 and Class 3 Inactive Pumps Analyzed by TVA Condition Stress Limits(2) Pmax(1)

Design and Normal Pm # 1.0 Sh 1.0 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.5 Sh Upset Pm # 1.1 Sh 1.1 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.65 Sh Emergency Pm # 1.5 Sh 1.2 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.8 Sh Faulted Pm # 2.0 Sh 1.5 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 2.4 Sh Pm, PL, Pb, and Sh are as defined in Table 3.9-18.

Notes:

(1)The maximum pressure does not exceed the tabulated factors listed under Pmax times the design pressure.

he stress allowable values given above were permitted for design, evaluation, and modification activities. As an alternative, a simplified approach was permitted for pumps procured prior to September 1, 1974. By this alternative approach, in addition to meeting applicable ASME code design condition requirements, the pump was analyzed for the faulted condition and pump stresses were limited to 1.2 times the applicable ASME code design/normal condition primary stress allowables.

3.9-66 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.9-16 Stress Criteria For Category I ASME Code Class 2 And Class 3 Inactive Valves Analyzed By TVA Condition Stress Limits (Notes 1-6) Pmax( note 7)

Design and Normal P m # Sh 1.0 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.5 Sh Upset Pm # 1.1 Sh 1.1 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.65 Sh Emergency Pm # 1.5 Sh 1.2 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.8 Sh Faulted Pm # 2.0 Sh 1.5 (Pm or PL) + Pb # 2.4 Sh Pm, PL, Pb, and Sh are as defined in Table 3.9-18.

Notes:

1. Valve nozzle (Piping load) stress analysis is not required when both the following conditions are satisfied by calculation: (1) section modulus and area of a plane, normal to the flow, through the region of valve body crotch is at least 10% greater than the piping connected (or joined) to the valve body inlet and outlet nozzles; and, (2) code allowable stress, S, for valve body material is equal to or greater than the code allowable stress, S, to connected piping material. If the valve body material allowable stress is less than that of the connected piping, the valve section modulus and area as calculated in (1) above shall be multiplied by the ratio of Spipe/Svalve. If unable to comply with this requirement, the design by analysis procedure of NB-3545.2 is an acceptable alternate method.
2. Casting quality factor of 1.0 shall be used.
3. These stress limits are applicable to the pressure retaining boundary, and include the effects of loads transmitted by the extended structures, when applicable.
4. Design requirements listed in this table are not applicable to valve discs, stems, seat rings, or other parts of valves which are contained within the confines of the body and bonnet, or otherwise not part of the pressure boundary.
5. These rules do not apply to Class 2 and 3 safety relief valves. Safety relief valves are designed in accordance with ASME Section III requirements.
6. The stress allowable values given above were permitted for design, evaluation, and modification activities. As an alternative, a simplified approach was permitted for valves procured prior to September 1, 1974. By this alternative approach, in addition to meeting the applicable ASME code design condition requirements, the valve was analyzed or tested per IEEE 344-1971 requirements for the faulted condition. When qualified by analysis using this alternative, the valve stresses were limited to 1.2 times the applicable ASME code design/normal condition primary stress allowables and the valve extended structure stresses were limited to 1.33 times the AISC code normal stress allowables.
7. The maximum pressure resulting from upset or faulted conditions shall not exceed the tabulated factors listed under Pmax times the design pressure or the rated pressure at the applicable MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-67

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 operating condition temperature. If the pressure rating limits are met at the operating conditions, the stress limits in this table are considered to be satisfied.

3.9-68 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 1 of 9)

System Name TVA Valve No. W Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Chemical and FCV-62-61 8112 4 Motor Gate Containment Isolation Volume FCV-62-63 8100 4 Motor Gate Containment Isolation Control FCV-62-691 LCV-460 3 Air Globe Letdown Isolation System (62) FCV-62-701 LCV-459 3 Air Globe Letdown Isolation FCV-62-72 8149A 2 Air Globe Containment Isolation FCV-62-73 8149B 2 Air Globe Containment Isolation FCV-62-74 8149C 2 Air Globe Containment Isolation FCV-62-77 8152 2 Motor Gate Containment Isolation FCV-62-84 8145 3 Air Globe Aux Spray Isolation FCV-62-90 8105 3 Motor Gate ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-62-91 8106 3 Motor Gate ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-62-76 8306A 2 Air Globe Containment Isolation LCV-62-132 LCV-112B 4 Motor Gate CVCS Charging Pump Suction LCV-62-133 LCV-112C 4 Motor Gate CVCS Charging Pump Suction LCV-62-135 LCV-112D 8 Motor Gate CVCS Charging Pump Suction LCV-62-136 LCV-112E 8 Motor Gate CVCS Charging Pump Suction CKV-62-504 8546 8 Self Actuated Check CVCS Charging Pump Suction RFV-62-505 8124  : Self Actuated Relief CCP Suction Relief Valve CKV-62-507 --- 1 Self Actuated Check CCP Suction Chem Feed Check Valve RFV-62-518 8118  : Self Actuated Relief PD CHG Pump Discharge Relief CKV-62-519 8497 3 Self Actuated Check Recip, CP Discharge Check Valve CKV-62-5432 8381 3 Check Containment Isolation Self CKV-62-5602 8368A 2 Actuated Check Containment Isolation Self CKV-62-5612 8368B 2 Actuated Check Containment Isolation Self Actuated 3.9-69 WBNP-91

Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 2 of 9) 3.9-70 WATTS BAR CKV-62-5622 8368C 2 Self Actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-62-5632 8368D 2 Self Actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-62-5761 8367A 2 Self Actuated Check CCP Discharge Header Integrity CKV-62-5771 8367B 2 Self Actuated Check CCP Discharge Header Integrity CKV-62-5781 8367C 2 Self Actuated Check CCP Discharge Header Integrity CKV-62-5791 8367D 2 Self Actuated Check CCP Discharge Header Integrity CKV-62-6381 8557 3 Self Actuated Check Normal Charging Isolation 1-CKV-62-639 CKV-62-6401  : Self Actuated Check Seal Water 1-FCV-62-61 Bypass 8556 3 Self Actuated Check Alternate Charging Isolation 1-RFV-62-649 2 Self Actuated Relief CKV-62-6591 8378 3 Self Actuated Check Seal Water Hx Relief Valve Normal Charging Isolation CKV-62-6601 8379 3 Self Actuated Check Alternate Charging Isolation CKV-62-6611 8377 3 Self Actuated Check Auxiliary Spray Isolation CKV-62-525 8481A 4 Self Actuated Check MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS Prevent Backflow thru Centrifugal CKV-62-532 8481B 4 Self Actuated Check Charging Pump Prevent Backflow thru Centrifugal FCV-62-1228 8870B 1 Air Globe Charging Pump FCV-62-1229 8870A 1 Air Globe Isolation Valve 1-RFV-62-662 8117 2 Self Actuated Relief Isolation Valve 1-RFV-62-1220  : Self Actuated Relief Cntmt Isolation Thermal Relief 1-RFV-62-1221  : Self Actuated Relief Recip CP Suction Over Pressure 1-RFV-62-1222  :: Self Actuated Releif CCP 1A-A Over Pressure CCP 1B-B Over Pressure WBNP-91

Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 3 of 9)

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR Safety FCV-63-1 8812 14 Motor Gate Prevent Radioactive Release in Injection (63) Recirc Mode FCV-63-3 8813 2 Motor Globe Prevent Radioactive Release in Recirc Mode FCV-63-4 8814 2 Motor Globe Prevent Radioactive Release in Recirc Mode FCV-63-5 8806 8 Motor Gate Prevent Radioactive Release in Recirc Mode FCV-63-6 8807B 4 Motor Gate Sis Recirc Flowback Integrity FCV-63-7 8807A 4 Motor Gate Sis Recirc Flowback Integrity FCV-63-8 8804A 8 Motor Gate Sis Recirc Flowpath Integrity FCV-63-11 8804B 8 Motor Gate Sis Recirc Flowpath Integrity FCV-63-23 8888 1 Air Globe Containment Isolation FCV-63-25 8801B 4 Motor Gate ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-63-26 8801A 4 Motor Gate ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-63-47 8923A 6 Motor Gate ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-63-48 8923B 6 Motor Gate ECCS Flowpath Integrity 3.9-71 WBNP-91

Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 4 of 9) 3.9-72 WATTS BAR FCV-63-64 8880 1 Air Globe Containment Isolation FCV-63-71 8871 3/4 Air Globe Containment Isolation FCV-63-72 8811A 18 Motor Gate CNTMT Sump Isolation FCV-63-73 8811B 18 Motor Gate CNTMT Sump Isolation FCV-63-84 8964 3/4 Air Globe Containment Isolation FCV-63-93 8809A 8 Motor Gate RHR Cold Leg Injection Line Isolation FCV-63-94 8809B 8 Motor Gate RHR Cold Leg Injection Line Isolation FCV-63-152 8821A 4 Motor Gate ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-63-153 8821B 4 Motor Gate ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-63-156 8802A 4 Motor Gate ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-63-157 8802B 4 Motor Gate ECCS Flowpath Intgrity FCV-63-172 8840 12 Motor Gate RHR Hot Leg Recirc FCV-63-175 8920  : Motor Globe Prevent Radioactive Release in Recirc Mode FCV-63-185 ---  : Air Globe Leak Test Line Isolation CKV-63-524 8922A 4 Self Actuated Check Prevent Backflow thru Nonoperating CKV-63-526 8922B 4 Self Actuated Check Train Prevent Backflow thru Nonoperational CKV-63-543 8905A 2 Self Actuated Check Train ECCS Flowpath Integrity CKV-63-545 8905C 2 Self Actuated Check RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS CKV-63-547 8905B 2 Self Actuated Check RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

CKV-63-549 8905D 2 Self Actuated Check RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

CKV-63-551 8819A 2 Self Actuated Check RCS Press. Bound. Prot ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-553 8819B 2 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot WBNP-91

Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 5 of 9)

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR CKV-63-555 8819C 2 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-557 8819D 2 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-558 8949D 6 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-559 8949B 6 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-560 8948A 10 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-561 8948B 10 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-562 8948C 10 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-563 8948D 10 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-581 8805 3 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-586 8900A 1-1/2 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-587 8900B 1-1/2 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-588 8900C 1-1/2 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-589 8900D 1-1/2 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-622 8956A 10 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-623 8956B 10 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-624 8956C 10 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-625 8956D 10 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-632 8818B 6 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

WBNP-91 RCS Press. Bound. Prot 3.9-73

Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 6 of 9) 3.9-74 WATTS BAR CKV-63-633 8818A 6 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/ RCS Press.

Bound. Prot CKV-63-634 8818C 6 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-640 8841A 8 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press Bound. Prot CKV-63-635 8818D 6 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press Bound. Prot CKV-63-641 8949A 6 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press Bound. Prot CKV-63-643 8841B 8 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press Bound. Prot CKV-63-644 8949C 6 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press Bound. Prot CKV-63-5023 8958 12 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot CKV-63-5103 8926 8 Self Actuated Check ECCS Flowpath Integrity/

RCS Press. Bound. Prot RFV-63-5113 8858 3/4 Self Actuated Angle SI Pressure Release RFV-63-5343 8853A 3/4 Self Actuated Angle SI Pressure Release RFV-63-5353 8851 3/4 Self Actuated Angle SI Pressure Release RFV-63-5363 8853B 3/4 Self Actuated Angle SI Pressure Release RFV-63-5773 8852 1 Self Actuated Angle SI Pressure Release RFV-63-6023 8855A 1 Self Actuated Angle SI Pressure Release MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS RFV-63-6033 8855B 1 Self Actuated Angle SI Pressure Release RFV-63-6043 8855C 1 Self Actuated Angle SI Pressure Release RFV-63-6053 8855D 1 Self Actuated Angle SI Pressure Release RFV-63-6263 8856A 2 Self Actuated Angle SI Pressure Release RFV-63-6273 8856B 3 Self Actuated Angle SI Pressure Release RFV-63-6373 8842 3/4 Self Actuated Angle SI Pressure Release RFV-63-835 ---- 3/4 Self Actuated Angle SI Pressure Release WBNP-91

Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 7 of 9)

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR Reactor FCV-68-305 8033 3/4 Air Daphragm Containment Isolation Coolant FCV-68-307 8025 3/8 Air Globe Containment Isolation System (68) FCV-68-308 8026 3/8 Air Globe Containment Isolation FCV-68-332 8000A 3 Motor Gate PORV Isolation FCV-68-333 8000B 3 Motor Gate PORV Isolation PCV-68-334 PCV-456 3 Solenoid Globe PORV PCV-68-340A PCV-455 3 Solenoid Globe PORV CKV-68-559 8097 4 Self Actuated Check Containment Isolation RFV-68-563 8010C 6 Self Actuated Angle RCS Pressure Release RFV-68-564 8010B 6 Self Actuated Angle RCS Pressure Release RFV-68-565 8010A 6 Self Actuated Angle RCS Pressure Release FSV-68-394 8012A 1 Solenoid Globe Head Vent FSV-68-395 8012B 1 Solenoid Globe Head Vent FSV-68-396 8014B 1 Solenoid Globe Head Vent FSV-68-397 8014A 1 Solenoid Globe Head Vent Containment FCV-72-2 9001B 10 Motor Gate Containment Isolation Spray FCV-72-21 9017B 12 Motor Gate Containment Sump Recirculation System (72) FCV-72-22 9017A 12 Motor Gate Containment Sump Recirculation FCV-72-39 9001A 10 Motor Gate Containment Isolation FCV-72-40 9026A 8 Motor Gate Containment Isolation FCV-72-41 9026B 8 Motor Gate Containment Isolation FCV-72-44 9020A 12 Motor Gate Containment Sump Recirculation FCV-72-45 9020B 12 Motor Gate Containment Sump Recirculation CKV-72-506 9018A 12 Self Actuated Check Containment Sump Recirculation CKV-72-507 9018B 12 Self Actuated Check Containment Sump Recirculation RFV-72-508 9019A 0.75 Self Actuated Relief Containment Spray PMP A Suction Pressure Relief RFV-72-509 9019B 0.75 Self Actuated Relief Containment Spray PMP B Suction Pressure Relief CKV-72-548 9011A 10 Self Actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-72-549 9011B 10 Self Actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-72-562 9022A 8 Self Actuated Check RHR Isolation 3.9-75 WBNP-91

Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 8 of 9) 3.9-76 WATTS BAR CKV-72-563 9022B 8 Self Actuated Check RHR Isolation Residual Heat FCV-74-1 8702 14 Motor Gate RCS Pressure Boundary Protection Removal System FCV-74-2 8701 14 Motor Gate RCS Pressure Boundary Protection (74) FCV-74-3 8700A 14 Motor Gate ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-74-8 8703 10 Motor Gate RCS Pressure Boundary Protection FCV-74-9 8704 10 Motor Gate RCS Pressure Boundary Protection FCV-74-12 FCV-610 3 Motor Globe RHR Mini-Flow FCV-74-21 8700B 14 Motor Gate ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-74-24 FCV-611 3 Motor Globe RHR Mini-Flow FCV-74-33 8716A 8 Motor Gate ECCS Flowpath Integrity FCV-74-35 8716B 8 Motor Gate ECCS Flowpath Integrity RFV-74-505 8708 3 Self Actuated Relief RHR Pump Suction CKV-74-514 8730A 8 Self Actuated Check Prevent Backflow thru Nonoperating Train CKV-74-515 8730B 8 Self Actuated Check Prevent Backflow thru Nonoperating Train CKV-74-544 8 Self Actuated Check Prevents pump-to-pump Interaction CKV-74-545 8 Self Actuated Check Prevents pump-to-pump Interaction Waste Disposal FCV-77-9 9170 3 Air Diaphragm Containment Isolation MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS System (77) FCV-77-10 FCV-1003 3 Air Diaphragm Containment Isolation FCV-77-16 9159A 3/4 Air Globe Containment Isolation FCV-77-17 9159B 3/4 Air Globe Containment Isolation FCV-77-18 9160A 1 Air Globe Containment Isolation FCV-77-19 9160B 1 Air Globe Containment Isolation FCV-77-20 9157 1 Air Globe Containment Isolation FCV-77-127 2 Air Plug Containment Isolation FCV-77-128 2 Air Plug Containment Isolation CKV-77-849 3/4 Self Actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-77-868 1 Self Actuated Check Containment Isolation RFV-77-2875 1/2 Self Actuated Relief Thermal Relief Valve Penetration X41 WBNP-91

Table 3.9-17 Active Valves for Primary Fluid Systems (Page 9 of 9)

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR Spent Fuel 0-CKV-78-509 8 Self Actuated Check Pump A-A Discharge Check Valve Pool Cooling (78) 0-CKV-78-510 8 Self Actuated Check Pump B-B Discharge Check Valve 0-ISV-78-581 10 Manual Gate Standby Pump Train A Suction Isolation Valve 0-ISV-78-582 10 Manual Gate Standby Pump Train B Suction Isolation Valve 0-CKV-78-586 8 Self Actuated Check Pump C-S Discharge Check Valve 0-ISV-78-587 8 Manual Gate Standby Pump Train B Discharge Isolation Valve 0-ISV-78-588 8 Manual Gate Standby Pump Train A Discharge Isolation Valve 1

Testing not required as part of Inservice Testing Program.

2 Testing not required as part of Inservice Testing Program. Testing not required to meet 10 CFR 50 Appendix J. See Table 6.2.4-1.

3 These components were not committed to meet the requirements of RG 1.48 since these were procured under contracts issued prior to September 1, 1974.

3.9-77 WBNP-91

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 Table 3.9-18 Stress Limits for Active Category I ASME Class 2 and 3 Pumps Condition Stress Limits(1) (2)

Design Normal and Upset Pm # 1.0 Sh (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.5 Sh Emergency Pm # 1.1 Sh (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.65 Sh Faulted Pm # 1.2 Sh (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.8 Sh Sh =Material allowable stress at maximum operating temperature from ASME Edition including Summer 1973 Addenda or the applicable code edition specified at the time of procurement.

Pm =Primary general membrane stress, the average primary stress across the solid section under consideration. Excludes effects of discontinuities and concentrations. Produced by pressure, mechanical loads.

Pb =Primary bending stress. This stress is produced by pressure and mechanical loads including inertia earthquake effects but excluding effects of discontinuities and concentrations.

PL =Primary local membrane stress, the average stress across any solid section under consideration. Considers effects of discontinuities but not concentrations. Produced by pressure and mechanical loads including inertia earthquake effects.

Notes:

1. The stress allowables given above were permitted for design, evaluation, and modification activities. As an alternative, a simplified approach was permitted for pumps procured prior to September 1, 1974. By this alternative approach, in addition to meeting applicable ASME Code design condition requirements, the pump was analyzed for the faulted condition and pump stresses were limited to 1.2 times the applicable ASME Code design/normal condition primary stress allowables.
2. Active pumps procured after September 1, 1974 also complied with operability tests and analysis requirements described in Section 3.9.3.2.2.2.

3.9-78 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.9-19 Stress Limits for Active Category I ASME Class 2 and 3 Valves Condition Stress Limits (Notes 1-6)

Design & Normal Pm # 1.0 Sh (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.5 Sh Upset Pm # 1.1 Sh (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.65 Sh Emergency Pm # 1.5 Sh (Pm or PL) + Pb # 1.8 Sh Faulted Pm # 2.0 Sh (Pm or PL) + Pb # 2.4 Sh Notes:

1. Sh, Pm, Pb, and PL are defined in Table 3.9-18.
2. Valve nozzle (piping load) stress analysis is not required when section modulus and area of a plane, normal to the flow, through the region of valve body crotch is at least 10% greater than the piping connected (or joined) to the valve body inlet and outlet nozzles.
3. Stress in the valve nozzles resulting from connecting pipe does not exceed the limits listed in this table where S is based on the valve material. To ensure this, the attached pipe stress is limited in accordance with Table 3.9-10 unless justified on a case-by-case basis.
4. Design requirements listed in this table are not applicable to valve discs, stems, cast rings, or other parts of valves which are contained within the confines of the body and bonnet.
5. The stress allowables given above were permitted for design, evaluation, and modification activities. As an alternative, a simplified approach was permitted for valves procured prior to September 1, 1974. By this alternative approach, in addition to meeting the applicable ASME code design condition requirements, the valve was analyzed or tested on IEEE 344-1971 requirements for the faulted condition. When qualified by analysis using this alternative, the valve stresses were limited to 1.2 times the applicable ASME code design/normal condition primary stress allowables and the valve extended structure stresses were limited to 1.33 times the AISC Code normal stress allowable.
6. Active valves procured after September 1, 1974 also complied with operability test and analysis requirements of R.G. 1.48.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-79

3.9-80 WATTS BAR Table 3.9-20 Relief Valves in Class 2 Auxiliary Systems Valve Maximum Relieving Set Required System No. Location Fluid Temperature Pressure Flow Rate Discharge SIS 1 Accumulator Tanks/ Nitrogen or 120EF 700/750 psig 1500 cfm Atmosphere N2 Supply Borated Water SIS 2 S. I. Pump Suction Borated Water 100EF 220 psig 25 gpm to PRT SIS 3 S. I. Pump Discharge Borated Water 100EF 1750 psig 20 gpm to PRT SIS 4 Boron Injection Tank Borated Water 180EF 2735 psig 20 gpm to HT RHR 5 Residual Pump Suction Borated Water 350EF** 450 psig 480 gpm to PRT 200EF 450 psig 690 gpm to PRT RHR 6 Residual Pump Discharge Borated Water 120EF 600 psig 20 gpm to PRT CVCS 7 Letdown Line Orifice Borated Water 347EF** 600 psig 227 gpm to PRT CVCS 8 Seal Water Return Line Borated Water 250EF** 150 psig 225 gpm to PRT CVCS 9 Letdown Line Borated Water 200EF 200 psig 200 gpm to VCT***

CVCS 10 Seal Water Return Line Borated Water 150EF 200 psig 180 gpm to VCT***

CVCS 11 Volume Control Tank Hydrogen 130EF 70 psig 350 gpm to HT***

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS Nitrogen or Borated Water CVCS 12 Charging Pump Suction Borated Water 100EF 220 psig 25 gpm to PRT CVCS 13 Positive Displacement Borated Water 250EF 2735 psig 100 gpm to VCT***

Charging Pump Discharge WDS 14 Downstream of 1-FCV Liquid 140EF 50 psig 1 gpm upstream of 127 Radwaste 1-FCV-77-127

    • Water-steam Mixture Downstream of ValvePRT - Pressurizer Relief Tank WBNP-89
      • Safety Class B Discharge PipingVCT - Volume Control Tank HT - Holdup Tanks

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Table 3.9-21 Support Design Allowable Stresses For Category I Piping Supports Supplemental Component Component Structural Standard Supports Standard Supports Load Steel, Welds & W/ LCDS' Except W/O LCDS' Except Condition Structural Bolts(2) Unistrut Clamps Unistrut Clamps(1)

Normal & Normal AISC Manufacturer's Manufacturer's Friction Allowable LCDS for Level A Allowable Catalog Value Upset Normal AISC Manufacturer's Manufacturer's Allowable X 1.33 LCDS for Level B Allowable Catalog Value X 1.2 Emergency Normal AISC Manufacturer's Manufacturer's Allowable X 1.5 LCDS for Level C Allowable Catalog Value X 1.5 Faulted Normal AISC Manufacturer's Manufacturer's Allowable X 1.5 LCDS for Level D Allowable Catalog Value X 1.5 Test Normal AISC Manufacturer's Manufacturer's Allowable LCDS for Level A Allowable Catalog X 1.33 Value X 1.33 Notes:

(1) The allowable loads for both U-bolts and unistrut clamps were developed based on the load testing per the requirements of ASME Section III 1974, Subsection NF including Winter 1974, Addenda.

(2) 0.9 F y / 3 .

Tensile stresses do not exceed 0.9Fy and shear stresses do not exceed For compressive loads, the stress does not exceed 2/3 critical buckling MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-81

WATTS BAR WBNP-51 Table 3.9-22 Deleted by Amendment 51 3.9-82 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-51 Table 3.9-23 Deleted by Amendment 51 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-83

WATTS BAR WBNP-51 Table 3.9-24 Deleted by Amendment 51 3.9-84 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events (Page 1 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Main Steam (1) FCV-1-4 32 Air Globe Main steam and containment isolation PCV-1-5 6 Air Globe SG pressure control and relief FCV-1-7 4 Solenoid Globe Blowdown and containment isolation FCV-1-11 32 Air Globe Main steam and containment isolation PCV-1-12 6 Air Globe SG pressure control and relief FCV-1-14 4 Solenoid Globe Blowdown and containment isolation FCV-1-22 32 Air Globe Main steam and containment isolation PCV-1-23 6 Air Globe SG pressure control and relief FCV-1-25 4 Solenoid Globe Blowdown and containment isolation FCV-1-29 32 Air Globe Main steam and containment isolation PCV-1-30 6 Air Globe SG pressure control and relief FCV-1-32 4 Solenoid Globe Blowdown and containment isolation FCV-1-51 4 Motor Globe AFW pump turbine operation FCV-1-52 4 Hydraulic Globe AFW pump turbine operation FCV-1-147 2 Air Globe Containment isolation FCV-1-148 2 Air Globe Containment isolation FCV-1-149 2 Air Globe Containment isolation FCV-1-150 2 Air Globe Containment isolation FCV-1-181 4 Solenoid Globe Containment isolation FCV-1-182 4 Solenoid Globe Containment isolation FCV-1-183 4 Solenoid Globe Containment isolation FCV-1-184 4 Solenoid Globe Containment isolation 3.9-85 WBNP-90

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-86 WATTS BAR (Page 2 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description SFV-1-512 6x10 Self-actuated Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-513 6x10 Self-actuated Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-514 6x10 Self-actuated Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-515 6x10 Self-actuated Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-516 6x10 Self-actuated Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-517 6x10 Self-actuated Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-518 6x10 Self-actuated Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-519 6x10 Self-actuated Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-520 6x10 Self-actuated Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-521 6x10 Self-actuated Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-522 6x10 Self-actuated Angle relief Steam generator safety relief MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS SFV-1-523 6x10 Self-actuated Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-524 6x10 Self-actuated Angle relief Steam generator safety relief WBNP-90

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 3 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Main Steam (1) SFV-1-525 6x10 Self-actuated Angle relief Steam generator safety relief (Continued)

SFV-1-526 6x10 Self-actuated Angle-relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-527 6x10 Self-actuated Angle-relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-528 6x10 Self-actuated Angle-relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-529 6x10 Self-actuated Angle-relief Steam generator safety relief 6x10 Self-actuated Angle relief Steam generator safety relief SFV-1-530 SFV-1-531 6x10 Self-actuated Angle relief Steam generator safety relief FCV-1-15 4 Motor Gate AFW pump turbine operation FCV-1-16 4 Motor Gate AFW pump turbine operation FCV-1-17 4 Motor Gate AFW pump turbine operation FCV-1-18 4 Motor Gate AFW pump turbine operation CKV-1-891 4 Self-actuated Check Prvnt bkflw btwn stm gen CKV-1-892 4 Self-actuated Check Prvnt bkflw btwn stm gen 3.9-87 WBNP-90

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-88 WATTS BAR (Page 4 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Feedwater (3) FCV-3-33 16 Motor Gate Main feedwater isolation FCV-3-47 16 Motor Gate Main feedwater isolation FCV-3-87 16 Motor Gate Main feedwater isolation FCV-3-100 16 Motor Gate Main feedwater isolation FCV-3-116A 4 Motor Gate AFW flow path integrity FCV-3-116B 4 Motor Gate AFW flow path integrity PCV-3-122 4 Air Globe Maintain head on pump FCV-3-126A 4 Motor Gate AFW flow path integrity FCV-3-126B 4 Motor Gate AFW flow path integrity PCV-3-132 4 Air Globe Maintain head on pump FCV-3-136A 6 Motor Gate AFW flow path integrity FCV-3-136B 6 Motor Gate AFW flow path integrity LCV-3-148 4 Air Globe Steam generator level control LCV-3-148A 2 Air Globe Steam generator level control LCV-3-156 4 Air Globe Steam generator level control LCV-3-156A 2 Air Globe Steam generator level control LCV-3-164 4 Air Globe Steam generator level control LCV-3-164A 2 Air Globe Steam generator level control LCV-3-171 4 Air Globe Steam generator level control LCV-3-171A 2 Air Globe Steam generator level control LCV-3-172 3 Air/Nitrogen Globe Steam generator level control MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS LCV-3-173 3 Air/Nitrogen Globe Steam generator level control LCV-3-174 3 Air/Nitrogen Globe Steam generator level control LCV-3-175 3 Air/Nitrogen Globe Steam generator level control FCV-3-179A 6 Motor Gate AFW flow path integrity FCV-3-179B 6 Motor Gate AFW flow path integrity FCV-3-185 2 Air Globe FW pressure integrity FCV-3-186 2 Air Globe FW pressure integrity FCV-3-187 2 Air Globe FW pressure integrity FCV-3-188 2 Air Globe FW pressure integrity WBNP-90

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 5 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Feedwater (3) FCV-3-236 6 Air Globe Main feedwater isolation (Continued) FCV-3-239 6 Air Globe Main feedwater isolation FCV-3-242 6 Air Globe Main feedwater isolation FCV-3-245 6 Air Globe Main feedwater isolation CKV-3-508 16 Self-actuated Check Pipe break protection CKV-3-509 16 Self-actuated Check Pipe break protection CKV-3-510 16 Self-actuated Check Pipe break protection CKV-3-511 16 Self-actuated Check Pipe break protection CKV-3-638 6 Self-actuated Check Pipe break protection CKV-3-644 6 Self-actuated Check Pipe break protection CKV-3-645 6 Self-actuated Check Pipe break protection CKV-3-652 6 Self-actuated Check Pipe break protection CKV-3-655 6 Self-actuated Check Pipe break protection CKV-3-656 6 Self-actuated Check Pipe break protection CKV-3-669 6 Self-actuated Check Pipe break protection CKV-3-670 6 Self-actuated Check Pipe break protection CKV-3-678 6 Self-actuated Check Pipe break protection CKV-3-679 6 Self-actuated Check Pipe break protection CKV-3-805 6 Self-actuated Check ERCW flowpath integrity CKV-3-806 6 Self-actuated Check ERCW flowpath integrity CKV-3-810 10 Self-actuated Check ERCW flowpath integrity CKV-3-830 4 Self-actuated Check Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity CKV-3-831 4 Self-actuated Check Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity CKV-3-832 4 Self-actuated Check Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity CKV-3-833 4 Self-actuated Check Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity CKV-3-861 4 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-3-862 4 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-3-871 4 Self-actuated Check Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity CKV-3-872 4 Self-actuated Check Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity CKV-3-873 4 Self-actuated Check Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity CKV-3-874 4 Self-actuated Check Maintain TDAFW pump flow path integrity CKV-3-921 4 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation WBNP-90 CKV-3-922 4 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation 3.9-89

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-90 WATTS BAR (Page 6 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Fuel Oil (18) CKV-18-556A-A 1.500 Self-actuated Check 7-DAY MDP #1 ISOL CKV-18-556A-B 1.500 Self-actuated Check 7-DAY MDP #1 ISOL CKV-18-557B-A 1.500 Self-actuated Check 7-DAY MDP #2 ISOL CKV-18-557B-B 1.500 Self-actuated Check 7-DAY MDP #2 ISOL CKV-18-558A-A 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK #1 MDP ISOL CKV-18-558A-B 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK #1 MDP ISOL CKV-18-559A-A 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK #1 EDP ISOL CKV-18-559A-B 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK #1 EDP ISOL RFV-18-560A-A 0.375 Self-actuated Relief DAY TK #1 MDP DISC RFV-18-560A-B 0.375 Self-actuated Relief DAY TK #1 MDP DISC CKV-18-563A-A 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK #1 MDP DISC CKV-18-563A-B 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK #1 MDP DISC CKV-18-565B-A 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK #2 MDP ISOL CKV-18-565B-B 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK #2 MDP ISOL CKV-18-566B-A 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK #2 EDP ISOL CKV-18-566B-B 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK #2 EDP ISOL RFV-18-567B-A 0.375 Self-actuated Relief DAY TK #2 MDP DISC RFV-18-567B-B 0.375 Self-actuated Relief DAY TK #2 MDP DISC CKV-18-570B-A 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK #2 MDP DISC CKV-18-570B-B 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK #2 MDP DISC CKV-18-686A 1.500 Self-actuated Check 7-DAY MDP #1 ISOL MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS CKV-18-686B 1.500 Self-actuated Check 7-DAY MDP #2 ISOL CKV-18-687A 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK #1 EDP ISOL CKV-18-687B 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK #1 MDP ISOL RFV-18-688A 1.500 Self-actuated Relief DAY TK #2 MDP DISC RFV-18-688B 1.500 Self-actuated Relief DAY TK #1 MDP DISC CKV-18-689A 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK MDP #2 DISC CKV-18-689B 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK MDP #1 DISC CKV-18-787A 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK #2 MDP ISOL CKV-18-787B 1.000 Self-actuated Check DAY TK #2 EDP ISOL High-Pressure FCV-26-240 4 Motor Gate Containment isolation Fire Protection FCV-26-243 4 Motor Gate Containment isolation WBNP-90 System (26) 26-1260 4 Self-actuated Check Containment isolation 26-1296 4 Self-actuated Check Containment isolation

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 7 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Ventilation (30) FCV-30-2 24 Air Butterfly Isolation Valve FCV-30-5 24 Air Butterfly Isolation Valve FCV-30-7 24 Air Butterfly Containment Isolation FCV-30-8 24 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-9 24 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-10 24 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-12 24 Air Butterfly Isolation Valve FCV-30-14 24 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-15 24 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-16 24 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-17 24 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-19 10 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-20 10 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-37 8 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-40 8 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-50 24 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-51 24 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-52 24 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-53 24 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-54 24 Air Butterfly Isolation Valve FCV-30-56 24 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-57 24 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-58 10 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-59 10 Air Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-30-61 24 Air Butterfly Isolation Valve FCV-30-62 24 Air Butterfly Isolation Valve 1-FSV-30-134* 1 Solenoid Solenoid Containment isolation 1-FSV-30-135* 1 Solenoid Solenoid Containment isolation

  • Unit 2 valves were deleted under ECN 5663 3.9-91 WBNP-90

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-92 WATTS BAR (Page 8 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Air-Conditioning FCV-31-305 2 Air Gate Containment Isolation System (31) FCV-31-306 2 Air Gate Containment Isolation FCV-31-308 2 Air Gate Containment Isolation FCV-31-309 2 Air Gate Containment Isolation FCV-31-326 2 Air Gate Containment Isolation FCV-31-327 2 Air Gate Containment Isolation FCV-31-329 2 Air Gate Containment Isolation FCV-31-330 2 Air Gate Containment Isolation CKV-31-3378 2 Self Actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-31-3392 2 Self Actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-31-3407 2 Self Actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-31-3421 2 Self Actuated Check Containment Isolation Control Air 0-FCV-32-70 1 Motor Ball Aux. Dryer Purge Control System (32) 0-CKV-32-70A 1 Self Actuated Check Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-70B 1 Self Actuated Check Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-70C 1 Self Actuated Check Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-70D 1 Self Actuated Check Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-FCV-32-71 1 Motor Ball Aux. Dryer Purge Control 0-FCV-32-72 1 Motor Ball Aux. Dryer Purge Control 0-FCV-32-73 1 Motor Ball Aux. Dryer Purge Control 1-FCV-32-80 2 Air Globe Containment Isolation MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 2-FCV-32-81 2 Air Globe Containment Isolation 0-FCV-32-82 2 Air Globe Control Air Normal Flow Isol 0-FCV-32-85 2 Air Globe Control Air Normal Flow Isol 0-FCV-32-94 1 Motor Ball Aux. Dryer Purge Control 0-CKV-32-94A 1 Self Actuated Check Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-94B 1 Self Actuated Check Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-94C 1 Self Actuated Check Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-94D 1 Self Actuated Check Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-FCV-32-95 1 Motor Ball Aux. Dryer Purge Control 0-FCV-32-96 1 Motor Ball Aux. Dryer Purge Control 0-FCV-32-97 1 Motor Ball Aux. Dryer Purge Control WBNP-90

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 9 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Control Air 1-FCV-32-102 2 Air Globe Containment isolation System (32) 2-FCV-32-103 2 Air Globe Containment isolation (cont) 1-FCV-32-110 2 Air Globe Containment isolation 2-FCV-32-111 2 Air Globe Containment isolation 0-CKV-32-240 2 Self Actuated Check Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-256 2 Self Actuated Check Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-264 2 Self Actuated Check Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 0-CKV-32-279 2 Self Actuated Check Air Dryer Purge Check Valve 1-32-293 2 Self Actuated Check Containment isolation 1-32-303 2 Self Actuated Check Containment isolation 1-32-313 2 Self Actuated Check Containment isolation 2-32-323 2 Self Actuated Check Containment isolation 2-32-333 2 Self Actuated Check Containment isolation 2-32-343 2 Self Actuated Check Containment isolation Service Air 1-33-794 1/2 Self Actuated Check Containment isolation System (33) 2-33-797 1/2 Self Actuated Check Containment isolation 3.9-93 WBNP-90

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-94 WATTS BAR (Page 10 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Sampling and FCV-43-2 3/8 Solenoid Globe Containment isolation Water Quality FCV-43-3 3/8 Air Globe Containment isolation (43) FCV-43-11 3/8 Solenoid Globe Containment isolation FCV-43-12 3/8 Air Globe Containment isolation FCV-43-22 3/8 Solenoid Globe Containment isolation FCV-43-23 1-1/3 Air Gate Containment isolation FCV-43-34 3/8 Solenoid Globe Containment isolation FCV-43-35 3/8 Air Globe Containment isolation FCV-43-55 1-1/3 Air Gate containment isolation FCV-43-58 1-1/3 Air Gate Containment isolation FCV-43-61 1-1/3 Air Gate Containment isolation FCV-43-64 1-1/3 Air Gate Containment isolation FCV-43-75 3/8 Solenoid Globe Containment isolation FCV-43-77 3/8 Air Globe Containment isolation 1-PCV-43-200A 1/4 Self Actuated Regulating LOCA H2 Cntmt Monitor Press Reg 1-PCV-43-200B 1/4 Self Actuated Regulating LOCA H2 Cntmt Monitor Press Reg FCV-43-201 3/8 Solenoid Globe Containment isolation FCV-43-202 3/8 Solenoid Globe Containment isolation FCV-43-207 3/8 Solenoid Globe Containment isolation FCV-43-208 3/8 Solenoid Globe Containment isolation 1-PCV-43-210A 1/4 Self Actuated Regulating LOCA H2 Cntmt Monitor Press Reg MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 1-PCV-43-210B 1/4 Self Actuated Regulating LOCA H2 Cntmt Monitor Press Reg Sampling and FCV-43-433 3/8 Solenoid Globe Containment isolation Water Quality FCV-43-434 3/8 Solenoid Globe Containment isolation (43) FCV-43-435 3/8 Solenoid Globe Containment isolation (Continued) FCV-43-436 3/8 Solenoid Globe Containment isolation 1-CKV-43-834 1/2 Self Actuated Check Cntmt Isolation PASS Waste Holdup Tank 1-CKV-43-841 1/2 Self Actuated Check Cntmt Isolation PASS Waste Holdup Tank 1-CKV-43-883 1/2 Self Actuated Check Cntmt Isolation PASS Cntmt Air Return 1-CKV-43-884 1/2 Self Actuated Check Cntmt Isolation PASS Cntmt Air Return 1-PREG-43-1470A-A 1/4 Self Actuated Regulating O2 Reagent Gas for H2 Monitor Press Reg 1-PREG-43-1470B-A 1/4 Self Actuated Regulating O2 Reagent Gas for H2 Monitor Press Reg WBNP-90 1-PREG-43-1471A-B 1/4 Self Actuated Regulating O2 Reagent Gas for H2 Monitor Press Reg 1-PREG-43-1471B-B 1/4 Self Actuated Regulating O2 Reagent Gas for H2 Monitor Press Reg

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 11 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Ice Condenser CKV-61-533 3/8 Self Actuated Check Containment isolation (61) CKV-61-680 3/8 Self Actuated Check Containment isolation CKV-61-692 3/8 Self Actuated Check Containment isolation CKV-61-745 3/8 Self Actuated Check Containment isolation FCV-61-96 2 Air Diaphragm Containment isolation FCV-61-97 2 Air Diaphragm Containment isolation FCV-61-110 2 Air Diaphragm Containment isolation FCV-61-122 2 Air Diaphragm Containment isolation FCV-61-191 4 Air Diaphragm Containment isolation FCV-61-192 4 Air Diaphragm Containment isolation FCV-61-193 4 Air Diaphragm Containment isolation FCV-61-194 4 Air Diaphragm Containment isolation Chemical and FCV-62-1228 1 Air Diaphragm Isolation of Hydrogen vent for charging pumps Volume suction side piping Control System FCV-62-1229 1 Air Diaphragm Isolation of Hydrogen vent for charging pumps (62) suction side piping Emergency Gas 1-FCV-65-8 8 Air Butterfly EGTS Tr A Unit 1 Suction Damper Treatment 1-FCV-65-10 24 Air Butterfly EGTS Tr A Unit 1 Suction Damper System (65) 0-FCV-65-24 8 Air Butterfly EGTS Tr A Fan Isolation Damper 0-FCV-65-28A 8 Air Butterfly EGTS Tr A Decay Cooling Damper 0-FCV-65-28B 8 Air Gate EGTS Tr A Decay Cooling Damper 1-FCV-65-30 24 Air Butterfly EGTS Tr B Unit 1 Suction Damper 0-FCV-65-43 8 Air Butterfly EGTS Tr B Fan Isolation Damper 0-FCV-65-47A 8 Air Gate EGTS Tr B Decay Cooling Damper 0-FCV-65-47B 8 Air Gate EGTS Tr B Decay Cooling Damper 1-FCV-65-51 8 Air Butterfly EGTS Tr B Unit 1 Suction Damper 1-FCV-65-52 14 Air Butterfly Cntmt Annulus Vacuum Fan Isolation Damper 1-FCV-65-53 14 Air Butterfly Cntmt Annulus Vacuum Fan Isolation Damper 1-PCV-65-81 16 Air Butterfly Shield Bldg & Cntmt Annulus Isol Damper 1-PCV-65-83 16 Air Butterfly Shield Bldg & Cntmt Annulus Isol Damper 1-PCV-65-86 16 Air Butterfly EGTS Cntmt Annulus Isolation Damper WBNP-90 1-PCV-65-87 16 Air Butterfly EGTS Cntmt Annulus Isolation Damper 3.9-95

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-96 WATTS BAR (Page 12 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Essential Raw FCV-67-9A 4 Motor Ball ERCW strainer Cooling Water FCV-67-9B 4 Motor Ball ERCW strainer (67) FCV-67-10A 4 Motor Ball ERCW strainer FCV-67-10B 4 Motor Ball ERCW strainer FCV-67-83 6 Motor Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-67-87 6 Motor Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-67-88 6 Motor Butterfly Containment isolation 1-FCV-67-89 6 Motor Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-67-91 6 Motor Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-67-95 6 Motor Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-67-96 6 Motor Butterfly Containment isolation 1-FCV-67-97 6 Motor Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-67-99 6 Motor Butterfly Containment isolation MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WBNP-90

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 13 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Essential Raw FCV-67-103 6 Motor Butterfly Containment isolation Cooling Water FCV-67-104 6 Motor Butterfly Containment isolation (67) (Continued) 1-FCV-67-105 6 Motor Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-67-107 6 Motor Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-67-111 6 Motor Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-67-112 6 Motor Butterfly Containment isolation 1-FCV-67-113 6 Motor Butterfly Containment isolation FCV-67-123 18 Motor Butterfly Containment spray cooling FCV-67-124 18 Motor Butterfly Containment spray cooling FCV-67-125 18 Motor Butterfly Containment spray cooling FCV-67-126 18 Motor Butterfly Containment spray cooling FCV-67-130 2 Motor Plug Containment isolation FCV-67-131 2 Motor Plug Containment isolation FCV-67-133 2 Motor Plug Containment isolation FCV-67-134 2 Motor Plug Containment isolation FCV-67-138 2 Motor Plug Containment isolation FCV-67-139 2 Motor Plug Containment isolation FCV-67-141 2 Motor Plug Containment isolation FCV-67-142 2 Motor Plug Containment isolation FCV-67-143 12 Motor Globe ERCW flow path integrity O-FCV-67-144 16 Motor Globe ERCW flow path integrity O-FCV-67-152 24 Motor Butterfly CCS flow path integrity 1-TCV-67-158 6 Motor Butterfly SBR temperature control 2-TCV-67-158 6 Motor Butterfly SBR temperature control 1-FCV-67-162 2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers 1-FCV-67-164 2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers 3.9-97 WBNP-90

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-98 WATTS BAR (Page 14 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Essential Raw 0-FCV-67-176 1-1/2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers Cooling Water FCV-67-182 1-1/2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers (67) FCV-67-184 1-1/2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers (Continued) FCV-67-186 1-1/2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers 0-FCV-67-205 4 Motor Butterfly Nonessential equipment isolation 0-FCV-67-208 4 Motor Butterfly Nonessential Equipment isolation 1-FCV-67-213 1-1/2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers 1-FCV-67-215 1-1/2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers 2-FCV-67-217 2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers 2-FCV-67-219 2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers FCV-67-295 2 Motor Plug Containment isolation FCV-67-296 2 Motor Plug Containment isolation FCV-67-297 2 Motor Plug Containment isolation FCV-67-298 2 Motor Plug Containment isolation 2-FCV-67-336 1 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers 2-FCV-67-338 1 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers FCV-67-342 2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers FCV-67-344 2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers FCV-67-346 1-1/2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers FCV-67-348 1-1/2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS FCV-67-350 1-1/2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers FCV-67-352 1-1/2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers FCV-67-354 1-1/2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers FCV-67-356 1-1/2 Air Globe ERCW to pump room coolers 0-CKV-67-503A 20 Self-actuated Check ERCW flow path integrity 0-CKV-67-503B 20 Self-actuated Check ERCW flow path integrity 0-CKV-67-503C 20 Self-actuated Check ERCW flow path integrity 0-TCV-67-1050-A 3 Self-actuated Globe EBR condenser temperature control 0-TCV-67-1051-A 3 Self-actuated Globe MCR condenser temperature control 0-TCV-67-1052-B 3 Self-actuated Globe EBR condenser temperature control 3 Self-actuated Globe MCR condenser temperature control WBNP-90 8 Self-Actuated Check ERCW flow path integrity 8 Self-Actuated Check ERCW flow path integrity Self-Actuated Check ERCW flow path integrity

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 15 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Essential Raw 0-TCV-67-1053-B 8 Self-Actuated Check ERCW flow path integrity Cooling Water CKV-67-508A 8 Self-Actuated Check ERCW flow path integrity (67) CKV-67-508B 8 Self-Actuated Check ERCW flow path integrity (Continued) 0-CKV-67-508A 8 Self-Actuated Check ERCW flow path integrity 0-CKV-67-508B 10 Self-Actuated Check ERCW flow path integrity 0-CKV-67-513A 10 Self-Actuated Check ERCW flow path integrity 0-CKV-67-513B 3 Self-Actuated Check ERCW flow path integrity 0-CKV-67-517A 3 Self-Actuated Check ERCW flow path integrity 0-CKV-67-512A 8 Self-Actuated Check ERCW flow path integrity 1-CKV-67-940A 8 Self-actuated Check ERCW flowpath integrity 2-CKV-67-935B 20 Self-actuated Check ERCW flowpath integrity CKV-67-513A 20 Self-actuated Check ERCW flowpath integrity CKV-67-513B 20 Self-actuated Check ERCW flowpath integrity 0-CKV-67-503D 20 Self-actuated Check ERCW flowpath integrity 0-CKV-67-503E 20 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation 0-CKV-67-503F 1/2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation 0-CKV-67-503G 1/2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation 0-CKV-67-503H 1/2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-67-575A 1/2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-67-575B 2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-67-575C 2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-67-575D 2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-67-580A 2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-67-580B 1/2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-67-580C 1/2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-67-580D 1/2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-67-585A 1/2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-67-585B 1/2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-67-585C 1/2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation CKV-67-585D 1/2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation 3.9-99 WBNP-90

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-100 WATTS BAR (Page 16 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description 1-CKV-67-1054A 1/2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation 1-CKV-67-1054B 1/2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation 1-CKV-67-1054C 1/2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation 1-CKV-67-1054D 1/2 Self-actuated Check Containment Isolation 0-CKV-67-502A 2 Self-actuated Check Air release 0-CKV-67-502B 2 Self-actuated Check Air release 0-CKV-67-502C 2 Self-actuated Check Air release 0-CKV-67-502D 2 Self-actuated Check Air release 0-CKV-67-502E 2 Solenoid Globe Air release 0-CKV-67-502F 2 Self Check Air release 0-CKV-67-502G 2 Self Check Air release 0-CKV-67-502H Self Check Air release 0-FSV-67-1221-A 1 Solenoid Globe ERCW Supply 0-PCV-67-1222 1 Self Regulating Press Cntr for ERCW to Aux Air Comp A 0-TCV-67-1222A 1/2 Self Regulating Throttles ERCW to Aux Air Comp A cyl jacket 0-TCV-67-1222B 3/4 Self Regulating Throttles ERCW to Aux Air Comp A cyl jacket 0-FSV-67-1223-B 1 Solenoid Globe ERCW Supply 0-PCV-67-1224 1 Self Regulating Press Cntr for ERCW to Aux Air Comp B 0-TCV-67-1224A 1/2 Self Regulating Throttles ERCW to Aux Air Comp B cyl jacket 0-TCV-67-1224B 3/4 Self Regulating Throttles ERCW to Aux Air Comp B cyl jacket Component FCV-70-85 6 Air Butterfly Containment Isolation MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS Cooling Water FCV-70-87 3 Motor Gate Containment Isolation (70) FCV-70-89 6 Motor Butterfly Containment Isolation FCV-70-90 3 Motor Gate Containment Isolation FCV-70-92 6 Motor Butterfly Containment Isolation WBNP-90

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 17 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Component 1-FCV-70-100 6 Motor Butterfly Containment Isolation Cooling Water FCV-70-133 3 Motor Gate RCP Thermal Barrier Isolation (70) (Continued) FCV-70-134 3 Motor Gate Containment Isolation FCV-70-140 6 Motor Butterfly Containment Isolation FCV-70-143 6 Motor Butterfly Containment Isolation FCV-70-156 18 Motor Butterfly RHR Hx Isolation FCV-70-168 10 Motor Butterfly BAE Isolation Valve 0-FCV-70-194 20 Motor Butterfly Spent Fuel Pit Hx Isolation FCV-70-197 20 Motor Butterfly Spent fuel pit Hx isolation 0-CKV-70-504 16 Self-actuated Check Prevent backflow through CCP CKV-70-504A 16 Self-actuated Check Prevent backflow through CCP CKV-70-504B 16 Self-actuated Check Prevent backflow through CCP 1-CKV-70-679 3 Self-actuated Check Containment isolation CCP CKV-70-698 3/4 Self-actuated Check Containment isolation CCP 0-CKV-70-753 8 Self-actuated Check CDWE Return Check 1-CKV-70-790 3/4 Self-actuated Check Containment isolation 1,2-FCV-70-183 3 Motor Gate Sample Hx Isolation 1,2-FCV-70-215 3 Motor Gate Sample Hx Isolation 1-FCV-70-66 2 Air Angle CCS surge tank isolation 2-FCV-70-66 2 Air Angle CCS surge tank isolation 1-RFV-70-538 3X4 Self actuated Relief Surge tank 1A/1B relief 1-CKV-70-681-A, B, C, D 1-1/2 Self actuated Check Overpressurization protection 1-CKV-70-682-A, B, C, D 1-1/2 Self actuated Check Overpressurization protection 1-CKV-70-687 3/4 Self actuated Check RCP thermal barrier isolation 1-RFV-70-703 3/4 Self actuated Relief Excess letdown HX relief 1-RFV-70-835 3/4 x 1 Self actuated Relief RCP thermal barrier supply relief Primary Water FCV-81-12 3 Air Gate Primary water to RCS PRT System (81) CKV-81-502 3 Self-actuated Gate Primary water to RCS PRT 3.9-101 WBNP-90

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-102 WATTS BAR (Page 18 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Standby Diesel 1-FCV-82-160 1.500 Air Diaph Flow Cont 1A1 TK A Generators (82) 1-FSV-82-160-A 0.370 Elec Sol V Air ST SOL 1A1 (A) 1-FCV-82-161 1.500 Air Diaph Flow Cont 1A2 TK A 1-FSV-82-161-A 0.370 Elec Sol V Air ST SOL 1A2 (A) 1-PCV-82-162A 2.000 Air Diaph PR RED V 1A1 TK A 1-PREG-82-162B 0.250 Self Diaph PR REG V 1A1 TK A 1-PCV-82-163A 2.000 Air Diaph PR RED V 1A2 TK A 1-PREG-82-163B 0.250 Self Diaph PR REG V 1A2 TK A 1-FCV-82-170 1.500 Air Diaph FLOW CONT 1A1 TK B 1-FSV-82-170-A 0.370 Elec Sol V AIR ST SOL 1A1 (B) 1-FCV-82-171 1.500 Air Diaph FLOW CONT 1A2 TK B 1-FSV-82-171-A 0.370 Elec Sol V AIR ST SOL 1A2 (B) 1-PCV-82-172A 2.000 Air Diaph PR RED V 1A1 TK B 1-PREG-82-172B 0.250 Self Diaph PR REG V 1A1 TK B 1-PCV-82-173A 2.000 Air Diaph PR RED V 1A2 TK B 1-PREG-82-173B 0.250 Self Diaph PR REG V 1A2 TK B 1-FCV-82-190 1.500 Air Diaph FLOW CONT 1B1 TK A 1-FSV-82-190-A 0.370 Elec Sol V AIR ST SOL 1B1(A) 1-FCV-82-191 1.500 Air Diaph FLOW CONT 1B2 TK A 1-FSV-82-191-A 0.370 Elec Sol V AIR ST SOL 1B2 (A) 1-PCV-82-192A 2.000 Air Diaph PR RED V 1B1 TK A MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 1-PREG-82-192B 0.250 Self Diaph PR REG V 1B1 TK A WBNP-90

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR (Page 19 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Standby Diesel 0-FCV-82-310 1.500 Air Diaph FLOW CONT 0C1 TK B Generators (82) 0-FSV-82-310-S 0.370 Elec Sol V AIR ST SOL 0C1 (B)

(Continued) 0-FCV-82-311 1.500 Air Diaph FLOW CONT 0C2 TK B 0-FSV-82-311-S 0.370 Elec Sol V AIR ST SOL 0C2 (B) 0-PCV-82-312A 2.000 Air Diaph PR RED V 0C1 TK B 0-PCV-82-312B 0.250 Self Diaph PR REG V 0C1 TK B 0-PCV-82-313A 2.000 Air Diaph PR RED V 0C2 TK B 0-PCV-82-313B 0.250 Self Diaph PR REG V 0C2 TK B CKV-82-502A1 0.750 Self Check TK SUP A1 (A)

CKV-82-502A2 0.750 Self Check TK SUP B1 (A)

CKV-82-505A1 0.750 Self Check TK SUP A1 (B)

CKV-82-505A2 0.750 Self Check TK SUP B1 (B)

CKV-82-509A1 0.750 Self Check CROSS CONN CK A1 CKV-82-509A2 0.750 Self Check CROSS CONN CK B1 CKV-82-523A1 0.750 Self Check RELAY CK A1 (A)

CKV-82-523A2 0.750 Self Check RELAY CK B1 (A)

SPV-82-524A1 0.375 Self Check SLIDE VLV A1 SPV-82-524A2 0.375 Self Check SLIDE VLV B1 CKV-82-531A1 0.750 Self Check RELAY CK A1 (B)

CKV-82-531A2 0.750 Self Check RELAY CK B1 (B)

CKV-82-536B1 0.750 Self Check TK SUP A2 (A)

CKV-82-536B2 0.750 Self Check TK SUP B2 (A)

CKV-82-539B1 0.750 Self Check TK SUP A2 (B)

CKV-82-539B2 0.750 Self Check TK SUP B2 (B)

CKV-82-543B1 0.750 Self Check CROSS CONN CK A2 CKV-82-543B2 0.750 Self Check CROSS CONN CK B2 CKV-82-557B1 0.750 Self Check RELAY CK A2 (A)

CKV-82-557B2 0.750 Self Check RELAY CK B2 (A)

SPV-82-558B1 0.375 Self Check SLIDE VLV A2 SPV-82-558B2 0.375 Self Check SLIDE VLV B2 CKV-82-565B1 0.750 Self Check RELAY CK A2 (B)

CKV-82-565B2 0.750 Self Check RELAY CK B2 (B)

WBNP-90 0-CKV-82-561 0.750 Self Check TK SUP 0C1 (A) 3.9-103 0-CKV-82-562 0.750 Self Check TK SUP 0C2 (A)

Table 3.9-25 Valves Required To Be Active For Design Basis Events 3.9-104 WATTS BAR (Page 20 of 20)

System Name Valve No. Size Inches Actuation Type Function/Description Standby Diesel 0-CKV-82-567 0.750 Self Check TK SUP 0C1 (B)

Generators (82) 0-CKV-82-568 0.750 Self Check TK SUP 0C2 (B)

(Continued) 0-CKV-82-572 0.750 Self Check CROSS CONN CK 0C2 0-CKV-82-573 0.750 Self Check CROSS CONN CK 0C1 0-CKV-82-589 0.750 Self Check RELAY CK 0C1 (A) 0-CKV-82-590 0.750 Self Check RELAY CK 0C2 (A) 0-CKV-82-591 0.750 Self Check RELAY CK 0C1 (B) 0-CKV-82-592 0.750 Self Check RELAY CK 0C2 (B) 0-SPV-82-593 0.375 Self Check SLIDE VLV 0C1 0-SPV-82-594 0.375 Self Check SLIDE VLV 0C2 Radiation 1,2-FCV-90-107 1-1/2 Motor Gate Containment Isolation Monitoring (90) 1,2-FCV-90-108 1-1/2 Motor Gate Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-109 1-1/2 Motor Gate Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-108 1-1/2 Motor Gate Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-109 1-1/2 Motor Gate Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-110 1-1/2 Motor Gate Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-111 1-1/2 Motor Gate Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-113 1-1/2 Motor Gate Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-114 1-1/2 Motor Gate Containment Isolation MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 1,2-FCV-90-115 1-1/2 Motor Gate Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-116 1-1/2 Motor Gate Containment Isolation 1,2-FCV-90-117 1-1/2 Motor Gate Containment Isolation WBNP-90

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 Table 3.9-26 Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 1 of 6)

SYSTEM CATEGORY CLASS VALVES MAIN STEAM B B FCV-1-4, FCV-1-11, FCV-1-22, FCV-1-29, 47W801-1 FCV-1-147, FCV-1-148, FCV-1-149, FCV-1-150 B B PCV-1-5, PCV-1-12, PCV-1-23, PCV-1-30, 1-ISV 619, 1-ISV-1-620, 1-ISV-1-621, 1-ISV-1-622 C B 1-512, 1-513, 1-514, 1-515, 1-516, 1-517, 1-518, 1-519, 1-520, 1-521, 1,522, 1-523, 1-524, 1-525, 1-526, 1-527, 1-528, 1-529, 1-530, 1-531 STEAM GENERATOR B B FCV-1-7, FCV-1-14, FCV-1-25, FCV-1-32, BLOWDOWN SYSTEM FCV-1-181, FCV-1-182, FCV-1-183, FCV-1-184 47W801-2 CONDENSATE C C 2-667 47W804-1 FEEDWATER B B FCV-3-33, FCV-3-47, FCV-3-87, FCV-3-100 47W803-1 FCV-3-185, FCV-3-186, FCV-3-187, FCV-3-188, FCV-3-236, FCV-3-239, FCV-3-242, FCV-3-245 B C FCV-3-35, FCV-3-35A, FCV-3-48, FCV-3-48A, FCV-3-90, FCV-3-90A, FCV-3-103, FCV-3-103A C B 3-508, 3-509, 3-510, 3-511, 3-638, 3-652, 3-669, 3-678, 3-644, 3-645, 3-655, 3-656, 3-670, 3-679 AUXILIARY B B FCV-1-15, FCV-1-16, FCV-1-18 FEEDWATER 47W803-2 B C LCV-3-148, LCV-3-148A, LCV-3-156, LCV-3-156A, LCV-3-164, LCV-3-164A, LCV-3-171, LCV-3-171A, LCV-3-172, LCV-3-173, LCV-3-174, FCV-3-175, FCV-1-17, FCV-3-116A, FCV-3-116B, FCV-3-126A, FCV-3-126B, FCV-3-136A, FCV-3-136B, FCV 179A, FCV-3-179B,FCV-1-51, PCV-3-122, PCV-3-132 C B 3-830, 3-831, 3-832, 3-833, 3-861, 3-862, 3-864, 3-871, 3-872, 3-873, 3-874, 1-891, 1-892, 3-921, 3-922 C C 3-805, 3-806, 3-810, 3-814, 3-815, 3-818 CHEMICAL & A B FCV-62-61, FCV-62-63, FCV-62-72, FCV-62-73 VOLUME FCV-62-74, FCV-62-77, FCV-62-76 CONTROL 47W809-1, -2, -5 AC B 62-639, 62-662,62-523, 62-525,62-530, 62-532 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-105

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 Table 3.9-26 Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 2 of 6)

SYSTEM CATEGORY CLASS VALVES B B LCV-62-132, LCV-62-133, LCV-62-135, LCV 136, FCV-62-138, FCV-62-144,FCV-62-1228, FCV 1229, FCV-62-90, FCV-62-91 C B 62-504, 62-505,62-518, 62-636,62-649, 62-675,62-688, 62-1220, 62-1221, 62-1222 B C FCV-62-138 C C FCV-62-930, FCV-62-1052-A, FCV-62-1052-B C B FCV-62-955, FCV-62-1079 RESIDUAL HEAT A A FCV-74-1, FCV-74-2, REMOVAL FCV-74-8, FCV-74-9 47W810-1 B B FCV-74-3, FCV-74-12, FCV-74-21,FCV-74-24, FCV-74-33, FCV-74-35 C B 74-505, 74-514,74-515, 74-544,74-545 SAFETY INJECTION A B FCV-63-23, FCV-63-64, FCV-63-71, FCV-63-84 AC A 63-543, 63-545,63-547, 63-549,63-551, 63-553,63-555, 63-557,63-558, 63-559,63-560, 63-561,63-562, 63-563,63-622, 63-623,63-624, 63-625,63-632, 63-633,63-634, 63-635,63-640, 63-641,63-643, 63-644 A A 63-581,63-586, 63-587,63-588, 63-589 AC B FCV-63-524, FCV-63-526, FCV-63-528, FCV 530 3.9-106 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 Table 3.9-26 Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 3 of 6)

SYSTEM CATEGORY CLASS VALVES B B FCV-63-1, FCV-63-3, FCV-63-4, FCV-63-5, FCV-63-6, FCV-63-7, FCV-63-8, FCV-63-11, FCV-63-22, FCV-63-25, FCV-63-26, FCV-63-47, FCV-63-48, FCV-63-72, FCV-63-73, FCV-63-93, FCV-63-94, FCV-63-152, FCV-63-153, FCV-63-156, FCV-63-157, FCV-63-172, FCV-63-175, FCV C B 185 63-502,63-510, 63-511,63-534, 63-535,63-536, 63-577,63-602, 63-603,63-604, 63-605,63-626, 63-627,63-637, 63-725,63-835, 63-868 CONTAINMENT A B FCV-72-2, FCV-72-39, FCV-72-40, FCV-72-41 SPRAY 47W812-1 B B FCV-72-13, FCV-72-21, FCV-72-22, FCV-72-34, FCV-72-44, FCV-72-45 C B 72-506, 72-507, 72-508, 72-509, 72-524, 72-525, 72-548, 72-549, 72-562, 72-563 REACTOR COOLANT A B FCV-68-305, FCV-68-307, FCV-63-308 47W813-1 B A FCV-68-332, FCV-68-333, PCV-68-334, PCV 340A B B FSV-68-394, FSV-68-395, FSV-68-396, FSV-68-397 C A 68-563, 68-564,68-565 C B 68-559, 68-849 ESSENTIAL RAW A B FCV-67-83, FCV-67-87, FCV-67-88, 1-FCV COOLING WATER 89,FCV-67-91, 47W845-1,2,3,4 FCV-67-95, FCV-67-96, 1-FCV-67-97, FCV-67-99, FCV-67-103, FCV-67-104, 1-FCV-67-105, FCV-67-107, FCV 111, FCV-67-112, 1-FCV-67-113, FCV-67-130, FCV-67-131, FCV-67-133, FCV-67-134, FCV-67-138, FCV-67-139, FCV-67-141, FCV 142, FCV-67-295, FCV-67-296, FCV-67-297, FCV-67-298 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-107

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 Table 3.9-26 Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 4 of 6)

SYSTEM CATEGORY CLASS VALVES AC B 2-67-562A, 2-67-562B, 2-67-562C, 2-67-562D, 67-575A, 67-575B, 67-575C, 67-575D, 67-580A, 67-580B, 67-580C, 67-580D, 67-585A, 67-585B, 67-585C, 67-585D, 1-67-1054A, 1-67-1054B, 1 1054C, 1-67-1054D B C FCV-67-65, FCV-67-68, FCV-67-123, FCV-67-124, FCV-67-125, FCV-67-126, FCV-67-143, FCV-67-144, FCV 152, FCV-67-162, FCV-67-164, FCV-67-176, FCV-67-182, FCV 184, FCV-67-186, FCV-67-205, FCV-67-208, FCV-67-213, FCV-67-215, FCV-67-342, FCV-67-344, FCV-67-346, FCV-67-348, FCV-67-350, FCV 352, FCV-67-354, FCV-67-356, 2-FCV-67-217, 2-FCV-67-219, 2-FCV-67-336, 2-FCV-67-338, FCV-67-9A, FCV 9B, FCV-67-10A, FCV-67-10B, FCV-67-22, FCV 81, FCV-67-82, FCV-67-147, 2-FCV-67-354, 2-FCV-67-356 C C 67-503A, 67-503B, 67-503C, 67-503D, 67-503E, 67-503F, 67-503G, 67-503H, 67-508A, 67-508B, 67-513A, 67-513B, 67-502A thru H, 1-67-940A, 2 935B COMPONENT A B FCV-70-85, FCV-70-87, FCV-70-89, FCV-70-90, COOLING WATER FCV-70-92, 47W859-1, -2, -3 1-FCV-70-100, FCV-70-134, FCV-70-140, FCV 143 AC B 70-679, 70-687,70-698, 70-703, 1-70-790 B C FCV-70-66, FCV-70-133, FCV-70-153, FCV-70-156, FCV-70-183, FCV-70-197, FCV-70-215 C C 70-504, 70-504A, 70-504B,70-538, 70-753,70-539, 70-681A, 70-681B, 70-681C, 70-681D, 70-682A, 70-682B, 70-682C, 70-682D PRIMARY WATER A B FCV-81-1247W819-47819-1 AC B 81-502 WASTE DISPOSAL A B FCV-77-9, FCV-77-10, FCV-77-16, FCV-70-17, 47W830-1, -6 FCV-77-18, FCV-77-19, FCV-77-20, FCV-77-127, FCV-77-128 AC B 77-2875 3.9-108 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 Table 3.9-26 Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 5 of 6)

SYSTEM CATEGORY CLASS VALVES FIRE PROTECTION A B FCV-26-240, FCV-26-243 47W850-9 AC B 26-1260, 26-1296 HEATING AND A B FCV-30-7, FCV-30-8, FCV-30-9, FCV-30-10, FCV-VENTILATION 30-14, FCV-30-15, FCV-30-16, FCV-30-17, 47W866-1 FCV-30-19, FCV-30-20, FCV-30-37, FCV-30-40, FCV-30-50, FCV-30-51, FCV-30-52, FCV-30-53, FCV-30-56, FCV-30-57, FCV-30-58, FCV-30-59, FCV-30-134, FCV-30-135 AIR CONDITIONING A B FCV-31-305, FCV-31-306, FCV-31-308, FCV 47W865-5, -3, -7, -8 309, FCV-31-326, FCV-31-327, FCV-31-329, FCV 330 AIR CONDITIONING AC B 31-3378, 31-3392, 31-3407, 31-3421 (continued) 47W865-5, -3, -7, -8 C Note 1 0-31-2193, 0-31-2235, 0-31-2210, 0-31-2252, 0 2307, 0-31-2364, 0-31-2326, 0-31-2383, 0-31-2607.

0-31-2649, 0-31-2623, 0-31-2665 CONTROL AIR A B FCV-32-80, FCV-32-102, FCV-32-110, FCV-32-288, 47W848-1 BYV-32-298, BYV-32-308 AC B 32-293, 32-303,32-313 SERVICE AIR A B 33-713 AC B 33-714 RADIATION A B FCV-43-2, FCV-43-3, FCV-43-11, FCV-43-12, FCV-SAMPLING 43-22, FCV-43-23, FCV-43-34, FCV-43-35, FCV 47W625-1, -2, -7, 75, FCV-43-77, FCV-43-201, FCV-43-202, FCV -11, -15 207, FCV-43-208, FSV-43-250, FSV-43-251, FSV-43-287, FSV 288, FSV-43-307, FSV-43-309, FSV-43-310, FSV 318, B B FSV-43-319, FSV-43-325, FSV-43-341, FSV-43-342 FCV-43-54D, FCV-43-55, FCV-43-56D, FCV-43-58, FCV-43-59D, FCV-43-61, FCV-43-63D, FCV-43-64 AC B 43-834, 43-841,43-883, 43-884 SYSTEM TEST A B 52-500, 52-501,52-502, 52-503,52-504, 52-505, FACILITY 52-506, 52-507 47W331-3 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 3.9-109

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 Table 3.9-26 Inservice Inspection Category Valves (Page 6 of 6)

SYSTEM CATEGORY CLASS VALVES DEMINERALIZED A B 59-522, 59-698 WATER AND CASK DECONTAMINATION 47W856-1 ICE CONDENSER A B FCV-61-96, FCV-61-97, FCV-61-110, FCV-61-122, 47W814-2 FCV-61-191, FCV-61-192, FCV-61-193, FCV 194 AC B 61-533, 61-680,61-692, 61-745 C C 61-658, 61-659,61-660, 61-661,61-662, 61-663,61-664, 61-665,61-666, 61-667,61-668, 61-669,61-670, 61-671,61-672, 61-673,61-674, 61-675,61-676, 61-677 BORATION MAKEUP A B 84-530 RADIATION A B FCV-90-107, FCV-90-108, FCV-90-109, FCV MONITORING 110, 47W610-90-3 FCV-90-111, FCV-90-113, FCV-90-114, FCV 115, FCV-90-116, FCV-90-117 FUEL POOL A B 78-557, 78-558,78-560, 78-561 COOLING AND CLEANING 47W855-1 Note 1: Not Constructed to an ASME Code Class.

3.9-110 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

Table 3.9-27 Active Section III ASME-Coded Components (Except Valves) In TVA Scope Of Supply(1)

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WATTS BAR System Name Component ANS Safety Class Normal Mode Post LOCA Mode Reason Feedwater (3) Auxiliary feedwater pumps:

Motor driven 1A-A 2B OFF ON Provide heat removal for chapter 1B-B 2B OFF ON 15 events.

2A-A 2B OFF ON 2B-B 2B OFF ON Steam driven 1A-S 2B OFF ON Provide heat removal for chapter 2A-S 2B OFF ON 15 events.

Control Air (32) Auxiliary air 2B OFF ON Provide control air for safety-compressors A & B related equipment.

Essential Raw ERCW pump A-A 2B ON ON Provide cooling water flow for Cooling Water (67) B-A 2B ON ON component cooling system and C-A 2B ON ON other heat removal systems.

D-A 2B ON ON E-B 2B ON ON F-B 2B ON ON G-B 2B ON ON H-B 2B ON ON Component Cooling (70) Component cooling pumps1A 2B ON ON Provide cooling water flow for 1B 2B ON ON refrigerated equipment served by 2A 2B ON ON the CCS.

2B 2B ON ON C-S 2B ON ON Note:(1) As defined in Regulatory Guide 1.48 3.9-111 WBNP-86

3.9-112 WATTS BAR Table 3.9-28 Active Pumps For Primary Fluid Systems In Westinghouse Scope Of Supply As Applied To Watts Bar Nuclear Plant System Name Component ANS Safety Class Normal Mode PST LOCA Mode Reason CVCS (62) Centrifugal Charging Pumps 1A-A 2A ON ON To provide emergency core 2A-A 2A ON ON cooling, reactivity control and 1B-B 2A ON ON RCP seal injection flow.

2B-2B 2A ON ON Safety Injection SIS Pump Systems 1A-A 2A OFF ON To provide emergency core 1B-B 2A OFF ON cooling and reactivity control.

2A-A 2A OFF ON 2B-B 2A OFF ON Containment Spray Pump (72) 1A-A 2A OFF ON Provide cooling water flow to 2A-A 2A OFF ON control containment temperature 1B-B 2A OFF ON and pressure.

2B-B 2A OFF ON Residual Heat Pump Removal (74) 1A-A 2A OFF ON To provide emergency core 1B-B 2A OFF ON cooling and reactivity control MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 2A-A 2A OFF ON and containment temperature 2B-B 2A OFF ON and pressure control.

WBNP-79

WATTS BAR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS WBNP-55 Figure 3.9-1 Vibration Check-Out Functional Test Inspection Data 3.9-7

WATTS BAR WBNP-55 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 3.9-8 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 3.10 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT Seismic Category I instrumentation and electrical equipment for the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant was either furnished by Westinghouse or purchased by TVA. TVA's seismic qualification program for instrumentation and electrical equipment at Watts Bar is based on the requirements of IEEE 344-1971 and the NRC Standard Review Plan, Section 3.10 (specifically, acceptance criteria for plants with Construction Permit application docketed before October 27, 1972) as discussed in Section 3.7.3.16.

Instrumentation and electrical equipment was purchased in assemblies except for local panel instrumentation as described in Section 3.10.1. TVA provided the vendor with a required response spectrum as a part of the equipment specification in order that the vendor could qualify the equipment. The derivation of the response spectrum is described in Section 3.7.

3.10.1 Seismic Qualification Criteria TVA Supplied Class 1E Power Equipment Table 3.10-1 lists the procurement packages for Class 1E power equipment. TVA's seismic qualification criteria is based on IEEE 344-1971 or IEEE 344-1975 as discussed above.

The capability of ESF circuits and the Class 1E system to withstand seismic disturbances is established by seismic analysis and/or testing of each system component. The qualification criteria used in the design of Seismic Category I electrical equipment are given below.

(1) Safety-related equipment designated as Seismic Category I, when subjected to the vertical and horizontal acceleration of the safe shutdown earthquake (SSE), shall perform as follows:

(a) Equipment shall retain its structural integrity during and after the seismic event.

(b) Equipment shall be capable of performing its design function during and after the seismic event.

(c) Maximum displacement of the equipment during the earthquake shall not cause loss of function of any externally connected parts, such as conduit, cable, or bus connections.

Equipment anchorage/support design is discussed in Section 3.10.3.1. Other considerations for the seismic qualification of Category I electrical equipment are described in Section 3.7.3.

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-1

WATTS BAR WBNP-90 Local Instrumentation TVA supplied instruments were classified as Seismic Category I in accordance with the system served and instrument function. Seismic Category I systems are qualified in accordance with IEEE-344-1971 or 1975, as applicable, and are listed in Table 3.10-1.

Type testing for seismic qualification has been performed on the Seismic Category I instruments. The active instruments are capable of performing their function during and following a SSE. They are qualified to the response acceleration which exceeds the response of the support structure. Tests and/or analyses were conducted on critical rack-instrumentation configurations to confirm the conservatism of the seismic test level for the instruments.

Westinghouse Supplied The reactor trip system, and engineered safety features actuation system are designed so that they are capable of providing the necessary protective actions during and after a SSE; therefore, the reactor protection system is capable of tripping the reactor during and after a SSE. The engineered safety features actuation system and the safety features systems are designed to initiate their protective functions during and after an SSE.

The following list identifies the instrumentation and electrical equipment requiring seismic qualification by the supplier of the Nuclear Steam Supply System (NSSS).

(1) Foxboro Model E-11 pressure transmitter and Model E-13 differential pressure transmitter.

(2) Foxboro Process Control Equipment cabinets.

(3) Westinghouse Solid-State Protection System cabinets.

(4) Nuclear Instrumentation System cabinets.

(5) Safeguards Test Racks.

(6) Resistance Temperature Detectors.

(7) Power range Neutron Detectors.

(8) Reactor trip breakers.

(9) Barton Models 332 and 386 differential pressure transmitters.

(10) Eagle-21 Process Protection System Seismic qualification testing of Items 1 through 9 is documented in References [1]

through [10]. Reference [10] presents the theory and practice, as well as justification, for the use of single axis sine beat test inputs used in the seismic qualification of electrical equipment. In addition, it is noted that Westinghouse has conducted a seismic qualification "Demonstration Test Program" (reference Letter NS-CE-692, C.

Eicheldinger (W), to D. B. Vassallo (NRC), 7/10/75) to confirm equipment operability during a seismic event. This program is documented in References [12] through [15]

(Proprietary) and References [16] through [20] (Non-Proprietary). Seismic qualification testing of Item 10 to IEEE 344-1975 is documented in References [21],

[22], and [23].

3.10-2 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 The Watts Bar Nuclear Plant complies with paragraph IV, "Conclusions and Regulatory Positions" of the "Mechanical Engineering Branch Report on Seismic Audit of Westinghouse Electrical Equipment." All topical reports have been completed and are included in the reference list. The non-proprietary topical reports have been referenced as a group above. The structural capability of the NIS rack is discussed in References [14], [19], and [24].

The demonstration test program, in conjunction with the justification for the use of single axis sine beat tests, presented in WCAP-8373, and the original tests, documented in References [2] through [10], meet the requirements of IEEE Standard 344-1975 "IEEE Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations" for the seismic qualification of Westinghouse electrical equipment outside of containment. Environmental qualification for equipment inside of containment is described in Section 3.11.

The peak accelerations used in the type testing are conservative values that are checked against those derived by structural analyses of SSE loadings of the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant. For the SSE there may be permanent deformation of the equipment provided that the capability to perform its function is maintained.

Resistance temperature detectors used to sense the temperature in the main coolant loops are rigid, ruggedly built devices designed to withstand the high temperature, high pressure, and flow vibration induced acceleration forces which they are subjected to when installed in the coolant loops. The natural frequency of this device is designed to be higher than the frequencies associated with the seismic disturbance. Seismic qualification of these resistance temperature detectors is presented in Reference [9].

The nuclear instrumentation system power range neutron detector has been vibration tested in both the transverse (horizontal) direction and longitudinal (vertical) direction at acceleration levels greater than those expected during a seismic disturbance at the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant site. Detector current measurements were made during the tests and neutron sensitivity, resistance, and capacitance checks were made after the test. No significant changes were seen. There was no mechanical damage to the detector.

Typical switches and indicators which could defeat automatic operation of a required safety function have been tested to determine their ability to withstand seismic excitation without malfunction. The control boards are stiff and past experience indicates that the amplification due to the board structure is sufficiently low so that the acceleration seen by the device is considerably less than that used in testing.

All safety-related instruments of the reactor protection system and the engineered safety feature circuits are mounted on Seismic Category I supporting structures. They are designed to withstand horizontal and vertical accelerations at each floor level for the SSE. The instrument supporting structures located throughout the plant (local panels) have been standardized in design and have been seismically qualified by testing. The local panels were tested using response spectra for the highest elevation SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-3

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 on which any of these panels are mounted. The test criteria were in accordance with IEEE 344-1971 or IEEE 344-1975, as discussed above.

Where space requirements preclude the use of the standard local panels, a small wall-mounted panel is used. This panel is qualified, to the same criteria as the local panels, by analysis and/or test.

3.10.2 Methods And Procedures For Qualifying Electrical Equipment And Instrumentation For the original seismic qualification methods of selected Category I electrical equipment and instrumentation, see Tables 3.10-1 and 3.10-2.

Instrumentation The seismic type testing performed by the NSSS supplier (Westinghouse) is described in References [1] through [10], and [21]. For References [1] through [10], the test method used was the sine beat procedure described in IEEE 344-1971 and Reference

[11]. In addition, as noted in Section 3.10.1, Westinghouse conducted a "Demonstration Test Program" which, when considered in conjunction with the tests presented in References [11] through [13], results in meeting the requirements of IEEE 344-1975.

Supporting Structures (Panels, Racks, Cabinets, and Boards)

The qualification of the supporting structures for Seismic Category I instruments has been accomplished by either analysis or testing. The method commonly used is testing under simulated conditions. All tests by TVA before September 1, 1974 on these supporting structures were similar. The support structure was mounted on a vibration generator in a manner that simulated the intended service mounting. The vibratory forces were applied to each of the three major perpendicular axes independently. Maximum service dead loads were simulated. Selected points were monitored to establish amplification of loads. Testing was done at the structure's resonant frequencies. The resonant frequencies were determined by an exploratory test using a sinusoidal steady-state input of low amplitude, (two continuous sweeps from 1 to 33 Hz at a rate of 1 octave per minute). The qualification test was conducted using the sine beat method at the resonant frequencies using the appropriate acceleration input as determined from the building response acceleration spectra.

Also, reference Section 3.7.3.16 for additional details.

Later qualification tests typically used multi-frequency time history input motion for which the test response spectra enveloped the required response spectra in accordance with IEEE 344-1975 guidelines.

3.10.3 Methods of Qualifying TVA-Designed Supports for Electrical Equipment Instrumentation and Cables The methods and procedures of design and analysis or testing of electrical equipment and instrumentation supports, cable trays, cable tray supports, conduit, conduit supports, and conduit banks are provided in the following sections.

3.10-4 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 3.10.3.1 Electrical Equipment and Instrumentation Assemblies TVA-designed supports and anchorage for Category I electrical equipment assemblies ensure compatibility with the equipment seismic qualifications test or analysis as described in Section 3.7.3.16.5. Design of these supports is in accordance with Section 3.8.4.5.2.

All floor/wall mounted Category I electrical equipment assemblies such as battery racks, instrument racks, and control consoles are attached by TVA to the building structure. The attachments are made by bolting or welding to structural members.

Anchorages to concrete are made by welding to embedded plates cast in the concrete with stud anchors, or by bolting to anchors set in the hardened concrete (self-drilling bolts, wedge bolts, undercut expansion anchors, or grouted anchors).

3.10.3.2 Cable Trays and Supports 3.10.3.2.1 Cable Trays Cable trays containing Class 1E cables located in Category I structures are considered safety-related and are designed to resist gravity and SSE forces.

Cable tray acceptance criteria are derived from testing. A factor of safety of 1.25 against the tested capacity, is maintained for the vertical moment. A ductility factor of 3 is used to establish tray capacity in the transverse direction. These limits are used in an interaction equation to evaluate tray sections for the SSE loading condition.

Seismic loadings are developed based on the applicable response spectra. In addition, all trays are evaluated to ensure a minimum factor of safety of 3 against test capacity for dead load only.

Figure 3.10-1 defines the orientation of the transverse and vertical moments.

Cable tray X and T fittings are evaluated for vertical loading to ensure a minimum factor of safety of 1.25 against the formation of a first hinge.

All other cable tray components are evaluated using AISI or AISC allowables (as applicable) with increase factors as allowed by Standard Review Plan Section 3.8.4.

Where test data is used to establish capacities of bolted parts, a factor of safety of 1.5 is maintained against the ultimate test load for the SSE loading condition.

3.10.3.2.2 Supports All cable tray supports located in Category I structures are designated Seismic Category I and designed to resist seismic forces applied to the weight of trays and cables. Each support in Category I structures is designed independently to support its appropriate length of tray. Seismic load inputs are based on the methods described in Section 3.7 and the damping requirements described in Table 3.7-2.

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-5

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 Trays are designed to carry a load of 30 pounds per square foot (which is equivalent to 45 pounds per linear foot for an 18 inch wide tray) and an additional construction load of 30 pounds per linear foot on the top tray. Actual tray loading may be used on a case by case basis.

For load combinations and allowables applicable for cable tray supports, see Table 3.10-5.

Welding was in accordance with the American Welding Society (AWS), "Structural Welding Code," AWS D1.1 with revision 1-73 and 1-74, except later editions may be used for prequalified joint details, base materials, and qualification of welding procedures and welders. Nuclear Construction Issues Group documents NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 may be used after June 26, 1985, for weldments that were designed and fabricated to the requirements of AISC/AWS. Visual inspection of structural welds will meet the minimum requirements of NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 as specified on the design drawings or other design output. Inspectors performing visual examination to the criteria of NCIG-01 are trained in the subject criteria.

3.10.3.3 Conduit and Supports 3.10.3.3.1 Conduit Conduit containing Class 1E cables located in Category I structures are considered safety-related and designed to resist gravity and SSE forces applied to the conduit and cable. The seismic qualification utilizes the same analysis methods as Seismic Category I subsystems described in Section 3.7.3 and limits allowable stress to 90%

of the yield stress of the conduit material. The applicable damping requirements are defined in Table 3.7-2.

3.10.3.3.2 Supports All conduit supports in Category I structures are designed to resist gravity and SSE forces applied to the conduit and cables. Supports for conduit containing Class 1E cables are designated Category I and stresses are limited to 90% of the yield stress of the material involved. Seismic load inputs are based on methods described in Section 3.7 and damping requirements are defined in Table 3.7-2. Supports for conduit containing only non-Class 1E cables are designated Category I(L) and designed and constructed to preclude a failure which could reduce the ability of Category I structures, systems, and components to perform their intended safety function.

Welding was in accordance with the American Welding Society (AWS), "Structural Welding Code," AWS D1.1 with revision 1-73 and 1-74, except later editions may be used for prequalified joint details, base materials, and qualification of welding procedures and welders. Nuclear Construction Issues Group documents NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 may be used after June 26, 1985, for weldments that were designed and fabricated to the requirements of AISC/AWS. Visual inspection of structural welds will meet the minimum requirements of NCIG-01 and NCIG-02 as specified on the design drawings or other design output. Inspectors performing visual examination to the criteria of NCIG-01 are trained in the subject criteria.

3.10-6 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-89 3.10.3.4 Conduit Banks The Category I underground electrical conduit banks, which run from the Auxiliary Building to the Diesel Generator Building and to the Intake Pumping Station, were analyzed for seismic loads by the method outlined in Section 3.7.2.1.3. The conduit banks are designed in accordance with Section 3.8.4.2.

3.10.4 Operating License Review 3.10.4.1 TVA Supplied Instrumentation and Electrical Equipment The results of the seismic qualification program for the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant described in Section 3.10.1, 3.10.2, and 3.10.3 are summarized by the following listing for Class 1E equipment and by Tables 3.10-1, 3.10-3, and 3.10-4.

Equipment TVA Contract No.

AC Auxiliary Power System 6.9kV Switchgear 74C2-84376 6.9kV Shutdown 75K2-85354 Logic Relay Panels 6.9kV/480V Transformer 74C2-84647 480V Switchgear 74C2-84647 480V Motor Control 74C5-84646 Centers 480V Distribution 75K3-86476 Panelboards for Pressurizer Heater Backup Groups Diesel Generator 74C63-83090 Transfer Switches 75K5-87048 125V DC Class 1E System Transfer Switches 75K5-87048 Battery Chargers 74C8-85251 Vital Batteries 76K3-85763 Vital Battery 75C2-85281 Boards 120V AC Class 1E System AC Vital Instrument 74C4-85216 Power Boards SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-7

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Equipment TVA Contract No.

Vital Inverters 34327 Miscellaneous Class 1E Electrical Penetrations 76K61-87064 Equipment BOP I&C Equipment MultipleContract No.

Emergency DC Lighting 75C2-85737-1

REFERENCES:

(1) Morrone, A., "Seismic Vibration Testing with Sine Beats," WCAP-7558, October, 1971.

(2) Vogeding, E. L., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment,"

WCAP-7397-L (Proprietary) and WCAP-7817 (NonProprietary), December, 1971.

(3) Vogeding, E. L., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment (WCID Process Control Equipment)," WCAP-7817, Supplement 1, December, 1971.

(4) Potochnik, L. M., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment (Low Seismic Plants)," WCAP-7817, Supplement 2, December, 1971.

(5) Vogeding, E. L., "Seismic Testing of Electric and Control Equipment (Westinghouse Solid State Protection System) (Low Seismic Plants),"

WCAP-7817, Supplement 3, December, 1971.

(6) Reid, J. B., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment (WCID NUCANA 7300 Series) (Low Seismic Plants)," WCAP-7817, Supplement 4, November, 1972.

(7) Vogeding, E. L., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment (Instrument Bus Distribution Panel)," WCAP-7817, Supplement 5, March, 1974.

(8) Faust III, C. E., Tang, D. T., and Yalich, M., "Equipment Qualification Test Report Reactor Trip Switchgear," WCAP 8687, Supplement 2-E20B, Revision 1, July, 1981.

(9) Resistance Temperature Detectors - Equipment Qualification Data Packages: EQDP-ESE-6, Revision 7; EQDP-ESE-7, Revision 7; and, EQDP-ESE-66A, Revision 1 - WCAP-8587.

3.10-8 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-93 (10) Fischer, E. G. and Jerecki, S. J., "Qualification of Westinghouse Seismic Testing Procedure for Electrical Equipment Tested Prior to May 1974,"

WCAP-8373, August, 1974.

(11) Wyle Laboratory T. R. 42377-1, "Seismic Simulation Test Program on Instrument Rack."

(12) Jareck, S. J., "General Method of Developing Multifrequency Biaxial Test Inputs for Bistables," WCAP-8624 (Proprietary) September, 1975.

(13) Jareck, S. J. and Vogeding, E. L., "Multifrequency and Direction Seismic Testing of Relays," WCAP-8673 (Proprietary) December, 1975.

(14) Jareck, S. J., Coslow, B. J., Croasdaile, T. R., and Lipchak, J. B., "Seismic Operability Demonstration Testing of the Nuclear Instrumentation System Bistable Amplifier," WCAP-8830 (Proprietary) October, 1976.

(15) Jareck, S. J. Coslow B. J., Ellis, A. E., and Miller, R. B., "Seismic Operability Demonstration Testing of the Foxboro H-Line Series Process Instrumentation System Bistables," WCAP-8848 (Proprietary) November, 1976.

(16) Miller, R. B., "Seismic Testing of Electrical and Control Equipment (low Seismic Plants)," WCAP-7817, Supplement 8 (Non-Proprietary) June, 1975.

(17) Jareck, S. J., "General Method of Developing Multifrequency Biaxial Test Inputs for Bistables," WCAP-8695 (Non-Proprietary) September 1975.

(18) Jareck, S. J. and Vogeding, E. L., "Multifrequency and Direction Seismic Testing of Relays," WCAP-8674 (Non-Proprietary) December 1975.

(19) Jareck, S. J., Coslow, B. J., Croasdaile, T. R., and Lipchak, J. B., "Seismic Operability Demonstration Testing of the Nuclear Instrumentation System Bistable Amplifier," WCAP-8831 (Non-Proprietary) October 1976.

(20) Jareck, S. J., Coslow, B. J., Ellis, A. E., and Miller R. B., "Seismic Operability Demonstration Testing of the Foxboro H-Line Series Process Instrumentation System Bistables," WCAP-8849 (Non-Proprietary)

November 1976.

(21) WCAP-8687, Supplement 2 - E69A, "Equipment Qualification Test Report, Eagle 21 Process Protection system" (Proprietary), May 1988.

(22) WCAP-8687, Supplement 2 - E69B, "Equipment Qualification Test Report, Eagle 21 Process Protection System Components" (Proprietary), February 1990.

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-9

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 (23) WCAP-8687, Supplement 2 - E69C, "Equipment Qualification Test Report, Eagle 21 Process Protection System Components" (Proprietary), February 1991.

(24) System Description, N3-92-4003, "Neutron Monitoring System".

3.10-10 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

3.10-11 WATTS BAR Table 3.10-1 WBNP Instrumentation And Electrical Equipment Seismic Qualification Summary (Sheet 1 of 3)

TVA QUALIFICA LOCATION CONTRACT SEISMIC TION EQUIPMENT BLDG/EL* NO. VENDOR QUALIFICATION CRITERIA METHOD TEST METHOD TEST LAB CONTROL INSTRUMENT LOOPS MULTIPLE 73C3-92784 BAILEY METER IEEE 344-1971 TEST SINGLE AXIS ACTION CO ENVIRON-LOCATIONS MENTAL TESTING CORP.

INSTRUMENTATION MULTIPLE 77K3-87352 ROBERTSHAW IEEE 344-1974 TEST RANDOM WYLE LAB SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS CONTROLS FREQUENCY, LOCATIONS CORP MULTIAXIS FABRICATION OF LOCAL PANELS MULTIPLE 73C38- H. K. PORTER IEEE 344-1974 TEST MULTIFREQUE WYLE LAB AND INSTALLATION OF 92800 (DRAFT REVISION TO IEEE NCY, BIAXIAL INSTRUMENTS LOCATIONS 344-1971)

PRESSURE GAUGES, PRESSURE SEE NOTE 1 SWITCHES, & LEVEL SWITCHES STANDBY POWER SYSTEM D-742 74C63- MORRISON-83090 KNUDSON POWER SYSTEMS DIV.

DIESEL GENERATOR IEEE 344-1971 TEST BIAXIAL WYLE LAB PROTECTIVE RELAY PANELS MULTIFREQUE NCY DIESEL GENERATOR IEEE 344-1971 TEST BIAXIAL WYLE LAB CONTROL PANELS MULTIFREQUE NCY DC DISTRIBUTION PANELS IEEE 344-1971 TEST BIAXIAL WYLE LAB MULTIFREQUE NCY 125V DIESEL BATTERIES IEEE 344-1971 TEST BIAXIAL WYLE LAB AND BATTERY RACKS MULTIFREQUE NCY BATTERY CHARGERS IEEE 344-1971 TEST BIAXIAL WYLE LAB WBNP-35 MULTIFREQUE NCY

Table 3.10-1 WBNP Instrumentation And Electrical Equipment SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BAR Seismic Qualification Summary (Sheet 2 of 3)

TVA QUALIFICA LOCATION CONTRACT SEISMIC TION EQUIPMENT BLDG/EL* NO. VENDOR QUALIFICATION CRITERIA METHOD TEST METHOD TEST LAB STANDBY DIESEL GENERATORS IEEE 344-1971 ANALYSIS EMERGENCY DC A-757 75C2-85737- GRAYBAR IEEE 344-1971 TEST MULTIFREQUE WYLE LAB LIGHTING 1-772 1 ELECTRIC, INC. NCY, BIAXIAL ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS R-(ALL 76K6I-87064 CONAX CORP IEEE 344-1971 ANALYSIS LEVELS) 125V DC VITAL BATTERIES A-757 76K3-85763 GOULD IND. IEEE 344-1975; IEE P535, TEST RANDOM, WYLE LAB DRAFT 2 DATED NOV. 15, BIAXIAL, 1974 MULTIFREQUE NCY TRANSFER SWITCHES A-772 75K5-87048 B-K ELECT IEEE 344-1971 TEST SINGLE AXIS, AERO NAU LAB A-757 PROD SINE BEAT 125V DC VITAL CHARGERS A-772 74C8-85251 PWR. CONV. IEEE 344-1971, DRAFT 5 TEST MULTIFREQUE WYLE LAB PROD. NCY, RANDOM, BIAXIAL 125V DC BATTERY BOARDS A-757 75C2-85281 WESTINGHOUSE IEEE 344-1971, ENCLOSURE TEST SINE BEAT, WESTINGHOUS NO. 5 BIAXIAL, FOUR E POSITIONS 120V AC VITAL INVERTERS A-772 34327 AMETEK SCI IEEE 344-1971, DRAFT 5 TEST MULTIFREQUE WYLE LAB NCY, RANDOM, BIAXIAL 120 AC VITAL INSTR. BOARDS A-757 74C4-85216 WESTINGHOUSE IEEE 344-1971, ENCLOSURE TEST SINE BEAT, WESTINGHOUS NO. 5 BIAXIAL, E FOUR POSITIONS WBNP-92 6.9KV SD BD LOGIC PANELS A-757 75K2-85354 H. K. PORTER IEEE 344, R3 (FEB. 15, 1974) TEST MULTIFREQUE WYLE LAB 3.10-12 NCY, RANDOM, BIAXIAL

Table 3.10-1 WBNP Instrumentation And Electrical Equipment SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WATTS BAR Seismic Qualification Summary (Sheet 3 of 3)

TVA QUALIFICA LOCATION CONTRACT SEISMIC TION EQUIPMENT BLDG/EL* NO. VENDOR QUALIFICATION CRITERIA METHOD TEST METHOD TEST LAB 6.9KV SD BDS A-757 74C2-84376 G. E. IEEE 344, DRAFT REV. 5 TEST MULTIFREQUE WYLE LAB NCY, RANDOM, BIAXIAL 480V SD BDS, TRANSFORMERS A-772 74C2-84647 WESTINGHOUSE IEEE 344, R3, AND TEST MULTIFREQUE WYLE LAB AND A-782 ENCLOSURE NO. 5 NCY, PRESS. HTR. TRANSFORMERS RANDOM, BIAXIAL 480 DISTRIBUTION A-782 75K3-86476 EL TEX IEEE 344, DRAFT R5 TEST MULTIFREQUE WYLE LAB PANELBOARDS FOR NCY, PRESSURIZER HEATER BACKUP RANDOM, GROUP BIAXIAL 480V MOTOR CONTROL A-772 74C5-84646 ITE IEEE 344, DRAFT 3 (FEB. 15, TEST SINE BEAT WYLE LAB CENTERS A-757 1974)

  • R-REACTOR BLDG.

A-AUXILIARY BLDG C-CONTROL BLDG.

D-DIESEL GEN. BLDG.

NOTE 1 - These instruments were purchased under various TVA contract and were tested to IEEE 344-1971 and 344-1974 criteria.

3.10-13 WBNP-93

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 Table 3.10-2 QUALIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT (Sheet 1 of 2)

Organization Performance Qualification Standard to Testing/Analysis and Equipment Method* Which Qualified* Date of Completion Reactor Trip and Bypass 1 & 3 testing Westinghouse Breakers Solid State Protection System 1 & 2 testing Westinghouse Eagle-21 Process Protection 3 testing Westinghouse System Nuclear Instrument System 1 & 2 testing Westinghouse Neutron Detectors 1 testing Westinghouse Process Transmitters 1 & 2 testing Westinghouse Containment Pressure 3 testing Transmitters Solid State Protection system 1 & 2 testing Westinghouse Output Relays Engineered Safeguards Test 1 testing Westinghouse Cabinets Control Room Panels 1 & 4 testing and Westinghouse analysis Safety System Status Monitoring System Post Accident Monitoring 1 & 2 testing Westinghouse System Post Accident Monitoring 2 & 5 testing Westinghouse Recorders 3.10-14 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.10-2 QUALIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT (Continued)

(Sheet 2 of 2)

QUALIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT (Continued)

2 Demonstration Test Program biaxial test inputs with multifrequency forcing functions, as per requirements of IEEE-344-1975.

3 IEEE-344-1975 4 Analysis 5 Test documented in WCAP-8687, Supplement 2-E15A (Proprietary) and WCAP-8587, Supplement 2-E15A (Non-Proprietary)

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-15

WATTS BAR WBPN-90 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Sheet 1 of 26)

Equipment: Metalclad Switchgear Equipment Rating: 6.9 kV, 60 Hz, 3-phase Mounting: The switchgear was bolted to test table to simulate in-service configuration.

Seismic Test: The control circuits of the switchgear were energized with 125 VDC and subjected to the following tests:

1. Exploratory tests (Resonant Search)--Consisting of a low level single axis sweep from 1 Hz to 35 Hz at a rate of two octaves per minute and at a level of 0.2 g per peak. Resonant search test was performed in the front-to-front and side-to-side orientation.
2. Proof Test-Consisting of biaxial multifrequency random tests in front-to-back and side-to-side orientations. More than 5 OBE'S and one SSE were performed in each orientation.

Monitoring: A multichannel recorder was used to monitor electrical continuity contact chatter and change of state before, during, and after tests.

Results: The specimen's structural integrity was not compromised and circuit continuity was maintained.

Reference:

Wyle Laboratories Report No. 42868-1.

3.10-16 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-35 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 2 of 26)

Equipment: 6900V Shutdown Board Logic Panels.

Electrical Rating: Not applicable.

Mounting: The specimen was mounted with its base flush to the test table and welded to the table top, simulating the in-service configuration.

Seismic Test: The specimen control circuits were energized (125V DC) and the specimen was subjected to the following tests:

1. Exploratory Test (Resonant Search) - Consists of low-level (0.2g horizontal and 0.1g vertical) multiaxis sine sweep from 1 Hz to 35 Hz to 1 Hz in front-to-back and side-to-side orientations to determine major equipment resonance points.
2. Proof Test (Multifrequency)-- consisting of simultaneous horizontal and vertical incoherent inputs of random motion at frequencies spaced 1/3 octave apart from 1-4 OHz in front-to-back and side-to-side orientations. Aging was obtained with a minimum of five half-level SSE tests in each orientation prior to performing the full-level SSE test.

Monitoring: A multichannel recorder was used to monitor electrical continuity, contact chatter, and change of state before, during, and after the seismic test.

Results: The specimen's structural integrity was not compromised. A"b" contact of the normally de-energized DC auxiliary relay controlled by the AC undervoltage relay experienced contact chatter.

Based upon further analysis of the "b" contact, it was determined that the contact chatter was of such an extremely short-term duration that it will not in any way affect system operation.

Reference:

Wyle Test Report No. 43137-1.

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-17

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 3 of 26)

Equipment: Power Transformers Electrical Ratings: 6900 to 480-V AC, 60-Hz, 3 phase in ratings of 500*, 1000* and 2000 KVA (

  • qualified by analysis).

Mounting: The 2000 KVA transformer was bolted to the test table to simulate actual in-service mounting.

Seismic Tests: The transformer was energized to 480V AC on the secondary and subjected to the following tests:

1 Resonance Search--A low level (0.2g) biaxial, sinusoidal sweep from 0.5 Hz to 40 Hz to 0.5 Hz was performed to determine resonance.

2. Proof Testing--The transformer was subjected to a 30 second biaxial random motion input wave with sine beats added to ensure enveloping of the required response spectra by the test response spectra. Five OBE's followed by one SSE were performed in each of four orientations (45E, 135E, 225E, and 315E to the axis of the test table). After proof tests another resonance search was performed in the last orientation.
3. Analysis--The 500 and 1000 KVA transformer were compared to the 2000 KVA transformer actually tested. It was shown that the two smaller transformers have lower weights, smaller dimensions and less coolant than, but are of the same skin thickness as the 2000 KVA transformer and therefore, have lower stresses for the same seismic excitation.

Monitoring: Data was recorded on three ink-type oscillographs.

Input acceleration was anlayzed on a spectral dynamics shock spectrum analyzer Results: No structural damage occurred and the 2000 KVA trans-former remained fully operational during and after testing. The 500 and 1000 KVA transformers were analytically found to be capable of successfully withstanding a seismic excitation equial to that of the 2000 KVA transformer.

Reference:

Seismic Test Report No. XAL 71789, SD 3036, Westing-house Seismic Design Analysis Report No. SBR-75-7.

3.10-18 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 4 of 26)

Equipment: 480V metal enclosed switchgear, Westinghouse type DS.

Electrical Rating: 480V AC, 60 Hz, 3 phase.

Mounting: The test specimen, consisting of two typical units, was bolted to the test table to simulate actual mounting.

Seismic Tests: The test specimen was energized to 480V AC and 125V AC (control circuits) and subjected to the following tests:

1. Resonance Search--A low level (0.2g) biaxial sinusoidal sweep from 1.0 Hz to 40 Hz to 1.0 Hz was performed on the specimen in the 225E (to the test table axis) orientation.
2. Proof Test--The specimen was subjected to an input wave made up of decaying sinusoids from 1.25 Hz to 35 Hz with two sine beats added to achieve enveloping of the required response spectra by the test response spectra. A minimum of five OBE's followed by a minimum of four SSE's were performed in the 225E and 315E orientations. In the 45E and 135E orientations only SSE's were performed. A second sine sweep for resonance was performed after proof testing.

Monitoring: Contact monitoring was performed by an event recorder and seismic monitoring by four ink-type oscillographs. Additionally, 20 accelerometers, 5 strain bolts and a strain gage were also used for monitoring.

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-19

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 5 of 26)

Results: The specimen maintained its structural integrity and there were no failures that would jeopardize proper functioning of the equipment.

Reference:

Westinghouse Seismic Qualification Report, type DS low voltage metal enclosed switchgear, with attached Westinghouse Astronuclear Laboratory Report (XAL 71706, SD 3027). (WCAP-10448) 3.10-20 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 6 of 26)

Equipment: 480V Motor Control Centers--I-T-E Imperial Corporation, subsidiary of Gould, Inc., Type 5600.

Electrical Rating: 480V AC, 60 Hz, 3-phase, 22KA short circuit bracing.

Mounting: The specimen which consisted of 3 panels was welded to the test table simulating the in-service condition.

Seismic Test: Control circuits (120V AC) of the specimen were energized and the specimen was subjected to the following tests:

1. Exploratory Tests (Resonant Search)--Consisting of low level (approximately 0.2 g horizontal and 0.1 g vertical) biaxial sine sweep from 1 Hz to 35 Hz in front-to-back/vertical axes test and side-to-side/vertical axes test to determine major equipment resonances.

Resonant frequencies at 8,75 Hz and 35 Hz were found for the front-to-back/vertical axes test and resonant frequencies of 10 Hz and 35 Hz were found for the side-to-side/vertical axes test.

2. Proof Test (Biaxial Sine Beat)--Consisting of biaxial sine beats at equipment resonances listed above. Aging was accomplished during the 8.75 and 10 Hz tests with 4 one-half level phase coherent half level tests and 4 half level incoherent tests. Full level (1.37 g input) tests were performed at each resonance for energized, deenergized, in phase, and out-of-phase conditions.
3. Main circuits (480V AC) were deenergized during tests.

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-21

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 7 of 26)

Monitoring: A 14-channel recorder was used to monitor electrical continuity, current/voltage levels, spurious operation, and contact chatter before, during, and after the seismic tests.

Results: It was demonstrated that the specimen possessed sufficient integrity to withstand, without compromise of structure, the prescribed seismic environment. Some contact chatter was encountered during the testing; however, full-level tests were performed without chatter after corrective action was taken by the I-T-E Technical Representative.

Reference:

I-T-E Imperial (Subsidiary of Gould, Inc.), Seismic Certification SC077 and Wyle Test Report TR-42926-1.

3.10-22 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 8 of 26)

Equipment: 480V Power Distribution Cabinet Electrical Rating: 480V AC, 60 Hz, 3-phase Mounting: Specimen was wall-mounted with commercially available bolts, nuts, and washers to a wall-mounting fixture which was welded to the test table. Mounting simulated the in-service configuration.

Seismic Test: The specimen was subjected to the following tests:

1. Exploratory Test (Resonant Search)--Consisting of a low level (0.2 g horizontal and vertical) biaxial sine sweep from 1-33 Hz in both front-to back and side-to-side orientation to obtain major resonance points of the equipment.
2. Proof Test (Multifrequency)--Consists of simultaneous horizontal and vertical incoherent inputs of random motion at frequencies spaced 1/3 octave apart from 1-31.6 Hz in front-to-back and side-to-side orientations. Aging was accomplished with a minimum of 5 half-level SSE tests followed by one full level SSE test performed in both orientations.

Monitoring: A multichannel recorder was used to monitor electrical continuity, contact chatter, and change of state before, during, and after the seismic test.

Results: The specimen's structural integrity and circuit continuity was not compromised.

Reference:

Wyle Test Report No. 43039-1.

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-23

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 9 of 26)

Equipment: The components of the Emergency Diesel Generator.

Seismic Test: An analysis was performed on the components listed on page 12 of this table for the seismic conditions and criteria as specified in TVA Specification WB-DC-40-31.2.

1. The natural frequencies of the engine and the generator system were determined by analysis.
2. Selected critical components 1-9 were analyzed for 3 g horizontal and 2 g vertical accelerations (above seismic criteria), whereas, components 10-21 were analyzed for 1.62 g horizontal accelerations and 1.08 vertical accelerations (as specified by seismic criteria).

Results: The system was found to be rigid with natural frequencies above the seismic range. All the components analyzed had conservative margins of safety in all cases under the maximum combined loadings.

References:

Corporate Consulting and Development Co., Ltd. CCL Report No. A 74, CCL Project No. 74-1110, DDL Report No. A-5-73A, CCL Project No.

73-1024.

3.10-24 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 10 of 26)

Diesel Generator Components

1. Air intake filter at Mounting Bracket
2. Accessory Rack at Base
3. Engine Tube Oil filter at Accessory Rack.
4. Water Expansion Tank at Accessory Tack
5. Governor (Hydraulic Actuating).
6. Primary Oil Pump at Engine.
7. Scavenging Oil Filter at Engine
8. Scavenging Oil Pump at Engine
9. Engine Lube Oil Cooler
10. Engine at Base
11. Generator at Base
12. Engine at Foundation
13. Generator at Foundation
14. Heat Exchanger
15. Air Turning Box
16. Air Intake Filter at Foundation
17. Air Tank Saddle at Bolts
18. Air Tank at U-Bolts
19. Critical Weld in Air Tank Saddle Mount
20. Maximum Pull Out of Concrete Insert.
21. .Maximum Shear in Concrete Insert SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-25

WATTS BAR WBNP-88 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 11 of 26)

Equipment: Diesel Generator Control Panel, D. C. Distribution Panel, and Battery Charger.

Mounting: As per test specifications, the equipment was mounted on the Wyle Multi-Axis Simulator.

Seismic Test: 1. A resonant search test was conducted consisting of two low level (approximately 0.2g horizontally and 0.1g vertically) multi-axis sine sweeps in each test one octave per minute.

2. Two sine beat tests in-phase and two sine beat tests out-of-phase were performed at each resonant frequency. The sine beat consisted of 15 oscillations per beat. A train of five beats with a two-second interval between beats was used at each test frequency.

Monitoring: Three to four electrical monitoring channels were recorded on an oscillograph recorder to ascertain electrical continuity, current/voltage levels, spurious operations, contact chatter, before, during, and after the seismic excitation.

Results: The equipment listed above withstood the prescribed simulated seismic environment without any loss of electrical functions and structural failures.

Reference:

Wyle Report No. 42879-1.

Wyle Job No. 42879.

3.10-26 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 12 of 26)

Equipment: The main components of the Emergency Diesel Generator analyzed are as follows:

1. Stator Frame
2. Rotor Shaft
3. Pole Doetail
4. Pole Heads
5. Bearings
6. End Bells
7. Mounting Feet
8. Hold Down Bolts Seismic Test: An analysis was performed on the components listed above for seismic criteria as specified by TVA Specification WB-DC-40-31-2.
1. The components listed above were analyzed for a seismic loading of 2.7 g horizontal acceleration and 1.8 g vertical acceleration acting concurrently.
2. The mechanical response of the rotor and stator in terms of deflections and stresses was evaluated from static considerations and vertical seismic loads, acting concurrently.

Results: All the stresses calculated were within the respective material working levels as called out in the material specs.

References:

Elective Products Division, Portec, Inc., Cleveland, Ohio. Analysis (B07 891005 019)

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-27

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 13 of 26)

Equipment: Emergency Diesel Generator Atlas Jacket Water Cooler.

Seismic Test: An analysis was performed on the Atlas Water Jacket Cooler for seismic conditions as specified in TVA Specification WB-DC-40-31-2.

1. The analysis evaluated the base natural frequency of the structure to determine the appropriate acceleration from the response spectra.
2. For emergency, upset, and normal conditions, the analysis considered the adequacy of the anchor bolts, supports, shell at the supports, and tubes, due to a combination of seismic loads, nozzle loads, deadweight, and pressure.
3. When emergency condition stresses were less than normal condition allowables, separate upset and normal load case calculations were omitted.

Results: All the calculated stresses at the various points on the cooler were well below the allowable stresses under all possible conditions.

Reference:

Dynatech Project No. AIM-20.

Dynatech Report No. 1237.

3.10-28 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 14 of 26)

Equipment: Diesel Generator Relay Boards.

Electrical Rating: 125V DC, and 120V AC, 60 Hz, 1 phase.

Mounting: The test specimen was welded to a steel plate which in turn was welded to the seismic test machine.

Seismic Testing: 1. Resonance Search--A resonance search was conducted using an input level of 0.2 g in the frequency range of 1 to 33 Hz with a frequency sweep rate of 1 octave per minute. The resonance search was conducted with the horizontal and vertical axis simultaneously, first in phase and then with the horizontal 180E from the original phase. The resonance search was then repeated in the second horizontal and vertical axis. The two horizontal axis were identified as longitudinal and lateral. Two control and six response accelerometers were utilized during the resonance search. The output of each accelerometer was recorded on a direct readout recorder.

2. Sine Beat Test--A sine beat test composed of ten oscillations per beat was performed at each resonance frequency determined from the resonance search. Each sine beat was applied five times at each frequency, first with one horizontal and the vertical inputs in phase and then with the horizontal input 180E from the original phase. A two-second interval between each sine beat was used.

The maximum peak acceleration for the horizontal axes was 1.08 g and for the vertical axes was 0.72 g. In addition to the resonance frequencies, the sine beat test was performed at each one-half octave over the frequency range of 1 to 33 Hz Monitoring: A 125V dc voltage source was used to energize relay circuits during testing. A source of 120V ac was applied to monitor an ac voltmeter on the front panel of the specimen. Two chatter/transfer detectors were utilized to monitor a total of 14 channels of relay contacts during testing.

The chatter/transfer detectors were set for a time duration of 1.0 millisecond or greater. During testing all monitored circuits were tested in the transfer, or open, mode. In the event of a momentary closure of a duration of 1.0 millisecond or greater, a red indicator light for that particular circuit would illuminate and remain illuminated until a reset button was pushed to reset the circuit.

Results: Visual examination of the test specimen after each test revealed no structural damage due to the seismic tests. Of the 14 channels monitored during testing, only one circuit (Westinghouse type CM relay) indicated chatter. TVA circuits show that this relay will only be used during testing phases of the diesel generator system; therefore, it cannot prevent operation of the diesel generators during or after a seismic event because of contact chatter.

Reference:

Wyle Laboratories Report No. 54064.

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-29

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 15 of 26)

Equipment: Emergency Generator Starting and Control System including:

Test Series 1 1 Battery (six cells), C & D 3DCU-9 with Rack PSD-007012 1 Battery Charger, C & D ARR130HK-50 1 Fuel Oil Pump, Viking GG195D 1 Soakback Oil Pump, EMD 8274507 1 Contactor/Relay System consisting of:

1 Square D Temperature Switch, Class 9025, Type BGW397 1 Fenwall Temperature Switch, No. 20800 1 Barksdale Pressure Switch, E1HM90V 1 Overspeed Trip Limit Switch, EMD 8246095 1 Crankcase Pressure Switch, EMD 8370362 2 Square D Relays, Class 8501, Type KP Test Series 2 1 Engine Control Panel, PSD-A990F02501 1 Anode Transformer, GE-278G121AA Test Series 3 1 Switchgear Exciter Assembly, PSD-A990F11000 Mounting: As per test specifications, the equipment was mounted on the Wyle Multi-Axis Simulator.

Seismic Test: 1. A resonant search consisting of a low level single axis sine sweep from 1 Hz to 33 Hz was performed to establish natural frequencies.

The input acceleration level for all pieces of equipment was 0.2 g in the vertical direction and 0.4 g in the horizontal direction (when specified as needed).

3.10-30 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-35 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 16 of 26)

2. Sine beat tests were performed at the natural frequencies detected in the resonant search test. The sine beat tests were performed as a train of beats with the number of beats per train depending upon the resonant frequency of each piece of equipment. The vertical and horizontal accelerations in the sine beat test were varied according to the piece of equipment being tested.

Monitoring: All specimens shall be operating during full level testing, and specified functions will be monitored and recorded. Electrical powering of 480V AC, 3 phase will be furnished for operation of the switchgear, battery charger, soakback pump and the anode transformer. For operation of the Fuel Oil Pump, 125 VDC will be furnished.

The battery discharge rate (10 amps), the charger output rate, the anode transformer secondary voltage and the discharge pressure of both pumps will be recorded on an oscillograph recorder. continuity circuits on the Switchgear Assembly, the Engine Control Panel and the contactor/Relay System will be monitored for a change of state and a monitor trace recorded on an oscillograph recorder.

Results: The equipment demonstrated the ability to withstand the prescribed seismic environment without any loss of electrical function or significant operational change. No structural degradation was noted during the tests.

Reference:

Wyle Report No. 42749-1.

Wyle Job No. 42749.

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-31

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 17 of 26)

Equipment: Transfer Switch Circuit Breaker Assemblies and Safety Switch.

Electrical Ratings: 1. 480V AC, 400A, manual circuit breaker assembly, NEMA 1 enclosure.

2. 480V AC, 600A, manual circuit breaker assembly, NEMA 1 enclosure.
3. 600V AC, 60A, 3 pole, non-fusible safety switch NEMA 1 enclosure.

Mounting: The switches were mounted to the test fixture to simulate actual mounting, The 400A circuit breaker assembly and the safety switch were tested on the same fixture. The 600A circuit breaker assembly was tested separately.

Seismic Tests: The switches were energized to 480V and subjected to the following tests:

1. Resonance Search--The switches were subjected to a continuous sinusoidal search from 1 to 35 Hz in each of three mutually perpendicular axes. The frequency was adjusted in discrete 1 Hz steps with vibration maintained for at least 20 seconds in each step.

Peak acceleration varied from 0.1 g to 0.31 g above 5 Hz and 0.01 g to 0.26 g from 1 Hz to 5 Hz.

3.10-32 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 18 of 26)

2. Proof Testing--The switches were subjected to a 30 second 0.5 SSE of 0.76 g followed by a 30 second SSE of 1.51 g's at each half octave over the range from 1 Hz to 35 Hz where no resonant frequencies were present. Where resonance was present, a 0.5 SSE (0.76 g) followed by a SSE (1.51 g's) were performed at those resonant frequencies. Testing was conducted in the front-to-back, side-to-side and vertical axes.

Monitoring: The switches were monitored for proper operation during the testing.

Results: No external physical damage or malfunction was noted as a result of these tests.

Reference:

Aero Nov Laboratories, Inc., Test Report No.

5-6156, dated October 31, 1975.

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-33

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 19 of 26)

Equipment: 125V-dc Battery Charger.

Electrical Rating: ac input-480V, 60Hz, 3.

dc output--125V, 100 Amperes.

Mounting: The battery charger channel sill was welded to the Wyle simulator table in a manner duplicating the expected in-service configuration at WBNP.

The control accelerometers were recorded on tape oscillograph recorders. The resulting table motion was analyzed by a spectrum analyzer at a damping of two percent (2%) and plotted at one-third octave frequency intervals over the frequency range of interest.

Five, one-half-level RRS tests followed by a full-level RRS test were performed in each orientation with the specimen energized and operating in its normal charging mode.

Full-level RRS tests were also performed in the front-to-back/vertical orientation during which the specimen's ac and dc circuit breakers were tripped using a low voltage ac current source.

Monitoring: A multichannel recorder and three accelerometer devices were used to monitor the test results. Each accelerometer device consisted of two sensors, one oriented for the vertical axis and the other for the horizontal axis, the horizontal axis accelerometers were realigned for the direction of motion after the charger was rotated 90 degrees on the horizontal plan. Three channels of the multichannel recorder were used to monitor (1) input voltage, (2) state of a parallel circuit consisting of the NO alarm contacts, and (3) output voltage.

Results: The oscillograph traces revealed no alarm contact chatter or breaker misoperation. No apparent physical damage was noticed in the visual checks. The charger performed satisfactorily before, during, and after the tests. The two DC meters mounted on the front of the charger cabinet would "peg" during the full SSE but each time they would return pretest readings with no recalibration necessary.

Reference:

Wyle Laborator's Seismic Test Report No. 42959-1.

3.10-34 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 20 of 26)

Equipment: 125-Volt Battery (Cell type NCX-2100).

Electrical Rating: Two-hour rate--696 amperes to minimum battery terminal voltage of 105 volts at 60 F initial electrolyte temperature.

Mounting: Test rack containing the batteries was welded to the test table.

Seismic Test: Battery (3 cells) was energized to an approximate 20-ampere restive load and subjected to the following tests;

1. Exploratory test (resonant search) consisting of a low level (approximately 0.2 g horizontally and vertically) sine sweep was performed to determine the specimen resonance frequencies in each of the three orthogonal axes. The sweep rate was 1 octave per minute over the frequency range of 1 Hz to 35 Hz.
2. Proof test (multifrequency) consisting of 30-second duration simultaneous horizontal and vertical inputs of random motion consisting of frequency bandwidths spaced one-third octave apart over the frequency range of 1 Hz to 35 Hz. The amplitude of each one-third octave bandwidth was independently adjusted in each axes until the TRS enveloped the RRs.

Monitoring: The output voltage of the battery was monitored on an oscillograph recorder during the seismic excitation.

The following parameter was monitored:

Output voltage +4 Percent.

Results: The battery performed satisfactorily and all parameters monitored were within their prescribed tolerances before, during, and after the test.

References:

Wyle Laboratories Test Report No. 43479-1.

Equipment: Battery Rack.

Seismic Test: The battery rack was qualified by analysis as described below:

1. Natural Frequency--The calculations for natural frequency were based upon a static analysis where all the component parts were analyzed for deflection. The sum of the deflections was then used to calculate the natural frequency of the rack.
2. After determination of the natural frequency of the rack, a stress analysis was again performed on each individual component part.

The absolute combined stress was then calculated by peak value analysis.

3. Data was provided with the analysis to show that all the critical acceleration response spectra was enveloped in this test.

Results: The data showed that the rack will meet the requirements as laid out by TVA specifications and IEEE 344-1971 and will perform adequately during and after a seismic event.

Reference:

Gould, Inc., Industrial Battery Division, 60 NCX-2550 and SO 7-074526-806. WYLE Report NO. 43479-1 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-35

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 21 of 26)

Equipment: 125V DC Vital Battery Boards.

Electrical Rating: 125V Dc, 20,000 amperes short-circuit.

Mounting: The equipment was bolted to the vibration generator in a manner that simulated the intended service mounting including bolt size and configuration.

Seismic Tests; 1. A resonant search test in test direction No. 1 using a sinusoidal input level of approximately 0.2 g from 1 to 33 Hz, and at a sweep rate of one octave per minute.

2. A sine beat test in test direction No. 1 with maximum peak acceleration corresponding to the SSE. The beat test was conducted at each natural frequency. Before each SSE beat test, five 1/2 SSE beat tests were applied.
3. Steps 1 and 2 repeated for 3 more directions.\

Monitoring: 1. Six accelerometers were mounted on the test table and throughout the boards to monitor input and output accelerations. The output was recorded on graphs made from oscillographs.

2. Ten circuit breakers carrying 90 percent of rated current were monitored for contact opening.
3. Alarm reset light was energized during all tests and was visually monitored.
4. Undervoltage relay was energized and the normally closed contact was monitored during all tests.
5. Each fuse checked for continuity after testing.

Results: The testing proved the integrity of the board/component system since no failures developed.

Reference:

Westinghouse Seismic Test Procedure No. CO-33697.

PEI-TR-852001-12 3.10-36 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 22 of 26)

Equipment: 120V AC Vital Instrument Power Boards.

Electrical Rating: 120V AC, 60 Hz and 5,000 amperes short-circuit.

Mounting: The equipment was bolted to the vibration generator in a manner that simulated the intended service mounting including bolt size and configuration.

Seismic Tests: 1. A resonant search test in test direction No. 1 using a sinusoidal input level of approximately 0.2 g from 1 to 33 Hz, and at a sweep of 1 octave per minute.

2. A sine beat test in test direction No. with maximum peak acceleration corresponding to the SSE. The beat test was conducted at each natural frequency. Before each SSE beat test, five 1/2 SSE beat tests were applied.
3. Steps 1 and 2 repeated for 3 more directions.

Monitoring: 1. Six accelerometers were mounted on the test table and throughout the boards to monitor input and output accelerations. The output was recorded on graphs made from oscillographs.

2. Ten circuit breakers carrying 90% of rated current were monitored for contact opening.
3. Lights were energized during all tests and were visually monitored.
4. Undervoltage relay was energized and the normally closed contact was monitored during all tests.
5. Fuses checked for continuity after testing.

Results: The testing proved the integrity of the board/component since no failures developed.

Reference:

Westinghouse Seismic Test Procedure No. CO-33419.

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-37

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 23 of 26)

Equipment: 120V AC, 60 Hz Vital Instrument Static Inverter.

Electrical Rating: AC input--480V, 60 Hz, 3 phase, DC input--125V.

AC out--120V, 60 Hz, Single phase.

KVA out--20kVa.

Mounting: The inverter channel sills were welded to the shake table in the exact manner they would be installed on steel floor plates at Watts Bar.

3.10-38 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 24 of 26)

Seismic Test: The inverter was energized to 480V, 3 phase and subjected to the following tests:

1. Exploratory Search--A low level (approximately 0.2 g horizontally and vertically) performed on each test configuration from 1 Hz to 33 Hz to establish major resonances. The sweep rate was one octave per minute.
2. Multifrequency Tests--The specimen was subjected to simultaneous horizontal and vertical inputs of random motion consisting of frequencies spaced 1/3 octave apart over the range of 1 Hz to 40 Hz. The amplitude of each 1/3 octave frequency was independently adjusted in each axis until the test response spectra enveloped the required response spectra. The resulting test table motion was analyzed at one percent damping by a spectrum analyzer and plotted at one-third octave intervals over the frequency range of interest. The duration of the tests was 30 seconds. The horizontal and vertical input accelerations levels were phase incoherent. Five 1/2-level SSE's and one SSE were performed on the invertor.

Monitoring: The equipment used to monitor the test included a visual counter for output frequency; a 3-channel recorder to monitor (1) input voltage, (2) state of a parallel circuit of 12 NO alarm relay contacts, and (3) output voltage: and 5 accelerometers. Each accelerometer device consisted of two sensors, one oriented for vertical axes, and the other for horizontal axes.

Results: The inverter withstood the seismic test satisfactorily without any failures.

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-39

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 25 of 26)

Reference:

Wyle Laboratories Seismic Test Report No.51133-1.

3.10-40 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 Table 3.10-3 Watts Bar Seismic Qualifications (Continued)

(Sheet 26 of 26)

Equipment: Electrical penetrations[1] (all types and voltages used at Watts Bar).

Seismic Test: Seismic qualification was done by analysis. The seismic analysis done on the penetrations consider the seismic loads imposed for both a safe shutdown earthquake and a 1/2 safe shutdown earthquake in accordance with paragraph NA-3250 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 111, Nuclear Power Plant Components.[2]

1. The analysis calculated the natural frequencies during a seismic event using standard formulas for stress and strain by the R. Roark or Rayleigh's methods.
2. Maximum stresses for the normal and seismic load conditions were calculated. Seismic loads were considered to act in the vertical direction and in two horizontal directions.

Results: The analysis indicated that the penetrations were able to withstand all seismic stresses from a one and a one-half safe shutdown earthquake without any loss of function.

Reference:

1. Conax Report IPS-212, Rev. A and addendum to IPS-212, Rev.A.

IPS-209, IPS-752, IPS-1348

2. TVA Design Specification WBNP-DS-1805-2697-00.

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-41

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic Qualification Sample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 1 of 7)

1. Transmitters
2. Power Supplies
3. Summing Amplifiers
4. Current-to-Current Converters
5. Square Root Converters
6. Alarm Units
7. Recorders
8. Indicating controllers
9. Manual Loading Stations
10. Panels (cabinets)
11. Dual Alarm Units
12. Square Root converters
13. Proportional Amplifiers
14. Millivolt Transmitters
15. Power Supplies
16. Current Isolators
17. Controllers (single case)
18. Controllers (dual case)
19. Setpoint Stations
20. Manual Loaders
21. Recorders
22. Hi-Fi Relays
23. Instrumentation Racks (local panels)
24. Single and Four Bay Instrument Cabinets
25. Lighting Panel Boards & Cabinets 3.10-42 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic Qualification Sample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 2 of 7)

WBNP-86 Equipment: BOP I&C (See equipment list on Page 1 of this table, Items 1-10)

Mounting: Several separate tests were run to qualify the instruments and cabinets.

Each instrument type was tested separately (that is not mounted in the cabinets) and the cabinets were tested fully loaded with a representation of most instrument types installed. Instruments as well as cabinets were mounted directly to the Wyle Lab seismic test device.

Seismic Test: An exploratory test was run in the form of a continuous sweep frequency search using a sinusoidal steady-state input at approximately 0.2 g. The search included two continuous sweeps from 1 to 35 to 1 Hz at a rate of one octave per minute.

The specimens were then subjected to sine beat tests consisting of ten oscillations per beat with a time pause of approximately two seconds between each of the five beats. A sine beat test was performed two times, in each of the four orientations, at one-third octave frequencies of 1, 1.25, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.2, 4, 5, 6.3, 8, 10, 12.5, 16, 20, 25, 32, and at 35 Hz.

The test level was 4.25 g's or greater, within the limits of the test machine, at a location near the driving point of the actuator. The 4.25 g input yielded an effective g force of 3.0 g's in both the horizontal and vertical axes, simultaneously.

Monitoring: Simulated inputs were made during tests and outputs were monitored for each type instrument.

Results: All instruments (and the cabinet) performed satisfactorily with no loss of function of ability to function properly before, during, and after the test.

References:

Wyle Lab Test Report Nos: 43522-1 42434-1 43280-1 43675-1 43859-1 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-43

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic Qualification Sample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 3 of 7)

Equipment: BOP I&C (see equipment list on Page 1 of this table, Items 11-22).

Mounting: All instruments were mounted in a rack mounting chassis which was modified for seismic use.

Seismic Testing: 1. A resonant search test was conducted in each of the three orthogonal directions. Each search consisted of two sweeps over the frequency range from 1 to 35 Hz and return to 1 Hz at a sweep rate of 1 octave/minute. The input "G" level to the vibration table was 0.5 g's.

2. A sine beat test was conducted at each resonant frequency found by step 1 and at the resonant frequencies found for the single and four-bay cabinets. The number of beats at each test frequency was 10 and the number of test frequencies cycled per beat was 10. The time between beats was of sufficient duration to preclude significant superimposition of motion. The input level was 3 g's horizontal and 2 g's vertical.
1. A 30 mA signal was applied to the input of each analog device requiring an external input. The output of the analog devices was Monitoring: monitored on a brush recorder.
2. The electrical contact of the discrete output devices were monitored for discontinuity (chatter) in excess of 100 microseconds.

There was no evidence of physical damage, contact chatter or output Results: shift.

Action Environmental Testing Corp. Report No. 10348-2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -

Reference:

7, -8, -9, -10, -11, -12, and -13.

3.10-44 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic Qualification Sample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 4 of 7)

Equipment: Instrumentation rack (local panel).

Mounting: The rack was bolted directly to the seismic simulator.

1. Two low level (approximately 0.1g) single axis sine sweeps from 1 Hz to 35 Hz to 1 Hz were performed to establish major resonances Seismic Testing: for each major axis. The sweep rate was 1 octave per minute.
2. A sine beat test was conducted at each resonant frequency found by step 1. The sine beat tests consisted of five beats per test. Each beat contained two oscillations and was separated by a sufficient time span to allow all equipment motion to cease. The sine beat test levels were approximately 0.3 g for the vertical direction and 0.8 g for each horizontal direction.
3. The specimen was also subjected to a 45-second simultaneous horizontal and vertical inputs of multi-frequency random motion consisting of frequencies spaced 1/3 octave apart over the frequency range of 1 to 40 Hz in the front-to-back/vertical and the side-to-side/vertical orientation. The excitation was biaxial and phase incoherent. The amplitude of each 1/3 octave acceleration was independently adjusted in each axis until the Test Response Spectra (TRS) enveloped the Required Response Spectra (RRS).

The resulting TRS was analyzed at 2% damping by a spectrum analyzer and plotted at 1/3 octave intervals over the frequency range of interest.

Approximately three one-half level or greater Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE) tests were performed. A minimum of one full level test was performed after completion of the one-half level tests.

Monitoring: None of the devices mounted on the rack were monitored.

There was no evidence of any physical damage. The test indicated that the instrument mounting locations would not see "g" levels greater than 2 g's in the vertical direction and 3 g's in the horizontal direction during Results: the postulated seismic event.

Reference:

Wyle Laboratories' Seismic Simulation Test Report No. 42807-1.

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-45

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic Qualification Sample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 5 of 7)

Equipment: Single bay and four bay instrument cabinets.

The test samples were mounted by their normal mounting means to the Mounting: test fixture.

1. A resonant search test was conducted in each of the three orthogonal directions. Each search consisted of two sweeps over the frequency range from 1 to 35 Hz and return to 1 Hz at a sweep rate of 1 octave/minute. The input "G" level to the vibration table Seismic Testing: was 0.2 g's.
2. A sine beat test was conducted at each resonant frequency found by step 1. The number of beats at each test frequency was 10 and the number of test frequencies cycle per beat was 10. The time between beats was of sufficient duration to preclude significant superimposition of motion. The input level was 0.36 g's horizontal and 0.24 g's vertical.

Monitoring: None of the devices mounted in the cabinets were monitored.

There was no evidence of any physical damage and in no case did the "G" levels exceed 3.0 g's in the horizontal axes or 2.0 g's in the vertical Results: axis during the beat test.

3.10-46 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic Qualification Sample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 6 of 7)

Reference:

Action Environmental Test Corporation Report Nos. 10348, 10348-1 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-47

WATTS BAR WBNP-35 Table 3.10-4 Watts Bar Seismic Qualification Sample Of Balance Of Plant Instrumentation And Control Equipment List (Sheet 7 of 7)

Equipment: Lighting Panel Boards and Cabinets Electrical Rating: 125V DC Cabinets, 120/208V AC Panels, 60 Hz, 3-Phase Specimen was wall-mounted with commercially available bolts, nuts, and washers to a wall-mounting fixture which in turn was welded to the Mounting: test table. Mounting simulated the in-service configuration.

The specimens were subjected to the following tests:

1. Exploratory Test (Resonant Search) - consists of low level (0.2 g horizontal and vertical) biaxial sine sweep from 1-33 Hz in front-to-back and side-to-side orientation to determine major equipment resonance points.
2. Proof Test (Multifrequency) - Consisting of simultaneous horizontal and vertical incoherent inputs of random motion at frequencies spaced 1/3 octave apart from 1-31.6 Hz in front-to-back and side-to-side orientations. Aging was obtained with three half-level SSE tests followed by one full-level SSE test performed in front-to-back Seismic Test: and side-to-side orientations.

A multichannel recorder was used to monitor electrical continuity, contact chatter, and change of state before, during, and after the seismic Monitoring: test.

The specimen's structural integrity was not compromised and circuit Results: continuity was maintained.

Reference:

Wyle Test Report 42979-1.

3.10-48 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 Table 3.10-5 Allowable Stresses For Cable Tray Supports Load Case Allowable Stress Load Combination2 Case I AISC Allowable D+L Case IA AISC Allowable D+E Case IB 1.5 x AISC Allowable1 D + E + To 1

Case II 1.5 x AISC Allowable D + E Case IIA 1.5 x AISC Allowable1 D + E + To 1

Case III 1.5 x AISC Allowable D + E + Pa + Ta

1. Allowable stresses are limited not to exceed 0.9 Fy, except for shear, which is limited not to exceed 0.52Fy, and buckling, which is limited not to exceed 0.9 FCR.
2. Key:

D = Deadweight L = Live loads E = Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE) loads E = Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE) loads To = Thermal effects and loads during normal operating or shutdown conditions based on the most critical transient or steady-state condition.

Ta = Thermal effects and loads during conditions generated by the design basis accident (DBA) transient condition and including To.

Pa = Pressure load effects from a DBA, such as steel containment vessel (SCV) dynamic movements and cavity pressurization.

SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-49

WATTS BAR WBNP-92 3.10-50 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-68 Figure 3.10-1 Orientation of Cable Tray Axes SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.10-51

WATTS BAR WBNP-68 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 3.10-52 SEISMIC DESIGN OF CATEGORY I INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 3.11 ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT The method of assuring that mechanical and electrical components of safety-related equipment are qualified for their potential normal operational and worst-case accident environments is described in this section.

Two programs are in place to environmentally qualify safety-related electrical equipment (including cable) and active safety-related mechanical equipment to function or not fail for event mitigation. These programs involve:

(1) Safety-related electrical equipment within the scope of 10CFR50.49.

(2) Active, safety-related mechanical equipment located in a harsh environment.

Equipment within the scope of 10 CFR 50.49 excludes that equipment located in mild or essentially mild environments. A mild environment is defined as a room or building zone where (1) the temperature, pressure, or relative humidity resulting from the direct effects of a design basis event (DBE) (e.g., temperature rise due to steam release) are no more severe than those which would occur during an abnormal plant operational condition, (2) the temperature does not exceed 130°F due to the indirect effects of a DBE (e.g., increased heat loads from electrical equipment), (3) the event radiation dose is less than or equal to 1 x 104 rads, and (4) the total event plus the 40 year TID (total integrated dose) is less than or equal to 5 x 104 rad[2].

The Mechanical Equipment Qualification (MEQ) program assures that active, safety-related mechanical equipment located in harsh environments will adequately perform the required design safety functions under all normal, abnormal, accident and post-accident environmental conditions in accordance with 10 CFR Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 4 (GDC-4).

3.11.1 Equipment Identification and Environmental Conditions 3.11.1.1 Identification of Safety Systems and Justification All systems whose functioning is required to mitigate a loss-of-coolant accident (LOCA) or high-energy line break (HELB) for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant harsh environment areas are listed in Table 3.11-1. These systems were determined by identifying all the systems upon which the safety analyses in the Final Safety Analysis Report and other referenced documents are dependent. Further, any systems which are necessary to support systems so identified were included in this table.

3.11.1.2 Identification of Equipment in Harsh Environments The identification of the harsh environment is provided in Section 3.11.2. With the harsh environments defined, a survey of the safety-related electrical and active safety-related mechanical equipment in the affected areas was conducted. This survey was conducted using electrical instrument tabulations, mechanical piping drawings, mechanical heating and ventilation drawings, instrumentation and control drawings, electrical equipment drawings, and conduit and grounding drawings to identify the ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.11-1

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 required components. The electrical components are identified in the Category and Operating Times Calculations. These calculations establish the 10 CFR 50.49 operating category and times for these components. 10 CFR 50.49 Category A or B electrical components located in a harsh environment are qualified in environmental qualification packages, which are referred to as the Environmental Qualification (EQ)

Binders. These are a comprehensive set of documentation packages that demonstrate compliance with 10 CFR 50.49. In some instances Category A or B equipment may be contained in "Essentially Mild" (EM) calculations. EM calculations evaluate the 1E equipment located in plant harsh environments for the specific DBE(s).

This evaluation concludes that for the specific DBE(s) for which the equipment must function, the environmental conditions (including normal plus accident dose) do not impose a significant environmental stress on the device.

Mechanical components are identified in the Mechanical Equipment List. This list identifies the active safety-related equipment which is required to perform a mechanical motion during the course of accomplishing a system safety function. This calculation identifies all mechanical equipment in the portions of safety system flow paths which are required to mitigate 10 CFR 50.49 accidents. This equipment includes, but is not limited to valves, pumps, dampers, and fans.

Verification of qualification levels for equipment within the scope of 10 CFR 50.49 has been accomplished by a field walkdown of the installed components to provide traceability between the qualification documents and the in-situ equipment. This field verification walkdown is documented in the EQ binders.

The active safety-related mechanical equipment located within harsh environmental areas in the plant was identified by use of design data and confirmed by field verification walkdowns. This information is documented in the MEQ binders.

3.11.2 Environmental Conditions 3.11.2.1 Harsh Environment Environmental conditions have been established for all harsh environment areas which contain safety-related electrical and active mechanical equipment exposed to a harsh environment resulting from a design basis event. Temperature, relative humidity, pressure, radiation dose, area type, chemical spray, and flooding were the parameters considered. (Only temperature and radiation were considered for mechanical equipment. The other parameters have no significant detrimental effect on mechanical equipment.) All values were based upon the following operational conditions:

(1) Normal operating conditions - The environmental service conditions which the plant environmental control systems are designed to maintain on a normal design day.

3.11-2 ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 (2) Abnormal operating conditions - The environmental service conditions which result from outside temperature excursions, temporary greater than design heat loads, or degraded environmental control system operations. This condition can exist for up to 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> per excursion and will occur less than 1%

of the plant life.

(3) Loss of Coolant Accident (LOCA) or High Energy Line Break (HELB) conditions resulting from small, intermediate, or large main steam line breaks inside containment.

(4) High Energy Line Break conditions outside primary containment resulting from ruptures and critical cracks in various high energy lines throughout the Auxiliary Building and steam valve vaults.

(5) Tornado depressurization conditions resulting from a design basis tornado.

(6) Inadvertent containment spray initiation conditions resulting from accidental operation of the containment spray system.

(7) Fuel handling accident The service conditions, resulting from the operational conditions listed above, are presented in Reference [4] and its associated environmental data drawings (47E235 Series). Temperature, pressure, and relative humidity vs. time curves are also provided on the drawings to clearly define the effects of various worst case HELB combinations on the area. These drawings include the environmental conditions for mild as well as harsh environmental areas.

For the purpose of 10 CFR 50.49, only design basis events 3, 4, and 7, above, are considered design basis accidents. Tornados, floods, or other natural phenomenon, including seismic, are expressly excluded from the scope of 10 CFR 50.49. Refer to Section 3.10 for Seismic Qualification.

3.11.2.2 Mild Environment Mild environment qualification is applied to Class 1E electrical equipment only and is required by 10 CFR 50 Appendix A, Criterion 4. Watts Bar satisfies the intent of NRC Generic Letter 82-09 by utilization of a preventive maintenance, surveillance, and testing program, as discussed in that generic letter.

For Class 1E equipment located in a mild environment and procured or installed before April 20, 1982 (date of issuance of NRC Generic letter 82-09), WBN demonstrates qualification by site preventative maintenance, testing, and surveillance programs.

For Class 1E equipment located in a mild environment and procured on or after April 20, 1982, WBN demonstrates qualification by the design or purchase specifications which identify environmental conditions and any other applicable design requirements as appropriate. These design activities are augmented by the site preventative maintenance, testing, and surveillance programs.

ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.11-3

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 3.11.3 Electrical Equipment Within the Scope of 10 CFR 50.49 The process assuring that electrical equipment/cable is capable of performing its safety function is described in this section. A description of TVA's environmental qualification program is presented in Reference [1]. This reference provides documentation on the program and initial EQ binder preparation to denote that the components are qualified. TVA has implemented a program to ensure that all components will be fully qualified in accordance with 10 CFR 50.49 at fuel load. The EQ binders are maintained as controlled documents.

Safety-related electrical devices located in a harsh environment and required to function or not fail for mitigation of a specific DBA are identified on the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant 10 CFR 50.49 List (1E electrical equipment requiring qualification under 10 CFR 50.49). The methodology for establishing the 10 CFR 50.49 List for Watts Bar Unit 1 is located in Section III.2 of Reference [1]. The operating category, operating time, and safety function for the 10 CFR 50.49 devices are established by the Category and Operating Time Calculations. All devices on the 10 CFR 50.49 List are analyzed for qualification to the requirements defined by 10 CFR 50.49 and documented in the EQ binders.

3.11.4 Qualification Tests and Analyses Qualification tests and analyses for safety-related electrical equipment were conducted in accordance with the requirements of 10 CFR 50.49 and the guidelines of NUREG-0588 [3]. See Table 3.11-3 for compliance with NRC criteria and standards.

3.11.5 Qualification Test Results Qualification test results are included or referenced in the EQ binder for safety-related electrical equipment in the 10CFR50.49 program.

3.11.6 Loss of Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC)

All plant locations containing safety-related equipment that need a controlled environment to perform required accident mitigation operations are served by fully redundant environmental control systems, or specific operator actions to limit minimum and maximum temperatures are required (see Section 9.4 for details). Such redundancy assures that no loss of safety-related equipment will occur from a single failure of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) equipment provided for controlling the local environment for this equipment. All data describing controlled local environmental conditions during accidents is valid for situations in which a loss of one train of HVAC has occurred.

3.11.7 Estimated Chemical and Radiation Environment 3.11.7.1 Chemical Spray The worst case environment (normal or post-accident) chemical composition of the containment spray was based on the following sources and assumptions:

(1) Ice Condenser 3.11-4 ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 (2) Boron Injection Tank (3) Cold Leg Injection Accumulators (4 tanks)

(4) Refueling Water Storage Tank (5) Reactor Coolant System The following assumptions were used in this analysis:

(1) Calculations based on maximum pipe/tank volumes and boron concentrations and on minimum ice mass and sodium tetraborate concentration.

(2) All soluiions including completely melted ice mix completely.

(3) Mass ratio of NaOH to boron in the ice is 1.85.

(4) Density of borated water is equal to that of water.

(5) Fission products, corrosion products, etc., will be neglected.

(6) Results -The sources stated above yield a mixture of boric acid and sodium tetraborate with a pH of 8.1 [5]

3.11.7.2 Radiation 3.11.7.2.1 Inside Containment The 40-year integrated normal operating dose and the maximum hypothetical accident doses are shown on the environmental data drawings (47?235 Series). The radiation exposure inside containment after a design basis LOCA was calculated based on a release to the containment atmosphere of 100 percent of the core inventory of noble gas, 25 'percent of the core inventory of iodine, and 1 percent of the core inventory of solid fission products (equivalent to TID-l4844 releases). Removal of iodine is assumed to be due to interaction with the ice condenser only. The calculation of activity in containment after a LOCA is described in Section 15.5. Maximum gamma doses were calculated in the upper compartment, lower compartment, and ice condenser using a point-kernel-with-buildup computer clJde. Doses were integrated to determine equipment exposure for a one-year period after the accident. Beta doses were calculated only for surfaces using the semi-infinite cloud equation in Regulatory Guide 1.4.

ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.11-5

WATTS BAR WBNP-86 The calculation of radiation conditions inside containment complies with Paragraph 1.4 of NUREG-0588 except a:; noted below:

(1) Paragraph 1.4(3) -The initial distribution of activity was assumed uniform throughout the containmEmt even though the containment is broken up into upper compartment, lower compartment, and ice condenser. Air return deck fans are provided to aid mixing between these compartments.

(2) Paragraph 1.4(5) -Natural deposition was not considered. Applicable deposition rates are unknown and actions of containment spray in the upper compartment, and stearn condensation in the lower compartment can be expected to wash the deposited activity into the sump.

3.11.7.2.2 Radiation - Auxiliary Building Spaces The normal operating radiation environment in the Auxiliary Building is shown on the Environmental data draw'ings (47E235 Series). The radiation exposure in the general spaces of the auxiliary building after a design basis LOCA is due to (1) containment sump fluid being circulated in the RHR, CS, and SI systems, (2) airborne activity in the Auxiliary Building, and (3) shine from activity in the containment. The source terms used for this accident are those suggested by the NRC for use in response to NUREG-0588 and correspond to TID-14844 releases. Flow diagrams and equipment layouts were reviewed to determine the flow paths which would be used after an accident and to determine the volume and physical locations of contaminated fluids in the Auxiliary Building. The layout of the shield walls and equipment within the rooms were conservatively modeled. Source terms were calculated at various times after an accident. Dose rates were then calculated at several positions in the Auxiliary Building with respect to the contained sources and at various times after an accident. The locations where dose rates were calculated were chosen to conservatively calculate the dose rates in corridors, outside equipment cubicles, in adjacent rooms, and within the equipment cubicles. These dose rates were then integrated to determine equipment exposure for a one-year period after the accident. Airborne activity in the Auxiliary Building is due to gaseous leakage from the containment which is processed and exhausted through HEPA and charcoal filters in the Auxiliary Building gas treatment system. The dose rates through the Reactor Shield Building from activity released into the containment atmosphere were also calculated.

The calculation of radiation conditions outside containment in the Auxiliary Building complies with Paragraph 1.4 of NUREG-0588.

3.11-6 ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-79 REFERENCES (1) September 30, 1986, Letter from R. Gridley to B. Youngblood, "Environmental Qualification of Electrical Equipment Important to Safety for Nuclear Power Plants ~'Summary Status Report -Watts Bar Nuclear Plant -

Unit 1".

(2) Watts Bar Design Criteria, WB-DC-40-54, "Environmental Qualification to 10 CFR 50.49," Revision 2.

(3) NUREG 0588, Interim Staff Report on Environmental Qualification of Safety-Related Electrical Equipment, Revisio-n 1, July 1, 1981.

(4) Watts Bar Design Criteria, WB-DC-40-42, Revision 2, "Envirorunental Design" .

(5) Westinghouse letter WAT-D-8902, Revision 1, dated July 8, 1992.

ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.11-7

WATTS BAR WBNP-91 Table 3.11-1 Systems (Or Portions Of Systems) Required To Mitigate Loss-Of-Coolant Accidents And/Or High Energy Line Breaks Standby AC Power System (Includes Diesel Generators) 120V Vital AC System Vital 125V DC Control Power System Diesel Generator Fuel Oil System Diesel Air Starting System Emergency Lighting System Auxiliary Control Air System Nuclear Instrumentation System Reactor Protection System Hydrogen Recombination System Containment Isolation Systems Ice Condenser System Containment Spray System Residual Heat Removal System Safety Injection System Reactor Coolant System Auxiliary Feedwater System Containment Air Return Fan System Essential Raw Cooling Water System Component Cooling System Main Steam System Radiation Monitoring System Chemical and Volume Control System Emergency Gas Treatment Air Cleanup System Auxiliary Building Gas Treatment System Control Room Area Ventilation System Engineered Safety Feature Coolers Auxiliary Building Ventilation Subsystems:

- Shutdown Board Room Air Conditioning System

- Auxiliary Board Rooms Air Conditioning System

- Turbine-Driven Auxiliary Feedwater Pump Ventilation

- Shutdown Transformer Room Ventilation System Spent Fuel Pool Cooling System Main Feedwater System Steam Generator Blowdown System Feedwater Control System Sampling System Containment Lower Compartment Cooling System: Fan only (HELB only)

Reactor Building Purge Air Filter Trains Diesel Generator Building Ventilation System Additional Diesel Generator Building Ventilation System 3.11-8 ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

WATTS BAR WBNP-50 Table 3.11-2 Deleted by Amendment 50 ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 3.11-9

WATTS BAR WBNP-64 Table 3.11-3 Compliance With Nrc Criteria And Standards General Design Criteria 1 See Chapter 17 General Design Criteria 4 See Sections 3.5, 3.6 General Design Criteria 23 See Sections 7.1, 7.3 General Design Criteria 50 See Section 6.2 10 CFR 50, Appendix B, Criterion III See Chapter 17 Regulatory Guide 1.30 Current activities generally conform to the requirements of N45.2.4.

Regulatory Guide 1.40 See Table 7.1-1 Regulatory Guide 1.63 See Paragraph 8.3 Regulatory Guide 1.73 See Table 7.1-1 Regulatory Guide 1.89 All 10 CFR 50.49 Equipment was qualified to IEEE 323-1971, or IEEE 323-1974 10 CFR 50.49/NUREG-0588 See References 1 and 3 3.11-10 ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Retrieved from "https://kanterella.com/w/index.php?title=ML091400650&oldid=2145459"